10 CFR Part 430 — Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products

PART 430—ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAM FOR CONSUMER PRODUCTS Authority: 42 U.S.C. 6291-6309; 28 U.S.C. 2461 note. Source: 42 FR 27898, June 1, 1977, unless otherwise noted. Subpart A—General Provisions § 430.1 Purpose and scope. This part establishes the regulations for the implementation of part B of title III (42 U.S.C. 6291-6309) of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (Pub. L. 94-163), as amended by Pub. L. 95-619, Pub. L. 100-12, Pub. L. 100-357, and Pub. L. 102-486 which establishes an energy conservation program for consumer products other than automobiles. [62 FR 29237, May 29, 1997] § 430.2 Definitions. For purposes of this part, words shall be defined as provided for in section 321 of the Act and as follows— 3-Way incandescent lamp (1) Employs two filaments, operated separately and in combination, to provide three light levels; and (2) Is designated on the lamp packaging and marketing materials as being a 3-way incandescent lamp. 700 series fluorescent lamp Act Activation lock Active mode (1) Is connected to a main power source; (2) Has been activated; and (3) Provides one or more main functions. Air cleaner All-refrigerator Annual fuel utilization efficiency (1) Weatherized warm air furnaces or boilers are located out-of-doors; (2) Warm air furnaces which are not weatherized are located indoors and all combustion and ventilation air is admitted through grill or ducts from the outdoors and does not communicate with air in the conditioned space; (3) Boilers which are not weatherized are located within the heated space. ANSI Appliance lamp (1) Is specifically designed to operate in a household appliance and has a maximum wattage of 40 watts (including an oven lamp, refrigerator lamp, and vacuum cleaner lamp); and (2) When sold at retail, is designated and marketed for the intended application, with (i) The designation on the lamp packaging; and (ii) Marketing materials that identify the lamp as being for appliance use. ASME Automatic clothes washer Back-up battery charger (1) That is embedded in a separate end-use product that is designed to continuously operate using mains power (including end-use products that use external power supplies); and (2) Whose sole purpose is to recharge a battery used to maintain continuity of power in order to provide normal or partial operation of a product in case of input power failure. Ballast Ballast efficacy factor Ballast luminous efficiency Baseboard electric heater Basic model (1) With respect to general service fluorescent lamps, general service incandescent lamps, and incandescent reflector lamps: Lamps that have essentially identical light output and electrical characteristics—including lamp efficacy and color rendering index (CRI). (2) With respect to faucets and showerheads: Have the identical flow control mechanism attached to or installed within the fixture fittings, or the identical water-passage design features that use the same path of water in the highest flow mode. (3) With respect to furnace fans: Are marketed and/or designed to be installed in the same type of installation; and (4) With respect to central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps essentially identical electrical, physical, and functional (or hydraulic) characteristics means: (i) For split systems manufactured by outdoor unit manufacturers (OUMs): all individual combinations having the same model of outdoor unit, which means comparably performing compressor(s) [a variation of no more than five percent in displacement rate (volume per time) as rated by the compressor manufacturer, and no more than five percent in capacity and power input for the same operating conditions as rated by the compressor manufacturer], outdoor coil(s) [no more than five percent variation in face area and total fin surface area; same fin material; same tube material], and outdoor fan(s) [no more than ten percent variation in air flow and no more than twenty percent variation in power input]; (ii) For split systems having indoor units manufactured by independent coil manufacturers (ICMs): all individual combinations having comparably performing indoor coil(s) [plus or minus one square foot face area, plus or minus one fin per inch fin density, and the same fin material, tube material, number of tube rows, tube pattern, and tube size]; and (iii) For single-package systems: all individual models having comparably performing compressor(s) [no more than five percent variation in displacement rate (volume per time) rated by the compressor manufacturer, and no more than five percent variations in capacity and power input rated by the compressor manufacturer corresponding to the same compressor rating conditions], outdoor coil(s) and indoor coil(s) [no more than five percent variation in face area and total fin surface area; same fin material; same tube material], outdoor fan(s) [no more than ten percent variation in outdoor air flow], and indoor blower(s) [no more than ten percent variation in indoor air flow, with no more than twenty percent variation in fan motor power input]; (iv) Except that, (A) for single-package systems and single-split systems, manufacturers may instead choose to make each individual model/combination its own basic model provided the testing and represented value requirements in 10 CFR 429.16 of this chapter are met; and (B) For multi-split, multi-circuit, and multi-head mini-split combinations, a basic model may not include both individual small-duct, high velocity (SDHV) combinations and non-SDHV combinations even when they include the same model of outdoor unit. The manufacturer may choose to identify specific individual combinations as additional basic models. Basic-voltage external power supply Batch Batch sample Batch sample size Batch size Battery charger Black light lamp Blowout action Blowout bowl BPAR incandescent reflector lamp BR30 BR40 BR incandescent reflector lamp Btu Bug lamp Built-in compact cooler (1) Installed totally encased by cabinetry or panels that are attached during installation; (2) Securely fastened to adjacent cabinetry, walls or floor; (3) Equipped with unfinished sides that are not visible after installation; and (4) Equipped with an integral factory-finished face or built to accept a custom front panel. Built-in cooler (1) Installed totally encased by cabinetry or panels that are attached during installation; (2) Securely fastened to adjacent cabinetry, walls or floor; (3) Equipped with unfinished sides that are not visible after installation; and (4) Equipped with an integral factory-finished face or built to accept a custom front panel. Built-in refrigerator/refrigerator-freezer/freezer Candelabra base incandescent lamp Casement-only Casement-slider Ceiling electric heater Ceiling fan (1) Circulating air means the discharge of air in an upward or downward direction. A ceiling fan that has a ratio of fan blade span (in inches) to maximum rotation rate (in revolutions per minute) greater than 0.06 provides circulating air. (2) For all other ceiling fan related definitions, see appendix U to this subpart. Ceiling fan light kit (1) Integral, such that the equipment is attached to the ceiling fan prior to the time of retail sale; or (2) Attachable, such that at the time of retail sale the equipment is not physically attached to the ceiling fan, but may be included inside the ceiling fan at the time of sale or sold separately for subsequent attachment to the fan. Central air conditioner or central air conditioning heat pump Central system humidifier Circulating water heater Class A external power supply (1) Means a device that— (i) Is designed to convert line voltage AC input into lower voltage AC or DC output; (ii) Is able to convert to only one AC or DC output voltage at a time; (iii) Is sold with, or intended to be used with, a separate end-use product that constitutes the primary load; (iv) Is contained in a separate physical enclosure from the end-use product; (v) Is connected to the end-use product via a removable or hard-wired male/female electrical connection, cable, cord, or other wiring; and (vi) Has nameplate output power that is less than or equal to 250 watts; (2) But, does not include any device that— (i) Requires Federal Food and Drug Administration listing and approval as a medical device in accordance with section 513 of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C. 360(c)); or (ii) Powers the charger of a detachable battery pack or charges the battery of a product that is fully or primarily motor operated. Clothes washer Cold temperature fluorescent lamp Color Rendering Index or CRI Colored fluorescent lamp (1) A CRI less than 40, as determined according to the method set forth in CIE Publication 13.3 (incorporated by reference; see (2) A correlated color temperature less than 2,500K or greater than 7,000K as determined according to the method set forth in IES LM-9 (incorporated by reference; see Colored incandescent lamp (1) A color rendering index of less than 50, as determined according to the test method given in CIE 13.3 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3); or (2) A correlated color temperature of less than 2,500K, or greater than 4,600K, where correlated temperature is computed according to the “Computation of Correlated Color Temperature and Distribution Temperature,” Journal of the Optical Society of America, (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). Colored lamp (1) A CRI less than 40, as determined according to the method set forth in CIE 13.3 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3); or (2) A CCT less than 2,500 K or greater than 7,000 K. Combination cooler refrigeration product Combined-duct portable air conditioner Commercial and industrial power supply (1) A power supply that requires 3-phase input power and that is incapable of operating on household mains electricity; (2) A DC-DC-only power supply that is incapable of operating on household mains electricity; (3) A power supply with a fixed, non-removable connection to an end-use device that is not a consumer product as defined under the Act; (4) A power supply whose output connector is uniquely shaped to fit only an end-use device that is not a consumer product; (5) A power supply that cannot be readily connected to an end-use device that is a consumer product without significant modification or customization of the power supply itself or the end-use device; (6) A power supply packaged with an end-use device that is not a consumer product, as evidenced by either: (i) Such device being certified as, or declared to be in conformance with, a specific standard applicable only to non-consumer products. For example, a power supply model intended for use with an end-use device that is certified to the following standards would not meet the EPCA definition of an EPS: (A) CISPR 11 (Class A Equipment), “Industrial, scientific and medical equipment—Radio-frequency disturbance—Limits and methods of measurement”; (B) UL 1480A, “Standard for Speakers for Commercial and Professional Use”; (C) UL 813, “Standard for Commercial Audio Equipment”; and (D) UL 1727, “Standard for Commercial Electric Personal Grooming Appliances”; or (ii) Such device being excluded or exempted from inclusion within, or conformance with, a law, regulation, or broadly-accepted industry standard where such exclusion or exemption applies only to non-consumer products; (7) A power supply distributed in commerce for use with an end-use device where: (i) The end-use device is not a consumer product, as evidenced by either the circumstances in paragraph (6)(i) or (ii) of this definition; and (ii) The end-use device for which the power supply is distributed in commerce is reasonably disclosed to the public, such as by identification of the end-use device on the packaging for the power supply, documentation physically present with the power supply, or on the manufacturer's or private labeler's public website; or (8) A power supply that is not marketed for residential or consumer use, and that is clearly marked (or, alternatively, the packaging of the individual power supply, the shipping container of multiple such power supplies, or associated documentation physically present with the power supply when distributed in commerce is clearly marked) “FOR USE WITH COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT ONLY” or “NOT FOR RESIDENTIAL OR CONSUMER USE,” with the marking designed and applied so that the marking will be visible and legible during customary conditions for the item on which the marking is placed. Compact fluorescent lamp (CFL) Compact refrigerator/refrigerator-freezer/freezer Component video Composite video Consumer product (1) Of a type— (i) Which in operation consumes, or is designed to consume, energy or, with respect to showerheads, faucets, water closets, and urinals, water; and (ii) Which, to any significant extent, is distributed in commerce for personal use or consumption by individuals; (2) Without regard to whether such article of such type is in fact distributed in commerce for personal use or consumption by an individual, except that such term includes fluorescent lamp ballasts, general service fluorescent lamps, incandescent reflector lamps, showerheads, faucets, water closets, and urinals distributed in commerce for personal or commercial use or consumption. Consumer refrigeration product Contractor Controlling parameter Convection microwave oven Conventional cooking top Conventional oven Conventional room air cleaner (1) Is a portable or wall mounted (fixed) unit, excluding ceiling mounted unit, that plugs into an electrical outlet; (2) Operates with a fan for air circulation; and (3) Contains means to remove, destroy, and/or deactivate particulates. The term portable is as defined in section 2.1.3.1 of AHAM AC-7-2022 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and fixed is as defined in section 2.1.3.2 of AHAM AC-7-2022. Cooking products Cooler (1) No lower than 39 °F (3.9 °C); or (2) In a range that extends no lower than 37 °F (2.8 °C) but at least as high as 60 °F (15.6 °C) as determined according to the applicable provisions in § 429.61(d)(2) of this chapter. Cooler-all-refrigerator Cooler-freezer Cooler-refrigerator (1) At least one of the remaining compartments is not a cooler compartment as defined in appendix A of subpart B of this part and is capable of maintaining compartment temperatures above 32 °F (0 °C) and below 39 °F (3.9 °C) as determined according to § 429.61(d)(2) of this chapter; (2) The cabinet may also include a compartment capable of maintaining compartment temperatures below 32 °F (0 °C) as determined according to § 429.61(d)(2) of this chapter; but (3) The cabinet does not provide a separate low temperature compartment capable of maintaining compartment temperatures below 8 °F (−13.3 °C) as determined according to § 429.61(d)(2) of this chapter. Cooler-refrigerator-freezer (1) At least one of the remaining compartments is not a cooler compartment as defined in appendix A of subpart B of this part and is capable of maintaining compartment temperatures above 32 °F (0 °C) and below 39 °F (3.9 °C) as determined according to § 429.61(d)(2) of this chapter; and (2) At least one other compartment is capable of maintaining compartment temperatures below 8 °F (−13.3 °C) and may be adjusted by the user to a temperature of 0 °F (−17.8 °C) or below as determined according to § 429.61(d)(2) of this chapter. Correlated color temperature (CCT) Covered product (1) Of a type specified in section 322 of the Act; or (2) That is an air cleaner, battery charger, ceiling fan, ceiling fan light kit, dehumidifier, external power supply, medium base compact fluorescent lamp, miscellaneous refrigeration product, portable air conditioner, portable electric spa, or torchiere. Dealer Dehumidifier (1) A refrigerated surface (evaporator) that condenses moisture from the atmosphere; (2) A refrigerating system, including an electric motor; (3) An air-circulating fan; and (4) A means for collecting or disposing of the condensate. Design voltage (1) The voltage marked as the intended operating voltage; (2) The mid-point of the voltage range if the lamp is marked with a voltage range; or (3) 120 V if the lamp is not marked with a voltage or voltage range. Designed and marketed e.g., Detachable battery (1) Contained in a separate enclosure from the product; and (2) Intended to be removed or disconnected from the product for recharging. Direct heating equipment Direct operation external power supply Direct vent system Dishwasher Distributor DOE Dual-duct portable air conditioner Dual-flush water closet Electric boiler Electric central furnace Electric circulating water heater Electric clothes dryer Electric heater Electric instantaneous water heater Electric pool heater Electric spa heater (1) Uses electricity as its primary energy source; (2) Has an output capacity (as measured according to appendix P to subpart B of part 430) of 11 kW or less; and (3) Is designed to be installed within a portable electric spa. Electric storage water heater Electromechanical hydraulic water closet Electronic ballast Energy conservation standard Energy use of a type of consumer product which is used by households ER incandescent reflector lamp ER30 ER40 Estimated annual operating cost External power supply (1) Light-emitting diodes providing illumination; (2) Organic light-emitting diodes providing illumination; or (3) Ceiling fans using direct current motors. External power supply design family Faucet Fitting Floor electric heater Fluorescent lamp (1) Any straight-shaped lamp (commonly referred to as 4-foot medium bipin lamps) with medium bipin bases of nominal overall length of 48 inches and rated wattage of 25 or more; (2) Any U-shaped lamp (commonly referred to as 2-foot U-shaped lamps) with medium bipin bases of nominal overall length between 22 and 25 inches and rated wattage of 25 or more; (3) Any rapid start lamp (commonly referred to as 8-foot high output lamps) with recessed double contact bases of nominal overall length of 96 inches; (4) Any instant start lamp (commonly referred to as 8-foot slimline lamps) with single pin bases of nominal overall length of 96 inches and rated wattage of 49 or more; (5) Any straight-shaped lamp (commonly referred to as 4-foot miniature bipin standard output lamps) with miniature bipin bases of nominal overall length between 45 and 48 inches and rated wattage of 25 or more; and (6) Any straight-shaped lamp (commonly referred to 4-foot miniature bipin high output lamps) with miniature bipin bases of nominal overall length between 45 and 48 inches and rated wattage of 44 or more. Fluorescent lamp ballast Fluorescent lamp designed for use in reprographic equipment Flushometer tank Flushometer valve Forced air central furnace Freestanding compact cooler Freestanding cooler Freezer (1) Any product that does not include a compressor and condenser unit as an integral part of the cabinet assembly; or (2) Any miscellaneous refrigeration product that must comply with an applicable miscellaneous refrigeration product energy conservation standard. Furnace (1) Is designed to be the principal heating source for the living space of a residence; (2) Is not contained within the same cabinet with a central air conditioner whose rated cooling capacity is above 65,000 Btu per hour; (3) Is an electric central furnace, electric boiler, forced-air central furnace, gravity central furnace, or low-pressure steam or hot water boiler; and (4) Has a heat input rate of less than 300,000 Btu per hour for electric boilers and low-pressure steam or hot water boilers and less than 225,000 Btu per hour for forced-air central furnaces, gravity central furnaces, and electric central furnaces. Furnace fan Gas Gas clothes dryer Gas-fired circulating water heater Gas-fired instantaneous water heater Gas-fired pool heater Gas-fired storage water heater General lighting application General service fluorescent lamp (1) Fluorescent lamps designed to promote plant growth; (2) Fluorescent lamps specifically designed for cold temperature applications; (3) Colored fluorescent lamps; (4) Impact-resistant fluorescent lamps; (5) Reflectorized or aperture lamps; (6) Fluorescent lamps designed for use in reprographic equipment; (7) Lamps primarily designed to produce radiation in the ultra-violet region of the spectrum; and (8) Lamps with a Color Rendering Index of 87 or greater. General service incandescent lamp (1) An appliance lamp; (2) A black light lamp; (3) A bug lamp; (4) A colored lamp; (5) A G shape lamp with a diameter of 5 inches or more as defined in ANSI C78.79-2020 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3); (6) An infrared lamp; (7) A left-hand thread lamp; (8) A marine lamp; (9) A marine signal service lamp; (10) A mine service lamp; (11) A plant light lamp; (12) An R20 short lamp; (13) A sign service lamp; (14) A silver bowl lamp; (15) A showcase lamp; and (16) A traffic signal lamp. General service lamp (1) Appliance lamps; (2) Black light lamps; (3) Bug lamps; (4) Colored lamps; (5) G shape lamps with a diameter of 5 inches or more as defined in ANSI C78.79-2020 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3); (6) General service fluorescent lamps; (7) High intensity discharge lamps; (8) Infrared lamps; (9) J, JC, JCD, JCS, JCV, JCX, JD, JS, and JT shape lamps that do not have Edison screw bases; (10) Lamps that have a wedge base or prefocus base; (11) Left-hand thread lamps; (12) Marine lamps; (13) Marine signal service lamps; (14) Mine service lamps; (15) MR shape lamps that have a first number symbol equal to 16 (diameter equal to 2 inches) as defined in ANSI C78.79-2020 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), operate at 12 volts, and have a lumen output greater than or equal to 800; (16) Other fluorescent lamps; (17) Plant light lamps; (18) R20 short lamps; (19) Reflector lamps (as set out in this definition) that have a first number symbol less than 16 (diameter less than 2 inches) as defined in ANSI C78.79-2020 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and that do not have E26/E24, E26d, E26/50x39, E26/53x39, E29/28, E29/53x39, E39, E39d, EP39, or EX39 bases; (20) S shape or G shape lamps that have a first number symbol less than or equal to 12.5 (diameter less than or equal to 1.5625 inches) as defined in ANSI C78.79-2014 (R2020) (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3); (21) Sign service lamps; (22) Silver bowl lamps; (23) Showcase lamps; (24) Specialty MR lamps; (25) T shape lamps that have a first number symbol less than or equal to 8 (diameter less than or equal to 1 inch) as defined in ANSI C78.79-2020 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), nominal overall length less than 12 inches, and that are not compact fluorescent lamps (as set out in this definition); (26) Traffic signal lamps. General service light-emitting diode (LED) lamp General service organic light-emitting diode (OLED) lamp Gravity central furnace Gravity flush tank water closet Grid-enabled water heater (1) Has a rated storage tank volume of more than 75 gallons; (2) Is manufactured on or after April 16, 2015; (3) Is equipped at the point of manufacture with an activation lock and; (4) Bears a permanent label applied by the manufacturer that— (i) Is made of material not adversely affected by water; (ii) Is attached by means of non-water-soluble adhesive; and (iii) Advises purchasers and end-users of the intended and appropriate use of the product with the following notice printed in 16.5 point Arial Narrow Bold font: “IMPORTANT INFORMATION: This water heater is intended only for use as part of an electric thermal storage or demand response program. It will not provide adequate hot water unless enrolled in such a program and activated by your utility company or another program operator. Confirm the availability of a program in your local area before purchasing or installing this product.” Hand-held showerhead High-definition multimedia interface or HDMI® Home heating equipment, not including furnaces Household (1) Group quarters (2) Housing unit (3) Separate living quarters (i) To which the occupants have access either: (A) Directly from outside of the building, or (B) Through a common hall that is accessible to other living quarters and that does not go through someone else's living quarters, and (ii) Occupied by one or more persons who live and eat separately from occupant(s) of other living quarters, if any, in the same building. Immersed heating element Impact-resistant fluorescent lamp (1) Has a coating or equivalent technology that is compliant with NSF/ANSI 51 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and is designed to contain the glass if the glass envelope of the lamp is broken; and (2) Is designated and marketed for the intended application, with: (i) The designation on the lamp packaging; and (ii) Marketing materials that identify the lamp as being impact-resistant, shatter-resistant, shatter-proof, or shatter-protected. Import Incandescent lamp (1) Any lamp (commonly referred to as lower wattage non-reflector general service lamps, including any tungsten halogen lamp) that has a rated wattage between 30 and 199, has an E26 medium screw base, has a rated voltage or voltage range that lies at least partially in the range of 115 and 130 volts, and is not a reflector lamp. (2) Any incandescent reflector lamp. (3) Any general service incandescent lamp (commonly referred to as a high-or higher-wattage lamp) that has a rated wattage above 199 (above 205 for a high wattage reflector lamp). Incandescent reflector lamp Indirect operation external power supply (1) If the external power supply (EPS) can be connected to an end-use consumer product and that consumer product can be operated using battery power, the method for determining whether that EPS is incapable of operating that consumer product directly is as follows: (i) If the end-use product has a removable battery, remove it for the remainder of the test and proceed to the step in paragraph (1)(v) of this definition. If not, proceed to the step in paragraph (1)(ii). (ii) Charge the battery in the application via the EPS such that the application can operate as intended before taking any additional steps. (iii) Disconnect the EPS from the application. From an off mode state, turn on the application and record the time necessary for it to become operational to the nearest five second increment (5 sec, 10 sec, etc.). (iv) Operate the application using power only from the battery until the application stops functioning due to the battery discharging. (v) Connect the EPS first to mains and then to the application. Immediately attempt to operate the application. If the battery was removed for testing and the end-use product operates as intended, the EPS is not an indirect operation EPS and paragraph 2 of this definition does not apply. If the battery could not be removed for testing, record the time for the application to become operational to the nearest five second increment (5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.). (2) If the time recorded in paragraph (1)(v) of this definition is greater than the summation of the time recorded in paragraph (1)(iii) of this definition and five seconds, the EPS cannot operate the application directly and is an indirect operation EPS. Infrared lamp Installation of a central air conditioner Integrated lamp Integrated light-emitting diode lamp Intermediate base incandescent lamp Kerosene Lamp Efficacy (LE) Lamps primarily designed to produce radiation in the ultraviolet region of the spectrum LED downlight retrofit kit Left-hand thread lamp Lifetime Lifetime of a compact fluorescent lamp Lifetime of an integrated light-emitting diode lamp Light-emitting diode LED Light fixture Low consumption see Low pressure steam or hot water boiler Low-pressure water dispenser Low-temperature water heater Low-voltage external power supply LP-gas Major cooking component Manufacture Manufacturer Marine lamp Marine signal service lamp Medium base compact fluorescent lamp (1) Any lamp that is— (i) Specifically designed to be used for special purpose applications; and (ii) Unlikely to be used in general purpose applications, such as the applications described in the definition of “General Service Incandescent Lamp” in this section; or (2) Any lamp not described in the definition of “General Service Incandescent Lamp” in this section that is excluded by the Secretary, by rule, because the lamp is— (i) Designed for special applications; and (ii) Unlikely to be used in general purpose applications. Medium screw base Microwave oven Mine service lamp Miscellaneous refrigeration product Mobile home furnace Modified spectrum (1) Is not a colored incandescent lamp; and (2) When operated at the rated voltage and wattage of the incandescent lamp— (A) Has a color point with (x,y) chromaticity coordinates on the C.I.E. 1931 chromaticity diagram, figure 2, page 3 of IESNA LM-16 (incorporated by reference; see (B) Has a color point with (x,y) chromaticity coordinates on the C.I.E. 1931 chromaticity diagram, figure 2, page 3 of IESNA LM-16 (incorporated by reference; see Natural gas Non-integrated lamp Off mode (1) Is connected to a main power source; and (2) Is not providing any stand-by or active mode function. Oil Oil-fired circulating water heater Oil-fired instantaneous water heater Oil-fired pool heater Oil-fired storage water heater Organic light-emitting diode LED Other clothes washer Other cooking products Other fluorescent lamp Packaged terminal air conditioner Packaged terminal heat pump PAR incandescent reflector lamp Person Pin base lamp Pin-based Plant light lamp Pool heater Portable air conditioner Portable dehumidifier Portable electric heater Portable electric spa Portable indoor conventional cooking top (1) For indoor use; and (2) To be moved from place to place. Pot filler Primary electric heater Private labeler (1) Such product (or its container) is labeled with the brand or trademark of a person other than a manufacturer of such product; (2) The person with whose brand or trademark such product (or container) is labeled has authorized or caused such product to be so labeled; and (3) The brand or trademark of a manufacturer of such product does not appear on such label. Propane 3 8 R incandescent reflector lamp R20 incandescent reflector lamp R20 short lamp Rated voltage (1) The design voltage if the design voltage is 115 V, 130 V or between 115V and 130 V: (2) 115 V if the design voltage is less than 115 V and greater than or equal to 100 V and the lamp can operate at 115 V; and (3) 130 V if the design voltage is greater than 130 V and less than or equal to 150 V and the lamp can operate at 130 V. Rated wattage (1) With respect to fluorescent lamps and general service fluorescent lamps: (i) If the lamp is listed in ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) or ANSI C78.901 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), the rated wattage of a lamp determined by the lamp designation of Clause 11.1 of ANSI C78.81 or ANSI C78.901; (ii) If the lamp is a residential straight-shaped lamp, and not listed in ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), the wattage of a lamp when operated on a reference ballast for which the lamp is designed; or (iii) If the lamp is neither listed in one of the ANSI standards referenced in paragraph (1)(i) of this definition, nor a residential straight-shaped lamp, a represented value of electrical power for a basic model, determined according to 10 CFR 429.27, and derived from the measured initial input power of a lamp tested according to appendix R to subpart B of this part. (2) With respect to general service incandescent lamps, a represented value of electrical power for a basic model, determined according to 10 CFR 429.66, and derived from the measured initial input power of a lamp tested according to appendix R to subpart B of this part. (3) With respect to incandescent reflector lamps, a represented value of electrical power for a basic model, determined according to 10 CFR 429.55, and derived from the measured initial input power of a lamp tested according to appendix R to subpart B of this part. Reflector lamp Reflectorized or aperture lamp Refrigerant-desiccant dehumidifier Refrigerator (1) Any product that does not include a compressor and condenser unit as an integral part of the cabinet assembly; (2) A cooler; or (3) Any miscellaneous refrigeration product that must comply with an applicable miscellaneous refrigeration product energy conservation standard. Refrigerator-freezer (1) Any product that does not include a compressor and condenser unit as an integral part of the cabinet assembly; or (2) Any miscellaneous refrigeration product that must comply with an applicable miscellaneous refrigeration product energy conservation standard. Replacement ballast (1) Is designed for use to replace an existing fluorescent lamp ballast in a previously installed luminaire; (2) Is marked “FOR REPLACEMENT USE ONLY”; (3) Is shipped by the manufacturer in packages containing not more than 10 fluorescent lamp ballasts; and (4) Has output leads that when fully extended are a total length that is less than the length of the lamp with which the ballast is intended to be operated. Residential straight-shaped lamp (1) A lamp is designed exclusively for residential applications if it will not function for more than 100 hours with a commercial high-power-factor ballast. (2) A lamp is designed primarily and marketed exclusively for residential applications if it: (i) Is permanently and clearly marked as being for residential use only; (ii) Has a life of 6,000 hours or less when used with a commercial high-power-factor ballast; (iii) Is not labeled or represented as a replacement for a fluorescent lamp that is a covered product; and (iv) Is marketed and distributed in a manner designed to minimize use of the lamp with commercial high-power-factor ballasts. (3) A manufacturer may market and distribute a lamp in a manner designed to minimize use of the lamp with commercial high-power-factor ballasts by: (i) Packaging and labeling the lamp in a manner that clearly indicates the lamp is for residential use only and includes appropriate instructions concerning proper and improper use; if the lamp is included in a catalog or price list that also includes commercial/industrial lamps, listing the lamp in a separate residential section accompanied by notes about proper use on the same page; and providing as part of any express warranty accompanying the lamp that improper use voids such warranty; or (ii) Using other comparably effective measures to minimize use with commercial high-power-factor ballasts. Room air conditioner Rough or vibration service incandescent reflector lamp Illuminating Engineering Society of North America Lighting Handbook, Rough service lamp (1) Has a minimum of 5 supports with filament configurations that are C-7A, C-11, C-17, and C-22 as listed in Figure 6-12 of the IESNA Lighting Handbook (incorporated by reference; see (2) Is designated and marketed specifically for ‘rough service’ applications, with (i) The designation appearing on the lamp packaging; and (ii) Marketing materials that identify the lamp as being for rough service. S-video Safety shower showerhead Secretary Security or life safety alarm or surveillance system (1) Equipment designed and marketed to perform any of the following functions (on a continuous basis): (i) Monitor, detect, record, or provide notification of intrusion or access to real property or physical assets or notification of threats to life safety. (ii) Deter or control access to real property or physical assets, or prevent the unauthorized removal of physical assets. (iii) Monitor, detect, record, or provide notification of fire, gas, smoke, flooding, or other physical threats to real property, physical assets, or life safety. (2) This term does not include any product with a principal function other than life safety, security, or surveillance that: (i) Is designed and marketed with a built-in alarm or theft-deterrent feature; or (ii) Does not operate necessarily and continuously in active mode. Semi-automatic clothes washer Shatter-resistant lamp, shatter-proof lamp, shatter-protected lamp (1) Has a coating or equivalent technology that is compliant with NSF/ANSI 51 (incorporated by reference; see (2) Is designated and marketed for the intended application, with (i) The designation on the lamp packaging; and (ii) Marketing materials that identify the lamp as being shatter-resistant, shatter-proof, or shatter-protected. Showcase lamp Sign service lamp Silver bowl lamp Single-duct portable air conditioner Siphonic action Siphonic bowl Small-duct high-velocity (SDHV) electric furnace (1) Is designed for, and produces, at least 1.2 inches of external static pressure when operated at the certified air volume rate of 220-350 CFM per rated ton of cooling in the highest default cooling airflow-control setting; and (2) When applied in the field, uses high velocity room outlets generally greater than 1,000 fpm that have less than 6.0 square inches of free area. Small-duct high-velocity (SDHV) modular blower (1) Is designed for, and produces, at least 1.2 inches of external static pressure when operated at the certified air volume rate of 220-350 CFM per rated ton of cooling in the highest default cooling airflow-controls setting; and (2) When applied in the field, uses high velocity room outlets generally greater than 1,000 fpm that have less than 6.0 square inches of free area. Space constrained product (1) That has rated cooling capacities no greater than 30,000 BTU/hr; (2) That has an outdoor or indoor unit having at least two overall exterior dimensions or an overall displacement that: (i) Is substantially smaller than those of other units that are: (A) Currently usually installed in site-built single family homes; and (B) Of a similar cooling, and, if a heat pump, heating capacity; and (ii) If increased, would certainly result in a considerable increase in the usual cost of installation or would certainly result in a significant loss in the utility of the product to the consumer; and (3) Of a product type that was available for purchase in the United States as of December 1, 2000. Specialty application mercury vapor lamp ballast (1) Is designed and marketed for operation of mercury vapor lamps used in quality inspection, industrial processing, or scientific use, including fluorescent microscopy and ultraviolet curing; and (2) In the case of a specialty application mercury vapor lamp ballast, the label of which— (i) Provides that the specialty application mercury vapor lamp ballast is ‘For specialty applications only, not for general illumination’; and (ii) Specifies the specific applications for which the ballast is designed. Specialty MR lamp Standby mode (1) Is connected to a main power source; and (2) Offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions: (i) To facilitate the activation or deactivation of other functions (including active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer; or (ii) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. State State regulation Supplementary electric heater Surface unit Tabletop water heater Television set or TV (1) Broadcast and similar services for terrestrial, cable, satellite, and/or broadband transmission of analog and/or digital signals; and/or (2) Display-specific data connections, such as HDMI, Component video, S-video, Composite video; and/or (3) Media storage devices such as a USB flash drive, memory card, or a DVD; and/or (4) Network connections, usually using Internet Protocol, typically carried over Ethernet or Wi-Fi. Through-the-wall central air conditioner (1) Is not weatherized; (2) Is clearly and permanently marked for installation only through an exterior wall; (3) Has a rated cooling capacity no greater than 30,000 Btu/hr; (4) Exchanges all of its outdoor air across a single surface of the equipment cabinet; and (5) Has a combined outdoor air exchange area of less than 800 square inches (split systems) or less than 1,210 square inches (single packaged systems) as measured on the surface described in paragraph (4) of this definition. Through-the-wall central air conditioning heat pump (1) Is not weatherized; (2) Is clearly and permanently marked for installation only through an exterior wall; (3) Has a rated cooling capacity no greater than 30,000 Btu/hr; (4) Exchanges all of its outdoor air across a single surface of the equipment cabinet; and (5) Has a combined outdoor air exchange area of less than 800 square inches (split systems) or less than 1,210 square inches (single packaged systems) as measured on the surface described in paragraph (4) of this definition. Torchiere Traffic signal lamp Trough-type urinal Unvented gas heater Unvented home heating equipment or unvented heater Unvented oil heater Urinal Vented floor furnace Vented home heating equipment or vented heater Vented room heater Vented wall furnace Vibration service lamp (1) Has filament configurations that are C-5, C-7A, or C-9, as listed in Figure 6-12 of the IESNA Lighting Handbook (incorporated by reference; see (2) Has a maximum wattage of 60 watts; (3) Is sold at retail in packages of 2 lamps or less; and (4) Is designated and marketed specifically for vibration service or vibration-resistant applications, with— (i) The designation appearing on the lamp packaging; and (ii) Marketing materials that identify the lamp as being vibration service only. Voltage range Wall electric heater Water closet Water heater (1) Storage type units which heat and store water at a thermostatically controlled temperature, including gas storage water heaters with an input of 75,000 Btu per hour or less, oil storage water heaters with an input of 105,000 Btu per hour or less, and electric storage water heaters with an input of 12 kilowatts or less; (2) Instantaneous type units which heat water but contain no more than one gallon of water per 4,000 Btu per hour of input, including gas instantaneous water heaters with an input of 200,000 Btu per hour or less, oil instantaneous water heaters with an input of 210,000 Btu per hour or less, and electric instantaneous water heaters with an input of 12 kilowatts or less; and (3) Heat pump type units, with a maximum current rating of 24 amperes at a voltage no greater than 250 volts, which are products designed to transfer thermal energy from one temperature level to a higher temperature level for the purpose of heating water, including all ancillary equipment such as fans, storage tanks, pumps, or controls necessary for the device to perform its function. Water use Weatherized warm air furnace or boiler Whole-home dehumidifier [42 FR 27898, June 1, 1977] Editorial Note: For Federal Register www.govinfo.gov. § 430.3 Materials incorporated by reference. (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register under 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) must publish a document in the Federal Register [email protected], www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/appliance-and-equipment-standards-program. www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html [email protected]. (b) Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA), 30 West University Drive, Arlington Heights, IL 60004, (847) 394-0150, or by going to https://www.amca.org/store/item.aspx?ItemId=81. (1) ANSI/AMCA 210-99, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating, (2) ANSI/ASHRAE 51-07/ANSI/AMCA 210-07 (“ANSI/AMCA 210”), Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating, AMCA approved July 28, 2006; IBR approved for appendix X1 to subpart B. (3) ANSI/AMCA Standard 208-18, (“AMCA 208-18”), Calculation of the Fan Energy Index, ANSI approved January 24, 2018, IBR approved for appendix U to this subpart. (4) ANSI/AMCA 210-07, ANSI/ASHRAE 51-07 (“AMCA 210-2007”), Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating, ANSI approved August 17, 2007, Section 8—Report and Results of Test, Section 8.2—Performance graphical representation of test results, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B, as follows: (i) Figure 2A—Static Pressure Tap, and (ii) Figure 12—Outlet Chamber Setup—Multiple Nozzles in Chamber. (5) ANSI/AMCA Standard 230-15 (“AMCA 230-15”), Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Circulating Fans for Rating and Certification, (6) AMCA 230-15 Technical Errata 2021-05-05 (“AMCA 260-15 TE), Technical Errata Sheet for ANSI/AMCA Standard 230-15: Density Corrections, (c) AHRI. www.ahrinet.org. (1) ANSI/AHRI 210/240-2008 with Addenda 1 and 2 (“AHRI 210/240-2008”), 2008 Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning & Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment, ANSI approved October 27, 2011 (Addendum 1 dated June 2011 and Addendum 2 dated March 2012); IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 6—Rating Requirements, Section 6.1—Standard Ratings, 6.1.3—Standard Rating Tests, 6.1.3.2—Electrical Conditions; (ii) Section 6—Rating Requirements, Section 6.1—Standard Ratings, 6.1.3—Standard Rating Tests, 6.1.3.4—Outdoor-Coil Airflow Rate; (iii) Section 6—Rating Requirements, Section 6.1—Standard Ratings, 6.1.3—Standard Rating Tests, 6.1.3.5—Requirements for Separated Assemblies; (iv) Figure D1—Tunnel Air Enthalpy Test Method Arrangement; (v) Figure D2—Loop Air Enthalpy Test Method Arrangement; and (vi) Figure D4—Room Air Enthalpy Test Method Arrangement. (2) AHRI Standard 210/240-2024 (I-P), (“AHRI 210/240-2024”), Performance Rating of Unitary Air-conditioning and Air-source Heat Pump Equipment; IBR approved for appendix M1 to subpart B. (3) AHRI Standard 1160-2009 (“AHRI 1160”), Performance Rating of Heat Pump Pool Heaters, 2009; IBR approved for appendix P to subpart B. (4) ANSI/AHRI 1230-2010 with Addendum 2 (“AHRI 1230-2010”), 2010 Standard for Performance Rating of Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Multi-Split Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment (including Addendum 1 dated March 2011), ANSI approved August 2, 2010 (Addendum 2 dated June 2014); IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 3—Definitions (except 3.8, 3.9, 3.13, 3.14, 3.15, 3.16, 3.23, 3.24, 3.26, 3.27, 3.28, 3.29, 3.30, and 3.31); (ii) Section 5—Test Requirements, Section 5.1 (untitled), 5.1.3-5.1.4; (iii) Section 6—Rating Requirements, Section 6.1—Standard Ratings, 6.1.5—Airflow Requirements for Systems with Capacities <65,000 Btu/h [19,000 W]; (iv) Section 6—Rating Requirements, Section 6.1—Standard Ratings, 6.1.6—Outdoor-Coil Airflow Rate (Applies to all Air-to-Air Systems); (v) Section 6—Rating Requirements, Section 6.2—Conditions for Standard Rating Test for Air-cooled Systems <65,000 Btu/h [19,000W] (except table 8); and (vi) Table 4—Refrigerant Line Length Correction Factors. (5) AHRI Standard 1600-2024 (I-P) (“AHRI 1600-2024”), Performance Rating of Unitary Air-conditioning and Air-source Heat Pump Equipment; IBR approved for appendix M2 to subpart B. (d) AATCC. www.aatcc.org. (1) AATCC Test Method 79-2010, Absorbency of Textiles, Revised 2010, IBR approved for Appendix J3 to Subpart B. (2) AATCC Test Method 118-2007, Oil Repellency: Hydrocarbon Resistance Test, Revised 2007, IBR approved for Appendix J3 to Subpart B. (3) AATCC Test Method 135-2010, Dimensional Changes of Fabrics after Home Laundering, Revised 2010, IBR approved for Appendix J3 to Subpart B. (e) ANSI. https://www.ansi.org. (1) ANSI C78.3-1991 (“ANSI C78.3”), American National Standard for Fluorescent Lamps-Instant-start and Cold-Cathode Types-Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics, approved July 15, 1991; IBR approved for § 430.32. (2) ANSI C78.20-2003, Revision of ANSI C78.20-1995 (“ANSI C78.20”), American National Standard for electric lamps—A, G, PS, and Similar Shapes with E26 Medium Screw Bases, approved October 30, 2003; IBR approved for § 430.2. (3) ANSI C78.21-1989, American National Standard for Electric Lamps—PAR and R Shapes, approved March 3, 1989, IBR approved for § 430.2. (4) ANSI C78.21-2011 (R2016) (“ANSI C78.21-2016”), American National Standard for Electric Lamps—PAR and R Shapes, (5) ANSI C78.79-2014 (R2020) (“ANSI C78.79-2020”), American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Nomenclature for Envelope Shapes Intended for Use with Electric Lamps, (6) ANSI__ANSLG C78.81-2010, (“ANSI C78.81-2010”), American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Double-Capped Fluorescent Lamps— Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics, approved January 14, 2010, IBR approved for §§ 430.2 and 430.32 and appendix R to subpart B. (7) ANSI C78.81-2016, American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Double-Capped Fluorescent Lamps—Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics, approved June 29, 2016, IBR approved for appendices Q and R to subpart B. (8) ANSI C78.375-1997, Revision of ANSI C78.375-1991 (“ANSI C78.375”), American National Standard for Fluorescent Lamps—Guide for Electrical Measurements, first edition, approved September 25, 1997; IBR approved for appendix R to subpart B. (9) ANSI C78.375A-2014 (R2020) (“ANSI C78.375A-2020”) American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Fluorescent Lamps—Guide for Electrical Measures, (10) ANSI__IEC C78.901-2005, (“ANSI C78.901-2005”), American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Single-Based Fluorescent Lamps—Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics, approved March 23, 2005; IBR approved for § 430.2 and appendix R to subpart B. (11) ANSI C78.901-2014, American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Single-Based Fluorescent Lamps—Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics, ANSI approved July 2, 2014; IBR approved for appendix W to subpart B. (12) ANSI/NEMA C78.901-2016 (“ANSI C78.901-2016”), American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Single-Based Fluorescent Lamps—Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics, ANSI approved August 23, 2016, IBR approved for appendices Q and R to subpart B. (13) ANSI C79.1-1994, American National Standard for Nomenclature for Glass Bulbs—Intended for Use with Electric Lamps, approved March 24, 1994, IBR approved for § 430.2. (14) ANSI C79.1-2002, American National Standard for Electric Lamps—Nomenclature for Glass Bulbs Intended for Use with Electric Lamps, approved September 16, 2002, IBR approved for § 430.2. (15) ANSI__ANSLG__ C81.61-2006, Revision of ANSI C81.61-2005, (“ANSI C81.61”), American National Standard for electrical lamp bases—Specifications for Bases (Caps) for Electric Lamps, approved August 25, 2006, IBR approved for §§ 430.2; 430.32. (16) ANSI C82.1-2004 (R2008, R2015), (“ANSI C82.1”), American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts—Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts, approved November 20, 2015; IBR approved for appendix Q to subpart B. (17) ANSI C82.2-2002 (R2007, R2016), (“ANSI C82.2”), American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts—Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts, approved July 12, 2016, IBR approved for appendix Q to subpart B. (18) ANSI C82.3-2016, (“ANSI C82.3”), American National Standard for Reference Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps, approved April 8, 2016; IBR approved for appendices Q and R to subpart B. (19) ANSI/NEMA C82.11-2017, (“ANSI C82.11”), American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts—High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts, approved January 23, 2017; IBR approved for appendix Q to subpart B. (20) ANSI C82.13-2002 (“ANSI C82.13”), American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts—Definitions for Fluorescent Lamps and Ballasts, approved July 23, 2002; IBR approved for appendix Q to subpart B. (21) ANSI C82.77-2002, (“ANSI C82.77”) Harmonic Emission Limits—Related Power Quality Requirements for Lighting Equipment, approved January 17, 2002; IBR approved for appendix Q to subpart B. (22) ANSI/NEMA WD 6-2016, Wiring Devices—Dimensional Specifications, (i) Figure 1-15—Plug and Receptacle; and (ii) Figure 5-15—Plug and Receptacle. (23) ANSI Z21.56-2006, section 2.10 (“ANSI Z21.56”), Standard for Gas-Fired Pool Heaters, approved December 13, 2005, IBR approved for appendix P to subpart B. (24) ANSI Z21.50-2007 (CSA 2.22-2007), (“ANSI Z21.50”), Vented Gas Fireplaces, Fifth Edition, Approved February 22, 2007, IBR approved for § 430.2. (25) [Reserved] (26) ANSI Z21.88-2009 (CSA 2.33-2009), (“ANSI Z21.88”), Vented Gas Fireplace Heaters, Fifth Edition, Approved March 26, 2009, IBR approved for § 430.2. Note 1 to paragraph ( e The standards referenced in paragraphs (e)(4), (5), (7), (9), (12), (16), (17), (18), (19), and (21) of this section were all published by National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and are also available from National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 1300 North 17th Street, Suite 900, Rosslyn, Virginia 22209, https://www.nema.org/Standards/Pages/default.aspx. (f) AS/NZS. www.standards.org.au/ www.standards.co.nz. (1) AS/NZS 4474.1:2007, Performance of Household Electrical Appliances—Refrigerating Appliances; Part 1: Energy Consumption and Performance, Second edition, published August 15, 2007, IBR approved for Appendix A to Subpart B. (2) [Reserved] (g) ASHRAE. www.ashrae.org. (1) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 16-2016 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 16”), Method of Testing for Rating Room Air Conditioners, Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners, and Packaged Terminal Heat Pumps for Cooling and Heating Capacity, ANSI approved November 1, 2016; IBR approved for appendices F, M1, and M2 to subpart B. (2) ANSI/ASHRAE 23.1-2010 (“ASHRAE 23.1-2010”), Methods of Testing for Rating the Performance of Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units that Operate at Subcritical Temperatures of the Refrigerant, ANSI approved January 28, 2010; IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 5—Requirements; (ii) Section 6—Instruments; (iii) Section 7—Methods of Testing; and (iv) Section 8—Compressor Testing. (3) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37-2009, (“ASHRAE 37-2009”), Methods of Testing for Rating Electrically Driven Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, ANSI approved June 25, 2009; IBR approved for appendices CC, CC1, M1, and M2 to subpart B. (4) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37-2009, (“ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009”), Methods of Testing for Rating Electrically Driven Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, ANSI approved June 25, 2009, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 5—Instruments, Section 5.1—Temperature Measuring Instruments: 5.1.1; (ii) Section 5—Instruments, Section 5.2—Refrigerant, Liquid, and Barometric Pressure Measuring Instruments; (iii) Section 5—Instruments, Section 5.5—Volatile Refrigerant Flow Measurement; (iv) Section 6—Airflow and Air Differential Pressure Measurement Apparatus, Section 6.1—Enthalpy Apparatus (Excluding Figure 3): 6.1.1-6.1.2 and 6.1.4; (v) Section 6—Airflow and Air Differential Pressure Measurement Apparatus, Section 6.2—Nozzle Airflow Measuring Apparatus (Excluding Figure 5); (vi) Section 6—Airflow and Air Differential Pressure Measurement Apparatus, Section 6.3—Nozzles (Excluding Figure 6); (vii) Section 6—Airflow and Air Differential Pressure Measurement Apparatus, Section 6.4—External Static Pressure Measurements; (viii) Section 6—Airflow and Air Differential Pressure Measurement Apparatus, Section 6.5—Recommended Practices for Static Pressure Measurements; (ix) Section 7—Methods of Testing and Calculation, Section 7.3—Indoor and Outdoor Air Enthalpy Methods (Excluding Table 1); (x) Section 7—Methods of Testing and Calculation, Section 7.4—Compressor Calibration Method; (xi) Section 7—Methods of Testing and Calculation, Section 7.5—Refrigerant Enthalpy Method; (xii) Section 7—Methods of Testing and Calculation, Section 7.7—Airflow Rate Measurement, Section 7.7.2—Calculations—Nozzle Airflow Measuring Apparatus (Excluding Figure 10), 7.7.2.1-7.7.2.2; (xiii) Section 8—Test Procedures, Section 8.1—Test Room Requirements: 8.1.2-8.1.3; (xiv) Section 8—Test Procedures, Section 8.2—Equipment Installation; (xv) Section 8—Test Procedures, Section 8.6—Additional Requirements for the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method, Section 8.6.2; (xvii) Section 8—Test Procedures, Section 8.6—Additional Requirements for the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method, Table 2a—Test Tolerances (SI Units), and (xviii) Section 8—Test Procedures, Section 8.6—Additional Requirements for the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method, Table 2b—Test Tolerances (I-P Units); (xix) Section 9—Data to be Recorded, Section 9.2—Test Tolerances; and (xx) Section 9—Data to be Recorded, Table 3—Data to be Recorded. (5) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37-2009 (RA 2019) (“ASHRAE 37-2009 (RA 2019)”), Methods of Testing for Rating Electrically Driven Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, (6) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37-2009 Errata Sheet (“ASHRAE 37-2009 Errata Sheet”), Errata Sheet for ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37-2009—Methods of Testing for Rating Electrically Driven Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment, (7) ASHRAE 41.1-1986 (Reaffirmed 2006) (“ASHRAE 41.1-1986”), Standard Method for Temperature Measurement, (8) ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1-2013 (“ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1”), Standard Method for Temperature Measurement, ANSI approved January 30, 2013; IBR approved for appendices F and X1 to subpart B. (9) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.1-2013, (“ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1-2013”), Standard Method for Temperature Measurement, ANSI approved January 30, 2013, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 4—Classifications; (ii) Section 5—Requirements, Section 5.3—Airstream Temperature Measurements; (iii) Section 6—Instruments; and (iv) Section 7—Temperature Test Methods (Informative). (10) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.1-2020 (“ASHRAE 41.1-2020”), Standard Methods for Temperature Measurement, (11) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.2-1987 (RA 92), (“ASHRAE 41.2-1987 (RA 1992)”), Standard Methods for Laboratory Airflow Measurement, ANSI reaffirmed April 20, 1992, IBR approved for appendix F to subpart B. (12) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.2-1987 (RA 1992), (“ASHRAE 41.2-1987 (RA 1992)”), Standard Methods for Laboratory Airflow Measurement, ANSI reaffirmed April 20, 1992, Section 5—Section of Airflow-Measuring Equipment and Systems, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 5.2—Test Ducts,, Section 5.2.2—Mixers, 5.2.2.1—Performance of Mixers (excluding Figures 11 and 12 and Table 1); and (ii) Figure 14—Outlet Chamber Setup for Multiple Nozzles in Chamber. (13) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.3-2014, (“ASHRAE 41.3-2014”), Standard Methods for Pressure Measurement, ANSI approved July 3, 2014, IBR approved for appendix F to subpart B. (14) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.6-1994 (RA 2006) (“ASHRAE 41.6-1994”), Standard Method for Measurement of Moist Air Properties, (15) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.6-2014, (“ASHRAE 41.6-2014”), Standard Method for Humidity Measurement, ANSI approved July 3, 2014, IBR approved for appendices E, F, and EE to subpart B. (16) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.6-2014, (“ASHRAE 41.6-2014”), Standard Method for Humidity Measurement, ANSI approved July 3, 2014, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 4—Classifications; (ii) Section 5—Requirements; (iii) Section 6—Instruments and Calibration; and (iv) Section 7—Humidity Measurement Methods. (17) ANSI/ASHRAE 41.9-2011, (“ASHRAE 41.9-2011”), Standard Methods for Volatile-Refrigerant Mass Flow Measurements Using Calorimeters, ANSI approved February 3, 2011, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 5—Requirements; (ii) Section 6—Instruments; (iii) Section 7—Secondary Refrigerant Calorimeter Method; (iv) Section 8—Secondary Fluid Calorimeter Method; (v) Section 9—Primary Refrigerant Calorimeter Method; and (vi) Section 11—Lubrication Circulation Measurements. (18) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.11-2014, (“ASHRAE 41.11-2014”), Standard Methods for Power Measurement, ANSI approved July 3, 2014, IBR approved for appendix F to subpart B. (19) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, (“ASHRAE 103-1993”), Methods of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers, (with Errata of October 24, 1996), except for sections 7.1, 7.2.2.2, 7.2.2.5, 7.2.3.1, 7.8, 8.2.1.3, 8.3.3.1, 8.4.1.1, 8.4.1.1.2, 8.4.1.2, 8.4.2.1.4, 8.4.2.1.6, 8.6.1.1, 8.7.2, 8.8.3, 9.1.2.2.1, 9.1.2.2.2, 9.5.1.1, 9.5.1.2.1, 9.5.1.2.2, 9.5.2.1, 9.7.1, 9.7.4, 9.7.6, 9.10, 11.5.11.1, 11.5.11.2 and appendices B and C, approved October 4, 1993, IBR approved for § 430.23 and appendix N to subpart B. (20) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-2017 (“ASHRAE 103-2017”), Method of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers, ANSI-approved July 3, 2017; IBR approved for § 430.23 and appendices O, AA, and EE to subpart B. (21) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 116-2010, (“ASHRAE 116-2010”), Methods of Testing for Rating Seasonal Efficiency of Unitary Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps, ANSI approved February 24, 2010, Section 7—Methods of Test, Section 7.4—Air Enthalpy Method—Indoor Side (Primary Method), Section 7.4.3—Measurements, Section 7.4.3.4—Temperature, Section 7.4.3.4.5, IBR approved for appendix M to subpart B. (22) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 116-2010, (“ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010”), Methods of Testing for Rating Seasonal Efficiency of Unitary Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps, ANSI approved February 24, 2010, IBR approved for appendices M1 and M2 to subpart B. (23) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 118.2-2022 (“ASHRAE 118.2-2022”), Method of Testing for Rating Residential Water Heaters and Residential-Duty Commercial Water Heaters, (24) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 146-2011 (“ASHRAE 146”), Method of Testing and Rating Pool Heaters, ASHRAE approved February 2, 2011, IBR approved for appendix P to subpart B. (25) 2021 ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentals Inch-Pound Edition, Chapter 1, “Psychrometrics” (“2021 ASHRAE Handbook”), copyright 2021; IBR approved for appendix AA to subpart B. (h) ASME. www.asme.org. (1) ASME A112.18.1-2018/CSA B125.1-2018, (“ASME A112.18.1”), Plumbing supply fittings, CSA-published July 2018; IBR approved for appendix S to subpart B. (2) ASME A112.19.2-2008, (“ASME A112.19.2-2008”), “Ceramic plumbing fixtures,” sections 7.1, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.1.4, 7.1.5, 7.4, 8.2, 8.2.1, 8.2.2, 8.2.3, 8.6, Table 5, and Table 6 approved August 2008, including Update No. 1, dated August 2009, and Update No. 2, dated March 2011, IBR approved for § 430.2 and appendix T to subpart B. (3) ASME A112.19.2-2018/CSA B45.1-18 (“ASME A112.19.2-2018”), “Ceramic plumbing fixtures”, July 2018 (including Errata—October 2018); IBR approved for appendix T to subpart B. (i) AHAM. https:////www.aham.org. (1) ANSI/AHAM AC-1-2020, (“AHAM AC-1-2020”), Method for Measuring Performance of Portable Household Electric Room Air Cleaners, (2) AHAM AC-7-2022, Energy Test Method for Consumer Room Air Cleaners, (3) AHAM DH-1-2022, Energy Measurement Test Procedure for Dehumidifiers, (4) AHAM DW-1-2020, Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Dishwashers, copyright 2020; IBR approved for § 430.32; appendices C1 and C2 to subpart B. (5) AHAM DW-2-2020, Household Electric Dishwashers, copyright 2020; IBR approved for appendices C1 and C2 to subpart B. (6) ANSI/AHAM HLD-1-2010 (“AHAM HLD-1”), Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers, ANSI-approved June 11, 2010, IBR approved for appendices D1 and D2 to subpart B of this part. (7) AHAM HRF-1-2019 (“HRF-1-2019”), Energy and Internal Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products, Copyright © 2019, IBR approved for appendices A and B to subpart B of this part. (8) ANSI/AHAM PAC-1-2015, (“ANSI/AHAM PAC-1-2015”), Portable Air Conditioners, June 19, 2015, IBR approved for appendix CC to subpart B of this part. (9) AHAM PAC-1-2022, Energy Measurement Test Procedure for Portable Air Conditioners, (10) AHAM RAC-1-2020 (“AHAM RAC-1”), Energy Measurement Test Procedure for Room Air Conditioners, approved 2020, IBR approved for appendix F to subpart B. (j) ASTM. [email protected]; www.astm.org. (1) ASTM D2156-09 (Reapproved 2013) (“ASTM D2156R13”), Standard Test Method for Smoke Density in Flue Gases from Burning Distillate Fuels, (2) ASTM D2156-09 (Reapproved 2018) (“ASTM D2156 (R2018)”), Standard Test Method for Smoke Density in Flue Gases from Burning Distillate Fuels, (3) ASTM E97-82 (Reapproved 1987) (“ASTM E97-1987”), Standard Test Method for Directional Reflectance Factor, 45-deg 0-deg, of Opaque Specimens by Broad-Band Filter Reflectometry, Note 2 to paragraph (j)(3): ASTM E97-1987 was withdrawn in 1991. It is reasonably available from standards resellers including GlobalSpec's Engineering 360 ( https://standards.globalspec.com/std/3801495/astm-e97-82-1987 https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?document_name=ASTM%20E97&item_s_key=00020483 (4) ASTM E741-11 (Reapproved 2017) (“ASTM E741-11(2017)”), Standard Test Method for Determining Air Change in a Single Zone Means of a Tracer Gas Dilution Approved Sept. 1, 2017; IBR approved for appendix FF to subpart B. (k) CSA. www.csagroup.org. (1) ANSI Z21.86-2016 • CSA 2.32-2016 (“ANSI Z21.86-2016”), Vented gas-fired space heating appliances, ANSI-approved December 21, 2016; IBR approved for appendix O to subpart B. (2) CSA C374:11 (R2021), Energy performance of hot tubs and spas, published November 2011, Update No. 1—National Standard of Canada—April 2012; IBR approved for appendix GG to subpart B of this part. (l) CEA. www.CE.org. (1) CEA Standard, CEA-770.3-D, High Definition TV Analog Component Video Interface, (2) [Reserved] (m) CIE. https://www.cie.co.at. (1) CIE 13.3-1995 (“CIE 13.3”), Technical Report: Method of Measuring and Specifying Colour Rendering Properties of Light Sources, 1995, ISBN 3 900 734 57 7; IBR approved for § 430.2 and appendices R and W to subpart B. (2) CIE 15:2004 (“CIE 15”), Technical Report: Colorimetry, 3rd edition, 2004, ISBN 978 3 901906 33 6; IBR approved for appendix W to subpart B. (3) CIE 015:2018 (“CIE 15:2018”), Colorimetry, (n) CTA. Consumer Technology Association, 1919 S. Eads Street, Arlington, VA 22202; 703-907-7600; www.cta.tech. (1) ANSI/CTA-2037-D, Determination of Television Set Power Consumption, September 2022; IBR approved for appendix H to subpart B. (2) [Reserved] (o) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), https://www.energystar.gov (1) ENERGY STAR Testing Facility Guidance Manual: Building a Testing Facility and Performing the Solid State Test Method for ENERGY STAR Qualified Ceiling Fans, Version 1.1, approved December 9, 2002, IBR approved for appendix U to subpart B. (2) Energy Star Program Requirements for Single Voltage External Ac-Dc and Ac-Ac Power Supplies, Eligibility Criteria (Version 2.0), effective date for EPS Manufacturers November 1, 2008, IBR approved for subpart C, § 430.32. (p) HDMI www.hdmi.org. (1) HDMI Specification Informational Version 1.0, High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification, (2) [Reserved] (q) IEC. https://webstore.iec.ch/. (1) IEC Standard 933-5:1992, (“IEC 60933-5 Ed. 1.0”), Audio, video and audiovisual systems—Interconnections and matching values—Part 5: Y/C connector for video systems—Electrical matching values and description of the connector, (2) IEC 60081:1997/AMD6, (“IEC 60081”), Double-capped fluorescent lamps—Performance specifications (Amendment 6, Edition 5.0, August 2017); IBR approved for appendix Q to subpart B. (3) IEC 60350-2, (“IEC 60350-2”), Household electric cooking appliances Part 2: Hobs—Methods for measuring performance, (4) IEC 62040-3:2021 (“IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0”) Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)—Part 3: Method of specifying the performance and test requirements, (5) IEC 62301, Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power, (6) IEC 62301 (“IEC 62301”), Household electrical appliances Measurement of standby power, (7) IEC 62301, (“IEC 62301-DD”), Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power, (Edition 2.0, 2011-01); Section 5—Measurements, IBR approved for appendix DD to subpart B. (8) IEC 62301, (“IEC 62301-W”), Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power, (Edition 2.0, 2011-01), Section 5—Measurements, IBR approved for appendix W to subpart B. (r) IES. www.ies.org. (1) The IESNA Lighting Handbook, Reference & Application, (2) IES LM-9-09, (“IES LM-9”), IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurement of Fluorescent Lamps, approved January 31, 2009; IBR approved for § 430.2. (3) IES LM-9-09 (“IES LM-9-09-DD”), IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurement of Fluorescent Lamps, approved January 31, 2009; IBR approved for appendix DD to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 4.0—Ambient and Physical Conditions; (ii) Section 5.0—Electrical Conditions; (iii) Section 6.0—Lamp Test Procedures; and (iv) Section 7.0—Photometric Test Procedures: Section 7.5—Integrating Sphere Measurement. (4) ANSI/IES LM-9-20 (“IES LM-9-20”), Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Fluorescent Lamps, (5) IESNA LM-16-1993 (“IESNA LM-16”), IESNA Practical Guide to Colorimetry of Light Sources, December 1993, IBR approved for § 430.2. (6) IES LM-20-13, IES Approved Method for Photometry of Reflector Type Lamps, approved February 4, 2013; IBR approved for appendix DD to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 4.0—Ambient and Physical Conditions; (ii) Section 5.0—Electrical and Photometric Test Conditions; (iii) Section 6.0—Lamp Test Procedures; and (iv) Section 8.0—Total Flux Measurements by Integrating Sphere Method. (7) ANSI/IES LM-20-20 (“IES LM-20-20”), Approved Method: Photometry of Reflector Type Lamps, (8) IES LM-45-15, IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurement of General Service Incandescent Filament Lamps, approved August 8, 2015; IBR approved for appendix DD to subpart B as follows: (i) Section 4.0—Ambient and Physical Conditions; (ii) Section 5.0—Electrical Conditions; (iii) Section 6.0—Lamp Test Procedures; and (iv) Section 7.0—Photometric Test Procedures: Section 7.1—Total Luminous Flux Measurements with an Integrating Sphere. (9) IES LM-45-20 (“IES LM-45-20”), Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurement of General Service Incandescent Filament Lamps, (10) ANSI/IES LM-49-20 (“IES LM-49-20”), Approved Method: Life Testing of Incandescent Filament Lamps, (11) IES LM-54-12, IES Guide to Lamp Seasoning, approved October 22, 2012; IBR approved for appendix W to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 4—Physical/Environmental Test Conditions; (ii) Section 5—Electrical Test Conditions; (iii) Section 6—Test Procedure Requirements: Section 6.1—Test Preparation; and (iv) Section 6—Test Procedure Requirements, Section 6.2—Seasoning Test Procedures: Section 6.2.2.1—Discharge Lamps: Discharge Lamps except T5 fluorescent. (12) ANSI/IES LM-54-20 (“IES LM-54-20”), Approved Method: IES Guide to Lamp Seasoning, (13) ANSI/IES LM-58-20 (“IES LM-58-20”), Approved Method: Spectroradiometric Measurement Methods for Light Sources; (14) IES LM-65-14, IES Approved Method for Life Testing of Single-Based Fluorescent Lamps, approved December 30, 2014; IBR approved for appendix W to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 4.0—Ambient and Physical Conditions; (ii) Section 5.0—Electrical Conditions; and (iii) Section 6.0—Lamp Test Procedures (15) IES LM-66-14, (“IES LM-66”), IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Single-Based Fluorescent Lamps, approved December 30, 2014; IBR approved for appendix W to subpart B, as follows: (i) Section 4.0—Ambient and Physical Conditions; (ii) Section 5.0—Power Source Characteristics; and (iii) Section 6.0—Testing Procedures Requirements. (16) ANSI/IES LM-75-19 (“IES LM-75-19”), Approved Method: Guide to Goniophotometer Measurements and Types, and Photometric Coordinate Systems, ANSI-approved November 22, 2019; IBR approved for appendix V to subpart B. (17) IESNA LM-78-07, IESNA Approved Method for Total Luminous Flux Measurement of Lamps Using an Integrating Sphere Photometer, approved January 28, 2007; IBR approved for appendix W to subpart B. (18) ANSI/IES LM-78-20 (“IES LM-78-20”) Approved Method: Total Luminous Flux Measurement of Lamps Using an Integrating Sphere Photometer, (19) IES LM-79-08, (“IES LM-79-08”), IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products, approved December 31, 2007; IBR approved for appendix BB to subpart B. (20) IES LM-79-08 (“IES LM-79-08-DD”), Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products, approved December 31, 2007; IBR approved for appendix DD to subpart B as follows: (i) Section 1.0 Introduction: Section 1.3—Nomenclature and Definitions (except section 1.3f); (ii) Section 2.0—Ambient Conditions; (iii) Section 3.0—Power Supply Characteristics; (iv) Section 5.0—Stabilization of SSL Product; (v) Section 7.0—Electrical Settings; (vi) Section 8.0—Electrical Instrumentation; (vii) Section 9.0—Test Methods for Total Luminous Flux measurement: Section 9.1 Integrating sphere with a spectroradiometer (Sphere-spectroradiometer system); and Section 9.2—Integrating sphere with a photometer head (Sphere-photometer system). (21) ANSI/IES LM-79-19 (“IES LM-79-19”), Approved Method: Optical and Electrical Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products, ANSI-approved May 14, 2019; IBR approved for appendix V to subpart B. (22) IES LM-84-14, (“IES LM-84”), Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED Lamps, Light Engines, and Luminaires, approved March 31, 2014; IBR approved for appendix BB to subpart B. (23) ANSI/IES RP-16-10 (“ANSI/IES RP-16”), Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering, approved October 15, 2005; IBR approved for § 430.2. (24) IES TM-28-14, (“IES TM-28”), Projecting Long-Term Luminous Flux Maintenance of LED Lamps and Luminaires, approved May 20, 2014; IBR approved for appendix BB to subpart B. (s) International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Suite 808, Arlington, Virginia 22209, (703) 525-1695, www.safetyequipment.org. (1) ANSI/ISEA Z358.1-2014 (“ISEA Z358.1”), American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment, ANSI-approved January 8, 2015, IBR approved for § 430.2. (2) [Reserved] (t) U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy. https://www.energystar.gov. (1) ITU-R BT.470-6, Conventional Television Systems, published November 1998; IBR approved for § 430.2. (2) [Reserved] (3) International Efficiency Marking Protocol for External Power Supplies, Version 3.0, September 2013, IBR approved for § 430.32. (u) NSF International. https://www.nsf.org. (1) NSF/ANSI 51-2007 (“NSF/ANSI 51”), Food equipment materials, revised and adopted April 2007, IBR approved for §§ 430.2 and 430.32. (2) [Reserved] (v) Optical Society of America. Optical Society of America, https://www.opticsinfobase.org; (1) “Computation of Correlated Color Temperature and Distribution Temperature,” A.R. Robertson, Journal of the Optical Society of America, Volume 58, Number 11, November 1968, pages 1528-1535, IBR approved for § 430.2. (2) [Reserved] (w) PHTA. www.phta.org (1) ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019, American National Standard for Portable Electric Spa Energy Efficiency, ANSI-approved November 19, 2019; IBR approved for appendix GG to subpart B of this part. (2) [Reserved] (x) SMPTE. https://standards.smpte.org. (1) SMPTE 170M-2004, (“SMPTE 170M-2004”), SMPTE Standard for Television—Composite Analog Video Signal—NTSC for Studio Applications, (2) [Reserved] (y) UL. www.UL.com (1) UL 729 (“UL 729-2016”), Standard for Safety for Oil-Fired Floor Furnaces, Sixth Edition, dated August 29, 2003, including revisions through November 22, 2016; IBR approved for appendix O to subpart B. (2) UL 730 (“UL 730-2016”), Standard for Safety for Oil-Fired Wall Furnaces, Fifth Edition, dated August 29, 2003, including revisions through November 22, 2016; IBR approved for appendix O to subpart B. (3) UL 896 (“UL 896-2016”), Standard for Safety for Oil-Burning Stoves, Fifth Edition, dated July 29, 1993; including revisions through November 22, 2016, IBR approved for appendix O to subpart B. (4) UL 1598C (“UL 1598C-2016”), Standard for Safety for Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Retrofit Luminaire Conversion Kits, [74 FR 12066, Mar. 23, 2009] Editorial Note: For Federal Register www.govinfo.gov. § 430.4 Sources for information and guidance. (a) General. (b) IESNA. http://www.iesna.org. (1) Illuminating Engineering Society of North America Lighting Handbook, (2) [Reserved] (c) IEEE. http://www.ieee.org. (1) IEEE 1515-2000, IEEE Recommended Practice for Electronic Power Subsystems: Parameter Definitions, Test Conditions, and Test Methods, March 30, 2000. (2) IEEE 100, Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms, 7th Edition, January 1, 2006. (d) IEC. http://www.iec.ch. (1) IEC 62301, Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power, First Edition, June 13, 2005. (2) IEC 60050, International Electrotechnical Vocabulary. (e) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program, Standards Services Division, NIST, 100 Bureau Drive, Stop 2140, Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2140, 301-975-4016, or go to http://ts.nist.gov/standards/accreditation. (1) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program Handbook 150-01, Energy Efficient Lighting Products, Lamps and Luminaires, August 1993. (2) [Reserved] [74 FR 12066, Mar. 23, 2009] § 430.5 Error correction procedures for energy conservation standards rules. (a) Scope and purpose. (b) Definitions. Act Error (i) A typographical mistake that causes the regulatory text to differ from how the preamble to the rule describes the rule; (ii) A calculation mistake that causes the numerical value of an energy conservation standard to differ from what technical support documents would justify; or (iii) A numbering mistake that causes a cross-reference to lead to the wrong text. Rule Secretary (c) Posting of rules. (2) If a rule is made available for review, the Secretary ordinarily will keep the document posted for a period of 45 calendar days, but the Secretary in his or her discretion (while remaining consistent with his or her statutory obligations under EPCA and other legal obligations when promulgating an energy conservation standard) may shorten or lengthen the time period during which the rule document is posted. (3) Any rule document posted pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall bear the following disclaimer: Notice: Federal Register. (d) Request for error-correction review. (2)(i) A request under this section must identify a potential Error with particularity. The request must specify the regulatory text claimed to be erroneous. The request must also provide text that the requester contends would be a correct substitute. If a requester is unable to identify a correct substitute, the requester may submit a request that states that the requester is unable to determine what text would be correct and explains why the requester is unable to do so. The request must also substantiate the claimed Error by citing evidence from the existing record of the rulemaking, demonstrating that the regulatory text of the rule is inconsistent with what the Secretary intended the text to be. (ii) A person's disagreement with any policy choices or discretionary decisions that are contained in the rule will not constitute a valid basis for a request under this section. All policy and discretionary decisions with regard to whether to establish or amend any conservation standard and, if so, the appropriate level at which to amend or establish that standard, remain within the sole discretion of the Secretary without regard to the procedures established in this section. (3) The evidence to substantiate a request (or evidence of the Error itself) must be in the record of the rulemaking at the time of posting the rule, which may include an accompanying preamble. The Secretary will not consider new evidence submitted in connection with an error-correction request. (4) A request under this section must be filed in electronic format by email to the address that the disclaimer to the rule designates for error-correction requests. Should filing by email not be feasible, the requester should contact the program point of contact designated in the rule order to ascertain an appropriate alternative means of filing an error-correction request. (5) A request that does not comply with the requirements of this section will not be considered. (e) Correction of rules. (f) Publication in the Federal Register. (2) If the Secretary receives no properly filed requests after posting a rule and identifies no Errors on the Secretary's own initiative, the Secretary will submit the rule, as it was posted pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, to the Office of the Federal Register for publication. This will occur after the period prescribed pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) of this section has elapsed. (3) If the Secretary receives a properly filed request after posting a rule pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section and determines that a correction is necessary, or discovers an Error on the Secretary's own initiative, the Secretary will, absent extenuating circumstances, submit a corrected rule for publication in the Federal Register (4) Consistent with the Act, compliance with an energy conservation standard will be required upon the specified compliance date as published in the relevant rule in the Federal Register (5) Consistent with the Administrative Procedure Act, and other applicable law, the Secretary will ordinarily designate an effective date for a rule under this section that is no less than 30 days after the publication of the rule in the Federal Register (6) When the Secretary submits a rule for publication, the Secretary will make publicly available a written statement indicating how any properly filed requests for correction were handled. (g) Alteration of standards. Federal Register, (h) Judicial review. Federal Register [81 FR 57757, Aug. 24, 2016], as amended at 89 FR 22924, Apr. 3, 2024 Subpart B—Test Procedures § 430.21 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains test procedures required to be prescribed by DOE pursuant to section 323 of the Act. § 430.23 Test procedures for the measurement of energy and water consumption. When the test procedures of this section call for rounding off of test results, and the results fall equally between two values of the nearest dollar, kilowatt-hour, or other specified nearest value, the result shall be rounded up to the nearest higher value. (a) Refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers. (i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year; (ii) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix A of this subpart; and (iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. (2) The estimated annual operating cost for models with an anti-sweat heater switch shall be the product of the following three factors, with the resulting product then being rounded to the nearest dollar per year: (i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year; (ii) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix A of this subpart; and (iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. (3) The estimated annual operating cost for any other specified cycle type shall be the product of the following three factors, the resulting product then being rounded to the nearest dollar per year: (i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year; (ii) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the specified cycle type, determined according to appendix A of this subpart; and (iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. (4) The energy factor, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle, shall be: (i) For models without an anti-sweat heater switch, the quotient of: (A) The adjusted total volume in cubic feet, determined according to appendix A of this subpart, divided by— (B) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix A of this subpart, the resulting quotient then being rounded to the second decimal place; and (ii) For models having an anti-sweat heater switch, the quotient of: (A) The adjusted total volume in cubic feet, determined according to appendix A of this subpart, divided by— (B) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix A of this subpart, the resulting quotient then being rounded to the second decimal place. (5) The annual energy use, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and rounded to the nearest kilowatt-hour per year, shall be determined according to appendix A of this subpart. (6) Other useful measures of energy consumption shall be those measures of energy consumption that the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions which are derived from the application of appendix A of this subpart. (7) The following principles of interpretation shall be applied to the test procedure. The intent of the energy test procedure is to simulate typical room conditions (72 °F (22.2 °C)) with door openings, by testing at 90 °F (32.2 °C) without door openings. Except for operating characteristics that are affected by ambient temperature (for example, compressor percent run time), the unit, when tested under this test procedure, shall operate in a manner equivalent to the unit's operation while in typical room conditions. (i) The energy used by the unit shall be calculated when a calculation is provided by the test procedure. Energy consuming components that operate in typical room conditions (including as a result of door openings, or a function of humidity), and that are not excluded by this test procedure, shall operate in an equivalent manner during energy testing under this test procedure, or be accounted for by all calculations as provided for in the test procedure. Examples: (A) Energy saving features that are designed to operate when there are no door openings for long periods of time shall not be functional during the energy test. (B) The defrost heater shall neither function nor turn off differently during the energy test than it would when in typical room conditions. Also, the product shall not recover differently during the defrost recovery period than it would in typical room conditions. (C) Electric heaters that would normally operate at typical room conditions with door openings shall also operate during the energy test. (D) Energy used during adaptive defrost shall continue to be measured and adjusted per the calculation provided in this test procedure. (ii) DOE recognizes that there may be situations that the test procedures do not completely address. In such cases, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver in accordance with the relevant provisions of 10 CFR part 430 if: (A) A product contains energy consuming components that operate differently during the prescribed testing than they would during representative average consumer use; and (B) Applying the prescribed test to that product would evaluate it in a manner that is unrepresentative of its true energy consumption (thereby providing materially inaccurate comparative data). (b) Freezers. (i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year; (ii) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix B of this subpart; and (iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. (2) The estimated annual operating cost for freezers with an anti-sweat heater switch shall be the product of the following three factors, with the resulting product then being rounded to the nearest dollar per year: (i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year; (ii) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix B of this subpart; and (iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. (3) The estimated annual operating cost for any other specified cycle type for freezers shall be the product of the following three factors, with the resulting product then being rounded to the nearest dollar per year: (i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year; (ii) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the specified cycle type, determined according to appendix B of this subpart; and (iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. (4) The energy factor, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle, shall be: (i) For models without an anti-sweat heater switch, the quotient of: (A) The adjusted total volume in cubic feet, determined according to appendix B of this subpart, divided by— (B) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix B of this subpart, the resulting quotient then being rounded to the second decimal place; and (ii) For models having an anti-sweat heater switch, the quotient of: (A) The adjusted total volume in cubic feet, determined according to appendix B of this subpart, divided by— (B) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix B of this subpart, the resulting quotient then being rounded to the second decimal place. (5) The annual energy use, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and rounded to the nearest kilowatt-hour per year, shall be determined according to appendix B of this subpart. (6) Other useful measures of energy consumption for freezers shall be those measures the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and are derived from the application of appendix B of this subpart. (7) The following principles of interpretation shall be applied to the test procedure. The intent of the energy test procedure is to simulate typical room conditions (72 °F (22.2 °C)) with door openings by testing at 90 °F (32.2 °C) without door openings. Except for operating characteristics that are affected by ambient temperature (for example, compressor percent run time), the unit, when tested under this test procedure, shall operate in a manner equivalent to the unit's operation while in typical room conditions. (i) The energy used by the unit shall be calculated when a calculation is provided by the test procedure. Energy consuming components that operate in typical room conditions (including as a result of door openings, or a function of humidity), and that are not excluded by this test procedure, shall operate in an equivalent manner during energy testing under this test procedure, or be accounted for by all calculations as provided for in the test procedure. Examples: (A) Energy saving features that are designed to operate when there are no door openings for long periods of time shall not be functional during the energy test. (B) The defrost heater shall neither function nor turn off differently during the energy test than it would when in typical room conditions. Also, the product shall not recover differently during the defrost recovery period than it would in typical room conditions. (C) Electric heaters that would normally operate at typical room conditions with door openings shall also operate during the energy test. (D) Energy used during adaptive defrost shall continue to be measured and adjusted per the calculation provided for in this test procedure. (ii) DOE recognizes that there may be situations that the test procedures do not completely address. In such cases, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver in accordance with the relevant provisions of this part if: (A) A product contains energy consuming components that operate differently during the prescribed testing than they would during representative average consumer use; and (B) Applying the prescribed test to that product would evaluate it in a manner that is unrepresentative of its true energy consumption (thereby providing materially inaccurate comparative data). (c) Dishwashers. (i) When cold water (50 °F) is used, EAOC = (D e TLP e WS DO CO F D Where, D e E TLP N = the representative average dishwasher use of 215 cycles per year when EAOC is determined pursuant to appendix C1 to this subpart, and 184 cycles per year when EAOC is determined pursuant to appendix C2 to this subpart, M = the machine energy consumption per cycle, in kilowatt-hours and determined according to section 5 of appendix C1 or appendix C2 to this subpart, as applicable, M WS M DO M CO E F E D (ii) When electrically heated water (120 °F or 140 °F) is used, EAOC = (D e TLP WS DO CO F WS DO CO Where, D e TLP WS DO CO F D W = the water energy consumption per cycle, in kilowatt-hours and determined according to section 5 of appendix C1 or appendix C2 to this subpart, as applicable, W WS W DO W CO (iii) When gas-heated or oil-heated water is used, EAOC g e TLP e WS DO CO g g WSg DOg COg Where, D e TLP WS DO CO F D D g W g W WSg W DOg W COg (2) The estimated annual energy use, EAEU, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year must be rounded to the nearest kilowatt-hour per year and is defined as follows: EAEU = (M + M WS DO CO F D WS DO CO TLP Where, M, M WS DO CO F D TLP WS DO CO (3) The sum of the water consumption, V, the water consumption during water softener regeneration, V WS DO CO (4) Other useful measures of energy consumption for dishwashers are those which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix C1 to this subpart or appendix C2 to this subpart, as applicable. (d) Clothes dryers. (2) The estimated annual operating cost for clothes dryers shall be— (i) For an electric clothes dryer, the product of the following three factors, with the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year: (A) The annual representative average number of clothes dryer cycles as specified in appendix D1 or appendix D2 to this subpart, as appropriate; (B) The per-cycle combined total energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to section 4.6 of appendix D1 or section 4.6 of appendix D2 to this subpart, as appropriate; and (C) The representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary; and (ii) For a gas clothes dryer, the product of the annual representative average number of clothes dryer cycles as specified in appendix D1 or D2 to this subpart, as appropriate, times the sum of the following three factors, with the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year: (A) The product of the per-cycle gas dryer electric energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to section 4.2 of appendix D1 or section 4.2 of appendix D2 to this subpart, as appropriate, times the representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary; plus, (B) The product of the per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption, in Btus per cycle, determined according to section 4.3 of appendix D1 or section 4.3 of appendix D2 to this subpart, as appropriate, times the representative average unit cost for natural gas or propane, as appropriate, in dollars per Btu as provided by the Secretary; plus, (C) The product of the per-cycle standby mode and off mode energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to section 4.5 of appendix D1 or section 4.5 of appendix D2 to this subpart, as appropriate, times the representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. (3) The combined energy factor, expressed in pounds per kilowatt-hour is determined in accordance with section 4.7 of appendix D1 or section 4.7 of appendix D2 to this subpart, as appropriate, the result then being rounded off to the nearest hundredth (0.01). (4) Other useful measures of energy consumption for clothes dryers shall be those measures of energy consumption for clothes dryers which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix D1 or D2 to this subpart, as appropriate. (e) Water heaters. (i) For a gas-fired or oil-fired water heater, the sum of: (A) The product of the annual gas or oil energy consumption, determined according to section 6.3.11 or 6.4.7 of appendix E to this subpart, times the representative average unit cost of gas or oil, as appropriate, in dollars per Btu as provided by the Secretary; plus (B) The product of the annual electric energy consumption, determined according to section 6.3.10 or 6.4.6 of appendix E to this subpart, times the representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. Round the resulting sum to the nearest dollar per year. (ii) For an electric water heater, the product of the annual energy consumption, determined according to section 6.3.10 or 6.4.6 of appendix E to this subpart, times the representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. Round the resulting product to the nearest dollar per year. (2) For an individual unit, the uniform energy factor is rounded to the nearest 0.01 and determined in accordance with section 6.3.8 or section 6.4.4 of appendix E to this subpart. (f) Room air conditioners. (i) For a single-speed room air conditioner, determine the cooling capacity in accordance with section 4.1.2 of appendix F of this subpart. (ii) For a variable-speed room air conditioner, determine the cooling capacity in accordance with section 4.1.2 of appendix F of this subpart for test condition 1 in Table 1 of appendix F of this subpart. (2) Determine electrical power input, expressed in watts (W) as follows: (i) For a single-speed room air conditioner, determine the electrical power input in accordance with section 4.1.2 of appendix F of this subpart. (ii) For a variable-speed room air conditioner, determine the electrical power input in accordance with section 4.1.2 of appendix F of this subpart, for test condition 1 in Table 1 of appendix F of this subpart. (3) Determine the combined energy efficiency ratio (CEER), expressed in British thermal units per watt-hour (Btu/Wh) and as follows: (i) For a single-speed room air conditioner, determine the CEER in accordance with section 5.2.2 of appendix F of this subpart. (ii) For a variable-speed room air conditioner, determine the CEER in accordance with section 5.3.11 of appendix F of this subpart. (4) Determine the estimated annual operating cost for a room air conditioner, expressed in dollars per year, by multiplying the following two factors and rounding as directed: (i) For single-speed room air conditioners, the sum of AEC cool ia/om wt ia/om (ii) A representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. Round the resulting product to the nearest dollar per year. (g) Unvented home heating equipment. (i) The average annual electric energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per year, determined according to section 3.1 of appendix G of this subpart and (ii) the representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year. (2) The estimated regional annual operating cost for primary electric heaters, shall be the product of: (i) The regional annual electric energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per year for primary heaters determined according to section 3.2 of appendix G of this subpart and (ii) the representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year. (3) The estimated operating cost per million Btu output shall be— (i) For primary and supplementary electric heaters and unvented gas and oil heaters without an auxiliary electric system, the product of: (A) One million; and (B) The representative unit cost in dollars per Btu for natural gas, propane, or oil, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act as appropriate, or the quotient of the representative unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hour, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act, divided by 3,412 Btu per kilowatt hour, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest 0.01 dollar per million Btu output; and (ii) For unvented gas and oil heaters with an auxiliary electric system, the product of: (A) The quotient of one million divided by the rated output in Btu's per hour as determined in 3.4 of appendix G of this subpart; and (B) the sum of: ( 1 2 (4) The rated output for unvented heaters is the rated output as determined according to either sections 3.3 or 3.4 of appendix G of this subpart, as appropriate, with the result being rounded to the nearest 100 Btu per hour. (5) Other useful measures of energy consumption for unvented home heating equipment shall be those measures of energy consumption for unvented home heating equipment which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix G of this subpart. (h) Television sets. (i) Cooking products. (2)(i) Determine the integrated annual energy consumption of a conventional electric cooking top, including any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product, according to section 4.3.1 of appendix I1 to this subpart. Round the result to the nearest 1 kilowatt-hour (kWh) per year. (ii) Determine the integrated annual energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, including any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product, according to section 4.3.2 of appendix I1 to this subpart. Round the result to the nearest 1 kilo-British thermal unit (kBtu) per year. (3) Determine the total annual gas energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, including any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product, according to section 4.1.2.2.1 of appendix I1 to this subpart. Round the result to the nearest 1 kBtu per year. (4)(i) Determine the total annual electrical energy consumption of a conventional electric cooking top, including any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product, as the integrated annual energy consumption of the conventional electric cooking top, as determined in paragraph (i)(2)(i) of this section. (ii) Determine the total annual electrical energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, including any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product, as follows, rounded to the nearest 1 kWh per year: E TGE AGE TLP Where: E AGE TLP (5) Determine the estimated annual operating cost corresponding to the energy consumption of a conventional cooking top, including any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product, as follows, rounded to the nearest dollar per year: (E TGE KWH TGG KBTU Where: E TGE C KWH E TGG C KBTU (6) Other useful measures of energy consumption for conventional cooking tops shall be the measures of energy consumption that the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and that are derived from the application of appendix I1 to this subpart. (j) Clothes washers. (i) When using appendix J (see the note at the beginning of appendix J), (A) When electrically heated water is used, (N × (ME T T TLP KWH Where: N = the representative average residential clothes washer use of 234 cycles per year according to appendix J, ME T HE T E TLP C KWH (B) When gas-heated or oil-heated water is used, (N × (((ME T TLP KWH TG BTU Where: N, ME T TLP KWH HE TG C BTU (ii) When using appendix J2 (see the note at the beginning of appendix J2), (A) When electrically heated water is used (N 2 TE2 TLP2 KWH Where: N 2 E TE2 E TLP2 C KWH (B) When gas-heated or oil-heated water is used, (N 2 T2 TLP2 KWH TG2 BTU Where: N 2, TLP2 KWH ME T2 HE TG2 C BTU (2)(i) The integrated modified energy factor for automatic and semi-automatic clothes washers is determined according to section 4.6 of appendix J2 (when using appendix J2). The result shall be rounded off to the nearest 0.01 cubic foot per kilowatt-hour per cycle. (ii) The energy efficiency ratio for automatic and semi-automatic clothes washers is determined according to section 4.9 of appendix J (when using appendix J). The result shall be rounded to the nearest 0.01 pound per kilowatt-hour per cycle. (3) The annual water consumption of a clothes washer must be determined as: (i) When using appendix J, the product of the representative average-use of 234 cycles per year and the total weighted per-cycle water consumption in gallons per cycle determined according to section 4.2.4 of appendix J. (ii) When using appendix J2, the product of the representative average-use of 295 cycles per year and the total weighted per-cycle water consumption for all wash cycles, in gallons per cycle, determined according to section 4.2.11 of appendix J2. (4)(i) The integrated water factor must be determined according to section 4.2.12 of appendix J2, with the result rounded to the nearest 0.1 gallons per cycle per cubic foot. (ii) The water efficiency ratio for automatic and semi-automatic clothes washers is determined according to section 4.7 of appendix J (when using appendix J). The result shall be rounded to the nearest 0.01 pound per gallon per cycle. (5) Other useful measures of energy consumption for automatic or semi-automatic clothes washers shall be those measures of energy consumption that the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and that are derived from the application of appendix J or appendix J2, as appropriate. (k)-(l) [Reserved] (m) Central air conditioners and heat pumps. (1) Determine cooling capacity from the steady-state wet-coil test (A or A full (i) To the nearest 50 Btu/h if cooling capacity is less than 20,000 Btu/h; (ii) To the nearest 100 Btu/h if cooling capacity is greater than or equal to 20,000 Btu/h but less than 38,000 Btu/h; and (iii) To the nearest 250 Btu/h if cooling capacity is greater than or equal to 38,000 Btu/h and less than 65,000 Btu/h. (2) Determine seasonal energy efficiency ratio 2 (SEER2) as described in sections 2 and 5 of appendix M1 to this subpart or seasonal cooling and off-mode rating efficiency (SCORE) as described in sections 2 and 4 of appendix M2 to this subpart, and round off to the nearest 0.025 Btu/W-h. (3) Determine energy efficiency ratio 2 (EER2) as described in section 2 of appendix M1 or energy efficiency ratio (EER) as described in section 2 of appendix M2 to this subpart and round off to the nearest 0.025 Btu/W-h. EER2 (for appendix M1 to this subpart) or EER (for appendix M2 to this subpart) is the efficiency from the A or A full (4) Determine heating seasonal performance factor 2 (HSPF2) as described in sections 2 and 5 of appendix M1 to this subpart or seasonal heating and off-mode rating efficiency (SHORE) as described in sections 2 and 4 of appendix M2 to this subpart, and round off to the nearest 0.025 Btu/W-h. (5) Determine P W,OFF, (6) Determine all other measures of energy efficiency or consumption or other useful measures of performance using appendix M1 or M2 of this subpart. (n) Furnaces. (i) The product of the average annual fuel energy consumption, in Btu's per year for gas or oil furnaces or in kilowatt-hours per year for electric furnaces, determined according to section 10.2.2 or 10.3 of appendix N of this subpart, respectively, (for furnaces, excluding low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers) or section 10.2.2 or 10.3 of appendix EE of this subpart, respectively (for low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers), and the representative average unit cost in dollars per Btu for gas or oil, or dollars per kilowatt-hour for electric, as appropriate, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act; plus (ii) The product of the average annual auxiliary electric energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per year determined according to section 10.2.3 of appendix N of this subpart (for furnaces, excluding low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers) or section 10.2.3 of appendix EE of this subpart (for low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers) of this subpart, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act. (iii) Round the resulting sum to the nearest dollar per year. (2) The annual fuel utilization efficiency (AFUE) for furnaces, expressed in percent, is the ratio of the annual fuel output of useful energy delivered to the heated space to the annual fuel energy input to the furnace. (i) For gas and oil furnaces, determine AFUE according to section 10.1 of appendix N (for furnaces, excluding low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers) or section 10.1 of appendix EE (for low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers) of this subpart, as applicable. (ii) For electric furnaces, excluding electric boilers, determine AFUE in accordance with section 11.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993 (incorporated by reference, see see (iii) Round the AFUE to one-tenth of a percentage point. (3) The estimated regional annual operating cost for furnaces is calculated as follows: (i) When using appendix N of this subpart for furnaces excluding low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers (see the note at the beginning of appendix N of this subpart), (A) For gas or oil-fueled furnaces, ( E FR C BTU E AER C KWH Where: E FR C BTU E AER C KWH (B) For electric furnaces, ( E ER C KWH Where: E ER C KWH (ii) When using appendix EE of this subpart for low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers (see the note at the beginning of appendix EE of this subpart), (A) For gas or oil-fueled boilers, ( E ER C BTU E AER C KWH Where: E FR C BTU KWH E AER (B) For electric boilers, ( E ER C KWH Where: E ER C KWH (iii) Round the estimated regional annual operating cost to the nearest dollar per year. (4) The energy factor for furnaces, expressed in percent, is the ratio of annual fuel output of useful energy delivered to the heated space to the total annual energy input to the furnace determined according to either section 10.6 of appendix N of this subpart (for furnaces, excluding low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers) or section 10.4 of appendix EE of this subpart (for low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers), as applicable. (5) The average standby mode and off mode electrical power consumption for furnaces shall be determined according to section 8.10 of appendix N of this subpart (for furnaces, excluding low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers) or section 8.9 of appendix EE of this subpart (for low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers), as applicable. Round the average standby mode and off mode electrical power consumption to the nearest tenth of a watt. (6) Other useful measures of energy consumption for furnaces shall be those measures of energy consumption which the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions and which are derived from the application of appendix N of this subpart (for furnaces, excluding low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers) or appendix EE of this subpart (for low pressure steam or hot water boilers and electric boilers). (o) Vented home heating equipment. (2) When estimating the annual operating cost for vented home heating equipment, calculate the sum of: (i) The product of the average annual fuel energy consumption, in Btus per year for natural gas, propane, or oil fueled vented home heating equipment, determined according to section 4.6.2 of appendix O of this subpart, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per Btu for natural gas, propane, or oil, as appropriate, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act; plus (ii) The product of the average annual auxiliary electric energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per year determined according to section 4.6.3 of appendix O of this subpart, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hours as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act. Round the resulting sum to the nearest dollar per year. (3) When estimating the operating cost per million Btu output for gas or oil vented home heating equipment with an auxiliary electric system, calculate the product of: (i) The quotient of one million Btu divided by the sum of: (A) The product of the maximum fuel input in Btus per hour as determined in sections 3.1.1 or 3.1.2 of appendix O of this subpart times the annual fuel utilization efficiency in percent as determined in sections 4.1.17, 4.2.6, or 4.3.7 of this appendix (as appropriate) divided by 100, plus (B) The product of the maximum electric power in watts as determined in section 3.1.3 of appendix O of this subpart times the quantity 3.412; and (ii) The sum of: (A) the product of the maximum fuel input in Btus per hour as determined in sections 3.1.1 or 3.1.2 of this appendix times the representative unit cost in dollars per Btu for natural gas, propane, or oil, as appropriate, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act; plus (B) the product of the maximum auxiliary electric power in kilowatts as determined in section 3.1.3 of appendix O of this subpart times the representative unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act. Round the resulting quantity to the nearest 0.01 dollar per million Btu output. (p) Pool heaters. t (2) Determine the integrated thermal efficiency (TE I (3) When estimating the annual operating cost of pool heaters, calculate the sum of: (i) The product of the average annual fossil fuel energy consumption, in Btus per year, determined according to section 5.2 of appendix P to this subpart, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per Btu for natural gas or oil, as appropriate, as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act; plus (ii) The product of the average annual electrical energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per year determined according to section 5.3 of appendix P to this subpart and converted to kilowatt-hours using a conversion factor of 3412 Btus = 1 kilowatt-hour, and the representative average unit cost in dollars per kilowatt-hours as provided pursuant to section 323(b)(2) of the Act. Round the resulting sum to the nearest dollar per year. (q) Fluorescent lamp ballasts. (2) Calculate power factor using appendix Q to this subpart. (r) General service fluorescent lamps, general service incandescent lamps, and incandescent reflector lamps. (s) Faucets. (t) Showerheads. (u) Water closets. (v) Urinals. (w) Ceiling fans. (x) Ceiling fan light kits. (1) For each ceiling fan light kit that requires compliance with the January 21, 2020 energy conservation standards: (i) For a ceiling fan light kit packaged with compact fluorescent lamps, measure lamp efficacy, lumen maintenance at 1,000 hours, lumen maintenance at 40 percent of lifetime, rapid cycle stress test, and time to failure in accordance with paragraph (y) of this section for each lamp basic model. (ii) For a ceiling fan light kit packaged with general service fluorescent lamps, measure lamp efficacy in accordance with paragraph (r) of this section for each lamp basic model. (iii) For a ceiling fan light kit packaged with incandescent lamps, measure lamp efficacy in accordance with paragraph (r) of this section for each lamp basic model. (iv) For a ceiling fan light kit packaged with integrated LED lamps, measure lamp efficacy in accordance with paragraph (ee) of this section for each lamp basic model. (v) For a ceiling fan light kit packaged with other fluorescent lamps (not compact fluorescent lamps or general service fluorescent lamps), packaged with consumer-replaceable SSL (not integrated LED lamps), packaged with non-consumer-replaceable SSL, or packaged with other SSL lamps that have an ANSI standard base (not integrated LED lamps), measure efficacy in accordance with section 3 of appendix V of this subpart for each lamp basic model, consumer-replaceable SSL basic model, or non-consumer-replaceable SSL basic model. (2) [Reserved] (y) Compact fluorescent lamps. (2) Conduct the rapid cycle stress test in accordance with section 3.3 of appendix W of this subpart. (z) Dehumidifiers. (2) Determine the integrated energy factor, expressed in L/kWh, according to section 5.4 of appendix X1 to this subpart. (3) Determine the case volume, expressed in cubic feet, for whole-home dehumidifiers in accordance with section 5.7 of appendix X1 of this subpart. (aa) Battery Chargers. (i) Measure the maintenance mode power, standby power, off mode power, battery discharge energy, 24-hour energy consumption and measured duration of the charge and maintenance mode test for a battery charger other than uninterruptible power supplies in accordance with appendix Y to this subpart; (ii) Calculate the unit energy consumption of a battery charger other than uninterruptible power supplies in accordance with appendix Y to this subpart; (iii) Calculate the average load adjusted efficiency of an uninterruptible power supply in accordance with appendix Y to this subpart. (2) For a battery charger subject to compliance with any amended relevant standard provided in § 430.32 that is published after September 8, 2022: (i) Measure active mode energy, maintenance mode power, no-battery mode power, off mode power and battery discharge energy for a battery charger other than uninterruptible power supplies in accordance with appendix Y1 to this subpart. (ii) Calculate the standby power of a battery charger other than uninterruptible power supplies in accordance with appendix Y1, to this subpart. (iii) Calculate the average load adjusted efficiency of an uninterruptible power supply in accordance with appendix Y1 to this subpart. (bb) External Power Supplies. (cc) Furnace Fans. (dd) Portable air conditioners. (1) When using appendix CC to this subpart, measure the seasonally adjusted cooling capacity (“SACC”) in British thermal units per hour (Btu/h), and the combined energy efficiency ratio, in British thermal units per watt-hour (Btu/Wh) in accordance with sections 5.2 and 5.4 of appendix CC to this subpart, respectively. When using appendix CC1 to this subpart, measure the SACC in Btu/h, and the combined energy efficiency ratio, in Btu/Wh in accordance with sections 5.2 and 5.4, respectively, of appendix CC1 to this subpart. (2) When using appendix CC to this subpart, determine the estimated annual operating cost for portable air conditioners, in dollars per year and rounded to the nearest whole number, by multiplying a representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary by the total annual energy consumption (“AEC”), determined as follows: (i) For dual-duct single-speed portable air conditioners, the sum of AEC DD_95 DD_83 T (ii) For single-duct single-speed portable air conditioners, the sum of AEC SD T (iii) For dual-duct variable-speed portable air conditioners the overall sum of (A) The sum of AEC DD_95_Full ia/om (B) The sum of AEC DD_83_Low ia/om (iv) For single-duct variable-speed portable air conditioners, the overall sum of (A) The sum of AEC SD_Full ia/om (B) The sum of AEC SD_Low ia/om (3) When using appendix CC1 to this subpart, determine the estimated annual operating cost for portable air conditioners, in dollars per year and rounded to the nearest whole number, by multiplying a representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary by the total AEC. The total AEC is the sum of AEC 95 83 oc ia (ee) Integrated light-emitting diode lamp. (2) The lumen output of an integrated light-emitting diode lamp must be measured in accordance with section 3 of appendix BB of this subpart. (3) The lamp efficacy of an integrated light-emitting diode lamp must be calculated in accordance with section 3 of appendix BB of this subpart. (4) The correlated color temperature of an integrated light-emitting diode lamp must be measured in accordance with section 3 of appendix BB of this subpart. (5) The color rendering index of an integrated light-emitting diode lamp must be measured in accordance with section 3 of appendix BB of this subpart. (6) The power factor of an integrated light-emitting diode lamp must be measured in accordance with section 3 of appendix BB of this subpart. (7) The time to failure of an integrated light-emitting diode lamp must be measured in accordance with section 4 of appendix BB of this subpart. (8) The standby mode power must be measured in accordance with section 5 of appendix BB of this subpart. (ff) Coolers and combination cooler refrigeration products. (i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year; (ii) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix A of this subpart; and (iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. (2) The estimated annual operating cost for models with an anti-sweat heater switch shall be the product of the following three factors, with the resulting product then being rounded to the nearest dollar per year: (i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year; (ii) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix A of this subpart; and (iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. (3) The estimated annual operating cost for any other specified cycle type shall be the product of the following three factors, with the resulting product then being rounded to the nearest dollar per year: (i) The representative average-use cycle of 365 cycles per year; (ii) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the specified cycle type, determined according to appendix A of this subpart; and (iii) The representative average unit cost of electricity in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary. (4) The energy factor, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle, shall be: (i) For models without an anti-sweat heater switch, the quotient of: (A) The adjusted total volume in cubic feet, determined according to appendix A of this subpart, divided by— (B) The average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix A of this subpart, the resulting quotient then being rounded to the second decimal place; and (ii) For models having an anti-sweat heater switch, the quotient of: (A) The adjusted total volume in cubic feet, determined according to appendix A of this subpart, divided by— (B) Half the sum of the average per-cycle energy consumption for the standard cycle and the average per-cycle energy consumption for a test cycle type with the anti-sweat heater switch in the position set at the factory just before shipping, each in kilowatt-hours per cycle, determined according to appendix A of this subpart, the resulting quotient then being rounded to the second decimal place. (5) The annual energy use, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and rounded to the nearest kilowatt-hour per year, shall be determined according to appendix A of this subpart. (6) Other useful measures of energy consumption shall be those measures of energy consumption that the Secretary determines are likely to assist consumers in making purchasing decisions which are derived from the application of appendix A of this subpart. (7) The following principles of interpretation shall be applied to the test procedure. The intent of the energy test procedure is to simulate operation in typical room conditions (72 °F (22.2 °C)) with door openings by testing at 90 °F (32.2 °C) ambient temperature without door openings. Except for operating characteristics that are affected by ambient temperature (for example, compressor percent run time), the unit, when tested under this test procedure, shall operate in a manner equivalent to the unit's operation while in typical room conditions. (i) The energy used by the unit shall be calculated when a calculation is provided by the test procedure. Energy consuming components that operate in typical room conditions (including as a result of door openings, or a function of humidity), and that are not excluded by this test procedure, shall operate in an equivalent manner during energy testing under this test procedure, or be accounted for by all calculations as provided for in the test procedure. Examples: (A) Energy saving features that are designed to operate when there are no door openings for long periods of time shall not be functional during the energy test. (B) The defrost heater shall neither function nor turn off differently during the energy test than it would when in typical room conditions. Also, the product shall not recover differently during the defrost recovery period than it would in typical room conditions. (C) Electric heaters that would normally operate at typical room conditions with door openings shall also operate during the energy test. (D) Energy used during adaptive defrost shall continue to be measured and adjusted per the calculation provided for in this test procedure. (ii) DOE recognizes that there may be situations that the test procedures do not completely address. In such cases, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver in accordance with the relevant provisions of this part if: (A) A product contains energy consuming components that operate differently during the prescribed testing than they would during representative average consumer use; and (B) Applying the prescribed test to that product would evaluate it in a manner that is unrepresentative of its true energy consumption (thereby providing materially inaccurate comparative data). (8) For non-compressor models, “compressor” and “compressor cycles” as used in appendix A of this subpart shall be interpreted to mean “refrigeration system” and “refrigeration system cycles,” respectively. (gg) General Service Lamps. (2) For compact fluorescent lamps, use paragraph (y) of this section. (3) For integrated LED lamps, use paragraph (ee) of this section. (4) For other incandescent lamps, measure initial light output, input power, lamp efficacy, power factor, and standby mode power in accordance with appendix DD of this subpart. (5) For other fluorescent lamps, measure initial light output, input power, lamp efficacy, power factor, and standby mode power in accordance with appendix DD of this subpart. (6) For OLED and non-integrated LED lamps, measure initial light output, input power, lamp efficacy, power factor, and standby mode power in accordance with appendix DD of this subpart. (hh) Air cleaners. (2) The PM 2.5 (3) The active mode and standby mode power consumption, expressed in watts, shall be measured in accordance with sections 5 and 6, respectively, of appendix FF of this subpart. (4) The annual energy consumption, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year, and the integrated energy factor, expressed in CADR per watts (CADR/W), for conventional room air cleaners, shall be measured in accordance with section 7 of appendix FF of this subpart. (5) The estimated annual operating cost for conventional room air cleaners, expressed in dollars per year, shall be determined by multiplying the following two factors: (i) The annual energy consumption as calculated in accordance with section 7 of appendix FF of this subpart, and (ii) A representative average unit cost of electrical energy in dollars per kilowatt-hour as provided by the Secretary, the resulting product then being rounded off to the nearest dollar per year. (ii) Portable electric spas. [42 FR 27898, June 1, 1977] Editorial Note: For Federal Register www.govinfo.gov. § 430.24 [Reserved] § 430.25 Laboratory Accreditation Program. The testing for general service fluorescent lamps, general service incandescent lamps (with the exception of lifetime testing), general service lamps (with the exception of applicable lifetime testing), incandescent reflector lamps, compact fluorescent lamps, and fluorescent lamp ballasts, and integrated light-emitting diode lamps must be conducted by test laboratories accredited by an Accreditation Body that is a signatory member to the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC) Mutual Recognition Arrangement (MRA). A manufacturer's or importer's own laboratory, if accredited, may conduct the applicable testing. [81 FR 72504, Oct. 20, 2016] § 430.27 Petitions for waiver and interim waiver. (a) General information. (1) Any interested person may submit a petition to waive for a particular basic model any requirements of § 430.23 or of any appendix to this subpart, upon the grounds that the basic model contains one or more design characteristics which either prevent testing of the basic model according to the prescribed test procedures or cause the prescribed test procedures to evaluate the basic model in a manner so unrepresentative of its true energy and/or water consumption characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data. (2) Manufacturers of basic model(s) subject to a waiver or interim waiver are responsible for complying with the other requirements of this subpart and with the requirements of 10 CFR part 429 regardless of the person that originally submitted the petition for waiver and/or interim waiver. The filing of a petition for waiver and/or interim waiver shall not constitute grounds for noncompliance with any requirements of this subpart. (3) All correspondence regarding waivers and interim waivers must be submitted to DOE either electronically to [email protected] (b) Petition content and publication. (i) Identify the particular basic model(s) for which a waiver is requested, each brand name under which the identified basic model(s) will be distributed in commerce, the design characteristic(s) constituting the grounds for the petition, and the specific requirements sought to be waived, and must discuss in detail the need for the requested waiver; (ii) Identify manufacturers of all other basic models distributed in commerce in the United States and known to the petitioner to incorporate design characteristic(s) similar to those found in the basic model that is the subject of the petition; (iii) Include any alternate test procedures known to the petitioner to evaluate the performance of the product type in a manner representative of the energy and/or water consumption characteristics of the basic model; and (iv) Be signed by the petitioner or an authorized representative. In accordance with the provisions set forth in 10 CFR 1004.11, any request for confidential treatment of any information contained in a petition or in supporting documentation must be accompanied by a copy of the petition, application or supporting documentation from which the information claimed to be confidential has been deleted. DOE will publish in the Federal Register (2) In addition to the requirements in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, each petition for interim waiver must reference the related petition for waiver, demonstrate likely success of the petition for waiver, and address what economic hardship and/or competitive disadvantage is likely to result absent a favorable determination on the petition for interim waiver. (c) Notification to other manufacturers. Federal Register, Federal Register (2) If a petitioner does not request an interim waiver and notification has not been provided pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, each petitioner, after filing a petition for waiver with DOE, and after the petition for waiver has been published in the Federal Register, Federal Register Federal Register, (d) Public comment and rebuttal. (2) Any person submitting written comments to DOE with respect to a petition for waiver must also send a copy of such comments to the petitioner. (3) A petitioner may, within 10 working days of the close of the comment period specified in the Federal Register, (e) Provisions specific to interim waivers. (2) A petition for interim waiver that does not meet the content requirements of paragraph (b) of this section will be considered incomplete. DOE will notify the petitioner of an incomplete petition via email. (3) DOE will grant an interim waiver from the test procedure requirements if it appears likely that the petition for waiver will be granted and/or if DOE determines that it would be desirable for public policy reasons to grant immediate relief pending a determination on the petition for waiver. Notice of DOE's determination on the petition for interim waiver will be published in the Federal Register (f) Provisions specific to waivers Disposition of application. (2) Criteria for granting. DOE will grant a waiver from the test procedure requirements if DOE determines either that the basic model(s) for which the waiver was requested contains a design characteristic that prevents testing of the basic model according to the prescribed test procedures, or that the prescribed test procedures evaluate the basic model in a manner so unrepresentative of its true energy or water consumption characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data. Waivers may be granted subject to conditions, which may include adherence to alternate test procedures specified by DOE. DOE will consult with the Federal Trade Commission prior to granting any waiver, and will promptly publish in the Federal Register (g) Extension to additional basic models. Federal Register. (h) Duration. (i) Publish in the Federal Register (ii) Publish in the Federal Register (2) When DOE publishes a decision and order on a petition for waiver in the Federal Register (3) When DOE amends the test procedure to address the issues presented in a waiver, the waiver or interim waiver will automatically terminate on the date on which use of that test procedure is required to demonstrate compliance. (4) When DOE publishes a decision and order in the Federal Register (i) Compliance certification and representations. (2) When DOE publishes a new or amended test procedure, certification reports to DOE required under 10 CFR 429.12 and any representations must be based on the testing methodology of an applicable waiver or interim waiver, or the new or amended test procedure until the date on which use of such test procedure is required to demonstrate compliance, unless otherwise specified by DOE in the test procedure final rule. Thereafter, certification reports and any representations must be based on the test procedure final rule methodology. Once a manufacturer uses the test procedure final rule methodology in a certification report or any representation, all subsequent certification reports and any representations must be made using the test procedure final rule methodology. (3) If DOE publishes a decision and order modifying an existing waiver, certification reports to DOE required under 10 CFR 429.12 and any representations must be based on either of the two methodologies until 180 days after the publication date of the decision and order modifying the waiver. Thereafter, certification reports and any representations must be based on the modified test procedure methodology unless otherwise specified by DOE. Once a manufacturer uses the modified test procedure methodology in a certification report or any representation, all subsequent certification reports and any representations must be made using the modified test procedure methodology while the modified waiver is valid. (j) Petition for waiver required of other manufactures. Federal Register (k) Rescission or modification. (2) A person may request that DOE rescind or modify a waiver or interim waiver issued to that person if the person discovers an error in the information provided to DOE as part of its petition, determines that the waiver is no longer needed, or for other appropriate reasons. In a request for rescission, the requestor must provide a statement explaining why it is requesting rescission. In a request for modification, the requestor must explain the need for modification to the authorized test procedure and detail the modifications needed and the corresponding impact on measured energy consumption. (3) DOE will publish a proposed rescission or modification (DOE-initiated or at the request of the original requestor) in the Federal Register Federal Register, (4) DOE will publish its decision in the Federal Register. (5) After the effective date of a rescission, any basic model(s) previously subject to a waiver must be tested and certified using the applicable DOE test procedure in 10 CFR part 430. (l) Revision of regulation. Federal Register Federal Register (m) To exhaust administrative remedies, any person aggrieved by an action under this section must file an appeal with the DOE's Office of Hearings and Appeals as provided in 10 CFR part 1003, subpart C. [79 FR 26599, May 9, 2014, as amended at 85 FR 79820, Dec. 11, 2020; 86 FR 70959, Dec. 14, 2021] Appendix A to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Refrigerators, Refrigerator-Freezers, and Miscellaneous Refrigeration Products Note: Prior to April 11, 2022, any representations of volume and energy use of refrigerators, refrigerator-freezers, and miscellaneous refrigeration products must be based on the results of testing pursuant to either this appendix or the procedures in appendix A as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B, appendix A, in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2019. Any representations of volume and energy use must be in accordance with whichever version is selected. On or after April 11, 2022, any representations of volume and energy use must be based on the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. For refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers, the rounding requirements specified in sections 4 and 5 of this appendix are not required for use until the compliance date of any amendment of energy conservation standards for these products published after October 12, 2021. 1. Referenced Materials DOE incorporated by reference AHAM HRF-1-2019, Energy and Internal Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products Performance of Household Electrical Appliances—Refrigerating Appliances; Part 1: Energy Consumption and Performance, Second Edition (a) AHAM HRF-1-2019, (“HRF-1-2019”), Energy and Internal Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products: (i) Section 3—Definitions, as specified in section 3 of this appendix; (ii) Section 4—Method for Determining the Refrigerated Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products, as specified in section 4.1 of this appendix; (iii) Section 5—Method for Determining the Energy Consumption of Consumer Refrigeration Products (excluding Table 5-1 and sections 5.5.6.5, 5.8.2.1.2, 5.8.2.1.3, 5.8.2.1.4, 5.8.2.1.5, and 5.8.2.1.6), as specified in section 5 of this appendix; and (iv) Section 6—Method for Determining the Adjusted Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products, as specified in section 4.2 of this appendix; (b) AS/NZS 4474.1:2007, (“AS/NZS 4474.1:2007”), Performance of Household Electrical Appliances—Refrigerating Appliances; Part 1: Energy Consumption and Performance, Second Edition: (i) Appendix M—Method of Interpolation When Two Controls are Adjusted, as specified in sections 5.2(b) and 5.5 of this appendix. (ii) [Reserved] 2. Scope This appendix provides the test procedure for measuring the annual energy use in kilowatt-hours per year (kWh/yr), the total refrigerated volume in cubic feet (ft 3 3 3. Definitions Section 3, Definitions, Door-in-door (a) Both doors (or both the door and the drawer) must be opened to provide access to the interior through a single opening; (b) Gaskets for both doors (or both the door and the drawer) are exposed to external ambient conditions on the outside around the full perimeter of the respective openings; and (c) The space between the two doors (or between the door and the drawer) achieves temperature levels consistent with the temperature requirements of the interior compartment to which the door-in-door provides access. Through-the-door ice/water dispenser Transparent door (a) The area of the transparent portion of the door is at least 40 percent of the area of the door. (b) The area of the door is at least 50 percent of the sum of the areas of all the external doors providing access to the fresh food compartments and cooler compartments. (c) For the purposes of this evaluation, the area of a door is determined as the product of the maximum height and maximum width dimensions of the door, not considering potential extension of flaps used to provide a seal to adjacent doors. 4. Volume Determine the refrigerated volume and adjusted volume for refrigerators, refrigerator-freezers, and miscellaneous refrigeration products in accordance with the following sections of HRF-1-2019, respectively: 4.1. Section 4, Method for Determining the Refrigerated Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products; and 4.2. Section 6, Method for Determining the Adjusted Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products. 5. Energy Consumption Determine the annual energy use (“AEU”) in kilowatt-hours per year (kWh/yr), for refrigerators, refrigerator-freezers, and miscellaneous refrigeration products in accordance with section 5, Method for Determining the Energy Consumption of Consumer Refrigeration Products, 5.1. Test Setup and Test Conditions (a) In section 5.3.1 of HRF-1-2019, the top of the unit shall be determined by the refrigerated cabinet height, excluding any accessories or protruding components on the top of the unit. (b) The ambient temperature and vertical ambient temperature gradient requirements specified in section 5.3.1 of HRF-1-2019 shall be maintained during both the stabilization period and the test period. (c) The power supply requirements as specified in section 5.5.1 of HRF-1-2019 shall be maintained based on measurement intervals not to exceed one minute. (d) The ice storage compartment temperature requirement as specified in section 5.5.6.5 in HRF-1-2019 is not required. (e) For cases in which setup is not clearly defined by this test procedure, manufacturers must submit a petition for a waiver (See section 6 of this appendix). (f) If the interior arrangements of the unit under test do not conform with those shown in Figures 5-1 or 5-2 of HRF-1-2019, as appropriate, the unit must be tested by relocating the temperature sensors from the locations specified in the figures to avoid interference with hardware or components within the unit, in which case the specific locations used for the temperature sensors shall be noted in the test data records maintained by the manufacturer in accordance with 10 CFR 429.71, and the certification report shall indicate that non-standard sensor locations were used. If any temperature sensor is relocated by any amount from the location prescribed in Figure 5-1 or 5-2 of HRF-1-2019 in order to maintain a minimum 1-inch air space from adjustable shelves or other components that could be relocated by the consumer, except in cases in which the Figures prescribe a temperature sensor location within 1 inch of a shelf or similar feature ( e.g., 5.2. Test Conduct (a) Standard Approach (i) For the purposes of comparing compartment temperatures with standardized temperatures, as described in section 5.6 of HRF-1-2019, the freezer compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.8.1.2.5 of HRF-1-2019, the fresh food compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.8.1.2.4 of HRF-1-2019, and the cooler compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.8.1.2.6 of HRF-1-2019. (ii) In place of Table 5-1 in HRF-1-2019, refer to Table 1 of this section. Table 1—Temperature Settings: General Chart for All Products First test Second test Energy Setting Results Setting Results Mid for all Compartments All compartments below standard reference temperature Warmest for all Compartments All compartments below standard reference temperature Second Test Only. One or more compartments above standard reference temperature First and Second Test. One or more compartments above standard reference temperature Coldest for all Compartments All compartments below standard reference temperature First and Second Test. One or more compartments above standard reference temperature Model may not be certified as compliant with energy conservation standards based on testing of this unit. Confirm that unit meets product definition. If so, see section 6 of this appendix. (b) Three-Point Interpolation Method (Optional Test for Models with Two Compartments and User-Operable Controls). As specified in section 5.6.3(6) of HRF-1-2019, and as an optional alternative to section 5.2(a) of this appendix, perform three tests such that the set of tests meets the “minimum requirements for interpolation” of AS/NZS 4474.1:2007 appendix M, section M3, paragraphs (a) through (c) and as illustrated in Figure M1. The target temperatures txA and txB defined in section M4(a)(i) of AS/NZ 4474.1:2007 shall be the standardized temperatures defined in section 5.6 of HRF-1-2019. 5.3. Test Cycle Energy Calculations Section 5.8.2, Energy Consumption, (a) In place of section 5.8.2.1.2 of HRF-1-2019, use the calculations provided in this section. For units with long-time automatic defrost control using the two-part test period, the test cycle energy shall be calculated as: Where: ET = test cycle energy expended in kilowatt-hours per day; 1440 = conversion factor to adjust to a 24-hour average use cycle in minutes per day; K = dimensionless correction factor of 1.0 for refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers and 0.55 for miscellaneous refrigeration products. EP1 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the first part of the test; EP2 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second part of the test; T1 and T2 = length of time in minutes of the first and second test parts, respectively; CT = defrost timer run time or compressor run time between defrosts in hours required to go through a complete cycle, rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour; 12 = factor to adjust for a 50-percent run time of the compressor in hours per day. (b) In place of sections 5.8.2.1.3 and 5.8.2.1.4 of HRF-1-2019, use the calculations provided in this section. For units with variable defrost control, the test cycle energy shall be calculated as set forth in section 5.3(a) of this appendix with the following addition: CT shall be calculated equivalent to: Where: CT L CT M L For variable defrost models with no values of CT L M F = ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy and the maximum difference in per-day energy consumption and is equal to 0.20. (c) In place of section 5.8.2.1.5 of HRF-1-2019, use the calculations provided in this section. For multiple-compressor products with automatic defrost, the two-part test method in section 5.7.2.1 of HRF-1-2019 shall be used, and the test cycle energy shall be calculated as: Where: ET, 1440, 12, and K are defined in section 5.3(a) of this appendix; EP1, and T1 are defined in section 5.3(a) of this appendix; i = a subscript variable that can equal 1, 2, or more that identifies each individual compressor system that has automatic defrost; D = the total number of compressor systems with automatic defrost; EP2 i T2 i CT i Where: CT L,i L CT M,i L,i For defrost cycle types with no values of CT L M F = ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy and the maximum difference in per-day energy consumption and is equal to 0.20. (d) In place of section 5.8.2.1.6 of HRF-1-2019, use the calculations provided in this section. For units with long-time automatic defrost control and variable defrost control with multiple defrost cycle types, the two-part test method in section 5.7.2.1 of HRF-1-2019 shall be used, and the test cycle energy shall be calculated as: Where: ET, 1440, 12, and K are defined in section 5.3(a) of this appendix; EP1, and T1 are defined in section 5.3(a) of this appendix; i = a subscript variable that can equal 1, 2, or more that identifies the distinct defrost cycle types applicable for the product; D = the total number of defrost cycle types; EP2 i T2 i CT i 12 = factor to adjust for a 50-percent run time of the compressor in hours per day. (i) For long-time automatic defrost control, CTi shall be equal to a fixed time in hours rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour. For cases in which there are more than one fixed CT value for a given defrost cycle type, an average fixed CT value shall be selected for this cycle type. (ii) For variable defrost control, CTi shall be calculated equivalent to: Where: CT L,i L CT M,i L,i For cases in which there are more than one CT M L M L L M F = ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy and the maximum difference in per-day energy consumption and is equal to 0.20. 5.4. Icemaker Energy Use (a) For refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers: To demonstrate compliance with the energy conservation standards at § 430.32(a) applicable to products manufactured on or after September 15, 2014, but before the compliance date of any amended standards published after January 1, 2022, IET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle, equals 0.23 for a product with one or more automatic icemakers and otherwise equals 0 (zero). To demonstrate compliance with any amended standards published after January 1, 2022, IET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle, is as defined in section 5.9.2.1 of HRF-1-2019. (b) For miscellaneous refrigeration products: To demonstrate compliance with the energy conservation standards at § 430.32(aa) applicable to products manufactured on or after October 28, 2019, IET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle, equals 0.23 for a product with one or more automatic icemakers and otherwise equals 0 (zero). 5.5. Triangulation Method If the three-point interpolation method of section 5.2(b) of this appendix is used for setting temperature controls, the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be defined as follows: E = E X Where: E is defined in section 5.9.1.1 of HRF-1-2019; IET is defined in section 5.4 of this appendix; and E X xA xB 6. Test Procedure Waivers To the extent that the procedures contained in this appendix do not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a basic model, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver under § 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such basic model. Such instances could, for example, include situations where the test setup for a particular basic model is not clearly defined by the provisions of this appendix. For details regarding the criteria and procedures for obtaining a waiver, please refer to § 430.27. [86 FR 56821, Oct. 12, 2021, as amended at 89 FR 3112, Jan. 17, 2024] Appendix B to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Freezers Note: Prior to April 11, 2022, any representations of volume and energy use of freezers must be based on the results of testing pursuant to either this appendix or the procedures in appendix B as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B, appendix B, in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2019. Any representations of volume and energy use must be in accordance with whichever version is selected. On or after April 11, 2022, any representations of volume and energy use must be based on the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. For freezers, the rounding requirements specified in sections 4 and 5 of this appendix are not required for use until the compliance date of any amendment of energy conservation standards for these products published after October 12, 2021. 1. Referenced Materials DOE incorporated by reference HRF-1-2019, Energy and Internal Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products (a) AHAM HRF-1-2019, (“HRF-1-2019”), Energy and Internal Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products: (i) Section 3—Definitions, as specified in section 3 of this appendix; (ii) Section 4—Method for Determining the Refrigerated Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products, as specified in section 4.1 of this appendix; (iii) Section 5—Method for Determining the Energy Consumption of Consumer Refrigeration Products (excluding Table 5-1 and sections 5.5.6.5, 5.8.2.1.2, 5.8.2.1.3, 5.8.2.1.4, 5.8.2.1.5, and 5.8.2.1.6), as specified in section 5 of this appendix; and (iv) Section 6—Method for Determining the Adjusted Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products, as specified in section 4.2 of this appendix. (b) Reserved. If there is any conflict between HRF-1—2019 and this appendix, follow the language of the test procedure in this appendix, disregarding the conflicting industry standard language. 2. Scope This appendix provides the test procedure for measuring the annual energy use in kilowatt-hours per year (kWh/yr), the total refrigerated volume in cubic feet (ft 3 3 3. Definitions Section 3, Definitions, Through-the-door ice/water dispenser 4. Volume Determine the refrigerated volume and adjusted volume for freezers in accordance with the following sections of HRF-1-2019, respectively: 4.1. Section 4, Method for Determining the Refrigerated Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products; and 4.2. Section 6, Method for Determining the Adjusted Volume of Consumer Refrigeration Products. 5. Energy Consumption Determine the annual energy use (“AEU”) in kilowatt-hours per year (kWh/yr), for freezers in accordance with section 5, Method for Determining the Energy Consumption of Consumer Refrigeration Products, 5.1. Test Setup and Test Conditions (a) In section 5.3.1 of HRF-1-2019, the top of the unit shall be determined by the refrigerated cabinet height, excluding any accessories or protruding components on the top of the unit. (b) The ambient temperature and vertical ambient temperature gradient requirements specified in section 5.3.1 of HRF-1-2019 shall be maintained during both the stabilization period and the test period. (c) The power supply requirements as specified in section 5.5.1 of HRF-1-2019 shall be maintained based on measurement intervals not to exceed one minute. (d) The ice storage compartment temperature requirement as specified in section 5.5.6.5 in HRF-1-2019 is not required. (e) For cases in which setup is not clearly defined by this test procedure, manufacturers must submit a petition for a waiver (See section 6 of this appendix). (f) If the interior arrangements of the unit under test do not conform with those shown in Figure 5-2 of HRF-1-2019, as appropriate, the unit must be tested by relocating the temperature sensors from the locations specified in the figures to avoid interference with hardware or components within the unit, in which case the specific locations used for the temperature sensors shall be noted in the test data records maintained by the manufacturer in accordance with 10 CFR 429.71, and the certification report shall indicate that non-standard sensor locations were used. If any temperature sensor is relocated by any amount from the location prescribed in Figure 5-2 of HRF-1- 2019 in order to maintain a minimum 1-inch air space from adjustable shelves or other components that could be relocated by the consumer, except in cases in which the Figure prescribes a temperature sensor location within 1 inch of a shelf or similar feature, this constitutes a relocation of temperature sensors that must be recorded in the test data and reported in the certification report as described in this paragraph. 5.2. Test Conduct (a) For the purposes of comparing compartment temperatures with standardized temperatures, as described in section 5.6 of HRF-1-2019, the freezer compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.8.1.2.5 of HRF-1-2019. (b) In place of Table 5-1 in HRF-1-2019, refer to Table 1 of this section. Table 1—Temperature Settings for Freezers First test Second test Energy calculation based on: Setting Results Setting Results Mid Below standard reference temperature Warmest Below standard reference temperature Second Test Only. Above standard reference temperature First and Second Test. Above standard reference temperature Coldest Below standard reference temperature First and Second Test. Above standard reference temperature Model may not be certified as compliant with energy conservation standards based on testing of this unit. Confirm that unit meets product definition. If so, see section 6 of this appendix. 5.3. Test Cycle Energy Calculations Section 5.8.2, Energy Consumption, (a) In place of section 5.8.2.1.2 of HRF-1-2019, use the calculations provided in this section. For units with long-time automatic defrost control using the two-part test period, the test cycle energy shall be calculated as: Where: ET = test cycle energy expended in kilowatt-hours per day; 1440 = conversion factor to adjust to a 24-hour average use cycle in minutes per day; K = dimensionless correction factor of 0.7 for chest freezers and 0.85 for upright freezers. EP1 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the first part of the test; EP2 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second part of the test; T1 and T2 = length of time in minutes of the first and second test parts, respectively; CT = defrost timer run time or compressor run time between defrosts in hours required to go through a complete cycle, rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour; 12 = factor to adjust for a 50-percent run time of the compressor in hours per day. (b) In place of sections 5.8.2.1.3 and 5.8.2.1.4 of HRF-1-2019, use the calculations provided in this section. For units with variable defrost control, the test cycle energy shall be calculated as set forth in section 5.3(a) of this appendix with the following addition: CT shall be calculated equivalent to: Where: CT L CT M L For variable defrost models with no values of CT L M F = ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy and the maximum difference in per-day energy consumption and is equal to 0.20. 5.4. Icemaker Energy Use For freezers: To demonstrate compliance with the energy conservation standards at § 430.32(a) applicable to products manufactured on or after September 15, 2014, but before the compliance date of any amended standards published after January 1, 2022, IET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle, equals 0.23 for a product with one or more automatic icemakers and otherwise equals 0 (zero). To demonstrate compliance with any amended standards published after January 1, 2022, IET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle, is as defined in section 5.9.2.1 of HRF-1-2019. 6. Test Procedure Waivers To the extent that the procedures contained in this appendix do not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a basic model, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver under § 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such basic model. Such instances could, for example, include situations where the test setup for a particular basic model is not clearly defined by the provisions of this appendix. For details regarding the criteria and procedures for obtaining a waiver, please refer to § 430.27. [86 FR 56824, Oct. 12, 2021, as amended at 89 FR 3113, Jan. 17, 2024] Appendix C1 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Dishwashers Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the relevant standards provided at § 430.32(f)(1). Manufacturers must use the results of testing under appendix C2 to this subpart to determine compliance with the amended standards for dishwashers provided at § 430.32(f)(2). Manufacturers may use appendix C2 to certify compliance with the standards provided at § 430.32(f)(2) prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards. Any representations related to energy or water consumption of dishwashers must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., The regulation at 10 CFR 429.19(b)(3) provides instructions regarding the combination of detergent and detergent dosing, specified in section 2.5 of this appendix, used for certification. 0. Incorporation by Reference In § 430.3, DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for AHAM DW-1-2020 and AHAM DW-2-2020; however, only enumerated provision of AHAM DW-1-2020, AHAM DW-2-2020, and IEC 62301 are applicable as follows: 0.1 AHAM DW-1-2020 (a) Sections 1.1 through 1.30 as referenced in section 1 of this appendix; (b) Section 2.1 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.1 of this appendix; (c) Sections 2.2 through 2.3.3, sections 2.5 through 2.7, sections 2.7.2 through 2.8, and section 2.11, as referenced in section 2 of this appendix; (d) Section 2.4 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.2 of this appendix; (e) Section 2.7.1 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.3 of this appendix; (f) Section 2.9 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.4 of this appendix; (g) Section 2.10 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.5 of this appendix; (h) Sections 3.1 through 3.2 and sections 3.5 through 3.7 as referenced in section 3 of this appendix; (i) Section 3.3 as referenced in sections 3 and 3.1 of this appendix; (j) Section 3.4 as referenced in sections 3 and 3.2 of this appendix; (k) Sections 4.1 through 4.1.2 and sections 4.1.4 through 4.2 as referenced in section 4 of this appendix; (l) Section 4.1.4 as referenced in sections 4 and 4.1 of this appendix; and (m) Section 5 as referenced in section 5 of this appendix. 0.2 AHAM DW-2-2020: Household Electric Dishwashers (a) Section 3.4 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.3 of this appendix, and through reference to sections 1.5 and 1.22 of AHAM DW-1-2020 in section 1 of this appendix. (b) Section 3.5 through reference to sections 1.5 and 1.22 of AHAM DW-1-2020 in section 1 of this appendix. (c) Section 4.1 as referenced in section 2 of this appendix. (d) Sections 5.3 through 5.8 as referenced in section 2 of this appendix, and through reference to sections 1.18, 1.19, and 1.20 of AHAM DW-1-2020 in section 1 of this appendix. 0.3 IEC 62301 (a) Sections 4.2, 4.3.2, and 5.2 as referenced in section 2 of this appendix; and (b) Sections 5.1, note 1, and 5.3.2 as referenced in section 4 of this appendix. 1. Definitions The definitions in sections 1.1 through 1.30 of AHAM DW-1-2020 apply to this test procedure, including the applicable provisions of AHAM DW-2-2020 as referenced in sections 1.5, 1.18, 1.19. 1.20, and 1.22 of AHAM DW-1-2020. 2. Testing Conditions The testing conditions in sections 2.1 through 2.11 of AHAM DW-1-2020 apply to this test procedure, including the following provisions of: (a) Sections 5.2, 4.3.2, and 4.2 of IEC 62301 as referenced in sections 2.1, 2.2.4, and 2.5.2 of AHAM DW-1-2020, respectively, and (b) Sections 5.3 through 5.8 of AHAM DW-2-2020 as referenced in sections 2.6.3.1, 2.6.3.2, and 2.6.3.3 of AHAM DW-1-2020; section 3.4 of AHAM DW-2-2020, excluding the accompanying Note, as referenced in section 2.7.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020; section 5.4 of AHAM DW-2-2020 as referenced in section 2.7.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020; section 5.5 of AHAM DW-2-2020 as referenced in section 2.7.5 of AHAM DW-1-2020, and section 4.1 of AHAM DW-2-2020 as referenced in section 2.10.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020. Additionally, the following requirements are also applicable. 2.1 Installation Requirements. The installation requirements described in section 2.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers, with the following additions: 2.1.1 In-Sink Dishwashers. For in-sink dishwashers, the requirements pertaining to the rectangular enclosure for under-counter or under-sink dishwashers are not applicable. For such dishwashers, the rectangular enclosure must consist of a front, a back, two sides, and a bottom. The front, back, and sides of the enclosure must be brought into the closest contact with the appliance that the configuration of the dishwasher will allow. The height of the enclosure shall be as specified in the manufacturer's instructions for installation height. If no instructions are provided, the enclosure height shall be 36 inches. The dishwasher must be installed from the top and mounted to the edges of the enclosure. 2.1.2 Dishwashers without a Direct Water Line. Manually fill the built-in water reservoir to the full capacity reported by the manufacturer, using water at a temperature in accordance with section 2.3 of AHAM DW-1-2020. 2.2 Water pressure. The water pressure requirements described in section 2.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers except dishwashers that do not have a direct water line. 2.3 Test load items. The test load items described in section 2.7.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020 apply to this test procedure, including the applicable provisions of section 3.4 of AHAM DW-2-2020, as referenced in section 2.7.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020. The following test load items may be used in the alternative. Dishware/glassware/flatware item Primary source Description Primary No. Alternate source Alternate source No. Dinner Plate Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 10 inch Dinner Plate 6003893 Bread and Butter Plate Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 6.75 inch Bread & Butter 6003887 Arzberg 8500217100 or 2000-00001-0217-1. Fruit Bowl Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 10 oz. Dessert Bowl 6003899 Arzberg 3820513100. Cup Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 8 oz. Ceramic Cup 6014162 Arzberg 1382-00001-4732. Saucer Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 6 inch Saucer 6010972 Arzberg 1382-00001-4731. Serving Bowl Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 1 qt. Serving Bowl 6003911 Platter Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 9.5 inch Oval Platter 6011655 Glass—Iced Tea Libbey 551 HT Flatware—Knife Oneida®—Accent 2619KPVF WMF—Gastro 0800 12.0803.6047. Flatware—Dinner Fork Oneida®—Accent 2619FRSF WMF—Signum 1900 12.1905.6040. Flatware—Salad Fork Oneida®—Accent 2619FSLF WMF—Signum 1900 12.1964.6040. Flatware—Teaspoon Oneida®—Accent 2619STSF WMF—Signum 1900 12.1910.6040. Flatware—Serving Fork Oneida®—Flight 2865FCM WMF—Signum 1900 12.1902.6040. Flatware—Serving Spoon Oneida®—Accent 2619STBF WMF—Signum 1900 12.1904.6040. 2.4 Preconditioning requirements. The preconditioning requirements described in section 2.9 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers. For dishwashers that do not have a direct water line, measurement of the prewash fill water volume, V pw mw 2.5 Detergent. 2.5.1 Detergent Formulation. 2.5.2 Detergent Dosage. 2.5.2.1 Dosage for any dishwasher other than water re-use system dishwashers. If Cascade with the Grease Fighting Power of Dawn detergent is used, the detergent dosing specified in section 2.5.2.1.1 of this appendix must be used. If Cascade Complete Powder detergent is used, consult the introductory note to this appendix regarding use of the detergent dosing specified in either section 2.5.2.1.1 or section 2.5.2.1.2 of this appendix. 2.5.2.1.1 Dosage based on fill water volumes. Prewash Detergent Dosing. pw, D pw pw where, V pw ρ = water density = 8.343 pounds (lb)/gallon for dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet water temperature of 50 °F (10 °C), 8.250 lb/gallon for dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet water temperature of 120 °F (49 °C), and 8.205 lb/gallon for dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet water temperature of 140 °F (60 °C), and k = conversion factor from lb to g = 453.6 g/lb. Main Wash Detergent Dosing. mw, D mw mw where, V mw ρ and k are as defined above. For dishwashers that do not have a direct water line, V mw 2.5.2.1.2 Dosage based on number of place settings. 2.5.2.2 Dosage for water re-use system dishwashers. 2.5.3 Detergent Placement. Prewash and main wash detergent must be placed as specified in sections 2.10 and 2.10.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020. For any dishwasher that does not have a main wash detergent compartment and the manufacturer does not recommend a location to place the main wash detergent, place the main wash detergent directly into the dishwasher chamber. 2.6 Connected functionality. For dishwashers that can communicate through a network ( e.g., 3. Instrumentation For this test procedure, the test instruments are to be calibrated annually according to the specifications in sections 3.1 through 3.7 of AHAM DW-1-2020, including the applicable provisions of IEC 62301 as referenced in section 3.6 of AHAM DW-1-2020. Additionally, the following requirements are also applicable. 3.1 Water meter. The water meter requirements described in section 3.3 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers except dishwashers that do not have a direct water line. For such dishwashers these water meter conditions do not apply and water is added manually pursuant to section 2.1.1 of this appendix. 3.2 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge requirements described in section 3.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers except dishwashers that do not have a direct water line. For such dishwashers these water pressure gauge conditions do not apply and water is added manually pursuant to section 2.1.1 of this appendix. 4. Test Cycle and Measurements The test cycle and measurement specifications in sections 4.1 through 4.2 of AHAM DW-1-2020 apply to this test procedure, including section 5.1, note 1, and section 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 as referenced in section 4.2 of AHAM DW-1-2020. Additionally, the following requirements are also applicable. 4.1 Water consumption. The water consumption requirements described in section 4.1.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers except dishwashers that do not have a direct water line. For such dishwashers these water consumption measurement requirements do not apply and water consumption, V, is the value reported by the manufacturer. 5. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements The calculations in section 5.1 through 5.7 of AHAM DW-1-2020 apply to this test procedure. The following additional requirements are also applicable: (a) In sections 5.1.3, 5.1.4, 5.1.5, 5.4.3, 5.4.4, 5.4.5, and 5.7 of AHAM DW-1-2020, use N = 215 cycles/year in place of N = 184 cycles/year. (b) In section 5.7 of AHAM DW-1-2020, use S LP (c) For dishwashers that do not have a direct water line, water consumption is equal to the volume of water use in the test cycle, as specified by the manufacturer. (d) In sections 5.6.1.3, 5.6.1.4, 5.6.2.3, and 5.6.2.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020, use (C/e) in place of K. [88 FR 3277, Jan. 18, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 48357, July 27, 2023; 89 FR 83617, Oct. 17, 2024] Appendix C2 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Dishwashers Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the relevant standards provided at § 430.32(f)(2). Manufacturers may use this appendix to certify compliance with the standards provided at § 430.32(f)(2) prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards. Any representations related to energy or water consumption of dishwashers must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 0. Incorporation by Reference In § 430.3, DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for AHAM DW-1-2020 and AHAM DW-2-2020; however, only enumerated provision of AHAM DW-1-2020, AHAM DW-2-2020, and IEC 62301 are applicable as follows: 0.1 AHAM DW-1-2020 (a) Sections 1.1 through 1.30 as referenced in section 1 of this appendix; (b) Section 2.1 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.1 of this appendix; (c) Sections 2.2 through 2.3.3, sections 2.5 and 2.7, sections 2.7.2 through 2.8, and section 2.11, as referenced in section 2 of this appendix; (d) Section 2.4 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.2 of this appendix; (e) Section 2.6.3 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.3 of this appendix; (f) Section 2.7.1 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.4 of this appendix; (g) Section 2.9 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.5 of this appendix; (h) Section 2.10 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.6 of this appendix; (i) Sections 3.1 through 3.2 and sections 3.5 through 3.7 as referenced in section 3 of this appendix; (j) Section 3.3 as referenced in sections 3 and 3.1 of this appendix; (k) Section 3.4 as referenced in sections 3 and 3.2 of this appendix; (l) Section 4.1 as referenced in sections 4 and 4.1 of this appendix; (m) Section 4.1.4 as referenced in sections 4 and 4.1.2 of this appendix; and (n) Section 5 as referenced in section 5 of this appendix. 0.2 AHAM DW-2-2020 (a) Section 3.4 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.4 of this appendix, and through reference to sections 1.5 and 1.22 of AHAM DW-1-2020 in section 1 of this appendix. (b) Section 3.5 through reference to sections 1.5 and 1.22 of AHAM DW-1-2020 in section 1 of this appendix. (c) Section 4.1 as referenced in section 2 of this appendix. (d) Sections 5.3 through 5.8 as referenced in section 2 of this appendix, and through reference to sections 1.18, 1.19 and 1.20 of AHAM DW-1-2020 in section 1 of this appendix. (e) Section 5.10 as referenced in sections 2 and 2.8 of this appendix; (f) Sections 5.10.1.1 as referenced in sections 4 and 4.2 of this appendix; and (g) Section 5.12.3.1 as referenced in sections 5 and 5.1 of this appendix. 0.3 IEC 62301 (a) Sections 4.2, 4.3.2, and 5.2 as referenced in section 2 of this appendix; and (b) Sections 5.1, note 1, and 5.3.2 as referenced in section 4 of this appendix. 1. Definitions The definitions in sections 1.1 through 1.30 of AHAM DW-1-2020 apply to this test procedure, including the applicable provisions of AHAM DW-2-2020 as referenced in sections 1.5, 1.18, 1.19, 1.20, and 1.22 of AHAM DW-1-2020. 2. Testing Conditions The testing conditions in Section 2.1 through 2.11 of AHAM DW-1-2020, except sections 2.6.1 and 2.6.2, and the testing conditions in section 5.10 of AHAM DW-2-2020 apply to this test procedure, including the following provisions of: (a) Sections 5.2, 4.3.2, and 4.2 of IEC 62301 as referenced in sections 2.1, 2.2.4, and 2.5.2 of AHAM DW-1-2020, respectively, and (b) Sections 5.3 through 5.8 of AHAM DW-2-2020 as referenced in sections 2.6.3.1, 2.6.3.2, and 2.6.3.3 of AHAM DW-1-2020; section 3.4 of AHAM DW-2-2020, excluding the accompanying Note, as referenced in section 2.7.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020; section 5.4 of AHAM DW-2-2020 as referenced in section 2.7.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020; section 5.5 of AHAM DW-2-2020 as referenced in section 2.7.5 of AHAM DW-1-2020, and section 4.1 of AHAM DW-2-2020 as referenced in section 2.10.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020. Additionally, the following requirements are also applicable. 2.1 Installation Requirements. The installation requirements described in section 2.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers, with the following additions: 2.1.1 In-Sink Dishwashers. For in-sink dishwashers, the requirements pertaining to the rectangular enclosure for under-counter or under-sink dishwashers are not applicable. For such dishwashers, the rectangular enclosure must consist of a front, a back, two sides, and a bottom. The front, back, and sides of the enclosure must be brought into the closest contact with the appliance that the configuration of the dishwasher will allow. The height of the enclosure shall be as specified in the manufacturer's instructions for installation height. If no instructions are provided, the enclosure height shall be 36 inches. The dishwasher must be installed from the top and mounted to the edges of the enclosure. 2.1.2 Dishwashers without a Direct Water Line. Manually fill the built-in water reservoir to the full capacity reported by the manufacturer, using water at a temperature in accordance with section 2.3 of AHAM DW-1-2020. 2.2 Water pressure. The water pressure requirements described in section 2.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers except dishwashers that do not have a direct water line. 2.3 Non-soil-sensing and soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet temperature of 50 °F, 120 °F, or 140 °F. The test load and soiling requirements for all non-soil-sensing and soil-sensing dishwashers shall be the same as those requirements specified in section 2.6.3 of AHAM DW-1-2020 for soil-sensing dishwashers. Additionally, both non-soil-sensing and soil-sensing compact dishwashers that have a capacity of less than four place settings shall be tested at the rated capacity of the dishwasher and the test load shall be soiled as follows at each soil load: (a) Heavy soil load: soil two-thirds of the place settings, excluding flatware and serving pieces (rounded up to the nearest integer) or one place setting, whichever is greater; (b) Medium soil load: soil one-quarter of the place settings, excluding flatware and serving pieces (rounded up to the nearest integer) or one place setting, whichever is smaller; (c) Light soil load: soil one-quarter of the place settings, excluding flatware and serving pieces (rounded up to the nearest integer) or one place setting, whichever is smaller, using half the quantity of soils specified for one place setting. 2.4 Test load items. The test load items described in section 2.7.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020 apply to this test procedure, including the applicable provisions of section 3.4 of AHAM DW-2-2020, as referenced in section 2.7.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020. The following test load items may be used in the alternative. Dishware/glassware/flatware item Primary source Description Primary No. Alternate source Alternate source No. Dinner Plate Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 10 inch Dinner Plate 6003893 Bread and Butter Plate Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 6.75 inch Bread & Butter 6003887 Arzberg 8500217100 or 2000-00001-0217-1. Fruit Bowl Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 10 oz. Dessert Bowl 6003899 Arzberg 3820513100. Cup Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 8 oz. Ceramic Cup 6014162 Arzberg 1382-00001-4732. Saucer Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 6 inch Saucer 6010972 Arzberg 1382-00001-4731. Serving Bowl Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 1 qt. Serving Bowl 6003911 Platter Corning Comcor®/Corelle® 9.5 inch Oval Platter 6011655 Glass—Iced Tea Libbey 551 HT Flatware—Knife Oneida®—Accent 2619KPVF WMF—Gastro 0800 12.0803.6047. Flatware—Dinner Fork Oneida®—Accent 2619FRSF WMF—Signum 1900 12.1905.6040. Flatware—Salad Fork Oneida®—Accent 2619FSLF WMF—Signum 1900 12.1964.6040. Flatware—Teaspoon Oneida®—Accent 2619STSF WMF—Signum 1900 12.1910.6040. Flatware—Serving Fork Oneida®—Flight 2865FCM WMF—Signum 1900 12.1902.6040. Flatware—Serving Spoon Oneida®—Accent 2619STBF WMF—Signum 1900 12.1904.6040. 2.5 Preconditioning requirements. The preconditioning requirements described in section 2.9 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers except the measurement of the prewash fill water volume, V pw mw 2.6 Detergent. The detergent requirements described in section 2.10 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers. For any dishwasher that does not have a main wash detergent compartment and the manufacturer does not recommend a location to place the main wash detergent, place the detergent directly into the dishwasher chamber. 2.7 Connected functionality. For dishwashers that can communicate through a network ( e.g., 2.8 Evaluation Room Lighting Conditions. The lighting setup in the evaluation room where the test load is scored shall be according to the requirements specified in section 5.10 of AHAM DW-2-2020. 3. Instrumentation For this test procedure, the test instruments are to be calibrated annually according to the specifications in section 3.1 through 3.7 of AHAM DW-1-2020, including the applicable provisions of IEC 62301 as referenced in section 3.6 of AHAM DW-1-2020. Additionally, the following requirements are also applicable. 3.1 Water meter. The water meter requirements described in section 3.3 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers except dishwashers that do not have a direct water line. For such dishwashers these water meter conditions do not apply and water is added manually pursuant to section 2.1.1 of this appendix. 3.2 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge requirements described in section 3.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers except dishwashers that do not have a direct water line. For such dishwashers these water pressure gauge conditions do not apply and water is added manually pursuant to section 2.1.1 of this appendix. 4. Test Cycle and Measurements The test cycle and measurement specifications in sections 4.1 through 4.2 of AHAM DW-1-2020 and the scoring specifications in section 5.10.1.1 of AHAM DW-2-2020 apply to this test procedure, including section 5.1, note 1, and section 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 as referenced in section 4.2 of AHAM DW-1-2020. Additionally, the following requirements are also applicable. 4.1 Active mode cycle. The active mode energy consumption measurement requirements described in section 4.1 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers. Additionally, the following requirements are also applicable: (a) After the completion of each test cycle (sensor heavy response, sensor medium response, and sensor light response), the test load shall be scored according to section 4.2 of this appendix and its cleaning index calculated according to section 5.1 of this appendix. (b) A test cycle is considered valid if its cleaning index is 70 or higher; otherwise, the test cycle is invalid and the data from that test run is discarded. (c) For soil-sensing dishwashers, if the test cycle at any soil load is invalid, clean the dishwasher filter according to manufacturer's instructions and repeat the test at that soil load on the most energy-intensive cycle (determined as provided in section 4.1.1 of this appendix) that achieves a cleaning index of 70 or higher. (d) For non-soil-sensing dishwashers, perform testing as described in section 4.1.a through 4.1.c of this appendix, except that, if a test cycle at a given soil load meets the cleaning index threshold criteria of 70 when tested on the normal cycle, no further testing is required for test cycles at lesser soil loads. 4.1.1 Determination of most energy-intensive cycle. If the most energy-intensive cycle is not known and needs to be determined via testing, ensure the filter is cleaned as specified in the manufacturer's instructions and test each available cycle type, selecting the default cycle options for that cycle type. In the absence of manufacturer recommendations on washing and drying temperature options, the highest energy consumption options must be selected. Following the completion of each test cycle, the machine electrical energy consumption and water consumption shall be measured according to sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020, respectively. The total cycle energy consumption, E MEI MEI For standard dishwashers, test each cycle with a clean load of eight place settings plus six serving pieces, as specified in section 2.7 of AHAM DW-1-2020. For compact dishwashers, test each cycle with a clean load of four place settings plus six serving pieces, as specified in section 2.7 of AHAM DW-1-2020. If the capacity of the dishwasher, as stated by the manufacturer, is less than four place settings, then the test load must be the stated capacity. 4.1.2 Water consumption. The water consumption requirements described in section 4.1.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020 are applicable to all dishwashers except dishwashers that do not have a direct water line. For such dishwashers these water consumption measurement requirements do not apply and water consumption, V, is the value reported by the manufacturer. 4.2 Scoring. Following the termination of an active mode test, each item in the test load shall be scored on a scale from 0 to 9 according to the instructions in section 5.10.1.1 of AHAM DW-2-2020. 5. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements The calculations in sections 5.1 through 5.7 of AHAM DW-1-2020 and section 5.12.3.1 of AHAM DW-2-2020 apply to this test procedure. The following additional requirements are also applicable: (a) For both soil-sensing and non-soil-sensing dishwashers, use the equations specified for soil-sensing dishwashers. (b) If a non-soil-sensing dishwasher is not tested at a certain soil load as specified in section 4.1.d of this appendix, use the energy and water consumption values of the preceding soil load when calculating the weighted average energy and water consumption values ( i.e., (c) For dishwashers that do not have a direct water line, water consumption is equal to the volume of water use in the test cycle, as specified by the manufacturer. (d) In sections 5.6.1.3, 5.6.1.4, 5.6.2.3, and 5.6.2.4 of AHAM DW-1-2020, use (C/e) in place of K. 5.1 Cleaning Index. Determine the per-cycle cleaning index for each test cycle using the equation in section 5.12.3.1 of AHAM DW-2-2020. 5.2 Calculation for determination of the most energy-intensive cycle type. The total cycle energy consumption for the determination of the most energy-intensive cycle specified in section 4.1.1 of this appendix is calculated for each tested cycle type as: E MEI F D where, M = per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption, expressed in kilowatt hours per cycle, E F E D W = water energy consumption and is defined as: V × T × K, for dishwashers using electrically heated water, and V × T × C/e, for dishwashers using gas-heated or oil-heated water. Additionally, V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, T = nominal water heater temperature rise and is equal to 90 °F for dishwashers that operate with a nominal 140 °F inlet water temperature, and 70 °F for dishwashers that operate with a nominal 120 °F inlet water temperature, K = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree Fahrenheit = 0.0024, C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit = 8.2, and e = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75. [88 FR 3279, Jan. 18, 2023, as amended at 89 FR 83617, Oct. 17, 2204] Appendix D1 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Clothes Dryers Note: The procedures in either this appendix or appendix D2 to this subpart must be used to determine compliance with the energy conservation standards for clothes dryers provided at § 430.32(h)(3). Manufacturers must use a single appendix for all representations, including certifications of compliance, and may not use this appendix for certain representations and appendix D2 to this subpart for other representations. The procedures in appendix D2 to this subpart must be used to determine compliance with the energy conservation standards for clothes dryers provided at § 430.32(h)(4). 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3 the standards for AHAM HLD-1 and IEC 62301, in their entirety, however, only enumerated provisions of those documents are applicable to this appendix. In cases where there is a conflict between any industry standard(s) and this appendix, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the industry standard(s). (1) AHAM HLD-1: (i) Section 3.3.5.1 “Standard Simulator” as referenced in sections 2.1.2 through 2.1.3 of this appendix. (ii) [Reserved] (2) IEC 62301: (i) Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 as referenced in section 3.6.2 of this appendix. (ii) Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2 “Sampling Method” as referenced in section 3.6.3 of this appendix. 1. Definitions 1.1 “Active mode” means a mode in which the clothes dryer is connected to a main power source, has been activated and is performing the main function of tumbling the clothing with or without heated or unheated forced air circulation to remove moisture from the clothing, remove wrinkles or prevent wrinkling of the clothing, or both. 1.2 “AHAM” means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers. 1.3 “AHAM HLD-1” means the test standard published by the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, titled “Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers,” ANSI-approved June 11, 2010, ANSI/AHAM HLD-1-2010. 1.4 “Automatic termination control” means a dryer control system with a sensor which monitors either the dryer load temperature or its moisture content and with a controller which automatically terminates the drying process. A mark, detent, or other visual indicator or detent which indicates a preferred automatic termination control setting must be present if the dryer is to be classified as having an “automatic termination control.” A mark is a visible single control setting on one or more dryer controls. 1.5 “Bone dry” means a condition of a load of test cloths which has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 minutes, removed, and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 10-minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent or less. 1.6 “Compact” or “compact size” means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of less than 4.4 cubic feet. 1.7 “Cool down” means that portion of the clothes drying cycle when the added gas or electric heat is terminated and the clothes continue to tumble and dry within the drum. 1.8 “Cycle” means a sequence of operation of a clothes dryer which performs a clothes drying operation, and may include variations or combinations of the functions of heating, tumbling, and drying. 1.9 “Drum capacity” means the volume of the drying drum in cubic feet. 1.10 “IEC 62301” (Second Edition) means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission (“IEC”) titled “Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power,” Publication 62301 (Edition 2.0 2011-01) (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 1.11 “Final moisture content” (“FMC”) means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the dry test load ( i.e., 1.12 “Inactive mode” means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer, or that provides continuous status display. 1.13 “Initial moisture content” (“IMC”) means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the damp test load ( i.e., 1.14 “Moisture content” means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the test load to the bone-dry weight of the test load, expressed as a percent. 1.15 “Off mode” means a mode in which the clothes dryer is connected to a main power source and is not providing any active or standby mode function, and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position is included within the classification of an off mode. 1.16 “Standard size” means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of 4.4 cubic feet or greater. 1.17 “Standby mode” means any product modes where the energy using product is connected to a main power source and offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time: (a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer. (b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks (e.g., switching) and that operates on a continuous basis. 1.18 “Vented clothes dryer” means a clothes dryer that exhausts the evaporated moisture from the cabinet. 1.19 “Ventless clothes dryer” means a clothes dryer that uses a closed-loop system with an internal condenser to remove the evaporated moisture from the heated air. The moist air is not discharged from the cabinet. 2. Testing Conditions 2.1 Installation. 2.1.1 All clothes dryers. 2.1.2 Vented clothes dryers. 2.1.3 Ventless clothes dryers. 2.2 Ambient temperature and humidity. 2.2.1 For drying testing, maintain the room ambient air temperature at 75 ±3 °F and the room relative humidity at 50 percent ±10 percent relative humidity. 2.2.2 For standby and off mode testing, maintain room ambient air temperature conditions as specified in section 4, paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) 2.3 Energy supply. 2.3.1 Electrical supply. 2.3.1.1 Supply voltage waveform. 2.3.2 Gas supply. 2.3.2.1 Natural gas supply. n 2.3.2.2 Propane gas supply. p 2.3.2.3 Hourly Btu Rating. (1) Modify the gas inlet supply pressure within the allowable range specified in section 2.3.2.1 or 2.3.2.2 of this appendix, as applicable; (2) If the clothes dryer is equipped with a gas pressure regulator, modify the outlet pressure of the gas pressure regulator within ±10 percent of the value recommended by the manufacturer in the installation manual, on the nameplate sticker, or wherever the manufacturer makes such a recommendation for the basic model; and (3) Modify the orifice as necessary to achieve the required hourly Btu rating. 2.4 Instrumentation. 2.4.1 Weighing scales. 2.4.1.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. 2.4.1.2 Weighing scale for drum capacity measurements. 2.4.2 Kilowatt-hour meter. 2.4.3 Gas meter. 2.4.4 Dry and wet bulb psychrometer. 2.4.5 Temperature. 2.4.6 Standard Continuous Flow Calorimeter. 2.4.7 Standby mode and off mode watt meter. 2.5 Lint trap. 2.6 Test cloths. 2.6.1 Material Specifications. 2.6.2 Material Verification. 2.6.3 Lot Identification. 2.6.4 Pre-Conditioning. 2.6.5 Lifetime. 2.7 Test loads. 2.7.1 Load size. Table 1—Test Loads Unit under test Test load Standard size clothes dryer 8.45 pounds ± .085 pounds. Compact size clothes dryer 3.00 pounds ± .03 pounds. Each test load must consist of energy test cloths and no more than five energy stuffer cloths. 2.7.2 Test load preparation. 2.7.3 Method of loading. 2.8 Clothes dryer pre-conditioning. 2.8.1 Vented clothes dryers. 2.8.2 Ventless clothes dryers. 3. Test Procedures and Measurements 3.1 Drum Capacity. i.e., C C w d 3.2 Dryer Loading. 3.3 Test cycle. 3.4 Data recording. 3.4.1 Bone-dry weight of the test load, W bonedry 3.4.2 Moisture content of the wet test load before the test, IMC, as described in section 2.7.2 of this appendix. 3.4.3 Moisture content of the dry test load obtained after the test, FMC, as described in section 3.3 of this appendix. 3.4.4 Test room conditions, temperature, and percent relative humidity described in 2.2.1. 3.4.5 For electric dryers—the total kilowatt-hours of electric energy, E t 3.4.6 For gas dryers: 3.4.6.1 Total kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, E te 3.4.6.2 Cubic feet of gas per cycle, E tg 3.4.6.3 Correct the gas heating value, GEF, as measured in 2.3.2.1 and 2.3.2.2, to standard pressure and temperature conditions in accordance with U.S. Bureau of Standards, circular C417, 1938. 3.5 Test for automatic termination field use factor. 3.6 Standby mode and off mode power. 3.6.1 Perform standby mode and off mode testing after completion of an active mode drying cycle included as part of the test cycle; after removing the test load; without changing the control panel settings used for the active mode drying cycle; with the door closed; and without disconnecting the electrical energy supply to the clothes dryer between completion of the active mode drying cycle and the start of standby mode and off mode testing. 3.6.2 For clothes dryers that take some time to automatically enter a stable inactive mode or off mode state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 of IEC 62301, allow sufficient time for the clothes dryer to automatically reach the default inactive/off mode state before proceeding with the test measurement. 3.6.3 Once the stable inactive/off mode state has been reached, measure and record the default inactive/off mode power, P default 3.6.4 For a clothes dryer with a switch (or other means) that can be optionally selected by the end user to achieve a lower-power inactive/off mode state than the default inactive/off mode state measured in section 3.6.3 of this appendix, after performing the measurement in section 3.6.3 of this appendix, activate the switch (or other means) to the position resulting in the lowest power consumption and repeat the measurement procedure described in section 3.6.3 of this appendix. Measure and record the lowest inactive/off mode power, P lowest 4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements 4.1 Total per-cycle electric dryer energy consumption. ce E ce t Where: E t 53.5 = an experimentally established value for the percent reduction in the moisture content of the test load during a laboratory test cycle expressed as a percent. field use = field use factor, = 1.18 for clothes dryers with time termination control systems only without any automatic termination control functions. = 1.04 for clothes dryers with automatic control systems that meet the requirements of the definition for automatic termination control in section 1.4 of this appendix, including those that also have a supplementary timer control, or that may also be manually controlled. IMC = the moisture content of the wet test load as recorded in section 3.4.2 of this appendix. FMC = the moisture content of the dry test load as recorded in section 3.4.3 of this appendix. 4.2 Per-cycle gas dryer electrical energy consumption. ge E ge te Where: E te field use, 53.5, MC w d 4.3 Per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption. gg E gg w d tg Where: E tg GEF = corrected gas heat value (Btu per cubic feet) as defined in section 3.4.6.3 of this appendix. field use, 53.5, IMC, and FMC as defined in section 4.1 of this appendix. 4.4 Total per-cycle gas dryer energy consumption expressed in kilowatt-hours. cg E cg ge gg Where: E ge E gg 4.5 Per-cycle standby mode and off mode energy consumption. TSO E TSO default default lowest lowest Where: P default P lowest lowest S default S lowest K = Conversion factor of watt-hours to kilowatt-hours = 0.001. 283 = Representative average number of clothes dryer cycles in a year. 8,620 = Combined annual hours for inactive and off mode. 4,310 = One-half of the combined annual hours for inactive and off mode. 4.6 Per-cycle combined total energy consumption expressed in kilowatt-hours. CC E CC ce TSO Where: E ce E TSO E CC cg TSO Where: E cg E TSO 4.7 Combined Energy Factor in pounds per kilowatt-hour. CEF = W bonedry CC Where: W bonedry E CC [76 FR 1032, Jan. 6, 2011, as amended at 78 FR 49645, Aug. 14, 2013; 86 FR 56639, Oct. 8, 2021; 89 FR 81305, Oct. 8, 2024; 90 FR 5536, Jan. 17, 2025] Appendix D2 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Clothes Dryers Note: The procedures in either appendix D1 to this subpart or this appendix must be used to determine compliance with the energy conservation standards for clothes dryers provided at § 430.32(h)(3). Manufacturers must use a single appendix for all representations, including certifications of compliance, and may not use appendix D1 to this subpart for certain representations and this appendix for other representations. The procedures in this appendix must be used to determine compliance with the energy conservation standards for clothes dryers provided at § 430.32(h)(4). Manufacturers may use this appendix to certify compliance with the clothes dryer standards provided at § 430.32(h)(4) prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards. Per-cycle standby mode and off mode energy consumption in section 4.5 of this appendix is calculated using the value for the annual representative average number of clothes dryer cycles in a year specified in section 4.5.1(a) of this appendix until March 1, 2028. Beginning on March 1, 2028, per-cycle standby mode and off mode energy consumption in section 4.5 of this appendix is calculated using the value for the annual representative average number of clothes dryer cycles in a year specified in section 4.5.1(b) of this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3 the entire standard for AHAM HLD-1 and IEC 62301, however, only enumerated provisions of those documents are applicable to this appendix. In cases where there is a conflict between any industry standard(s) and this appendix, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the industry standard(s). (1) AHAM HLD-1: (i) Section 3.3.5.1 “Standard Simulator” as referenced in sections 2.1.2 through 2.1.3 of this appendix. (ii) [Reserved] (2) IEC 62301: (i) Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 as referenced in section 3.5.2 of this appendix. (ii) Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2 “Sampling Method” as referenced in section 3.5.3 of this appendix. 1. Definitions 1.1 “Active mode” means a mode in which the clothes dryer is connected to a main power source, has been activated and is performing the main function of tumbling the clothing with or without heated or unheated forced air circulation to remove moisture from the clothing, remove wrinkles or prevent wrinkling of the clothing, or both. 1.2 “AHAM” means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers. 1.3 “AHAM HLD-1” means the test standard published by the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, titled “Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers,” ANSI-approved June 11, 2010, ANSI/AHAM HLD-1-2010. 1.4 “Automatic termination control” means a dryer control system with a sensor which monitors either the dryer load temperature or its moisture content and with a controller which automatically terminates the drying process. A mark, detent, or other visual indicator or detent which indicates a preferred automatic termination control setting must be present if the dryer is to be classified as having an “automatic termination control.” A mark is a visible single control setting on one or more dryer controls. 1.5 “Automatic termination control dryer” means a clothes dryer which can be preset to carry out at least one sequence of operations to be terminated by means of a system assessing, directly or indirectly, the moisture content of the load. An automatic termination control dryer with supplementary timer or that may also be manually controlled shall be tested as an automatic termination control dryer. 1.6 “Bone dry” means a condition of a load of test cloths which has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 minutes, removed, and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 10-minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent or less. 1.7 “Compact” or “compact size” means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of less than 4.4 cubic feet. 1.8 “Cool down” means that portion of the clothes drying cycle when the added gas or electric heat is terminated and the clothes continue to tumble and dry within the drum. 1.9 “Cycle” means a sequence of operation of a clothes dryer which performs a clothes drying operation, and may include variations or combinations of the functions of heating, tumbling, and drying. 1.10 “Drum capacity” means the volume of the drying drum in cubic feet. 1.11 “Final moisture content” (“FMC”) means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the dry test load ( i.e., 1.12 “IEC 62301” (Second Edition) means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission (“IEC”) titled “Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power,” Publication 62301 (Edition 2.0 2011-01) (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 1.13 “Initial moisture content” (“IMC”) means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the damp test load ( i.e., 1.14 “Inactive mode” means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer, or that provides continuous status display. 1.15 “Moisture content” means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the test load to the bone-dry weight of the test load, expressed as a percent. 1.16 “Off mode” means a mode in which the clothes dryer is connected to a main power source and is not providing any active or standby mode function, and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position is included within the classification of an off mode. 1.17 “Standard size” means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of 4.4 cubic feet or greater. 1.18 “Standby mode” means any product modes where the energy using product is connected to a mains power source and offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time: (a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer. (b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks ( e.g., 1.19 “Timer dryer” means a clothes dryer that can be preset to carry out at least one operation to be terminated by a timer, but may also be manually controlled, and does not include any automatic termination function. 1.20 “Vented clothes dryer” means a clothes dryer that exhausts the evaporated moisture from the cabinet. 1.21 “Ventless clothes dryer” means a clothes dryer that uses a closed-loop system with an internal condenser to remove the evaporated moisture from the heated air. The moist air is not discharged from the cabinet. 2. Testing Conditions 2.1 Installation. 2.1.1 All clothes dryers. 2.1.2 Vented clothes dryers. 2.1.3 Ventless clothes dryers. 2.2 Ambient temperature and humidity. 2.2.1 For drying testing, maintain the room ambient air temperature at 75 ±3 F and the room relative humidity at 50 percent ±10 percent relative humidity. 2.2.2 For standby and off mode testing, maintain room ambient air temperature conditions as specified in section 4, paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 2.3 Energy supply. 2.3.1 Electrical supply. 2.3.1.1 Supply voltage waveform. 2.3.2 Gas supply. 2.3.2.1 Natural gas supply. n 2.3.2.2 Propane gas supply. p 2.3.2.3 Hourly Btu Rating. (1) Modify the gas inlet supply pressure within the allowable range specified in section 2.3.2.1 or 2.3.2.2 of this appendix, as applicable; (2) If the clothes dryer is equipped with a gas pressure regulator, modify the outlet pressure of the gas pressure regulator within ±10 percent of the value recommended by the manufacturer in the installation manual, on the nameplate sticker, or wherever the manufacturer makes such a recommendation for the basic model; and (3) Modify the orifice as necessary to achieve the required hourly Btu rating. 2.4 Instrumentation. 2.4.1 Weighing scales. 2.4.1.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. 2.4.1.2 Weighing scale for drum capacity measurements. 2.4.2 Kilowatt-hour meter. 2.4.3 Gas meter. 2.4.4 Dry and wet bulb psychrometer. 2.4.5 Temperature. 2.4.6 Standard Continuous Flow Calorimeter. 2.4.7 Standby mode and off mode watt meter. 2.5 Lint trap. 2.6 Test cloths. 2.6.1 Material Specifications. 2.6.2 Material Verification. 2.6.3 Lot Identification. 2.6.4 Pre-Conditioning. 2.6.5 Lifetime. 2.7 Test loads. 2.7.1 Load size. Table 1—Test Loads Unit under test Test load Standard size clothes dryer 8.45 pounds ± .085 pounds. Compact size clothes dryer 3.00 pounds ± .03 pounds. Each test load must consist of energy test cloths and no more than five energy stuffer cloths. 2.7.2 Test load preparation. 2.7.3 Method of loading. 2.8 Clothes dryer pre-conditioning. 2.8.1 Vented clothes dryers. 2.8.2 Ventless clothes dryers. 3. Test Procedures and Measurements 3.1 Drum Capacity. i.e., C= C w d 3.2 Dryer Loading. 3.3 Test cycle. 3.3.1 Timer dryers. 3.3.2 Automatic termination control dryers. Operate the clothes dryer until the completion of the programmed cycle, including the cool down period. The cycle shall be considered complete when the dryer indicates to the user that the cycle has finished (by means of a display, indicator light, audible signal, or other signal) and the heater and drum/fan motor shuts off for the final time. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a wrinkle prevention mode ( i.e., 3.4 Data recording. 3.4.1 Bone-dry weight of the test load, W bonedry 3.4.2 Moisture content of the wet test load before the test, IMC, as described in section 2.7.2 of this appendix. 3.4.3 Moisture content of the dry test load obtained after the test, FMC, as described in section 3.3 of this appendix. 3.4.4 Test room conditions, temperature, and percent relative humidity described in 2.2.1. 3.4.5 For electric dryers—the total kilowatt-hours of electric energy, E t 3.4.6 For gas dryers: 3.4.6.1 Total kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, E te 3.4.6.2 Cubic feet of gas per cycle, E tg 3.4.6.3 Correct the gas heating value, GEF, as measured in 2.3.2.1 and 2.3.2.2, to standard pressure and temperature conditions in accordance with U.S. Bureau of Standards, circular C417, 1938. 3.4.7 The cycle settings selected, in accordance with section 3.3.2 of this appendix, for the automatic termination control dryer test. 3.5 Standby mode and off mode power. 3.5.1 Perform standby mode and off mode testing after completion of an active mode drying cycle included as part of the test cycle; after removing the test load; without changing the control panel settings used for the active mode drying cycle; with the door closed; and without disconnecting the electrical energy supply to the clothes dryer between completion of the active mode drying cycle and the start of standby mode and off mode testing. 3.5.2 For clothes dryers that take some time to automatically enter a stable inactive mode or off mode state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 of IEC 62301, allow sufficient time for the clothes dryer to automatically reach the default inactive/off mode state before proceeding with the test measurement. 3.5.3 Once the stable inactive/off mode state has been reached, measure and record the default inactive/off mode power, P default 3.5.4 For a clothes dryer with a switch (or other means) that can be optionally selected by the end user to achieve a lower-power inactive/off mode state than the default inactive/off mode state measured in section 3.5.3 of this appendix, after performing the measurement in section 3.5.3 of this appendix, activate the switch (or other means) to the position resulting in the lowest power consumption and repeat the measurement procedure described in section 3.5.3 of this appendix. Measure and record the lowest inactive/off mode power, P lowest 4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements 4.1 Total per-cycle electric dryer energy consumption. ce, E ce t for automatic termination control dryers, and, E ce t for timer dryers Where: 55.5 = an experimentally established value for the percent reduction in the moisture content of the test load during a laboratory test cycle expressed as a percent. E t field use = 1.18, the field use factor for clothes dryers with time termination control systems only without any automatic termination control functions. IMC = the moisture content of the wet test load as recorded in section 3.4.2 of this appendix. FMC = the moisture content of the dry test load as recorded in section 3.4.3 of this appendix. 4.2 Per-cycle gas dryer electrical energy consumption. ge, E ge te for automatic termination control dryers, and, E ge te for timer dryers Where: E te field use, 55.5, IMC, and FMC as defined in section 4.1 of this appendix. 4.3 Per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption. gg E gg tg for automatic termination control dryers, and, E gg tg for timer dryers Where: E tg GEF = corrected gas heat value (Btu per cubic foot) as defined in section 3.4.6.3 of this appendix, field use, 55.5, IMC, and FMC as defined in section 4.1 of this appendix. 4.4 Total per-cycle gas dryer energy consumption expressed in kilowatt-hours. cg E cg ge gg Where: E ge E gg 4.5 Per-cycle standby mode and off mode energy consumption. TSO E TSO default default lowest lowest annual Where: P default P lowest lowest S default S lowest K = Conversion factor of watt-hours to kilowatt-hours = 0.001. C annual 8,620 = Combined annual hours for inactive and off mode. 4,310 = One-half of the combined annual hours for inactive and off mode. 4.5.1 Representative average number of clothes dryer cycles in a year. (1) C annual (2) C annual 4.6 Per-cycle combined total energy consumption expressed in kilowatt-hours. CC E CC ce TSO Where: E ce E TSO E CC cg TSO Where: E cg E TSO 4.7 Combined Energy Factor in pounds per kilowatt-hour. CEF = W bonedry CC Where: W bonedry E CC [78 FR 49647, Aug. 14, 2013, as amended at 86 FR 56641, Oct. 8, 2021; 89 FR 81305, Oct. 8, 2024; 90 FR 5536, Jan. 17, 2025] Appendix E to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Water Heaters Note: On and after December 18, 2023, representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of consumer water heaters covered by this test method, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix, except as described in the paragraphs that follow. On and after June 15, 2024, representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of residential-duty commercial water heaters covered by this test method, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix, except as follows. Prior to May 6, 2029, consumer water heaters subject to section 4.10 of this appendix may optionally apply the requirements of section 4.10 of this appendix. For residential-duty commercial water heaters subject to section 4.10 of this appendix the requirements of section 4.10 of this appendix may optionally be applied prior to the compliance date of any final rule reviewing potential amended energy conservation standards for this equipment published after June 21, 2023. Prior to May 6, 2029, consumer water heaters subject to section 5.1.2 of this appendix (as specified at § 429.17(a)(1)(ii)(E) of this chapter) may optionally apply the requirements of section 5.1.2 of this appendix in lieu of the requirements in section 5.1.1 of this appendix. On or after May 6, 2029, representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of consumer water heaters subject to sections 4.10 and 5.1.2 of this appendix must be based on testing conducted in accordance with those provisions. 0. Incorporation by Reference. DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3 the entire standard for: ASHRAE 41.1-2020; ASHRAE 41.6-2014; ASHRAE 118.2-2022; ASTM D2156-09 (R2018); and ASTM E97-1987. However, only enumerated provisions of ASHRAE 118.2-2022 are applicable to this appendix, as follows: 0.1 ASHRAE 118.2-2022 (a) Annex B—Gas Heating Value Correction Factor; (b) [Reserved] 0.2 [Reserved] 1. Definitions. 1.1. Cut-in 1.2. Cut-out 1.3. Design Power Rating 1.4. Draw Cluster 1.5. First-Hour Rating i.e., 1.6. Flow-Activated 1.7. Heat Trap 1.8. Maximum GPM (L/min) Rating 1.19 Water Heater Requiring a Storage Tank 1.10. Rated Storage Volume 1.11. Recovery Efficiency 1.12. Recovery Period 1.13. Split-system heat pump water heater 1.14. Standby 1.15. Symbol Usage. C p E annual E annual,e E annual,f E X F hr F max i k V M del,i i M in,i i M* del,i i M* in,i i M del,10m M in,10m n N N r Q Q d Q da d Q dm da HWD Q e Q f Q hr Q HW Q HW,67 °F Q HWD HW Q r Q stby stby,1 Q su,0 Q su,f T 0 T 24 T a,stby T a,stby,1 T t,stby,1 T del T del,i i T in T st T p τ p T in,p T out,p T in,i i T max,1 T su,0 T su,f T del,i i T max,i i T min,i i UA UEF V V del,i i V in,i i V* del,i i V* in,i i V del,10m V in,10m V st V eff v out,p W f W t η r ρ τ p τ stby,1 τ stby,2 1.16. Temperature Controller 1.17. Thermal break 1.18. Uniform Energy Factor 1.19. Water Heater Requiring a Storage Tank 2. Test Conditions. 2.1 Installation Requirements. 2.2 Ambient Air Temperature and Relative Humidity. 2.2.1 Non-Heat Pump Water Heaters. 2.2.2 Heat Pump Water Heaters. When testing a split-system heat pump water heater or heat pump water heater requiring a separate storage tank, the heat pump portion of the system shall be tested at the conditions within this section and the separate water heater or unfired hot water storage tank shall be tested at either the conditions within this section or the conditions specified in section 2.2.1 of this appendix. 2.3 Supply Water Temperature. 2.4 Outlet Water Temperature. 2.5 Set Point Temperature. 2.6 Supply Water Pressure. 2.7 Electrical and/or Fossil Fuel Supply. 2.7.1 Electrical. 2.7.2 Natural Gas. 2.7.3 Propane Gas. 2.7.4 Fuel Oil Supply. 2.8 Optional Test Conditions (Heat Pump-Type Water Heaters). X X, Heat pump type Metric Outdoor air conditions Indoor air conditions Supply water Dry-bulb Relative Dry-bulb Relative Split-System or Circulating E 5 5.0 30 67.5 50 42.0 E 34 34.0 72 47.0 E 95 95.0 25 67.0 Integrated, Split-System, or Circulating E 50 N/A N/A 50.0 58 50.0 E 95 N/A N/A 95.0 40 67.0 3. Instrumentation. 3.1 Pressure Measurements. Item measured Instrument accuracy Instrument precision Gas pressure ±0.1 inch of water column (±0.025 kPa) ±0.05 inch of water column (±0.012 kPa). Atmospheric pressure ±0.1 inch of mercury column (±0.34 kPa) ±0.05 inch of mercury column (±0.17 kPa). Water pressure ±1.0 pounds per square inch (±6.9 kPa) ±0.50 pounds per square inch (±3.45 kPa). 3.2 Temperature Measurement 3.2.1 Measurement. 3.2.2 Accuracy and Precision. Item measured Instrument accuracy Instrument precision Air dry-bulb temperature ±0.2 °F (±0.1 °C) ±0.1 °F (±0.06 °C). Air wet-bulb temperature ±0.2 °F (±0.1 °C) ±0.1 °F (±0.06 °C). Inlet and outlet water temperatures ±0.2 °F (±0.1 °C) ±0.1 °F (±0.06 °C). Storage tank temperatures ±0.5 °F (±0.3 °C) ±0.25 °F (±0.14 °C). 3.2.3 Scale Division. 3.2.4 Temperature Difference. (a) A thermopile (b) Calibrated resistance thermometers (c) Precision thermometers (d) Calibrated thermistors (e) Calibrated thermocouples (f) Quartz thermometers 3.2.5 Thermopile Construction. 3.2.6 Time Constant. 3.3 Liquid Flow Rate Measurement. 3.4 Electrical Energy. 3.5 Fossil Fuels. 3.6 Mass Measurements. 3.7 Heating Value. 3.8 Time. 3.9 Volume. 3.10 Relative Humidity. 4. Installation. 4.1 Water Heater Mounting. 3/4 3/4 5/8 4.2 Water Supply. 4.3 Water Inlet and Outlet Configuration. All dimensions noted in Figures 1 through 7 of section 7 of this appendix must be achieved. All piping between the water heater and inlet and outlet temperature sensors, noted as T IN OUT At the discretion of the test laboratory, the mass or water delivered may be measured on either the inlet or outlet of the water heater. For water heaters designed to be used with a mixing valve and that do not have a self-contained mixing valve, a mixing valve shall be installed according to the water heater and/or mixing valve manufacturer's installation instructions. If permitted by the water heater and mixing valve manufacturer's instructions, the mixing valve and cold water junction may be installed where the elbows are located in the outlet and inlet line, respectively. If there are no installation instructions for the mixing valve in the water heater or mixing valve manufacturer's instructions, then the mixing valve shall be installed on the outlet line and the cold water shall be supplied from the inlet line from a junction installed downstream from the location where the inlet water temperature is measured. The outlet water temperature, water flow rate, and/or mass measuring instrumentation, if installed on the outlet side of the water heater, shall be installed downstream from the mixing valve. 4.4 Fuel and/or Electrical Power and Energy Consumption. 4.5 Internal Storage Tank Temperature Measurements. (a) The anodic device opening; (b) The relief valve opening; or (c) The hot water outlet. If installed through the relief valve opening or the hot water outlet, a tee fitting or outlet piping, as applicable, must be installed as close as possible to its original location. If the relief valve temperature sensor is relocated, and it no longer extends into the top of the tank, install a substitute relief valve that has a sensing element that can reach into the tank. If the hot water outlet includes a heat trap, install the heat trap on top of the tee fitting. Cover any added fittings with thermal insulation having an R value between 4 and 8 h·ft 2 2 4.6 Ambient Air Temperature Measurement. 4.7 Inlet and Outlet Water Temperature Measurements. 4.8 Flow Control. 4.9 Flue Requirements. 4.9.1 Gas-Fired Water Heaters. 4.9.2 Oil-Fired Water Heaters. 4.10 Storage Tank Requirement for Water Heaters Requiring a Storage Tank (i.e., Circulating Water Heaters). i.e., 4.11 External Communication. 5. Test Procedures. 5.1 Operational Mode Selection. i.e., 5.1.1 Testing at Normal Setpoint. 5.1.2 High Temperature Testing. max,1 (1) Electric storage water heaters that do not have a permanent mode or setting in which the water heater is capable of heating and storing water above 135 °F (as measured by T max,1 (2) Electric storage water heaters that meet the definition of “heat pump-type” water heater at § 430.2; (3) Electric storage water heaters that are only capable of heating the stored water above 135 °F in response to instructions received from a utility or third-party demand-response program. (4) Electric storage water heaters with measured storage volumes (V st This paragraph may optionally apply to electric heat pump water heaters for voluntary representations of high-temperature operation only. For those equipped with factory-installed or built-in mixing valves, set the unit to maintain the highest mean tank temperature possible while delivering water at 125 °F ±5 °F. For those not so equipped, install an ASSE 1017-certified mixing valve in accordance with the provisions in section 4.3 of this appendix and adjust the valve to deliver water at 125 °F ±5 °F when the water heater is operating at its highest storage tank temperature setpoint. Maintain this setting throughout the entirety of the test. 5.2 Water Heater Preparation. 5.2 1 Determination of Storage Tank Volume. st, t f 5.2.2 Setting the Outlet Discharge Temperature. 5.2.2.1 Flow-Activated Water Heaters, including certain instantaneous water heaters and certain storage-type water heaters. 5.2.2.2 All Other Water Heaters. 5.2.2.2.1 Water Heaters with a Single Temperature Controller. 5.2.2.2.1.1 Water Heaters with Rated Volumes Less than 20 Gallons. 5.2.2.2.1.2 Water Heaters with Rated Volumes Greater than or Equal to 20 Gallons. 5.2.2.2.2 Water Heaters with Two or More Temperature Controllers. (a) At least 50 percent of the water drawn during the first draw of the first-hour rating test procedure shall be delivered at a temperature within the range specified in section 2.4 of this appendix. (b) No water is delivered above the range specified in section 2.4 of this appendix during first-hour rating test. (c) The delivery temperature measured 15 seconds after commencement of each draw begun prior to an elapsed time of 60 minutes from the start of the test shall be within the range specified in section 2.4 of this appendix. If these conditions are not met, turn off the water heater, adjust the temperature controllers, and then drain and refill the tank with supply water at the temperature specified in section 2.3 of this appendix. Repeat the procedure described at the start of section 5.2.2.2.2 of this appendix until the criteria for setting the temperature controllers is met. If the conditions stated above are met, the data obtained during the process of verifying the temperature control set-points may be used in determining the first-hour rating provided that all other conditions and methods required in sections 2 and 5.2.4 of this appendix in preparing the water heater were followed. 5.2.3 Power Input Determination. 2 5.2.4 Soak-In Period for Water Heaters with Rated Storage Volumes Greater than or Equal to 2 Gallons. 5.3 Delivery Capacity Tests. 5.3.1 General. 5.3.2 Maximum GPM Rating Test for Flow-Activated Water Heaters. For this 10-minute test, either collect the withdrawn water for later measurement of the total mass removed or use a water meter to directly measure the water mass of volume removed. Initiate water flow through the water heater and record the inlet and outlet water temperatures beginning 15 seconds after the start of the test and at subsequent 5-second intervals throughout the duration of the test. At the end of 10 minutes, turn off the water. Determine and record the mass of water collected, M 10m 10m 5.3.3 First-Hour Rating Test. 5.3.3.1 General. 5.3.3.2 Draw Initiation Criteria. 5.3.3.3 Test Sequence. i.e., Initiate a draw after a maximum mean tank temperature (the maximum of the mean temperatures of the individual sensors) has been observed following a cut-out. If the water heater cannot have its internal tank temperatures measured, wait 5 minutes after cut-out. Record the time when the draw is initiated and designate it as an elapsed time of zero (τ* = 0). (The superscript * is used to denote variables pertaining to the first-hour rating test). Record the outlet water temperature beginning 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at 5-second intervals thereafter until the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum outlet temperature that occurs during this first draw and record it as T* max,1 max,1 max,1 max,1 max,1 max,1 max,1 min,1 T del,i 1 1 Initiate a second and, if applicable, successive draw(s) each time the applicable draw initiation criteria described in section 5.3.3.2 of this appendix are satisfied. As required for the first draw, record the outlet water temperature 15 seconds after initiating each draw and at 5-second intervals thereafter until the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum outlet temperature that occurs during each draw and record it as T* max,i max,i max,i min,i T del,i i i If a draw is occurring at one hour from the start of the test, continue this draw until the outlet temperature decreases to T* max,n max,n min,n−1 min,n−1 i.e., n n T del,n n n, 5.4 24-Hour Simulated-Use Test. 5.4.1 Selection of Draw Pattern. Table I—Draw Pattern To Be Used Based on First-Hour Rating First-hour rating greater than or equal to: . . . and first-hour rating less than: Draw pattern to be used in the 24-hour simulated-use test 0 gallons 18 gallons Very-Small-Usage (Table III.1). 18 gallons 51 gallons Low-Usage (Table III.2). 51 gallons 75 gallons Medium-Usage (Table III.3). 75 gallons No upper limit High-Usage (Table III.4). Table II—Draw Pattern To Be Used Based on Maximum GPM Rating Maximum GPM rating greater than or equal to: and maximum GPM rating less than: Draw pattern to be used in the 24-hour simulated-use test 0 gallons/minute 1.7 gallons/minute Very-Small-Usage (Table III.1). 1.7 gallons/minute 2.8 gallons/minute Low-Usage (Table III.2). 2.8 gallons/minute 4 gallons/minute Medium-Usage (Table III.3). 4 gallons/minute No upper limit High-Usage (Table III.4). The draw patterns are provided in Tables III.1 through III.4 in section 5.5 of this appendix. Use the appropriate draw pattern when conducting the test sequence provided in section 5.4.2 of this appendix for water heaters with rated storage volumes greater than or equal to 2 gallons or section 5.4.3 of this appendix for water heaters with rated storage volumes less than 2 gallons. 5.4.2 Test Sequence for Water Heater With Rated Storage Volume Greater Than or Equal to 2 Gallons. If the water heater is turned off, fill the water heater with supply water at the temperature specified in section 2.3 of this appendix and maintain supply water pressure as described in section 2.6 of this appendix. Turn on the water heater and associated heat pump unit, if present. If turned on in this fashion, the soak-in period described in section 5.2.4 of this appendix shall be implemented. If the water heater has undergone a first-hour rating test prior to conduct of the 24-hour simulated-use test, allow the water heater to fully recover after completion of that test such that the main burner, heating elements, or heat pump compressor of the water heater are no longer raising the temperature of the stored water. In all cases, the water heater shall sit idle for 1 hour prior to the start of the 24-hour test; during which time no water is drawn from the unit, and there is no energy input to the main heating elements, heat pump compressor, and/or burners. For water heaters that can have their internal storage tank temperature measured directly, perform testing in accordance with the instructions in section 5.4.2.1 of this appendix. For water heaters that cannot have their internal tank temperatures measured, perform testing in accordance with the instructions in section 5.4.2.2. of this appendix. 5.4.2.1 Water Heaters Which Can Have Internal Storage Tank Temperature Measured Directly. After the 1-hour period specified in section 5.4.2 of this appendix, the 24-hour simulated-use test will begin. One minute prior to the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test, record the mean tank temperature (T 0 At the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test, record the electrical and/or fuel measurement readings, as appropriate. Begin the 24-hour simulated-use test by withdrawing the volume specified in the appropriate table in section 5.5 of this appendix ( i.e., All draws during the 24-hour simulated-use test shall be made at the flow rates specified in the applicable draw pattern table in section 5.5 of this appendix, within a tolerance of ±0.25 gallons per minute (±0.9 liters per minute). Measurements of the inlet and outlet temperatures shall be made 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every subsequent 3-second interval throughout the duration of each draw. Calculate and record the mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature for each draw T del,i in,i i i The first recovery period is the time from the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test and continues during the temperature rise of the stored water until the first cut-out; if the cut-out occurs during a subsequent draw, the first recovery period includes the time until the draw of water from the tank stops. If, after the first cut-out occurs but during a subsequent draw, a subsequent cut-in occurs prior to the draw completion, the first recovery period includes the time until the subsequent cut-out occurs, prior to another draw. The first recovery period may continue until a cut-out occurs when water is not being removed from the water heater or a cut-out occurs during a draw and the water heater does not cut-in prior to the end of the draw. At the end of the first recovery period, record the maximum mean tank temperature observed after cut-out (T max,1 r etc., The start of the portion of the test during which the standby loss coefficient is determined depends upon whether the unit has fully recovered from the first draw cluster. If a recovery is occurring at or within five minutes after the end of the final draw in the first draw cluster, as identified in the applicable draw pattern table in section 5.5 of this appendix, then the standby period starts when a maximum mean tank temperature is observed starting five minutes after the end of the recovery period that follows that draw. If a recovery does not occur at or within five minutes after the end of the final draw in the first draw cluster, as identified in the applicable draw pattern table in section 5.5 of this appendix, then the standby period starts five minutes after the end of that draw. Determine and record the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumed from the beginning of the test to the start of the standby period (Q su,0 In preparation for determining the energy consumed during standby, record the reading given on the electrical energy (watt-hour) meter, the gas meter, and/or the scale used to determine oil consumption, as appropriate. Record the mean tank temperature at the start of the standby period (T su,0 su,f su,f su,f stby,1 Following the final draw of the prescribed draw pattern and subsequent recovery, allow the water heater to remain in the standby mode until exactly 24 hours have elapsed since the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test ( i.e., i.e., In the event that the recovery period continues from the end of the last draw of the first draw cluster until the subsequent draw, the standby period will start after the end of the first recovery period after the last draw of the 24-hour simulated-use test, when the temperature reaches the maximum mean tank temperature, though no sooner than five minutes after the end of this recovery period. The standby period shall last eight hours, so testing may extend beyond the 24-hour duration of the 24-hour simulated-use test. Determine and record the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumed from the beginning of the 24-hour simulated-use test to the start of the 8-hour standby period (Q su,0 su,0 su,f su,f su,f stby,1 a,stby,1 t,stby,1 If the standby period occurred at the end of the first recovery period after the last draw of the 24-hour simulated-use test, allow the water heater to remain in the standby mode until exactly 24 hours have elapsed since the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test ( i.e., 24 24 Record the time during which water is not being withdrawn from the water heater during the entire 24-hour period (τ stby,2 5.4.2.2 Water Heaters Which Cannot Have Internal Storage Tank Temperature Measured Directly. After the water heater has undergone a 1-hour idle period (as described in section 5.4.2 of this appendix), deactivate the burner, compressor, or heating element(s). Remove water from the storage tank by performing a continuous draw at the flow rate specified for the first draw of applicable draw pattern for the 24-hour simulated use test in section 5.5 of this appendix within a tolerance of ±0.25 gallons per minute (±0.9 liters per minute). While removing the hot water, measure the inlet and outlet temperature after initiating the draw at 3-second intervals. Remove water until the outlet water temperature is within ±2 °F (±1.1 °C) of the inlet water temperature for 15 consecutive seconds. Determine the mean tank temperature using section 6.3.77 of this appendix and assign this value of T st T 0 T max,1 T su,0 After completing the draw, reactivate the burner, compressor, or heating elements(s) and allow the unit to fully recover such that the main burner, heating elements, or heat pump compressor is no longer raising the temperature of the stored water. Let the water heater sit idle again for 1 hour prior to beginning the 24-hour test, during which time no water shall be drawn from the unit, and there shall be no energy input to the main heating elements. After the 1-hour period, the 24-hour simulated-use test will begin. At the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test, record the electrical and/or fuel measurement readings, as appropriate. Begin the 24-hour simulated-use test by withdrawing the volume specified in the appropriate table in section 5.5 of this appendix ( i.e., All draws during the 24-hour simulated-use test shall be made at the flow rates specified in the applicable draw pattern table in section 5.5 of this appendix, within a tolerance of ±0.25 gallons per minute (±0.9 liters per minute). Measurements of the inlet and outlet temperatures shall be made 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every subsequent 3-second interval throughout the duration of each draw. Calculate and record the mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature for each draw T del,i in,i i i The first recovery period is the time from the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test and continues until the first cut-out; if the cut-out occurs during a subsequent draw, the first recovery period includes the time until the draw of water from the tank stops. If, after the first cut-out occurs but during a subsequent draw, a subsequent cut-in occurs prior to the draw completion, the first recovery period includes the time until the subsequent cut-out occurs, prior to another draw. The first recovery period may continue until a cut-out occurs when water is not being removed from the water heater or a cut-out occurs during a draw and the water heater does not cut-in prior to the end of the draw. At the end of the first recovery period, record the total energy consumed by the water heater from the beginning of the test (Q r The standby period begins at five minutes after the first time a recovery ends following last draw of the simulated-use test and shall continue for 8 hours. At the end of the 8-hour standby period, record the total amount of time elapsed since the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test ( i.e., Determine and record the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumed from the beginning of the 24-hour simulated-use test to the start of the 8-hour standby period (Q su,0 T st T su,f T 24 Determine the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel energy consumption from the beginning of the test to the end of the standby period (Q su,f stby,1 a,stby,1 t,stby,1 su,0 su,f. 5.4.3 Test Sequence for Water Heaters With Rated Storage Volume Less Than 2 Gallons. Establish normal operation with the discharge water temperature at 125 °F ± 5 °F (51.7 °C ± 2.8 °C) and set the flow rate as determined in section 5.2 of this appendix. Prior to commencement of the 24-hour simulated-use test, the unit shall remain in an idle state in which controls are active but no water is drawn through the unit for a period of one hour. With no draw occurring, record the reading given by the gas meter and/or the electrical energy meter as appropriate. Begin the 24-hour simulated-use test by withdrawing the volume specified in Tables III.1 through III.4 of section 5.5 of this appendix for the first draw at the flow rate specified. Record the time when this first draw is initiated and designate it as an elapsed time, τ, of 0. At the elapsed times specified in Tables III.1 through III.4 for a particular draw pattern, initiate additional draws, removing the volume of hot water at the prescribed flow rate specified in Tables III.1 through III.4. The maximum allowable deviation from the specified volume of water removed for any single draw taken at a nominal flow rate less than or equal to 1.7 GPM (6.4 L/min) is ±0.1 gallons (±0.4 liters). The maximum allowable deviation from the specified volume of water removed for any single draw taken at a nominal flow rate of 3.0 GPM (11.4 L/min) is ±0.25 gallons (0.9 liters). The quantity of water drawn during the final draw shall be increased or decreased as necessary such that the total volume of water withdrawn equals the prescribed daily amount for that draw pattern ±1.0 gallon (±3.8 liters). If this adjustment to the volume drawn in the last draw results in no draw taking place, the test is considered invalid. All draws during the 24-hour simulated-use test shall be made at the flow rates specified in the applicable draw pattern table in section 5.5 of this appendix within a tolerance of ±0.25 gallons per minute (±0.9 liters per minute) unless the unit being tested is flow-activated and has a rated Max GPM of less than 1 gallon per minute, in which case the tolerance shall be ±25% of the rated Max GPM. Measurements of the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be made 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every 3-second interval thereafter throughout the duration of the draw. Calculate the mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold-water inlet temperature for each draw. Record the mass of the withdrawn water or the water meter reading, as appropriate, after each draw. At the end of the first recovery period following the first draw, determine and record the fossil fuel and/or electrical energy consumed, Q r i.e., 5.5 Draw Patterns. The draw patterns to be imposed during 24-hour simulated-use tests are provided in Tables III.1 through III.4. Subject each water heater under test to one of these draw patterns based on its first-hour rating or maximum GPM rating, as discussed in section 5.4.1 of this appendix. Each draw pattern specifies the elapsed time in hours and minutes during the 24-hour test when a draw is to commence, the total volume of water in gallons (liters) that is to be removed during each draw, and the flow rate at which each draw is to be taken, in gallons (liters) per minute. Table III.1—Very-Small-Usage Draw Pattern Draw No. Time during test ** Volume Flow rate *** 1 * 0:00 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8) 2 * 1:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 3 * 1:05 0.5 (1.9) 1 (3.8) 4 * 1:10 0.5 (1.9) 1 (3.8) 5 * 1:15 0.5 (1.9) 1 (3.8) 6 8:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 7 8:15 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8) 8 9:00 1.5 (5.7) 1 (3.8) 9 9:15 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) Total Volume Drawn Per Day: 10 gallons (38 L) * Denotes draws in first draw cluster. ** If a draw extends to the start of the subsequent draw, then the subsequent draw shall start when the required volume of the previous draw has been delivered. *** Should the water heater have a maximum GPM rating less than 1 GPM (3.8 L/min), then all draws shall be implemented at a flow rate equal to the rated maximum GPM. Table III.2—Low-Usage Draw Pattern Draw No. Time during test Volume Flow rate 1 * 0:00 15.0 (56.8) 1.7 (6.4) 2 * 0:30 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8) 3 * 1:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 4 10:30 6.0 (22.7) 1.7 (6.4) 5 11:30 4.0 (15.1) 1.7 (6.4) 6 12:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 7 12:45 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 8 12:50 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 9 16:15 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8) 10 16:45 2.0 (7.6) 1.7 (6.4) 11 17:00 3.0 (11.4) 1.7 (6.4) Total Volume Drawn Per Day: 38 gallons (144 L) *Denotes draws in first draw cluster. Table III.3—Medium-Usage Draw Pattern Draw No. Time during test Volume Flow Rate 1 * 0:00 15.0 (56.8) 1.7 (6.4) 2 * 0:30 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8) 3 * 1:40 9.0 (34.1) 1.7 (6.4) 4 10:30 9.0 (34.1) 1.7 (6.4) 5 11:30 5.0 (18.9) 1.7 (6.4) 6 12:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 7 12:45 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 8 12:50 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 9 16:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 10 16:15 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8) 11 16:45 2.0 (7.6) 1.7 (6.4) 12 17:00 7.0 (26.5) 1.7 (6.4) Total Volume Drawn Per Day: 55 gallons (208 L) * Denotes draws in first draw cluster. Table III.4—High-Usage Draw Pattern Draw No. Time during test Volume Flow rate 1 * 0:00 27.0 (102) 3 (11.4) 2 * 0:30 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8) 3 * 0:40 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 4 * 1:40 9.0 (34.1) 1.7 (6.4) 5 10:30 15.0 (56.8) 3 (11.4) 6 11:30 5.0 (18.9) 1.7 (6.4) 7 12:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 8 12:45 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 9 12:50 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8) 10 16:00 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8) 11 16:15 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8) 12 16:30 2.0 (7.6) 1.7 (6.4) 13 16:45 2.0 (7.6) 1.7 (6.4) 14 17:00 14.0 (53.0) 3 (11.4) Total Volume Drawn Per Day: 84 gallons (318 L) * Denotes draws in first draw cluster. 5.6 Optional Tests (Heat Pump-Type Water Heaters). X 6. Computations. 6.1 First-Hour Rating Computation. hr Where: n = the number of draws that are completed during the first-hour rating test. V* del,i i Where: M* del,i i ρ del,i i T del,i or, if the volume of the water entering the water heater is being measured, Where: V* in,i i ρ in,i i T in,i or, if the mass of water entering the water heater is being measured, Where: M* in,i i For the case in which a draw is not in progress at one hour from the start of the test and a final draw is imposed at the elapsed time of one hour, the first-hour rating shall be calculated using, where n and V* del,i V* del,n n T del,n−1 (n−1) T del,n n T* min,n−1 (n−1) 6.2 Maximum GPM (L/min) Rating Computation. max Where: V del,10m T del T in 10 = the number of minutes in the maximum GPM (L/min) rating test, min. or, if the mass of water removed is measured, Where: M del,10m ρ del T del or, if the volume of water entering the water heater is measured, Where: V in,10m ρ in T del or, if the mass of water entering the water heater is measured, Where: M in,10m 6.3 Computations for Water Heaters with a Rated Storage Volume Greater Than or Equal to 2 Gallons and Circulating Water Heaters. 6.3.1 Storage Tank Capacity. st Where: V st W f W t ρ = the density of water used to fill the tank measured at the temperature of the water, lb/gal (kg/L). 6.3.1.1 Effective Storage Volume. eff For water heaters requiring a separate storage tank, V eff For all other water heaters: V eff k V V st Where: V st k V If the first recovery period extends into the second draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, and If T 0 T del,1 T 0 (if T 0 T del,1 T 0 If the first recovery period does not extend into the second draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, and If T max,1 T del,2 T max,1 (if T max,1 T del,2 T max,1 Otherwise, k V Where: T 0 T del,1 ρ( T 0 T 0 C p T 0 T 0 T max,1 T del,2 ρ( T max,1 T max,1 C p T max,1 T max,1 ρ(125 °F) = the density of the stored hot water at 125 °F, lb/gal (kg/L). C p 125 °F (51.7 °C) = the nominal maximum mean tank temperature for a storage tank that does not utilize a mixing valve to achieve a 125 °F delivery temperature. 67.5 °F (19.7 °C) = the nominal average ambient air temperature. 6.3.2 Mass of Water Removed. del,i If the mass of water removed is measured, use the measured value, or, if the volume of water removed is being measured, M del,i V del,i r del,i 6.3.3 Recovery Efficiency. r, Where: V st ρ 1 T max,1 T 0 C p1 T max,1 T 0 T max,1 T 0 Q r etc., N r M del,i i C pi i T del,i T in,i T del,i i T in,i i The recovery efficiency for electric water heaters with immersed heating elements, not including heat pump water heaters with immersed heating elements, is assumed to be 98 percent. 6.3.4 Hourly Standby Losses. stby, Q stby su,f su,o Where: Q su,0 Q su,f The hourly standby energy losses are computed as: Where: Q hr V st ρ = density of the stored hot water, evaluated at ( T su,f T su,0 C p T su,f T su,0 T su,f T su,0 η r τ stby,1 The standby heat loss coefficient for the tank is computed as: Where: UA = standby heat loss coefficient of the storage tank, Btu/(h· °F), (kJ/(h· °C). T t,stby,1 T a,stby,1 6.3.5 Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. Q = Q f e Q f Q e The daily water heating energy consumption, Q d Where: V st ρ = density of the stored hot water, evaluated at ( T 24 T 0 C p T 24 T 0 T 24 T 0 η r 6.3.6 Adjusted Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. da, Q da Q d F T a,stby,2 UA t stby,2 or, Q da Q d C T a,stby,2 UA t stby,2 Where: Q da Q d T a,stby,2 t stby,2 UA = as defined in section 6.3.4 of this appendix. T stby,2 A modification is also needed to take into account that the temperature difference between the outlet water temperature and supply water temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 67 °F (125 °F-58 °F) or 37.3 °C (51.7 °C-14.4 °C). The following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 67 °F (37.3 °C) temperature rise. The energy used to heat water, Btu/day (kJ/day), may be computed as: Where: N = total number of draws in the 24-hour simulated-use test. M del,i i C pi i T del,i T in,i T del,i i T in,i i h r The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 67 °F (37.3 °C) temperature rise, Btu/day (kJ/day), is: or, The difference between these two values is: Q HWD Q HW,67 °F Q HW or, Q HWD Q HW,37.3 °C Q HW This difference (Q HWD Q dm Q da Q HWD 6.3.7 Estimated Mean Tank Temperature for Water Heaters with Rated Storage Volumes Greater Than or Equal to 2 Gallons. Where: T st T p p v out,p V st τ p T in,p T out,p 6.3.8 Uniform Energy Factor. Where: N = total number of draws in the 24-hour simulated-use test. Q dm M del,i i C pi i 6.3.9 Annual Energy Consumption. Where: UEF = the uniform energy factor as computed in accordance with section 6.3.88 of this appendix. 365 = the number of days in a year. V = the volume of hot water drawn during the applicable draw pattern, gallons. = 10 for the very-small-usage draw pattern. = 38 for the low-usage draw pattern. = 55 for the medium-usage draw pattern. = 84 for high-usage draw pattern. ρ = 8.24 lb/gallon, the density of water at 125 °F. C p 67 = the nominal temperature difference between inlet and outlet water 6.3.10 Annual Electrical Energy Consumption. annual,e, Where: E annual Q e Q = total energy used by the water heater during the 24-hour simulated-use test in accordance with section 6.3.5 of this appendix, Btu (kJ). 3412 = conversion factor from Btu to kWh. 6.3.11 Annual Fossil Fuel Energy Consumption. annual,f, E annual,f E annual E annual,e Where: E annual E annual,e 3412 = conversion factor from kWh to Btu. 6.4 Computations for Water Heaters with a Rated Storage Volume Less Than 2 Gallons. 6.4.1 Mass of Water Removed Calculate the mass of water removed using the calculations in section 6.3.2 of this appendix. 6.4.2 Recovery Efficiency. r, Where: M 1 C p1 T del,1 T in,1 T del,1 T in,1 Q r 6.4.3 Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. d, Q d Q Where: Q = Q f e Q f Q e A modification is needed to take into account that the temperature difference between the outlet water temperature and supply water temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 67 °F (125 °F−58 °F) or 37.3 °C (51.7 °C−14.4 °C). The following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 67 °F (37.3 °C) temperature rise. The energy used to heat water may be computed as: Where: N = total number of draws in the 24-hour simulated-use test. M del,i i C pi i T del,i T in,i T del,i i T in,i i η r The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 67 °F (37.3 °C) temperature rise is: Where: N = total number of draws in the 24-hour simulated-use test. M del,i i C pi i T del,i T in,i η r The difference between these two values is: Q HWD Q HW,67 °F Q HW or, Q HWD Q HW,37.3 °C Q HW This difference (Q HWD Q dm da HWD 6.4.4 Uniform Energy Factor. Where: N = total number of draws in the 24-hour simulated-use test. Q dm M del,i i C pi i 6.4.5 Annual Energy Consumption. annual, Where: UEF = the uniform energy factor as computed in accordance with section 6.4.4 of this appendix. 365 = the number of days in a year. V = the volume of hot water drawn during the applicable draw pattern, gallons. = 10 for the very-small-usage draw pattern. = 38 for the low-usage draw pattern. = 55 for the medium-usage draw pattern. = 84 for high-usage draw pattern. ρ = 8.24 lb/gallon, the density of water at 125 °F. C p 67 = the nominal temperature difference between inlet and outlet water. 6.4.6 Annual Electrical Energy Consumption. annual,e, Where: Q e E annual Q = total energy used by the water heater during the 24-hour simulated-use test in accordance with section 6.4.3 of this appendix, Btu (kJ). Q dm 3412 = conversion factor from Btu to kWh. 6.4.7 Annual Fossil Fuel Energy Consumption. annual,f , E annual,f E annual E annual,e Where: E annual E annual,e 3412 = conversion factor from kWh to Btu. 6.5 Energy Efficiency at Optional Test Conditions. X, i.e., 7. Test Set-Up Diagrams [88 FR 40473, June 21, 2023, as amended at 89 FR 37943, May 6, 2024; 90 FR 6790, Jan. 21, 2025] Appendix F to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Room Air Conditioners Note: On or after September 27, 2021, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of room air conditioners must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. Prior to September 27, 2021, manufacturers must either test room air conditioners in accordance with this appendix, or the previous version of this appendix as it appeared in the Code of Federal Regulations on January 1, 2020. DOE notes that, because representations made on or after September 27, 2021 must be made in accordance with this appendix, manufacturers may wish to begin using this test procedure immediately. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for AHAM RAC-1, ANSI/ASHRAE 16, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1, ASHRAE 41.2-1987 (RA 1992), ASHRAE 41.3-2014, ASHRAE 41.6-2014, ASHRAE 41.11-2014 and IEC 62301 in § 430.3. However, only enumerated provisions of AHAM RAC-1 and ANSI/ASHRAE 16 apply to this appendix, as follows: (1) ANSI/AHAM RAC-1: (i) Section 4—Testing Conditions, Section 4.1—General (ii) Section 5—Standard Measurement Test, Section 5.2—Standard Test Conditions: 5.2.1.1 (iii) Section 6—Tests and Measurements, Section 6.1—Cooling capacity (iv) Section 6— Tests and Measurements, Section 6.2—Electrical Input (2) ANSI/ASHRAE 16: (i) Section 3—Definitions (ii) Section 5—Instruments (iii) Section 6—Apparatus, Section 6.1—Calorimeters, Sections 6.1.1-6.1.1., 6.1.1.3a, 6.1.1.4-6.1.4, including Table 1 (iv) Section 7—Methods of Testing, Section 7.1—Standard Test Methods, Section 7.1a, 7.1.1a (v) Section 8—Test Procedures, Section 8.1—General (vi) Section 8—Test Procedures, Section 8.2—Test Room Requirements (viii) Section 8—Test Procedures, Section 8.3—Air Conditioner Break-In (ix) Section 8—Test Procedures, Section 8.4—Air Conditioner Installation (x) Section 8 —Test Procedures, Section 8.5—Cooling Capacity Test (xi) Section 9—Data To Be Recorded, Section 9.1 (xii) Section 10—Measurement Uncertainty (xiii) Normative Appendix A Cooling Capacity Calculations—Calorimeter Test Indoor and Calorimeter Test Outdoor If there is any conflict between any industry standard(s) and this appendix, follow the language of the test procedure in this appendix, disregarding the conflicting industry standard language. Scope This appendix contains the test requirements to measure the energy performance of a room air conditioner. 2. Definitions 2.1 “Active mode” means a mode in which the room air conditioner is connected to a mains power source, has been activated and is performing any of the following functions: Cooling or heating the conditioned space, or circulating air through activation of its fan or blower, with or without energizing active air-cleaning components or devices such as ultra-violet (UV) radiation, electrostatic filters, ozone generators, or other air-cleaning devices. 2.2 “ANSI/AHAM RAC-1” means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, titled “Energy Measurement Test Procedure for Room Air Conditioners,” Standard RAC-1-2020 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 2.3 “ANSI/ASHRAE 16” means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers titled “Method of Testing for Rating Room Air Conditioners and Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners,” Standard 16-2016 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 2.4 “ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1” means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers titled “Standard Method for Temperature Measurement,” Standard 41.1-2013 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 2.5 “ASHRAE 41.2-1987 (RA 1992)” means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers titled “Standard Methods for Laboratory Airflow Measurement,” Standard 41.2-1987 (RA 1992) (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 2.6 “ASHRAE 41.3-2014” means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers titled “Standard Methods for Pressure Measurement,” Standard 41.3-2014 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 2.7 “ASHRAE 41.6-2014” means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers titled “Standard Method for Humidity Measurement,” Standard 41.6-2014 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 2.8 “ASHRAE 41.11-2014” means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers titled “Standard Methods for Power Measurement,” Standard 41.11-2014 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 2.9 “Combined energy efficiency ratio” means the energy efficiency of a room air conditioner in British thermal units per watt-hour (Btu/Wh) and determined in section 5.2.2 of this appendix for single-speed room air conditioners and section 5.3.12 of this appendix for variable-speed room air conditioners. 2.10 “Cooling capacity” means the amount of cooling, in British thermal units per hour (Btu/h), provided to a conditioned space, measured under the specified conditions and determined in section 4.1 of this appendix. 2.11 “Cooling mode” means an active mode in which a room air conditioner has activated the main cooling function according to the thermostat or temperature sensor signal or switch (including remote control). 2.12 “Full compressor speed (full)” means the compressor speed at which the unit operates at full load test conditions, when using user settings with a unit thermostat setpoint of 75 °F to achieve maximum cooling capacity, according to the instructions in ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 16-2016. 2.13 “IEC 62301” means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, titled “Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power,” Publication 62301 (Edition 2.0 2011-01), (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 2.14 “Inactive mode” means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control) or internal sensor or which provides continuous status display. 2.15 “Intermediate compressor speed (intermediate)” means the compressor speed higher than the low compressor speed at which the measured capacity is higher than the capacity at low compressor speed by one third of the difference between Capacity 4 1 2.16 “Low compressor speed (low)” means the compressor speed at which the unit operates at low load test conditions, achieved by following the instructions certified by the manufacturer, such that Capacity 4 1 2.17 “Off mode” means a mode in which a room air conditioner is connected to a mains power source and is not providing any active or standby mode function and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time, including an indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position. 2.18 “Single-speed room air conditioner” means a type of room air conditioner that cannot automatically adjust the compressor speed based on detected conditions. 2.19 “Standby mode” means any product mode where the unit is connected to a mains power source and offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time: (a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks ( e.g., (b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. 2.20 “Theoretical comparable single-speed room air conditioner” means a theoretical single-speed room air conditioner with the same cooling capacity and electrical power input as the variable-speed room air conditioner under test, with no cycling losses considered, at test condition 1 in Table 1 of this appendix. 2.21 “Variable-speed compressor” means a compressor that can vary its rotational speed in non-discrete stages or discrete steps from low to full. 2.22 “Variable-speed room air conditioner” means a type of room air conditioner that can automatically adjust compressor speed based on detected conditions. 3. Test Methods and General Instructions 3.1 Cooling mode. 3.1.1 Through-the-wall installation. 3.1.2 Power measurement accuracy. 3.1.3 Electrical supply. 3.1.4 Control settings. 3.1.5 Measurement resolution. 3.1.6 Temperature tolerances. 3.2 Standby and off modes. 3.2.1 Install the room air conditioner in accordance with Section 5, Paragraph 5.2 of IEC 62301 and maintain the indoor test conditions (and outdoor test conditions where applicable) as required by Section 4, Paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301. If testing is not conducted in a facility used for testing cooling mode performance, the test facility must comply with Section 4, Paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301. 3.2.2 Electrical supply. 3.2.3 Supply voltage waveform. 3.2.4 Wattmeter. 3.2.5 Air ventilation damper. 4. Test Conditions and Measurements 4.1 Cooling mode. 4.1.1 Temperature conditions. Table 1—Indoor and Outdoor Inlet Air Test Conditions—Variable-Speed Room Air Conditioners Test Evaporator inlet Condenser inlet Compressor speed Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb Test Condition 1 80 67 95 75 Full. Test Condition 2 80 67 92 72.5 Full. Test Condition 3 80 67 87 69 Intermediate. Test Condition 4 80 67 82 65 Low. 4.1.2 Cooling capacity and power measurements. cool, tc tc 4.2 Standby and off modes. 4.2.1 If the unit has an inactive mode, as defined in section 2.14 of this appendix, measure and record the average inactive mode power, Pia, in watts. 4.2.2 If the unit has an off mode, as defined in section 2.17 of this appendix, measure and record the average off mode power, P om 5. Calculations 5.1 Annual energy consumption in inactive mode and off mode. ia/om, AEC ia/om P ia t ia P om t om Where: AEC ia/om P ia P om t ia t om 5.2 Combined energy efficiency ratio for single-speed room air conditioners. 5.2.1 Single-speed room air conditioner annual energy consumption in cooling mode. cool, AEC cool P cool Where: AEC cool P cool 0.75 is 750 annual operating hours in cooling mode multiplied by a 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor from watt-hours to kilowatt-hours. 5.2.2 Single-speed room air conditioner combined energy efficiency ratio. Where: CEER = combined energy efficiency ratio, in Btu/Wh. Capacity = single-speed room air conditioner cooling capacity, in Btu/h, determined in section 4.1.2 of this appendix. AEC cool AEC ia/om 0.75 as defined in section 5.2.1 of this appendix. 5.3 Combined energy efficiency ratio for variable-speed room air conditioners. 5.3.1 Weighted electrical power input. wt, P wt tc P tc W tc Where: P wt P tc W tc 5.3.2 Theoretical comparable single-speed room air conditioner. Capacity ss__tc 1 c tc P ss__tc 1 p tc Where: Capacity ss__tc Capacity 1 P ss__tc P 1 M c M p 95 is the condenser inlet dry-bulb temperature for test condition 1 in Table 1 of this appendix, 95 °F. T tc tc as explained in section 5.3.1 of this appendix. 5.3.3 Variable-speed room air conditioner unit's annual energy consumption for cooling mode at each cooling mode test condition. tc, AEC tc P tc Where: AEC tc P tc 0.75 as defined in section 5.2.1 of this appendix. tc as explained in section 5.3.1 of this appendix. 5.3.4 Variable-speed room air conditioner weighted annual energy consumption. wt, AEC wt tc AEC tc W tc Where: AEC wt AEC tc W tc tc as explained in section 5.3.1 of this appendix. 5.3.5 Theoretical comparable single-speed room air conditioner annual energy consumption in cooling mode at each cooling mode test condition. ss__tc AEC ss__tc P ss__tc Where: AEC ss__tc P ss__tc 0.75 as defined in section 5.2.1 of this appendix. tc as explained in section 5.3.1 of this appendix. 5.3.6 Variable-speed room air conditioner combined energy efficiency ratio at each cooling mode test condition. tc Where: CEER tc Capacity tc AEC tc AEC ia/om 0.75 as defined in section 5.2.1 of this appendix. tc as explained in section 5.3.1 of this appendix. 5.3.7 Theoretical comparable single-speed room air conditioner combined energy efficiency ratio. ss__tc Where: CEER ss__tc Capacity ss__tc AEC ss__tc AEC ia/om 0.75 as defined in section 5.2.1 of this appendix. tc as explained in section 5.3.1 of this appendix. 5.3.8 Theoretical comparable single-speed room air conditioner adjusted combined energy efficiency ratio. ss__tc__adj CEER ss__tc__adj CEER ss__tc CLF tc Where: CEER ss__tc__adj CEER ss__tc CLF tc tc as explained in section 5.3.1 of this appendix. 5.3.9 Weighted combined energy efficiency ratio. wt ss__wt CEER wt tc CEER tc W tc CEER ss__wt tc CEER ss__tc__adj W tc Where: CEER wt CEER ss__wt CEER tc CEER ss__tc__adj W tc tc as explained in section 5.3.1 of this appendix. 5.3.10 Variable-speed room air conditioner performance adjustment factor. p. Where: F p CEER wt CEER ss__wt 5.3.11 Variable-speed room air conditioner combined energy efficiency ratio. CEER CEER 1 F p Where: CEER = combined energy efficiency ratio, in Btu/Wh. CEER 1 F p [86 FR 16476, Mar. 29, 2021, as amended at 86 FR 24484, May 7, 2021; 88 FR 59791, Aug. 30, 2023] Appendix G to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Unvented Home Heating Equipment 1. Testing conditions. 1.1 Installation. 1.1.1 Electric heater. 1.1.2 Unvented gas heater. 1.1.3 Unvented oil heater. 1.2 Temperature regulating controls. 1.3 Fan controls. 1.4 Energy supply. 1.4.1 Electrical supply. 1.4.2 Natural gas supply. 1.4.3 Propane gas supply. 1.4.4 Oil supply. 1.5 Energy flow instrumentation. 2. Testing and measurements. 2.1 Electric power measurement. E Allow the auxiliary electrical system of a forced air unvented gas, propane, or oil heater to operate for at least five minutes before recording the maximum auxiliary electric power measurement from the wattmeter. Record the maximum auxiliary electric power (P A 2.2 Natural gas, propane, and oil measurement. F 2.3 Pilot light measurement. p 2.3.1 The measurement of Q p i.e., e.g., 2.4 Electrical standby mode power measurement. W,SB Electrical supply W,SB 2.4.1 The measurement of P W,SB i.e., e.g., 3. Calculations. 3.1 Annual energy consumption for primary electric heaters. E E E where: 2080 = national average annual heating load hours 0.77 = adjustment factor DHR = design heating requirement and is equal to P E P E 1.2 = typical oversizing factor for primary electric heaters 3.2 Annual energy consumption for primary electric heaters by geographic region of the United States. R E R where: HLH = heating load hours for a specific region determined from Figure 1 of this appendix in hours 0.77 = as defined in 3.1 of this appendix DHR = as defined in 3.1 of this appendix 3.3 Rated output for electric heaters. out Q out E where: P E 3.4 Rated output for unvented heaters using either natural gas, propane, or oil. out F For unvented heaters using either natural gas, propane, or oil equipped with auxiliary electrical systems, calculate the rated output (Q out Q out F A where: P F P A (Energy Policy and Conservation Act, Pub. L. 94-163, as amended by Pub. L. 94-385; Federal Energy Administration Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93-275, as amended by Pub. L. 94-385; Department of Energy Organization Act, Pub. L. 95-91; E.O. 11790, 39 FR 23185) [43 FR 20132, May 10, 1978. Redesignated and amended at 44 FR 37938, June 29, 1979; 49 FR 12157, Mar. 28, 1984; 77 FR 74571, Dec. 17, 2012] Appendix H to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Power Consumption of Television Sets Note: On or after April 14, 2023 and prior to September 11, 2023, any representations made with respect to the energy use or energy efficiency of a television must be based upon results generated under this appendix as it appeared in 10 CFR part 430 edition revised as of January 1, 2023, or this appendix. Beginning September 11, 2023 any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of a television must be based upon results generated under this appendix. Given that beginning September 11, 2023, representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of televisions must be made in accordance with tests conducted pursuant to this appendix, manufacturers may wish to begin using this test procedure as soon as possible. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, ANSI/CTA-2037-D in its entirety. However, only enumerated provisions of ANSI/CTA-2037-D are applicable to this appendix, as follows: 0.1 ANSI/CTA-2037-D (a) Section 5 as referenced in section 2 of this appendix; (b) Sections 6 and 8 through 11 as referenced in section 3 of this appendix; (c) Section 7 as referenced in sections 3 and 4 of this appendix; and (d) Annex A as referenced in section 4 of this appendix. 0.2 [Reserved] 1. Scope This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the energy and power consumption of television sets that have a diagonal screen size of at least fifteen inches; and are powered by mains power (including TVs with auxiliary batteries but not TVs with main batteries). 2. Definitions and Symbols 2.1. Definitions. (a) Annual energy consumption (b) Automatic brightness control (c) Brightest selectable picture setting (d) Default preset picture setting (e) Dynamic Luminance (f) Energy-Efficient-Ethernet (g) Filmmaker Mode (h) Forced menu (i) Gloss Unit (GU) (j) HDR10 (k) High Dynamic Range (l) Home configuration (m) Hybrid Log Gamma (HLG) (n) Illuminance (o) International System of Units (p) Luminance (q) Main battery (r) Motion-Based Dynamic Dimming (s) Neutral density filter (t) Off Mode (u) On Mode (v) Perceptual Quantization Video (w) Preset picture setting (x) Quick start (y) Retail Configuration (z) Snoot (aa) Software (ab) Wake-By-Remote-Control-App (ac) Wake-By-Smart-Speaker (ad) Wake-On-Cast 2.2. Symbol usage. 3. Test Conduct Determine the dynamic luminance and on mode and standby mode power consumption of TVs by following the procedure specified in sections 6 through 11 of ANSI/CTA-2037-D. 4. Calculation of Measured Values Calculate the on mode power consumption, dynamic luminance, standby mode power consumption, and annual energy consumption as specified in Annex A of ANSI/CTA-2037-D. The following additional requirements are also applicable. 4.1. Round on mode power value as specified in Annex A of ANSI/CTA-2037-D. 4.2. Round dynamic luminance to the nearest tenth. 4.3. Round standby mode power as specified in section 7.1.2 of ANSI/CTA-2037-D. 4.4. Round annual energy consumption as specified in Annex A of ANSI/CTA-2037-D. [88 FR 16109, Mar. 15, 2023] Appendix I to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Microwave Ovens Note: After September 26, 2022, representations made with respect to the energy use of microwave ovens must fairly disclose the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. On or after April 29, 2022 and prior to September 26, 2022 representations, including compliance certifications, made with respect to the energy use of microwave ovens must fairly disclose the results of testing pursuant to either this appendix or appendix I as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B, in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2020. Representations made with respect to the energy use of microwave ovens within that range of time must fairly disclose the results of testing under the selected version. Given that after September 26, 2022 representations with respect to the energy use of microwave ovens must be made in accordance with tests conducted pursuant to this appendix, manufacturers may wish to begin using this test procedure as soon as possible. 1. Definitions The following definitions apply to the test procedures in this appendix, including the test procedures incorporated by reference: 1.1 Active mode 1.2 Built-in 1.3 Combined cooking product 1.4 Drop-in 1.5 IEC 62301 (First Edition) 1.6 IEC 62301 (Second Edition) 1.7 Normal non-operating temperature 1.8 Off mode 1.9 Standby mode (1) Facilitation of the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer; (2) Provision of continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that allows for regularly scheduled tasks and that operates on a continuous basis. 2. Test Conditions 2.1 Installation. 2.1.1 Microwave ovens, excluding any microwave oven component of a combined cooking product. e.g., 2.2 Energy supply. 2.2.1 Electrical supply. 2.2.1.1 Voltage. 2.3 Air circulation. 2.4 Ambient room test conditions. 2.4.1 Standby mode and off mode ambient temperature. 2.5 Normal non-operating temperature. 2.6 Instrumentation. 2.6.1 Electrical Measurements. 2.6.1.1 Standby mode and off mode watt meter. 2.6.2 Temperature measurement equipment. 2.6.2.1 Room temperature indicating system. 3. Test Methods and Measurements 3.1. Test methods. 3.1.1 Microwave oven. 3.1.1.1 Microwave oven test standby mode and off mode power except for any microwave oven component of a combined cooking product. 3.2 Test measurements. 3.2.1 Microwave oven standby mode and off mode power except for any microwave oven component of a combined cooking product. 3.3 Recorded values. 3.3.1 For microwave ovens except for any microwave oven component of a combined cooking product, record the average standby mode power, PSB, for the microwave oven standby mode, as determined in section 3.2.1 of this appendix for a microwave oven capable of operating in standby mode. Record the average off mode power, POM, for the microwave oven off mode power test, as determined in section 3.2.1 of this appendix for a microwave oven capable of operating in off mode. [85 FR 50766, Aug. 18, 2020, as amended at 87 FR 18271, Mar. 30, 2022; 87 FR 51538, Aug. 22, 2022] Appendix I1 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Conventional Cooking Products Note: Any representation related to energy consumption of conventional cooking tops, including the conventional cooking top component of combined cooking products, made after February 20, 2023 must be based upon results generated under this test procedure. Upon the compliance date(s) of any energy conservation standard(s) for conventional cooking tops, including the conventional cooking top component of combined cooking products, use of the applicable provisions of this test procedure to demonstrate compliance with the energy conservation standard is required. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire test standard for IEC 60350-2; IEC 62301 (First Edition); and IEC 62301 (Second Edition). However, only enumerated provisions of those standards are applicable to this appendix, as follows. If there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the referenced test standards. 0.1 IEC 60350-2 (a) Section 5.1 as referenced in section 2.4.1 of this appendix; (b) Section 5.3 as referenced in sections 2.7.1.1, 2.7.3.1, 2.7.3.3, 2.7.3.4, 2.7.4, and 2.7.5 of this appendix; (c) Section 5.5 as referenced in section 2.5.1 of this appendix; (d) Section 5.6.1 as referenced in section 2.6.1 of this appendix; (e) Section 5.6.1.5 as referenced in section 3.1.1.2 of this appendix; (f) Section 6.3 as referenced in section 3.1.1.1.1 of this appendix; (g) Section 6.3.1 as referenced in section 3.1.1.1.1 of this appendix; (h) Section 6.3.2 as referenced in section 3.1.1.1.1 of this appendix; (i) Section 7.5.1 as referenced in section 2.6.2 of this appendix; (j) Section 7.5.2 as referenced in section 3.1.4.4 of this appendix; (k) Section 7.5.2.1 as referenced in sections 1 and 3.1.4.2 of this appendix; (l) Section 7.5.2.2 as referenced in section 3.1.4.4 of this appendix; (m) Section 7.5.4.1 as referenced in sections 1 and 3.1.4.5 of this appendix; (n) Annex A as referenced in section 3.1.1.2 of this appendix; (o) Annex B as referenced in sections 2.6.1 and 2.8.3 of this appendix; and (p) Annex C as referenced in section 3.1.4.1 of this appendix. 0.2 IEC 62301 (First Edition) (a) Paragraph 5.3 as referenced in section 3.2 of this appendix; and (b) Paragraph 5.3.2 as referenced in section 3.2 of this appendix. 0.3 IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (a) Paragraph 4.2 as referenced in section 2.4.2 of this appendix; (b) Paragraph 4.3.2 as referenced in section 2.2.1.1.2 of this appendix; (c) Paragraph 4.4 as referenced in section 2.7.1.2 of this appendix; (d) Paragraph 5.1 as referenced in section 3.2 of this appendix; and (e) Paragraph 5.3.2 as referenced in section 3.2 of this appendix. 1. Definitions The following definitions apply to the test procedures in this appendix, including the test procedures incorporated by reference: Active mode Built-in Combined cooking product Combined low-power mode Cooking area Cooking top control Cooking zone Cycle finished mode Drop-in Freestanding Inactive mode Infinite power settings Maximum-below-threshold power setting Maximum power setting Minimum-above-threshold power setting Multi-ring cooking zone Off mode Power setting Simmering period 90. Smoothened water temperature Specialty cooking zone Stable temperature Standard cubic foot of gas Standby mode (1) Facilitation of the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer; (2) Provision of continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that allows for regularly scheduled tasks and that operates on a continuous basis. Target turndown temperature (Tc target ) Thermocouple Time t 90 Turndown temperature (T c ) 2. Test Conditions and Instrumentation 2.1 Installation. e.g., 2.1.1 Freestanding combined cooking product. 2.1.2 Drop-in or built-in combined cooking product. 2.1.3 Conventional cooking top. 2.2 Energy supply. 2.2.1 Electrical supply. 2.2.1.1 Supply voltage. 2.2.1.1.1 Active mode supply voltage. 2.2.1.1.2 Standby mode and off mode supply voltage. 2.2.1.2 Supply frequency. 2.2.2 Gas supply. 2.2.2.1 Natural gas. n 2.2.2.2 Propane. p 2.3 Air circulation. 2.4 Ambient room test conditions. 2.4.1 Active mode ambient conditions. 2.4.2 Standby mode and off mode ambient conditions. 2.5 Product temperature. 2.5.1 Product temperature stability. 2.5.2 Product temperature measurement. 2.5.2.1 Measure the product temperature at the center of the cooking zone under test for any gas burner adjustment in section 3.1.3 of this appendix and per-cooking zone energy consumption test in section 3.1.4 of this appendix, except that the product temperature measurement is not required for any potential simmering setting pre-selection test in section 3.1.4.3 of this appendix. For a conventional gas cooking top, measure the product temperature inside the burner body of the cooking zone under test, after temporarily removing any burner cap on that cooking zone. 2.5.2.2 Measure the temperature at the center of each cooking zone for the standby mode and off mode power test in section 3.2 of this appendix. For a conventional gas cooking top, measure the temperature inside the burner body of each cooking zone, after temporarily removing any burner cap on that cooking zone. Calculate the product temperature as the average of the temperatures at the center of each cooking zone. 2.6 Test loads. 2.6.1 Test vessels. 2.6.2 Water load. 2.7 Instrumentation. 2.7.1 Electrical measurements. 2.7.1.1 Active mode watt-hour meter. 2.7.1.2 Standby mode and off mode watt meter. 2.7.2 Gas measurements. 2.7.2.1 Gas meter. 2.7.2.2 Standard continuous flow calorimeter. 2.7.2.3 Gas line temperature. 2.7.2.4 Gas line pressure. 2.7.3 Temperature measurements. 2.7.3.1 Active mode ambient room temperature. 2.7.3.2 Standby mode and off mode ambient room temperature. 2.7.3.3 Product temperature. 2.7.3.4 Water temperature. 2.7.4 Room air pressure. 2.7.5 Water mass. 2.8 Power settings. 2.8.1 On a multi-ring cooking zone on a conventional gas cooking top, all power settings are considered, whether they ignite all rings of orifices or not. 2.8.2 On a multi-ring cooking zone on a conventional electric cooking top, only power settings corresponding to the concentric heating element with the largest diameter are considered, which may correspond to operation with one or more of the smaller concentric heating elements energized. 2.8.3 On a cooking zone with infinite power settings where the available range of rotation from maximum to minimum is more than 150 rotational degrees, evaluate power settings that are spaced by 10 rotational degrees. On a cooking zone with infinite power settings where the available range of rotation from maximum to minimum is less than or equal to 150 rotational degrees, evaluate power settings that are spaced by 5 rotational degrees, starting with the first position that meets the definition of a power setting, irrespective of how the knob is labeled. Polar coordinate paper, as provided in Annex B of IEC 60350-2 may be used to mark power settings. 3. Test Methods and Measurements 3.1 Active mode. 3.1.1 Test vessel and water load selection. 3.1.1.1 Conventional electric cooking tops. 3.1.1.1.1 For cooking zones, measure the size of each cooking zone as specified in Section 6.3.2 of IEC 60350-2, not including any specialty cooking zones as defined in section 1 of this appendix. For circular cooking zones on smooth cooking tops, the cooking zone size is determined using the outer diameter of the printed marking, as specified in Section 6.3 of IEC 60350-2. For open coil cooking zones, the cooking zone size is determined using the widest diameter of the coil, see Figure 3.1.1.1. For non-circular cooking zones, the cooking zone size is determined by the measurement of the shorter side or minor axis. For cooking areas, determine the number of cooking zones as specified in Section 6.3.1 of IEC 60350-2. 3.1.1.1.2 Determine the test vessel diameter in millimeters (mm) and water load mass in grams (g) for each measured cooking zone. For cooking zones, test vessel selection is based on cooking zone size as specified in Table 3 in Section 5.6.1.5 of IEC 60350-2. For cooking areas, test vessel selection is based on the number of cooking zones as specified in Annex A of IEC 60350-2. If a selected test vessel (including its lid) cannot be centered on the cooking zone due to interference with a structural component of the cooking top, the test vessel with the largest diameter that can be centered on the cooking zone shall be used. The allowable tolerance on the water load weight is ±0.5 g. 3.1.1.2 Conventional gas cooking tops. 3.1.1.2.1 Record the nominal heat input rate for each cooking zone, not including any specialty cooking zones as defined in section 1 of this appendix. 3.1.1.2.2 Determine the test vessel diameter in mm and water load mass in g for each measured cooking zone according to Table 3.1 of this appendix. If a selected test vessel cannot be centered on the cooking zone due to interference with a structural component of the cooking top, the test vessel with the largest diameter that can be centered on the cooking zone shall be used. The allowable tolerance on the water load weight is ±0.5 g. Table 3.1—Test Vessel Selection for Conventional Gas Cooking Tops Nominal gas burner input rate Test vessel diameter Water load mass Minimum Maximum 5,600 210 2,050 5,600 8,050 240 2,700 8,050 14,300 270 3,420 14,300 300 4,240 3.1.2 Unit Preparation. 3.1.3 Gas burner adjustment. 3.1.3.1 Conventional gas cooking tops with an adjustable internal pressure regulator. 3.1.3.2 Conventional gas cooking tops with a non-adjustable internal pressure regulator or without an internal pressure regulator. 3.1.4 Per-cooking zone energy consumption test. 3.1.4.1 Test vessel placement. 3.1.4.2 Overshoot test. target Tc target max 70 Where: T max T 70 If T 70 target 70 3.1.4.3 Potential simmering setting pre-selection test. 3.1.4.3.1 Use the test vessel with water load for the cooking zone under test, selected, prepared, and positioned as specified in sections 3.1.1 and 3.1.4.1 of this appendix. The temperature of the conventional cooking top is not required to meet the specification for the product temperature in section 2.5 of this appendix for the potential simmering setting pre-selection test. Operate the cooking zone under test with the lowest available power setting. Measure the energy consumption for 10 minutes ±2 seconds. 3.1.4.3.2 Calculate the power density of the power setting, j, on a conventional electric cooking top, Qe j Where: a = the surface area of the test vessel bottom, in square centimeters; and E j 3.1.4.3.3 Calculate the power density of the power setting, j, on a conventional gas cooking top, Qg j Where: a = the surface area of the test vessel bottom, in square centimeters; V j CF = the gas correction factor to standard temperature and pressure, as calculated in section 4.1.1.2.1 of this appendix; H = either H n p Ee j K e 3.1.4.3.4 Repeat the measurement for each successively higher power setting until Qe j 2 j 2 For conventional cooking tops with rotating knobs for selecting the power setting, the selection knob shall be turned to the maximum power setting in between each test, to avoid hysteresis. The selection knob shall be turned in the direction from higher power to lower power to select the power setting for the test. If the appropriate power setting is passed, the selection knob shall be turned to the maximum power setting again before repeating the power setting selection. Of the last two power settings tested, the potential simmering setting is the power setting that produces a power density closest to 0.8 W/cm 2 2 3.1.4.4 Simmering test. For conventional cooking tops with rotating knobs for selecting the power setting, the selection knob shall be turned in the direction from higher power to lower power to select the potential simmering setting for the test, to avoid hysteresis. If the appropriate setting is passed, the test is considered invalid and must be repeated after allowing the product to return to ambient conditions. 3.1.4.5 Evaluation of the simmering test. target 3.2 Standby mode and off mode power. 3.2.1 If the product has an inactive mode, as defined in section 1 of this appendix, measure the average inactive mode power, P IA 3.2.2 If the product has an off mode, as defined in section 1 of this appendix, measure the average off mode power, P OM 3.3 Recorded values. 3.3.1 Active mode. 3.3.1.1 For a conventional gas cooking top tested with natural gas, record the natural gas higher heating value in Btu per standard cubic foot, H n p 3.3.1.2 Record the test room temperature in degrees Celsius and relative air pressure in hectopascals (hPa) during each test. 3.3.1.3 Per-cooking zone energy consumption test. 3.3.1.3.1 Record the product temperature in degrees Celsius, T P 3.3.1.3.2 Overshoot test. i; 70 max target 3.3.1.3.3 Simmering test. 90 3.3.1.3.3.1 The power setting under test. 3.3.1.3.3.2 The initial temperature of the water, in degrees Celsius, T i 3.3.1.3.3.3 The time at which the tester begins adjusting the cooking top control to change the power setting, to the nearest second, t c 3.3.1.3.3.4 The time at which the simmering period starts, to the nearest second, t 90 3.3.1.3.3.5 The time at which the simmering period ends, to the nearest second, t S S 3.3.1.3.3.6 For a conventional electric cooking top, the electrical energy consumption from the start of the test to t S 3.3.1.3.3.7 For a conventional gas cooking top, the volume of gas consumed from the start of the test to t S S e 3.3.2 Standby mode and off mode. IA OM 4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements 4.1. Active mode energy consumption of conventional cooking tops and any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product. 4.1.1 Per-cycle active mode energy consumption of a conventional cooking top and any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product. 4.1.1.1 Conventional electric cooking top per-cycle active mode energy consumption. 4.1.1.1.1 Conventional electric cooking top per-cooking zone normalized active mode energy consumption. For each cooking zone, calculate the per-cooking zone normalized active mode energy consumption of a conventional electric cooking top, E, in watt-hours, using the following equation: E E ETC for cooking zones where an Energy Test Cycle was measured in section 3.1.4.5 of this appendix, and for cooking zones where a minimum-above-threshold cycle and a maximum-below-threshold cycle were measured in section 3.1.4.5 of this appendix. Where: E ETC E MAT E MBT T S,MAT T S,MBT 4.1.1.1.2 Calculate the per-cycle active mode total energy consumption of a conventional electric cooking top, E CET Where: n = the total number of cooking zones tested on the conventional cooking top; E z m z 2853 = the representative water load mass, in grams. 4.1.1.2 Conventional gas cooking top per-cycle active mode energy consumption. 4.1.1.2.1 Gas correction factor to standard temperature and pressure. Calculate the gas correction factor to standard temperature and pressure, which converts between standard cubic feet and measured cubic feet of gas for a given set of test conditions: Where: P gas 0.0361= the conversion factor from inches of water column to pounds per square inch; P atm P base T base T gas T k 4.1.1.2.2 Conventional gas cooking top per-cooking zone normalized active mode gas energy consumption. For each cooking zone, calculate the per-cooking zone normalized active mode gas energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, E g E g E gt,ETC for cooking zones where an Energy Test Cycle was measured in section 3.1.4.5 of this appendix, and for cooking zones where a minimum-above-threshold cycle and a maximum-below-threshold cycle were measured in section 3.1.4.5 of this appendix. Where: E gt,ETC n p, E gt,MAT n p E gt,MBT n p T S,MAT T S,MBT 4.1.1.2.3 Conventional gas cooking top per-cooking zone active mode normalized electrical energy consumption. For each cooking zone, calculate the per-cooking zone normalized active mode electrical energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, E e E e E e,ETC for cooking zones where an Energy Test Cycle was measured in section 3.1.4.5 of this appendix, and for cooking zones where a minimum-above-threshold cycle and a maximum-below-threshold cycle were measured in section 3.1.4.5 of this appendix. Where: E e,ETC E e,MAT E e,MBT T S,MAT T S,MBT 4.1.1.2.4 Conventional gas cooking top per-cycle active mode gas energy consumption. Calculate the per-cycle active mode gas energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, E CGG Where: n, m z E gz 4.1.1.2.5 Conventional gas cooking top per-cycle active mode electrical energy consumption. Calculate the per-cycle active mode electrical energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, E CGE Where: n, m z E ez 4.1.1.2.6 Conventional gas cooking top per-cycle active-mode total energy consumption. Calculate the per-cycle active mode total energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, E CGT E CGT CGG CGE e Where: E CGG E CGE K e 4.1.2 Annual active mode energy consumption of a conventional cooking top and any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product. 4.1.2.1 Conventional electric cooking top annual active mode energy consumption. Calculate the annual active mode total energy consumption of a conventional electric cooking top, E AET E AET CET C Where: E CET K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours; and N C 4.1.2.2 Conventional gas cooking top annual active mode energy consumption. 4.1.2.2.1 Conventional gas cooking top annual active mode gas energy consumption. Calculate the annual active mode gas energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, E AGG E AGG CGG C Where: K and N C E CGG 4.1.2.2.2 Conventional gas cooking top annual active mode electrical energy consumption. Calculate the annual active mode electrical energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, E AGE E AGE CGE C Where: K and N C E CGE 4.1.2.2.3 Conventional gas cooking top annual active mode total energy consumption. Calculate the annual active mode total energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, E AGT E AGT AGG AGE e Where: E AGG E AGE K e 4.2 Annual combined low-power mode energy consumption of a conventional cooking top and any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product. 4.2.1 Conventional cooking top annual combined low-power mode energy consumption. Calculate the annual combined low-power mode energy consumption for a conventional cooking top, E TLP E TLP IA IA OM OM T Where: P IA P OM F IA OM K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours; and S T Table 4.2.1—Annual Hour Multipliers Types of low-power mode(s) available F IA F OM Both inactive and off mode 0.5 0.5 Inactive mode only 1 0 Off mode only 0 1 4.2.2 Conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product annual combined low-power mode energy consumption. Calculate the annual combined low-power mode energy consumption for the conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product, E TLP E TLP IA IA OM OM TOT C Where: P IA OM IA OM S TOT H C Table 4.2.2—Combined Cooking Product Usage Factors Type of combined cooking product S TOT H C Cooking top and conventional oven (conventional range) 8,392 60 Cooking top and microwave oven 8,481 77 Cooking top, conventional oven, and microwave oven 8,329 51 4.3 Integrated annual energy consumption of a conventional cooking top and any conventional cooking top component of a combined cooking product. 4.3.1 Conventional electric cooking top integrated annual energy consumption. Calculate the integrated annual energy consumption, IAEC, of a conventional electric cooking top, in kilowatt-hours per year, using the following equation: IAEC = E AET TLP Where: E AET E TLP 4.3.2 Conventional gas cooking top integrated annual energy consumption. Calculate the integrated annual energy consumption, IAEC, of a conventional gas cooking top, in kBtu per year, defined as: IAEC = E AGT TLP e Where: E AGT E TLP K e [87 FR 51538, Aug. 22, 2022, as amended at 88 FR 7847, Feb. 7, 2023] Appendix J to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Automatic and Semi-Automatic Clothes Washers Note 1 to appendix J to subpart B of part 430: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under appendix J2 to this subpart to determine compliance with the residential clothes washer standards provided at § 430.32(g)(1) and the commercial clothes washer standards provided at § 431.156(b). Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the residential clothes washer standards provided at § 430.32(g)(2) and for any amended commercial clothes washer standards provided at § 431.156 that are published after January 1, 2022. Any representations related to energy or water consumption of residential or commercial clothes washers must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire test standard for IEC 62301. However, only enumerated provisions of this standard are applicable to this appendix, as follows. In cases in which there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the referenced test standard. 0.1 IEC 62301: (a) Section 4.2 as referenced in section 2.4 of this appendix; (b) Section 4.3.2 as referenced in section 2.1.2 of this appendix; (c) Section 4.4 as referenced in section 2.5.3 of this appendix; (d) Section 5.1 as referenced in section 3.5.2 of this appendix; (e) Section 5.2 as referenced in section 2.10.2 of this appendix; and (f) Section 5.3.2 as referenced in section 3.5.3 of this appendix. 0.2 [Reserved] 1. Definitions Active mode Active-mode energy efficiency ratio Active washing mode Bone-dry Clothes container Cold rinse Combined low-power mode Cycle finished mode Delay start mode Energy efficiency ratio (a) The machine electrical energy consumption; (b) The hot water energy consumption; (c) The energy required for removal of the remaining moisture in the wash load; and (d) The combined low-power mode energy consumption. Energy test cycle Fixed water fill control system Inactive mode Load usage factor Lot Manual water fill control system Non-user-adjustable adaptive water fill control system Normal cycle Off mode Standby mode (a) Facilitating the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer; (b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks ( e.g., Temperature use factor User-adjustable adaptive water fill control system Wash time Water efficiency ratio 2. Testing Conditions and Instrumentation 2.1 Electrical energy supply. 2.1.1 Supply voltage and frequency. 2.1.2 Supply voltage waveform. 2.2 Supply water. 2.3 Water pressure. 2.4 Test room temperature. 2.5 Instrumentation. 2.5.1 Weighing scales. 2.5.1.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. 2.5.1.2 Weighing scale for clothes container capacity measurement. 2.5.2 Watt-hour meter. 2.5.3 Watt meter. 2.5.4 Water and air temperature measuring devices. 2.5.4.1 Non-reversible temperature indicator labels, adhered to the inside of the clothes container, may be used to confirm that an extra-hot wash temperature greater than or equal to 140 °F has been achieved during the wash cycle, under the following conditions. The label must remain waterproof, intact, and adhered to the wash drum throughout an entire wash cycle; provide consistent maximum temperature readings; and provide repeatable temperature indications sufficient to demonstrate that a wash temperature of greater than or equal to 140 °F has been achieved. The label must have been verified to consistently indicate temperature measurements with an accuracy of ±1 °F. If using a temperature indicator label to test a front-loading clothes washer, adhere the label along the interior surface of the clothes container drum, midway between the front and the back of the drum, adjacent to one of the baffles. If using a temperature indicator label to test a top-loading clothes washer, adhere the label along the interior surface of the clothes container drum, on the vertical portion of the sidewall, as close to the bottom of the container as possible. 2.5.4.2 Submersible temperature loggers placed inside the wash drum may be used to confirm that an extra-hot wash temperature greater than or equal to 140 °F has been achieved during the wash cycle, under the following conditions. The submersible temperature logger must have a time resolution of at least 1 data point every 5 seconds and a temperature measurement accuracy of ±1 °F. Due to the potential for a waterproof capsule to provide a thermal insulating effect, failure to measure a temperature of 140 °F does not necessarily indicate the lack of an extra-hot wash temperature. However, such a result would not be conclusive due to the lack of verification of the water temperature requirement, in which case an alternative method must be used to confirm that an extra-hot wash temperature greater than or equal to 140 °F has been achieved during the wash cycle. 2.5.5 Water meter. 2.5.6 Water pressure gauge. 2.6 Bone-dryer. 2.7 Test cloths. 2.7.1 Material Specifications. 2.7.2 Material Verification. 2.7.3 RMC Correction Curve. 2.7.4 Lot Identification. 2.7.5 Pre-Conditioning. 2.7.6 Lifetime. 2.8 Test Loads. 2.8.1 Test load sizes. 2.8.2 Test load composition. 2.9 Preparation and loading of test loads. 2.9.1 Test loads for energy and water consumption measurements must be bone-dry prior to the first cycle of the test, and dried to a maximum of 104 percent of bone-dry weight for subsequent testing. 2.9.2 Prepare the energy test cloths for loading by grasping them in the center, lifting, and shaking them to hang loosely, as illustrated in Figure 2.9.2 of this appendix. For all clothes washers, follow any manufacturer loading instructions provided to the user regarding the placement of clothing within the clothes container. In the absence of any manufacturer instructions regarding the placement of clothing within the clothes container, the following loading instructions apply. 2.9.2.1 To load the energy test cloths in a top-loading clothes washer, arrange the cloths circumferentially around the axis of rotation of the clothes container, using alternating lengthwise orientations for adjacent pieces of cloth. Complete each cloth layer across its horizontal plane within the clothes container before adding a new layer. Figure 2.9.2.1 of this appendix illustrates the correct loading technique for a vertical-axis clothes washer. 2.9.2.2 To load the energy test cloths in a front-loading clothes washer, grasp each test cloth in the center as indicted in section 2.9.2 of this appendix, and then place each cloth into the clothes container prior to activating the clothes washer. 2.10 Clothes washer installation. 2.10.1 Water inlet connections. 2.10.2 Low-power mode testing. 2.11 Clothes washer pre-conditioning. 2.12 Determining the energy test cycle 2.12.1 Automatic clothes washers. 2.12.2. Semi-automatic clothes washers. 3. Test Measurements 3.1 Clothes container capacity. 3.1.1 Place the clothes washer in such a position that the uppermost edge of the clothes container opening is leveled horizontally, so that the container will hold the maximum amount of water. For front-loading clothes washers, the door seal and shipping bolts or other forms of bracing hardware to support the wash drum during shipping must remain in place during the capacity measurement. If the design of a front-loading clothes washer does not include shipping bolts or other forms of bracing hardware to support the wash drum during shipping, a laboratory may support the wash drum by other means, including temporary bracing or support beams. Any temporary bracing or support beams must keep the wash drum in a fixed position, relative to the geometry of the door and door seal components, that is representative of the position of the wash drum during normal operation. The method used must avoid damage to the unit that would affect the results of the energy and water testing. For a front-loading clothes washer that does not include shipping bolts or other forms of bracing hardware to support the wash drum during shipping, the laboratory must fully document the alternative method used to support the wash drum during capacity measurement, include such documentation in the final test report, and pursuant to § 429.71 of this chapter, the manufacturer must retain such documentation as part its test records. 3.1.2 Line the inside of the clothes container with a 2 mil thickness (0.051 mm) plastic bag. All clothes washer components that occupy space within the clothes container and that are recommended for use during a wash cycle must be in place and must be lined with a 2 mil thickness (0.051 mm) plastic bag to prevent water from entering any void space. 3.1.3 Record the total weight of the machine before adding water. 3.1.4 Fill the clothes container manually with either 60 °F ± 5 °F (15.6 °C ± 2.8 °C) or 100 °F ± 10 °F (37.8 °C ± 5.5 °C) water, with the door open. For a top-loading vertical-axis clothes washer, fill the clothes container to the uppermost edge of the rotating portion, including any balance ring. Figure 3.1.4.1 of this appendix illustrates the maximum fill level for top-loading clothes washers. For a front-loading horizontal-axis clothes washer, fill the clothes container to the highest point of contact between the door and the door gasket. If any portion of the door or gasket would occupy the measured volume space when the door is closed, exclude from the measurement the volume that the door or gasket portion would occupy. For a front-loading horizontal-axis clothes washer with a concave door shape, include any additional volume above the plane defined by the highest point of contact between the door and the door gasket, if that area can be occupied by clothing during washer operation. For a top-loading horizontal-axis clothes washer, include any additional volume above the plane of the door hinge that clothing could occupy during washer operation. Figure 3.1.4.2 of this appendix illustrates the maximum fill volumes for all horizontal-axis clothes washer types. For all clothes washers, exclude any volume that cannot be occupied by the clothing load during operation. 3.1.5 Measure and record the weight of water, W, in pounds. 3.1.6 Calculate the clothes container capacity as follows: C = W/d Where: C = Capacity in cubic feet (liters). W = Mass of water in pounds (kilograms). d = Density of water (62.0 lbs/ft 3 3 3 3 3.1.7 Calculate the clothes container capacity, C, to the nearest 0.01 cubic foot for the purpose of determining test load sizes per Table 5.1 of this appendix and for all subsequent calculations that include the clothes container capacity. 3.2 Cycle settings. 3.2.1 Wash/rinse temperature selection. 3.2.2 Wash time setting. 3.2.2.1 If the cycle under test offers a range of wash time settings, the wash time setting shall be the higher of either the minimum or 70 percent of the maximum wash time available for the wash cycle under test, regardless of the labeling of suggested dial locations. If 70 percent of the maximum wash time is not available on a dial with a discrete number of wash time settings, choose the next-highest setting greater than 70 percent. 3.2.2.2 If the clothes washer is equipped with an electromechanical dial or timer controlling wash time that rotates in both directions, reset the dial to the minimum wash time and then turn it in the direction of increasing wash time to reach the appropriate setting. If the appropriate setting is passed, return the dial to the minimum wash time and then turn in the direction of increasing wash time until the appropriate setting is reached. 3.2.3 Water fill level settings. Table 3.2.3—Clothes Washer Water Fill Control Settings Settings are Settings are not Water fill level unaffected by the size or weight of the clothing load Manual water fill Fixed water fill. Water fill level is determined automatically by the clothes washer based on the size and weight of the clothing load User-adjustable adaptive water fill Non-user-adjustable adaptive water fill. 3.2.3.1 Clothes washers with a manual water fill control system. If the water fill level selector has more than two settings available for the wash cycle under test, for the small test load size, select the second-lowest water fill level setting. 3.2.3.2 Clothes washers with a fixed water fill control system. 3.2.3.3 Clothes washers with a user-adjustable adaptive water fill control system. 3.2.3.4 Clothes washers with a non-user-adjustable adaptive water fill control system. 3.2.3.5 Clothes washers with multiple water fill control systems. T T T TLP T T T T TLP T 3.2.4 Manufacturer default settings. 3.2.5 For each wash cycle tested, include the entire active washing mode and exclude any delay start or cycle finished modes. 3.2.6 Anomalous Test Cycles. 3.3 Test cycles for automatic clothes washers. Table 3.3—Symbol Definitions of Measured Values for Automatic Clothes Washer Test Cycles Wash/rinse Load size Bone-dry weight Hot water Cold water Electrical Cycle time Cycle Extra-Hot/Cold Large WIx L Hx L Cx L Ex L Tx L WCx L Small WIx S Hx S Cx S Ex S Tx S WCx S Hot/Cold Large WIh L Hh L Ch L Eh L Th L WCh L Small WIh S Hh S Ch S Eh S Th S WCh S Warm/Cold * Large WIw L Hw L Cw L Ew L Tw L WCw L Small WIw S Hw S Cw S Ew S Tw S WCw S Warm/Warm * Large WIww L Hww L Cww L Eww L Tww L WCww L Small WIww S Hww S Cww S Eww S Tww S WCww S Cold/Cold Large WIc L Hc L Cc L Ec L Tc L WCc L Small WIc S Hc S Cc S Ec S Tc S WCc S * If two cycles are tested to represent the Warm/Cold selection or the Warm/Warm selection, calculate the average of the two tested cycles and use that value for all further calculations. 3.4 Test cycles for semi-automatic clothes washers. 3.4.1 Test Measurements. Table 3.4.1—Symbol Definitions of Measured Values for Semi-Automatic Clothes Washer Test Cycles Temperature selection Load size Bone-dry Hot water Cold water Electrical Cycle time Cycle Cold Large WIc L not measured Cc L Ec L Tc L WCc L Small WIc S not measured Cc S Ec S Tc S WCc S 3.4.2 Calculation of Hot and Warm measured values. Table 3.4.2—Symbol Definitions and Calculation of Measured Values for Semi-Automatic Clothes Washer Test Cycles Temperature selection Load Size Bone-Dry Hot water Cold water Electrical energy Cycle time Cycle Hot Large WIh L L Hh L L Eh L L Th L L WCh L L Small WIh S S Hh S S Eh S S Th S S WCh S S Warm Large WIw L L Hw L L Cw L L Ew L L Tw L L WCw L L Small WIw S S Hw S S Cw S S Ew S S Tw S S WCw S S 3.5 Combined low-power mode power. 3.5.1 Perform combined low-power mode testing after completion of an active mode wash cycle included as part of the energy test cycle; after removing the test load; without changing the control panel settings used for the active mode wash cycle; with the door closed; and without disconnecting the electrical energy supply to the clothes washer between completion of the active mode wash cycle and the start of combined low-power mode testing. 3.5.2 For a clothes washer that takes some time to automatically enter a stable inactive mode or off mode state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, note 1 of IEC 62301, allow sufficient time for the clothes washer to automatically reach the default inactive/off mode state before proceeding with the test measurement. 3.5.3 Once the stable inactive/off mode state has been reached, measure and record the default inactive/off mode power, P default 3.5.4 For a clothes washer with a switch, dial, or button that can be optionally selected by the end user to achieve a lower-power inactive/off mode state than the default inactive/off mode state measured in section 3.5.3 of this appendix, after performing the measurement in section 3.5.3 of this appendix, activate the switch, dial, or button to the position resulting in the lowest power consumption and repeat the measurement procedure described in section 3.5.3 of this appendix. Measure and record the lowest-power inactive/off mode power, P lowest 3.6 Energy consumption for the purpose of determining the cycle selection(s) to be included in the energy test cycle. 3.6.1 For the wash/rinse temperature selection being considered under this section, establish the testing conditions set forth in section 2 of this appendix. Select the applicable cycle selection and wash/rinse temperature selection. For all wash/rinse temperature selections, select the cycle settings as described in section 3.2 of this appendix. 3.6.2 Measure each wash cycle's electrical energy consumption (E L L TL E TL L L Where: E L H L T = nominal temperature rise = 65 °F (36.1 °C). K = Water specific heat in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree F = 0.00240 kWh/gal − °F (0.00114 kWh/L − °C). 4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements 4.1 Hot water and machine electrical energy consumption of clothes washers. 4.1.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted hot water consumption for all load sizes tested. L, S (a) Vh L L X L h L w L ww L c (b) Vh S S X S h S w S ww S c Where: Hx L L L L L S S S S S TUF X h w ww c Table 4.1.1—Temperature Use Factors Wash/rinse temperature selections available in the energy test cycle Clothes washers with cold rinse only Clothes washers with both cold and warm rinse C/C H/C H/C XH/C XH/C H/C XH/C XH/C TUFx (Extra-Hot/Cold) 0.14 0.05 0.14 0.05 TUFh (Hot/Cold) 0.63 0.14 ** 0.49 0.09 0.14 ** 0.22 0.09 TUFw (Warm/Cold) 0.49 0.49 0.22 0.22 TUFww (Warm/Warm) 0.27 0.27 0.27 TUFc (Cold/Cold) 1.00 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 * This column applies to all semi-automatic clothes washers. ** On clothes washers with only two wash temperature selections <140 °F, the higher of the two wash temperatures is classified as a Hot Wash/Cold Rinse, in accordance with the wash/rinse temperature definitions within the energy test cycle. 4.1.2 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for all load sizes tested. L, S (a) HE L L (b) HE S S Where: Vh L S T = Temperature rise = 65 °F (36.1 °C). K = Water specific heat in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree F = 0.00240 kWh/gal − °F (0.00114 kWh/L − °C). 4.1.3 Total weighted per-cycle hot water energy consumption. T, HE T L L S S Where: HE L S LUF L LUF S 4.1.4 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-heated water, for product labeling requirements. TG, HE TG T TG T Where: e = Nominal gas or oil water heater efficiency = 0.75. HE T 4.1.5 Per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption for all load sizes tested. L, S (a) ME L L X L h L w L ww L c (b) ME S S X S h S w S ww S c Where: Ex L L L L L S S S S S TUF X h w ww c 4.1.6 Total weighted per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption. T, ME T L L S S Where: ME L S LUF L S 4.2 Water consumption of clothes washers. 4.2.1 Per cycle total water consumption for each large load size tested. L, L L L L (a) Qx L L L (b) Qh L L L (c) Qw L L L (d) Qww L L L (e) Qc L L L Where: Hx L L L L L L L L L L 4.2.2 Per cycle total water consumption for each small load size tested. S, S S S S (a) Qx S S S (b) Qh S S S (c) Qw S S S (d) Qww S S S (e) Qc S S S Where: Hx S S S S S S S S S S 4.2.3 Per-cycle total water consumption for all load sizes tested. L, S (a) Q L L L L L L (b) Q S S S S S S Where: Qx L L L L L Qx S S S S S TUFx, TUFh, TUFw, TUFww, and TUFc are defined in Table 4.1.1 of this appendix. 4.2.4 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption. T, Q T L L S S Where: Q L S LUF L S 4.3 Remaining moisture content (RMC). 4.3.1 Per cycle remaining moisture content for each large load size tested. L, L L L L (a) RMCx L L L L (b) RMCh L L L L (c) RMCw L L L L (d) RMCww L L L L (e) RMCc L L L L Where: WCx L L L L L L L L L L 4.3.2 Per cycle remaining moisture content for each small load size tested. S, S S S S (a) RMCx S S S S (b) RMCh S S S S (c) RMCw S S S S (d) RMCww S S S S (e) RMCc S S S S Where: WCx S S S S S S S S S S 4.3.3 Per-cycle remaining moisture content for all load sizes tested. L, S (a) RMC L L X L h L w L ww L c (b) RMC S S X S h S w S ww S c Where: RMCx L L L L L RMCx S S S S S TUF X h w ww c 4.3.4 Weighted per-cycle remaining moisture content. T, RMC T L L S S Where: RMC L S LUF L S 4.3.5 Apply the RMC correction curve as described in section 9 of appendix J3 to this subpart to calculate the corrected remaining moisture content, RMC corr RMC corr T Where: A and B are the coefficients of the RMC correction curve as defined in section 8.7 of appendix J3 to this subpart. RMC T 4.4 Per-cycle energy consumption for removal of moisture from test load. T, DE T L S corr Where: LUF L S Large and small test load weights are defined in Table 5.1 of this appendix. RMC corr DEF = Nominal energy required for a clothes dryer to remove moisture from clothes = 0.5 kWh/lb (1.1 kWh/kg). DUF = Dryer usage factor, percentage of washer loads dried in a clothes dryer = 0.91. 4.5 Cycle time. 4.5.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted cycle time for all load sizes tested. L, S (a) T L L X L h L w L ww L c (b) T S S X S h S w S ww S c Where: Tx L L L L L S S S S S TUF X h w ww c 4.5.2 Total weighted per-cycle cycle time. T, T T L L S S Where: T L S LUF L S 4.6 Combined low-power mode energy consumption. 4.6.1 Annual hours in default inactive/off mode. default S default T Where: T T N = Number of inactive/off modes, defined as 1 if no optional lowest-power inactive/off mode is available; otherwise 2. 8,760 = Total number of hours in a year. 234 = Representative average number of clothes washer cycles in a year. 60 = Conversion from minutes to hours. 4.6.2 Per-cycle combined low-power mode energy consumption. TLP, E TLP default default lowest lowest p Where: P default P lowest lowest S default S lowest default K p 234 = Representative average number of clothes washer cycles in a year. 4.7 Water efficiency ratio. WER = [(LUF L S T Where: LUF L S Large and small test load weights are defined in Table 5.1 of this appendix. Q T 4.8 Active-mode energy efficiency ratio. AEER = [(LUF L S T T T Where: LUF L S Large and small test load weights are defined in Table 5.1 of this appendix. ME T HE T DE T 4.9 Energy efficiency ratio. EER = [(LUF L S T T T TLP Where: LUF L S Large and small test load weights are defined in Table 5.1 of this appendix. ME T HE T DE T E TLP 5. Test Loads Table 5.1—Test Load Sizes Container volume Small load Large load cu. ft. liter lb kg lb kg ≥ < ≥ < 0.00-0.80 0.00-22.7 3.00 1.36 3.00 1.36 0.80-0.90 22.7-25.5 3.10 1.41 3.35 1.52 0.90-1.00 25.5-28.3 3.20 1.45 3.70 1.68 1.00-1.10 28.3-31.1 3.30 1.50 4.00 1.81 1.10-1.20 31.1-34.0 3.40 1.54 4.30 1.95 1.20-1.30 34.0-36.8 3.45 1.56 4.60 2.09 1.30-1.40 36.8-39.6 3.55 1.61 4.95 2.25 1.40-1.50 39.6-42.5 3.65 1.66 5.25 2.38 1.50-1.60 42.5-45.3 3.75 1.70 5.55 2.52 1.60-1.70 45.3-48.1 3.80 1.72 5.85 2.65 1.70-1.80 48.1-51.0 3.90 1.77 6.20 2.81 1.80-1.90 51.0-53.8 4.00 1.81 6.50 2.95 1.90-2.00 53.8-56.6 4.10 1.86 6.80 3.08 2.00-2.10 56.6-59.5 4.20 1.91 7.10 3.22 2.10-2.20 59.5-62.3 4.30 1.95 7.45 3.38 2.20-2.30 62.3-65.1 4.35 1.97 7.75 3.52 2.30-2.40 65.1-68.0 4.45 2.02 8.05 3.65 2.40-2.50 68.0-70.8 4.55 2.06 8.35 3.79 2.50-2.60 70.8-73.6 4.65 2.11 8.70 3.95 2.60-2.70 73.6-76.5 4.70 2.13 9.00 4.08 2.70-2.80 76.5-79.3 4.80 2.18 9.30 4.22 2.80-2.90 79.3-82.1 4.90 2.22 9.60 4.35 2.90-3.00 82.1-85.0 5.00 2.27 9.90 4.49 3.00-3.10 85.0-87.8 5.10 2.31 10.25 4.65 3.10-3.20 87.8-90.6 5.20 2.36 10.55 4.79 3.20-3.30 90.6-93.4 5.25 2.38 10.85 4.92 3.30-3.40 93.4-96.3 5.35 2.43 11.15 5.06 3.40-3.50 96.3-99.1 5.45 2.47 11.50 5.22 3.50-3.60 99.1-101.9 5.55 2.52 11.80 5.35 3.60-3.70 101.9-104.8 5.65 2.56 12.10 5.49 3.70-3.80 104.8-107.6 5.70 2.59 12.40 5.62 3.80-3.90 107.6-110.4 5.80 2.63 12.75 5.78 3.90-4.00 110.4-113.3 5.90 2.68 13.05 5.92 4.00-4.10 113.3-116.1 6.00 2.72 13.35 6.06 4.10-4.20 116.1-118.9 6.10 2.77 13.65 6.19 4.20-4.30 118.9-121.8 6.15 2.79 14.00 6.35 4.30-4.40 121.8-124.6 6.25 2.83 14.30 6.49 4.40-4.50 124.6-127.4 6.35 2.88 14.60 6.62 4.50-4.60 127.4-130.3 6.45 2.93 14.90 6.76 4.60-4.70 130.3-133.1 6.55 2.97 15.25 6.92 4.70-4.80 133.1-135.9 6.60 2.99 15.55 7.05 4.80-4.90 135.9-138.8 6.70 3.04 15.85 7.19 4.90-5.00 138.8-141.6 6.80 3.08 16.15 7.33 5.00-5.10 141.6-144.4 6.90 3.13 16.50 7.48 5.10-5.20 144.4-147.2 7.00 3.18 16.80 7.62 5.20-5.30 147.2-150.1 7.05 3.20 17.10 7.76 5.30-5.40 150.1-152.9 7.15 3.24 17.40 7.89 5.40-5.50 152.9-155.7 7.25 3.29 17.70 8.03 5.50-5.60 155.7-158.6 7.35 3.33 18.05 8.19 5.60-5.70 158.6-161.4 7.45 3.38 18.35 8.32 5.70-5.80 161.4-164.2 7.50 3.40 18.65 8.46 5.80-5.90 164.2-167.1 7.60 3.45 18.95 8.60 5.90-6.00 167.1-169.9 7.70 3.49 19.30 8.75 6.00-6.10 169.9-172.7 7.80 3.54 19.60 8.89 6.10-6.20 172.7-175.6 7.90 3.58 19.90 9.03 6.20-6.30 175.6-178.4 7.95 3.61 20.20 9.16 6.30-6.40 178.4-181.2 8.05 3.65 20.55 9.32 6.40-6.50 181.2-184.1 8.15 3.70 20.85 9.46 6.50-6.60 184.1-186.9 8.25 3.74 21.15 9.59 6.60-6.70 186.9-189.7 8.30 3.76 21.45 9.73 6.70-6.80 189.7-192.6 8.40 3.81 21.80 9.89 6.80-6.90 192.6-195.4 8.50 3.86 22.10 10.02 6.90-7.00 195.4-198.2 8.60 3.90 22.40 10.16 7.00-7.10 198.2-201.0 8.70 3.95 22.70 10.30 7.10-7.20 201.0-203.9 8.80 3.99 23.05 10.46 7.20-7.30 203.9-206.7 8.85 4.01 23.35 10.59 7.30-7.40 206.7-209.5 8.95 4.06 23.65 10.73 7.40-7.50 209.5-212.4 9.05 4.11 23.95 10.86 7.50-7.60 212.4-215.2 9.15 4.15 24.30 11.02 7.60-7.70 215.2-218.0 9.25 4.20 24.60 11.16 7.70-7.80 218.0-220.9 9.30 4.22 24.90 11.29 7.80-7.90 220.9-223.7 9.40 4.26 25.20 11.43 7.90-8.00 223.7-226.5 9.50 4.31 25.50 11.57 Notes: (2) Allowable tolerance on the test load weights is ±0.10 lbs (0.05 kg). [87 FR 33381, June 1, 2022, as amended at 87 FR 78820, Dec. 23, 2022; 89 FR 84076, Oct. 21, 2024; 90 FR 5536, Jan. 17, 2025] Appendix J1 to Subpart B of Part 430 [Reserved] Appendix J2 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Automatic and Semi-automatic Clothes Washers Note 1 to appendix J2 to subpart B of part 430: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the residential clothes washer standards provided at § 430.32(g)(1) and the commercial clothes washer standards provided at § 431.156(b). Manufacturers must use the results of testing under Appendix J to this subpart to determine compliance with the residential clothes washer standards provided at § 430.32(g)(2) and for any amended commercial clothes washer standards provided at § 431.156 that are published after January 1, 2022. Any representations related to energy or water consumption of residential or commercial clothes washers must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire test standard for IEC 62301. However, only enumerated provisions of this standard are applicable to this appendix, as follows. In cases in which there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the referenced test standard. 0.1 IEC 62301: (a) Section 4.2 as referenced in section 2.4 of this appendix; (b) Section 4.3.2 as referenced in section 2.1.2 of this appendix; (c) Section 4.4 as referenced in section 2.5.3 of this appendix; (d) Section 5.1 as referenced in section 3.9.2 of this appendix; (e) Section 5.2 as referenced in section 2.10 of this appendix; and (f) Section 5.3.2 as referenced in section 3.9.3 of this appendix. 0.2 [Reserved] 1. Definitions Active mode Active washing mode Adaptive water fill control system Automatic water fill control system Bone-dry Clothes container Cold rinse Combined low-power mode Cycle finished mode Delay start mode Energy test cycle Fixed water fill control system Inactive mode Integrated modified energy factor (a) The machine electrical energy consumption; (b) The hot water energy consumption; (c) The energy required for removal of the remaining moisture in the wash load; and (d) The combined low-power mode energy consumption. Integrated water factor Load usage factor Lot Manual water fill control system Modified energy factor Non-water-heating clothes washer Normal cycle J2 Off mode Standby mode (a) Facilitating the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer; (b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. (c) A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks ( e.g., Temperature use factor User-adjustable adaptive water fill control system Wash time Water factor Water-heating clothes washer 2. Testing Conditions and Instrumentation 2.1 Electrical energy supply. 2.1.1 Supply voltage and frequency. 2.1.2 Supply voltage waveform. 2.2 Supply water. 2.3 Water pressure. 2.4 Test room temperature. 2.5 Instrumentation. 2.5.1 Weighing scales. 2.5.1.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. 2.5.1.2 Weighing scale for clothes container capacity measurement. 2.5.2 Watt-hour meter. 2.5.3 Watt meter. 2.5.4 Water and air temperature measuring devices. 2.5.4.1 Non-reversible temperature indicator labels, adhered to the inside of the clothes container, may be used to confirm that an extra-hot wash temperature greater than 135 °F has been achieved during the wash cycle, under the following conditions. The label must remain waterproof, intact, and adhered to the wash drum throughout an entire wash cycle; provide consistent maximum temperature readings; and provide repeatable temperature indications sufficient to demonstrate that a wash temperature of greater than 135 °F has been achieved. The label must have been verified to consistently indicate temperature measurements with an accuracy of ±1 °F if the label provides a temperature indicator at 135 °F. If the label does not provide a temperature indicator at 135 °F, the label must have been verified to consistently indicate temperature measurements with an accuracy of ±1 °F if the next-highest temperature indicator is greater than 135 °F and less than 140 °F, or ±3 °F if the next-highest temperature indicator is 140 °F or greater. If the label does not provide a temperature indicator at 135 °F, failure to activate the next-highest temperature indicator does not necessarily indicate the lack of an extra-hot wash temperature. However, such a result would not be conclusive due to the lack of verification of the water temperature requirement, in which case an alternative method must be used to confirm that an extra-hot wash temperature greater than 135 °F has been achieved during the wash cycle. If using a temperature indicator label to test a front-loading clothes washer, adhere the label along the interior surface of the clothes container drum, midway between the front and the back of the drum, adjacent to one of the baffles. If using a temperature indicator label to test a top-loading clothes washer, adhere the label along the interior surface of the clothes container drum, on the vertical portion of the sidewall, as close to the bottom of the container as possible. 2.5.4.2 Submersible temperature loggers placed inside the wash drum may be used to confirm that an extra-hot wash temperature greater than 135 °F has been achieved during the wash cycle, under the following conditions. The submersible temperature logger must have a time resolution of at least 1 data point every 5 seconds and a temperature measurement accuracy of ±1 °F. Due to the potential for a waterproof capsule to provide a thermal insulating effect, failure to measure a temperature of 135 °F does not necessarily indicate the lack of an extra-hot wash temperature. However, such a result would not be conclusive due to the lack of verification of the water temperature requirement, in which case an alternative method must be used to confirm that an extra-hot wash temperature greater than 135 °F has been achieved during the wash cycle. 2.5.5 Water meter. 2.5.6 Water pressure gauge. 2.6 Bone dryer temperature. 2.7 Test cloths. 2.7.1 Material Specifications. 2.7.2 Material Verification. 2.7.3 RMC Correction Curve. 2.7.4 Lot Identification. 2.7.5 Pre-Conditioning. 2.7.6 Lifetime. 2.8 Test load sizes. Use the test load sizes and corresponding water fill settings defined in Table 2.8 of this appendix when measuring water and energy consumption. Use only the maximum test load size when measuring RMC. Table 2.8—Required Test Load Sizes and Water Fill Settings Water fill control system type Test load size Water fill setting Manual water fill control system Max Max. Automatic water fill control system Max As determined by the clothes washer. 2.9 Use of test loads. 2.9.1 Test loads for energy and water consumption measurements must be bone dry prior to the first cycle of the test, and dried to a maximum of 104 percent of bone dry weight for subsequent testing. 2.9.2 Prepare the energy test cloths for loading by grasping them in the center, lifting, and shaking them to hang loosely, as illustrated in Figure 2.9.2 of this appendix. For all clothes washers, follow any manufacturer loading instructions provided to the user regarding the placement of clothing within the clothes container. In the absence of any manufacturer instructions regarding the placement of clothing within the clothes container, the following loading instructions apply. 2.9.2.1 To load the energy test cloths in a top-loading clothes washer, arrange the cloths circumferentially around the axis of rotation of the clothes container, using alternating lengthwise orientations for adjacent pieces of cloth. Complete each cloth layer across its horizontal plane within the clothes container before adding a new layer. Figure 2.9.2.1 of this appendix illustrates the correct loading technique for a vertical-axis clothes washer. 2.9.2.2 To load the energy test cloths in a front-loading clothes washer, grasp each test cloth in the center as indicted in section 2.9.2 of this appendix, and then place each cloth into the clothes container prior to activating the clothes washer. 2.10 Clothes washer installation. 2.11 Clothes washer pre-conditioning. 2.11.1 Non-water-heating clothes washer. 2.11.2 Water-heating clothes washer. 2.12 Determining the energy test cycle. 3. Test Measurements 3.1 Clothes container capacity. 3.1.1 Place the clothes washer in such a position that the uppermost edge of the clothes container opening is leveled horizontally, so that the container will hold the maximum amount of water. For front-loading clothes washers, the door seal and shipping bolts or other forms of bracing hardware to support the wash drum during shipping must remain in place during the capacity measurement. If the design of a front-loading clothes washer does not include shipping bolts or other forms of bracing hardware to support the wash drum during shipping, a laboratory may support the wash drum by other means, including temporary bracing or support beams. Any temporary bracing or support beams must keep the wash drum in a fixed position, relative to the geometry of the door and door seal components, that is representative of the position of the wash drum during normal operation. The method used must avoid damage to the unit that would affect the results of the energy and water testing. For a front-loading clothes washer that does not include shipping bolts or other forms of bracing hardware to support the wash drum during shipping, the laboratory must fully document the alternative method used to support the wash drum during capacity measurement, include such documentation in the final test report, and pursuant to § 429.71 of this chapter, the manufacturer must retain such documentation as part its test records. 3.1.2 Line the inside of the clothes container with a 2 mil thickness (0.051 mm) plastic bag. All clothes washer components that occupy space within the clothes container and that are recommended for use during a wash cycle must be in place and must be lined with a 2 mil thickness (0.051 mm) plastic bag to prevent water from entering any void space. 3.1.3 Record the total weight of the machine before adding water. 3.1.4 Fill the clothes container manually with either 60 °F ± 5 °F (15.6 °C ± 2.8 °C) or 100 °F ± 10 °F (37.8 °C ± 5.5 °C) water, with the door open. For a top-loading vertical-axis clothes washer, fill the clothes container to the uppermost edge of the rotating portion, including any balance ring. Figure 3.1.4.1 of this appendix illustrates the maximum fill level for top-loading clothes washers. For a front-loading horizontal-axis clothes washer, fill the clothes container to the highest point of contact between the door and the door gasket. If any portion of the door or gasket would occupy the measured volume space when the door is closed, exclude from the measurement the volume that the door or gasket portion would occupy. For a front-loading horizontal-axis clothes washer with a concave door shape, include any additional volume above the plane defined by the highest point of contact between the door and the door gasket, if that area can be occupied by clothing during washer operation. For a top-loading horizontal-axis clothes washer, include any additional volume above the plane of the door hinge that clothing could occupy during washer operation. Figure 3.1.4.2 of this appendix illustrates the maximum fill volumes for all horizontal-axis clothes washer types. For all clothes washers, exclude any volume that cannot be occupied by the clothing load during operation. 3.1.5 Measure and record the weight of water, W, in pounds. 3.1.6 Calculate the clothes container capacity as follows: C = W/d where: C = Capacity in cubic feet (liters). W = Mass of water in pounds (kilograms). d = Density of water (62.0 lbs/ft 3 3 3 3 3.1.7 Calculate the clothes container capacity, C, to the nearest 0.01 cubic foot for the purpose of determining test load sizes per Table 5.1 of this appendix and for all subsequent calculations that include the clothes container capacity. 3.2 Procedure for measuring water and energy consumption values on all automatic and semi-automatic washers. 3.2.1 Perform all energy consumption tests under the energy test cycle. 3.2.2 Perform the test sections listed in Table 3.2.2 in accordance with the wash/rinse temperature selections available in the energy test cycle. Table 3.2.2—Test Section Reference Wash/rinse temperature Corresponding test section Extra-Hot/Cold 3.3 Hot/Cold 3.4 Warm/Cold 3.5 Warm/Warm 3.6 Cold/Cold 3.7 Test Sections Applicable to all Clothes Washers Remaining Moisture Content 3.8 Combined Low-Power Mode Power 3.9 3.2.3 Hot and cold water faucets. 3.2.3.1 For automatic clothes washers, open both the hot and cold water faucets. 3.2.3.2 For semi-automatic washers: (1) For hot inlet water temperature, open the hot water faucet completely and close the cold water faucet; (2) For warm inlet water temperature, open both hot and cold water faucets completely; (3) For cold inlet water temperature, close the hot water faucet and open the cold water faucet completely. 3.2.4 Wash/rinse temperature selection. 3.2.5 Wash time setting. 3.2.5.1 If the cycle under test offers a range of wash time settings, the wash time setting shall be the higher of either the minimum or 70 percent of the maximum wash time available for the wash cycle under test, regardless of the labeling of suggested dial locations. If 70 percent of the maximum wash time is not available on a dial with a discrete number of wash time settings, choose the next-highest setting greater than 70 percent. 3.2.5.2 If the clothes washer is equipped with an electromechanical dial or timer controlling wash time that rotates in both directions, reset the dial to the minimum wash time and then turn it in the direction of increasing wash time to reach the appropriate setting. If the appropriate setting is passed, return the dial to the minimum wash time and then turn in the direction of increasing wash time until the appropriate setting is reached. 3.2.6 Water fill levels. 3.2.6.1 Clothes washers with manual water fill control system. 3.2.6.2 Clothes washers with automatic water fill control system. 3.2.6.2.1 Not user adjustable. 3.2.6.2.2 User-adjustable adaptive. 3.2.6.3 Clothes washers with automatic water fill control system and alternate manual water fill control system. T T E T T T E T 3.2.7 Manufacturer default settings. 3.2.8 For each wash cycle tested, include the entire active washing mode and exclude any delay start or cycle finished modes. 3.2.9 Anomalous Test Cycles. 3.3 Extra-Hot Wash/Cold Rinse. 3.3.1 Maximum test load and water fill. X X X 3.3.2 Minimum test load and water fill. n n n 3.3.3 Average test load and water fill. a a a 3.4 Hot Wash/Cold Rinse. 3.4.1 Maximum test load and water fill. X X X 3.4.2 Minimum test load and water fill. n n n 3.4.3 Average test load and water fill. a a a 3.5 Warm Wash/Cold Rinse. For a clothes washer with fewer than four discrete Warm Wash/Cold Rinse temperature selections, test all Warm Wash/Cold Rinse selections. For a clothes washer that offers four or more Warm Wash/Cold Rinse selections, test at all discrete selections, or test at the 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent positions of the temperature selection device between the hottest hot (≤135 °F (57.2 °C)) wash and the coldest cold wash. If a selection is not available at the 25, 50 or 75 percent position, in place of each such unavailable selection, use the next warmer setting. For each reportable value to be used for the Warm Wash/Cold Rinse temperature selection, calculate the average of all Warm Wash/Cold Rinse temperature selections tested pursuant to this section. 3.5.1 Maximum test load and water fill. X X X 3.5.2 Minimum test load and water fill. n n n 3.5.3 Average test load and water fill. a a a 3.6 Warm Wash/Warm Rinse. 3.6.1 Maximum test load and water fill. X X X 3.6.2 Minimum test load and water fill. n n n 3.6.3 Average test load and water fill. a a a 3.7 Cold Wash/Cold Rinse. 3.7.1 Maximum test load and water fill. X X X 3.7.2 Minimum test load and water fill. n n n 3.7.3 Average test load and water fill. a a a 3.8 Remaining moisture content (RMC). 3.8.1 The wash temperature must be the same as the rinse temperature for all testing. Use the maximum test load as defined in Table 5.1 of this appendix for testing. 3.8.2 Clothes washers with cold rinse only. 3.8.2.1 Record the actual “bone dry” weight of the test load (WI X 3.8.2.2 Set the water level controls to maximum fill. 3.8.2.3 Run the Cold Wash/Cold Rinse cycle. 3.8.2.4 Record the weight of the test load immediately after completion of the wash cycle (WC X 3.8.2.5 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load, RMC X RMC X X X X 3.8.2.6 Apply the RMC correction curve described in section 9 of appendix J3 to this subpart to calculate the corrected remaining moisture content, RMC corr RMC corr X where: A and B are the coefficients of the RMC correction curve as defined in section 8.7 of appendix J3 to this subpart. RMC X 3.8.2.7 Use RMC corr 3.8.3 Clothes washers with both cold and warm rinse options. 3.8.3.1 Complete sections 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 of this appendix for a Cold Wash/Cold Rinse cycle. Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for Cold Wash/Cold Rinse, RMC COLD RMC COLD X X X 3.8.3.2 Apply the RMC correction curve described in section 9 of appendix J3 to this subpart to calculate the corrected remaining moisture content for Cold Wash/Cold Rinse, RMC COLD,corr RMC COLD,corr COLD where: A and B are the coefficients of the RMC correction curve as defined in section 8.7 of appendix J3 to this subpart. RMC COLD 3.8.3.3 Complete sections 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 of this appendix using a Warm Wash/Warm Rinse cycle instead. Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for Warm Wash/Warm Rinse, RMC WARM RMC WARM X X X 3.8.3.4 Apply the RMC correction curve described in section 9 of appendix J3 to this subpart to calculate the corrected remaining moisture content for Warm Wash/Warm Rinse, RMC WARM,corr RMC WARM,corr WARM where: A and B are the coefficients of the RMC correction curve as defined in section 8.7 of appendix J3 to this subpart. RMC WARM 3.8.3.5 Calculate the corrected remaining moisture content of the maximum test load, RMC corr RMC corr COLD,corr ww WARM,corr ww where: RMC COLD,corr RMC WARM,corr TUF ww 3.8.3.6 Use RMC corr 3.8.4 Clothes washers that have options such as multiple selections of spin speeds or spin times that result in different RMC values, and that are available within the energy test cycle. 3.8.4.1 Complete sections 3.8.2 or 3.8.3 of this appendix, as applicable, using the maximum and minimum extremes of the available spin options, excluding any “no spin” (zero spin speed) settings. Combine the calculated values RMC corr,max extraction corr,min extraction RMC corr corr,max extraction corr,min extraction where: RMC corr, max extraction RMC corr, min extraction 3.8.4.2 Use RMC corr 3.8.5 The procedure for calculating the corrected RMC as described in section 3.8.2, 3.8.3, or 3.8.4 of this appendix may be replicated twice in its entirety, for a total of three independent corrected RMC measurements. If three replications of the RMC measurement are performed, use the average of the three corrected RMC measurements as the final corrected RMC in section 4.3 of this appendix. 3.9 Combined low-power mode power. 3.9.1 Perform combined low-power mode testing after completion of an active mode wash cycle included as part of the energy test cycle; after removing the test load; without changing the control panel settings used for the active mode wash cycle; with the door closed; and without disconnecting the electrical energy supply to the clothes washer between completion of the active mode wash cycle and the start of combined low-power mode testing. 3.9.2 For a clothes washer that takes some time to automatically enter a stable inactive mode or off mode state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, note 1 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), allow sufficient time for the clothes washer to automatically reach the default inactive/off mode state before proceeding with the test measurement. 3.9.3 Once the stable inactive/off mode state has been reached, measure and record the default inactive/off mode power, P default 3.9.4 For a clothes washer with a switch, dial, or button that can be optionally selected by the end user to achieve a lower-power inactive/off mode state than the default inactive/off mode state measured in section 3.9.3 of this appendix, after performing the measurement in section 3.9.3, activate the switch, dial, or button to the position resulting in the lowest power consumption and repeat the measurement procedure described in section 3.9.3. Measure and record the lowest-power inactive/off mode power, P lowest 3.10 Energy consumption for the purpose of determining the cycle selection(s) to be included in the energy test cycle. 3.10.1 For the wash/rinse temperature selection being considered under this section, establish the testing conditions set forth in section 2 of this appendix. Select the applicable cycle selection and wash/rinse temperature selection. For all wash/rinse temperature selections, the manufacturer default settings shall be used as described in section 3.2.7 of this appendix. 3.10.2 Use the clothes washer's maximum test load size, determined from Table 5.1 of this appendix, for testing under this section. 3.10.3 For clothes washers with a manual fill control system, user-adjustable automatic water fill control system, or automatic water fill control system with alternate manual water fill control system, use the water fill selector setting resulting in the maximum water level available for each cycle selection for testing under this section. 3.10.4 Each wash cycle tested under this section shall include the entire active washing mode and exclude any delay start or cycle finished modes. 3.10.5 Measure each wash cycle's electrical energy consumption (E X X TX E TX X X where: E X H X T = nominal temperature rise = 75 °F (41.7 °C). K = Water specific heat in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree F = 0.00240 kWh/gal - °F (0.00114 kWh/L- °C). 4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements 4.1 Hot water and machine electrical energy consumption of clothes washers. 4.1.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted hot water consumption for all maximum, average, and minimum water fill levels tested. X a n (a) Vh X X m X h X w X ww X c (b) Vh a a m a h a w a ww a c (c) Vh n n m n h n w n ww n c where: Hm X a n Hh X a n Hw X a n Hww X a n Hc X a n TUF m h w ww c Table 4.1.1—Temperature Use Factors Wash/Rinse Temperature Selections Available in the Energy Test Cycle Clothes washers with cold rinse only Clothes washers with both cold and warm rinse C/C H/C H/C XH/C XH/C H/C XH/C XH/C TUF m 0.14 0.05 0.14 0.05 TUF h 0.63 0.14 * 0.49 0.09 0.14 * 0.22 0.09 TUF w 0.49 0.49 0.22 0.22 TUF ww 0.27 0.27 0.27 TUF c 1.00 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37 * On clothes washers with only two wash temperature selections ≤135 °F, the higher of the two wash temperatures is classified as a Hot Wash/Cold Rinse, in accordance with the wash/rinse temperature definitions within the energy test cycle. 4.1.2 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for all maximum, average, and minimum water fill levels tested. max avg min (a) HE max X (b) HE avg a (c) HE min n where: Vh X a n T = Temperature rise = 75 °F (41.7 °C). K = Water specific heat in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree F = 0.00240 kWh/gal- °F (0.00114 kWh/L- °C). 4.1.3 Total weighted per-cycle hot water energy consumption. T HE T max max avg avg min min where: HE max avg min F max avg min Table 4.1.3—Load Usage Factors Load usage factor Water fill control system Manual Automatic F max 0.72 0.12 F avg 0.74 F min 0.28 0.14 4.1.4 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-heated water, for product labeling requirements. TG HE TG T TG T where: e = Nominal gas or oil water heater efficiency = 0.75. HE T 4.1.5 Per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption for all maximum, average, and minimum test load sizes. max avg min (a) ME max X m X h X w X ww X c (b) ME avg a m a h a w a ww a c (c) ME min n m n h n w n ww n c where: Em X a n Eh X a n Ew X a n Eww X a n Ec X a n TUF m h w ww c 4.1.6 Total weighted per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption. T ME T max max avg avg min min where: ME max avg min F max avg min 4.1.7 Total per-cycle energy consumption when electrically heated water is used. TE E TE ET ET where: M ET H ET 4.2 Water consumption of clothes washers. 4.2.1 Per-cycle water consumption for Extra-Hot Wash/Cold Rinse. Qm max X X Qm avg a a Qm min n n where: Hm X X a a n n 4.2.2 Per-cycle water consumption for Hot Wash/Cold Rinse. Qh max X X Qh avg a a Qh min n n where: Hh X X a a n n 4.2.3 Per-cycle water consumption for Warm Wash/Cold Rinse. Qw max X X Qw avg a a Qw min n n where: Hw X X a a n n 4.2.4 Per-cycle water consumption for Warm Wash/Warm Rinse. Qww max X X Qww avg a a Qww min n n where: Hww X X a a n n 4.2.5 Per-cycle water consumption for Cold Wash/Cold Rinse. Qc max X X Qc avg a a Qc min n n where: Hc X X a a n n 4.2.6 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for Extra-Hot Wash/Cold Rinse. T Qm T max max avg avg min min where: Qm max avg min F max avg min 4.2.7 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for Hot Wash/Cold Rinse. T Qh T max max avg avg min min where: Qh max avg min F max avg min 4.2.8 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for Warm Wash/Cold Rinse. T Qw T max max avg avg min min where: Qw max avg min F max avg min 4.2.9 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for Warm Wash/Warm Rinse. T Qww T max max avg avg min min where: Qww max avg min F max avg min 4.2.10 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for Cold Wash/Cold Rinse. T Qc T max max avg avg min min where: Qc max avg min F max avg min 4.2.11 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for all wash cycles. T Q T T m T h T w T ww T c where: Qm T T T T T TUF m h w ww c 4.2.12 Integrated water factor. IWF = Q T where: Q T C = As defined in section 3.1.7 of this appendix. 4.3 Per-cycle energy consumption for removal of moisture from test load. E D E max avg min corr where: F max avg min Maximum, average, and minimum test load weights are defined in Table 5.1 of this appendix. RMC corr DEF = Nominal energy required for a clothes dryer to remove moisture from clothes = 0.5 kWh/lb (1.1 kWh/kg). DUF = Dryer usage factor, percentage of washer loads dried in a clothes dryer = 0.91. 4.4 Per-cycle combined low-power mode energy consumption. TLP E TLP default default lowest lowest p where: P default P lowest lowest S default S lowest K p 295 = Representative average number of clothes washer cycles in a year. 8,465 = Combined annual hours for inactive and off mode. 4,232.5 = One-half of the combined annual hours for inactive and off mode. 4.5 Modified energy factor. J2 MEF J2 TE E where: C = As defined in section 3.1.7 of this appendix. E TE D E 4.6 Integrated modified energy factor. IMEF = C/(E TE E TLP where: C = As defined in section 3.1.7 of this appendix. E TE D E E TLP 5. Test Loads Table 5.1—Test Load Sizes Container volume Minimum load Maximum load Average load cu. ft. liter lb kg lb kg lb kg ≥ < ≥ < 0.00-0.80 0.00-22.7 3.00 1.36 3.00 1.36 3.00 1.36 0.80-0.90 22.7-25.5 3.00 1.36 3.50 1.59 3.25 1.47 0.90-1.00 25.5-28.3 3.00 1.36 3.90 1.77 3.45 1.56 1.00-1.10 28.3-31.1 3.00 1.36 4.30 1.95 3.65 1.66 1.10-1.20 31.1-34.0 3.00 1.36 4.70 2.13 3.85 1.75 1.20-1.30 34.0-36.8 3.00 1.36 5.10 2.31 4.05 1.84 1.30-1.40 36.8-39.6 3.00 1.36 5.50 2.49 4.25 1.93 1.40-1.50 39.6-42.5 3.00 1.36 5.90 2.68 4.45 2.02 1.50-1.60 42.5-45.3 3.00 1.36 6.40 2.90 4.70 2.13 1.60-1.70 45.3-48.1 3.00 1.36 6.80 3.08 4.90 2.22 1.70-1.80 48.1-51.0 3.00 1.36 7.20 3.27 5.10 2.31 1.80-1.90 51.0-53.8 3.00 1.36 7.60 3.45 5.30 2.40 1.90-2.00 53.8-56.6 3.00 1.36 8.00 3.63 5.50 2.49 2.00-2.10 56.6-59.5 3.00 1.36 8.40 3.81 5.70 2.59 2.10-2.20 59.5-62.3 3.00 1.36 8.80 3.99 5.90 2.68 2.20-2.30 62.3-65.1 3.00 1.36 9.20 4.17 6.10 2.77 2.30-2.40 65.1-68.0 3.00 1.36 9.60 4.35 6.30 2.86 2.40-2.50 68.0-70.8 3.00 1.36 10.00 4.54 6.50 2.95 2.50-2.60 70.8-73.6 3.00 1.36 10.50 4.76 6.75 3.06 2.60-2.70 73.6-76.5 3.00 1.36 10.90 4.94 6.95 3.15 2.70-2.80 76.5-79.3 3.00 1.36 11.30 5.13 7.15 3.24 2.80-2.90 79.3-82.1 3.00 1.36 11.70 5.31 7.35 3.33 2.90-3.00 82.1-85.0 3.00 1.36 12.10 5.49 7.55 3.42 3.00-3.10 85.0-87.8 3.00 1.36 12.50 5.67 7.75 3.52 3.10-3.20 87.8-90.6 3.00 1.36 12.90 5.85 7.95 3.61 3.20-3.30 90.6-93.4 3.00 1.36 13.30 6.03 8.15 3.70 3.30-3.40 93.4-96.3 3.00 1.36 13.70 6.21 8.35 3.79 3.40-3.50 96.3-99.1 3.00 1.36 14.10 6.40 8.55 3.88 3.50-3.60 99.1-101.9 3.00 1.36 14.60 6.62 8.80 3.99 3.60-3.70 101.9-104.8 3.00 1.36 15.00 6.80 9.00 4.08 3.70-3.80 104.8-107.6 3.00 1.36 15.40 6.99 9.20 4.17 3.80-3.90 107.6-110.4 3.00 1.36 15.80 7.16 9.40 4.26 3.90-4.00 110.4-113.3 3.00 1.36 16.20 7.34 9.60 4.35 4.00-4.10 113.3-116.1 3.00 1.36 16.60 7.53 9.80 4.45 4.10-4.20 116.1-118.9 3.00 1.36 17.00 7.72 10.00 4.54 4.20-4.30 118.9-121.8 3.00 1.36 17.40 7.90 10.20 4.63 4.30-4.40 121.8-124.6 3.00 1.36 17.80 8.09 10.40 4.72 4.40-4.50 124.6-127.4 3.00 1.36 18.20 8.27 10.60 4.82 4.50-4.60 127.4-130.3 3.00 1.36 18.70 8.46 10.85 4.91 4.60-4.70 130.3-133.1 3.00 1.36 19.10 8.65 11.05 5.00 4.70-4.80 133.1-135.9 3.00 1.36 19.50 8.83 11.25 5.10 4.80-4.90 135.9-138.8 3.00 1.36 19.90 9.02 11.45 5.19 4.90-5.00 138.8-141.6 3.00 1.36 20.30 9.20 11.65 5.28 5.00-5.10 141.6-144.4 3.00 1.36 20.70 9.39 11.85 5.38 5.10-5.20 144.4-147.2 3.00 1.36 21.10 9.58 12.05 5.47 5.20-5.30 147.2-150.1 3.00 1.36 21.50 9.76 12.25 5.56 5.30-5.40 150.1-152.9 3.00 1.36 21.90 9.95 12.45 5.65 5.40-5.50 152.9-155.7 3.00 1.36 22.30 10.13 12.65 5.75 5.50-5.60 155.7-158.6 3.00 1.36 22.80 10.32 12.90 5.84 5.60-5.70 158.6-161.4 3.00 1.36 23.20 10.51 13.10 5.93 5.70-5.80 161.4-164.2 3.00 1.36 23.60 10.69 13.30 6.03 5.80-5.90 164.2-167.1 3.00 1.36 24.00 10.88 13.50 6.12 5.90-6.00 167.1-169.9 3.00 1.36 24.40 11.06 13.70 6.21 6.00-6.10 169.9-172.7 3.00 1.36 24.80 11.25 13.90 6.30 6.10-6.20 172.7-175.6 3.00 1.36 25.20 11.43 14.10 6.40 6.20-6.30 175.6-178.4 3.00 1.36 25.60 11.61 14.30 6.49 6.30-6.40 178.4-181.2 3.00 1.36 26.00 11.79 14.50 6.58 6.40-6.50 181.2-184.1 3.00 1.36 26.40 11.97 14.70 6.67 6.50-6.60 184.1-186.9 3.00 1.36 26.90 12.20 14.95 6.78 6.60-6.70 186.9-189.7 3.00 1.36 27.30 12.38 15.15 6.87 6.70-6.80 189.7-192.6 3.00 1.36 27.70 12.56 15.35 6.96 6.80-6.90 192.6-195.4 3.00 1.36 28.10 12.75 15.55 7.05 6.90-7.00 195.4-198.2 3.00 1.36 28.50 12.93 15.75 7.14 7.00-7.10 198.2-201.0 3.00 1.36 28.90 13.11 15.95 7.23 7.10-7.20 201.0-203.9 3.00 1.36 29.30 13.29 16.15 7.33 7.20-7.30 203.9-206.7 3.00 1.36 29.70 13.47 16.35 7.42 7.30-7.40 206.7-209.5 3.00 1.36 30.10 13.65 16.55 7.51 7.40-7.50 209.5-212.4 3.00 1.36 30.50 13.83 16.75 7.60 7.50-7.60 212.4-215.2 3.00 1.36 31.00 14.06 17.00 7.71 7.60-7.70 215.2-218.0 3.00 1.36 31.40 14.24 17.20 7.80 7.70-7.80 218.0-220.9 3.00 1.36 31.80 14.42 17.40 7.89 7.80-7.90 220.9-223.7 3.00 1.36 32.20 14.61 17.60 7.98 7.90-8.00 223.7-226.5 3.00 1.36 32.60 14.79 17.80 8.07 (1) All test load weights are bone-dry weights. (2) Allowable tolerance on the test load weights is ±0.10 lbs (0.05 kg). [80 FR 46767, Aug. 5, 2015; 80 FR 50757, Aug. 21, 2015, as amended at 80 FR 62443, Oct. 16, 2015; 87 FR 33395, June 1, 2022; 87 FR 78820, Dec. 23, 2022; 89 FR 84076, Oct. 21, 2024; 90 FR 5536, Jan. 17, 2025] Appendix J3 to Subpart B of Part 430—Test Cloth Specifications and Procedures for Pre-Conditioning and Determining Correction Coefficients of New Test Cloth Lots Note: DOE maintains an historical record of the standard extractor test data and final correction curve coefficients for each approved lot of energy test cloth. These can be accessed through DOE's web page for standards and test procedures for residential clothes washers at DOE's Building Technologies Office Appliance and Equipment Standards website. 1. Objective This appendix includes the following: (1) Specifications for the test cloth to be used for testing clothes washers and clothes dryers; (2) procedures for pre-conditioning the test cloth for use in testing clothes washers and clothes dryers; (3) procedures for verifying that new lots of test cloth meet the defined material specifications; and (4) procedures for developing a set of correction coefficients that correlate the measured remaining moisture content (RMC) values of each new test cloth lot with a set of standard RMC values established as an historical reference point. These correction coefficients are applied to the RMC measurements performed during testing according to appendix J or appendix J2 to this subpart, ensuring that the final corrected RMC measurement for a clothes washer remains independent of the test cloth lot used for testing. 2. Definitions AHAM Bone-dry Lot Roll 3. Test Cloth Specifications The energy test cloths and energy stuffer cloths must meet the following specifications: 3.1 The test cloth material must be one of the following two types: 3.1.1 Legacy Momie Cloth. 3.1.1.1 Fabric type. 3.1.1.2 Fiber content of warp and filling yarn. 3.1.1.3 Thread count. 3.1.1.4 Fabric weight. 2 3.1.2 Modified AATCC Laundering Ballast Type 3. 3.1.2.1 Fabric Type. 3.1.2.2 Fiber content of warp and filling yarn. 3.1.2.3 Thread count. 3.1.2.4 Fabric weight. 2 3.2 Water repellent finishes, such as fluoropolymer stain resistant finishes, must not be applied to the test cloth. 3.3. Test cloth dimensions. 3.3.1 Energy test cloth. 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3.3.2 Energy stuffer cloth. 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 4. Equipment Specifications 4.1 Extractor. 3 i.e., Table 4.1—Extractor Spin Speeds for Each Test Condition “g Force” RPM 100 594 ± 1 200 840 ± 1 350 1,111 ± 1 500 1,328 ± 1 650 1,514 ± 1 4.2 Bone-dryer. 5. Test Cloth Pre-Conditioning Instructions Use the following instructions for performing pre-conditioning of new energy test cloths and energy stuffer cloths as specified throughout section 7 and section 8 of this appendix, before any clothes washer testing using appendix J or appendix J2 to this subpart, and before any clothes dryer testing using appendix D1 or appendix D2 to this subpart. 5.1 Perform five complete wash-rinse-spin cycles, the first two with current AHAM Standard detergent Formula 3 and the last three without detergent. Place the test cloth in a clothes washer set at the maximum water level. Wash the load for ten minutes in soft water (17 ppm hardness or less) using 27.0 grams + 4.0 grams per pound of cloth load of AHAM Standard detergent Formula 3. The wash temperature is to be controlled to 135 °F ± 5 °F (57.2 °C ± 2.8 °C) and the rinse temperature is to be controlled to 60 °F ± 5 °F (15.6 °C ± 2.8 °C). 5.2 Dry the load to bone-dry between each of the five wash-rinse-spin cycles. 5.3 The maximum shrinkage after pre-conditioning must not be more than 5 percent of the length and width. Measure per AATCC Test Method 135-2010 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 6. Extractor Run Instructions Use the following instructions for performing each of the extractor runs specified throughout section 7 and section 8 of this appendix: 6.1 Test load size. 6.2 Measure the average RMC for each sample loads as follows: 6.2.1 Dry the test cloth until it is bone-dry according to the definition in section 2 of this appendix. Record the bone-dry weight of the test load (WI). 6.2.2 Prepare the test load for soak by grouping four test cloths into loose bundles. Create the bundles by hanging four cloths vertically from one corner and loosely wrapping the test cloth onto itself to form the bundle. Bundles should be wrapped loosely to ensure consistency of water extraction. Then place the bundles into the water to soak. Eight to nine bundles will be formed depending on the test load. The ninth bundle may not equal four cloths but can incorporate energy stuffer cloths to help offset the size difference. 6.2.3 Soak the test load for 20 minutes in 10 gallons of soft (<17 ppm) water. The entire test load must be submerged. Maintain a water temperature of 100 °F ± 5 °F (37.8 °C ± 2.8 °C) at all times between the start and end of the soak. 6.2.4 Remove the test load and allow each of the test cloth bundles to drain over the water bath for a maximum of 5 seconds. 6.2.5 Manually place the test cloth bundles in the basket of the extractor, distributing them evenly by eye. The draining and loading process must take no longer than 1 minute. Spin the load at a fixed speed corresponding to the intended centripetal acceleration level (measured in units of the acceleration of gravity, g) ± 1g for the intended time period ± 5 seconds. Begin the timer when the extractor meets the required spin speed for each test. 6.2.6 Record the weight of the test load immediately after the completion of the extractor spin cycle (WC). 6.2.7 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load as (WC-WI)/WI. 6.2.8 Draining the soak tub is not necessary if the water bath is corrected for water level and temperature before the next extraction. 6.2.9 Drying the test load in between extraction runs is not necessary. However, the bone-dry weight must be checked after every 12 extraction runs to make sure the bone-dry weight is within tolerance (8.4 ± 0.1 lbs). Following this, the test load must be soaked and extracted once before continuing with the remaining extraction runs. Perform this extraction at the same spin speed used for the extraction run prior to checking the bone-dry weight, for a time period of 4 minutes. Either warm or cold soak temperature may be used. 7. Test Cloth Material Verification Procedure 7.1 Material Properties Verification. 7.1.1 Dimensions. 7.1.2 Oil repellency. TM 7.1.3 Absorbency. TM 7.2 Uniformity Verification. 7.2.1 Pre-conditioning. 7.2.2 Distribution of samples. Table 7.2.2—Distribution of Sample Loads for Prequalification Testing Roll No. Roll location First Beginning. Middle Beginning. Last Beginning. 7.2.3 Measure the remaining moisture content of each of the nine sample test loads, as specified in section 6 of this appendix, using a centripetal acceleration of 350g (corresponding to 1111 ± 1 RPM) and a spin duration of 15 minutes ± 5 seconds. 7.2.4 Repeat section 7.2.3 of this appendix an additional two times and calculate the arithmetic average of the three RMC values to determine the average RMC value for each sample load. It is not necessary to dry the load to bone-dry the load before the second and third replications. 7.2.5 Calculate the coefficient of variation (CV) of the nine average RMC values from each sample load. For test cloth lots qualified after February 18, 2025, the CV must be less than or equal to 1.5% for the test cloth lot to be considered acceptable and to perform the standard extractor RMC testing. 8. RMC Correction Curve Procedure 8.1 Pre-conditioning. 8.2 Distribution of samples. 8.3 Measure the remaining moisture content of the test load, as specified in section 6 of this appendix at five g-force levels: 100 g, 200 g, 350 g, 500 g, and 650 g, using two different spin times at each g level: 4 minutes and 15 minutes. Table 4.1 of this appendix provides the corresponding spin speeds for each g-force level. 8.4 Repeat section 8.3 of this appendix using soft (<17 ppm) water at 60 °F ± 5 °F (15.6 °C ± 2.8 °C). 8.5 Repeat sections 8.3 and 8.4 of this appendix an additional two times, so that three replications at each extractor condition are performed. When this procedure is performed in its entirety, a total of 60 extractor RMC test runs are required. 8.6 Calculate RMC cloth-avg 8.7 Perform a linear least-squares fit to determine coefficients A and B such that the standard RMC values shown in Table 8.7 of this appendix (RMC standard cloth-avg RMC standard cloth-avg where A and B are coefficients of the linear least-squares fit. Table 8.7—Standard RMC Values “g Force” RMC percentage Warm soak Cold soak 15 min. spin 4 min. spin 15 min. spin 4 min. spin 100 45.9 49.9 49.7 52.8 200 35.7 40.4 37.9 43.1 350 29.6 33.1 30.7 35.8 500 24.2 28.7 25.5 30.0 650 23.0 26.4 24.1 28.0 8.8 Calculate the corrected RMC value for each extractor test condition, RMC cloth-corr RMC cloth-corr A RMC cloth-avg B Where: RMC cloth-avg A and B are the coefficients of the linear least squares fit as determined in section 8.7 of this appendix. 8.9 Calculate the root mean square error of the linear fit, RMSE. For test cloth lots qualified after February 18, 2025, the RMSE must be less than or equal to 0.012 for the test cloth lot to be considered acceptable. The RMSE is calculated as follows: Where: RMC standard_i standard RMC cloth-corr_i N = the number of extractor test conditions listed in Table 8.7 of this appendix = 20. 9. Application of the RMC Correction Curve 9.1 Using the coefficients A and B calculated in section 8.7 of this appendix: RMC corr 9.2 Apply this RMC correction curve to measured RMC values in appendix J and appendix J2 to this subpart. [87 FR 33403, June 1, 2022, as amended at 87 FR 78820, Dec. 23, 2022; 90 FR 5537, Jan. 17, 2025] Appendixes K-L to Subpart B of Part 430 [Reserved] Appendix M to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Central Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps Note: Prior to January 1, 2023, if using the appendix M test procedure for representations, including compliance certifications, with respect to the energy use, power, or efficiency of central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps, any such representations must be based on the results of testing pursuant to either this appendix or the procedures in appendix M as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B, in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2022. Any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of such central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps must be in accordance with whichever version is selected. Any representations, including compliance certifications, made with respect to the energy use, power, or efficiency of central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps made on or after January 1, 2023, must be based on the results of testing pursuant the procedures in appendix M1 to this subpart. On or after July 5, 2017 and prior to January 1, 2023, any representations, including compliance certifications, made with respect to the energy use, power, or efficiency of central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps must be based on the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. On or after January 1, 2023, any representations, including compliance certifications, made with respect to the energy use, power, or efficiency of central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps must be based on the results of testing pursuant to appendix M1 of this subpart. 1. Scope and Definitions 1.1 Scope This test procedure provides a method of determining SEER, EER, HSPF and P W,OFF (a) Split-system air conditioners, including single-split, multi-head mini-split, multi-split (including VRF), and multi-circuit systems (b) Split-system heat pumps, including single-split, multi-head mini-split, multi-split (including VRF), and multi-circuit systems (c) Single-package air conditioners (d) Single-package heat pumps (e) Small-duct, high-velocity systems (including VRF) (f) Space-constrained products—air conditioners (g) Space-constrained products—heat pumps For purposes of this appendix, the Department of Energy incorporates by reference specific sections of several industry standards, as listed in § 430.3. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the incorporated standards. All section references refer to sections within this appendix unless otherwise stated. 1.2 Definitions Airflow-control settings e.g., i.e., Air sampling device e.g. Airflow prevention device Aspirating psychrometer Blower coil indoor unit Blower coil system Cased coil Coefficient of Performance (COP) Coil-only indoor unit Coil-only system Condensing unit Constant-air-volume-rate indoor blower Continuously recorded, Cooling load factor (CLF) Crankcase heater Cyclic Test Damper box Degradation coefficient (C D ) D c D h Demand-defrost control system (1) Monitor one or more parameters that always vary with the amount of frost accumulated on the outdoor coil ( e.g., (2) operate as a feedback system that measures the length of the defrost period and adjusts defrost frequency accordingly. In all cases, when the frost parameter(s) reaches a predetermined value, the system initiates a defrost. In a demand-defrost control system, defrosts are terminated based on monitoring a parameter(s) that indicates that frost has been eliminated from the coil. ( Note: Design heating requirement (DHR) Dry-coil tests Ducted system Energy efficiency ratio (EER) When determined for a ducted coil-only system, EER must include, from this appendix, the section 3.3 and 3.5.1 default values for the heat output and power input of a fan motor. Evaporator coil Heat pump Heat pump having a heat comfort controller Heating load factor (HLF) Heating season e.g., Heating seasonal performance factor (HSPF) Independent coil manufacturer (ICM) Indoor unit (1) An arrangement of refrigerant-to-air heat transfer coil(s) for transfer of heat between the refrigerant and the indoor air, (2) A condensate drain pan, and may or may not include (3) Sheet metal or plastic parts not part of external cabinetry to direct/route airflow over the coil(s), (4) A cooling mode expansion device, (5) External cabinetry, and (6) An integrated indoor blower ( i.e. Multi-head mini-split system Multiple-circuit (or multi-circuit) system Multiple-split (or multi-split) system e.g., Nominal capacity Nominal cooling capacity 2 Nominal heating capacity N Non-ducted indoor unit Normalized Gross Indoor Fin Surface (NGIFS) Off-mode power consumption Off-mode season Outdoor unit Outdoor unit manufacturer (OUM) Part-load factor (PLF) Seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER) Service coil e.g., Shoulder season e.g., Single-package unit Single-split system Small-duct, high-velocity system Split system Standard Air 3 Steady-state test Temperature bin Test condition tolerance Test operating tolerance Tested combination (1) The system consists of one outdoor unit with one or more compressors matched with between two and five indoor units; (2) The indoor units must: (i) Collectively, have a nominal cooling capacity greater than or equal to 95 percent and less than or equal to 105 percent of the nominal cooling capacity of the outdoor unit; (ii) Each represent the highest sales volume model family, if this is possible while meeting all the requirements of this section. If this is not possible, one or more of the indoor units may represent another indoor model family in order that all the other requirements of this section are met. (iii) Individually not have a nominal cooling capacity greater than 50 percent of the nominal cooling capacity of the outdoor unit, unless the nominal cooling capacity of the outdoor unit is 24,000 Btu/h or less; (iv) Operate at fan speeds consistent with manufacturer's specifications; and (v) All be subject to the same minimum external static pressure requirement while able to produce the same external static pressure at the exit of each outlet plenum when connected in a manifold configuration as required by the test procedure. (3) Where referenced, “nominal cooling capacity” means, for indoor units, the highest cooling capacity listed in published product literature for 95 °F outdoor dry bulb temperature and 80 °F dry bulb, 67 °F wet bulb indoor conditions, and for outdoor units, the lowest cooling capacity listed in published product literature for these conditions. If incomplete or no operating conditions are published, the highest (for indoor units) or lowest (for outdoor units) such cooling capacity available for sale must be used. Time-adaptive defrost control system Time-temperature defrost control systems e.g., e.g., In a second application of the control scheme, one or more parameters are measured ( e.g., Triple-capacity, northern heat pump Triple-split system Two-capacity (or two-stage) compressor system Two-capacity, northern heat pump Uncased coil Variable refrigerant flow (VRF) system Note: Variable-speed compressor system Wet-coil test 2. Testing Overview and Conditions (A) Test VRF systems using AHRI 1230-2010 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) and appendix M. Where AHRI 1230-2010 refers to the appendix C therein substitute the provisions of this appendix. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over AHRI 1230-2010. For definitions use section 1 of appendix M and section 3 of AHRI 1230-2010 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). For rounding requirements, refer to § 430.23(m). For determination of certified ratings, refer to § 429.16 of this chapter. For test room requirements, refer to section 2.1 of this appendix. For test unit installation requirements refer to sections 2.2.a, 2.2.b, 2.2.c, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 2.2.3(a), 2.2.3(c), 2.2.4, 2.2.5, and 2.4 to 2.12 of this appendix, and sections 5.1.3 and 5.1.4 of AHRI 1230-2010. The “manufacturer's published instructions,” as stated in section 8.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) and “manufacturer's installation instructions” discussed in this appendix mean the manufacturer's installation instructions that come packaged with or appear in the labels applied to the unit. This does not include online manuals. Installation instructions that appear in the labels applied to the unit take precedence over installation instructions that are shipped with the unit. For general requirements for the test procedure, refer to section 3.1 of this appendix, except for sections 3.1.3 and 3.1.4, which are requirements for indoor air volume and outdoor air volume. For indoor air volume and outdoor air volume requirements, refer instead to section 6.1.5 (except where section 6.1.5 refers to Table 8, refer instead to Table 4 of this appendix) and 6.1.6 of AHRI 1230-2010. For the test method, refer to sections 3.3 to 3.5 and 3.7 to 3.13 of this appendix. For cooling mode and heating mode test conditions, refer to section 6.2 of AHRI 1230-2010. For calculations of seasonal performance descriptors, refer to section 4 of this appendix. (B) For systems other than VRF, only a subset of the sections listed in this test procedure apply when testing and determining represented values for a particular unit. Table 1 shows the sections of the test procedure that apply to each system. This table is meant to assist manufacturers in finding the appropriate sections of the test procedure; the appendix sections rather than the table provide the specific requirements for testing, and given the varied nature of available units, manufacturers are responsible for determining which sections apply to each unit tested based on the unit's characteristics. To use this table, first refer to the sections listed under “all units”. Then refer to additional requirements based on: (1) System configuration(s), (2) The compressor staging or modulation capability, and (3) Any special features. Testing requirements for space-constrained products do not differ from similar equipment that is not space-constrained and thus are not listed separately in this table. Air conditioners and heat pumps are not listed separately in this table, but heating procedures and calculations apply only to heat pumps. 2.1 Test Room Requirements a. Test using two side-by-side rooms: An indoor test room and an outdoor test room. For multiple-split, single-zone-multi-coil or multi-circuit air conditioners and heat pumps, however, use as many indoor test rooms as needed to accommodate the total number of indoor units. These rooms must comply with the requirements specified in sections 8.1.2 and 8.1.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). b. Inside these test rooms, use artificial loads during cyclic tests and frost accumulation tests, if needed, to produce stabilized room air temperatures. For one room, select an electric resistance heater(s) having a heating capacity that is approximately equal to the heating capacity of the test unit's condenser. For the second room, select a heater(s) having a capacity that is close to the sensible cooling capacity of the test unit's evaporator. Cycle the heater located in the same room as the test unit evaporator coil ON and OFF when the test unit cycles ON and OFF. Cycle the heater located in the same room as the test unit condensing coil ON and OFF when the test unit cycles OFF and ON. 2.2 Test Unit Installation Requirements a. Install the unit according to section 8.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3), subject to the following additional requirements: (1) When testing split systems, follow the requirements given in section 6.1.3.5 of AHRI 210/240-2008 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). For the vapor refrigerant line(s), use the insulation included with the unit; if no insulation is provided, use insulation meeting the specifications for the insulation in the installation instructions included with the unit by the manufacturer; if no insulation is included with the unit and the installation instructions do not contain provisions for insulating the line(s), fully insulate the vapor refrigerant line(s) with vapor proof insulation having an inside diameter that matches the refrigerant tubing and a nominal thickness of at least 0.5 inches. For the liquid refrigerant line(s), use the insulation included with the unit; if no insulation is provided, use insulation meeting the specifications for the insulation in the installation instructions included with the unit by the manufacturer; if no insulation is included with the unit and the installation instructions do not contain provisions for insulating the line(s), leave the liquid refrigerant line(s) exposed to the air for air conditioners and heat pumps that heat and cool; or, for heating-only heat pumps, insulate the liquid refrigerant line(s) with insulation having an inside diameter that matches the refrigerant tubing and a nominal thickness of at least 0.5 inches. However, these requirements do not take priority over instructions for application of insulation for the purpose of improving refrigerant temperature measurement accuracy as required by sections 2.10.2 and 2.10.3 of this appendix. Insulation must be the same for the cooling and heating tests. (2) When testing split systems, if the indoor unit does not ship with a cooling mode expansion device, test the system using the device as specified in the installation instructions provided with the indoor unit. If none is specified, test the system using a fixed orifice or piston type expansion device that is sized appropriately for the system. (3) When testing triple-split systems (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions), use the tubing length specified in section 6.1.3.5 of AHRI 210/240-2008 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) to connect the outdoor coil, indoor compressor section, and indoor coil while still meeting the requirement of exposing 10 feet of the tubing to outside conditions; (4) When testing split systems having multiple indoor coils, connect each indoor blower coil unit to the outdoor unit using: (a) 25 feet of tubing, or (b) tubing furnished by the manufacturer, whichever is longer. At least 10 feet of the system interconnection tubing shall be exposed to the outside conditions. If they are needed to make a secondary measurement of capacity or for verification of refrigerant charge, install refrigerant pressure measuring instruments as described in section 8.2.5 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). Section 2.10 of this appendix specifies which secondary methods require refrigerant pressure measurements and section 2.2.5.5 of this appendix discusses use of pressure measurements to verify charge. At a minimum, insulate the low-pressure line(s) of a split system with insulation having an inside diameter that matches the refrigerant tubing and a nominal thickness of 0.5 inch. b. For units designed for both horizontal and vertical installation or for both up-flow and down-flow vertical installations, use the orientation for testing specified by the manufacturer in the certification report. Conduct testing with the following installed: (1) The most restrictive filter(s); (2) Supplementary heating coils; and (3) Other equipment specified as part of the unit, including all hardware used by a heat comfort controller if so equipped (see section 1 of this appendix, Definitions). For small-duct, high-velocity systems, configure all balance dampers or restrictor devices on or inside the unit to fully open or lowest restriction. c. Testing a ducted unit without having an indoor air filter installed is permissible as long as the minimum external static pressure requirement is adjusted as stated in Table 4, note 3 (see section 3.1.4 of this appendix). Except as noted in section 3.1.10 of this appendix, prevent the indoor air supplementary heating coils from operating during all tests. For uncased coils, create an enclosure using 1 inch fiberglass foil-faced ductboard having a nominal density of 6 pounds per cubic foot. Or alternatively, construct an enclosure using sheet metal or a similar material and insulating material having a thermal resistance (“R” value) between 4 and 6 hr·ft 2 d. When testing a coil-only system, install a toroidal-type transformer to power the system's low-voltage components, complying with any additional requirements for the transformer mentioned in the installation manuals included with the unit by the system manufacturer. If the installation manuals do not provide specifications for the transformer, use a transformer having the following features: (1) A nominal volt-amp rating such that the transformer is loaded between 25 and 90 percent of this rating for the highest level of power measured during the off mode test (section 3.13 of this appendix); (2) Designed to operate with a primary input of 230 V, single phase, 60 Hz; and (3) That provides an output voltage that is within the specified range for each low-voltage component. Include the power consumption of the components connected to the transformer as part of the total system power consumption during the off mode tests; do not include the power consumed by the transformer when no load is connected to it. e. Test an outdoor unit with no match ( i.e., (1) Round tubes of outer diameter no less than 0.375 inches, and (2) a normalized gross indoor fin surface (NGIFS) no greater than 1.0 square inches per British thermal unit per hour (sq. in./Btu/hr). NGIFS is calculated as follows: NGIFS L f W f N f Q c where: L f W f N f Q c ƒ. If the outdoor unit or the outdoor portion of a single-package unit has a drain pan heater to prevent freezing of defrost water, the heater shall be energized, subject to control to de-energize it when not needed by the heater's thermostat or the unit's control system, for all tests. g. If pressure measurement devices are connected to a cooling/heating heat pump refrigerant circuit, the refrigerant charge M t t t where: V i f i r Table 2—Pressure Measurement Locations Location Compressor Discharge 1 Between Outdoor Coil and Outdoor Expansion Valve(s) 2 Liquid Service Valve 3 Indoor Coil Inlet 4 Indoor Coil Outlet 5 Common Suction Port (i.e. vapor service valve) 6 Compressor Suction 7 Calculate the internal volume of each pressure measurement system using internal volume reported for pressure transducers and gauges in product literature, if available. If such information is not available, use the value of 0.1 cubic inches internal volume for each pressure transducer, and 0.2 cubic inches for each pressure gauge. In addition, for heat pumps that have a single expansion device located in the outdoor unit to serve each indoor unit, the internal volume of the pressure system at location 2 (as indicated in Table 2) must be no more than 1 cubic inch. Once the pressure measurement lines are set up, no change should be made until all tests are finished. 2.2.1 Defrost Control Settings Set heat pump defrost controls at the normal settings which most typify those encountered in generalized climatic region IV. (Refer to Figure 1 and Table 20 of section 4.2 of this appendix for information on region IV.) For heat pumps that use a time-adaptive defrost control system (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions), the manufacturer must specify in the certification report the frosting interval to be used during frost accumulation tests and provide the procedure for manually initiating the defrost at the specified time. 2.2.2 Special Requirements for Units Having a Multiple-Speed Outdoor Fan Configure the multiple-speed outdoor fan according to the installation manual included with the unit by the manufacturer, and thereafter, leave it unchanged for all tests. The controls of the unit must regulate the operation of the outdoor fan during all lab tests except dry coil cooling mode tests. For dry coil cooling mode tests, the outdoor fan must operate at the same speed used during the required wet coil test conducted at the same outdoor test conditions. 2.2.3 Special Requirements for Multi-Split Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps and Ducted Systems Using a Single Indoor Section Containing Multiple Indoor Blowers That Would Normally Operate Using Two or More Indoor Thermostats Because these systems will have more than one indoor blower and possibly multiple outdoor fans and compressor systems, references in this test procedure to a singular indoor blower, outdoor fan, and/or compressor means all indoor blowers, all outdoor fans, and all compressor systems that are energized during the test. a. Additional requirements for multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps. For any test where the system is operated at part load ( i.e., b. Additional requirements for ducted split systems with a single indoor unit containing multiple indoor blowers (or for single-package units with an indoor section containing multiple indoor blowers) where the indoor blowers are designed to cycle on and off independently of one another and are not controlled such that all indoor blowers are modulated to always operate at the same air volume rate or speed. For any test where the system is operated at its lowest capacity— i.e., c. For test setups where the laboratory's physical limitations requires use of more than the required line length of 25 feet as listed in section 2.2.a(4) of this appendix, then the actual refrigerant line length used by the laboratory may exceed the required length and the refrigerant line length correction factors in Table 4 of AHRI 1230-2010 are applied to the cooling capacity measured for each cooling mode test. 2.2.4 Wet-Bulb Temperature Requirements for the Air Entering the Indoor and Outdoor Coils 2.2.4.1 Cooling Mode Tests For wet-coil cooling mode tests, regulate the water vapor content of the air entering the indoor unit so that the wet-bulb temperature is as listed in Tables 5 to 8. As noted in these same tables, achieve a wet-bulb temperature during dry-coil cooling mode tests that results in no condensate forming on the indoor coil. Controlling the water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor side of the unit is not required for cooling mode tests except when testing: (1) Units that reject condensate to the outdoor coil during wet coil tests. Tables 5-8 list the applicable wet-bulb temperatures. (2) Single-package units where all or part of the indoor section is located in the outdoor test room. The average dew point temperature of the air entering the outdoor coil during wet coil tests must be within ±3.0 °F of the average dew point temperature of the air entering the indoor coil over the 30-minute data collection interval described in section 3.3 of this appendix. For dry coil tests on such units, it may be necessary to limit the moisture content of the air entering the outdoor coil of the unit to meet the requirements of section 3.4 of this appendix. 2.2.4.2 Heating Mode Tests For heating mode tests, regulate the water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor unit to the applicable wet-bulb temperature listed in Tables 12 to 15. The wet-bulb temperature entering the indoor side of the heat pump must not exceed 60 °F. Additionally, if the Outdoor Air Enthalpy test method (section 2.10.1 of this appendix) is used while testing a single-package heat pump where all or part of the outdoor section is located in the indoor test room, adjust the wet-bulb temperature for the air entering the indoor side to yield an indoor-side dew point temperature that is as close as reasonably possible to the dew point temperature of the outdoor-side entering air. 2.2.5 Additional Refrigerant Charging Requirements 2.2.5.1 Instructions To Use for Charging a. Where the manufacturer's installation instructions contain two sets of refrigerant charging criteria, one for field installations and one for lab testing, use the field installation criteria. b. For systems consisting of an outdoor unit manufacturer's outdoor section and indoor section with differing charging procedures, adjust the refrigerant charge per the outdoor installation instructions. c. For systems consisting of an outdoor unit manufacturer's outdoor unit and an independent coil manufacturer's indoor unit with differing charging procedures, adjust the refrigerant charge per the indoor unit's installation instructions. If instructions are provided only with the outdoor unit or are provided only with an independent coil manufacturer's indoor unit, then use the provided instructions. 2.2.5.2 Test(s) To Use for Charging a. Use the tests or operating conditions specified in the manufacturer's installation instructions for charging. The manufacturer's installation instructions may specify use of tests other than the A or A 2 2 b. If the manufacturer's installation instructions do not specify a test or operating conditions for charging or there are no manufacturer's instructions, use the following test(s): (1) For air conditioners or cooling and heating heat pumps, use the A or A 2 (2) For cooling and heating heat pumps that do not operate in the H1 or H1 2 e.g. 2 2 2.2.5.3 Parameters To Set and Their Target Values a. Consult the manufacturer's installation instructions regarding which parameters ( e.g., b. In the event of conflicting information between charging instructions ( i.e., (1) For fixed orifice systems: (i) Superheat (ii) High side pressure or corresponding saturation or dew-point temperature (iii) Low side pressure or corresponding saturation or dew-point temperature (iv) Low side temperature (v) High side temperature (vi) Charge weight (2) For expansion valve systems: (i) Subcooling (ii) High side pressure or corresponding saturation or dew-point temperature (iii) Low side pressure or corresponding saturation or dew-point temperature (iv) Approach temperature (difference between temperature of liquid leaving condenser and condenser average inlet air temperature) (v) Charge weight c. If there are no installation instructions and/or they do not provide parameters and target values, set superheat to a target value of 12 °F for fixed orifice systems or set subcooling to a target value of 10 °F for expansion valve systems. 2.2.5.4 Charging Tolerances a. If the manufacturer's installation instructions specify tolerances on target values for the charging parameters, set the values within these tolerances. b. Otherwise, set parameter values within the following test condition tolerances for the different charging parameters: 1. Superheat: ± 2.0 °F 2. Subcooling: ± 2.0 °F 3. High side pressure or corresponding saturation or dew point temperature: ± 4.0 psi or ± 1.0 °F 4. Low side pressure or corresponding saturation or dew point temperature: ± 2.0 psi or ± 0.8 °F 5. High side temperature: ±2.0 °F 6. Low side temperature: ±2.0 °F 7. Approach temperature: ± 1.0 °F 8. Charge weight: ± 2.0 ounce 2.2.5.5 Special Charging Instructions a. Cooling and Heating Heat Pumps If, using the initial charge set in the A or A 2 2 2 2 b. Single-Package Systems Unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer's installation instructions, install one or more refrigerant line pressure gauges during the setup of the unit, located depending on the parameters used to verify or set charge, as described: (1) Install a pressure gauge at the location of the service valve on the liquid line if charging is on the basis of subcooling, or high side pressure or corresponding saturation or dew point temperature; (2) Install a pressure gauge at the location of the service valve on the suction line if charging is on the basis of superheat, or low side pressure or corresponding saturation or dew point temperature. Use methods for installing pressure gauge(s) at the required location(s) as indicated in manufacturer's instructions if specified. 2.2.5.6 Near-Azeotropic and Zeotropic Refrigerants. Perform charging of near-azeotropic and zeotropic refrigerants only with refrigerant in the liquid state. 2.2.5.7 Adjustment of Charge Between Tests. After charging the system as described in this test procedure, use the set refrigerant charge for all tests used to determine performance. Do not adjust the refrigerant charge at any point during testing. If measurements indicate that refrigerant charge has leaked during the test, repair the refrigerant leak, repeat any necessary set-up steps, and repeat all tests. 2.3 Indoor Air Volume Rates. If a unit's controls allow for overspeeding the indoor blower (usually on a temporary basis), take the necessary steps to prevent overspeeding during all tests. 2.3.1 Cooling Tests a. Set indoor blower airflow-control settings ( e.g., b. Express the Cooling full-load air volume rate, the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate, and the Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate in terms of standard air. 2.3.2 Heating Tests a. Set indoor blower airflow-control settings ( e.g., b. Express the heating full-load air volume rate, the heating minimum air volume rate, the heating intermediate air volume rate, and the heating nominal air volume rate in terms of standard air. 2.4 Indoor Coil Inlet and Outlet Duct Connections Insulate and/or construct the outlet plenum as described in section 2.4.1 of this appendix and, if installed, the inlet plenum described in section 2.4.2 of this appendix with thermal insulation having a nominal overall resistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr·ft 2 2.4.1 Outlet Plenum for the Indoor Unit a. Attach a plenum to the outlet of the indoor coil. ( Note: b. For systems having multiple indoor coils, or multiple indoor blowers within a single indoor section, attach a plenum to each indoor coil or indoor blower outlet. In order to reduce the number of required airflow measurement apparati (section 2.6 of this appendix), each such apparatus may serve multiple outlet plenums connected to a single common duct leading to the apparatus. More than one indoor test room may be used, which may use one or more common ducts leading to one or more airflow measurement apparati within each test room that contains multiple indoor coils. At the plane where each plenum enters a common duct, install an adjustable airflow damper and use it to equalize the static pressure in each plenum. Each outlet air temperature grid (section 2.5.4 of this appendix) and airflow measuring apparatus are located downstream of the inlet(s) to the common duct. For multiple-circuit (or multi-circuit) systems for which each indoor coil outlet is measured separately and its outlet plenum is not connected to a common duct connecting multiple outlet plenums, the outlet air temperature grid and airflow measuring apparatus must be installed at each outlet plenum. c. For small-duct, high-velocity systems, install an outlet plenum that has a diameter that is equal to or less than the value listed in Table 3. The limit depends only on the Cooling full-load air volume rate (see section 3.1.4.1.1 of this appendix) and is effective regardless of the flange dimensions on the outlet of the unit (or an air supply plenum adapter accessory, if installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions). d. Add a static pressure tap to each face of the (each) outlet plenum, if rectangular, or at four evenly distributed locations along the circumference of an oval or round plenum. Create a manifold that connects the four static pressure taps. Figure 9 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) shows allowed options for the manifold configuration. The cross-sectional dimensions of plenum shall be equal to the dimensions of the indoor unit outlet. See Figures 7a, 7b, and 7c of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 for the minimum length of the (each) outlet plenum and the locations for adding the static pressure taps for ducted blower coil indoor units and single-package systems. See Figure 8 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 for coil-only indoor units. Table 3—Size of Outlet Plenum for Small-Duct High-Velocity Indoor Units Cooling full-load Maximum ≤500 6 501 to 700 7 701 to 900 8 901 to 1100 9 1101 to 1400 10 1401 to 1750 11 * If the outlet plenum is rectangular, calculate its equivalent diameter using (4 A/P, A 2.4.2 Inlet Plenum for the Indoor Unit Install an inlet plenum when testing a coil-only indoor unit, a ducted blower coil indoor unit, or a single-package system. See Figures 7b and 7c of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 for cross-sectional dimensions, the minimum length of the inlet plenum, and the locations of the static-pressure taps for ducted blower coil indoor units and single-package systems. See Figure 8 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 for coil-only indoor units. The inlet plenum duct size shall equal the size of the inlet opening of the air-handling (blower coil) unit or furnace. For a ducted blower coil indoor unit the set up may omit the inlet plenum if an inlet airflow prevention device is installed with a straight internally unobstructed duct on its outlet end with a minimum length equal to 1.5 times the square root of the cross-sectional area of the indoor unit inlet. See section 2.5.1.2 of this appendix for requirements for the locations of static pressure taps built into the inlet airflow prevention device. For all of these arrangements, make a manifold that connects the four static-pressure taps using one of the three configurations specified in section 2.4.1.d of this appendix. Never use an inlet plenum when testing non-ducted indoor units. 2.5 Indoor Coil Air Property Measurements and Airflow Prevention Devices Follow instructions for indoor coil air property measurements as described in section 2.14 of this appendix, unless otherwise instructed in this section. a. Measure the dry-bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air entering and leaving the indoor coil. If needed, use an air sampling device to divert air to a sensor(s) that measures the water vapor content of the air. See section 5.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1-2013 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) for guidance on constructing an air sampling device. No part of the air sampling device or the tubing transferring the sampled air to the sensor shall be within two inches of the test chamber floor, and the transfer tubing shall be insulated. The sampling device may also be used for measurement of dry bulb temperature by transferring the sampled air to a remotely located sensor(s). The air sampling device and the remotely located temperature sensor(s) may be used to determine the entering air dry bulb temperature during any test. The air sampling device and the remotely located sensor(s) may be used to determine the leaving air dry bulb temperature for all tests except: (1) Cyclic tests; and (2) Frost accumulation tests. b. Install grids of temperature sensors to measure dry bulb temperatures of both the entering and leaving airstreams of the indoor unit. These grids of dry bulb temperature sensors may be used to measure average dry bulb temperature entering and leaving the indoor unit in all cases (as an alternative to the dry bulb sensor measuring the sampled air). The leaving airstream grid is required for measurement of average dry bulb temperature leaving the indoor unit for the two special cases noted above. The grids are also required to measure the air temperature distribution of the entering and leaving airstreams as described in sections 3.1.8 and 3.1.9 of this appendix. Two such grids may applied as a thermopile, to directly obtain the average temperature difference rather than directly measuring both entering and leaving average temperatures. c. Use of airflow prevention devices. Use an inlet and outlet air damper box, or use an inlet upturned duct and an outlet air damper box when conducting one or both of the cyclic tests listed in sections 3.2 and 3.6 of this appendix on ducted systems. If not conducting any cyclic tests, an outlet air damper box is required when testing ducted and non-ducted heat pumps that cycle off the indoor blower during defrost cycles and there is no other means for preventing natural or forced convection through the indoor unit when the indoor blower is off. Never use an inlet damper box or an inlet upturned duct when testing non-ducted indoor units. An inlet upturned duct is a length of ductwork installed upstream from the inlet such that the indoor duct inlet opening, facing upwards, is sufficiently high to prevent natural convection transfer out of the duct. If an inlet upturned duct is used, install a dry bulb temperature sensor near the inlet opening of the indoor duct at a centerline location not higher than the lowest elevation of the duct edges at the inlet, and ensure that any pair of 5-minute averages of the dry bulb temperature at this location, measured at least every minute during the compressor OFF period of the cyclic test, do not differ by more than 1.0 °F. 2.5.1 Test Set-Up on the Inlet Side of the Indoor Coil: For Cases Where the Inlet Airflow Prevention Device Is Installed a. Install an airflow prevention device as specified in section 2.5.1.1 or 2.5.1.2 of this appendix, whichever applies. b. For an inlet damper box, locate the grid of entering air dry-bulb temperature sensors, if used, and the air sampling device, or the sensor used to measure the water vapor content of the inlet air, at a location immediately upstream of the damper box inlet. For an inlet upturned duct, locate the grid of entering air dry-bulb temperature sensors, if used, and the air sampling device, or the sensor used to measure the water vapor content of the inlet air, at a location at least one foot downstream from the beginning of the insulated portion of the duct but before the static pressure measurement. 2.5.1.1 If the Section 2.4.2 Inlet Plenum Is Installed Construct the airflow prevention device having a cross-sectional flow area equal to or greater than the flow area of the inlet plenum. Install the airflow prevention device upstream of the inlet plenum and construct ductwork connecting it to the inlet plenum. If needed, use an adaptor plate or a transition duct section to connect the airflow prevention device with the inlet plenum. Insulate the ductwork and inlet plenum with thermal insulation that has a nominal overall resistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr · ft 2 2.5.1.2 If the Section 2.4.2 Inlet Plenum Is Not Installed Construct the airflow prevention device having a cross-sectional flow area equal to or greater than the flow area of the air inlet of the indoor unit. Install the airflow prevention device immediately upstream of the inlet of the indoor unit. If needed, use an adaptor plate or a short transition duct section to connect the airflow prevention device with the unit's air inlet. Add static pressure taps at the center of each face of a rectangular airflow prevention device, or at four evenly distributed locations along the circumference of an oval or round airflow prevention device. Locate the pressure taps at a distance from the indoor unit inlet equal to 0.5 times the square root of the cross sectional area of the indoor unit inlet. This location must be between the damper and the inlet of the indoor unit, if a damper is used. Make a manifold that connects the four static pressure taps using one of the configurations shown in Figure 9 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). Insulate the ductwork with thermal insulation that has a nominal overall resistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr · ft 2 2.5.2 Test Set-Up on the Inlet Side of the Indoor Unit: for Cases Where No Airflow Prevention Device is Installed If using the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum and a grid of dry bulb temperature sensors, mount the grid at a location upstream of the static pressure taps described in section 2.4.2 of this appendix, preferably at the entrance plane of the inlet plenum. If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is not used ( i.e. 2.5.3 Indoor Coil Static Pressure Difference Measurement Fabricate pressure taps meeting all requirements described in section 6.5.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) and illustrated in Figure 2A of AMCA 210-2007 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3), however, if adhering strictly to the description in section 6.5.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, the minimum pressure tap length of 2.5 times the inner diameter of Figure 2A of AMCA 210-2007 is waived. Use a differential pressure measuring instrument that is accurate to within ±0.01 inches of water and has a resolution of at least 0.01 inches of water to measure the static pressure difference between the indoor coil air inlet and outlet. Connect one side of the differential pressure instrument to the manifolded pressure taps installed in the outlet plenum. Connect the other side of the instrument to the manifolded pressure taps located in either the inlet plenum or incorporated within the airflow prevention device. For non-ducted indoor units that are tested with multiple outlet plenums, measure the static pressure within each outlet plenum relative to the surrounding atmosphere. 2.5.4 Test Set-Up on the Outlet Side of the Indoor Coil a. Install an interconnecting duct between the outlet plenum described in section 2.4.1 of this appendix and the airflow measuring apparatus described below in section 2.6 of this appendix. The cross-sectional flow area of the interconnecting duct must be equal to or greater than the flow area of the outlet plenum or the common duct used when testing non-ducted units having multiple indoor coils. If needed, use adaptor plates or transition duct sections to allow the connections. To minimize leakage, tape joints within the interconnecting duct (and the outlet plenum). Construct or insulate the entire flow section with thermal insulation having a nominal overall resistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr·ft 2 b. Install a grid(s) of dry-bulb temperature sensors inside the interconnecting duct. Also, install an air sampling device, or the sensor(s) used to measure the water vapor content of the outlet air, inside the interconnecting duct. Locate the dry-bulb temperature grid(s) upstream of the air sampling device (or the in-duct sensor(s) used to measure the water vapor content of the outlet air). Turn off the sampler fan motor during the cyclic tests. Air leaving an indoor unit that is sampled by an air sampling device for remote water-vapor-content measurement must be returned to the interconnecting duct at a location: (1) Downstream of the air sampling device; (2) On the same side of the outlet air damper as the air sampling device; and (3) Upstream of the section 2.6 airflow measuring apparatus. 2.5.4.1 Outlet Air Damper Box Placement and Requirements If using an outlet air damper box (see section 2.5 of this appendix), the leakage rate from the combination of the outlet plenum, the closed damper, and the duct section that connects these two components must not exceed 20 cubic feet per minute when a negative pressure of 1 inch of water column is maintained at the plenum's inlet. 2.5.4.2 Procedures To Minimize Temperature Maldistribution Use these procedures if necessary to correct temperature maldistributions. Install a mixing device(s) upstream of the outlet air, dry-bulb temperature grid (but downstream of the outlet plenum static pressure taps). Use a perforated screen located between the mixing device and the dry-bulb temperature grid, with a maximum open area of 40 percent. One or both items should help to meet the maximum outlet air temperature distribution specified in section 3.1.8 of this appendix. Mixing devices are described in sections 5.3.2 and 5.3.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1-2013 and section 5.2.2 of ASHRAE 41.2-1987 (RA 1992) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). 2.5.4.3 Minimizing Air Leakage For small-duct, high-velocity systems, install an air damper near the end of the interconnecting duct, just prior to the transition to the airflow measuring apparatus of section 2.6 of this appendix. To minimize air leakage, adjust this damper such that the pressure in the receiving chamber of the airflow measuring apparatus is no more than 0.5 inch of water higher than the surrounding test room ambient. If applicable, in lieu of installing a separate damper, use the outlet air damper box of sections 2.5 and 2.5.4.1 of this appendix if it allows variable positioning. Also apply these steps to any conventional indoor blower unit that creates a static pressure within the receiving chamber of the airflow measuring apparatus that exceeds the test room ambient pressure by more than 0.5 inches of water column. 2.5.5 Dry Bulb Temperature Measurement a. Measure dry bulb temperatures as specified in sections 4, 5.3, 6, and 7 of ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1-2013 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). b. Distribute the sensors of a dry-bulb temperature grid over the entire flow area. The required minimum is 9 sensors per grid. 2.5.6 Water Vapor Content Measurement Determine water vapor content by measuring dry-bulb temperature combined with the air wet-bulb temperature, dew point temperature, or relative humidity. If used, construct and apply wet-bulb temperature sensors as specified in sections 4, 5, 6, 7.2, 7.3, and 7.4 of ASHRAE 41.6-2014 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). The temperature sensor (wick removed) must be accurate to within ±0.2 °F. If used, apply dew point hygrometers as specified in sections 4, 5, 6, 7.1, and 7.4 of ASHRAE 41.6-2014 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). The dew point hygrometers must be accurate to within ±0.4 °F when operated at conditions that result in the evaluation of dew points above 35 °F. If used, a relative humidity (RH) meter must be accurate to within ±0.7% RH. Other means to determine the psychrometric state of air may be used as long as the measurement accuracy is equivalent to or better than the accuracy achieved from using a wet-bulb temperature sensor that meets the above specifications. 2.5.7 Air Damper Box Performance Requirements If used (see section 2.5 of this appendix), the air damper box(es) must be capable of being completely opened or completely closed within 10 seconds for each action. 2.6 Airflow Measuring Apparatus a. Fabricate and operate an airflow measuring apparatus as specified in section 6.2 and 6.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). Place the static pressure taps and position the diffusion baffle (settling means) relative to the chamber inlet as indicated in Figure 12 of AMCA 210-2007 and/or Figure 14 of ASHRAE 41.2-1987 (RA 1992) (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). When measuring the static pressure difference across nozzles and/or velocity pressure at nozzle throats using electronic pressure transducers and a data acquisition system, if high frequency fluctuations cause measurement variations to exceed the test tolerance limits specified in section 9.2 and Table 2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, dampen the measurement system such that the time constant associated with response to a step change in measurement (time for the response to change 63% of the way from the initial output to the final output) is no longer than five seconds. b. Connect the airflow measuring apparatus to the interconnecting duct section described in section 2.5.4 of this appendix. See sections 6.1.1, 6.1.2, and 6.1.4, and Figures 1, 2, and 4 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009; and Figures D1, D2, and D4 of AHRI 210/240-2008 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) for illustrative examples of how the test apparatus may be applied within a complete laboratory set-up. Instead of following one of these examples, an alternative set-up may be used to handle the air leaving the airflow measuring apparatus and to supply properly conditioned air to the test unit's inlet. The alternative set-up, however, must not interfere with the prescribed means for measuring airflow rate, inlet and outlet air temperatures, inlet and outlet water vapor contents, and external static pressures, nor create abnormal conditions surrounding the test unit. ( Note: 2.7 Electrical Voltage Supply Perform all tests at the voltage specified in section 6.1.3.2 of AHRI 210/240-2008 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) for “Standard Rating Tests.” If either the indoor or the outdoor unit has a 208V or 200V nameplate voltage and the other unit has a 230V nameplate rating, select the voltage supply on the outdoor unit for testing. Otherwise, supply each unit with its own nameplate voltage. Measure the supply voltage at the terminals on the test unit using a volt meter that provides a reading that is accurate to within ±1.0 percent of the measured quantity. 2.8 Electrical Power and Energy Measurements a. Use an integrating power (watt-hour) measuring system to determine the electrical energy or average electrical power supplied to all components of the air conditioner or heat pump (including auxiliary components such as controls, transformers, crankcase heater, integral condensate pump on non-ducted indoor units, etc.). The watt-hour measuring system must give readings that are accurate to within ±0.5 percent. For cyclic tests, this accuracy is required during both the ON and OFF cycles. Use either two different scales on the same watt-hour meter or two separate watt-hour meters. Activate the scale or meter having the lower power rating within 15 seconds after beginning an OFF cycle. Activate the scale or meter having the higher power rating within 15 seconds prior to beginning an ON cycle. For ducted blower coil systems, the ON cycle lasts from compressor ON to indoor blower OFF. For ducted coil-only systems, the ON cycle lasts from compressor ON to compressor OFF. For non-ducted units, the ON cycle lasts from indoor blower ON to indoor blower OFF. When testing air conditioners and heat pumps having a variable-speed compressor, avoid using an induction watt/watt-hour meter. b. When performing section 3.5 and/or 3.8 cyclic tests on non-ducted units, provide instrumentation to determine the average electrical power consumption of the indoor blower motor to within ±1.0 percent. If required according to sections 3.3, 3.4, 3.7, 3.9.1 of this appendix, and/or 3.10 of this appendix, this same instrumentation requirement (to determine the average electrical power consumption of the indoor blower motor to within ±1.0 percent) applies when testing air conditioners and heat pumps having a variable-speed constant-air-volume-rate indoor blower or a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor blower. 2.9 Time Measurements Make elapsed time measurements using an instrument that yields readings accurate to within ±0.2 percent. 2.10 Test Apparatus for the Secondary Space Conditioning Capacity Measurement For all tests, use the indoor air enthalpy method to measure the unit's capacity. This method uses the test set-up specified in sections 2.4 to 2.6 of this appendix. In addition, for all steady-state tests, conduct a second, independent measurement of capacity as described in section 3.1.1 of this appendix. For split systems, use one of the following secondary measurement methods: Outdoor air enthalpy method, compressor calibration method, or refrigerant enthalpy method. For single-package units, use either the outdoor air enthalpy method or the compressor calibration method as the secondary measurement. 2.10.1 Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method a. To make a secondary measurement of indoor space conditioning capacity using the outdoor air enthalpy method, do the following: (1) Measure the electrical power consumption of the test unit; (2) Measure the air-side capacity at the outdoor coil; and (3) Apply a heat balance on the refrigerant cycle. b. The test apparatus required for the outdoor air enthalpy method is a subset of the apparatus used for the indoor air enthalpy method. Required apparatus includes the following: (1) On the outlet side, an outlet plenum containing static pressure taps (sections 2.4, 2.4.1, and 2.5.3 of this appendix), (2) An airflow measuring apparatus (section 2.6 of this appendix), (3) A duct section that connects these two components and itself contains the instrumentation for measuring the dry-bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air leaving the outdoor coil (sections 2.5.4, 2.5.5, and 2.5.6 of this appendix), and (4) On the inlet side, a sampling device and temperature grid (section 2.11.b of this appendix). c. During the free outdoor air tests described in sections 3.11.1 and 3.11.1.1 of this appendix, measure the evaporator and condenser temperatures or pressures. On both the outdoor coil and the indoor coil, solder a thermocouple onto a return bend located at or near the midpoint of each coil or at points not affected by vapor superheat or liquid subcooling. Alternatively, if the test unit is not sensitive to the refrigerant charge, install pressure gages to the access valves or to ports created from tapping into the suction and discharge lines according to sections 7.4.2 and 8.2.5 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. Use this alternative approach when testing a unit charged with a zeotropic refrigerant having a temperature glide in excess of 1 °F at the specified test conditions. 2.10.2 Compressor Calibration Method Measure refrigerant pressures and temperatures to determine the evaporator superheat and the enthalpy of the refrigerant that enters and exits the indoor coil. Determine refrigerant flow rate or, when the superheat of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator is less than 5 °F, total capacity from separate calibration tests conducted under identical operating conditions. When using this method, install instrumentation and measure refrigerant properties according to section 7.4.2 and 8.2.5 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). If removing the refrigerant before applying refrigerant lines and subsequently recharging, use the steps in 7.4.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 in addition to the methods of section 2.2.5 of this appendix to confirm the refrigerant charge. Use refrigerant temperature and pressure measuring instruments that meet the specifications given in sections 5.1.1 and 5.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. 2.10.3 Refrigerant Enthalpy Method For this method, calculate space conditioning capacity by determining the refrigerant enthalpy change for the indoor coil and directly measuring the refrigerant flow rate. Use section 7.5.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) for the requirements for this method, including the additional instrumentation requirements, and information on placing the flow meter and a sight glass. Use refrigerant temperature, pressure, and flow measuring instruments that meet the specifications given in sections 5.1.1, 5.2, and 5.5.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. Refrigerant flow measurement device(s), if used, must be either elevated at least two feet from the test chamber floor or placed upon insulating material having a total thermal resistance of at least R-12 and extending at least one foot laterally beyond each side of the device(s)' exposed surfaces. 2.11 Measurement of Test Room Ambient Conditions Follow instructions for setting up air sampling device and aspirating psychrometer as described in section 2.14 of this appendix, unless otherwise instructed in this section. a. If using a test set-up where air is ducted directly from the conditioning apparatus to the indoor coil inlet (see Figure 2, Loop Air-Enthalpy Test Method Arrangement, of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3)), add instrumentation to permit measurement of the indoor test room dry-bulb temperature. b. On the outdoor side, use one of the following two approaches, except that approach (1) is required for all evaporatively-cooled units and units that transfer condensate to the outdoor unit for evaporation using condenser heat. (1) Use sampling tree air collection on all air-inlet surfaces of the outdoor unit. (2) Use sampling tree air collection on one or more faces of the outdoor unit and demonstrate air temperature uniformity as follows. Install a grid of evenly-distributed thermocouples on each air-permitting face on the inlet of the outdoor unit. Install the thermocouples on the air sampling device, locate them individually or attach them to a wire structure. If not installed on the air sampling device, install the thermocouple grid 6 to 24 inches from the unit. The thermocouples shall be evenly spaced across the coil inlet surface and be installed to avoid sampling of discharge air or blockage of air recirculation. The grid of thermocouples must provide at least 16 measuring points per face or one measurement per square foot of inlet face area, whichever is less. This grid must be constructed and used as per section 5.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1-2013 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). The maximum difference between the average temperatures measured during the test period of any two pairs of these individual thermocouples located at any of the faces of the inlet of the outdoor unit, must not exceed 2.0 °F, otherwise approach (1) must be used. The air sampling devices shall be located at the geometric center of each side; the branches may be oriented either parallel or perpendicular to the longer edges of the air inlet area. The air sampling devices in the outdoor air inlet location shall be sized such that they cover at least 75% of the face area of the side of the coil that they are measuring. Air distribution at the test facility point of supply to the unit shall be reviewed and may require remediation prior to the beginning of testing. Mixing fans can be used to ensure adequate air distribution in the test room. If used, mixing fans shall be oriented such that they are pointed away from the air intake so that the mixing fan exhaust does not affect the outdoor coil air volume rate. Particular attention should be given to prevent the mixing fans from affecting (enhancing or limiting) recirculation of condenser fan exhaust air back through the unit. Any fan used to enhance test room air mixing shall not cause air velocities in the vicinity of the test unit to exceed 500 feet per minute. The air sampling device may be larger than the face area of the side being measured, however care shall be taken to prevent discharge air from being sampled. If an air sampling device dimension extends beyond the inlet area of the unit, holes shall be blocked in the air sampling device to prevent sampling of discharge air. Holes can be blocked to reduce the region of coverage of the intake holes both in the direction of the trunk axis or perpendicular to the trunk axis. For intake hole region reduction in the direction of the trunk axis, block holes of one or more adjacent pairs of branches (the branches of a pair connect opposite each other at the same trunk location) at either the outlet end or the closed end of the trunk. For intake hole region reduction perpendicular to the trunk axis, block off the same number of holes on each branch on both sides of the trunk. A maximum of four (4) air sampling devices shall be connected to each aspirating psychrometer. In order to proportionately divide the flow stream for multiple air sampling devices for a given aspirating psychrometer, the tubing or conduit conveying sampled air to the psychrometer shall be of equivalent lengths for each air sampling device. Preferentially, the air sampling device should be hard connected to the aspirating psychrometer, but if space constraints do not allow this, the assembly shall have a means of allowing a flexible tube to connect the air sampling device to the aspirating psychrometer. The tubing or conduit shall be insulated and routed to prevent heat transfer to the air stream. Any surface of the air conveying tubing in contact with surrounding air at a different temperature than the sampled air shall be insulated with thermal insulation with a nominal thermal resistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr · ft 2 Pairs of measurements ( e.g., 2.12 Measurement of Indoor Blower Speed When required, measure fan speed using a revolution counter, tachometer, or stroboscope that gives readings accurate to within ±1.0 percent. 2.13 Measurement of Barometric Pressure Determine the average barometric pressure during each test. Use an instrument that meets the requirements specified in section 5.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). 2.14 Air Sampling Device and Aspirating Psychrometer Requirements Air temperature measurements shall be made in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1-2013, unless otherwise instructed in this section. 2.14.1 Air Sampling Device Requirements The air sampling device is intended to draw in a sample of the air at the critical locations of a unit under test. It shall be constructed of stainless steel, plastic or other suitable, durable materials. It shall have a main flow trunk tube with a series of branch tubes connected to the trunk tube. Holes shall be on the side of the sampler facing the upstream direction of the air source. Other sizes and rectangular shapes can be used, and shall be scaled accordingly with the following guidelines: (1) Minimum hole density of 6 holes per square foot of area to be sampled (2) Sampler branch tube pitch (spacing) of 6 ± 3 in (3) Manifold trunk to branch diameter ratio having a minimum of 3:1 ratio (4) Hole pitch (spacing) shall be equally distributed over the branch ( 1/2 (5) Maximum individual hole to branch diameter ratio of 1:2 (1:3 preferred) The minimum average velocity through the air sampling device holes shall be 2.5 ft/s as determined by evaluating the sum of the open area of the holes as compared to the flow area in the aspirating psychrometer. 2.14.2 Aspirating Psychrometer The psychrometer consists of a flow section and a fan to draw air through the flow section and measures an average value of the sampled air stream. At a minimum, the flow section shall have a means for measuring the dry bulb temperature (typically, a resistance temperature device (RTD) and a means for measuring the humidity (RTD with wetted sock, chilled mirror hygrometer, or relative humidity sensor). The aspirating psychrometer shall include a fan that either can be adjusted manually or automatically to maintain required velocity across the sensors. The psychrometer shall be made from suitable material which may be plastic (such as polycarbonate), aluminum or other metallic materials. All psychrometers for a given system being tested, shall be constructed of the same material. Psychrometers shall be designed such that radiant heat from the motor (for driving the fan that draws sampled air through the psychrometer) does not affect sensor measurements. For aspirating psychrometers, velocity across the wet bulb sensor shall be 1000 ± 200 ft/min. For all other psychrometers, velocity shall be as specified by the sensor manufacturer. 3. Testing Procedures 3.1 General Requirements If, during the testing process, an equipment set-up adjustment is made that would have altered the performance of the unit during any already completed test, then repeat all tests affected by the adjustment. For cyclic tests, instead of maintaining an air volume rate, for each airflow nozzle, maintain the static pressure difference or velocity pressure during an ON period at the same pressure difference or velocity pressure as measured during the steady-state test conducted at the same test conditions. Use the testing procedures in this section to collect the data used for calculating (1) Performance metrics for central air conditioners and heat pumps during the cooling season; (2) Performance metrics for heat pumps during the heating season; and (3) Power consumption metric(s) for central air conditioners and heat pumps during the off mode season(s). 3.1.1 Primary and Secondary Test Methods For all tests, use the indoor air enthalpy method test apparatus to determine the unit's space conditioning capacity. The procedure and data collected, however, differ slightly depending upon whether the test is a steady-state test, a cyclic test, or a frost accumulation test. The following sections described these differences. For the full-capacity cooling-mode test and (for a heat pump) the full-capacity heating-mode test, use one of the acceptable secondary methods specified in section 2.10 of this appendix to determine indoor space conditioning capacity. Calculate this secondary check of capacity according to section 3.11 of this appendix. The two capacity measurements must agree to within 6 percent to constitute a valid test. For this capacity comparison, use the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method capacity that is calculated in section 7.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) (and, if testing a coil-only system, compare capacities before making the after-test fan heat adjustments described in section 3.3, 3.4, 3.7, and 3.10 of this appendix). However, include the appropriate section 3.3 to 3.5 and 3.7 to 3.10 fan heat adjustments within the indoor air enthalpy method capacities used for the section 4 seasonal calculations of this appendix. 3.1.2 Manufacturer-Provided Equipment Overrides Where needed, the manufacturer must provide a means for overriding the controls of the test unit so that the compressor(s) operates at the specified speed or capacity and the indoor blower operates at the specified speed or delivers the specified air volume rate. 3.1.3 Airflow Through the Outdoor Coil For all tests, meet the requirements given in section 6.1.3.4 of AHRI 210/240-2008 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) when obtaining the airflow through the outdoor coil. 3.1.3.1 Double-Ducted For products intended to be installed with the outdoor airflow ducted, the unit shall be installed with outdoor coil ductwork installed per manufacturer installation instructions and shall operate between 0.10 and 0.15 in H 2 3.1.4 Airflow Through the Indoor Coil Airflow setting(s) shall be determined before testing begins. Unless otherwise specified within this or its subsections, no changes shall be made to the airflow setting(s) after initiation of testing. 3.1.4.1 Cooling Full-Load Air Volume Rate 3.1.4.1.1. Cooling Full-Load Air Volume Rate for Ducted Units Identify the certified cooling full-load air volume rate and certified instructions for setting fan speed or controls. If there is no certified Cooling full-load air volume rate, use a value equal to the certified cooling capacity of the unit times 400 scfm per 12,000 Btu/h. If there are no instructions for setting fan speed or controls, use the as-shipped settings. Use the following procedure to confirm and, if necessary, adjust the Cooling full-load air volume rate and the fan speed or control settings to meet each test procedure requirement: a. For all ducted blower coil systems, except those having a constant-air-volume-rate indoor blower: Step (1) Operate the unit under conditions specified for the A (for single-stage units) or A 2 Step (2) Measure the external static pressure; Step (3) If this external static pressure is equal to or greater than the applicable minimum external static pressure cited in Table 4, the pressure requirement is satisfied; proceed to step 7 of this section. If this external static pressure is not equal to or greater than the applicable minimum external static pressure cited in Table 4, proceed to step 4 of this section; Step (4) Increase the external static pressure by adjusting the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until either (i) The applicable Table 4 minimum is equaled or (ii) The measured air volume rate equals 90 percent or less of the Cooling full-load air volume rate, whichever occurs first; Step (5) If the conditions of step 4 (i) of this section occur first, the pressure requirement is satisfied; proceed to step 7 of this section. If the conditions of step 4 (ii) of this section occur first, proceed to step 6 of this section; Step (6) Make an incremental change to the setup of the indoor blower ( e.g. Step (7) The airflow constraints have been satisfied. Use the measured air volume rate as the Cooling full-load air volume rate. Use the final fan speed or control settings for all tests that use the Cooling full-load air volume rate. b. For ducted blower coil systems with a constant-air-volume-rate indoor blower. For all tests that specify the Cooling full-load air volume rate, obtain an external static pressure as close to (but not less than) the applicable Table 4 value that does not cause automatic shutdown of the indoor blower or air volume rate variation Q Var where: Q max Q min Q Var Additional test steps as described in section 3.3.(e) of this appendix are required if the measured external static pressure exceeds the target value by more than 0.03 inches of water. c. For coil-only indoor units. For the A or A 2 Table 4—Minimum External Static Pressure for Ducted Blower Coil Systems Rated Cooling 1 2 Minimum external resistance 3 Small-duct, 4 5 All other Up Thru 28,800 1.10 0.10 29,000 to 42,500 1.15 0.15 43,000 and Above 1.20 0.20 1 A A 2 2 H1 H1 2 3 4 5 d. For ducted systems having multiple indoor blowers within a single indoor section, obtain the full-load air volume rate with all indoor blowers operating unless prevented by the controls of the unit. In such cases, turn on the maximum number of indoor blowers permitted by the unit's controls. Where more than one option exists for meeting this “on” indoor blower requirement, which indoor blower(s) are turned on must match that specified in the certification report. Conduct section 3.1.4.1.1 setup steps for each indoor blower separately. If two or more indoor blowers are connected to a common duct as per section 2.4.1 of this appendix, temporarily divert their air volume to the test room when confirming or adjusting the setup configuration of individual indoor blowers. The allocation of the system's full-load air volume rate assigned to each “on” indoor blower must match that specified by the manufacturer in the certification report. 3.1.4.1.2. Cooling Full-Load Air Volume Rate for Non-Ducted Units For non-ducted units, the Cooling full-load air volume rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit is operated at an external static pressure of zero inches of water. 3.1.4.2 Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate Identify the certified cooling minimum air volume rate and certified instructions for setting fan speed or controls. If there is no certified cooling minimum air volume rate, use the final indoor blower control settings as determined when setting the cooling full-load air volume rate, and readjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus if necessary to reset to the cooling full load air volume obtained in section 3.1.4.1 of this appendix. Otherwise, calculate the target external static pressure and follow instructions a, b, c, d, or e below. The target external static pressure, ΔP st__i where: ΔP st__i ΔP st__full 2 Q i Q full a. For a ducted blower coil system without a constant-air-volume indoor blower, adjust for external static pressure as follows: Step (1) Operate the unit under conditions specified for the B1 test using the certified fan speed or controls settings, and adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus to achieve the certified cooling minimum air volume rate; Step (2) Measure the external static pressure; Step (3) If this pressure is equal to or greater than the minimum external static pressure computed above, the pressure requirement is satisfied; proceed to step 7 of this section. If this pressure is not equal to or greater than the minimum external static pressure computed above, proceed to step 4 of this section; Step (4) Increase the external static pressure by adjusting the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until either (i) The pressure is equal to the minimum external static pressure computed above or (ii) The measured air volume rate equals 90 percent or less of the cooling minimum air volume rate, whichever occurs first; Step (5) If the conditions of step 4 (i) of this section occur first, the pressure requirement is satisfied; proceed to step 7 of this section. If the conditions of step 4 (ii) of this section occur first, proceed to step 6 of this section; Step (6) Make an incremental change to the setup of the indoor blower ( e.g., Step (7) The airflow constraints have been satisfied. Use the measured air volume rate as the cooling minimum air volume rate. Use the final fan speed or control settings for all tests that use the cooling minimum air volume rate. b. For ducted units with constant-air-volume indoor blowers, conduct all tests that specify the cooling minimum air volume rate—( i.e. 1 1 1 1 1 Var c. For ducted two-capacity coil-only systems, the cooling minimum air volume rate is the higher of (1) the rate specified by the installation instructions included with the unit by the manufacturer or (2) 75 percent of the cooling full-load air volume rate. During the laboratory tests on a coil-only (fanless) system, obtain this cooling minimum air volume rate regardless of the pressure drop across the indoor coil assembly. d. For non-ducted units, the cooling minimum air volume rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the indoor blower setting used at low compressor capacity (two-capacity system) or minimum compressor speed (variable-speed system). For units having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor blower, use the lowest fan setting allowed for cooling. e. For ducted systems having multiple indoor blowers within a single indoor section, operate the indoor blowers such that the lowest air volume rate allowed by the unit's controls is obtained when operating the lone single-speed compressor or when operating at low compressor capacity while meeting the requirements of section 2.2.3.b of this appendix for the minimum number of blowers that must be turned off. Using the target external static pressure and the certified air volume rates, follow the procedures described in section 3.1.4.2.a of this appendix if the indoor blowers are not constant-air-volume indoor blowers or as described in section 3.1.4.2.b of this appendix if the indoor blowers are constant-air-volume indoor blowers. The sum of the individual “on” indoor blowers' air volume rates is the cooling minimum air volume rate for the system. 3.1.4.3 Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate Identify the certified cooling intermediate air volume rate and certified instructions for setting fan speed or controls. If there is no certified cooling intermediate air volume rate, use the final indoor blower control settings as determined when setting the cooling full load air volume rate, and readjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus if necessary to reset to the cooling full load air volume obtained in section 3.1.4.1 of this appendix. Otherwise, calculate target minimum external static pressure as described in section 3.1.4.2 of this appendix, and set the air volume rate as follows. a. For a ducted blower coil system without a constant-air-volume indoor blower, adjust for external static pressure as described in section 3.1.4.2.a of this appendix for cooling minimum air volume rate. b. For a ducted blower coil system with a constant-air-volume indoor blower, conduct the E V Var c. For non-ducted units, the cooling intermediate air volume rate is the air volume rate that results when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the fan speed selected by the controls of the unit for the E V 3.1.4.4 Heating Full-Load Air Volume Rate 3.1.4.4.1. Ducted Heat Pumps Where the Heating and Cooling Full-Load Air Volume Rates Are the Same a. Use the Cooling full-load air volume rate as the heating full-load air volume rate for: (1) Ducted blower coil system heat pumps that do not have a constant-air-volume indoor blower, and that operate at the same airflow-control setting during both the A (or A 2 2 (2) Ducted blower coil system heat pumps with constant-air-flow indoor blowers that provide the same air flow for the A (or A 2 2 (3) Ducted heat pumps that are tested with a coil-only indoor unit (except two-capacity northern heat pumps that are tested only at low capacity cooling—see section 3.1.4.4.2 of this appendix). b. For heat pumps that meet the above criteria “1” and “3,” no minimum requirements apply to the measured external or internal, respectively, static pressure. Use the final indoor blower control settings as determined when setting the Cooling full-load air volume rate, and readjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus if necessary to reset to the cooling full-load air volume obtained in section 3.1.4.1 of this appendix. For heat pumps that meet the above criterion “2,” test at an external static pressure that does not cause an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower or air volume rate variation Q Var 2 3.1.4.4.2. Ducted Heat Pumps Where the Heating and Cooling Full-Load Air Volume Rates Are Different Due to Changes in Indoor Blower Operation, i.e. Identify the certified heating full-load air volume rate and certified instructions for setting fan speed or controls. If there is no certified heating full-load air volume rate, use the final indoor blower control settings as determined when setting the cooling full-load air volume rate, and readjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus if necessary to reset to the cooling full load air volume obtained in section 3.1.4.1 of this appendix. Otherwise, calculate target minimum external static pressure as described in section 3.1.4.2 of this appendix and set the air volume rate as follows. a. For ducted blower coil system heat pumps that do not have a constant-air-volume indoor blower, adjust for external static pressure as described in section 3.1.4.2.a of this appendix for cooling minimum air volume rate. b. For ducted heat pumps tested with constant-air-volume indoor blowers installed, conduct all tests that specify the heating full-load air volume rate at an external static pressure that does not cause an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower or air volume rate variation Q Var c. When testing ducted, two-capacity blower coil system northern heat pumps (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions), use the appropriate approach of the above two cases. For coil-only system northern heat pumps, the heating full-load air volume rate is the lesser of the rate specified by the manufacturer in the installation instructions included with the unit or 133 percent of the cooling full-load air volume rate. For this latter case, obtain the heating full-load air volume rate regardless of the pressure drop across the indoor coil assembly. d. For ducted systems having multiple indoor blowers within a single indoor section, obtain the heating full-load air volume rate using the same “on” indoor blowers as used for the Cooling full-load air volume rate. Using the target external static pressure and the certified air volume rates, follow the procedures as described in section 3.1.4.4.2.a of this appendix if the indoor blowers are not constant-air-volume indoor blowers or as described in section 3.1.4.4.2.b of this appendix if the indoor blowers are constant-air-volume indoor blowers. The sum of the individual “on” indoor blowers' air volume rates is the heating full load air volume rate for the system. 3.1.4.4.3. Ducted Heating-Only Heat Pumps Identify the certified heating full-load air volume rate and certified instructions for setting fan speed or controls. If there is no certified heating full-load air volume rate, use a value equal to the certified heating capacity of the unit times 400 scfm per 12,000 Btu/h. If there are no instructions for setting fan speed or controls, use the as-shipped settings. a. For all ducted heating-only blower coil system heat pumps, except those having a constant-air-volume-rate indoor blower. Conduct the following steps only during the first test, the H1 or H1 2 Step (1) Adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus to achieve the certified heating full-load air volume rate. Step (2) Measure the external static pressure. Step (3) If this pressure is equal to or greater than the Table 4 minimum external static pressure that applies given the heating-only heat pump's rated heating capacity, the pressure requirement is satisfied; proceed to step 7 of this section. If this pressure is not equal to or greater than the applicable Table 4 minimum external static pressure, proceed to step 4 of this section; Step (4) Increase the external static pressure by adjusting the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until either (i) the pressure is equal to the applicable Table 4 minimum external static pressure or (ii) the measured air volume rate equals 90 percent or less of the heating full-load air volume rate, whichever occurs first; Step (5) If the conditions of step 4(i) of this section occur first, the pressure requirement is satisfied; proceed to step 7 of this section. If the conditions of step 4(ii) of this section occur first, proceed to step 6 of this section; Step (6) Make an incremental change to the setup of the indoor blower ( e.g., Step (7) The airflow constraints have been satisfied. Use the measured air volume rate as the heating full-load air volume rate. Use the final fan speed or control settings for all tests that use the heating full-load air volume rate. b. For ducted heating-only blower coil system heat pumps having a constant-air-volume-rate indoor blower. For all tests that specify the heating full-load air volume rate, obtain an external static pressure that does not cause an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower or air volume rate variation Q Var c. For ducted heating-only coil-only system heat pumps in the H1 or H1 2 3.1.4.4.4. Non-Ducted Heat Pumps, Including Non-Ducted Heating-Only Heat Pumps For non-ducted heat pumps, the heating full-load air volume rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water. 3.1.4.5 Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate 3.1.4.5.1. Ducted Heat Pumps Where the Heating and Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rates Are the Same a. Use the cooling minimum air volume rate as the heating minimum air volume rate for: (1) Ducted blower coil system heat pumps that do not have a constant-air-volume indoor blower, and that operate at the same airflow-control setting during both the A 1 1 (2) Ducted blower coil system heat pumps with constant-air-flow indoor blowers installed that provide the same air flow for the A 1 1 (3) Ducted coil-only system heat pumps. b. For heat pumps that meet the above criteria “1” and “3,” no minimum requirements apply to the measured external or internal, respectively, static pressure. Use the final indoor blower control settings as determined when setting the cooling minimum air volume rate, and readjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus if necessary to reset to the cooling minimum air volume rate obtained in section 3.1.4.2 of this appendix. For heat pumps that meet the above criterion “2,” test at an external static pressure that does not cause an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower or air volume rate variation Q Var 1 3.1.4.5.2. Ducted Heat Pumps Where the Heating and Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rates Are Different Due to Changes in Indoor Blower Operation, i.e. Identify the certified heating minimum air volume rate and certified instructions for setting fan speed or controls. If there is no certified heating minimum air volume rate, use the final indoor blower control settings as determined when setting the cooling minimum air volume rate, and readjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus if necessary to reset to the cooling minimum air volume obtained in section 3.1.4.2 of this appendix. Otherwise, calculate the target minimum external static pressure as described in section 3.1.4.2 of this appendix. a. For ducted blower coil system heat pumps that do not have a constant-air-volume indoor blower, adjust for external static pressure as described in section 3.1.4.2.a of this appendix for cooling minimum air volume rate. b. For ducted heat pumps tested with constant-air-volume indoor blowers installed, conduct all tests that specify the heating minimum air volume rate—( i.e., 1 1 1 1 Var c. For ducted two-capacity blower coil system northern heat pumps, use the appropriate approach of the above two cases. d. For ducted two-capacity coil-only system heat pumps, use the cooling minimum air volume rate as the heating minimum air volume rate. For ducted two-capacity coil-only system northern heat pumps, use the cooling full-load air volume rate as the heating minimum air volume rate. For ducted two-capacity heating-only coil-only system heat pumps, the heating minimum air volume rate is the higher of the rate specified by the manufacturer in the test setup instructions included with the unit or 75 percent of the heating full-load air volume rate. During the laboratory tests on a coil-only system, obtain the heating minimum air volume rate without regard to the pressure drop across the indoor coil assembly. e. For non-ducted heat pumps, the heating minimum air volume rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the indoor blower setting used at low compressor capacity (two-capacity system) or minimum compressor speed (variable-speed system). For units having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor blower, use the lowest fan setting allowed for heating. f. For ducted systems with multiple indoor blowers within a single indoor section, obtain the heating minimum air volume rate using the same “on” indoor blowers as used for the cooling minimum air volume rate. Using the target external static pressure and the certified air volume rates, follow the procedures as described in section 3.1.4.5.2.a of this appendix if the indoor blowers are not constant-air-volume indoor blowers or as described in section 3.1.4.5.2.b of this appendix if the indoor blowers are constant-air-volume indoor blowers. The sum of the individual “on” indoor blowers' air volume rates is the heating full-load air volume rate for the system. 3.1.4.6 Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate Identify the certified heating intermediate air volume rate and certified instructions for setting fan speed or controls. If there is no certified heating intermediate air volume rate, use the final indoor blower control settings as determined when setting the heating full-load air volume rate, and readjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus if necessary to reset to the cooling full load air volume obtained in section 3.1.4.2 of this appendix. Calculate the target minimum external static pressure as described in section 3.1.4.2 of this appendix. a. For ducted blower coil system heat pumps that do not have a constant-air-volume indoor blower, adjust for external static pressure as described in section 3.1.4.2.a of this appendix for cooling minimum air volume rate. b. For ducted heat pumps tested with constant-air-volume indoor blowers installed, conduct the H2 V Var c. For non-ducted heat pumps, the heating intermediate air volume rate is the air volume rate that results when the heat pump operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the fan speed selected by the controls of the unit for the H2 V 3.1.4.7 Heating Nominal Air Volume Rate The manufacturer must specify the heating nominal air volume rate and the instructions for setting fan speed or controls. Calculate target minimum external static pressure as described in section 3.1.4.2 of this appendix. Make adjustments as described in section 3.1.4.6 of this appendix for heating intermediate air volume rate so that the target minimum external static pressure is met or exceeded. 3.1.5 Indoor Test Room Requirement When the Air Surrounding the Indoor Unit Is Not Supplied From the Same Source as the Air Entering the Indoor Unit If using a test set-up where air is ducted directly from the air reconditioning apparatus to the indoor coil inlet (see Figure 2, Loop Air-Enthalpy Test Method Arrangement, of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3)), maintain the dry bulb temperature within the test room within ±5.0 °F of the applicable sections 3.2 and 3.6 dry bulb temperature test condition for the air entering the indoor unit. Dew point shall be within 2 °F of the required inlet conditions. 3.1.6 Air Volume Rate Calculations For all steady-state tests and for frost accumulation (H2, H2 1 2 V Where: V s 3 da V mx 3 mx v n 3 W n 0.075 = the density associated with standard (dry) air, (lbm/ft 3 v n 3 Note: In the first printing of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, the second IP equation for Q mi 3.1.7 Test Sequence Before making test measurements used to calculate performance, operate the equipment for the “break-in” period specified in the certification report, which may not exceed 20 hours. Each compressor of the unit must undergo this “break-in” period. When testing a ducted unit (except if a heating-only heat pump), conduct the A or A 2 2 V V 3.1.8 Requirement for the Air Temperature Distribution Leaving the Indoor Coil For at least the first cooling mode test and the first heating mode test, monitor the temperature distribution of the air leaving the indoor coil using the grid of individual sensors described in sections 2.5 and 2.5.4 of this appendix. For the 30-minute data collection interval used to determine capacity, the maximum spread among the outlet dry bulb temperatures from any data sampling must not exceed 1.5 °F. Install the mixing devices described in section 2.5.4.2 of this appendix to minimize the temperature spread. 3.1.9 Requirement for the Air Temperature Distribution Entering the Outdoor Coil Monitor the temperatures of the air entering the outdoor coil using air sampling devices and/or temperature sensor grids, maintaining the required tolerances, if applicable, as described in section 2.11 of this appendix. 3.1.10 Control of Auxiliary Resistive Heating Elements Except as noted, disable heat pump resistance elements used for heating indoor air at all times, including during defrost cycles and if they are normally regulated by a heat comfort controller. For heat pumps equipped with a heat comfort controller, enable the heat pump resistance elements only during the below-described, short test. For single-speed heat pumps covered under section 3.6.1 of this appendix, the short test follows the H1 or, if conducted, the H1C Test. For two-capacity heat pumps and heat pumps covered under section 3.6.2 of this appendix, the short test follows the H1 2 CC. 3.2 Cooling Mode Tests for Different Types of Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps 3.2.1 Tests for a System Having a Single-Speed Compressor and Fixed Cooling Air Volume Rate This set of tests is for single-speed-compressor units that do not have a cooling minimum air volume rate or a cooling intermediate air volume rate that is different than the cooling full load air volume rate. Conduct two steady-state wet coil tests, the A and B Tests. Use the two optional dry-coil tests, the steady-state C Test and the cyclic D Test, to determine the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient, C D c D c D c D c Table 5—Cooling Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Fixed Cooling Air Volume Rate Test description Air entering indoor unit Air entering outdoor unit Cooling air volume rate Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb A Test—required (steady, wet coil) 80 67 95 1 Cooling full-load. 2 B Test—required (steady, wet coil) 80 67 82 1 Cooling full-load. 2 C Test—optional (steady, dry coil) 80 ( 3 82 Cooling full-load. 2 D Test—optional (cyclic, dry coil) 80 ( 3 82 ( 4 1 2 3 4 3.2.2 Tests for a Unit Having a Single-Speed Compressor Where the Indoor Section Uses a Single Variable-Speed Variable-Air-Volume Rate Indoor Blower or Multiple Indoor Blowers 3.2.2.1 Indoor Blower Capacity Modulation That Correlates With the Outdoor Dry Bulb Temperature or Systems With a Single Indoor Coil but Multiple Indoor Blowers Conduct four steady-state wet coil tests: The A 2 1 2 1 1 1 D c D D D 3.2.2.2 Indoor Blower Capacity Modulation Based on Adjusting the Sensible to Total (S/T) Cooling Capacity Ratio The testing requirements are the same as specified in section 3.2.1 of this appendix and Table 5. Use a cooling full-load air volume rate that represents a normal installation. If performed, conduct the steady-state C Test and the cyclic D Test with the unit operating in the same S/T capacity control mode as used for the B Test. Table 6—Cooling Mode Test Conditions for Units With a Single-Speed Compressor That Meet the Section 3.2.2.1 Indoor Unit Requirements Test description Air entering indoor unit Air entering outdoor unit Cooling air volume rate Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb A 2 80 67 95 1 Cooling full-load. 2 A 1 80 67 95 1 Cooling minimum. 3 B 2 80 67 82 1 Cooling full-load. 2 B 1 80 67 82 1 Cooling minimum. 3 C 1 4 80 ( 4 82 Cooling minimum. 3 D 1 4 80 ( 4 82 ( 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 3.2.3 Tests for a Unit Having a Two-Capacity Compressor (See Section 1.2 of This Appendix, Definitions) a. Conduct four steady-state wet coil tests: the A 2 2 1 1 1 1 D c D D D b. For units having a variable speed indoor blower that is modulated to adjust the sensible to total (S/T) cooling capacity ratio, use cooling full-load and cooling minimum air volume rates that represent a normal installation. Additionally, if conducting the dry-coil tests, operate the unit in the same S/T capacity control mode as used for the B 1 c. Test two-capacity, northern heat pumps (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions) in the same way as a single speed heat pump with the unit operating exclusively at low compressor capacity (see section 3.2.1 of this appendix and Table 5). d. If a two-capacity air conditioner or heat pump locks out low-capacity operation at higher outdoor temperatures, then use the two dry-coil tests, the steady-state C 2 2 D c c c c D c D c D c Table 7—Cooling Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Two-Capacity Compressor Test description Air entering indoor unit temperature ( °F) Air entering outdoor unit temperature ( °F) Compressor Cooling air volume rate Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb A 2 80 67 95 1 High Cooling Full-Load. 2 B 2 80 67 82 1 High Cooling Full-Load. 2 B 1 80 67 82 1 Low Cooling Minimum. 3 C 2 80 ( 4 82 High Cooling Full-Load. 2 D 2 80 ( 4 82 High ( 5 C 1 80 ( 4 82 Low Cooling Minimum. 3 D 1 80 ( 4 82 Low ( 6 F 1 80 67 67 1 Low Cooling Minimum. 3 1 2 3 4 5 2 6 1 3.2.4 Tests for a Unit Having a Variable-Speed Compressor a. Conduct five steady-state wet coil tests: The A 2 V 2 1 1 1 1 D c D D D 2 2 1 1 1 1 where a tolerance of plus 5 percent or the next higher inverter frequency step from that calculated is allowed. b. For units that modulate the indoor blower speed to adjust the sensible to total (S/T) cooling capacity ratio, use cooling full-load, cooling intermediate, and cooling minimum air volume rates that represent a normal installation. Additionally, if conducting the dry-coil tests, operate the unit in the same S/T capacity control mode as used for the F 1 c. For multiple-split air conditioners and heat pumps (except where noted), the following procedures supersede the above requirements: For all Table 8 tests specified for a minimum compressor speed, at least one indoor unit must be turned off. The manufacturer shall designate the particular indoor unit(s) that is turned off. The manufacturer must also specify the compressor speed used for the Table 8 E V 1/4 3/4 V V Table 8—Cooling Mode Test Condition for Units Having a Variable-Speed Compressor Test description Air entering indoor unit Air entering outdoor unit Compressor speed Cooling air Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb A 2 80 67 95 1 Cooling Full Cooling Full-Load. 2 B 2 80 67 82 1 Cooling Full Cooling Full-Load. 2 E V 80 67 87 1 Cooling Intermediate Cooling Intermediate. 3 B 1 80 67 82 1 Cooling Minimum Cooling Minimum. 4 F 1 80 67 67 1 Cooling Minimum Cooling Minimum. 4 G 1 5 80 ( 6 67 Cooling Minimum Cooling Minimum. 4 I 1 5 80 ( 6 67 Cooling Minimum ( 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3.2.5 Cooling Mode Tests for Northern Heat Pumps With Triple-Capacity Compressors Test triple-capacity, northern heat pumps for the cooling mode in the same way as specified in section 3.2.3 of this appendix for units having a two-capacity compressor. 3.2.6 Tests for an Air Conditioner or Heat Pump Having a Single Indoor Unit Having Multiple Indoor Blowers and Offering Two Stages of Compressor Modulation Conduct the cooling mode tests specified in section 3.2.3 of this appendix. 3.3 Test Procedures for Steady-State Wet Coil Cooling Mode Tests (the A, A 2 1 2 1 V 1 a. For the pretest interval, operate the test room reconditioning apparatus and the unit to be tested until maintaining equilibrium conditions for at least 30 minutes at the specified section 3.2 test conditions. Use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus and, if installed, the indoor blower of the test unit to obtain and then maintain the indoor air volume rate and/or external static pressure specified for the particular test. Continuously record (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions): (1) The dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor coil, (2) The water vapor content of the air entering the indoor coil, (3) The dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the outdoor coil, and (4) For the section 2.2.4 of this appendix cases where its control is required, the water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor coil. Refer to section 3.11 of this appendix for additional requirements that depend on the selected secondary test method. b. After satisfying the pretest equilibrium requirements, make the measurements specified in Table 3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 for the indoor air enthalpy method and the user-selected secondary method. Make said Table 3 measurements at equal intervals that span 5 minutes or less. Continue data sampling until reaching a 30-minute period ( e.g., c. Calculate indoor-side total cooling capacity and sensible cooling capacity as specified in sections 7.3.3.1 and 7.3.3.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). To calculate capacity, use the averages of the measurements ( e.g. c k sc k c k Use the superscript k=2 to denote a test with the unit operating at high capacity or full speed, k=1 to denote low capacity or minimum speed, and k=v to denote the intermediate speed. d. For coil-only system tests, decrease Q c k and increase E c k where V s Table 9—Test Operating and Test Condition Tolerances for Section 3.3 Steady-State Wet Coil Cooling Mode Tests and Section 3.4 Dry Coil Cooling Mode Tests Test operating 1 Test condition 1 Indoor dry-bulb, °F Entering temperature 2.0 0.5 Leaving temperature 2.0 Indoor wet-bulb, °F Entering temperature 1.0 2 Leaving temperature 2 Outdoor dry-bulb, °F Entering temperature 2.0 0.5 Leaving temperature 3 Outdoor wet-bulb, °F Entering temperature 1.0 4 Leaving temperature 3 External resistance to airflow, inches of water 0.05 5 Electrical voltage, % of rdg. 2.0 1.5 Nozzle pressure drop, % of rdg. 2.0 1 2 3 4 5 e. For air conditioners and heat pumps having a constant-air-volume-rate indoor blower, the five additional steps listed below are required if the average of the measured external static pressures exceeds the applicable sections 3.1.4 minimum (or target) external static pressure (ΔP min (1) Measure the average power consumption of the indoor blower motor (E fan,1 1 (2) After completing the 30-minute interval and while maintaining the same test conditions, adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until the external static pressure increases to approximately ΔP 1 1 min (3) After re-establishing steady readings of the fan motor power and external static pressure, determine average values for the indoor blower power (E fan,2 2 (4) Approximate the average power consumption of the indoor blower motor at ΔP min (5) Increase the total space cooling capacity, Q c k fan,1 fan,min c k 3.4 Test Procedures for the Steady-State Dry-Coil Cooling-Mode Tests (the C, C 1 2 1 a. Except for the modifications noted in this section, conduct the steady-state dry coil cooling mode tests as specified in section 3.3 of this appendix for wet coil tests. Prior to recording data during the steady-state dry coil test, operate the unit at least one hour after achieving dry coil conditions. Drain the drain pan and plug the drain opening. Thereafter, the drain pan should remain completely dry. b. Denote the resulting total space cooling capacity and electrical power derived from the test as Q ss,dry ss,dry ss,dry i.e., n n c. If the temperature sensors used to provide the primary measurement of the indoor-side dry bulb temperature difference during the steady-state dry-coil test and the subsequent cyclic dry-coil test are different, include measurements of the latter sensors among the regularly sampled data. Beginning at the start of the 30-minute data collection period, measure and compute the indoor-side air dry-bulb temperature difference using both sets of instrumentation, ΔT (Set SS) and ΔT (Set CYC), for each equally spaced data sample. If using a consistent data sampling rate that is less than 1 minute, calculate and record minutely averages for the two temperature differences. If using a consistent sampling rate of one minute or more, calculate and record the two temperature differences from each data sample. After having recorded the seventh (i=7) set of temperature differences, calculate the following ratio using the first seven sets of values: Each time a subsequent set of temperature differences is recorded (if sampling more frequently than every 5 minutes), calculate F CD CD CD CD CD 3.5 Test Procedures for the Cyclic Dry-Coil Cooling-Mode Tests (the D, D 1 2 1 After completing the steady-state dry-coil test, remove the outdoor air enthalpy method test apparatus, if connected, and begin manual OFF/ON cycling of the unit's compressor. The test set-up should otherwise be identical to the set-up used during the steady-state dry coil test. When testing heat pumps, leave the reversing valve during the compressor OFF cycles in the same position as used for the compressor ON cycles, unless automatically changed by the controls of the unit. For units having a variable-speed indoor blower, the manufacturer has the option of electing at the outset whether to conduct the cyclic test with the indoor blower enabled or disabled. Always revert to testing with the indoor blower disabled if cyclic testing with the fan enabled is unsuccessful. a. For all cyclic tests, the measured capacity must be adjusted for the thermal mass stored in devices and connections located between measured points. Follow the procedure outlined in section 7.4.3.4.5 of ASHRAE 116-2010 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) to ensure any required measurements are taken. b. For units having a single-speed or two-capacity compressor, cycle the compressor OFF for 24 minutes and then ON for 6 minutes (Δτ cyc,dry cyc,dry c. Sections 3.5.1 and 3.5.2 of this appendix specify airflow requirements through the indoor coil of ducted and non-ducted indoor units, respectively. In all cases, use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus (covered under section 2.6 of this appendix) along with the indoor blower of the unit, if installed and operating, to approximate a step response in the indoor coil airflow. Regulate the exhaust fan to quickly obtain and then maintain the flow nozzle static pressure difference or velocity pressure at the same value as was measured during the steady-state dry coil test. The pressure difference or velocity pressure should be within 2 percent of the value from the steady-state dry coil test within 15 seconds after airflow initiation. For units having a variable-speed indoor blower that ramps when cycling on and/or off, use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus to impose a step response that begins at the initiation of ramp up and ends at the termination of ramp down. d. For units having a variable-speed indoor blower, conduct the cyclic dry coil test using the pull-thru approach described below if any of the following occur when testing with the fan operating: (1) The test unit automatically cycles off; (2) Its blower motor reverses; or (3) The unit operates for more than 30 seconds at an external static pressure that is 0.1 inches of water or more higher than the value measured during the prior steady-state test. For the pull-thru approach, disable the indoor blower and use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus to generate the specified flow nozzles static pressure difference or velocity pressure. If the exhaust fan cannot deliver the required pressure difference because of resistance created by the unpowered indoor blower, temporarily remove the indoor blower. e. Conduct three complete compressor OFF/ON cycles with the test tolerances given in Table 10 satisfied. Calculate the degradation coefficient C D D D D D D D f. With regard to the Table 10 parameters, continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor and outdoor coils during periods when air flows through the respective coils. Sample the water vapor content of the indoor coil inlet air at least every 2 minutes during periods when air flows through the coil. Record external static pressure and the air volume rate indicator (either nozzle pressure difference or velocity pressure) at least every minute during the interval that air flows through the indoor coil. (These regular measurements of the airflow rate indicator are in addition to the required measurement at 15 seconds after flow initiation.) Sample the electrical voltage at least every 2 minutes beginning 30 seconds after compressor start-up. Continue until the compressor, the outdoor fan, and the indoor blower (if it is installed and operating) cycle off. g. For ducted units, continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering (as noted above) and leaving the indoor coil. Or if using a thermopile, continuously record the difference between these two temperatures during the interval that air flows through the indoor coil. For non-ducted units, make the same dry-bulb temperature measurements beginning when the compressor cycles on and ending when indoor coil airflow ceases. h. Integrate the electrical power over complete cycles of length Δτ cyc,dry Table 10—Test Operating and Test Condition Tolerances for Cyclic Dry Coil Cooling Mode Tests Test operating tolerance 1 Test condition tolerance 1 Indoor entering dry-bulb temperature, 2 2.0 0.5 Indoor entering wet-bulb temperature, °F ( 3 Outdoor entering dry-bulb temperature, 2 2.0 0.5 External resistance to airflow, 2 0.05 Airflow nozzle pressure difference or velocity pressure, 2 2.0 4 Electrical voltage, 5 2.0 1.5 1 2 3 4 5 If the Table 10 tolerances are satisfied over the complete cycle, record the measured electrical energy consumption as e cyc,dry cyc,dry Where, V p,a n n n CD T al T a2 τ 1 τ 2 Adjust the total space cooling delivered, q cyc,dry 3.5.1 Procedures When Testing Ducted Systems The automatic controls that are installed in the test unit must govern the OFF/ON cycling of the air moving equipment on the indoor side (exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus and the indoor blower of the test unit). For ducted coil-only systems rated based on using a fan time-delay relay, control the indoor coil airflow according to the OFF delay listed by the manufacturer in the certification report. For ducted units having a variable-speed indoor blower that has been disabled (and possibly removed), start and stop the indoor airflow at the same instances as if the fan were enabled. For all other ducted coil-only systems, cycle the indoor coil airflow in unison with the cycling of the compressor. If air damper boxes are used, close them on the inlet and outlet side during the OFF period. Airflow through the indoor coil should stop within 3 seconds after the automatic controls of the test unit (act to) de-energize the indoor blower. For ducted coil-only systems (excluding the special case where a variable-speed fan is temporarily removed), increase e cyc,dry and decrease q cyc,dry where V s cyc,dry cyc,dry a. The product of [τ 2 τ1 b. The following algorithm if the indoor blower ramps its speed when cycling. (1) Measure the electrical power consumed by the variable-speed indoor blower at a minimum of three operating conditions: At the speed/air volume rate/external static pressure that was measured during the steady-state test, at operating conditions associated with the midpoint of the ramp-up interval, and at conditions associated with the midpoint of the ramp-down interval. For these measurements, the tolerances on the airflow volume or the external static pressure are the same as required for the section 3.4 steady-state test. (2) For each case, determine the fan power from measurements made over a minimum of 5 minutes. (3) Approximate the electrical energy consumption of the indoor blower if it had operated during the cyclic test using all three power measurements. Assume a linear profile during the ramp intervals. The manufacturer must provide the durations of the ramp-up and ramp-down intervals. If the test setup instructions included with the unit by the manufacturer specifies a ramp interval that exceeds 45 seconds, use a 45-second ramp interval nonetheless when estimating the fan energy. 3.5.2 Procedures When Testing Non-Ducted Indoor Units Do not use airflow prevention devices when conducting cyclic tests on non-ducted indoor units. Until the last OFF/ON compressor cycle, airflow through the indoor coil must cycle off and on in unison with the compressor. For the last OFF/ON compressor cycle—the one used to determine e cyc,dry cyc,dry cyc,dry. cyc,dry. cyc,dry cyc,dry 3.5.3 Cooling-Mode Cyclic-Degradation Coefficient Calculation Use the two dry-coil tests to determine the cooling-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, C D c c c c i.e., D c D c D c where: the average energy efficiency ratio during the cyclic dry coil cooling mode test, Btu/W·h the average energy efficiency ratio during the steady-state dry coil cooling mode test, Btu/W·h the cooling load factor dimensionless Round the calculated value for C D c D c 3.6 Heating Mode Tests for Different Types of Heat Pumps, Including Heating-Only Heat Pumps 3.6.1 Tests for a Heat Pump Having a Single-Speed Compressor and Fixed Heating Air Volume Rate This set of tests is for single-speed-compressor heat pumps that do not have a heating minimum air volume rate or a heating intermediate air volume rate that is different than the heating full load air volume rate. Conduct the optional high temperature cyclic (H1C) test to determine the heating mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, C D h D h D h D h Table 11—Heating Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Fixed-Speed Indoor Blower, a Constant Air Volume Rate Indoor Blower, or No Indoor Blower Test description Air entering indoor unit Air entering outdoor unit Heating air volume rate Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb H1 Test (required, steady) 70 60 (max) 47 43 Heating Full-load. 1 H1C Test (optional, cyclic) 70 60 (max) 47 43 ( 2 H2 Test (required) 70 60 (max) 35 33 Heating Full-load. 1 H3 Test (required, steady) 70 60 (max) 17 15 Heating Full-load. 1 1 2 3.6.2 Tests for a Heat Pump Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Single Indoor Unit Having Either (1) a Variable Speed, Variable-Air-Rate Indoor Blower Whose Capacity Modulation Correlates With Outdoor Dry Bulb Temperature or (2) Multiple Indoor Blowers Conduct five tests: Two high temperature tests (H1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 D h D h D h D h 1 1 The quantities Q h k=2 h k=2 h k=1 h k=1 2 1 h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=2 h k=2 h k=1 h k=1 2 1 Table 12—Table Heating Mode Test Conditions for Units With a Single-Speed Compressor That Meet the Section 3.6.2 Indoor Unit Requirements Test description Air entering indoor unit Air entering outdoor unit Heating air volume rate Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb H1 2 70 60 (max) 47 43 Heating Full-load. 1 H1 1 70 60 (max) 47 43 Heating Minimum. 2 H1C 1 70 60 (max) 47 43 ( 3 H2 2 70 60 (max) 35 33 Heating Full-load. 1 H2 1 70 60 (max) 35 33 Heating Minimum. 2 H3 2 70 60 (max) 17 15 Heating Full-load. 1 H3 1 70 60 (max) 17 15 Heating Minimum. 2 1 2 3 1 3.6.3 Tests for a Heat Pump Having a Two-Capacity Compressor (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions), Including Two-Capacity, Northern Heat Pumps (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions) a. Conduct one maximum temperature test (H0 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 (1) Knowledge of the heat pump's capacity and electrical power at low compressor capacity for outdoor temperatures of 37 °F and less is needed to complete the section 4.2.3 of this appendix seasonal performance calculations; and (2) The heat pump's controls allow low-capacity operation at outdoor temperatures of 37 °F and less. If the above two conditions are met, an alternative to conducting the H2 1 Determine the quantities Q h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=1 h k=1 1 b. Conduct the optional high temperature cyclic test (H1C 1 D h D h D h D h 2 D h D h D h D h D h D h D h Table 13—Heating Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Two-Capacity Compressor Test description Air entering indoor unit Air entering outdoor unit Compressor capacity Heating air volume rate Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb H0 1 70 60 (max) 62 56.5 Low Heating Minimum. 1 H1 2 70 60 (max) 47 43 High Heating Full-Load. 2 H1C 2 7 70 60 (max) 47 43 High ( 3 H1 1 70 60 (max) 47 43 Low Heating Minimum. 1 H1C 1 70 60 (max) 47 43 Low ( 4 H2 2 70 60 (max) 35 33 High Heating Full-Load. 2 H2 1 5 6 70 60 (max) 35 33 Low Heating Minimum. 1 H3 2 70 60 (max) 17 15 High Heating Full-Load. 2 H3 1 5 70 60 (max) 17 15 Low Heating Minimum. 1 1 2 3 H1 2 4 H1 1 5 HSPF 6 h k=1 h k=1 1 7 3.6.4 Tests for a Heat Pump Having a Variable-Speed Compressor a. Conduct one maximum temperature test (H0 1 N 1 V 2 2 2 1 D h D h D h D h 2 2 2 N 2 N 2 1 1 1 Where a tolerance on speed of plus 5 percent or the next higher inverter frequency step from the calculated value is allowed. b. If the H1 2 Where: Q hcalc k=2 hcalc k=2 Q h k=2 2 E h k=2 2 Evaluate the quantities Q h k=2 h k=2 Otherwise, if the H1 N 2 Where: Q hcalc k=2 E hcalc k=2 Q h k=N N E h k=N N Evaluate the quantities Q h k=N h k=N Otherwise (if no high temperature test is conducted using the same speed (RPM or power input frequency) as the H3 2 Where: Q hcalc k=2 E hcalc k=2 Q h k =2 2 E h k =2 2 CSF is the capacity slope factor, equal to 0.0204/ °F for split systems and 0.0262/ °F for single-package systems, and PSF is the Power Slope Factor, equal to 0.00455/ °F. c. If the H2 2 2 Where: Q hcalc k =2 E hcalc k =2 Q h k =2 E h k =2 2 d. Determine the quantities Q h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=2 h k=2 2 Table 14—Heating Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Variable-Speed Compressor Test description Air entering indoor unit Air entering outdoor unit Compressor speed Heating air volume rate Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb H0 1 70 60 (max) 62 56.5 Heating minimum Heating minimum. 1 H1 2 70 60 (max) 47 43 Heating full 4 Heating full-load. 3 H1 1 70 60 (max) 47 43 Heating minimum Heating minimum. 1 H1 N 70 60 (max) 47 43 Heating full Heating full-load. 3 H1C 1 70 60 (max) 47 43 Heating minimum ( 2 H2 2 70 60 (max) 35 33 Heating full 4 Heating full-load. 3 H2 V 70 60 (max) 35 33 Heating intermediate Heating intermediate. 5 H3 2 70 60 (max) 17 15 Heating full Heating full-load. 3 1 2 1 3 4 2 2 N 5 3.6.5 Additional Test for a Heat Pump Having a Heat Comfort Controller Test any heat pump that has a heat comfort controller (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions) according to section 3.6.1, 3.6.2, or 3.6.3, whichever applies, with the heat comfort controller disabled. Additionally, conduct the abbreviated test described in section 3.1.10 of this appendix with the heat comfort controller active to determine the system's maximum supply air temperature. ( Note: 3.6.6 Heating Mode Tests for Northern Heat Pumps With Triple-Capacity Compressors. Test triple-capacity, northern heat pumps for the heating mode as follows: a. Conduct one maximum-temperature test (H0 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 h k=1 h k=1 In evaluating the above equations, determine the quantities Q h k=1 1 h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=1 h k=1 1 b. Conducting a frost accumulation test (H2 3 h k=3 h k=3 Where: Determine the quantities Q h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=3 h k=3 3 h k=3 h k=3 3 h k=3 h k=3 3 c. Conduct the optional high-temperature cyclic test (H1C 1 D h D h D h 2 D h D h D h D h 3 D h D h D h D h Table 15—Heating Mode Test Conditions for Units With a Triple-Capacity Compressor Test description Air entering indoor unit Air entering outdoor unit Compressor capacity Heating air volume rate Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb H0 1 70 60 (max) 62 56.5 Low Heating Minimum. 1 H1 2 70 60 (max) 47 43 High Heating Full-Load. 2 H1C 2 8 70 60 (max) 47 43 High ( 3 H1 1 70 60 (max) 47 43 Low Heating Minimum. 1 H1C 1 70 60 (max) 47 43 Low ( 4 H2 3 70 60 (max) 35 33 Booster Heating Full-Load. 2 H2 2 70 60 (max) 35 33 High Heating Full-Load. 2 H2 1 70 60 (max) 35 33 Low Heating Minimum. 1 H3 3 70 60 (max) 17 15 Booster Heating Full-Load. 2 H3C 3 5 6 70 60 (max) 17 15 Booster ( 7 H3 2 70 60 (max) 17 15 High Heating Full-Load. 2 H3 1 5 70 60 (max) 17 15 Low Heating Minimum. 1 H4 3 70 60 (max) 5 3 (max) Booster Heating Full-Load. 2 1 2 3 2 4 1 5 6 5 h k=1 h k=1 1 7 3 8 3.6.7 Tests for a Heat Pump Having a Single Indoor Unit Having Multiple Indoor Blowers and Offering Two Stages of Compressor Modulation Conduct the heating mode tests specified in section 3.6.3 of this appendix. 3.7 Test Procedures for Steady-State Maximum Temperature and High Temperature Heating Mode Tests (the H0 1 2 1 N a. For the pretest interval, operate the test room reconditioning apparatus and the heat pump until equilibrium conditions are maintained for at least 30 minutes at the specified section 3.6 test conditions. Use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus and, if installed, the indoor blower of the heat pump to obtain and then maintain the indoor air volume rate and/or the external static pressure specified for the particular test. Continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor coil, and the dry-bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor coil. Refer to section 3.11 of this appendix for additional requirements that depend on the selected secondary test method. After satisfying the pretest equilibrium requirements, make the measurements specified in Table 3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) for the indoor air enthalpy method and the user-selected secondary method. Make said Table 3 measurements at equal intervals that span 5 minutes or less. Continue data sampling until a 30-minute period ( e.g., Table 16—Test Operating and Test Condition Tolerances for Section 3.7 and Section 3.10 Steady-State Heating Mode Tests Test operating 1 Test condition 1 Indoor dry-bulb, °F: Entering temperature 2.0 0.5 Leaving temperature 2.0 Indoor wet-bulb, °F: Entering temperature 1.0 Leaving temperature 1.0 Outdoor dry-bulb, °F: Entering temperature 2.0 0.5 Leaving temperature 2 Outdoor wet-bulb, °F: Entering temperature 1.0 0.3 Leaving temperature 2 External resistance to airflow, inches of water 0.05 3 Electrical voltage, % of rdg 2.0 1.5 Nozzle pressure drop, % of rdg 2.0 1 2 3 b. Calculate indoor-side total heating capacity as specified in sections 7.3.4.1 and 7.3.4.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). To calculate capacity, use the averages of the measurements ( e.g. h k h k N c. For coil-only system heat pumps, increase Q h k where V s h k h k d. If conducting the cyclic heating mode test, which is described in section 3.8 of this appendix, record the average indoor-side air volume rate, V p,a n n n fan,1 (1) The section 3.8 cyclic test will be conducted and the heat pump has a variable-speed indoor blower that is expected to be disabled during the cyclic test; or (2) The heat pump has a (variable-speed) constant-air volume-rate indoor blower and during the steady-state test the average external static pressure (ΔP 1 min Determine E fan,1 fan,1 1 (i) While maintaining the same test conditions, adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until the external static pressure increases to approximately ΔP 1 1 min (ii) After re-establishing steady readings for fan motor power and external static pressure, determine average values for the indoor blower power (E fan,2 2 (iii) Approximate the average power consumption of the indoor blower motor if the 30-minute test had been conducted at ΔP min (iv) Decrease the total space heating capacity, Q h k fan,1 fan,min h k e. If the temperature sensors used to provide the primary measurement of the indoor-side dry bulb temperature difference during the steady-state dry-coil test and the subsequent cyclic dry-coil test are different, include measurements of the latter sensors among the regularly sampled data. Beginning at the start of the 30-minute data collection period, measure and compute the indoor-side air dry-bulb temperature difference using both sets of instrumentation, ΔT (Set SS) and ΔT (Set CYC), for each equally spaced data sample. If using a consistent data sampling rate that is less than 1 minute, calculate and record minutely averages for the two temperature differences. If using a consistent sampling rate of one minute or more, calculate and record the two temperature differences from each data sample. After having recorded the seventh (i=7) set of temperature differences, calculate the following ratio using the first seven sets of values: Each time a subsequent set of temperature differences is recorded (if sampling more frequently than every 5 minutes), calculate F CD F CD F CD F CD F CD 3.8 Test Procedures for the Cyclic Heating Mode Tests (the H0C 1 1 2 a. Except as noted below, conduct the cyclic heating mode test as specified in section 3.5 of this appendix. As adapted to the heating mode, replace section 3.5 references to “the steady-state dry coil test” with “the heating mode steady-state test conducted at the same test conditions as the cyclic heating mode test.” Use the test tolerances in Table 17 rather than Table 10. Record the outdoor coil entering wet-bulb temperature according to the requirements given in section 3.5 of this appendix for the outdoor coil entering dry-bulb temperature. Drop the subscript “dry” used in variables cited in section 3.5 of this appendix when referring to quantities from the cyclic heating mode test. Determine the total space heating delivered during the cyclic heating test, q cyc (1) When evaluating Equation 3.5-1, use the values of V p,a n n n (2) Calculate Γ using where F CD b. For ducted coil-only system heat pumps (excluding the special case where a variable-speed fan is temporarily removed), increase q cyc cyc s c. For non-ducted heat pumps, subtract the electrical energy used by the indoor blower during the 3 minutes after compressor cutoff from the non-ducted heat pump's integrated heating capacity, q cyc d. If a heat pump defrost cycle is manually or automatically initiated immediately prior to or during the OFF/ON cycling, operate the heat pump continuously until 10 minutes after defrost termination. After that, begin cycling the heat pump immediately or delay until the specified test conditions have been re-established. Pay attention to preventing defrosts after beginning the cycling process. For heat pumps that cycle off the indoor blower during a defrost cycle, make no effort here to restrict the air movement through the indoor coil while the fan is off. Resume the OFF/ON cycling while conducting a minimum of two complete compressor OFF/ON cycles before determining q cyc cyc 3.8.1 Heating Mode Cyclic-Degradation Coefficient Calculation Use the results from the required cyclic test and the required steady-state test that were conducted at the same test conditions to determine the heating mode cyclic-degradation coefficient C D h h k cyc cyc D h D h D h i.e., D h D h D h where: the average coefficient of performance during the cyclic heating mode test, dimensionless. the average coefficient of performance during the steady-state heating mode test conducted at the same test conditions— i.e., cyc the heating load factor, dimensionless. T cyc Δτ cyc Round the calculated value for C D h D h Table 17—Test Operating and Test Condition Tolerances for Cyclic Heating Mode Tests Test operating 1 Test condition 1 Indoor entering dry-bulb temperature, 2 2.0 0.5 Indoor entering wet-bulb temperature, 2 1.0 Outdoor entering dry-bulb temperature, 2 2.0 0.5 Outdoor entering wet-bulb temperature, 2 2.0 1.0 External resistance to air-flow, 2 0.05 Airflow nozzle pressure difference or velocity pressure, 2 2.0 3 Electrical voltage, 4 2.0 1.5 1 2 3 4 3.9 Test Procedures for Frost Accumulation Heating Mode Tests (the H2, H2 2 V 1 a. Confirm that the defrost controls of the heat pump are set as specified in section 2.2.1 of this appendix. Operate the test room reconditioning apparatus and the heat pump for at least 30 minutes at the specified section 3.6 test conditions before starting the “preliminary” test period. The preliminary test period must immediately precede the “official” test period, which is the heating and defrost interval over which data are collected for evaluating average space heating capacity and average electrical power consumption. b. For heat pumps containing defrost controls which are likely to cause defrosts at intervals less than one hour, the preliminary test period starts at the termination of an automatic defrost cycle and ends at the termination of the next occurring automatic defrost cycle. For heat pumps containing defrost controls which are likely to cause defrosts at intervals exceeding one hour, the preliminary test period must consist of a heating interval lasting at least one hour followed by a defrost cycle that is either manually or automatically initiated. In all cases, the heat pump's own controls must govern when a defrost cycle terminates. c. The official test period begins when the preliminary test period ends, at defrost termination. The official test period ends at the termination of the next occurring automatic defrost cycle. When testing a heat pump that uses a time-adaptive defrost control system (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions), however, manually initiate the defrost cycle that ends the official test period at the instant indicated by instructions provided by the manufacturer. If the heat pump has not undergone a defrost after 6 hours, immediately conclude the test and use the results from the full 6-hour period to calculate the average space heating capacity and average electrical power consumption. For heat pumps that turn the indoor blower off during the defrost cycle, take steps to cease forced airflow through the indoor coil and block the outlet duct whenever the heat pump's controls cycle off the indoor blower. If it is installed, use the outlet damper box described in section 2.5.4.1 of this appendix to affect the blocked outlet duct. d. Defrost termination occurs when the controls of the heat pump actuate the first change in converting from defrost operation to normal heating operation. Defrost initiation occurs when the controls of the heat pump first alter its normal heating operation in order to eliminate possible accumulations of frost on the outdoor coil. e. To constitute a valid frost accumulation test, satisfy the test tolerances specified in Table 18 during both the preliminary and official test periods. As noted in Table 18, test operating tolerances are specified for two sub-intervals: (1) When heating, except for the first 10 minutes after the termination of a defrost cycle (sub-interval H, as described in Table 18) and (2) When defrosting, plus these same first 10 minutes after defrost termination (sub-interval D, as described in Table 18). Evaluate compliance with Table 18 test condition tolerances and the majority of the test operating tolerances using the averages from measurements recorded only during sub-interval H. Continuously record the dry bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor coil, and the dry bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor coil. Sample the remaining parameters listed in Table 18 at equal intervals that span 5 minutes or less. f. For the official test period, collect and use the following data to calculate average space heating capacity and electrical power. During heating and defrosting intervals when the controls of the heat pump have the indoor blower on, continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering (as noted above) and leaving the indoor coil. If using a thermopile, continuously record the difference between the leaving and entering dry-bulb temperatures during the interval(s) that air flows through the indoor coil. For coil-only system heat pumps, determine the corresponding cumulative time (in hours) of indoor coil airflow, Δτ a. Note: mi DEF k FR. Table 18—Test Operating and Test Condition Tolerances for Frost Accumulation Heating Mode Tests Test operating tolerance 1 Test condition 1 2 Sub-interval H 2 Sub-interval D 3 Indoor entering dry-bulb temperature, °F 2.0 4 0.5 Indoor entering wet-bulb temperature, °F 1.0 Outdoor entering dry-bulb temperature, °F 2.0 10.0 1.0 Outdoor entering wet-bulb temperature, °F 1.5 0.5 External resistance to airflow, inches of water 0.05 5 Electrical voltage, % of rdg 2.0 1.5 1 2 3 4 5 3.9.1 Average Space Heating Capacity and Electrical Power Calculations a. Evaluate average space heating capacity, Q h k Where, V C p,a n da v n 3 mx. W n Δτ FR 2 1 T al T a2 τ 1 τ 2 v n 3 To account for the effect of duct losses between the outlet of the indoor unit and the section 2.5.4 dry-bulb temperature grid, adjust Q h k b. Evaluate average electrical power, E h k For coil-only system heat pumps, increase Q h k and increase E h k where V s c. For heat pumps having a constant-air-volume-rate indoor blower, the five additional steps listed below are required if the average of the external static pressures measured during sub-interval H exceeds the applicable section 3.1.4.4, 3.1.4.5, or 3.1.4.6 minimum (or targeted) external static pressure (ΔP min (1) Measure the average power consumption of the indoor blower motor (E fan,1 1 (2) After the frost accumulation heating mode test is completed and while maintaining the same test conditions, adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until the external static pressure increases to approximately ΔP 1 1 min (3) After re-establishing steady readings for the fan motor power and external static pressure, determine average values for the indoor blower power (E fan,2 2 (4) Approximate the average power consumption of the indoor blower motor had the frost accumulation heating mode test been conducted at ΔP min (5) Decrease the total heating capacity, Q h k fan,1 fan,min a FR h k 3.9.2 Demand Defrost Credit a. Assign the demand defrost credit, F def def where: Δτ def def Δτ max b. For two-capacity heat pumps and for section 3.6.2 units, evaluate the above equation using the Δτ def def 3.10 Test Procedures for Steady-State Low Temperature Heating Mode Tests (the H3, H3 2 1 Except for the modifications noted in this section, conduct the low temperature heating mode test using the same approach as specified in section 3.7 of this appendix for the maximum and high temperature tests. After satisfying the section 3.7 requirements for the pretest interval but before beginning to collect data to determine Q h k h k h k h k 3.11 Additional Requirements for the Secondary Test Methods 3.11.1 If Using the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method as the Secondary Test Method a. For all cooling mode and heating mode tests, first conduct a test without the outdoor air-side test apparatus described in section 2.10.1 of this appendix connected to the outdoor unit (“free outdoor air” test). b. For the first section 3.2 steady-state cooling mode test and the first section 3.6 steady-state heating mode test, conduct a second test in which the outdoor-side apparatus is connected (“ducted outdoor air” test). No other cooling mode or heating mode tests require the ducted outdoor air test so long as the unit operates the outdoor fan during all cooling mode steady-state tests at the same speed and all heating mode steady-state tests at the same speed. If using more than one outdoor fan speed for the cooling mode steady-state tests, however, conduct the ducted outdoor air test for each cooling mode test where a different fan speed is first used. This same requirement applies for the heating mode tests. 3.11.1.1 Free Outdoor Air Test a. For the free outdoor air test, connect the indoor air-side test apparatus to the indoor coil; do not connect the outdoor air-side test apparatus. Allow the test room reconditioning apparatus and the unit being tested to operate for at least one hour. After attaining equilibrium conditions, measure the following quantities at equal intervals that span 5 minutes or less: (1) The section 2.10.1 evaporator and condenser temperatures or pressures; (2) Parameters required according to the indoor air enthalpy method. Continue these measurements until a 30-minute period ( e.g., b. For cases where a ducted outdoor air test is not required per section 3.11.1.b of this appendix, the free outdoor air test constitutes the “official” test for which validity is not based on comparison with a secondary test. c. For cases where a ducted outdoor air test is required per section 3.11.1.b of this appendix, the following conditions must be met for the free outdoor air test to constitute a valid “official” test: (1) Achieve the energy balance specified in section 3.1.1 of this appendix for the ducted outdoor air test ( i.e., (2) The capacities determined using the indoor air enthalpy method from the ducted outdoor air and free outdoor tests must agree within 2 percent. 3.11.1.2 Ducted Outdoor Air Test a. The test conditions and tolerances for the ducted outdoor air test are the same as specified for the free outdoor air test described in Section 3.11.1.1 of this appendix. b. After collecting 30 minutes of steady-state data during the free outdoor air test, connect the outdoor air-side test apparatus to the unit for the ducted outdoor air test. Adjust the exhaust fan of the outdoor airflow measuring apparatus until averages for the evaporator and condenser temperatures, or the saturated temperatures corresponding to the measured pressures, agree within ±0.5 °F of the averages achieved during the free outdoor air test. Collect 30 minutes of steady-state data after re-establishing equilibrium conditions. c. During the ducted outdoor air test, at intervals of 5 minutes or less, measure the parameters required according to the indoor air enthalpy method and the outdoor air enthalpy method for the prescribed 30 minutes. d. For cooling mode ducted outdoor air tests, calculate capacity based on outdoor air-enthalpy measurements as specified in sections 7.3.3.2 and 7.3.3.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). For heating mode ducted tests, calculate heating capacity based on outdoor air-enthalpy measurements as specified in sections 7.3.4.2 and 7.3.3.4.3 of the same ANSI/ASHRAE Standard. Adjust the outdoor-side capacity according to section 7.3.3.4 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 to account for line losses when testing split systems. As described in section 8.6.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009, use the outdoor air volume rate as measured during the ducted outdoor air tests to calculate capacity for checking the agreement with the capacity calculated using the indoor air enthalpy method. 3.11.2 If Using the Compressor Calibration Method as the Secondary Test Method a. Conduct separate calibration tests using a calorimeter to determine the refrigerant flow rate. Or for cases where the superheat of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator is less than 5 °F, use the calorimeter to measure total capacity rather than refrigerant flow rate. Conduct these calibration tests at the same test conditions as specified for the tests in this appendix. Operate the unit for at least one hour or until obtaining equilibrium conditions before collecting data that will be used in determining the average refrigerant flow rate or total capacity. Sample the data at equal intervals that span 5 minutes or less. Determine average flow rate or average capacity from data sampled over a 30-minute period where the Table 9 (cooling) or the Table 16 (heating) tolerances are satisfied. Otherwise, conduct the calibration tests according to sections 5, 6, 7, and 8 of ASHRAE 23.1-2010 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3); sections 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 11 of ASHRAE 41.9-2011 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3); and section 7.4 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). b. Calculate space cooling and space heating capacities using the compressor calibration method measurements as specified in section 7.4.5 and 7.4.6 respectively, of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. 3.11.3 If Using the Refrigerant-Enthalpy Method as the Secondary Test Method Conduct this secondary method according to section 7.5 of ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009. Calculate space cooling and heating capacities using the refrigerant-enthalpy method measurements as specified in sections 7.5.4 and 7.5.5, respectively, of the same ASHRAE Standard. 3.12 Rounding of Space Conditioning Capacities for Reporting Purposes a. When reporting rated capacities, round them off as specified in § 430.23 (for a single unit) and in 10 CFR 429.16 (for a sample). b. For the capacities used to perform the calculations in section 4 of this appendix, however, round only to the nearest integer. 3.13 Laboratory Testing to Determine Off Mode Average Power Ratings Voltage tolerances: As a percentage of reading, test operating tolerance shall be 2.0 percent and test condition tolerance shall be 1.5 percent (see section 1.2 of this appendix for definitions of these tolerances). Conduct one of the following tests: If the central air conditioner or heat pump lacks a compressor crankcase heater, perform the test in section 3.13.1 of this appendix; if the central air conditioner or heat pump has a compressor crankcase heater that lacks controls and is not self-regulating, perform the test in section 3.13.1 of this appendix; if the central air conditioner or heat pump has a crankcase heater with a fixed power input controlled with a thermostat that measures ambient temperature and whose sensing element temperature is not affected by the heater, perform the test in section 3.13.1 of this appendix; if the central air conditioner or heat pump has a compressor crankcase heater equipped with self-regulating control or with controls for which the sensing element temperature is affected by the heater, perform the test in section 3.13.2 of this appendix. 3.13.1 This Test Determines the Off Mode Average Power Rating for Central Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps That Lack a Compressor Crankcase Heater, or Have a Compressor Crankcase Heating System That Can Be Tested Without Control of Ambient Temperature During the Test. This Test Has No Ambient Condition Requirements a. Test Sample Set-up and Power Measurement: For coil-only systems, provide a furnace or modular blower that is compatible with the system to serve as an interface with the thermostat (if used for the test) and to provide low-voltage control circuit power. Make all control circuit connections between the furnace (or modular blower) and the outdoor unit as specified by the manufacturer's installation instructions. Measure power supplied to both the furnace or modular blower and power supplied to the outdoor unit. Alternatively, provide a compatible transformer to supply low-voltage control circuit power, as described in section 2.2.d of this appendix. Measure transformer power, either supplied to the primary winding or supplied by the secondary winding of the transformer, and power supplied to the outdoor unit. For blower coil and single-package systems, make all control circuit connections between components as specified by the manufacturer's installation instructions, and provide power and measure power supplied to all system components. b. Configure Controls: Configure the controls of the central air conditioner or heat pump so that it operates as if connected to a building thermostat that is set to the OFF position. Use a compatible building thermostat if necessary to achieve this configuration. For a thermostat-controlled crankcase heater with a fixed power input, bypass the crankcase heater thermostat if necessary to energize the heater. c. Measure P2 x P2 x d. Measure P x outdoor outdoor P x P x e. Calculate P2 For single-package systems and blower coil split systems for which the designated air mover is not a furnace or modular blower, divide the heating season total off mode power ( P2 x P2 P2 P2 For coil-only split systems and blower coil split systems for which a furnace or a modular blower is the designated air mover, subtract the low-voltage power ( P x P2 x P2 P2 P2 f. Shoulder-season per-compressor off mode power, P1: If the system does not have a crankcase heater, has a crankcase heater without controls that is not self-regulating, or has a value for the crankcase heater turn-on temperature (as certified in the DOE Compliance Certification Database) that is higher than 71 °F, P1 is equal to P2. Otherwise, de-energize the crankcase heater (by removing the thermostat bypass or otherwise disconnecting only the power supply to the crankcase heater) and repeat the measurement as described in section 3.13.1.c of this appendix. Designate the measured average power as P x Determine the number of compressors as described in section 3.13.1.e of this appendix. For single-package systems and blower coil systems for which the designated air mover is not a furnace or modular blower, divide the shoulder season total off mode power ( P x P1 P1 P1 For coil-only split systems and blower coil split systems for which a furnace or a modular blower is the designated air mover, subtract the low-voltage power ( P x P x P1 P1 P1 3.13.2 This Test Determines the Off Mode Average Power Rating for Central Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps for Which Ambient Temperature Can Affect the Measurement of Crankcase Heater Power a. Test Sample Set-up and Power Measurement: Set up the test and measurement as described in section 3.13.1.a of this appendix. b. Configure Controls: Position a temperature sensor to measure the outdoor dry-bulb temperature in the air between 2 and 6 inches from the crankcase heater control temperature sensor or, if no such temperature sensor exists, position it in the air between 2 and 6 inches from the crankcase heater. Utilize the temperature measurements from this sensor for this portion of the test procedure. Configure the controls of the central air conditioner or heat pump so that it operates as if connected to a building thermostat that is set to the OFF position. Use a compatible building thermostat if necessary to achieve this configuration. Conduct the test after completion of the B, B 1 2 c. Measure P x P x P x d. Reduce outdoor temperature: Approach the target outdoor dry-bulb temperature by adjusting the outdoor temperature at a rate of change of no more than 20 °F per hour. This target temperature is five degrees Fahrenheit less than the temperature specified by the manufacturer in the DOE Compliance Certification Database at which the crankcase heater turns on. Maintain the target temperature within ±2 °F while making the power measurement, as described in section 3.13.2.e of this appendix. e. Measure P2 x P2 x P2 x f. Measure P x outdoor outdoor P x P x g. Calculate P1 Set the number of compressors equal to the unit's number of single-stage compressors plus 1.75 times the unit's number of compressors that are not single-stage. For single-package systems and blower coil split systems for which the air mover is not a furnace or modular blower, divide the shoulder season total off mode power ( P x P1 P1 For coil-only split systems and blower coil split systems for which a furnace or a modular blower is the designated air mover, subtract the low-voltage power ( P x P x P1 P1 h. Calculate P2 Determine the number of compressors as described in section 3.13.2.g of this appendix. For single-package systems and blower coil split systems for which the air mover is not a furnace, divide the heating season total off mode power ( P2 x P2 P2 For coil-only split systems and blower coil split systems for which a furnace or a modular blower is the designated air mover, subtract the low-voltage power ( P x P2 x P2 P2 4. Calculations of Seasonal Performance Descriptors 4.1 Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) Calculations. SEER must be calculated as follows: For equipment covered under sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3, and 4.1.4 of this appendix, evaluate the seasonal energy efficiency ratio, where: T j j = the bin number. For cooling season calculations, j ranges from 1 to 8. Additionally, for sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3, and 4.1.4 of this appendix, use a building cooling load, BL(T j j where: Q c k=2 2 1.1 = sizing factor, dimensionless. The temperatures 95 °F and 65 °F in the building load equation represent the selected outdoor design temperature and the zero-load base temperature, respectively. 4.1.1 SEER Calculations for a Blower Coil System Having a Single-Speed Compressor and Either a Fixed-Speed Indoor Blower or a Constant-Air-Volume-Rate Indoor Blower, or a Coil-Only System Air Conditioner or Heat Pump a. Evaluate the seasonal energy efficiency ratio, expressed in units of Btu/watt-hour, using: SEER = PLF EER B where: PLF(0.5) = 1 − 0.5 · C D c b. Refer to section 3.3 of this appendix regarding the definition and calculation of Q c c D c 4.1.2 SEER Calculations for an Air Conditioner or Heat Pump Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Variable-Speed Variable-Air-Volume-Rate Indoor Blower 4.1.2.1 Units Covered by Section 3.2.2.1 of This Appendix Where Indoor Blower Capacity Modulation Correlates With the Outdoor Dry Bulb Temperature The manufacturer must provide information on how the indoor air volume rate or the indoor blower speed varies over the outdoor temperature range of 67 °F to 102 °F. Calculate SEER using Equation 4.1-1. Evaluate the quantity q c j where: Q c j j n j j a. For the space cooling season, assign n j j c j where: the space cooling capacity of the test unit at outdoor temperature T j the space cooling capacity of the test unit at outdoor temperature T j b. For units where indoor blower speed is the primary control variable, FP c k=1 1 1 c k=2 2 2 c j j. c c k=1 c k=1 c k=2 c k=2 where: PLF j D c j E c j j c. The quantities X(T j j D c d. Evaluate E c j e. The parameters FP c k=1 c k=2 c j c k=1 c k=1 c k=2 c k=2 4.1.2.2 Units Covered by Section 3.2.2.2 of This Appendix Where Indoor Blower Capacity Modulation Is Used To Adjust the Sensible to Total Cooling Capacity Ratio. Calculate SEER as specified in section 4.1.1 of this appendix. 4.1.3 SEER Calculations for an Air Conditioner or Heat Pump Having a Two-Capacity Compressor Calculate SEER using Equation 4.1-1. Evaluate the space cooling capacity, Q c k=1 j c k=1 j j where Q c k=1 c k=1 1 c k=1 c k=1 1 c k=2 j c k=2 j j where Q c k=2 c k=2 2 c k=2 c k=2 2 The calculation of Equation 4.1-1 quantities q c j c j j 4.1.3.1 Steady-State Space Cooling Capacity at Low Compressor Capacity Is Greater Than or Equal to the Building Cooling Load at Temperature T j c k=1 j j where: X k=1 j j c k=1 j PLF j D c k=1 j Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n j c k=1 j c k=1 j D c Table 19—Distribution of Fractional Hours Within Cooling Season Temperature Bins Bin number, Bin Representative temperature for bin Fraction of total j 1 65-69 67 0.214 2 70-74 72 0.231 3 75-79 77 0.216 4 80-84 82 0.161 5 85-89 87 0.104 6 90-94 92 0.052 7 95-99 97 0.018 8 100-104 102 0.004 4.1.3.2 Unit Alternates Between High (k=2) and Low (k=1) Compressor Capacity to Satisfy the Building Cooling Load at Temperature T j c k=1 j j c k=2 j X k=2 j k=1 j Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n j c k=1 j c k=1 j c k=2 j c k=2 j 4.1.3.3 Unit Only Operates at High (k=2) Compressor Capacity at Temperature T j j c k=2 j where: X k=2 j j c k=2 j PLF j C D c X k=2 j 4.1.3.4 Unit Must Operate Continuously at High (k=2) Compressor Capacity at Temperature T j j c k=2 j Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n j c k=2 j c k=2 j 4.1.4 SEER Calculations for an Air Conditioner or Heat Pump Having a Variable-Speed Compressor Calculate SEER using Equation 4.1-1. Evaluate the space cooling capacity, Q c k=1 j c k=1 j j. where Q c k=1 c k=1 1 c k=1 c k=1 Evaluate the space cooling capacity, Q c k=2 j c k=2 j j. c k=2 c k=2 2 c k=2 c k=2 2 c k=v j c k=v j j V where Q c k=v c k=v V Q E Use Equations 4.1.4-1 and 4.1.4-2, respectively, to calculate Q c k=1 c k=1 4.1.4.1 Steady-State Space Cooling Capacity When Operating at Minimum Compressor Speed Is Greater Than or Equal to the Building Cooling Load at Temperature T j c k=1 j j where: X k=1 j j c k=1 j PLF j D c k=1 j n j j Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n j c k=l j c k=l j D c 4.1.4.2 Unit Operates at an Intermediate Compressor Speed (k=i) In Order To Match the Building Cooling Load at Temperature T j c k=1 j j c k=2 j Where: Q c k=i j j j EER k=i j j Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n j k=i j EER k=i T j = A + B T j + C * T 2 j For each unit, determine the coefficients A, B, and C by conducting the following calculations once: Where: T 1 c k=l l 1 1 T v v c k=v v v v T 2 c k=2 2 2 2 4.1.4.3 Unit Must Operate Continuously at Full (k=2) Compressor Speed at Temperature Tj, BL(T j c k=2 j as specified in section 4.1.3.4 of this appendix with the understanding that Q c k=2 j c k=2 j 4.1.5 SEER Calculations for an Air Conditioner or Heat Pump Having a Single Indoor Unit With Multiple Indoor Blowers Calculate SEER using Eq. 4.1-1, where q c c 4.1.5.1 For Multiple Indoor Blower Systems That Are Connected to a Single, Single-Speed Outdoor Unit a. Calculate the space cooling capacity, Q c k =1 T j E c k =1 T j j Q c k =2 T j E c k =2 T j j Q c k =1 E c k =1 Q c k =1 E c k =1 Q c k =2 E c k =2 Q c k =2 E c k =2 b. Determine the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient, CD c c c. Except for using the above values of Q c k =1 T j E c k =1 T j E c k =2 T j Q c k =2 T j c c c j c j Q c k =1 T j j j c c Q c k =2 T j j Q c k =2 T j j 4.1.5.2 Unit Operates at an Intermediate Compressor Speed (k=i) In Order To Match the Building Cooling Load at Temperature T j c k=1 j j c k=2 j where, Q c k=i j j j EER k=i j j Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, n j k=i j For each temperature bin where Q c k=1 j j c k=v j For each temperature bin where Q c k=v j j c k=2 j Where: EER k=1 j c k=1 j c k=1 j EER k =v j c k=v j c k=v j EER k=2 j c k=2 j c k=2 j BL(T j j 4.2 Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF) Calculations Unless an approved alternative efficiency determination method is used, as set forth in 10 CFR 429.70(e), HSPF must be calculated as follows: Six generalized climatic regions are depicted in Figure 1 and otherwise defined in Table 20. For each of these regions and for each applicable standardized design heating requirement, evaluate the heating seasonal performance factor using, where: e2(T j j RH(T j j h j T j n j j j j = the bin number, dimensionless. J = for each generalized climatic region, the total number of temperature bins, dimensionless. Referring to Table 20, J is the highest bin number (j) having a nonzero entry for the fractional bin hours for the generalized climatic region of interest. F def BL(T j j Table 20—Generalized Climatic Region Information Region No. I II III IV V VI Heating Load Hours, HLH 750 1,250 1,750 2,250 2,750 *2,750 Outdoor Design Temperature, T OD 37 27 17 5 −10 30 j T j Fractional Bin Hours, n j 1 62 .291 .215 .153 .132 .106 .113 2 57 .239 .189 .142 .111 .092 .206 3 52 .194 .163 .138 .103 .086 .215 4 47 .129 .143 .137 .093 .076 .204 5 42 .081 .112 .135 .100 .078 .141 6 37 .041 .088 .118 .109 .087 .076 7 32 .019 .056 .092 .126 .102 .034 8 27 .005 .024 .047 .087 .094 .008 9 22 .001 .008 .021 .055 .074 .003 10 17 0 .002 .009 .036 .055 0 11 12 0 0 .005 .026 .047 0 12 7 0 0 .002 .013 .038 0 13 2 0 0 .001 .006 .029 0 14 −3 0 0 0 .002 .018 0 15 −8 0 0 0 .001 .010 0 16 −13 0 0 0 0 .005 0 17 −18 0 0 0 0 .002 0 18 −23 0 0 0 0 .001 0 * Pacific Coast Region. Evaluate the building heating load using Where: T OD C = 0.77, a correction factor which tends to improve the agreement between calculated and measured building loads, dimensionless. DHR = the design heating requirement (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions), Btu/h. Calculate the minimum and maximum design heating requirements for each generalized climatic region as follows: where Q h k a. For a single-speed heat pump tested as per section 3.6.1 of this appendix,

Q h k h b. For a section 3.6.2 single-speed heat pump or a two-capacity heat pump not covered by item d,

Q h k h k=2 2 c. For a variable-speed heat pump,

Q h k h k=N N d. For two-capacity, northern heat pumps (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions),

Q k h k=1 h 1 For all heat pumps, HSPF accounts for the heating delivered and the energy consumed by auxiliary resistive elements when operating below the balance point. This condition occurs when the building load exceeds the space heating capacity of the heat pump condenser. For HSPF calculations for all heat pumps, see either section 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, or 4.2.4 of this appendix, whichever applies. For heat pumps with heat comfort controllers (see section 1.2 of this appendix, Definitions), HSPF also accounts for resistive heating contributed when operating above the heat-pump-plus-comfort-controller balance point as a result of maintaining a minimum supply temperature. For heat pumps having a heat comfort controller, see section 4.2.5 of this appendix for the additional steps required for calculating the HSPF. Table 21—Standardized Design Heating Requirements [Btu/h] 5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 130,000 4.2.1 Additional Steps for Calculating the HSPF of a Blower Coil System Heat Pump Having a Single-Speed Compressor and Either a Fixed-Speed Indoor Blower or a Constant-Air-Volume-Rate Indoor Blower Installed, or a Coil-Only System Heat Pump Where: whichever is less; the heating mode load factor for temperature bin j, dimensionless. Q h j j E h j j δ(T j PLF j D h j Use Equation 4.2-2 to determine BL(T j j D h Determine the low temperature cut-out factor using Where: T off j off on T on Calculate Q h j h j where Q h h h h h h 4.2.2 Additional Steps for Calculating the HSPF of a Heat Pump Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Variable-Speed, Variable-Air-Volume-Rate Indoor Blower The manufacturer must provide information about how the indoor air volume rate or the indoor blower speed varies over the outdoor temperature range of 65 °F to −23 °F. Calculate the quantities in Equation 4.2-1 as specified in section 4.2.1 of this appendix with the exception of replacing references to the H1C test and section 3.6.1 of this appendix with the H1C 1 h j h j where the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption at both low capacity (k=1) and high capacity (k=2) at outdoor temperature Tj are determined using For units where indoor blower speed is the primary control variable, FP h k=1 1 1 h k=2 2 2 2 h j j. h h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=1 h k=1 h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=2 h k=2 2 4.2.3 Additional Steps for Calculating the HSPF of a Heat Pump Having a Two-Capacity Compressor The calculation of the Equation 4.2-1 to this appendix quantities differ depending upon whether the heat pump would operate at low capacity (section 4.2.3.1 of this appendix), cycle between low and high capacity (section 4.2.3.2 of this appendix), or operate at high capacity (sections 4.2.3.3 and 4.2.3.4 of this appendix) in responding to the building load. For heat pumps that lock out low capacity operation at low outdoor temperatures, the outdoor temperature at which the unit locks out must be that specified by the manufacturer in the certification report so that the appropriate equations can be selected. a. Evaluate the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption of the heat pump when operating at low compressor capacity and outdoor temperature T j b. Evaluate the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption (Q h k=2 j h k=2 j h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=1 h k=1 1 4.2.3.1 Steady-State Space Heating Capacity When Operating at Low Compressor Capacity is Greater Than or Equal to the Building Heating Load at Temperature T j h k=1 j j Where: X k=1 j j h k=1 j j, PLF j D h k=1 j δ′(T j Evaluate the heating mode cyclic degradation factor C D h Determine the low temperature cut-out factor using where T off on a. The heat pump locks out low capacity operation at low outdoor temperatures and b. T j 4.2.3.2 Heat Pump Alternates Between High (k=2) and Low (k=1) Compressor Capacity To Satisfy the Building Heating Load at a Temperature T j h k=1 j j h k=2 j X k=2 j k=1 j j Determine the low temperature cut-out factor, δ′(T j 4.2.3.3 Heat Pump Only Operates at High (k=2) Compressor Capacity at Temperature T j j h k=2 j This section applies to units that lock out low compressor capacity operation at low outdoor temperatures. Where: X k=2 T j BL T j Q h k=2 T j PLF j C h D k X k=2 T j If the H1C 2 D h Determine the low temperature cut-out factor, δ(T j 4.2.3.4 Heat Pump Must Operate Continuously at High (k=2) Compressor Capacity at Temperature T j j h k=2 j Where: 4.2.4 Additional Steps for Calculating the HSPF of a Heat Pump Having a Variable-Speed Compressor Calculate HSPF using Equation 4.2-1. Evaluate the space heating capacity, Q h k=1 j h k=1 j j where Q h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=1 h k=1 1 Evaluate the space heating capacity, Q h k=2 j h k=2 j j hcalc k=2 h k=2 hcalc k=2 hcalc k=2 hcalc k=2 hcalc k=2 where Q h k=v h k=v V Q E 4.2.4.1 Steady-State Space Heating Capacity When Operating at Minimum Compressor Speed Is Greater Than or Equal to the Building Heating Load at Temperature T j h k=1 j j Evaluate the Equation 4.2-1 quantities as specified in section 4.2.3.1 of this appendix. Except now use Equations 4.2.4-1 and 4.2.4-2 to evaluate Q h k=1 j h k=1 j 4.2.4.2 Heat Pump Operates at an Intermediate Compressor Speed (k=i) in Order To Match the Building Heating Load at a Temperature T j h k=1 j j h k=2 j and δ(T j Q h k=i j j j COP k=i j j For each temperature bin where the heat pump operates at an intermediate compressor speed, determine COP k=i j For each temperature bin where Q h k=1 j j h k=v j For each temperature bin where Q h k=v j j h k=2 j Where: COP h k=1 j h k=1 j h k=1 j COP h k=v j h k=v j h k=v j COP h k=2 j h k=2 j h k=2 j BL(T j j 4.2.4.3 Heat Pump Must Operate Continuously at Full (k=2) Compressor Speed at Temperature T j j h k=2 j Evaluate the Equation 4.2-1 Quantities as specified in section 4.2.3.4 of this appendix with the understanding that Q h k=2 j h k=2 j 4.2.5 Heat Pumps Having a Heat Comfort Controller Heat pumps having heat comfort controllers, when set to maintain a typical minimum air delivery temperature, will cause the heat pump condenser to operate less because of a greater contribution from the resistive elements. With a conventional heat pump, resistive heating is only initiated if the heat pump condenser cannot meet the building load ( i.e., i.e., i.e., 4.2.5.1 Blower Coil System Heat Pump Having a Heat Comfort Controller: Additional Steps for Calculating the HSPF of a Heat Pump Having a Single-Speed Compressor and Either a Fixed-Speed Indoor Blower or a Constant-Air-Volume-Rate Indoor Blower Installed, or a Coil-Only System Heat Pump Calculate the space heating capacity and electrical power of the heat pump without the heat comfort controller being active as specified in section 4.2.1 of this appendix (Equations 4.2.1-4 and 4.2.1-5) for each outdoor bin temperature, T j da where V s mx n n n Evaluate e h j j j j j Case 1. For outdoor bin temperatures where T o j CC h j h j i.e., h j hp j h j hp j Note: o j cc Case 2. For outdoor bin temperatures where T o j CC h j h j Note: Even though T o j cc 4.2.5.2 Heat Pump Having a Heat Comfort Controller: Additional Steps for Calculating the HSPF of a Heat Pump Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Variable-Speed, Variable-Air-Volume-Rate Indoor Blower Calculate the space heating capacity and electrical power of the heat pump without the heat comfort controller being active as specified in section 4.2.2 of this appendix (Equations 4.2.2-1 and 4.2.2-2) for each outdoor bin temperature, T j da 2 where V S mx n n n Evaluate e h j j j j j 1 Case 1. For outdoor bin temperatures where T o j CC h j h j i.e. h j hp j h j hp j o j CC, Case 2. For outdoor bin temperatures where T o j CC h j h j Note: Even though T o j cc 4.2.5.3 Heat Pumps Having a Heat Comfort Controller: Additional Steps for Calculating the HSPF of a Heat Pump Having a Two-Capacity Compressor Calculate the space heating capacity and electrical power of the heat pump without the heat comfort controller being active as specified in section 4.2.3 of this appendix for both high and low capacity and at each outdoor bin temperature, T j da 1 where V s mx n n n Repeat the above calculations to determine the mass flow rate (m da k=2 p,da k=2 2 Evaluate e h j j k=1 j k=2 j j j j Case 1. For outdoor bin temperatures where T o k=1 j CC h k=1 j h k=1 j i.e., h k=1 j hp k=1 j h k=1 j hp k=1 j Note: Even though T o k=1 j CC j Case 2. For outdoor bin temperatures where T o k=1 j CC h k=1 j h k=1 j Note: Even though T o k=1 j cc j Case 3. For outdoor bin temperatures where T o k=2 j CC h k=2 j h k=2 j i.e., h k=2 j hp k=2 j h k=2 j hp k=2 j Note: Even though T o k=2 j CC j Case 4. For outdoor bin temperatures where T o k=2 j CC h k=2 j h k=2 j Note: Even though T o k=2 j cc j 4.2.5.4 Heat Pumps Having a Heat Comfort Controller: Additional Steps for Calculating the HSPF of a Heat Pump Having a Variable-Speed Compressor. [Reserved] 4.2.6 Additional Steps for Calculating the HSPF of a Heat Pump Having a Triple-Capacity Compressor The only triple-capacity heat pumps covered are triple-capacity, northern heat pumps. For such heat pumps, the calculation of the Eq. 4.2-1 quantities differ depending on whether the heat pump would cycle on and off at low capacity (section 4.2.6.1 of this appendix), cycle on and off at high capacity (section 4.2.6.2 of this appendix), cycle on and off at booster capacity (section 4.2.6.3 of this appendix), cycle between low and high capacity (section 4.2.6.4 of this appendix), cycle between high and booster capacity (section 4.2.6.5 of this appendix), operate continuously at low capacity (4.2.6.6 of this appendix), operate continuously at high capacity (section 4.2.6.7 of this appendix), operate continuously at booster capacity (section 4.2.6.8 of this appendix), or heat solely using resistive heating (also section 4.2.6.8 of this appendix) in responding to the building load. As applicable, the manufacturer must supply information regarding the outdoor temperature range at which each stage of compressor capacity is active. As an informative example, data may be submitted in this manner: At the low (k=1) compressor capacity, the outdoor temperature range of operation is 40 °F ≤ T ≤ 65 °F; At the high (k=2) compressor capacity, the outdoor temperature range of operation is 20 °F ≤ T ≤ 50 °F; At the booster (k=3) compressor capacity, the outdoor temperature range of operation is −20 °F ≤ T ≤ 30 °F. a. Evaluate the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption of the heat pump when operating at low compressor capacity and outdoor temperature Tj using the equations given in section 4.2.3 of this appendix for Q h k=1 j h k=1 j h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=2 h k=2 2 1 h k=1 h k=1 h k=1 h k=1 b. Evaluate the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption (Q h k=2 j h k=2 j h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=1 h k=1 1 h k=2 h k=2 2 h k=2 h k=2 2, h k=2 h k=2 2 c. Evaluate the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption of the heat pump when operating at booster compressor capacity and outdoor temperature Tj using Determine Q h k=3 h k=3 3 h k=3 h k=3 3 h k=3 h k=3 4.2.6.1 Steady-State Space Heating Capacity when Operating at Low Compressor Capacity is Greater than or Equal to the Building Heating Load at Temperature T j h k=1 j j j. Evaluate the quantities using Eqs. 4.2.3-1 and 4.2.3-2, respectively. Determine the equation inputs X k=1 j j j j D h D h 4.2.6.2 Heat Pump Only Operates at High (k=2) Compressor Capacity at Temperature T j j h k=2 j Evaluate the quantities as specified in section 4.2.3.3 of this appendix. Determine the equation inputs X k=2 j j j j D h 4.2.6.3 Heat Pump Only Operates at Booster (k=3) Compressor Capacity at Temperature T j j h k=3 j where: X k=3 T j BL T j Q h k=3 T j PLF j C D h k = 3 X k=3 T j Determine the low temperature cut-out factor, δ′(T j D h 4.2.6.4 Heat Pump Alternates Between High (k=2) and Low (k=1) Compressor Capacity to Satisfy the Building Heating Load at a Temperature T j h k=1 j j h k=2 j Evaluate the quantities as specified in section 4.2.3.2 of this appendix. Determine the equation inputs X k=1 j k=2 j j 4.2.6.5 Heat Pump Alternates Between High (k=2) and Booster (k=3) Compressor Capacity To Satisfy the Building Heating Load at a Temperature T j h k=2 j j h k=3 j and X k=3 j k=2 j j 4.2.6.6 Heat Pump Only Operates at Low (k=1) Capacity at Temperature T j j h k=1 j where the low temperature cut-out factor, δ′(Tj), is calculated using Eq. 4.2.3-3. 4.2.6.7 Heat Pump Only Operates at High (k=2) Capacity at Temperature Tj and Its Capacity Is Less Than the Building Heating Load, BL(Tj) > Q h k=2 j Evaluate the quantities as specified in section 4.2.3.4 of this appendix. Calculate δ″(Tj) using the equation given in section 4.2.3.4 of this appendix. 4.2.6.8 Heat Pump Only Operates at Booster (k=3) Capacity at Temperature Tj and Its Capacity Is Less Than the Building Heating Load, BL(T j h k=3 j where δ″(Tj) is calculated as specified in section 4.2.3.4 of this appendix if the heat pump is operating at its booster compressor capacity. If the heat pump system converts to using only resistive heating at outdoor temperature T j j 4.2.7 Additional Steps for Calculating the HSPF of a Heat Pump Having a Single Indoor Unit With Multiple Indoor Blowers The calculation of the Eq. 4.2-1 quantities e h j j 4.2.7.1 For Multiple Indoor Blower Heat Pumps That Are Connected to a Singular, Single-Speed Outdoor Unit a. Calculate the space heating capacity, Q h k =1 E h k =1 j Q h k =2 E h k =2 j Q h k =1 E h k =1 1 Q h k =2 E h k =2 2 Q h k =1 E h k =1 Q h k =2 E h k =2 2 Q h k =1 E h k =1 1 Q h k =2 E h k =2 2 b. Determine the heating mode cyclic degradation coefficient, CD h h c. Except for using the above values of Q h k =1 E h k =1 Q h k =2 E h k =2 h h h j Q h k =1 j j h h Q h k =2 Q h k =2 j 4.2.7.2 For Multiple Indoor Blower Heat Pumps Connected to Either a Single Outdoor Unit With a Two-capacity Compressor or to Two Separate Single-Speed Outdoor Units of Identical Model, calculate the quantities e h j j 4.3 Calculations of Off-mode Power Consumption For central air conditioners and heat pumps with a cooling capacity of: Less than 36,000 Btu/h, determine the off mode represented value, P W,OFF greater than or equal to 36,000 Btu/h, calculate the capacity scaling factor according to: where Q C 2 P W,OFF 4.4 Rounding of SEER and HSPF for Reporting Purposes After calculating SEER according to section 4.1 of this appendix and HSPF according to section 4.2 of this appendix round the values off as specified per § 430.23(m) of title 10 of the Code of Federal Regulations. Table 22—Representative Cooling and Heating Load Hours for Each Generalized Climatic Region Climatic region Cooling load hours R Heating load hours R I 2,400 750 II 1,800 1,250 III 1,200 1,750 IV 800 2,250 Rating Values 1,000 2,080 V 400 2,750 VI 200 2,750 4.5 Calculations of the SHR, Which Should Be Computed for Different Equipment Configurations and Test Conditions Specified in Table 23 Table 23—Applicable Test Conditions For Calculation of the Sensible Heat Ratio Equipment configuration Reference SHR computation with results Computed values Units Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Fixed-Speed Indoor blower, a Constant Air Volume Rate Indoor blower, or No Indoor blower 4 B Test SHR(B). Units Having a Single-Speed Compressor That Meet the section 3.2.2.1 Indoor Unit Requirements 5 B2 and B1 Tests SHR(B1), SHR(B2). Units Having a Two-Capacity Compressor 6 B2 and B1 Tests SHR(B1), SHR(B2). Units Having a Variable-Speed Compressor 7 B2 and B1 Tests SHR(B1), SHR(B2). The SHR is defined and calculated as follows: Where both the total and sensible cooling capacities are determined from the same cooling mode test and calculated from data collected over the same 30-minute data collection interval. 4.6 Calculations of the Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER). Calculate the energy efficiency ratio using. where Q c k T E c k T e.g., EER A 2 [82 FR 1476, Jan. 5, 2017, as amended at 86 FR 68393, Dec. 2, 2021; 87 FR 64586, Oct. 25, 2022] Appendix M1 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Central Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps Note: Prior to July 7, 2025, representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of central air conditioners and heat pumps, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with: (a) Appendix M1 to this subpart, in the 10 CFR parts 200 through 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2023; or (b) This appendix M1. Beginning July 7, 2025, and prior to the compliance date of amended standards for central air conditioners and heat pumps based on Seasonal Cooling and Off-mode Rating Efficiency (SCORE) and Seasonal Heating and Off-mode Rating Efficiency (SHORE), representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of central air conditioners and heat pumps, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. Beginning on the compliance date of amended standards for central air conditioners and heat pumps based on SCORE and SHORE, representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of central air conditioners and heat pumps, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with appendix M2 to this subpart. Manufacturers may also certify compliance with any amended energy conservation standards for central air conditioners and heat pumps based on SCORE or SHORE prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards, and those compliance certifications must be based on testing in accordance with appendix M2 to this subpart. 1. Incorporation by Reference In § 430.3, DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for AHRI 210/240-2024, ANSI/ASHRAE 16, ASHRAE 37-2009 and ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010. However, certain enumerated provisions of AHRI 210/240-2024, ANSI/ASHRAE 16, ASHRAE 37-2009 and ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010, as set forth in sections 1.1 through 1.4 of this appendix, are inapplicable. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1. AHRI 210/240-2024 (a) Section 1 Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2 Scope is inapplicable, (c) The following subsections of Section 3 Definitions are inapplicable: 3.2.16 (Double-duct system), 3.2.20 (Gross capacity), 3.2.46 (Oil Recovery Mode), 3.2.51 (Published Rating), 3.2.63 (Standard Filter), 3.2.78 (Unitary Air-conditioner), 3.2.79 (Unitary Heat Pump), (d) Section 4 Classifications is inapplicable, (e) The following subsection of Section 5 Test Requirements is inapplicable: 5.1.6.2 (Outdoor Unit with No Match (OUWNM)), (f) The following subsections of Section 6 Rating Requirements are inapplicable: 6.1.8, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4 and 6.5 (g) Section 7 Minimum Data Requirements for Published Ratings is inapplicable, (h) Section 8 Operating Requirements is inapplicable, (i) Section 9 Marking and Nameplate Data is inapplicable, (j) Section 10 Conformance Conditions is inapplicable, (k) Appendix A References—Normative is inapplicable, (l) Appendix B References—Informative is inapplicable, (m) Appendix C Secondary Capacity Check Requirements—Normative is inapplicable, (n) Appendix F Unit Configurations for Standard Efficiency Determination—Normative is inapplicable, (o) Appendix H Verification Testing—Normative is inapplicable, (p) Appendix I Controls Verification Procedure—Normative is inapplicable, and (q) Appendix J Determination of Cut in and Cut out temperatures—Normative is inapplicable. 1.2. ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (a) Section 1—Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2—Scope is inapplicable, and (c) Section 4—Classification is inapplicable. 1.3. ANSI/ASHRAE 16-2016 (a) Section 1—Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2—Scope is inapplicable, and (c) Section 4—Classification is inapplicable. 1.4. ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010 (a) Section 1—Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2—Scope is inapplicable, (c) Section 4—Classification is inapplicable, (d) Section 7—Methods of Test is inapplicable, (e) References is inapplicable, (f) Appendix A—Example Bin Calculations is inapplicable, and (g) Appendix B—Bibliography is inapplicable. 2. General Determine the cooling capacity, heating capacity, and applicable energy efficiency metrics (SEER2, HSPF2, and EER2) in accordance with the specified sections of AHRI 210/240-2024 and the applicable provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE 16, ASHRAE 37-2009, and ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010. The A Full Full Nom Full Full Low Low Low Low Sections 3, 4, and 5 of this appendix provide additional instructions for testing. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes highest precedence, followed, in order, by: AHRI 210/240-2024, ASHRAE 37-2009, ANSI/ASHRAE 16 and ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010. Any subsequent amendment to a referenced document by the standard-setting organization will not affect the test procedure in this appendix, unless and until the test procedure is amended by DOE. Material is incorporated as it exists on the date of the approval, and a notice of any change in the incorporation will be published in the Federal Register 3. Off-Mode Power Determine off-mode power, P W, OFF 4. Outdoor Units With No Match (OUWNM) 4.1. Definition. An Outdoor Unit that is not distributed in commerce with any indoor units, that meets any of the following criteria: (a) Is designed for use with a refrigerant that makes the unit banned for installation when paired with a new Indoor Unit to create a new system, according to EPA regulations in 40 CFR chapter I, subchapter C, (b) Is designed for use with a refrigerant that has a 95 °F midpoint saturation absolute pressure that is ±18 percent of the 95 °F saturation absolute pressure for R-22 and global warming potential greater than 150 per EPA regulations in 40 CFR 84.64, or (c) Is shipped without a specified refrigerant from the point of manufacture or is shipped such that more than two pounds of refrigerant are required to meet the charge per section 5.1.8 of AHRI 210/240-2024. This shall not apply if either: (1) The factory charge is equal to or greater than 70% of the outdoor unit internal volume times the liquid density of refrigerant at 95 °F, or (2) An A2L refrigerant is approved for use and listed in the certification report. 4.2. Testing. c h 5. Test Conditions 5.1. Test Conditions for Certifying Compliance with Standards. (a) For cooling mode, use the rating conditions specified in table 8 of AHRI 210/240-2024 and the fractional cooling bin hours in table 15 of AHRI 210/240-2024 to determine SEER2, and EER2 for models subject to regional standards in terms of EER2. (b) For heat pump heating mode, use the rating conditions specified in table 8 of AHRI 210/240-2024 and the fractional heating bin hours specified for Region IV in table 16 of AHRI 210/240-2024 to determine the heating efficiency metric, HSPF2. 5.2. Optional Representations. peak [90 FR 1283, Jan. 7, 2025] Appendix M2 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Central Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps Note: Prior to July 7, 2025, representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of central air conditioners and heat pumps, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with: (a) Appendix M1 to this subpart, in the 10 CFR parts 200 through 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2023; or (b) Appendix M1 to this subpart. Beginning July 7, 2025, and prior to the compliance date of amended standards for central air conditioners and heat pumps based on Seasonal Cooling and Off-mode Rating Efficiency (SCORE) and Seasonal Heating and Off-mode Rating Efficiency (SHORE), representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of central air conditioners and heat pumps, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with appendix M1 to this subpart. Beginning on the compliance date of amended standards for central air conditioners and heat pumps based on SCORE and SHORE, representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of central air conditioners and heat pumps, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. Manufacturers may also certify compliance with any amended energy conservation standards for central air conditioners and heat pumps based on SCORE or SHORE prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards, and those compliance certifications must be based on testing in accordance with this appendix. 1. Incorporation by Reference In § 430.3, DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for AHRI 1600-2024, ANSI/ASHRAE 16, ASHRAE 37-2009, and ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010. However, certain enumerated provisions of AHRI 1600-2024, ANSI/ASHRAE 16, ASHRAE 37-2009, and ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010, as set forth in sections 1.1 through 1.4 of this appendix, are inapplicable. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 1.1. AHRI 1600-2024 (a) Section 1 Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2 Scope is inapplicable, (c) The following sections of Section 3 Definitions are inapplicable: 3.2.16 (Double-duct system), 3.2.20 (Gross capacity), 3.2.45 (Oil Recovery Mode), 3.2.50 (Published Rating), 3.2.63 (Standard Filter), 3.2.78 (Unitary Air-conditioner), 3.2.79 (Unitary Heat Pump), (d) Section 4 Classifications is inapplicable, (e) The following subsection of Section 5 Test Requirements is inapplicable: 5.1.6.2 (Outdoor Unit with No Match (OUWNM)), (f) The following subsections of Section 6 Rating Requirements are inapplicable: 6.1.8, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4 and 6.5 (g) Section 7 Minimum Data Requirements for Published Ratings is inapplicable, (h) Section 8 Operating Requirements is inapplicable, (i) Section 9 Marking and Nameplate Data is inapplicable, (j) Section 10 Conformance Conditions is inapplicable, (k) Appendix A References—Normative is inapplicable, (l) Appendix B References—Informative is inapplicable, (m) Appendix C Secondary Capacity Check Requirements—Normative is inapplicable, (n) Appendix F Unit Configurations for Standard Efficiency Determination—Normative is inapplicable, (o) Appendix H Verification Testing—Normative is inapplicable, (p) Appendix I Controls Verification Procedure—Normative is inapplicable, and (q) Appendix J Determination of Cut in and Cut out temperatures—Normative is inapplicable. 1.2. ANSI/ASHRAE 37-2009 (a) Section 1—Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2—Scope is inapplicable, and (c) Section 4—Classification is inapplicable. 1.3. ANSI/ASHRAE 16-2016 (a) Section 1—Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2—Scope is inapplicable, and (c) Section 4—Classification is inapplicable. 1.4. ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010 (a) Section 1—Purpose is inapplicable, (b) Section 2—Scope is inapplicable, (c) Section 4—Classification is inapplicable, (d) Section 7—Methods of Test is inapplicable, (e) References is inapplicable, (f) Appendix A—Example Bin Calculations is inapplicable, and (g) Appendix B—Bibliography is inapplicable. 2. General Determine the applicable energy efficiency metrics (SCORE, SHORE, and EER) in accordance with the specified sections of AHRI 1600-2024 and the applicable provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE 16, ASHRAE 37-2009, and ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010. The A Full Full Nom Full Full Low Low Low Low Sections 3 and 4 of this appendix provide additional instructions for testing. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes highest precedence, followed, in order, by: AHRI 1600-2024, ASHRAE 37-2009, ANSI/ASHRAE 16, and ANSI/ASHRAE 116-2010. Any subsequent amendment to a referenced document by the standard-setting organization will not affect the test procedure in this appendix, unless and until the test procedure is amended by DOE. Material is incorporated as it exists on the date of the approval, and a notice of any change in the incorporation will be published in the Federal Register 3. Outdoor Units With No Match (OUWNM) 3.1. Definition. (a) Is designed for use with a refrigerant that makes the unit banned for installation when paired with a new Indoor Unit as a system, according to EPA regulations in 40 CFR chapter I, subchapter C, (b) Is designed for use with a refrigerant that has a 95 °F midpoint saturation absolute pressure that is ±18 percent of the 95 °F saturation absolute pressure for R-22 and a global warming potential greater than 150 per EPA regulations in 40 CFR 84.64, or (c) Is shipped without a specified refrigerant from the point of manufacture or is shipped such that more than two pounds of refrigerant are required to meet the charge per section 5.1.8 of AHRI 1600-2024. This shall not apply if either: (1) The factory charge is equal to or greater than 70% of the outdoor unit internal volume times the liquid density of refrigerant at 95 °F or, (2) An A2L refrigerant is approved for use and listed in the certification report 3.2. Testing. c h 4. Test Conditions 4.1. Test Conditions for Certifying Compliance with Standards. (a) For cooling mode, use the rating conditions specified in table 8 of AHRI 1600-2024 and the `U.S. National Average' cooling conditioning hours and shoulder season hours in table 15 of AHRI 1600-2024, to determine SCORE, and EER for models subject to regional standards in terms of EER. (b) For heat pump heating mode, use the rating conditions specified in table 8 of AHRI 1600-2024 and the `U.S. National Average' heating conditioning hours and shoulder season hours specified in table 18 of AHRI 1600-2024 to determine the heating efficiency metric, SHORE. 4.2. Optional Representations. peak [90 FR 1284, Jan. 7, 2025] Appendix N to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Consumer Furnaces Other Than Boilers 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire standards for ASTM D2156R13 and IEC 62301. DOE also incorporated selected provisions of ASHRAE 103-1993. 1. Scope. 2. Definitions. Active mode Control Draft inducer Gas valve Installation and operation (I&O) manual Isolated combustion system Multi-position furnace i.e., Off mode Off switch Oil control valve Standby mode (a) Activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including thermostat or remote control), internal or external sensors, and/or timer; and (b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays or sensor-based functions. Thermal stack damper 3. Classifications. 4. Requirements. 5. Instruments. 6. Apparatus. 6.1 General. (a) Install the furnace in the test room in accordance with the I&O manual, as defined in section 2.6 of this appendix, except that if provisions within this appendix are specified, then the provisions herein drafted and prescribed by DOE govern. If the I&O manual and any additional provisions of this appendix are not sufficient for testing a furnace, the manufacturer must request a waiver from the test procedure pursuant to § 430.27. (b) If the I&O manual indicates the unit should not be installed with a return duct, then the return (inlet) duct specified in section 7.2.1 of ASHRAE 103-1993 is not required. (c) Test multi-position furnaces in the least efficient configuration. Testing of multi-position furnaces in other configurations is permitted if energy use or efficiency is represented pursuant to the requirements in 10 CFR part 429. (d) The apparatuses described in section 6 of this appendix are used in conjunction with the furnace during testing. Each piece of apparatus shall conform to material and construction specifications listed in this appendix and in ASHRAE 103-1993, and the reference standards cited in this appendix and in ASHRAE 103-1993. (e) Test rooms containing equipment must have suitable facilities for providing the utilities (including but not limited to environmental controls, applicable measurement equipment, and any other technology or tools) necessary for performance of the test and must be able to maintain conditions within the limits specified in section 6 of this appendix. 6.2 Forced-air central furnaces (direct vent and direct exhaust). (a) Units not equipped with a draft hood or draft diverter must be provided with the minimum-length vent configuration recommended in the I&O manual or a 5-ft flue pipe if there is no recommendation provided in the I&O manual ( see see (b) For units with power burners, cover the flue collection box with insulation having an R-value of not less than 7 and an outer layer of aluminum foil before the cool-down and heat-up tests described in sections 9.5 and 9.6 of ASHRAE 103-1993, respectively. However, do not apply the insulation for the jacket loss test (if conducted) described in section 8.6 of ASHRAE 103-1993 or the steady-state test described in section 9.1 of ASHRAE 103-1993. (c) For power-vented units, insulate the shroud surrounding the blower impeller with insulation having an R-value of not less than 7 and an outer layer of aluminum foil before the cool-down and heat-up tests described in sections 9.5 and 9.6, respectively, of ASHRAE 103-1993. However, do not apply the insulation for the jacket loss test (if conducted) described in section 8.6 of ASHRAE 103-1993 or the steady-state test described in section 9.1 of ASHRAE 103-1993. Do not insulate the blower motor or block the airflow openings that facilitate the cooling of the combustion blower motor or bearings. 6.3 Downflow furnaces. See 6.4 Units with draft hoods or draft diverters. (a) For units with an integral draft diverter, cover the 5-ft stack with insulation having an R-value of not less than 7 and an outer layer of aluminum foil. (b) For units with draft hoods, insulate the flue pipe between the outlet of the furnace and the draft hood with insulation having an R-value of not less than 7 and an outer layer of aluminum foil. (c) For units with integral draft diverters that are mounted in an exposed position (not inside the overall unit cabinet), cover the diverter boxes (excluding any openings through which draft relief air flows) before the beginning of any test (including jacket loss test) with insulation having an R-value of not less than 7 and an outer layer of aluminum foil. (d) For units equipped with integral draft diverters that are enclosed within the overall unit cabinet, insulate the draft diverter box with insulation as described in section 6.4.c before the cool-down and heat-up tests described in sections 9.5 and 9.6, respectively, of ASHRAE 103-1993. However, do not apply the insulation for the jacket loss test (if conducted) described in section 8.6 of ASHRAE 103-1993 or the steady-state test described in section 9.1 of ASHRAE 103-1993. 6.5 Condensate collection. 7. Testing conditions. 7.1 Fuel supply, gas. 7.2 Gas burner. see 7.3 Modulating gas burner adjustment at reduced input rate. 7.4 Oil burner. 2 7.5 Temperature Rise Targets. (a) 15 °F less than the nameplate maximum temperature rise or (b) 15 °F higher than the minimum temperature rise specified in the I&O manual. (c) A furnace with a non-adjustable air temperature rise range and an automatically controlled airflow that does not permit a temperature rise range of 30 °F or more must be tested at the midpoint of the rise range. 7.6 Temperature Rise Adjustments. (a) If the resultant temperature rise is less than the required temperature rise, vary the blower speed by gradually adjusting the blower voltage so as to maintain the minimum external static pressure listed in Table 4 of ASHRAE 103-1993. The airflow restrictions shall then remain unchanged. If static pressure must be varied to prevent unstable blower operation, then increase the static pressure until blower operation is stabilized, except that the static pressure must not exceed the maximum external static pressure as specified by the manufacturer in the I&O manual. (b) If the resultant temperature rise is greater than the required temperature rise, then the unit can be tested at a higher temperature rise value, but one not greater than nameplate maximum temperature rise. In order not to exceed the maximum temperature rise, the speed of a direct-driven blower may be increased by increasing the circulating air blower motor voltage. 7.7 Measurement of jacket surface temperature. See 7.8 Installation of vent system. 7.9 Additional optional method of testing for determining D P and D F for furnaces. F P 7.9.1 Optional test method for indicating the absence of flow through the heat exchanger. 7.9.1.1 Test apparatus. 7.9.1.2 Test conditions. 7.9.1.3 Location of the test apparatus. (a) For horizontal combustion air intakes, approximately 4 inches from the vertical plane at the termination of the intake vent and 4 inches below the bottom edge of the combustion air intake; or (b) for vertical combustion air intakes, approximately 4 inches horizontal from vent perimeter at the termination of the intake vent and 4 inches down (parallel to the vertical axis of the vent). 7.9.1.4 Duration of test. 7.9.1.5 Test results. (a) If absolutely no smoke is drawn into the combustion air intake, the furnace meets the requirements to allow use of the minimum default draft factor pursuant to section 7.9 of this appendix. (b) If there is any smoke drawn into the intake, proceed with the methods of testing as prescribed in section 8.8 of ASHRAE 103-1993. 8. Test procedure. 8.1 Fuel input. 8.2 Electrical input. During the steady-state test, perform a single measurement of the electrical power to the circulating air blower (BE). 8.3 Input to interrupted ignition device. IG IG IG IG IG 8.4 Optional test procedures for condensing furnaces, measurement of condensate during the establishment of steady-state conditions. 8.5 Cool-down test for gas- and oil-fueled gravity and forced-air central furnaces without stack dampers. F,OFF 3 F,OFF 4 For furnaces that employ post-purge, measure the length of the post-purge period with a stopwatch. Record the time from burner “OFF” to combustion blower “OFF” (electrically de-energized) as t P P P P P P F,OFF P P F,OFF 3 P F,OFF 4 8.6 Cool-down test for gas- and oil-fueled gravity and forced-air central furnaces without stack dampers and with adjustable fan control. + + + 8.7 [Reserved] 8.8 Calculation options. P F S F P 8.9 Optional test procedures for condensing furnaces that have no off-period flue losses. HS 8.10 Measurement of electrical standby and off mode power. 8.10.1 Standby power measurement. W,SB Room Ambient Temperature, Electrical Supply, Test room, Power supply. Power measurement instruments, Measurements, Energy Flow Rate. W,SB 8.10.2 Off mode power measurement. W OFF Room Ambient Temperature, Electrical Supply, Test room, Power supply. Power measurement instruments, Measurements, Energy Flow Rate. W,OFF W,SB W,OFF 9. Nomenclature. Eff motor PE IG R T,a T,F = R T,S R T,F R T,S t IG T a,SS,X F,SS,X = T S,SS,X y IG y P E SO P W,OFF P W,SB 10. Calculation of derived results from test measurements. 10.1 Annual fuel utilization efficiency. HS HS Effy HS HS 10.2 Part-load efficiency at reduced fuel input rate. Effy U,R, Where: L L,A L G L C L J t ON Q P Q IN t OFF L S,ON L S,OFF L I,ON L I,OFF C J = 0.0 for furnaces intended to be installed indoors = 1.7 for furnaces intended to be installed as isolated combustion systems = 3.3 for furnaces intended to be installed outdoors L S,SS C S 10.3 Part-Load Efficiency at Maximum Fuel Input Rate. U,H Where: L L,A L G L C L J t ON Q P Q IN t OFF L S,ON L S,OFF L I,ON L I,OFF C J L S,SS C S 10.4 National average burner operating hours, average annual fuel energy consumption, and average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil furnaces. 10.4.1 National average number of burner operating hours. BOH SS Where: 2,080 = national average heating load hours 0.77 = adjustment factor to adjust the calculated design heating requirement and heating load hours to the actual heating load experienced by the heating system A = 100,000/[341,200 (y P IG IG IN P HS = 100,000/[341,200 (y P motor IG IG IN P HS = 100,000/[341,200 (y P motor IG IG IN P HS = 100,000/[341,200 (y IG IG IN P HS DHR = typical design heating requirements as listed in Table 8 (in kBtu/h) of ASHRAE 103-1993, using the proper value of Q OUT B = 2 Q P HS Where: Eff motor = 0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if not provided by the manufacturer. 100,000 = factor that accounts for percent and kBtu y P 1 for units without post-purge; 1 + (t P 1 + (t P PE = all electrical power related to burner operation at full load steady-state operation, including electrical ignition device if energized, controls, gas valve or oil control valve, and draft inducer, as determined in section 8.2 of this appendix. y IG 0 for burners not equipped with interrupted ignition device; (t IG (t IG PE IG y = ratio of blower on-time to average burner on-time, as follows: 1 for furnaces without fan delay; 1 + (t + − 1 + (t + − BE = circulating air fan electrical energy input rate at full-load steady-state operation as defined in section 8.2 of this appendix. t P = 0 if t P t IG Q IN Q P Effy HS isolated combustion system installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces; or outdoor installation, for furnaces that are weatherized. 2 = ratio of the average length of the heating season in hours to the average heating load hours t + t − 10.4.1.1 For furnaces equipped with two stage or step modulating controls the average annual energy used during the heating season, E M E M IN P SS P Where: Q IN Q P BOH SS HS OUT P IG IG R = 2.3 for two stage controls = 2.3 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum output is greater than or equal to 0.5 = 3.0 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum output is less than 0.5 A = 100,000/[341,200 (y P IG IG IN P HS = 100,000/[341,200 (y P motor IG IG IN P HS = 100,000/[341,200 (y P motor IG IG IN P HS = 100,000/[341,200 (y IG IG IN P HS Where: Eff motor = 0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if not provided by the manufacturer. Effy HS isolated combustion system installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces; or outdoor installation, for furnaces that are weatherized. 8,760 = total number of hours per year 4,600 = as defined in section 11.4.12 of ASHRAE 103-1993 10.4.1.2 For furnaces equipped with two-stage or step-modulating controls, the national average number of burner operating hours at the reduced operating mode (BOH R BOH R R M IN,R Where: X R E M Q IN,R 10.4.1.3 For furnaces equipped with two-stage controls, the national average number of burner operating hours at the maximum operating mode (BOH H BOH H H M IN Where: X H E M Q IN 10.4.1.4 For furnaces equipped with step-modulating controls, the national average number of burner operating hours at the modulating operating mode (BOH M BOH M H M IN,M Where: X H E M Q IN,M OUT,M SS,M Q OUT,M Effy SS,M 100 = factor that accounts for percent 10.4.2 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil fueled furnaces. F E F SS IN P P Where: BOH SS Q IN Q P 8,760 = as defined in section 10.4.1.1 of this appendix 10.4.2.1 For furnaces equipped with either two-stage or step modulating controls, E F E F M P Where: E M 4,600 = as defined in section 11.4.12 of ASHRAE 103-1993 Q P 10.4.2.2 [Reserved] 10.4.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled furnaces. AE E AE SS P IG IG SO Where: BOH SS y P PE = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix y IG PE IG y = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix BE = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix E SO 10.4.3.1 For furnaces equipped with two-stage controls, E AE E AE R P R IG IG R H P H IG IG H SO Where: BOH R y P PE R y IG PE IG y = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix BE R BOH H PE H BE H E SO 10.4.3.2 For furnaces equipped with step-modulating controls, E AE E AE R P R IG IG R M P H IG IG H SO Where: BOH R y P PE R y IG PE IG y = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix BE R BOH M PE H BE H E SO 10.5 Average annual electric energy consumption for electric furnaces. E E E SO Where: 100 = to express a percent as a decimal 2,080 = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix 0.77 = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix DHR = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix 3.412 = conversion factor from watt-hours to Btu AFUE = as defined in section 11.1 of ASHRAE 103-1993, in percent, and calculated on the basis of: isolated combustion system installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces; or outdoor installation, for furnaces that are weatherized. E SO 10.6 Energy factor. 10.6.1 Energy factor for gas or oil furnaces. EF = (E F P HS F AE Where: E F 4,600 = as defined in section 11.4.12 of ASHRAE 103-1993 Q P Effy HS isolated combustion system installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces; or outdoor installation, for furnaces that are weatherized. 3,412 = conversion factor from kW to Btu/h E AE 10.6.2 Energy factor for electric furnaces. EF = AFUE Where: AFUE = annual fuel utilization efficiency as defined in section 10.4.3 of this appendix, in percent 10.7 Average annual energy consumption for furnaces located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. 10.7.1 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled furnaces located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. FR E FR F P P Where: E F 8,760 = as defined in section 10.4.1.1 of this appendix Q P HLH = heating load hours for a specific geographic region determined from the heating load hour map in Figure 1 of this appendix 2,080 = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix 10.7.2 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled furnaces located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. AER E AER AE SO SOR Where: E AE E SO HLH = as defined in section 10.7.1 of this appendix 2,080 = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix E SOR 10.7.3 Average annual electric energy consumption for electric furnaces located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. ER E ER SOR Where: 100 = as defined in section 10.4.3 of this appendix 0.77 = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix DHR = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix HLH = as defined in section 10.7.1 of this appendix 3.412 = as defined in section 10.4.3 of this appendix AFUE = as defined in section 10.4.3 of this appendix E SOR SO SO 10.8 Annual energy consumption for mobile home furnaces 10.8.1 National average number of burner operating hours for mobile home furnaces (BOH SS ). SS HS SS 10.8.2 Average annual fuel energy for mobile home furnaces (E F ). F SS 10.8.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for mobile home furnaces (E AE ). AE SS 10.9 Calculation of sales weighted average annual energy consumption for mobile home furnaces. MHF 10.9.1 For mobile home furnaces, the sales weighted average annual fossil fuel energy consumption is expressed in Btu per year and defined as: E F,MHF F P MHF P Where: E F 8,760 = as defined in section 10.4.1.1 of this appendix Q P HLH MHF 2,080 = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix 10.9.2 For mobile home furnaces, the sales-weighted-average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as: E AE,MHF AE MHF Where: E AE HLH MHF 2,080 = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix 10.10 [Reserved] 10.11 Average annual electrical standby mode and off mode energy consumption. SO E SO W,SB W,OFF Where: P W,SB 4,160 = average heating season hours per year BOH = total burner operating hours as calculated in section 10.4 of this appendix for gas or oil-fueled furnaces. Where for gas or oil-fueled furnaces equipped with single-stage controls, BOH = BOH SS R H R M in 4,600 = as defined in section 11.4.12 of ASHRAE 103-1993 P W,OFF K = 0.001 kWh/Wh, conversion factor from watt-hours to kilowatt-hours Where: 100 = to express a percent as a decimal 2,080 = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix 0.77 = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix DHR = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix E in 3.412 = as defined in section 10.4.3 of this appendix AFUE = as defined in section 11.1 of ASHRAE 103-1993 in percent [88 FR 15538, Mar. 13, 2023] Appendix O to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Vented Home Heating Equipment Note: Prior to November 16, 2022, representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of vented home heating equipment, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with either this appendix as it now appears or appendix O as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B revised as of January 1, 2021. On and after November 16, 2022, representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of vented home heating equipment, including compliance certifications, must be based on testing conducted in accordance with this appendix. 0.0 Incorporation by Reference. DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3: ANSI Z21.86-2016; ASHRAE 103-2017; ASTM D2156-09 (R2018); IEC 62301; UL 729-2016; UL 730-2016; and UL 896-2016 in their entirety. However, only enumerated provisions of ANSI Z21.86-2016; ASHRAE 103-2017, UL 729-2016, UL 730-2016, and UL 896-2016 are applicable to this appendix, as follows: 0.1 ANSI Z21.86-2016 (i) Section 5.2—Test gases (ii) Section 9.1.3 (iii) Section 11.1.3 (iv) Section 11.7—Temperature at discharge air opening and surface temperatures 0.2 ASHRAE 103-2017 (i) Section 6—INSTRUMENTS (ii) Section 8.2.2.3.1—Oil Supply (iii) Section 8.6—Jacket Loss Measurement (iv) Section 8.8.3—Additional Optional Method of Testing for Determining DP and DF for Furnaces and Boilers (v) Section 9.10—Optional Test Procedures for Condensing Furnaces and Boilers that Have no OFF-Period Flue Losses 0.3 UL 729-2016 (i) Section 38.1—Enclosure (ii) Section 38.2—Chimney connector 0.4 UL 730-2016 (i) Section 36.1—Enclosure (ii) Section 36.2—Chimney connector (iii) Sections 37.5.8 through 37.5.180.5 UL 896-2016 (i) Section 37.1.2 (ii) Section 37.1.3 1.0 Definitions 1.1 “Active mode” means the condition during the heating season in which the vented heater is connected to the power source, and either the burner or any electrical auxiliary is activated. 1.2 “Air shutter” means an adjustable device for varying the size of the primary air inlet(s) to the combustion chamber power burner. 1.3 “Air tube” means a tube which carries combustion air from the burner fan to the burner nozzle for combustion. 1.4 “Barometic draft regulator or barometric damper” means a mechanical device designed to maintain a constant draft in a vented heater. 1.5 “Condensing vented heater” means a vented heater that, during the laboratory tests prescribed in this appendix, condenses part of the water vapor in the flue gases. 1.6 “Draft hood” means an external device which performs the same function as an integral draft diverter, as defined in section 1.17 of this appendix. 1.7 “Electro-mechanical stack damper” means a type of stack damper which is operated by electrical and/or mechanical means. 1.8 “Excess air” means air which passes through the combustion chamber and the vented heater flues in excess of that which is theoretically required for complete combustion. 1.9 “Flue” means a conduit between the flue outlet of a vented heater and the integral draft diverter, draft hood, barometric damper or vent terminal through which the flue gases pass prior to the point of draft relief. 1.10 “Flue damper” means a device installed between the furnace and the integral draft diverter, draft hood, barometric draft regulator, or vent terminal which is not equipped with a draft control device, designed to open the venting system when the appliance is in operation and to close the venting system when the appliance is in a standby condition. 1.11 “Flue gases” means reaction products resulting from the combustion of a fuel with the oxygen of the air, including the inerts and any excess air. 1.12 “Flue losses” means the sum of sensible and latent heat losses above room temperature of the flue gases leaving a vented heater. 1.13 “Flue outlet” means the opening provided in a vented heater for the exhaust of the flue gases from the combustion chamber. 1.14 “Heat input” (Q in 1.15 “Heating capacity” (Q out in ss in j j 1.16 “Higher heating value” (HHV) means the heat produced per unit of fuel when complete combustion takes place at constant pressure and the products of combustion are cooled to the initial temperature of the fuel and air and when the water vapor formed during combustion is condensed. The higher heating value is usually expressed in Btu's per pound, Btu's per cubic foot for gaseous fuel, or Btu's per gallon for liquid fuel. 1.17 “IEC 62301 (Second Edition)” means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, titled “Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power,” Publication 62301 Edition 2.0 2011-01 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 1.18 “Induced draft” means a method of drawing air into the combustion chamber by mechanical means. 1.19 “Infiltration parameter” means that portion of unconditioned outside air drawn into the heated space as a consequence of loss of conditioned air through the exhaust system of a vented heater. 1.20 “Integral draft diverter” means a device which is an integral part of a vented heater, designed to: (1) Provide for the exhaust of the products of combustion in the event of no draft, back draft, or stoppage beyond the draft diverter, (2) prevent a back draft from entering the vented heater, and (3) neutralize the stack action of the chimney or gas vent upon the operation of the vented heater. 1.21 “Manually controlled vented heaters” means either gas or oil fueled vented heaters equipped without thermostats. 1.22 “Modulating control” means either a step-modulating or two-stage control. 1.23 “Off mode” means the condition during the non-heating season in which the vented heater is connected to the power source, and neither the burner nor any electrical auxiliary is activated. 1.24 “Power burner” means a vented heater burner which supplies air for combustion at a pressure exceeding atmospheric pressure, or a burner which depends on the draft induced by a fan incorporated in the furnace for proper operation. 1.25 “Reduced heat input rate” means the factory adjusted lowest reduced heat input rate for vented home heating equipment equipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats. 1.26 “Seasonal off switch” means the control device, such as a lever or toggle, on the vented heater that affects a difference in off mode energy consumption as compared to standby mode consumption. 1.27 “Single-stage thermostat” means a thermostat that cycles a burner at the maximum heat input rate and off. 1.28 “Stack” means the portion of the exhaust system downstream of the integral draft diverter, draft hood or barometric draft regulator. 1.29 “Stack damper” means a device installed downstream of the integral draft diverter, draft hood, or barometric draft regulator, designed to open the venting system when the appliance is in operation and to close off the venting system when the appliance is in the standby condition. 1.30 “Stack gases” means the flue gases combined with dilution air that enters at the integral draft diverter, draft hood or barometric draft regulator. 1.31 “Standby mode” means the condition during the heating season in which the vented heater is connected to the power source, and neither the burner nor any electrical auxiliary is activated. 1.32 “Steady-state conditions for vented home heating equipment” means equilibrium conditions as indicated by temperature variations of not more than 5 °F (2.8C) in the flue gas temperature for units equipped with draft hoods, barometric draft regulators or direct vent systems, in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart or not more than 3 °F (1.7C) in the stack gas temperature for units equipped with integral draft diverters in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart. 1.33 “Step-modulating control” means a control that either cycles off and on at the low input if the heating load is light, or gradually, increases the heat input to meet any higher heating load that cannot be met with the low firing rate. 1.34 “Thermal stack damper” means a type of stack damper which is dependent for operation exclusively upon the direct conversion of thermal energy of the stack gases into movement of the damper plate. 1.35 “Two stage control” means a control that either cycles a burner at the reduced heat input rate and off or cycles a burner at the maximum heat input rate and off. 1.36 “Vaporizing-type oil burner” means a device with an oil vaporizing bowl or other receptacle designed to operate by vaporizing liquid fuel oil by the heat of combustion and mixing the vaporized fuel with air. 1.37 “Vent/air intake terminal” means a device which is located on the outside of a building and is connected to a vented heater by a system of conduits. It is composed of an air intake terminal through which the air for combustion is taken from the outside atmosphere and a vent terminal from which flue gases are discharged. 1.38 “Vent limiter” means a device which limits the flow of air from the atmospheric diaphragm chamber of a gas pressure regulator to the atmosphere. A vent limiter may be a limiting orifice or other limiting device. 1.39 “Vent pipe” means the passages and conduits in a direct vent system through which gases pass from the combustion chamber to the outdoor air. 2.0 Testing conditions. 2.1 Installation of test unit. 2.1.1 Vented wall furnaces (including direct vent systems). 2.1.2 Vented floor furnaces. 2.1.3 Vented room heaters. 2.2 Flue and stack requirements. 2.2.1 Gas fueled vented home heating equipment employing integral draft diverters and draft hoods (excluding direct vent systems). Attach to the outlet of vented heaters having a horizontally discharging draft diverter or draft hood outlet a 90-degree elbow, and a five (5) foot long vertical test stack. A horizontal section of pipe may be used on the floor furnace between the diverter and the elbow, if necessary, to clear any framing used in the installation. Use the minimum length of pipe possible for this section. Use stack, elbow, and horizontal section with same cross-sectional area as the diverter outlet. 2.2 Oil-fueled vented home heating equipment (excluding direct vent systems). 2.2.3 Direct vent systems. 2.2.4 Condensing vented heater, additional flue requirements. 2.3 Fuel supply. 2.3.1 Natural gas. 2.3.2 Propane gas. 2.3.3 Other test gas. 2.3.4 Oil supply. 2.3.5 Electrical supply. 2.4 Burner adjustments. 2.4.1 Gas burner adjustments. For gas-fueled heaters with modulating controls, adjust the controls to operate the heater at the maximum fuel input rate. Set the thermostat control to the maximum setting. Start the heater by turning the safety control valve to the “on” position. In order to prevent modulation of the burner at maximum input, place the thermostat sensing element in a temperature control bath which is held at a temperature below the maximum set point temperature of the control. For gas-fueled heaters with modulating controls, adjust the controls to operate the heater at the reduced fuel input rate. Set the thermostat control to the minimum setting. Start the heater by turning the safety control valve to the “on” position. If ambient test room temperature is above the lowest control set point temperature, initiate burner operation by placing the thermostat sensing element in a temperature control bath that is held at a temperature below the minimum set point temperature of the control. 2.4.2 Oil burner adjustments. 2 2 2.5 Circulating air adjustments. 2.5.1 Forced-air vented wall furnaces (including direct vent systems). 2.5.2 Fan-type vented room heaters and floor furnaces. 2.6 Location of temperature measuring instrumentation. 2.6.1 Gas-fueled vented home heating equipment (including direct vent systems). 2.6.1.1 Integral draft diverter. For units with a stack diameter 2 inches or less, five thermocouples may be installed instead of nine. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the stack. Locate four thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this horizontal plane at points halfway between the center of the stack and the stack wall. 2.6.1.2 Direct vent system. 2.6.1.3 Draft hood or direct vent system which does not intentionally preheat incoming air. For units with a flue pipe diameter of 2 inches or less, five thermocouples may be installed instead of nine. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the pipe and four thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this horizontal plane at points halfway between the center of the pipe and the pipe wall. 2.6.1.4 Direct vent system which intentionally preheat incoming air. For units with a flue pipe diameter of 2 inches or less, five thermocouples may be installed instead of nine. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the flue pipe and four thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this plane at points halfway between the center of the flue pipe and the pipe wall. 2.6.2 Oil-fueled vented home heating equipment (including direct vent systems). Install thermocouples for measuring the heated air temperature as described in Sections 37.5.8 through 37.5.18 of UL 730-2016. Establish the temperature of the inlet air by means of a single No. 24 AWG bead-type thermocouple located in the center of the plane of each inlet air opening. Use bead-type thermocouples having a wire size not greater than No. 24 AWG. If there is a thermocouple that has a direct line of sight with the fire, install a radiation shield, meeting the material and minimum thickness requirements from Section 8.14.1 of ANSI Z21.86-2016, on the fire side of the thermocouple only, and position the shield so that it does not touch the thermocouple junction. Install nine thermocouples, wired in parallel and having equal length leads, in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the flue pipe. Locate this plane at the position shown in Figure 36.4 of UL 730-2016, or Figure 38.1 and 38.2 of UL 729-2016 for a single thermocouple, except that on direct vent systems which intentionally preheat the incoming combustion air, locate this plane within 6 inches (152.5 mm) of the outlet of the vent/air intake terminal. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the flue pipe and eight thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this plane at points one third and two thirds of the distance between the center of the pipe and pipe wall. For units with a flue pipe diameter of 2 inches or less, five thermocouples may be installed instead of nine. Wire the thermocouples in parallel with equal length leads, in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the flue pipe. Locate this plane at the position shown in Figure 36.4 of UL 730-2016, or Figure 38.1 and 38.2 of UL 729-2016 for a single thermocouple, except that on direct vent systems which intentionally preheat the incoming combustion air, locate this plane within 6 inches (152.5 mm) of the outlet of the vent/air intake terminal. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the flue pipe and four thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this plane at points halfway between the center of the pipe and pipe wall. 2.7 Combustion measurement instrumentation. 2.8 Energy flow instrumentation. 2.9 Room ambient temperature. The value T RA RA Locate a thermocouple at each elevation of draft relief inlet opening and combustion air inlet opening at a distance of approximately 24 inches from the inlet openings. The temperature of the air for combustion and the air for draft relief shall not differ more than ±5 °F from the room ambient temperature as measured above at any point in time. This requirement for combustion air inlet temperature does not need to be met once the burner is shut off during the testing described in sections 3.3 and 3.6 of this appendix. 2.10 Equipment used to measure mass flow rate in flue and stack. 2.11 Equipment with multiple control modes. 2.11.1 For equipment that has both manual and automatic thermostat control modes, test the unit according to the procedure for its automatic control mode, i.e., 2.11.2 For equipment that has multiple automatic thermostat control modes, test in the default mode (or similarly named mode identified for normal operation) as defined by the manufacturer in its I&O manual. If a default mode is not defined in the I&O manual, test in the mode in which the equipment operates as shipped from the manufacturer. 3.0 Testing and measurements. 3.1 Steady-state testing. 3.1.1 Gas fueled vented home heating equipment (including direct vent systems). On units employing draft diverters, measure the room temperature (T RA S,SS S,SS CO2S On units employing draft hoods or direct vent systems, measure the room temperature (T RA F,SS 2 CO2F 2 CO2S Determine the steady-state heat input rate (Qin) including pilot gas by multiplying the measured higher heating value of the test gas by the steady-state gas input rate corrected to standard conditions of 60 °F and 30 inches of mercury. Use measured values of gas temperature and pressure at the meter and the barometric pressure to correct the metered gas flow rate to standard conditions. After the above test measurements have been completed on units employing draft diverters, secure a sample of the flue gases at the exit of the heat exchanger(s) and determine the concentration of CO 2 CO2F 2 2 2 For heaters with single-stage thermostat control (wall mounted electric thermostats), determine the steady-state efficiency at the maximum fuel input rate as specified in section 2.4 of this appendix. For gas fueled vented heaters equipped with either two stage control or step-modulating control, determine the steady-state efficiency at the maximum fuel input rate and at the reduced fuel input rate, as specified in section 2.4.1 of this appendix. For manually controlled gas fueled vented heaters with various input rates, determine the steady-state efficiency at a fuel input rate that is within ±5 percent of 50 percent of the maximum rated fuel input rate as indicated on the nameplate of the unit or in the manufacturer's installation and operation manual shipped with the unit. If the heater is designed to use a control that precludes operation at other than maximum rated fuel input rate (single firing rate) determine the steady state efficiency at the maximum rated fuel input rate only. 3.1.2 Oil-fueled vented home heating equipment (including direct vent systems). For units equipped with power burners, do not allow smoke in the flue to exceed a No. 1 smoke during the steady-state performance test as measured by the procedure described in ASTM D2156-09 (R2018). Maintain the average draft over the fire and in the breeching during the steady-state performance test at that recommended by the manufacturer ±0.005 inches of water gauge. Measure the room temperature (T RA F,SS F,SS 2 CO2F in For manually controlled oil fueled vented heaters, determine the steady-state efficiency at a fuel input rate that is within ±5 percent of 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate; or, if the design of the heater is such that the fuel input rate cannot be set to ±5 percent of 50 percent of the maximum rated fuel input rate, determine the steady-state efficiency at the minimum rated fuel input rate as measured in section 3.1.2 of this appendix for manually controlled oil fueled vented heaters. 3.1.3 Auxiliary Electric Power Measurement. E E 3.2 Jacket loss measurement. j 3.3 Measurement of the off-cycle losses for vented heaters equipped with thermal stack dampers. For vented heaters equipped with single-stage thermostats, measure the off-cycle losses at the maximum fuel input rate. For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, measure the off-cycle losses at the maximum fuel input rate and at the reduced fuel input rate. For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, measure the off-cycle losses at the reduced fuel input rate. Allow the vented heater to heat up to a steady-state condition. Feed a tracer gas at a constant metered rate into the stack directly above and within one foot above the stack damper. Record tracer gas flow rate and temperature. Measure the tracer gas concentration in the stack at several locations in a horizontal plane through a cross-section of the stack at a point sufficiently above the stack damper to ensure that the tracer gas is well mixed in the stack. Continuously measure the tracer gas concentration and temperature during a 10-minute cool-down period. Shut the burner off and immediately begin measuring tracer gas concentration in the stack, stack temperature, room temperature, and barometric pressure. Record these values as the midpoint of each one-minute interval between burner shut-down and ten minutes after burner shut-down. Meter response time and sampling delay time shall be considered in timing these measurements. 3.4 Measurement of the effectiveness of electro-mechanical stack dampers. s o 3.5 Pilot light measurement. 3.5.1 Measure the energy input rate to the pilot light (Q P 3.5.2 For manually controlled heaters where the pilot light is designed to be turned off by the user when the heater is not in use, that is, turning the control to the OFF position will shut off the gas supply to the burner(s) and to the pilot light, the measurement of Q P 3.6 Optional procedure for determining p′ F′ s for systems for all types of vented heaters. p′ F′ S Conduct a cool down test by letting the unit heat up until steady-state conditions are reached, as indicated by temperature variation of not more than 5 °F (2.8 °C) in the flue gas temperature in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart, and then shutting the unit off with the stack or flue damper controls by-passed or adjusted so that the stack or flue damper remains open during the resulting cool down period. If a draft was maintained on oil fueled units in the flue pipe during the steady-state performance test described in section 3.1 of this appendix, maintain the same draft (within a range of −.001 to + .005 inches of water gauge of the average steady-state draft) during this cool down period. Measure the flue gas mass flow rate (m F,OFF F,SS Within one minute after the unit is shut off to start the cool down test for determining D F T T T Between 5 and 6 minutes after the unit is shut off to start the cool down test, measure at the exit of the heat exchanger the average flue gas temperature, T* F,Off T F,Off T T B The rate of the flue gas mass flow through the vented heater and the factors D P F S 3.6.1 Procedure for determining ( F and P of vented home heating equipment with no measurable airflow. F P 3.6.2 Test Method to Determine Whether the Use of the Default Draft Factors ( F and P of 0.05 is Allowed. 3.6.2.1 Test Conditions. 3.6.2.2 Location of Test Apparatus 3.6.2.2.1 After all air currents and drafts in the test chamber have been minimized, position the operable smoke stick/pencil as specified, based on the following equipment configuration: for horizontal combustion air intakes, approximately 4 inches from the vertical plane at the termination of the intake vent and 4 inches below the bottom edge of the combustion air intake, or for vertical combustion air intakes, approximately 4 inches horizontal from vent perimeter at the termination of the intake vent and 4 inches down (parallel to the vertical axis of the vent). In the instance where the boiler combustion air intake is closer than 4 inches to the floor, place the smoke device directly on the floor without impeding the flow of smoke. 3.6.2.2.2 Monitor the presence and the direction of the smoke flow. 3.6.2.3 Duration of Test. 3.6.2.4 Test Results 3.6.2.4.1 During visual assessment, determine whether there is any draw of smoke into the combustion air intake. 3.6.2.4.2 If absolutely no smoke is drawn into the combustion air intake, the vented heater meets the requirements to allow use of the default draft factor of 0.05. 3.6.2.4.3 If there is any smoke drawn into the intake, use of default draft factor of 0.05 is prohibited. Proceed with the methods of testing as prescribed in section 3.6 of this appendix, or select the appropriate default draft factor from Table 1. 3.7 Measurement of electrical standby mode and off mode power. 3.7.1 Standby power measurements. W,SB Room ambient temperature, Electrical supply, Test room, Power supply. Power measuring instruments, Measurements, Energy flow instrumentation, W,SB 3.7.2 Off mode power measurement. W,OFF Room ambient temperature, Electrical supply, Test room, Power supply. Power measuring instruments, Measurements, Energy flow instrumentation, W,OFF W,SB W,OFF 3.8 Condensing vented heaters—measurement of condensate under steady-state and cyclic conditions. 3.8.1 Steady-state condensate collection test. c,ss c,ss For units with step-modulating or two stage controls, the steady-state condensate collection test shall be conducted at both the maximum and reduced input rates. 3.8.2 Cyclic condensate collection tests. Record fuel input during the entire test period starting at the beginning of the on-time period of the first cycle to the beginning of the on-time period of the second cycle, from the beginning of the on-time period of the second cycle to the beginning of the on-time period of the third cycle, etc., for each of the test cycles. Record fuel HHV, temperature, and pressure necessary for determining fuel energy input, Q C C C C C For units with step-modulating controls, conduct the cyclic condensate collection test at reduced input rate only. For units with two-stage controls, conduct the cyclic condensate collection test at both maximum and reduced input rates unless the balance-point temperature (T C 4.0 Calculations. 4.1 Annual fuel utilization efficiency for gas fueled or oil fueled vented home heating equipment equipped without manual controls or with multiple control modes as per 2.11 and without thermal stack dampers. 4.1.1 System number. 4.1.2 Off-cycle flue gas draft factor. F 4.1.3 Off-cycle stack gas draft factor. s 4.1.4 Pilot fraction. F P F P in where: Q P Q in 4.1.5 Jacket loss for floor furnaces. j j 4.1.6 Latent heat loss. L,A L,A For steady-state conditions: L L,A L,A G,SS C,SS where: L L,A L G,SS L C,SS For cyclic conditions: (only for vented heaters tested under the optional tracer gas procedures of section 3.3 or 3.6) L L,A L,A G C where: L L,A L G L C 4.1.6.1 Latent heat gain due to condensation under steady-state conditions. G,SS where: 100 = conversion factor to express a decimal as a percent, 1053.3 = latent heat of vaporization of water, Btu per pound, M c,ss Q c,ss 4.1.6.2 Heat loss due to hot condensate going down the drain under steady-state conditions. C,SS where: L G,SS 1.0 = specific heat of water, Btu/lb− °F, T F,SS 70 = assumed indoor temperature, °F, 0.45 = specific heat of water vapor, Btu/lb− °F, and 45 = average outdoor temperature for vented heaters, °F. 4.1.6.3 Latent heat gain due to condensation under cyclic conditions. G where: 100 = conversion factor to express a decimal as a percent, 1053.3 = latent heat of vaporization of water, Btu per pound, M c Q c 4.1.6.4 Heat loss due to hot condensate going down the drain under cyclic conditions. (only for vented heaters tested under the optional tracer gas procedures of section 3.3 or 3.6 of this appendix) C where: L G 1.0 = specific heat of water, Btu/lb− °F, T F,SS 70 = assumed indoor temperature, °F, 0.45 = specific heat of water vapor, Btu/lb− °F, and 45 = average outdoor temperature for vented heaters, °F. 4.1.7 Ratio of combustion air mass flow rate to stoichiometric air mass flow rate. T,F R T,F CO2F where: A = as determined from Table 2 of this appendix B = as determined from Table 2 of this appendix X CO2F 4.1.8 Ratio of combustion and relief air mass flow rate to stoichiometric air mass flow rate. T,S R T,S CO2S where: A = as determined from Table 2 of this appendix, B = as determined from Table 2 of this appendix, and X CO2S 4.1.9 Sensible heat loss at steady-state operation. S,SS,A where: L S,SS,A T,S S,SS RA C = as determined from Table 2 of this appendix R T,S D = as determined from Table 2 of this appendix T S,SS T RA For vented heaters equipped without an integral draft diverter, determine (L S,SS,A L S,SS,A T,F F,SS RA where: C = as determined from Table 2 of this appendix R T,F D = as determined from Table 2 of this appendix T F,SS T RA 4.1.10 Steady-state efficiency. SS, η SS L,A S,SS,A where: L L,A L,A L S,SS,A For vented heaters equipped with either two stage controls or with step-modulating controls, calculate the steady-state efficiency at the reduced fuel input rate, η SS−L η SS−L L,A S,SS,A where: L L,A L,A L S,SS,A S,SS,A For vented heaters equipped with two stage controls, calculate the steady-state efficiency at the maximum fuel input rate, η SS−H η SS−H L,A S,SS,A where: L L,A L,A L S,SS,A S,SS,A For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, calculate the weighted-average steady-state efficiency in the modulating mode, η SS−MOD where: η SS-H η SS-L T OA T C T C where: 65 = average outdoor temperature at which a vented heater starts operating, 15 = national average outdoor design temperature for vented heaters, and R = ratio of reduced to maximum heat output rates, as defined in section 4.1.13 of this appendix. 4.1.11 Reduced heat output rate. (Q red-out Q red-out SS-L red-in where: η SS-L Q red-in 4.1.12 Maximum heat output rate. max-out Q max,out SS,H max,in where: η SS-H Q max-in 4.1.13 Ratio of reduced to maximum heat output rates. R = Q red-out max-out where: Q red-out Q max-out 4.1.14 Fraction of heating load at reduced operating mode. 1 4.1.15 Fraction of heating load at maximum operating mode or noncycling mode. 2 4.1.16 Weighted-average steady-state efficiency. SS-WT SS, SS-WT η SS-WT 1 SS-L 2 SS-H where: X 1 η SS-L X 2 η SS-H For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating controls, η SS-WT η SS-WT 1 SS-L 2 SS-MOD where: X 1 η SS-L X 2 η SS-MOD 4.1.17 Annual fuel utilization efficiency. AFUE=[0.968η SS − WT F S F J where: η SS-WT D F D S P F L J 4.2 Annual fuel utilization efficiency for gas or oil fueled vented home heating equipment equipped with manual controls. 4.2.1 Average ratio of stack gas mass flow rate to flue gas mass flow rate at steady-state operation. where: R T,S CO2s R T,F CO2F 4.2.2 Multiplication factor for infiltration loss during burner on-cycle. I,ON where: 100 = converts a decimal fraction into a percent 0.24 = specific heat of air A/F = stoichiometric air/fuel ratio, determined in accordance with Table 2 of this appendix S/F = as defined in section 4.2.1 of this appendix 0.7 = infiltration parameter R T,F HHV A 4.2.3 On-cycle infiltration heat loss. I,ON L I,ON I,ON where: K I,ON 70 = average indoor temperature 45 = average outdoor temperature 4.2.4 Weighted-average steady-state efficiency. 4.2.4.1 For manually controlled heaters with various input rates the weighted average steady-state efficiency (η SS−WT η SS-WT L,A S,SS,A where: L L,A L,A L S,SS,A L,A S,SS,A (1) at 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate as measured in either section 3.1.1 of this appendix for manually controlled gas vented heaters or section 3.1.2 of this appendix for manually controlled oil vented heaters, or (2) at the minimum fuel input rate as measured in either section 3.1.1 of this appendix for manually controlled gas vented heaters or section 3.1.2 of this appendix for manually controlled oil vented heaters if the design of the heater is such that the ±5 percent of 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate cannot be set, provided this minimum rate is no greater than 2/3 4.2.4.2 For manually controlled heater with one single firing rate the weighted average steady-state efficiency is the steady-state efficiency measured at the single firing rate. 4.2.5 Part-load fuel utilization efficiency. u η u SS-WT I,ON where: η SS-WT L I,ON 4.2.6 Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency. 4.2.6.1 For manually controlled vented heaters, calculate the AFUE expressed as a percent and defined as: where: 2,950 = average number of heating degree days η SS SS−WT η u Q in−max in 4,600 = average number of non-heating season hours per year Q P 2.083 = (65 − 15) / 24 = 50 / 24 65 = degree day base temperature, °F 15 = national average outdoor design temperature for vented heaters as defined in section 4.1.10 of this appendix 24 = number of hours in a day 4.2.6.2 For manually controlled vented heaters where the pilot light can be turned off by the user when the heater is not in use as described in section 3.5.2, calculate the AFUE expressed as a percent and defined as: AFUE=η u where: η u 4.3 Annual fuel utilization efficiency by the tracer gas method. 4.3.1 On-cycle sensible heat loss. S,ON L S,ON S,SS,A where: L S,SS,A For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate L S,ON L S,ON 1 S,SS,A-red 2 S,SS,A-max where: X 1 L S,SS,A-red S,SS,A X 2 L S,SS,A-max S,SS,A For vented heaters with step-modulating controls, calculate L S,ON L S,ON 1 S,SS,A-red 2 S,SS,A-avg where: X 1 L LS,SS,A-red X 2 L S,SS,A-avg where: L S,SS,A-avg T C T OA* 15 = as defined in section 4.1.10 of this appendix 4.3.2 On-cycle infiltration heat loss. I,ON L I,ON I,ON where: K I,ON 70 = as defined in section 4.2.3 of this appendix 45 = as defined in section 4.2.3 of this appendix For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate L I,ON L I,ON 1 I,ON-Max OA* 2 I,ON,red OA where: X 1 K I,ON-max I,ON 70 = as defined in section 4.2.3 of this appendix T OA* K I,ON,red I,ON T OA X 2 For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, calculate L I,ON L I,ON 1 I,ON-avg OA* 2 I,ON,red OA where: X 1 70 = as defined in section 4.2.3 of this appendix T OA* X 2 T OA 4.3.3 Off-cycle sensible heat loss. S,OFF S,OFF L S,OFF 1 S,OFF,red where: X 1 L S,OFF,red S,OFF For vented heaters equipped with two stage controls, calculate L S,OFF L S,OFF 1 S,OFF,red 2 S,OFF,Max where: X 1 L S,OFF,red S,OFF X 2 L S,OFF,Max S,OFF Calculate the off-cycle sensible heat loss (L S,OFF where: 100 = conversion factor for percent, 0.24 = specific heat of air in Btu per pound— °F, Q in t on Σ m S,OFF S,OFF RA S,OFF S,OFF RA m S,OFF T S,OFF T RA P B V T C T* C T T T (T T 4.3.4 Average outdoor temperature. OA OA OA* 4.3.5 Off-cycle infiltration heat loss. I,OFF I,OFF L I,OFF 1 I,OFF,red where: X 1 L I,OFF,red I,OFF For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate L I,OFF L I,OFF 1 I,OFF,red 2 I,OFF,max where: X 1 L I,OFF,red I,OFF X 2 L I,OFF,Max I,OFF Calculate the off-cycle infiltration heat loss (L I,OFF where: 100 = conversion factor for percent 0.24 = specific heat of air in Btu per pound— °F 1.3 = dimensionless factor for converting laboratory measured stack flow to typical field conditions 0.7 = infiltration parameter 70 = assumed average indoor air temperature, °F T OA Q in t on Σ m S,OFF S,OFF m S,OFF 4.3.6 Part-load fuel utilization efficiency. u where: C j L j L L,A L,A t on L S,ON L S,OFF L I,ON L I,OFF P F t OFF 4.3.7 Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency. Calculate the AFUE expressed as a percent and defined as: where: 2,950 = average number of heating degree days η SS-WT η u Q in−max 4,600 = as specified in 4.2.6 of this appendix Q P 2.083 = as specified in 4.2.6 of this appendix 4.4 Stack damper effectiveness for vented heaters equipped with electro-mechanical stack dampers. o D o D S where: A D Ω = as defined in 3.4 of this appendix A S 4.5 Addition requirements for vented home heating equipment using indoor air for combustion and draft control. F S 4.5.1 Optional procedure for determining D P for vented home heating equipment. P F,OFF F,SS F,SS F,SS D P F,OFF F,SS F,SS F,SS For vented heaters in which no draft is maintained during the steady-state or cool down tests, M F,OFF F,SS For oil fueled vented heaters in which an imposed draft is maintained, as described in section 3.6 of this appendix, M F,OFF F,SS M F,OFF F,SS F,OFF F,OFF where: T F,SS T* F,OFF T RA P B V T C T C T* T T (T T M F,SS F,SS in T,F A Q in R T,F A/F = as defined in section 4.2.2 of this appendix, and HHV A 4.5.2 Optional procedure for determining off-cycle draft factor for flue gas flow for vented heaters. F D F P For systems numbered 11 or 12: D F P O For systems complying with section 3.6.1 or 3.6.2, D F Where: D P D O 4.5.3 Optional procedure for determining off-cycle draft factor for stack gas flow for vented heaters. S For systems numbered 1 or 2: D S For systems numbered 3 or 4: D S P For systems numbered 5 or 6: D S O For systems numbered 7 or 8 and if D O S O P For systems numbered 7 or 8 and if D O D S O P O P O where: D P D O 4.6 Annual energy consumption. 4.6.1 National average number of burner operating hours. BOH SS F where: 1,416 = national average heating load hours for vented heaters based on 2,950 degree days and 15 °F outdoor design temperature A F DHR = typical design heating requirements based on Q OUT Q OUT SS j j in L j C j η SS Q in A = 100,000/[341,300P E in P u B = 2.938(Q P u 100,000 = factor that accounts for percent and kBtu P E Q P η u = as defined in 4.2.5 of this appendix for manually controlled vented heaters, percent = 2,950 AFUEη SS in SS in P AFUE = as defined in 4.1.17 of this appendix, percent 2,950 = average number of heating degree days as defined in 4.2.6 of this appendix 4,600 = average number of non-heating season hours per year as defined in 4.2.6 of this appendix 2.938 = (4,160/1,416) = ratio of the average length of the heating season in hours to the average heating load hours 2.083 = as specified in 4.2.6 of this appendix 4.6.1.1 For vented heaters equipped with two stage or step modulating controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the reduced operating mode is defined as: BOH R 1 M red-in where: X 1 Q red-in E M = (Q in P SS P Q in Q P BOH SS E R = 1.3 for two stage controls = 1.4 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum fuel input is greater than or equal to 0.7 = 1.7 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum fuel input is less than 0.7 and greater than or equal to 0.5 = 2.2 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum fuel input is less than 0.5 A = 100,000/[341,300 PE R + (Q in P u 8,760 = total number of hours per year 4,600 = as specified in 4.2.6 of this appendix 4.6.1.2 For vented heaters equipped with two stage or step modulating controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the maximum operating mode (BOH H BOH H 2 M in where: X 2 E M = (Q in P SS P Q in 4.6.2 Average annual fuel energy for gas or oil fueled vented heaters. F E F SS in P P where: BOH SS Q in Q P 8,760 = as specified in 4.6.1 of this appendix 4.6.2.1 For vented heaters equipped with either two stage or step modulating controls E F E F M P where: E M 4,600 = as specified 4.2.6 of this appendix Q P 4.6.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for vented heaters. AE E AE SS E SO Where: BOH SS P E E SO 4.6.3.1 For vented heaters with two-stage or modulating controls, E AE E AE R H E SO Where: BOH R BOH H P E E SO 4.6.4 Average annual energy consumption for vented heaters located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. 4.6.4.1 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil fueled vented home heaters located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. FR E FR F P P where: E F 8,760 = as specified in 4.6.1 of this appendix Q P HLH = heating load hours for a specific geographic region determined from the heating load hour map in Figure 3 of this appendix 1,416 = as specified in 4.6.1 of this appendix 4.6.4.2 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil fueled vented home heaters located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. AER E AER AE where: E AE HLH = as defined in 4.6.4.1 of this appendix 1,416 = as specified in 4.6.1 of this appendix Table 1—Off-Cycle Draft Factors for Flue Gas Flow (D F S System number (D F (D S Burner type Venting system type 1 1 1.0 1.0 Atmospheric Draft hood or diverter. 2 0.4 1.0 Power Draft hood or diverter. 3 1.0 1.0 Atmospheric Barometric draft regulator. 4 0.4 0.85 Power Barometric draft regulator. 5 1.0 D O Atmospheric Draft hood or diverter with damper. 6 0.4 D O Power Draft hood or diverter with damper. 7 1.0 D O Atmospheric Barometric draft regulator with damper. 8 0.4 D O P Power Barometric draft regulator with damper. 9 1.0 0 Atmospheric Direct vent. 10 0.4 0 Power Direct vent. 11 D O 0 Atmospheric Direct vent with damper. 12 0.4 D O 0 Power Direct vent with damper. 1 Table 2—Values of Higher Heating Value (HHV( A L,A Fuels HHV A A/F L L,A A B C D No. 1 oil 19,800 14.56 6.55 0.0679 14.22 0.0179 0.167 No. 2 oil 19,500 14.49 6.50 0.0667 14.34 0.0181 0.167 Natural gas 20,120 14.45 9.55 0.0919 10.96 0.0175 0.171 Manufactured gas 18,500 11.81 10.14 0.0965 10.10 0.0155 0.235 Propane 21,500 15.58 7.99 0.0841 12.60 0.0177 0.151 Butane 20,000 15.36 7.79 0.0808 12.93 0.0180 0.143 Table 3—Fraction of Heating Load at Reduced Operating Mode (X1) and at Maximum Operating Mode (X2), Average Outdoor Temperatures (TOA and TOA*), and Balance Point Temperature (TC) for Vented Heaters Equipped With Either Two-Stage Thermostats or Step-Modulating Thermostats Heat output ratio a X1 X2 TOA TOA* TC 0.20 to 0.24 .12 .88 57 40 53 0.25 to 0.29 .16 .84 56 39 51 0.30 to 0.34 .20 .80 54 38 49 0.35 to 0.39 .30 .70 53 36 46 0.40 to 0.44 .36 .64 52 35 44 0.45 to 0.49 .43 .57 51 34 42 0.50 to 0.54 .52 .48 50 32 39 0.55 to 0.59 .60 .40 49 30 37 0.60 to 0.64 .70 .30 48 29 34 0.65 to 0.69 .76 .24 47 27 32 0.70 to 0.74 .84 .16 46 25 29 0.75 to 0.79 .88 .12 46 22 27 0.80 to 0.84 .94 .06 45 20 23 0.85 to 0.89 .96 .04 45 18 21 0.90 to 0.94 .98 .02 44 16 19 0.95 to 0.99 .99 .01 44 13 17 a Table 4—Average Design Heating Requirements for Vented Heaters With Different Output Capacities Vented heaters output capacity Q out Average design heating requirements (kBtu/hr) 5,000-7,499 5.0 7,500-10,499 7.5 10,500-13,499 10.0 13,500-16,499 12.5 16,500-19,499 15.0 19,500-22,499 17.5 22,500-26,499 20.5 26,500-30,499 23.5 30,500-34,499 26.5 34,500-38,499 30.0 38,500-42,499 33.5 42,500-46,499 36.5 46,500-51,499 40.0 51,500-56,499 44.0 56,500-61,499 48.0 61,500-66,499 52.0 66,500-71,499 56.0 71,500-76,500 60.0 4.7 Average annual electric standby mode and off mode energy consumption. Calculate the annual electric standby mode and off mode energy consumption, E SO E SO W,SB W,OFF Where: P W,SB 4160 = average heating season hours per year P W,OFF 4600 = average non-heating season hours per year K = 0.001 kWh/Wh, conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours BOH = burner operating hours as calculated in section 4.6.1 of this appendix where for single-stage controls or manual controls vented heaters BOH = BOH SS R H [49 FR 12169, Mar. 28, 1984, as amended at 62 FR 26162, May 12, 1997; 77 FR 74571, Dec. 17, 2012; 80 FR 806, Jan. 6, 2015; 87 FR 30791, May 20, 2022] Appendix P to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Pool Heaters Note: On and after November 27, 2023, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of all pool heaters must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. Until November 27, 2023, manufacturers must test gas-fired pool heaters in accordance with this appendix, or appendix P as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B revised as of January 1, 2021. Prior to November 27, 2023, if a manufacturer makes representations of standby mode and off mode energy consumption, then testing must also include the provisions of this appendix, or appendix P as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B revised as of January 1, 2021, related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption. 1. Definitions: Active electrical power Active mode Coefficient of performance (COP), Electric heat pump pool heater Electric resistance pool heater Fossil fuel-fired pool heater Hybrid pool heater Input capacity Off mode Output capacity Seasonal off switch Standby mode 2. Test method. 2.1 Active mode. 2.1.1 Fossil fuel-fired pool heaters. 1. Burner input rate is adjusted as specified in section 2.3.3 of ANSI Z21.56, 2. Equilibrium is defined as in section 9.1.3 of ASHRAE 146 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) 3. Units are only to be tested using a recirculating loop and a pump if: the use of the recirculating loop and pump are listed as required; a minimum flow rate is specified in the installation or operation manual provided with the unit; the pump is packaged with the unit by the manufacturer; or such use is required for testing. 4. A water temperature rise of less than 40 °F is allowed only as specified in the installation or operation manual(s) provided with the unit. 2.1.2 Electric resistance pool heaters. 2.1.3 Electric heat pump pool heaters. 2.1.4 Hybrid pool heaters. 2.2 Standby mode. 2.3 Off mode. 2.3.1 Pool heaters with a seasonal off switch. 2.3.2 Pool heaters without a seasonal off switch. 3. Test conditions. 3.1 Active mode. 3.1.1 Fossil fuel-fired pool heaters. 3.1.2 Electric resistance pool heaters. 3.1.3 Electric heat pump pool heaters. 3.1.4 Hybrid pool heaters. 3.2 Standby mode and off mode. 4. Measurements 4.1 Active mode 4.1.1 Fossil fuel-fired pool heaters. e.g., 4.1.2 Electric resistance pool heaters. 4.1.3 Electric heat pump pool heaters. HP 4.1.4 Hybrid pool heaters. 4.2 Standby mode. W,SB, p W,SB 4.3 Off mode. 4.3.1 Pool heaters with a seasonal off switch. W,OFF off 4.3.2 Pool heaters without a seasonal off switch. W,OFF W,SB, off p W,OFF 5. Calculations. 5.1 Thermal efficiency. 5.1.1 Fossil fuel-fired pool heaters. t 5.1.2 Electric resistance pool heaters. t 5.1.3 Electric heat pump pool heaters. t t 5.1.4 Hybrid pool heaters. 5.2 Average annual fossil fuel energy for pool heaters. F For fossil fuel-fired pool heaters, the average annual fuel energy for pool heaters, E F E F IN PR off,R Where: BOH = average number of burner operating hours = 104 h, POH = average number of pool operating hours = 4,464 h, Q IN IN Q PR P Q P 8760 = number of hours in one year, Q off,R off Q off 5.3 Average annual electrical energy consumption for pool heaters. AE (1) E AE AE,active AE,standby,off (2) E AE,active (3) E AE,standby,off W,SB W,OFF where: E AE,active E AE,standby,off PE = active electrical power, calculated as: = 2E c = 3.412 PE aux,rated = E c,HP HP E c PE aux,rated E c,HP t HP BOH = as defined in section 5.2 of this appendix, POH = as defined in section 5.2 of this appendix, P W,SB W,SB P W,SB P W,OFF W,OFF P W,OFF 5.4 Integrated thermal efficiency. 5.4.1 Calculate the seasonal useful output of the pool heater as: E OUT t IN where: BOH = as defined in section 5.2 of this appendix, E t Q IN PE = as defined in section 5.3 of this appendix, and 100 = conversion factor, from percent to fraction. 5.4.2 Calculate the annual input to the pool heater as: E IN F AE where: E F E AE 5.4.3 Calculate the pool heater integrated thermal efficiency (TE I TE I OUT IN where: E OUT E IN 100 = conversion factor, from fraction to percent. 5.5 Output capacity for electric pool heaters. 5.5.1 Calculate the output capacity of an electric heat pump pool heater as: Q OUT,HP ohp ihp HP where k is the specific heat of water, W is the mass of water collected during the test, T ohp ihp HP 5.5.2 Calculate the output capacity of an electric resistance pool heater as: Q OUT,ER mo mi where k is the specific heat of water, W is the mass of water collected during the test, T mo mi [80 FR 813, Jan. 6, 2015, as amended at 88 FR 34703, May 30, 2023] Appendix Q to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts Note regarding effective date: 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference ANSI C78.81-2016, ANSI C78.375A, ANSI C78.901-2016, ANSI C82.1, ANSI 82.2, ANSI 82.3, ANSI 82.11, ANSI C82.13, ANSI 82.77, IEC 60081, and IEC 62301, each in their entirety in § 430.3; however, only enumerated provisions of ANSI C78.375A, ANSI C82.2, and IEC 62301 are applicable to this appendix, as follows: (a) ANSI C78.375A, as follows: (i) Section 4, Ambient conditions for temperature measurement, as specified in section 2.4.2 of this appendix; and (ii) Section 9, Electrical instruments, as specified in sections 2.2.1, 2.2.2, and 2.2.3 of this appendix. (b) ANSI C82.2, as follows: (i) Section 3, Pertinent measurements, as specified in section 2.4.1 of this appendix; (ii) Section 4, Electrical supply characteristics—test ballast measurement circuits, as specified in section 2.4.1 of this appendix; and (iii) Section 7, Test measurements circuits, as specified in sections 2.5.6, 2.5.7, and 2.5.8 of this appendix. (c) IEC 62301 as follows: (i) Section 5, Measurements, as specified in sections 3.4.3 and 3.4.4 of this appendix. 1. Definitions 1.1. Average total lamp arc power 1.2. Dimming ballast 1.3. High frequency ballast 1.4. Instant-start e.g., 1.5. Low-frequency ballast 1.6. Programmed-start e.g., 1.7. Rapid-start e.g., 1.8. Reference lamp 1.9. Residential ballast 1.10. RMS 1.11 Sign Ballast 2. Active Mode Procedure for Measuring BLE at Full Light Output 2.1. Where ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) references ANSI C82.1, use ANSI C82.1 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) for testing low-frequency ballasts and use ANSI C82.11 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) for testing high-frequency ballasts. In addition when applying ANSI C82.2, use the standards ANSI C78.375A, ANSI C78.81-2016, ANSI C82.1, ANSI C82.11, ANSI C82.13, ANSI C82.3, ANSI C82.77, and ANSI C78.901-2016 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) instead of the normative references in ANSI 82.2. Specifications in referenced standards that are recommended, that “shall” or “should” be met, or that are not clearly mandatory, are mandatory. In cases where there is a conflict between any industry standard(s) and this appendix, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the industry standard(s). 2.2. Instruments 2.2.1. All instruments must meet the specifications of section 9 of ANSI C78.375A. 2.2.2. Power Analyzer. 2.2.3. Current Probe. 2.3. Test Setup 2.3.1. Connect the ballast to a main power source and to the fluorescent lamp(s) as specified in this section. Ensure the ballast is connected to fluorescent lamp(s) according to any manufacturer's wiring instructions on or sold with each unit (including those provided online). To test a low-frequency ballast, follow ANSI C82.1 but disregard section 5.3 of ANSI C82.1. To test a high-frequency ballast, follow ANSI C82.11 but disregard sections 5.3.1 and 5.13 and Annex D of ANSI C82.11. 2.3.2. In the test setup, all wires used in the apparatus, including any wires from the ballast to the lamps and from the lamps to the measuring devices, must meet the following specifications: 2.3.2.1. Use the wires provided by the ballast manufacturer and only the minimum wire length necessary to reach both ends of each lamp. If the wire lengths supplied with the ballast are too short to reach both ends of each lamp, add the minimum additional wire length necessary to reach both ends of each lamp, using wire of the same wire gauge(s) as the wire supplied with the ballast. If no wiring is provided with the ballast, use 18 gauge or thicker wire. 2.3.2.2. Keep wires loose. Do not shorten or allow bundling of any wires. Separate all wires from each other, and ground them to prevent parasitic capacitance. 2.3.3. Test each ballast with only one fluorescent lamp type. Select the one type of fluorescent lamp for testing as follows: 2.3.3.1. Each fluorescent lamp must meet the specifications of a reference lamp as defined by ANSI C82.13, be seasoned at least 12 hours, and be stabilized as specified in 2.5.2.1 of this appendix. Test each reference lamp with a reference ballast that meets the criteria of ANSI C82.3. For low frequency ballasts that operate: (a) 32 W 4-foot medium bipin T8 lamps, use the following reference lamp specifications: 30.8 W, arc wattage; 1.7 W, approximate cathode wattage (with 3.6 V on each cathode); 32.5 W, total wattage; 137 V, voltage; 0.265 A, current. Test the selected reference lamp with the following reference ballast specifications: 300 V, rated input voltage; 0.265 A, reference current; 910 ohms, impedance. Use the following cathode heat requirements for rapid start: 3.6 V nominal, voltage; 2.5 V min, 4.4 V max, limits during operation; 11.0 ohms ± 0.1 ohms, dummy load resistor; 3.4 V min, 4.5 V max, voltage across dummy load. (b) 59 W 8-foot single pin T8 lamps, use the following reference lamp specifications: 60.1 W, arc wattage; 270.3 V, voltage; 0.262 A, current. Test the selected reference lamp with the following reference ballast specifications: 625 V, rated input voltage; 0.260 A, reference current; 1960 ohms, impedance. (c) 32 W 2-foot U-shaped medium bipin T8 lamps, use the following reference lamp specifications: 30.5 W, arc wattage; 1.7 W, approximate cathode wattage (with 3.6 V on each cathode); 32.2 W, total wattage; 137 V, voltage; 0.265 A, current. Test the selected reference lamp with the following reference ballast specifications: 300 V, rated input voltage; 0.265 A, reference current; 910 ohms, impedance. Use the following cathode heat requirements for rapid start: 3.6 V nominal, voltage; 2.5 V min, 4.4 V max, limits during operation; 11.0 ohms ± 0.1 ohms, dummy load resistor; 3.4 V min, 4.5 V max, voltage across dummy load. 2.3.3.2 For any sign ballast designed and marketed to operate both T8 and T12 lamps, use a T12 lamp as specified in Table 1 of this appendix. 2.3.3.3. For any ballast designed and marketed to operate lamps of multiple base types, select lamp(s) of one base type, in the following order of decreasing preference: Medium bipin, miniature bipin, single pin, or recessed double contact. 2.3.3.4. After selecting the base type (per section 2.3.3.3), select the diameter of the reference lamp. Any ballast designed and marketed to operate lamps of multiple diameters, except for any sign ballast capable of operating both T8 and T12 lamps, must be tested with lamps of one of those diameters, selected in the following order of decreasing preference: T8, T5, or T12. 2.3.3.5. Connect the ballast to the maximum number of lamps (lamp type as determined by 2.3.3.2, 2.3.3.3, and 2.3.3.4 of this section) the ballast is designed and marketed to operate simultaneously. For any ballast designed and marketed to operate both 4-foot medium bipin lamps and 2-foot U-shaped lamps, test with the maximum number of 4-foot medium bipin lamp(s). 2.3.3.6. Test each ballast with the lamp type specified in Table A of this section that corresponds to the lamp diameter and base type the ballast is designed and marketed to operate. Table 1 to Section 2.3.3.6—Lamp-and-Ballast Pairings and Frequency Adjustment Factors Ballast type Lamp type Frequency adjustment factor Lamp diameter and base Nominal lamp Low- High- Ballasts that operate straight-shaped lamps (commonly referred to as 4-foot medium bipin lamps) with medium bipin bases and a nominal overall length of 48 inches T8 MBP (Data Sheet 7881-ANSI-1005-4) * 32 0.94 1.0 Ballasts that operate U-shaped lamps (commonly referred to as 2-foot U-shaped lamps) with medium bipin bases and a nominal overall length between 22 and 25 inches T8 MBP (Data Sheet 78901-ANSI-4027-2) * 32 0.94 1.0 Ballasts that operate lamps (commonly referred to as 8-foot-high output lamps) with recessed double contact bases and a nominal overall length of 96 inches T8 HO RDC (Data Sheet 7881-ANSI-1501-2) * 86 0.92 1.0 Ballasts that operate lamps (commonly referred to as 8-foot slimline lamps) with single pin bases and a nominal overall length of 96 inches T8 slimline SP (Data Sheet 7881-ANSI-1505-1) * 59 0.95 1.0 Ballasts that operate straight-shaped lamps (commonly referred to as 4-foot miniature bipin standard output lamps) with miniature bipin bases and a nominal length between 45 and 48 inches T5 SO Mini-BP (Data Sheet 60081-IEC-6640-7) * 28 0.95 1.0 Ballasts that operate straight-shaped lamps (commonly referred to as 4-foot miniature bipin high output lamps) with miniature bipin bases and a nominal length between 45 and 48 inches T5 HO Mini-BP (Data Sheet 60081-IEC-6840-6) * 54 0.95 1.0 Sign ballasts that operate lamps (commonly referred to as 8-foot high output lamps) with recessed double contact bases and a nominal overall length of 96 inches T8 HO RDC (Data Sheet 7881-ANSI-1501-2) * 86 0.92 1.0 MBP, Mini-BP, RDC, and SP represent medium bipin, miniature bipin, recessed double contact, and single pin, respectively. * Data Sheet corresponds to ANSI C78.81-2016, ANSI C78.901-2016, or IEC 60081 page number (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). ** No ANSI or IEC Data Sheet exists for 34 W T12 MBP U-shaped lamps. For ballasts designed and marketed to operate only T12 2-foot U-shaped lamps with MBP bases and a nominal overall length between 22 and 25 inches, select T12 U-shaped lamps designed and marketed as having a nominal wattage of 34 W. † This lamp type is commonly marketed as 110 W; however, the ANSI C78.81-2016 Data Sheet (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) lists nominal wattage of 113 W. Test with specifications for operation at 0.800 amperes (A). 2.3.4. Test Circuits 2.3.4.1. The power analyzer test setup must have exactly n + 1 channels, where n is the maximum number of lamps (lamp type as determined by sections 2.3.3.2, 2.3.3.3, and 2.3.3.4 of this appendix) a ballast is designed and marketed to operate. Use the minimum number of power analyzers possible during testing. Synchronize all power analyzers. A system may be used to synchronize the power analyzers. 2.3.4.2. Lamp Arc Voltage. 2.3.4.3. Lamp Arc Current. For the lamp arc current measurement, set the full transducer ratio in the power analyzer to match the current probe to the power analyzer. Where: in out in s 2.4. Test Conditions 2.4.1. Establish and maintain test conditions for testing fluorescent lamp ballasts in accordance with sections 3 and 4 of ANSI C82.2. 2.4.2. Room Temperature and Air Circulation. 2.4.3. Input Voltage. 2.5. Test Method 2.5.1. Connect the ballast to the selected fluorescent lamps (as determined in section 2.3.3 of this appendix) and to measurement instrumentation as specified in the Test Setup in section 2.3 of this appendix. 2.5.2. Determine stable operating conditions according to Option 1 or Option 2. 2.5.2.1. Option 1. Operate the ballast for at least 15 minutes before determining stable operating conditions. Determine stable operating conditions by measuring lamp arc voltage, current, and power once per minute in accordance with the setup described in section 2.3 of this appendix. The system is stable once the difference between the maximum and minimum for each value of lamp arc voltage, current, and power divided by the average value of the measurements do not exceed one percent over a four minute moving window. Once stable operating conditions are reached, measure each of the parameters described in sections 2.5.3 through 2.5.9 of this appendix. 2.5.2.2 Option 2. Determine stable operating conditions for lamp arc voltage, current, and power according to steps 1 through 6 of section D.2.1 in Annex D of ANSI C82.11. 2.5.3. Lamp Arc Voltage. 2.5.4. Lamp Arc Current. 2.5.5. Lamp Arc Power. 2.5.6. Input Power. 2.5.7. Input Voltage. 2.5.8. Input Current. 2.5.9. Lamp Operating Frequency. 2.6. Calculations 2.6.1. Calculate ballast luminous efficiency (BLE) as follows (do not round values of total lamp arc power and input power prior to calculation): Where: 2.6.2. Calculate Power Factor (PF) as follows (do not round values of input power, input voltage, and input current prior to calculation): Where: 3. Standby Mode Procedure 3.1. The measurement of standby mode power is required to be performed only if a manufacturer makes any representations with respect to the standby mode power use of the fluorescent lamp ballast. When there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). Specifications in referenced standards that are not clearly mandatory are mandatory. Manufacturer's instructions, such as “instructions for use” referenced in IEC 62301 mean the manufacturer's instructions that come packaged with or appear on the unit, including on a label. It may include an online manual if specifically referenced ( e.g., 3.2. Test Setup 3.2.1. Take all measurements with instruments as specified in section 2.2 of this appendix. Fluorescent lamp ballasts that are designed and marketed for connection to control devices must be tested with all commercially available compatible control devices connected in all possible configurations. For each configuration, a separate measurement of standby power must be made in accordance with section 3.4 of this appendix. 3.2.2. Connect each ballast to the maximum number of lamp(s) as specified in section 2.3 (specifications in 2.3.3.1 are optional) of this appendix. Note: ballast operation with reference lamp(s) is not required. 3.3. Test Conditions 3.3.1. Establish and maintain test conditions in accordance with section 2.4 of this appendix. 3.4. Test Method and Measurements 3.4.1. Turn on all of the lamps at full light output. 3.4.2. Send a signal to the ballast instructing it to have zero light output using the appropriate ballast communication protocol or system for the ballast being tested. 3.4.3. Stabilize the ballast prior to measurement using one of the methods as specified in section 5 of IEC 62301. 3.4.4. Measure the standby mode energy consumption in watts using one of the methods as specified in section 5 of IEC 62301. [85 FR 56494, Sept. 14, 2020] Appendix R to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring Electrical and Photometric Characteristics of General Service Fluorescent Lamps, Incandescent Reflector Lamps, and General Service Incandescent Lamps Note: After September 30, 2022 and prior to February 27, 2023 any representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of general service fluorescent lamps, incandescent reflector lamps, and general service incandescent lamps must be in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix or the test procedures as they appeared in appendix R to subpart B of part 430 revised as of January 1, 2021. On or after February 27, 2023, any representations, including certifications of compliance for lamps subject to any energy conservation standard, made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of general service fluorescent lamps, incandescent reflector lamps, and general service incandescent lamps must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire standard for: IES LM-9-20, IES LM-20-20, IES LM-45-20, IES LM-49-20, IES LM-54-20, IES LM-58-20, IES LM-78-20, ANSI C78.375A-2020, ANSI C78.81-2010, ANSI C78.901-2005, ANSI C78.81-2016, ANSI C78.901-2016, ANSI C82.3, CIE 15:2018, and CIE 13.3; however, only enumerated provisions of IES LM-9-20, IES LM-20-20, IES LM-45-20, IES LM-49-20, IES LM-58-20, and CIE 13.3, are applicable to this appendix, as follows: 0.1 IES LM-9-20 (a) Section 3.0 “Nomenclature and Definitions” as referenced in section 2.1 of this appendix. (b) Section 6.2.2 “Pre-burning” and Section 6.2.4 “Lamp Circuit Switching” as referenced in section 3.2 of this appendix. (c) Section 4.0 “Ambient and Physical Conditions”, Section 5.0 “Electrical Conditions”, Section 6.1 “Lamp Orientation”, Section 6.5 “Electrical Settings”, and Section 6.6 “Electrical Instrumentation” as referenced in section 4.1.1.1 of this appendix. (d) Section 6.1 “Lamp Orientation”, Section 6.2 “Lamp Stabilization”, Section 6.3 “Use of the “Peak Lumen” Method”, and Section 6.4 “Unusual Conditions” as referenced in section 4.2.1.1 of this appendix. (e) Section 7.0 “Photometric Test Procedures” as referenced in section 4.2.1.3 of this appendix. (f) Section 7.6 “Color Measurements” as referenced in sections 4.2.1.5 and 4.2.1.6 of this appendix. 0.2 IES LM-20-20 (a) Section 3.0 “Definitions” as referenced in section 2.1 of this appendix. (b) Section 4.0 “Ambient and Physical Conditions” and Section 5.0 “Electrical and Photometric Test Conditions” as referenced in section 4.1.3 of this appendix. (c) Section 6.0 “Lamp Test Procedures” as referenced in sections 4.2.3.1 and 6.2.1 of this appendix. (d) Section 7.0 “Photometric Characterization by Measurement of Intensity Distribution”, Section 8.0 “Total Flux Measurement by Integrating Sphere Method”, and Section 8.2 “Exclusion of Undirected Light by Using a Luminaire Inside an Integrating Sphere” as referenced in section 4.2.3.3 of this appendix. 0.3 IES LM-45-20 (a) Section 3.0 “Nomenclature and Definitions” as referenced in section 2.1 of this appendix. (b) Section 4.0 “Ambient and Physical Conditions”, Section 5.0 “Electrical Conditions”, section 6.1 “Lamp Position”, Section 6.3 “Electrical Settings”, and Section 6.4 “Electrical Instrumentation” as referenced in section 4.1.2 of this appendix. (c) Section 6.2 “Lamp Stabilization” as referenced in sections 4.2.2.1 and 6.2.1 of this appendix. (d) Section 7.0 “Photometric Test Procedures” as referenced in section 4.2.2.3 of this appendix. (e) Section 7.4 “Color Measurements” as referenced in sections 4.2.2.5 and 4.2.2.6 of this appendix. 0.4 IES LM-49-20 (a) Section 4.0 “Ambient and Physical Conditions” and Section 5.0 “Electrical Conditions” as referenced in section 6.1 of this appendix. (b) Section 6.4 “Operating Cycle” as referenced in sections 6.2.2 and 6.3 of this appendix. 0.5 IES LM-58-20 (a) Section 3.0 “Definitions and Nomenclature” as referenced in section 2.1 of this appendix. (b) [Reserved] 0.6 CIE 13.3 (a) Appendix 1 “Terminology” as referenced in section 2.1 of this appendix. (b) [Reserved] 1. Scope: This appendix specifies the test methods required for determining the electrical and photometric performance characteristics of general service fluorescent lamps (GSFLs), incandescent reflector lamps (IRLs), and general service incandescent lamps (GSILs). 2. Definitions 2.1 To the extent that definitions in the referenced IES and CIE standards do not conflict with the DOE definitions, the definitions specified in Section 3.0 of IES LM-9-20, Section 3.0 of IES LM-20-20, Section 3.0 of IES LM-45-20, Section 3.0 of IES LM-58-20, and Appendix 1 of CIE 13.3 apply in this appendix. 2.2 Initial input power 2.3 Initial lamp efficacy 2.4 Initial lumen output 2.5 Time to failure 3. General Instructions 3.1 When there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over any materials incorporated by reference. 3.2 Maintain lamp operating orientation throughout seasoning and testing, except that for T5 miniature bipin standard and high output GSFLs, follow Section 6.2.2 of IES LM-9-20. For all GSFLs, maintain lamp orientation when transferring lamps from a warm-up position to the photometric equipment per Section 6.2.4 of IES LM-9-20. Maintain lamp orientation at all other times, if practical. 3.3 If a lamp breaks, becomes defective, fails to stabilize, exhibits abnormal behavior (such as swirling), or stops producing light prior to the end of the seasoning period, replace the lamp with a new unit. However, if a lamp exhibits one of the conditions listed in the previous sentence only after the seasoning period ends, include the lamp's measurements in the sample. 3.4 Operate GSILs and IRLs at the rated voltage for incandescent lamps as defined in 10 CFR 430.2. 4. Test Method for Determining Initial Input Power, Initial Lumen Output, Initial Lamp Efficacy, CRI, and CCT 4.1 Test Conditions and Setup 4.1.1 General Service Fluorescent Lamps 4.1.1.1 Establish ambient, physical, and electrical conditions in accordance with Sections (and corresponding subsections) 4.0, 5.0, 6.1, 6.5, and 6.6 of IES LM-9-20. 4.1.1.2 Operate each lamp at the appropriate voltage and current conditions as described in ANSI C78.375A-2020 and in either ANSI C78.81-2010 or ANSI C78.901-2005. Operate each lamp using the appropriate reference ballast at input voltage specified by the reference circuit as described in ANSI C82.3. If, for a lamp, both low-frequency and high-frequency reference ballast settings are included in ANSI C78.81-2010 or ANSI C78.901-2005, operate the lamp using the low-frequency reference ballast. When testing with low-frequency reference ballast settings, include cathode power only if the circuit application of the lamp is specified as rapid start in ANSI C78.81-2010 or ANSI C78.901-2005. When testing with high-frequency reference ballast settings, do not include cathode power in the measurement. For any lamp not listed in ANSI C78.81-2010 or ANSI C78.901-2005, operate the lamp using the following reference ballast settings: 4.1.1.2.1 For 4-Foot medium bi-pin lamps, use the following reference ballast settings: (a) T10 or T12 lamps: 236 volts, 0.43 amps, and 439 ohms, at low frequency (60 Hz) and with cathode power. Approximate cathode wattage (with 3.6 V on each cathode): 2.0 W. Cathode characteristics for low resistance (at 3.6V): 9.6 ohms (objective), 7.0 ohms (minimum). Cathode heat for rapid start: 3.6 V (nominal); 2.5 V min, 4.0 V max (limits during operation); 9.6 ohms ±0.1 ohm (dummy load resistor); 3.4 V min, 4.5 V max (voltage across dummy load). (b) T8 lamps greater than or equal to 32 W: 300 volts, 0.265 amps, and 910 ohms, at low frequency (60 Hz) and with cathode power. Approximate cathode wattage (with 3.6 V on each cathode): 1.7 W. Cathode characteristics for low resistance (at 3.6 V): 12.0 ±2.0 ohms; 4.75 ±0.50 (Rh/Rc ratio). Cathode heat for rapid start: 3.6 V (nominal); 2.5 V min; 4.4 V max (limits during operation); 11.0 ohms ±0.1 ohms (dummy load resistor); 3.4 V min, 4.5 V max (voltage across dummy load). (c) T8 lamps less than 32 W: 300 volts, 0.265 amps, and 910 ohms, at low frequency (60 Hz) and without cathode power. 4.1.1.2.2 For 2-Foot U-shaped lamps, use the following reference ballast settings: (a) T12 lamps: 236 volts, 0.430 amps, and 439 ohms, at low frequency (60 Hz) and with cathode power. Approximate cathode wattage (with 3.6 V on each cathode): 2.0 W. Cathode characteristics for low resistance (at 3.6V): 9.6 ohms (objective), 7.0 ohms (minimum). Cathode heat for rapid start: 3.6 V (nominal); 2.5 V min, 4.0 V max (limits during operation); 9.6 ohms ±0.1 ohm (dummy load resistor); 3.4 V min, 4.5 V max (voltage across dummy load). (b) T8 lamps greater than or equal to 31 W: 300 volts, 0.265 amps, and 910 ohms, at low frequency (60 Hz) and with cathode power. Approximate cathode wattage (with 3.6 V on each cathode): 1.7 W. Cathode characteristics for low resistance (at 3.6 V): 11.0 ohms (objective); 8.0 ohms (minimum). Cathode heat for rapid start: 3.6 V (nominal); 2.5 V min; 4.4 V max (limits during operation); 11.0 ohms ±0.1 ohms (dummy load resistor); 3.4 V min, 4.5 V max (voltage across dummy load). (c) T8 lamps less than 31 W: 300 volts, 0.265 amps, and 910 ohms, at low frequency (60 Hz) and without cathode power. 4.1.1.2.3 For 8-foot slimline lamps, use the following reference ballast settings: (a) T12 lamps: (b) T8 lamps: 4.1.1.2.4 For 8-foot high output lamps, use the following reference ballast settings: (a) T12 lamps: (b) T8 lamps: 4.1.1.2.5 For 4-foot miniature bipin standard output or high output lamps, use the following reference ballast settings: (a) Standard Output: (b) High Output: 4.1.2 General Service Incandescent Lamps: 4.1.3 Incandescent Reflector Lamps: 4.2 Test Methods, Measurements, and Calculations Multiply all lumen measurements made with instruments calibrated to the devalued NIST lumen after January 1, 1996, by 1.011. 4.2.1 General Service Fluorescent Lamps 4.2.1.1 Season and stabilize lamps in accordance with Sections (and corresponding subsections) 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4 of IES LM-9-20 and with IES LM-54-20. 4.2.1.2 Measure the initial input power (in watts). 4.2.1.3 Measure initial lumen output in accordance with Section 7.0 (and corresponding subsections) of IES LM-9-20 and with IES LM-78-20. 4.2.1.4 Calculate initial lamp efficacy by dividing the measured initial lumen output by the measured initial input power. 4.2.1.5 Calculate CRI as specified in Section 7.6 of IES LM-9-20 and CIE 13.3. Conduct the required spectroradiometric measurement and characterization in accordance with the methods set forth in IES LM-58-20. 4.2.1.6 Calculate CCT as specified in Section 7.6 of IES LM-9-20 and CIE 15:2018. Conduct the required spectroradiometric measurement and characterization in accordance with the methods set forth in IES LM-58-20. 4.2.2 General Service Incandescent Lamps 4.2.2.1 Season and stabilize lamps in accordance with Section (and corresponding subsections) 6.2 of IES LM-45-20 and with IES LM-54-20. 4.2.2.2 Measure the initial input power (in watts). 4.2.2.3 Measure initial lumen output in accordance with Section (and corresponding subsections) 7.0 of IES LM-45-20 and with IES LM-78-20. 4.2.2.4 Calculate initial lamp efficacy by dividing the measured initial lumen output by the measured initial input power. 4.2.2.5 Calculate CRI as specified in Section 7.4 of IES LM-45-20 and CIE 13.3. Conduct the required spectroradiometric measurement and characterization in accordance with the methods set forth in IES LM-58-20. 4.2.2.6 Calculate CCT as specified in Section 7.4 of IES LM-45-20 and CIE 15:2018. Conduct the required spectroradiometric measurement and characterization in accordance with the methods set forth in IES LM-58-20. 4.2.3 Incandescent Reflector Lamps 4.2.3.1 Season and stabilize lamps in accordance with Section (and corresponding subsections) 6.0 of IES LM-20-20 and with IES LM-54-20. 4.2.3.2 Measure the initial input power (in watts). 4.2.3.3 Measure initial lumen output in accordance with Sections (and corresponding subsections) 7.0 or 8.0 of IES LM-20-20 and with IES LM-78-20. When measuring in accordance with section 8.0, exclude undirected light using the method specified in section 8.2. 4.2.3.4 Calculate initial lamp efficacy by dividing the measured initial lumen output by the measured initial input power. 4.2.3.5 Calculate CRI as specified in CIE 13.3. Conduct the required spectroradiometric measurement and characterization in accordance with the methods set forth in IES LM-58-20. 4.2.3.6 Calculate CCT as specified in CIE 15:2018. Conduct the required spectroradiometric measurement and characterization in accordance with the methods set forth in IES LM-58-20. 5. Test Method for Voluntary Representations for General Service Fluorescent Lamps Follow sections 1.0 through 4.0 of this appendix to make voluntary representations only for GSFLs that have high frequency reference ballast settings in ANSI C78.81-2016 or ANSI C78.901-2016. Where ANSI C78.81-2010 and ANSI C78.901-2005 are referenced in the preceding sections, use ANSI C78.81-2016 and ANSI C78.901-2016 instead. Operate lamps using high frequency reference ballast settings and without cathode power. Voluntary representations must be in addition to, not instead of, a representation in accordance with sections 1.0 to 4.0 of this appendix for GSFLs. As a best practice, an indication of high frequency operation should be provided with the voluntary representations. 6. Test Method for Determining Time to Failure for General Service Incandescent Lamps and Incandescent Reflector Lamps 6.1 Test Conditions and Setup. 6.2 Test Methods, Measurements, and Calculations 6.2.1 Season and stabilize lamps according to Section 6.2 of IES LM-45-20 for GSILs and in accordance with Section (and corresponding subsections) 6.0 of IES LM-20-20 for IRLs. 6.2.2 Measure the time to failure as specified in Section 6.4 of IES LM-49-20 and based on the lamp's operating time, expressed in hours, not including any off time. 6.3 Accelerated lifetime testing is not allowed; disregard the second paragraph of Section 6.4 of IES LM-49-20. [87 FR 53641, Aug. 31, 2022] Appendix S to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Water Consumption of Faucets and Showerheads Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the relevant standards for faucets and showerheads at § 430.32(g)(o) and (p) as those standards appeared in January 1, 2023 edition of 10 CFR parts 200-499. Specifically, before November 20, 2023 representations must be based upon results generated either under this appendix as codified on June 23, 2023 or under this appendix as it appeared in the 10 CFR parts 200-499 edition revised as of January 1, 2023. Any representations made on or after November 20, 2023 must be made based upon results generated using this appendix as codified on June 23, 2023. 0. Incorporation by Reference In § 430.3, DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for ASME A112.18.1; however, only enumerated provisions of ASME A112.18.1 apply to this appendix, as follows. In cases in which there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the referenced test standard. Treat precatory language in ASME A112.18.1 as mandatory. 0.1 ASME A112.18.1: (a) Section 5.4 “Flow rate,” including Figure 3 but excluding Table 1 and excluding sections 5.4.2.3.1(a) and (c), 5.4.2.3.2(b) and (c), and 5.4.3, as specified in section 2.1 and 2.2 of this appendix; (b) Section 5.4.2.2(c), as specified in section 3.1 of this appendix. (c) Section 5.4.2.2(d), as specified in sections 2.2 and 3.2 of this appendix. 0.2 [Reserved] 1. Scope This appendix covers the test requirements to measure the hydraulic performance of faucets and showerheads. 2. Flow Capacity Requirements 2.1. Faucets—Measure the water flow rate for faucets, in gallons per minute (gpm) or liters per minute (L/min), or gallons per cycle (gal/cycle) or liters per cycle (L/cycle), in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 5.4, Flow Rate, of ASME A112.18.1. Record measurements at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Round each calculation to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. Round the final water consumption value to one decimal place for non-metered faucets, or two decimal places for metered faucets. 2.2. Showerheads—Measure the water flow rate for showerheads, in gallons per minute (gpm) or liters per minute (L/min), in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 5.4, Flow Rate, of ASME A112.18.1. Record measurements at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Round each calculation to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. Round the final water consumption value to one decimal place. If using the time/volume method of section 5.4.2.2(d), position the container to ensure it collects all water flowing from the showerhead, including any leakage from the ball joint. 3. General Instruction for Measuring Flow Rate 3.1. Using the Fluid Meter Method To Measure Flow Rate When measuring flow rate upstream of a showerhead or faucet using a fluid meter (or equivalent device) as described in section 5.4.2.2(c) of ASME A112.18.1, ensure the fluid meter (or equivalent device) meets the following additional requirements. First, ensure the fluid meter is rated for the flow rate range of the product being tested. Second, when testing showerheads or non-metering faucets, ensure that the fluid meter has a resolution for flow rate of at least 0.1 gallons (0.4 liters) per minute. When testing a metering faucet, ensure that the fluid meter has a resolution for flow rate of at least 0.01 gallons (0.04 liters) per minute. Third, verify the fluid meter is calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer printed instructions. 3.2. Using the Time/Volume Method To Measure Flow Rate There are several additional requirements when measuring flow rate downstream of a showerhead or faucet as described in section 5.4.2.2(d) of ASME A112.18.1 to measure flow rate. First, ensure the receiving container is large enough to contain all the water for a single test and has an opening size and/or a partial cover such that loss of water from splashing is minimized. Second, conduct the time/volume test for at least one minute, with the time recorded via a stopwatch with at least 0.1-second resolution. Third, measure and record the temperature of the water using a thermocouple or other similar device either at the receiving container immediately after recording the mass of water, or at the water in the supply line anytime during the duration of the time/volume test. Fourth, measure the mass of water to a resolution of at least 0.01 lb. (0.005 kg) and normalize it to gallons based on the specific gravity of water at the recorded temperature. [88 FR 33545, May 24, 2023] Appendix T to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Water Consumption of Water Closets and Urinals Note: After September 19, 2022, representations made with respect to the water consumption of water closets or urinals must fairly disclose the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. On or after April 22, 2022 and prior to September 19, 2022 representations, including compliance certifications, made with respect to the water consumption of water closets or urinals must fairly disclose the results of testing pursuant to either this appendix or the appendix as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B, in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2014. Representations made with respect to the water consumption of water closets or urinals tested within that range of time must fairly disclose the results of testing under the selected version. Given that after September 19, 2022 representations with respect to the water consumption of water closets and urinals must be made in accordance with tests conducted pursuant to this appendix, manufacturers may wish to begin using this test procedure as soon as possible. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire standard for ASME A112.19.2-2018; however, only enumerated provisions of that document apply to this appendix, as follows. Treat precatory language in ASME A112.19.2-2018 as mandatory for the purpose of testing. a. Section 7.1.1 “All tests,” including Figures 11 and 12, as specified in section 2.a of this appendix; b. Section 7.1.2 “Gravity flush tank water closets,” as specified in section 2.a of this appendix; c. Section 7.1.3 “Flushometer tank, electro-hydraulic, or other pressurized flushing device water closets,” as specified in section 2.a of this appendix; d. Section 7.1.4 “Flushometer valve water closets,” as specified in section 2.a of this appendix; e. Section 7.1.5 “Procedures for standardizing the water supply system,” including Figures 11 and 12, as specified in section 2.a of this appendix; f. Section 7.3 “Water consumption test,” as specified in section 3.a of this appendix, except sections 7.3.4 and 7.3.5; f. Section 8.2.1, including Figure 12, as specified in section 2.b of this appendix; g. Section 8.2.2, as specified in section 2.b of this appendix; h. Section 8.2.3, as specified in section 2.b of this appendix; i. Section 8.6 “Water Consumption Test,” as specified in section 3.b of this appendix, except sections 8.6.3 and 8.6.4; j. Table 5 “Static test pressures for water closets, kPa (psi),” as specified in sections 2.a and 3.a of this appendix; and k. Table 6 “Static test pressures for urinals, kPa (psi)” as specified in sections 2.a and 3.a of this appendix. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over ASME A112.19.2-2018. 1. Scope This appendix sets forth the test requirements used to measure the hydraulic performances of water closets and urinals. 2. Test Apparatus and General Instructions a. When testing a water closet, use the test apparatus and follow the instructions specified in Sections 7.1.1 (including Table 5), 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.1.4, and 7.1.5 of ASME A112.19.2-2018). The flushometer valve used in the water consumption test must represent the maximum design flush volume of the water closet. Record each measurement at the resolution of the test apparatus. Round each calculation of water consumption for each tested unit to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. b. When testing a urinal, use the test apparatus and follow the instructions specified in Sections 8.2.1, 8.2.2, and 8.2.3 (including Table 6) of ASME A112.19.2-2018. The flushometer valve used in the water consumption test must represent the maximum design flush volume of the urinal. Record each measurement at the resolution of the test apparatus. Round each calculation of water consumption for each tested unit to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. 3. Test Measurement a. Water closets: (i) Measure the water flush volume for water closets, expressed in gallons per flush (gpf) or liters per flush (Lpf), in accordance with Section 7.3, Water Consumption Test, of ASME A112.19.2-2018. For dual-flush water closets, the measurement of the water flush volume shall be conducted separately for the full-flush and reduced-flush modes and in accordance with the test requirements specified Section 7.3, Water Consumption Test, of ASME A112.19.2-2018. The final measured flush volume for each tested unit is the average of the total flush volumes recorded at each test pressure as specified in Table 5 “Static test pressures for water closets, kPa (psi),” of ASME A112.19.2-2018, based on the average of the individual flush volumes at a given pressure from the three tests. (ii) Flush volume and tank trim component adjustments: For gravity flush tank water closets, set trim components that can be adjusted to cause an increase in flush volume, including (but not limited to) the flapper valve, fill valve, and tank water level, in accordance with the printed installation instructions supplied by the manufacturer with the unit. If the printed installation instructions for the model to be tested do not specify trim setting adjustments, adjust these trim components to the maximum water use setting so that the maximum flush volume is produced without causing the water closet to malfunction or leak. Set the water level in the tank to the maximum water line designated in the printed installation instructions supplied by the manufacturer or the designated water line on the tank itself, whichever is higher. If the printed installation instructions or the water closet tank do not indicate a water level, adjust the water level to 1±0.1 inches below the top of the overflow tube or, for gravity flush tank water closets that do not contain an overflow tube, 1±0.1 inches below the top rim of the water-containing vessel for each designated pressure specified in Table 5 of ASME A112.19.2-2018. b. Urinals—Measure water flush volume for urinals, expressed in gallons per flush (gpf) or liters per flush (Lpf), in accordance with Section 8.6, Water Consumption Test, of ASME A112.19.2-2018. The final measured flush volume for each tested unit is the average of the total flush volumes recorded at each test pressure as specified in Table 6 “Static test pressures for urinals, kPa (psi),” of ASME A112.19.2-2018, based on the average of the individual flush volumes at a given pressure from the three tests. [87 FR 16386, Mar. 23, 2022] Appendix U to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Ceiling Fans Note: Prior to February 13, 2023, manufacturers must make any representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of ceiling fans as specified in section 2 of this appendix as it appeared on January 23, 2017. On or after February 13, 2023, manufacturers of ceiling fans, as specified in section 2 of this appendix, must make any representations with respect to energy use or efficiency in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. Representations of standby power consumption for large-diameter ceiling fans including for the purpose of certification, are not required until such time as compliance is required with an energy conservation standard for standby power consumption. Upon the compliance date(s) of any energy conservation standards for large-diameter ceiling fans with a blade span greater than 24 feet, use of the applicable provisions of this test procedure to demonstrate compliance with the energy conservation standard will also be required. 0. Incorporation by Reference In § 430.3, DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for AMCA 208-18, AMCA 230-15, AMCA 230-15 TE, and IEC 62301; however, only enumerated provisions of AMCA 230-15, AMCA 230-15 TE, and IEC 62301 are applicable as follows: 0.1. AMCA 230-15 (including corresponding sections in AMCA 230-15 TE): (a) Section 3—Units of Measurement, as specified in section 3.4 of this appendix; (b) Section 4—Symbols and Subscripts; (including Table 1—Symbols and Subscripts), as specified in section 3.4 of this appendix; (c) Section 5—Definitions (except 5.1), as specified in section 3.4 of this appendix; (d) Section 6—Instruments and Section Methods of Measurement, as specified in section 3.4 of this appendix; (e) Section 7—Equipment and Setups (except the last 2 bulleted items in 7.1—Allowable test setups), as specified in section 3.4 of this appendix; (f) Section 8—Observations and Conduct of Test, as specified in section 3.5 of this appendix; (g) Section 9—Calculations (except 9.5 and 9.6), as specified in section 3.5 of this appendix; and (h) Test Figure 1—Vertical Airflow Setup with Load Cell (Ceiling Fans), as specified in section 3.4 of this appendix. 0.2. IEC 62301: (a) Section 4.3.1—Supply voltage and frequency (first paragraph only), as specified in section 3.6 of this appendix; (b) Section 4.3.2—Supply voltage waveform, as specified in section 3.6 of this appendix; (c) Section 4.4—General conditions for measurements: Power measuring instruments, as specified in section 3.6 of this appendix; (d) Section 5.3.1—General (except the last bulleted item), as specified in section 3.6 of this appendix and (e) Section 5.3.2—Sampling method (first two paragraphs and Note 1), as specified in sections 3.6 and 3.6.3 of this appendix. 1. Definitions: 1.1. 40% speed 1.2. Airflow 1.3. Belt-driven ceiling fan 1.4. Blade span 1.5. Ceiling fan efficiency 1.6. Centrifugal ceiling fan 1.7. High speed i.e., 1.8. High-speed small-diameter (HSSD) ceiling fan High-Speed Small-Diameter Ceiling Fan Blade and Tip Speed Criteria Airflow direction Thickness (t) of edges of blades Tip speed threshold Mm Inch m/s feet per minute Downward-only 4.8 > t ≥ 3.2 3 16 1 8 16.3 3,200 Downward-only t ≥ 4.8 t ≥ 3 16 20.3 4,000 Reversible 4.8 > t ≥ 3.2 3 16 1 8 12.2 2,400 Reversible t ≥ 4.8 t ≥ 3 16 16.3 3,200 1.9. High-speed belt-driven (HSBD) ceiling fan High-Speed Belt-Driven Ceiling Fan Blade and Tip Speed Criteria Airflow direction Thickness (t) of edges of blades Tip speed threshold Mm Inch m/s feet per minute Downward-only 4.8 > t ≥ 3.2 3 16 1 8 16.3 3,200 Downward-only t ≥ 4.8 t ≥ 3 16 20.3 4,000 Reversible 4.8 > t ≥ 3.2 3 16 1 8 12.2 2,400 Reversible t ≥ 4.8 t ≥ 3 16 16.3 3,200 1.10. Highly-decorative ceiling fan 1.11. Hugger ceiling fan 1.12. Large-diameter ceiling fan 1.13. Low speed Number of sensors per individual axis as Number of sensors per individual axis measuring 40 feet per minute or greater 3 2 4 3 5 3 6 4 7 4 8 5 9 6 10 7 11 8 12 9 1.14. Low-speed small-diameter (LSSD) ceiling fan Low-Speed Small-Diameter Ceiling Fan Blade and Tip Speed Criteria Airflow direction Thickness (t) of edges of blades Tip speed threshold Mm Inch m/s feet per minute Reversible 4.8 > t ≥ 3.2 3 16 1 8 12.2 2,400 Reversible t ≥ 4.8 t ≥ 3 16 16.3 3,200 1.15. Multi-head ceiling fan i.e., 1.16. Multi-mount ceiling fan 1.17. Oscillating ceiling fan 1.18. Small-diameter ceiling fan 1.19. Standard ceiling fan 1.20. Total airflow 1.21. Very-small-diameter (VSD) ceiling fan 2. Scope: The provisions in this appendix apply to ceiling fans except: (1) Ceiling fans where the plane of rotation of a ceiling fan's blades is not less than or equal to 45 degrees from horizontal, or cannot be adjusted based on the manufacturer's specifications to be less than or equal to 45 degrees from horizontal; (2) Centrifugal ceiling fans; (3) Belt-driven ceiling fans that are not high-speed belt-driven ceiling fans; and (4) Oscillating ceiling fans. 3. General Instructions, Test Apparatus, and Test Measurement: The test apparatus and test measurement used to determine energy performance depend on the ceiling fan's blade span, and in some cases the ceiling fan's blade edge thickness. For each tested ceiling fan, measure the lateral distance from the center of the axis of rotation of the fan blades to the furthest fan blade edge from the center of the axis of rotation. Measure this lateral distance at the resolution of the measurement instrument, using an instrument with a measurement resolution of least 0.25 inches. Multiply the lateral distance by two and then round to the nearest whole inch to determine the blade span. For ceiling fans having a blade span greater than 18 inches and less than or equal to 84 inches, measure the ceiling fan's blade edge thickness. To measure the fan blade edge thickness, use an instrument with a measurement resolution of at least 0.001 inch and measure the thickness of one fan blade's leading edge (in the forward direction) according to the following: (1) Locate the cross-section perpendicular to the fan blade's radial length that is at least one inch from the tip of the fan blade and for which the blade is thinnest, and (2) Measure at the thickest point of that cross-section within one inch from the leading edge of the fan blade. See Figure 1 of this appendix for an instructional schematic on the fan blade edge thickness measurement. Figure 1 depicts a ceiling fan from above. Round the measured blade edge thickness to the nearest 0.01 inch. 3.1. General instructions. 3.1.1. Record measurements at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Round off calculations to the number of significant digits present at the resolution of the test instrumentation, except for blade span, which is rounded to the nearest inch. Round the final ceiling fan efficiency value to the nearest whole number as follows: 3.1.1.1. A fractional number at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two whole numbers; or 3.1.1.2. A fractional number below the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two whole numbers. 3.1.2. For multi-head ceiling fans, the effective blade span is the blade span (as specified in section 3) of an individual fan head, if all fan heads are the same size. If the fan heads are of varying sizes, the effective blade span is the blade span (as specified in section 3) of the largest fan head. 3.2. Test apparatus for low-speed small-diameter and high-speed small-diameter ceiling fans: All instruments are to have accuracies within ±1% of reading, except for the air velocity sensors, which must have accuracies within ±5% of reading or 2 feet per minute (fpm), whichever is greater. Equipment is to be calibrated at least once a year to compensate for variation over time. 3.2.1. Air Delivery Room Requirements (1) The air delivery room dimensions are to be 20 ± 0.75 feet x 20 ± 0.75 feet with an 11 ± 0.75 foot-high ceiling. The control room shall be constructed external to the air delivery room. (2) The ceiling shall be constructed of sheet rock or stainless plate. The walls must be of adequate thickness to maintain the specified temperature and humidity during the test. The paint used on the walls, as well as the paint used on the ceiling material, must be of a type that minimizes absorption of humidity and that keeps the temperature of the room constant during the test ( e.g., (3) The room must not have any ventilation other than an air conditioning and return system used to control the temperature and humidity of the room. The construction of the room must ensure consistent air circulation patterns within the room. Vents must have electronically-operated damper doors controllable from a switch outside of the testing room. 3.2.2. Equipment Set-Up (1) Make sure the transformer power is off. Hang the ceiling fan to be tested directly from the ceiling, according to the manufacturer's installation instructions. Hang all non-multi-mount ceiling fans in the fan configuration that minimizes the distance between the ceiling and the lowest point of the fan blades. Hang and test multi-mount fans in two configurations: The configuration associated the definition of a standard fan that minimizes the distance between the ceiling and the lowest point of the fan blades and the configuration associated with the definition of a hugger fan that minimizes the distance between the ceiling and the lowest point of the fan blades. For all tested configurations, measure the distance between the ceiling and the lowest point of the fan blade using an instrument with a measurement resolution of at least 0.25 inches. Round the measured distance from the ceiling to the lowest point of the fan blade to the nearest quarter inch. (2) Connect wires as directed by manufacturer's wiring instructions. Note: (3) With the ceiling fan installed, adjust the height of the air velocity sensors to ensure the vertical distance between the lowest point on the ceiling fan blades and the air velocity sensors is 43 inches. (4) A single rotating sensor arm, two rotating sensor arms, or four fixed sensor arms can be used to take air velocity measurements along four axes, labeled A-D. Axes A, B, C, and D are at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degree positions. Axes A-D must be perpendicular to the four walls of the room. See Figure 2 of this appendix. (5) Minimize the amount of exposed wiring. Store all sensor lead wires under the floor, if possible. (6) Place the sensors at intervals of 4 ± 0.0625 inches along a sensor arm, starting with the first sensor at the point where the four axes intersect, aligning the sensors perpendicular to the direction of airflow. Do not touch the actual sensor prior to testing. Use enough sensors to record air delivery within a circle 8 inches larger in diameter than the blade span of the ceiling fan being tested. The experimental set-up is shown in Figure 3 of this appendix. (7) Table 1 of this appendix shows the appropriate number of sensors needed per each of four axes (including the first sensor at the intersection of the axes) for common fan sizes. Table 1 to Appendix U to Subpart B of Part 430: Sensor Selection Requirements Fan blade Number 36 6 42 7 44 7 48 7 52 8 54 8 56 8 60 9 72 10 84 12 * The fan sizes listed are illustrative and do not restrict which ceiling fan sizes can be tested. (8) Install an RPM (revolutions per minute) meter, or tachometer, to measure RPM of the ceiling fan blades. (9) Use an RMS sensor capable of measuring power with an accuracy of ±1% to measure ceiling fan power consumption. If the ceiling fan operates on multi-phase power input, measure the active (real) power in all phases simultaneously. Measure test voltage within 6” of the connection supplied with the ceiling fan. (10) Complete any conditioning instructions provided in the ceiling fan's instruction or installation manual must be completed prior to conducting testing. 3.2.3. Multi-Head Ceiling Fan Test Set-Up. Hang a multi-headed ceiling fan from the ceiling such that one of the ceiling fan heads is centered directly over sensor 1 ( i.e., see i.e., 3.2.4. Test Set-Up for Ceiling Fans with Airflow Not Directly Downward For ceiling fans where the airflow is not directly downward, adjust the ceiling fan head such that the airflow is as vertical as possible prior to testing. For ceiling fans where a fully vertical orientation of airflow cannot be achieved, orient the ceiling fan (or fan head, if the ceiling fan is a multi-head fan) such that any remaining tilt is aligned along one of the four sensor axes. Instead of measuring the air velocity for only those sensors directly beneath the ceiling fan, the air velocity is to be measured at all sensors along that axis, as well as the axis oriented 180 degrees with respect to that axis. For example, if the tilt is oriented along axis A, air velocity measurements are to be taken for all sensors along the A-C axis. No measurements would need to be taken along the B-D axis in this case. All other aspects of test set-up remain unchanged from sections 3 through 3.2.2. 3.3. Active mode test measurement for low-speed small-diameter and high-speed small-diameter ceiling fans. 3.3.1. Test conditions to be followed when testing: (1) Maintain the room temperature at 70 degrees ± 5 degrees Fahrenheit and the room humidity at 50% ± 5% relative humidity during the entire test process. (2) If present, the ceiling fan light fixture is to be installed but turned off during testing. (3) If present, any additional accessories or features sold with the ceiling fan that do not relate to the ceiling fan's ability to create airflow by rotation of the fan blades (for example light kit, heater, air ionization, ultraviolet technology) is to be installed but turned off during testing. If such an accessory or feature cannot be turned off, it shall be set to the lowest energy-consuming mode during testing. If the ceiling fan is offered with a default controller, test using the default controller. If multiple controllers are offered, test using the minimally functional controller. (4) If present, turn off any oscillating function causing the axis of rotation of the fan head(s) to change relative to the ceiling during operation prior to taking air velocity measurements. Turn on any oscillating function prior to taking power measurements. (5) Test ceiling fans rated for operation with only a single- or multi-phase power supply with single- or multi-phase electricity, respectively. Test ceiling fans capable of operating with single- and multi-phase electricity with single-phase electricity. DOE will allow manufacturers of ceiling fans capable of operating with single- and multi-phase electricity to test such fans with single-phase power and make representations of efficiency associated with both single and multi-phase electricity if a manufacturer desires to do so, but the test results in the multi-phase configuration will not be valid to assess compliance with any amended energy conservation standard. All tested power supply should be at 60 Hz. (6) The supply voltage shall be: (i) for ceiling fans tested with single-phase electricity, the supply voltage shall be: (a) 120 V if the ceiling fan's minimum rated voltage is 120 V or the lowest rated voltage range contains 120 V, (b) 240 V if the ceiling fan's minimum rated voltage is 240 V or the lowest rated voltage range contains 240 V, or (c) The ceiling fan's minimum rated voltage (if a voltage range is not given) or the mean of the lowest rated voltage range, in all other cases. (ii) for ceiling fans tested with multi-phase electricity, the supply voltage shall be: (a) 240 V if the ceiling fan's minimum rated voltage is 240 V or the lowest rated voltage range contains 240 V, or (b) The ceiling fan's minimum rated voltage (if a voltage range is not given) or the mean of the lowest rated voltage range, in all other cases. (iii) The test voltage shall not vary by more than ±1% during the tests. (7) Conduct the test with the fan connected to a supply circuit at the rated frequency. (8) Measure power input at a point that includes all power-consuming components of the ceiling fan (but without any attached light kit energized; or without any additional accessory or feature energized, if possible; and if not, with the additional accessory or feature set at the lowest energy-consuming mode). If the ceiling fan is offered with a default controller, test using the default controller. If multiple controllers are offered, test using the minimally functional controller. 3.3.2. Air Velocity and Power Consumption Testing Procedure: Measure the air velocity (FPM) and power consumption (W) for HSSD ceiling fans until stable measurements are achieved, measuring at high speed only. Measure the air velocity and power consumption for LSSD and VSD ceiling fans that also meet the definition of an LSSD fan until stable measurements are achieved, measuring first at low speed and then at high speed. To determine low speed, start measurements at the lowest available speed and move to the next highest speed until the low speed definition in section 1.13 of this appendix is met. Air velocity and power consumption measurements are considered stable for high speed if: (1) The average air velocity for each sensor varies by less than 5 percent or 2 FPM, whichever is greater, compared to the average air velocity measured for that same sensor in a successive set of air velocity measurements, and (2) Average power consumption varies by less than 1 percent in a successive set of power consumption measurements. (a) Air velocity and power consumption measurements are considered stable for low speed if: (1) The average air velocity for each sensor varies by less than 10 percent or 2 FPM, whichever is greater, compared to the average air velocity measured for that same sensor in a successive set of air velocity measurements, and (2) Average power consumption varies by less than 1 percent in a successive set of power consumption measurements. (b) These stability criteria are applied differently to ceiling fans with airflow not directly downward. See Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: e.g., Step 4a: Step 4b: Step 4c: Step 5: Step 6: Step 7: If a multi-head ceiling fan includes more than one category of ceiling fan head, then test at least one of each unique category. A fan head with different construction that could affect air movement or power consumption, such as housing, blade pitch, or motor, would constitute a different category of fan head. Step 8: For ceiling fans with an oscillating function, measure active (real) power consumption in all phases simultaneously at each speed continuously for 100 seconds with the oscillating function turned on. Record the average value of the power measurement in watts (W). For both multi-head ceiling fans and fans with an oscillating function, repeat power consumption measurement until stable power measurements are achieved. 3.3.3. Air Velocity Measurements for Ceiling Fans with Airflow Not Directly Downward: Using the number of sensors that cover the same diameter as if the airflow were directly downward, record air velocity at each speed from the same number of continuous sensors with the largest air velocity measurements. This continuous set of sensors must be along the axis that the ceiling fan tilt is directed in (and along the axis that is 180 degrees from the first axis). For example, a 42-inch fan tilted toward axis A may create the pattern of air velocity shown in Figure 4 of this appendix. As shown in Table 1 of this appendix, a 42-inch fan would normally require 7 active sensors per axis. However, because the fan is not directed downward, all sensors must record data. In this case, because the set of sensors corresponding to maximum air velocity are centered 3 sensor positions away from the sensor 1 along the A axis, substitute the air velocity at A axis sensor 4 for the average air velocity at sensor 1. Take the average of the air velocity at A axis sensors 3 and 5 as a substitute for the average air velocity at sensor 2, take the average of the air velocity at A axis sensors 2 and 6 as a substitute for the average air velocity at sensor 3, etc. Lastly, take the average of the air velocities at A axis sensor 10 and C axis sensor 4 as a substitute for the average air velocity at sensor 7. Stability criteria apply after these substitutions. For example, air velocity stability at sensor 7 are determined based on the average of average air velocity at A axis sensor 10 and C axis sensor 4 in successive measurements. Any air velocity measurements made along the B-D axis are not included in the calculation of average air velocity. 3.4. Test apparatus for large-diameter ceiling fans and high-speed belt-driven ceiling fans: The test apparatus and instructions for testing large-diameter ceiling fans and HSBD ceiling fans must conform to the requirements specified in Sections 3 through 7 (including Test Figure 1) of AMCA 230-15, with the following modifications: 3.4.1. A “ceiling fan” is defined as in 10 CFR 430.2. 3.4.2. Test ceiling fans rated for operation with only a single- or multi-phase power supply with single- or multi-phase electricity, respectively. Test ceiling fans capable of operating with single- and multi-phase electricity with multi-phase electricity. DOE will allow manufacturers of ceiling fans capable of operating with single- and multi-phase electricity to test such fans with single-phase power and make representations of efficiency associated with both single and multi-phase electricity if a manufacturer desires to do so, but the test results in the single-phase configuration will not be valid to assess compliance with any amended energy conservation standard. All tested power supply should be at 60 Hz. 3.4.3. Supply Voltage: (1) For ceiling fans tested with single-phase electricity, the supply voltage shall be: (a) 120 V if the ceiling fan's minimum rated voltage is 120 V or the lowest rated voltage range contains 120 V, (b) 240 V if the ceiling fan's minimum rated voltage is 240 V or the lowest rated voltage range contains 240 V, or (c) The ceiling fan's minimum rated voltage (if a voltage range is not given) or the mean of the lowest rated voltage range, in all other cases. (2) For ceiling fans tested with multi-phase electricity, the supply voltage shall be: (a) 240 V if the ceiling fan's minimum rated voltage is 240 V or the lowest rated voltage range contains 240 V, or (b) The ceiling fan's minimum rated voltage (if a voltage range is not given) or the mean of the lowest rated voltage range, in all other cases. 3.5. Active mode test measurement for large-diameter ceiling fans and high-speed belt-driven ceiling fans: (1) Test large-diameter ceiling fans and high-speed belt-driven ceiling fans in accordance with AMCA 208-18, in all phases simultaneously at: (a) High speed, and (b) 40 percent or the nearest speed that is not less than 40 percent speed. (2) When testing at 40 percent speed for large-diameter ceiling fans that can operate over an infinite number of speeds ( e.g., 3.5.1. Measure active (real) power consumption in all phases simultaneously at a point that includes all power-consuming components of the ceiling fan. If present, any additional accessories or features sold with the ceiling fan that do not relate to the ceiling fan's ability to create airflow by rotation of the fan blades (for example light kit, heater, air ionization, ultraviolet technology) are to be installed but turned off during testing. If the accessory/feature cannot be turned off, it shall be set to the lowest energy-consuming mode during testing. If the ceiling fan is offered with a default controller, test using the default controller. If multiple controllers are offered, test using the minimally functional controller. 3.5.2. Measure active (real) power consumption in all phases simultaneously continuously at the rated voltage that represents normal operation over the time period for which the load differential test is conducted. 3.6. Test measurement for standby power consumption. (1) Measure standby power consumption if the ceiling fan offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions: (a) The ability to facilitate the activation or deactivation of other functions (including active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer. (b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks), or sensor-based functions. (2) Measure standby power consumption after completion of active mode testing and after the active mode functionality has been switched off ( i.e., i.e., 3.6.1. Allow 3 minutes between switching off active mode functionality and beginning the standby power test. (No additional time before measurement is required.) 3.6.2. Simultaneously in all phases, measure active (real) power consumption continuously for 100 seconds, and record the average value of the standby power measurement in watts (W). 3.6.3. Determine power consumption according to section 5.3.2 of IEC 62301, or by using the following average reading method. Note that a shorter measurement period may be possible using the sample method in section 5.3.2 of IEC 62301. (1) Connect the product to the power supply and power measuring instrument. (2) Select the mode to be measured (which may require a sequence of operations and could require waiting for the product to automatically enter the desired mode) and then monitor the power. (3) Calculate the average power using either the average power method or the accumulated energy method. For the average power method, where the power measuring instrument can record true average power over an operator selected period, the average power is taken directly from the power measuring instrument. For the accumulated energy method, determine the average power by dividing the measured energy by the time for the monitoring period. Use units of watt-hours and hours for both methods to determine average power in watts. 4. Calculation of Ceiling Fan Efficiency From the Test Results: 4.1. Calculation of effective area for small-diameter ceiling fans other than high-speed belt-driven ceiling fans: Calculate the effective area corresponding to each sensor used in the test method for small-diameter ceiling fans other than high-speed belt-driven ceiling fans (section 3.3 of this appendix) with the following equations: (1) For sensor 1, the sensor located directly underneath the center of the ceiling fan, the effective width of the circle is 2 inches, and the effective area is: (2) For the sensors between sensor 1 and the last sensor used in the measurement, the effective area has a width of 4 inches. If a sensor is a distance d, (3) For the last sensor, the width of the effective area depends on the horizontal displacement between the last sensor and the point on the ceiling fan blades furthest radially from the center of the fan. The total area included in an airflow calculation is the area of a circle 8 inches larger in diameter than the ceiling fan blade span (as specified in section 3 of this appendix). Therefore, for example, for a 42-inch ceiling fan, the last sensor is 3 inches beyond the end of the ceiling fan blades. Because only the area within 4 inches of the end of the ceiling fan blades is included in the airflow calculation, the effective width of the circle corresponding to the last sensor would be 3 inches. The calculation for the effective area corresponding to the last sensor would then be: For a 46-inch ceiling fan, the effective area of the last sensor would have a width of 5 inches, and the effective area would be: 4.2 Calculation of airflow and efficiency for small-diameter ceiling fans other than high-speed belt-driven ceiling fans: Calculate fan airflow using the overall average of both sets of air velocity measurements at each sensor position from the successive sets of measurements that meet the stability criteria from section 3.3 of this appendix. To calculate airflow for HSSD, LSSD, and VSD ceiling fans, multiply the overall average air velocity at each sensor position from section 3.3 (for high speed for HSSD, LSSD, and VSD ceiling fans that also meet the definition of an LSSD ceiling fan; and repeated for low speed only for LSSD and VSD ceiling fans that also meet the definition of an LSSD ceiling fan) by that sensor's effective area (see section 4.1 of this appendix), and then sum the products to obtain the overall calculated airflow at the tested speed. For each speed, using the overall calculated airflow and the overall average power consumption measurements from the successive sets of measurements as follows: Where: CFM i i, OH i i, W i i, OH Sb W Sb Calculate two ceiling fan efficiencies for multi-mount ceiling fans: One efficiency corresponds to the ceiling fan mounted in the configuration associated with the definition of a hugger ceiling fan, and the other efficiency corresponds to the ceiling fan mounted in the configuration associated with the definition of a standard ceiling fan. Table 2 to Appendix U to Subpart B of Part 430: Daily Operating Hours for Calculating Ceiling Fan Efficiency No standby With standby Daily Operating Hours for LSSD and VSD * Ceiling Fans High Speed 3.4 3.4 Low Speed 3.0 3.0 Standby Mode 0.0 17.6 Off Mode 17.6 0.0 Daily Operating Hours for HSSD Ceiling Fans High Speed 12.0 12.0 Standby Mode 0.0 12.0 Off Mode 12.0 0.0 * These values apply only to VSD fans that also meet the definition of an LSSD fan. 4.3 Calculation of airflow and efficiency for multi-head ceiling fans: Calculate airflow for each fan head using the method described in section 4.2 of this appendix. To calculate overall airflow at a given speed for a multi-head ceiling fan, sum the airflow for each fan head included in the ceiling fan (a single airflow can be applied to each of the identical fan heads, but at least one of each unique fan head must be tested). The power consumption is the measured power consumption with all fan heads on. Using the airflow as described in this section, and power consumption measurements from section 3.3 of this appendix, calculate ceiling fan efficiency for a multi-head ceiling fan as follows: Where: CFM i OH i W i OH Sb W Sb 5. Calculation of Ceiling Fan Energy Index (CFEI) From the Test Results for Large Diameter Ceiling Fan and High-Speed Belt-Driven Ceiling Fans: Calculate CFEI, which is the FEI for large-diameter ceiling fans and high-speed belt-driven ceiling fans, at the speeds specified in section 3.5 of this appendix according to AMCA 208-18, with the following modifications: (1) Using an Airflow Constant (Q 0 (2) Using a Pressure Constant (P 0 (3) Using a Fan Efficiency Constant (η 0 [81 FR 48639, July 25, 2016; 81 FR 54721, Aug. 17, 2016, as amended at 86 FR 28473, May 27, 2021; 87 FR 50424, Aug. 16, 2022] Appendix V to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Ceiling Fan Light Kits Packaged With Other Fluorescent Lamps (Not Compact Fluorescent Lamps or General Service Fluorescent Lamps), Packaged With Consumer-Replaceable SSL (Not Integrated LED Lamps), Packaged With Non-Consumer-Replaceable SSL, or Packaged With Other SSL Lamps That Have an ANSI Standard Base (Not Integrated LED Lamps) Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the relevant standards for ceiling fan light kits as those standards appeared in January 1, 2023 edition of 10 CFR parts 200-499. Specifically, before October 10, 2023 representations must be based upon results generated either under this appendix as codified on May 11, 2023 or under appendix V1 as it appeared in the 10 CFR parts 200-499 edition revised as of January 1, 2023. Any representations made on or after October 10, 2023 must be made based upon results generated using this appendix as codified on May 11, 2023. 0. Incorporation by Reference. DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3 the entire standard for: IES LM-9-20, IES LM-54-20, IES LM-75-19, IES LM-78-20, and IES LM-79-19; however, only enumerated provisions of IES LM-9-20 and IES LM-79-19 are applicable to this appendix as follows: 0.1 IES LM-9-20 as referenced by section 3 of this appendix (a) Section 4.0 “Ambient and Physical Conditions”. (b) Section 5.0 “Electrical Conditions”. (c) Section 6.0 “Lamp Test Procedures”. (d) Section 7.0 “Photometric Test Procedures”.0.2 IES LM-79-19 as referenced by section 3 of this appendix (a) Section 4.0 “Physical and Environmental Test Conditions”. (b) Section 5.0 “Electrical Test Conditions”. (c) Section 6.0 “Test Preparation”. (d) Section 7.0 “Total Luminous Flux and Integrated Optical Measurements”. 1. Scope This appendix establishes the test requirements to measure the energy efficiency of all ceiling fan light kits (CFLKs) packaged with fluorescent lamps other than compact fluorescent lamps (CFLs) or general service fluorescent lamps (GSFLs), packaged with consumer-replaceable solid-state lighting (SSL) (not integrated light-emitting diode [LED] lamps), packaged with non-consumer-replaceable SSL, or packaged with SSL lamps that have an American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard base (not integrated LED lamps). 2. Definitions 2.1. CFLK with non-consumer-replaceable SSL i.e., 2.2. CFLK with consumer-replaceable SSL i.e., 2.3. Covers 2.4. Other (non-CFL and non-GSFL) fluorescent lamp 2.5. Solid-State Lighting (SSL) 3. Test Conditions and Measurements For any CFLK that utilizes consumer replaceable lamps or consumer-replaceable SSL, measure the lamp efficacy of each basic model of lamp or SSL light source packaged with the CFLK. For any CFLK only with non-consumer-replaceable SSL, measure the luminaire efficacy of the CFLK. For any CFLK that includes consumer replaceable lamps or consumer-replaceable SSL and non-consumer-replaceable SSL, measure both the lamp efficacy of each basic model of lamp or consumer-replaceable SSL light source packaged with the CFLK and the luminaire efficacy of the CFLK with all consumer replaceable lamps or consumer-replaceable SSL light sources removed. Take measurements at full light output. For each test, use the test procedures in the table in this section. CFLKs with non-consumer-replaceable SSL and consumer replaceable covers may be measured with their covers removed but must otherwise be measured according to the table in this section. Lighting technology Lamp or luminaire efficacy measured Referenced test procedure Other (non-CFL and non-GSFL) fluorescent lamps Lamp Efficacy IES LM-9-20, sections 4-7 and corresponding subsections including references to IES LM-54-20 (lamp seasoning); IES-LM-78-20 (integrating sphere measurements). CFLKs with consumer-replaceable SSL Lamp Efficacy IES LM-79-19, sections 4-7 and corresponding subsections. Where IES LM-78-17 and IES LM-75-01/R12 are referenced in these sections and corresponding subsections, use IES LM-78-20 (integrating sphere measurements) and IES LM-75-19 (goniophotometer measurements) instead. CFLKs with non-consumer-replaceable SSL Luminaire Efficacy IES LM-79-19, sections 4-7 and corresponding subsections. Where IES LM-78-17 and IES LM-75-01/R12 are referenced in these sections and corresponding subsections, use IES LM-78-20 (integrating sphere measurements) and IES LM-75-19 (goniophotometer measurements) instead. Other SSL lamps that have an ANSI standard base and are not integrated LED lamps Lamp Efficacy IES LM-79-19, sections 4-7 and corresponding subsections. Where IES LM-78-17 and IES LM-75-01/R12 are referenced in these sections and corresponding, use IES LM-78-20 (integrating sphere measurements) and IES LM-75-19 (goniophotometer measurements) instead. [88 FR 21073, Apr. 10, 2023] Appendix W to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Compact Fluorescent Lamps Note 1 to appendix W to subpart B: On and after July 15, 2025, any representations made with respect to the energy efficiency of compact fluorescent lamps must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix W. Manufacturers conducting tests of compact fluorescent lamps prior to July 15, 2025, must conduct such tests in accordance with either this appendix or the procedures in appendix W as it appeared in the Code of Federal Regulations on January 1, 2023. Any representations made with respect to the energy efficiency of compact fluorescent lamps must be in accordance with whichever version is selected. 1. Scope: 1.1. Integrated compact fluorescent lamps. 1.1.1. This appendix specifies the test methods required to measure the initial lamp efficacy, lumen maintenance at 1,000 hours, lumen maintenance at 40 percent of lifetime, time to failure, power factor, correlated color temperature (CCT), color rendering index (CRI), and start time of an integrated compact fluorescent lamp. 1.1.2. This appendix describes how to conduct rapid cycle stress testing for integrated compact fluorescent lamps. 1.1.3. This appendix specifies test methods required to measure standby mode energy consumption applicable to integrated CFLs capable of operation in standby mode (as defined in § 430.2), such as those that can be controlled wirelessly. 1.2. Non-integrated compact fluorescent lamps. 1.2.1. This appendix specifies the test methods required to measure the initial lamp efficacy, lumen maintenance at 40 percent of lifetime, time to failure, CCT, and CRI for non-integrated compact fluorescent lamps. 2. Definitions: 2.1. Ballasted adapter 2.2. Hybrid compact fluorescent lamp 2.3. Initial lamp efficacy 2.4. Integrated compact fluorescent lamp 2.5. Labeled wattage 2.6. Lumen maintenance 2.7. Measured initial input power 2.8. Measured initial lumen output 2.9. Non-integrated compact fluorescent lamp 2.10. Percent variability 2.11. Power factor 2.12. Rated input voltage 2.13. Start plateau 2.14. Start time 2.15. Time to failure 3. Active Mode Test Procedures 3.1. General Instructions. 3.1.1. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over any materials incorporated by reference. 3.1.2. Maintain lamp operating orientation throughout seasoning and testing, including storage and handling between tests. 3.1.3. Season CFLs prior to photometric and electrical testing in accordance with sections 4, 5, 6.1, and 6.2.2.1 of IES LM-54-12 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). Season the CFL for a minimum of 100 hours in accordance with section 6.2.2.1 of IES LM-54-12. During the 100 hour seasoning period, cycle the CFL (operate the lamps for 180 minutes, 20 minutes off) as specified in section 6.4 of IES LM-65-14 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.1.3.1. Unit operating time during seasoning may be counted toward time to failure, lumen maintenance at 40 percent of lifetime of a compact fluorescent lamp (as defined in § 430.2), and lumen maintenance at 1,000 hours if the required operating cycle and test conditions for time to failure testing per section 3.3.1 of this appendix are satisfied. 3.1.3.2. If a lamp breaks, becomes defective, fails to stabilize, exhibits abnormal behavior (such as swirling), or stops producing light prior to the end of the seasoning period, the lamp must be replaced with a new unit. If a lamp exhibits one of the conditions listed in the previous sentence after the seasoning period, the lamp's measurements must be included in the sample. Record number of lamps replaced, if any. 3.1.4. Conduct all testing with the lamp operating at labeled wattage. This requirement applies to all CFLs, including those that are dimmable or multi-level. 3.1.5. If the lamp can operate in multiple modes at the labeled wattage, operate the lamp as not a colored lamp (as defined in 10 CFR 430.2). If multiple modes occur at the same labeled wattage (such as variable CCT or CRI), select any of these modes for testing; however, all measurements must be taken at the same selected mode. The test report must specify which mode was selected for testing and include details such that another laboratory can replicate the test at the same mode. 3.1.6. Operate the CFL at the rated input voltage throughout testing. For a CFL with multiple rated input voltages including 120 volts, operate the CFL at 120 volts. If a CFL with multiple rated input voltages is not rated for 120 volts, operate the CFL at the highest rated input voltage. 3.1.7. Test CFLs packaged with ballasted adapters or designed exclusively for use with ballasted adapters as non-integrated CFLs, with no ballasted adapter in the circuit. 3.1.8. Conduct all testing of hybrid CFLs with all supplemental light sources in the lamp turned off, if possible. Before taking measurements, verify that the lamp has stabilized in the operating mode that corresponds to its primary light source. 3.1.9. For a CFL that has one or more component(s) that offer a completely different functionality ( e.g., e.g., 3.2. Test Procedures for Determining Initial Lamp Efficacy, Lumen Maintenance, CCT, CRI, and Power Factor. Determine initial lamp efficacy, lumen maintenance at 40 percent of lifetime of a compact fluorescent lamp (as defined in in § 430.2), CCT, and CRI for integrated and non-integrated CFLs. Determine lumen maintenance at 1,000 hours and power factor for integrated CFLs only. 3.2.1. Test Conditions and Setup 3.2.1.1. Test half of the units in the sample in the base up position, and half of the units in the base down position; if the position is restricted by the manufacturer, test the units in the manufacturer-specified position. 3.2.1.2. Establish ambient conditions, power supply, auxiliary equipment, circuit setup, lamp connections, and instrumentation in accordance with the specifications in sections (and corresponding subsections) 4.0, 5.0 and 6.0 of IES LM-66-14 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), except maintain ambient temperature at 25 ± 1 °C (77 ± 1.8 °F). 3.2.1.3. Non-integrated CFLs must adhere to the reference ballast requirements in section 5.2 of IES LM-66 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.2.1.3.1. Test non-integrated lamps rated for operation on and having reference ballast characteristics for either low frequency or high frequency circuits ( e.g., 3.2.1.3.2. For low frequency operation, test non-integrated lamps rated for operation on either preheat start (starter) or rapid start (no starter) circuits on preheat. 3.2.1.3.3. Operate non-integrated CFLs not listed in ANSI C78.901-2014 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) using the following reference ballast settings: 3.2.1.3.3.1. Operate 25-28 W, T5 twin 2G11-based lamps that are lower wattage replacements of 40 W, T5 twin 2G11-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 400 volts, 0.270 amps, and 1240 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.2. Operate 14-15 W, T4 quad G24q-2-based lamps that are lower wattage replacements of 18 W, T4 quad G24q-2-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 220 volts, 0.220 amps, and 815 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.3. Operate 21 W, T4 quad G24q-3-based lamps that are lower wattage replacements of 26 W, T4 quad G24q-3-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 220 volts, 0.315 amps, and 546 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.4. Operate 21 W, T4 quad G24d-3-based lamps that are lower wattage replacements of 26 W, T4 quad G24d-3-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 220 volts, 0.315 amps, and 546 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.5. Operate 21 W, T4 multi (6) GX24q-3-based lamps that are lower wattage replacements of 26 W, T4 multi (6) GX24q-3-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 220 volts, 0.315 amps, and 546 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.6. Operate 27-28 W, T4 multi (6) GX24q-3-based lamps that are lower wattage replacements of 32 W, T4 multi (6) GX24q-3-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 20-26 kHz, 200 volts, 0.320 amps, and 315 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.7. Operate 33-38 W, T4 multi (6) GX24q-4-based lamps that are lower wattage replacements of 42 W, T4 multi (6) GX24q-4-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 20-26 kHz, 270 volts, 0.320 amps, and 420 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.8. Operate 10 W, T4 square GR10q-4-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 236 volts, 0.165 amps, and 1,200 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.9. Operate 16 W, T4 square GR10q-4-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 220 volts, 0.195 amps, and 878 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.10. Operate 21 W, T4 square GR10q-4-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 220 volts, 0.260 amps, and 684 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.11. Operate 28 W, T6 square GR10q-4-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 236 volts, 0.320 amps, and 578 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.12. Operate 38 W, T6 square GR10q-4-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 236 volts, 0.430 amps, and 439 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.13. Operate 55 W, T6 square GRY10q-3-based lamps using the following reference ballast settings: 60 Hz, 236 volts, 0.430 amps, and 439 ohms. 3.2.1.3.3.14. For all other lamp designs not listed in ANSI C78.901-2014 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) or section 3.2.1.3.3 of this appendix: 3.2.1.3.3.14.1. If the lamp is a lower wattage replacement of a lamp with specifications in ANSI C78.901-2014, use the reference ballast characteristics of the corresponding higher wattage lamp replacement in ANSI C78.901-2014. 3.2.1.3.3.14.2. For all other lamps, use the reference ballast characteristics in ANSI C78.901-2014 for a lamp with the most similar shape, diameter, and base specifications, and next closest wattage. 3.2.2. Test Methods, Measurements, and Calculations 3.2.2.1. Season CFLs. (See section 3.1.3 of this appendix.) 3.2.2.2. Stabilize CFLs as specified in section 6.2.1 of IES LM-66 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.2.2.3. Measure the input power (in watts), the input voltage (in volts), and the input current (in amps) as specified in section 5.0 of IES LM-66 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.2.2.4. Measure initial lumen output as specified in section 6.3.1 of IES LM-66 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and in accordance with IESNA LM-78-07 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.2.2.5. Measure lumen output at 1,000 hours as specified in section 6.3.1 of IES LM-66 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and in accordance with IESNA LM-78-07 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.2.2.6. Measure lumen output at 40 percent of lifetime of a compact fluorescent lamp (as defined in 10 CFR 430.2) as specified in section 6.3.1 of IES LM-66 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and in accordance with IESNA LM-78-07 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.2.2.7. Determine CCT as specified in section 6.4 of IES LM-66 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and in accordance with CIE 15 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.2.2.8. Determine CRI as specified in section 6.4 of IES LM-66 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and in accordance with CIE 13.3 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.2.2.9. Determine initial lamp efficacy by dividing measured initial lumen output by the measured initial input power. 3.2.2.10. Determine lumen maintenance at 1,000 hours by dividing measured lumen output at 1,000 hours by the measured initial lumen output. 3.2.2.11. Determine lumen maintenance at 40 percent of lifetime of a compact fluorescent lamp (as defined in § 430.2) by dividing measured lumen output at 40 percent of lifetime of a compact fluorescent lamp (as defined in § 430.2) by the measured initial lumen output. 3.2.2.12. Determine power factor by dividing the measured input power (watts) by the product of measured RMS input voltage (volts) and measured RMS input current (amps). 3.3. Test Method for Time to Failure and Rapid Cycle Stress Test. Determine time to failure for integrated and non-integrated CFLs. Conduct rapid cycle stress testing for integrated CFLs only. Disregard section 3.0 of IES LM-65-14. 3.3.1. Test Conditions and Setup 3.3.1.1. Test half of the units in the base up position and half of the units in the base down position; if the position is restricted by the manufacturer, test in the manufacturer-specified position. 3.3.1.2. Establish the ambient and physical conditions and electrical conditions in accordance with the specifications in sections 4.0 and 5.0 of IES LM-65-14 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). Do not, however, test lamps in fixtures or luminaires. 3.3.1.3. Non-integrated CFLs must adhere to ballast requirements as specified in section 3.2.1.3 of this appendix. 3.3.2. Test Methods and Measurements 3.3.2.1. Season CFLs. (See section 3.1.3 of this appendix.) 3.3.2.2. Measure time to failure of CFLs as specified in section 6.0 of IES LM-65-14 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.3.2.3. Conduct rapid cycle stress testing of integrated CFLs as specified in section 6.0 of IES LM-65-14 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), except cycle the lamp continuously with each cycle consisting of one 5-minute ON period followed by one 5-minute OFF period. 3.4. Test Method for Start Time. Determine start time for integrated CFLs only. 3.4.1. Test Conditions and Setup 3.4.1.1. Test all units in the base up position; if the position is restricted by the manufacturer, test units in the manufacturer-specified position. 3.4.1.2. Establish the ambient conditions, power supply, auxiliary equipment, circuit setup, lamp connections, and instrumentation in accordance with the specifications in sections 4.0 and 5.0 of IES LM-66 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), except maintain ambient temperature at 25 ± 1 °C (77 ± 1.8 °F). 3.4.2. Test Methods and Measurement 3.4.2.1. Season CFLs. (See section 3.1.3 of this appendix.) 3.4.2.2. After seasoning, store units at 25 ± 5 °C ambient temperature for a minimum of 16 hours prior to the test, after which the ambient temperature must be 25 ± 1 °C for a minimum of 2 hours immediately prior to the test. Any units that have been off for more than 24 hours must be operated for a minimum of 3.0 hours and then be turned off for 16 to 24 hours prior to testing. 3.4.2.3. Connect multichannel oscilloscope with data storage capability to record input voltage to CFL and light output. Set oscilloscope to trigger at 10 V lamp input voltage. Set oscilloscope vertical scale such that vertical resolution is 1 percent of measured initial light output or finer. Set oscilloscope to sample the light output waveform at a minimum rate of 2 kHz. 3.4.2.4. Operate the CFL at the rated voltage and frequency. 3.4.2.5. Upon the commencement of start time testing, record sampled light output until start plateau has been determined. 3.4.2.6. Calculate the time-averaged light output value at least once every millisecond where the time-averaged light output is computed over one full cycle of sinusoidal input voltage, as a moving average where the measurement interval is incremented by one sample for each successive measurement value. 3.4.2.7. Determine start time. 4. Standby Mode Test Procedure Measure standby mode energy consumption for only integrated CFLs that are capable of operating in standby mode. The standby mode test method in this section may be completed before or after the active test method for determining lumen output, input power, CCT, CRI, and power factor in section 3 of this appendix. The standby mode test method in this section must be completed before the active mode test method for determining time to failure in section 3.3 of this appendix. The standby mode test method must be completed in accordance with applicable provisions in section 3.1. 4.1. Test Conditions and Setup 4.1.1. Position half of the units in the sample in the base up position and half of the units in the base down position; if the position is restricted by the manufacturer, test units in the manufacturer-specified position. 4.1.2. Establish the ambient conditions (including air flow), power supply, electrical settings, and instrumentation in accordance with the specifications in sections 4.0, 5.0 and 6.0 of IES LM-66 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), except maintain ambient temperature at 25 ± 1 °C (77 ± 1.8 °F). 4.2. Test Methods, Measurements, and Calculations 4.2.1. Season CFLs. (See section 3.1.3 of this appendix.) 4.2.2. Connect the integrated CFL to the manufacturer-specified wireless control network (if applicable) and configure the integrated CFL in standby mode by sending a signal to the integrated CFL instructing it to have zero light output. The integrated CFL must remain connected to the network throughout the entire duration of the test. 4.2.3. Stabilize the integrated CFL prior to measurement as specified in section 5 of IEC 62301-W (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 4.2.4. Measure the standby mode energy consumption in watts as specified in section 5 of IEC 62301-W (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). [81 FR 59418, Aug. 29, 2016, as amended at 90 FR 4602, Jan. 16, 2025] Appendix X to Subpart B of Part 430 [Reserved] Appendix X1 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Dehumidifiers Note: After January 22, 2024, any representations made with respect to the energy efficiency of a dehumidifier must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. Manufacturers conducting tests of a dehumidifier prior to January 22, 2024, must conduct such test in accordance with either this appendix or the previous version of this appendix as it appeared in the Code of Federal Regulations on January 1, 2023. Any representations made with respect to the energy efficiency of such dehumidifier must be in accordance with whichever version is selected. Any representations made on or after the compliance date of any amended energy conservation standards, with respect to the energy use or efficiency of portable or whole-home dehumidifiers, must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire standard for AHAM DH-1-2022, ANSI/AMCA 210, ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1, and IEC 62301; however, only enumerated provisions of those documents are applicable to this appendix. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. 0.1 AHAM DH-1-2022 (a) Section 3 “Definitions”, as specified in sections 2 and 3.1.2 of this appendix. (b) Section 4 “Instrumentation”, as specified in sections 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 of this appendix. (c) Section 5.1 “General”, as specified in sections 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 of this appendix. (d) Section 5.2 “Test Room”, as specified in sections 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 of this appendix. (e) Section 5.3 “Positioning of Test Unit”, as specified in sections 3.1.1 and 3.1.1.2 of this appendix. (f) Section 5.5 “Control settings”, as specified in sections 3.1.1, 3.1.1.4, and 3.1.2 of this appendix. (g) Section 7 “Test Tolerances”, as specified in section 4.1.1 of this appendix. (h) Section 8 “Capacity Test”, as specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of this appendix. (i) Section 8.3 “Standard Test Voltage”, as specified in section 3.2.2.1 of this appendix. (j) Section 8.4 “Psychrometer Placement”, as specified in section 3.1.1.2 of this appendix. (k) Section 9 “Energy Consumption”, as specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of this appendix. (l) Section 9.3.2 “Inactive/Off Mode”, as specified in section 4.2 of this appendix. (m) Section 9.3.1 “Off-Cycle Mode”, as specified in section 4.3 of this appendix. (n) Section 9.4 “Calculation of Test Results”, as specified in section 4.1.2 of this appendix. 0.2 ANSI/AMCA 210 (a) Section 5.2.1.6 “Airflow straightener”, as specified in section 3.1.2.1 of this appendix. (b) Figure 6A “Flow Straightener—Cell Type”, as specified in section 3.1.2.1 of this appendix. (c) Section 4.2.2 “Pitot-static tube”, as specified in section 3.1.2.2.3.1 (d) Section 4.2.3 “Static pressure tap”, as specified in section 3.1.2.2.3.1 (e) Section 4.3.1 “Pitot Traverse”, as specified in section 3.1.2.2.3.1 (f) Section 4.3.2 “Flow nozzle”, as specified in section 3.1.2.2.3.1 (g) Section 7.5.2 “Pressure Losses”, as specified in section 3.1.2.2.3.1 (h) Section 7.3.1 “Velocity Traverse”, as specified in section 3.1.2.2.3.2 (i) Section 7.3.2 “Nozzle”, as specified in section 3.1.2.2.3.2 (j) Section 7.3 “Fan airflow rate at test conditions”, as specified in section 5.6 of this appendix. 0.3 ANSI/ASHRAE 41.1 (a) Section 5.3.5 “Centers of Segments—Grids”, as specified in section 3.1.2.2.1 of this appendix. (b) [Reserved] 0.4 IEC 62301 (a) Section 5.2 “Preparation of product”, as specified in section 3.2.1 of this appendix. (b) Section 4.3.2 “Supply voltage waveform”, as specified in section 3.2.2.2 of this appendix. (c) Section 4.4 “Power measuring instruments”, as specified in section 3.2.3 of this appendix. (d) Section 4.2 “Test room”, as specified in section 3.2.4 of this appendix. 1. Scope This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the energy performance of dehumidifiers. 2. Definitions Definitions for terms, modes, calculations, etc. are in accordance with AHAM DH-1-2022, section 3, with the following added definitions: Energy factor for dehumidifiers External static pressure (ESP) Process air Product capacity Product case volume Reactivation air 3. Test Apparatus and General Instructions 3.1 Active mode. 3.1.1 Portable dehumidifiers and whole-home dehumidifiers other than refrigerant-desiccant dehumidifiers. 3.1.1.1 Testing configuration for whole-home dehumidifiers other than refrigerant-desiccant dehumidifiers. 3.1.1.2 Instrumentation placement. 3.1.1.3 Condensate collection. 3.1.1.4 Control settings. 3.1.1.5 Run-in period. 3.1.2 Refrigerant-desiccant dehumidifiers. 3.1.2.1 Testing configuration. 3.1.2.2 Instrumentation. 3.1.2.2.1 Temperature. 3.1.2.2.2 Relative humidity. 3.1.2.2.3 Pressure. 3.1.2.2.3.1 External static pressure. 3.1.2.2.3.2 Velocity pressure. 3.1.2.2.4 Weight. 3.1.2.3 Control settings. 3.1.2.4 Run-in period. 3.1.3 Ducting for whole-home dehumidifiers. 2 2 3.1.4 Recording and rounding. 3.2 Inactive mode and off mode. 3.2.1 Installation requirements. 3.2.2 Electrical energy supply. 3.2.2.1 Electrical supply. 3.2.2.2 Supply voltage waveform. 3.2.3 Inactive mode, off mode, and off-cycle mode wattmeter. 3.2.4 Inactive mode and off mode ambient temperature. 3.3 Case dimensions for whole-home dehumidifiers. 4. Test Measurement 4.1 Dehumidification mode. 4.1.1 Portable dehumidifiers and whole-home dehumidifiers other than refrigerant-desiccant dehumidifiers. Table 1 to Paragraph 4.1.1.—Standard Test Conditions for Dehumidifier Testing Configuration Dry-bulb Aspirating Relative humidity Portable dehumidifiers 65 ± 2.0 56.6 ± 1.0 60 ± 2 Whole-home dehumidifiers 73 ± 2.0 63.6 ± 1.0 60 ± 2 When using relative humidity and dry-bulb temperature sensors, for dehumidifiers with multiple process air intake grilles, average the measured relative humidities and average the measured dry-bulb temperatures to determine the overall intake air conditions. Table 2 to Paragraph 4.1.1.—Relative Humidity as a Function of Dry-Bulb and Wet-Bulb Temperatures for Portable Dehumidifiers Wet-bulb temperature Dry-bulb temperature ( °F) 64.5 64.6 64.7 64.8 64.9 65 65.1 65.2 65.3 65.4 65.5 56.3 60.32 59.94 59.57 59.17 58.8 58.42 58.04 57.67 57.3 56.93 56.56 56.4 60.77 60.38 60 59.62 59.24 58.86 58.48 58.11 57.73 57.36 56.99 56.5 61.22 60.83 60.44 60.06 59.68 59.3 58.92 58.54 58.17 57.8 57.43 56.6 61.66 61.27 60.89 60.5 60.12 59.74 59.36 58.98 58.6 58.23 57.86 56.7 62.4 61.72 61.33 60.95 60.56 60.18 59.8 59.42 59.04 58.67 58.29 56.8 62.56 62.17 61.78 61.39 61 60.62 60.24 59.86 59.48 59.1 58.73 56.9 63.01 62.62 62.23 61.84 61.45 61.06 60.68 60.3 59.92 59.54 59.16 Table 3 to Paragraph 4.1.1.—Relative Humidity as a Function of Dry-Bulb and Wet-Bulb Temperatures for Whole-Home Dehumidifiers Wet-bulb temperature Dry-bulb temperature ( °F) 72.5 72.6 72.7 72.8 72.9 73 73.1 73.2 73.3 73.4 73.5 63.3 60.59 60.26 59.92 59.59 59.26 58.92 58.6 58.27 57.94 57.62 57.3 63.4 60.98 60.64 60.31 59.75 59.64 59.31 58.98 58.65 58.32 58 57.67 63.5 61.37 61.03 60.7 60.36 60.02 59.69 59.36 59.03 58.7 58.38 58.05 63.6 61.76 61.42 61.08 60.75 60.41 60.08 59.74 59.41 59.08 58.76 58.43 63.7 62.16 61.81 61.47 61.13 60.8 60.46 60.13 59.8 59.47 59.14 58.81 63.8 62.55 62.2 61.86 61.52 61.18 60.85 60.51 60.18 59.85 59.52 59.19 63.9 62.94 62.6 62.25 61.91 61.57 61.23 60.9 60.56 60.23 59.9 59.57 4.1.2 Refrigerant-desiccant dehumidifiers. (a) Each measurement of the temperature and relative humidity of the air entering the process air inlet duct and the reactivation air inlet must be within 73 °F ± 2.0 °F dry-bulb temperature and 60 percent ± 5 percent relative humidity, and the arithmetic average of the inlet test conditions over the test period shall be within 73 °F ± 0.5 °F dry-bulb temperature and 60 percent ± 2 percent relative humidity; (b) Disregard the instructions for psychrometer placement; (c) Record dry-bulb temperatures, relative humidities, static pressures, velocity pressures in each duct, volumetric air flow rates, and the number of measurements in the test period; (d) Disregard the requirement to weigh the condensate collected during the test; (e) The rating test period must be 2 hours; and (f) To perform the calculations in section 9.4, “Calculation of Test Results,” of AHAM DH-1-2022: (i) Replace “Condensate collected (lb)” and “mlb”, with the weight of condensate removed, W, as calculated in section 5.6 of this appendix; and (ii) Use the recorded relative humidities, not the tables in section 4.1.1 of this appendix, to determine average relative humidity. 4.2 Off-cycle mode. 4.3 Inactive and off mode. 4.4 Product case volume for whole-home dehumidifiers. L W H 5. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements 5.1 Corrected relative humidity. H c,p H t B H c,wh H t B Where: H c,p H c,wh H t B = average barometric pressure during the test period in in. Hg. 5.2 Corrected product capacity. C r,p C t C t t C t H C,p C r,wh C t C t T t C t H C,wh Where: C r,p C r,wh C t T t H C,p H C,wh 5.3 Annual combined low-power mode energy consumption. TLP E TLP IO IO OC OC Where: P IO IA OM P OC S IO S OC K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kWh. 5.4 Integrated energy factor. Where: C r 2 = dehumidification mode test duration in hours; E DM E TLP 1,095 = dehumidification mode annual hours, used to convert E TLP 1.04 = the density of water in pounds per pint; 0.454 = the liters of water per pound of water; and 24 = the number of hours per day. 5.5 Absolute humidity for refrigerant-desiccant dehumidifiers. 5.5.1 Temperature in Kelvin. The air dry-bulb temperature, in Kelvin, is: Where: T F 5.5.2 Water saturation pressure. The water saturation pressure, expressed in kilopascals (kPa), is: Where: T K 5.5.3 Vapor pressure. The water vapor pressure, expressed in kilopascals (kPa), is: Where: RH = percent relative humidity during the rating test period; and P ws 5.5.4 Mixing humidity ratio. The mixing humidity ratio, the mass of water per mass of dry air, is: Where: P w P = measured ambient barometric pressure in in. Hg; 3.386 = the conversion factor from in. Hg to kPa; and 0.62198 = the ratio of the molecular weight of water to the molecular weight of dry air. 5.5.5 Specific volume. The specific volume, expressed in feet cubed per pounds of dry air, is: Where: T K P = measured ambient barometric pressure in in. Hg; P w 0.287055 = the specific gas constant for dry air in kPa times cubic meter per kg per K; 3.386 = the conversion factor from in. Hg to kPa; and 16.016 = the conversion factor from cubic meters per kilogram to cubic feet per pound. 5.5.6 Absolute humidity. The absolute humidity, expressed in pounds of water per cubic foot of air, is: Where: HR = the mixing humidity ratio, the mass of water per mass of dry air, as calculated in section 5.5.4 of this appendix; and ν = the specific volume in cubic feet per pound of dry air, as calculated in section 5.5.5 of this appendix. 5.6 Product capacity for refrigerant-desiccant dehumidifiers. Where: n = number of samples during the test period in section 4.1.1.2 of this appendix; AH I,i i X I,i i AH O,i i X O,i i t = time interval in seconds between samples, with a maximum of 60; and 60 = conversion from minutes to seconds. The capacity, C t Where: 24 = number of hours per day; 1.04 = density of water in pounds per pint; and T = total test period time in hours. Then correct the product capacity, C r,wh 5.7 Product case volume for whole-home dehumidifiers. Where: D L D W D H 1,728 = conversion from cubic inches to cubic feet. [80 FR 45826, July 31, 2015, as amended at 88 FR 48052, July 26, 2023] Appendix Y to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Battery Chargers Note 1: For all Battery Chargers, including UPSs, compliance with the relevant standard in § 430.32(z) or any representation must be based upon results generated under the corresponding appendix listed in the following table: Battery chargers other than UPSs UPS On or After July 3, 2024 and Before October 16, 2024 Use appendix Y as it appeared on either March 7, 2023, or July 3, 2024 Use appendix Y as it appeared on either March 7, 2023, or July 3, 2024. On or After October 16, 2024 and Before compliance date of any new or amended standards published any time after September 2022 Use appendix Y as it appeared on July 3, 2024. Use appendix Y as it appeared on July 3, 2024. On or After compliance date of any new or amended standards published any time after September 2022 Use appendix Y1 Use appendix Y1. For any amended standards for battery chargers published after September 8, 2022, manufacturers must use the results of testing under appendix Y1 to determine compliance. Representations related to energy consumption must be made in accordance with the appropriate appendix that applies ( i.e., 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3 the entire test standard for IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0. However, only enumerated provisions of this standard are applicable to this appendix, as follows. In cases in which there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the referenced test standard. 0.1 IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0: (a) Section 3.5, Specified values; (b) Section 3.5.49, total harmonic distortion; (c) Section 5, Electrical conditions, performance and declared values; (d) Section 5.2, UPS input specification, as specified in section 2.27.2 of this appendix; (e) Section 5.2.1, Conditions for normal mode of operation; Clause 5.2.1.a; (f) Clause 5.2.1.b; (g) Section 5.2.2, Conditions to be declared by the manufacturer; Clause 5.2.2.k; (h) Clause 5.2.2.l; (i) Clause 5.2.2.m; (j) Section 5.3, UPS output specification; Section 5.3.2, Characteristics to be declared by the manufacturer; Clause 5.3.2.b; (k) Clause 5.3.2.c; (l) Clause 5.3.2.d; (m) Clause 5.3.2.e; (n) Section 5.3.4.2, Input dependency AAA; (o) Section 6.2, Routine test procedure; Section 6.2.2, Electrical; Section 6.2.2.4, No load, as specified in section 4.3.3(c) of this appendix; (p) Section 6.2.2.7, AC input failure, as specified in Note to section 2.27.1 of this appendix; (q) Section 6.4, Type test procedure (electrical); Section 6.4.1, Input—AC input power compatibility; Section 6.4.1.2, Steady state input voltage tolerance and VI input independency, as specified in Note to section 2.27.3 of this appendix; (r) Section 6.4.1.3, Combined input voltage/frequency tolerance and VFI input independency, as specified in Note to section 2.27.2 of this appendix; (s) Annex G—AC input power failure—Test method; (t) Annex J—UPS efficiency and no load losses—Methods of measurement, as specified in sections 4.2.1 and 4.3.3 of this appendix. 0.2 [Reserved] 1. Scope This appendix provides the test requirements used to measure the energy consumption of battery chargers operating at either DC or United States AC line voltage (115V at 60Hz). This appendix also provides the test requirements used to measure the energy efficiency of uninterruptible power supplies as defined in section 2 of this appendix that utilize the standardized National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) plug, 1-15P or 5-15P, as specified in ANSI/NEMA WD 6-2016 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) and have an AC output. This appendix does not provide a method for testing back-up battery chargers. 2. Definitions The following definitions are for the purposes of explaining the terminology associated with the test method for measuring battery charger energy consumption. 1 1 2.1. Active mode charge mode 2.2. Active power real power 2.3. Ambient temperature 2.4. Apparent power 2.5. Batch charger 2.6. Battery battery pack 2.7. Battery energy 2.8. Battery maintenance mode maintenance mode 2.9. Battery rest period 2.10. C-Rate (C) 2.11. Cradle 2.12. Energy storage system 2.13. Equalization 2.14. Instructions manufacturer's instructions 2.15. Measured charge capacity 2.16. Manual on-off switch 2.17. Multi-port charger 2.18. Multi-voltage charger 2.19. Normal mode (1) The AC input supply is within required tolerances and supplies the UPS, (2) The energy storage system is being maintained at full charge or is under recharge, and (3) The load connected to the UPS is within the UPS's specified power rating. 2.20. Off mode (1) Is connected to the main electricity supply; (2) Is not connected to the battery; and (3) All manual on-off switches are turned off. 2.21. Nameplate battery voltage 2.22. Nameplate battery charge capacity 2.23. Nameplate battery energy capacity 2.24. Reference test load 2.25. Standby mode no-battery mode (1) The battery charger is connected to the main electricity supply; (2) The battery is not connected to the charger; and (3) For battery chargers with manual on-off switches, all such switches are turned on. 2.26. Total harmonic distortion (THD), 2.27. Uninterruptible power supply or UPS 2.27.1. Voltage and frequency dependent UPS or VFD UPS Note to 2.27.1: 2.27.2. Voltage and frequency independent UPS or VFI UPS Note to 2.27.2: 2.27.3. Voltage independent UPS or VI UPS Note to 2.27.3: 2.28. Unit under test 3. Testing Requirements for all Battery Chargers Other Than Uninterruptible Power Supplies 3.1. Standard Test Conditions 3.1.1 General The values that may be measured or calculated during the conduct of this test procedure have been summarized for easy reference in Table 3.1.1. of this appendix. Table 3.1.1—List of Measured or Calculated Values Name of measured or Reference 1. Duration of the charge and maintenance mode test Section 3.3.2. 2. Battery Discharge Energy Section 3.3.8. 3. Initial time and power (W) of the input current of connected battery Section 3.3.6. 4. Active and Maintenance Mode Energy Consumption Section 3.3.6. 5. Maintenance Mode Power Section 3.3.9. 6. 24 Hour Energy Consumption Section 3.3.10. 7. Standby Mode Power Section 3.3.11. 8. Off Mode Power Section 3.3.12. 9. Unit Energy Consumption, UEC (kWh/yr) Section 3.3.13. 3.1.2. Verifying Accuracy and Precision of Measuring Equipment Any power measurement equipment utilized for testing must conform to the uncertainty and resolution requirements outlined in section 4, “General conditions for measurement”, as well as annexes B, “Notes on the measurement of low power modes”, and D, “Determination of uncertainty of measurement”, of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). 3.1.3. Setting Up the Test Room All tests, battery conditioning, and battery rest periods shall be carried out in a room with an air speed immediately surrounding the UUT of ≤0.5 m/s. The ambient temperature shall be maintained at 20 °C ± 5 °C throughout the test. There shall be no intentional cooling of the UUT such as by use of separately powered fans, air conditioners, or heat sinks. The UUT shall be conditioned, rested, and tested on a thermally non-conductive surface. When not undergoing active testing, batteries shall be stored at 20 °C ± 5 °C. 3.1.4. Verifying the UUT's Input Voltage and Input Frequency (a) If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input in the United States, it shall be tested at 115 V at 60 Hz. If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input but cannot be operated at 115 V at 60 Hz, it shall not be tested. (b) If a charger is powered by a low-voltage DC or AC input, and the manufacturer packages the charger with an external power supply (“EPS”), sells, or recommends an optional EPS capable of providing that low voltage input, then the charger shall be tested using that EPS and the input reference source shall be 115 V at 60 Hz. If the EPS cannot be operated with AC input voltage at 115 V at 60 Hz, the charger shall not be tested. (c) If the UUT is designed for operation only on DC input voltage and the provisions of section 3.1.4(b) of this appendix do not apply, it shall be tested with one of the following input voltages: 5.0 V DC for products drawing power from a computer USB port or the midpoint of the rated input voltage range for all other products. The input voltage shall be within ±1 percent of the above specified voltage. (d) If the input voltage is AC, the input frequency shall be within ±1 percent of the specified frequency. The THD of the input voltage shall be ≤2 percent, up to and including the 13th harmonic. The crest factor of the input voltage shall be between 1.34 and 1.49. (e) If the input voltage is DC, the AC ripple voltage (RMS) shall be: (1) ≤0.2 V for DC voltages up to 10 V; or (2) ≤2 percent of the DC voltage for DC voltages over 10 V. 3.2. Unit Under Test Setup Requirements 3.2.1. General Setup (a) The battery charger system shall be prepared and set up in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except where those instructions conflict with the requirements of this test procedure. If no instructions are given, then factory or “default” settings shall be used, or where there are no indications of such settings, the UUT shall be tested in the condition as it would be supplied to an end user. (b) If the battery charger has user controls to select from two or more charge rates (such as regular or fast charge) or different charge currents, the test shall be conducted at the fastest charge rate that is recommended by the manufacturer for everyday use, or, failing any explicit recommendation, the factory-default charge rate. If the charger has user controls for selecting special charge cycles that are recommended only for occasional use to preserve battery health, such as equalization charge, removing memory, or battery conditioning, these modes are not required to be tested. The settings of the controls shall be listed in the report for each test. 3.2.2. Selection and Treatment of the Battery Charger The UUT, including the battery charger and its associated battery, shall be new products of the type and condition that would be sold to a customer. If the battery is lead-acid chemistry and the battery is to be stored for more than 24 hours between its initial acquisition and testing, the battery shall be charged before such storage. 3.2.3. Selection of Batteries To Use for Testing (a) For chargers with integral batteries, the battery packaged with the charger shall be used for testing. For chargers with detachable batteries, the battery or batteries to be used for testing will vary depending on whether there are any batteries packaged with the battery charger. (1) If batteries are packaged with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from the batteries packaged with the battery charger, according to the procedure in section 3.2.3(b) of this appendix. (2) If no batteries are packaged with the charger, but the instructions specify or recommend batteries for use with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from those recommended or specified in the instructions, according to the procedure in section 3.2.3(b) of this appendix. (3) If no batteries are packaged with the charger and the instructions do not specify or recommend batteries for use with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from any that are suitable for use with the charger, according to the procedure in section 3.2.3(b) of this appendix. (b)(1) From the detachable batteries specified above, use Table 3.2.1 of this appendix to select the batteries to be used for testing, depending on the type of battery charger being tested. The battery charger types represented by the rows in the table are mutually exclusive. Find the single applicable row for the UUT, and test according to those requirements. Select only the single battery configuration specified for the battery charger type in Table 3.2.1 of this appendix. (2) If the battery selection criteria specified in Table 3.2.1 of this appendix results in two or more batteries or configurations of batteries of different chemistries, but with equal voltage and capacity ratings, determine the maintenance mode power, as specified in section 3.3.9 of this appendix, for each of the batteries or configurations of batteries, and select for testing the battery or configuration of batteries with the highest maintenance mode power. (c) A charger is considered as: (1) Single-capacity if all associated batteries have the same nameplate battery charge capacity (see definition) and, if it is a batch charger, all configurations of the batteries have the same nameplate battery charge capacity. (2) Multi-capacity if there are associated batteries or configurations of batteries that have different nameplate battery charge capacities. (d) The selected battery or batteries will be referred to as the “test battery” and will be used through the remainder of this test procedure. Table 3.2.1—Battery Selection for Testing Type of charger Tests to perform Multi-voltage Multi-port Multi-capacity Battery selection No No No Any associated battery. No No Yes Highest charge capacity battery. No Yes Yes or No Use all ports. Use the maximum number of identical batteries with the highest nameplate battery charge capacity that the charger can accommodate. Yes No No Highest voltage battery. Yes Yes to either or both Use all ports. Use the battery or configuration of batteries with the highest individual voltage. If multiple batteries meet this criteria, then use the battery or configuration of batteries with the highest total nameplate battery charge capacity at the highest individual voltage. 3.2.4. Limiting Other Non-Battery-Charger Functions (a) If the battery charger or product containing the battery charger does not have any additional functions unrelated to battery charging, this subsection may be skipped. (b) Any optional functions controlled by the user and not associated with the battery charging process ( e.g., (c) If the battery charger takes any physically separate connectors or cables not required for battery charging but associated with its other functionality (such as phone lines, serial or USB connections, Ethernet, cable TV lines, etc. (d) Any manual on-off switches specifically associated with the battery charging process shall be switched on for the duration of the charge, maintenance, and no-battery mode tests, and switched off for the off mode test. 3.2.5. Accessing the Battery for the Test (a) The technician may need to disassemble the end-use product or battery charger to gain access to the battery terminals for the Battery Discharge Energy Test in section 3.3.8 of this appendix. If the battery terminals are not clearly labeled, the technician shall use a voltmeter to identify the positive and negative terminals. These terminals will be the ones that give the largest voltage difference and are able to deliver significant current (0.2 C or 1/hr) into a load. (b) All conductors used for contacting the battery must be cleaned and burnished prior to connecting in order to decrease voltage drops and achieve consistent results. (c) Manufacturer's instructions for disassembly shall be followed, except those instructions that: (1) Lead to any permanent alteration of the battery charger circuitry or function; (2) Could alter the energy consumption of the battery charger compared to that experienced by a user during typical use, e.g., (3) Conflict requirements of this test procedure. (d) Care shall be taken by the technician during disassembly to follow appropriate safety precautions. If the functionality of the device or its safety features is compromised, the product shall be discarded after testing. (e) Some products may include protective circuitry between the battery cells and the remainder of the device. If the manufacturer provides a description for accessing the connections at the output of the protective circuitry, these connections shall be used to discharge the battery and measure the discharge energy. The energy consumed by the protective circuitry during discharge shall not be measured or credited as battery energy. (f) If any of the following conditions noted immediately below in sections 3.2.5.(f)(1) to 3.2.5.(f)(3) are applicable, preventing the measurement of the Battery Discharge Energy and the Charging and Maintenance Mode Energy, a manufacturer must submit a petition for a test procedure waiver in accordance with § 430.27: (1) Inability to access the battery terminals; (2) Access to the battery terminals destroys charger functionality; or (3) Inability to draw current from the test battery. 3.2.6. Determining Charge Capacity for Batteries With No Rating (a) If there is no rating for the battery charge capacity on the battery or in the instructions, then the technician shall determine a discharge current that meets the following requirements. The battery shall be fully charged and then discharged at this constant-current rate until it reaches the end-of-discharge voltage specified in Table 3.3.2 of this appendix. The discharge time must be not less than 4.5 hours nor more than 5 hours. In addition, the discharge test (section 3.3.8 of this appendix) (which may not be starting with a fully-charged battery) shall reach the end-of-discharge voltage within 5 hours. The same discharge current shall be used for both the preparations step (section 3.3.4 of this appendix) and the discharge test (section 3.3.8 of this appendix). The test report shall include the discharge current used and the resulting discharge times for both a fully-charged battery and for the discharge test. (b) For this section, the battery is considered as “fully charged” when either: it has been charged by the UUT until an indicator on the UUT shows that the charge is complete; or it has been charged by a battery analyzer at a current not greater than the discharge current until the battery analyzer indicates that the battery is fully charged. (c) When there is no capacity rating, a suitable discharge current must generally be determined by trial and error. Since the conditioning step does not require constant-current discharges, the trials themselves may also be counted as part of battery conditioning. 3.3. Test Measurement The test sequence to measure the battery charger energy consumption is summarized in Table 3.3.1 of this appendix, and explained in detail in this appendix. Measurements shall be made under test conditions and with the equipment specified in sections 3.1 and 3.2 of this appendix. Table 3.3.1—Test Sequence Step/Description Data taken? Equipment needed Test Charger Battery AC power meter Thermometer 1. Record general data on UUT; Section 3.3.1 Yes X X 2. Determine test duration; Section 3.3.2 No 3. Battery conditioning; Section 3.3.3 No X X X 4. Prepare battery for charge test; Section 3.3.4 No X X 5. Battery rest period; Section 3.3.5 No X X 6. Conduct Charge Mode and Battery Maintenance Mode Test; Section 3.3.6 Yes X X X 7. Battery Rest Period; Section 3.3.7 No X X 8. Battery Discharge Energy Test; Section 3.3.8 Yes X X 9. Determining the Maintenance Mode Power; Section 3.3.9 Yes X X X 10. Calculating the 24-Hour Energy Consumption; Section 3.3.10 No 11. Standby Mode Test; Section 3.3.11 Yes X X 12. Off Mode Test; Section 3.3.12 Yes X X 3.3.1. Recording General Data on the UUT The technician shall record: (a) The manufacturer and model of the battery charger; (b) The presence and status of any additional functions unrelated to battery charging; (c) The manufacturer, model, and number of batteries in the test battery; (d) The nameplate battery voltage of the test battery; (e) The nameplate battery charge capacity of the test battery; and (f) The nameplate battery charge energy of the test battery. (g) The settings of the controls, if battery charger has user controls to select from two or more charge rates. 3.3.2. Determining the Duration of the Charge and Maintenance Mode Test (a) The charging and maintenance mode test, described in detail in section 3.3.6 of this appendix, shall be 24 hours in length or longer, as determined by the items below. Proceed in order until a test duration is determined. (1) If the battery charger has an indicator to show that the battery is fully charged, that indicator shall be used as follows: If the indicator shows that the battery is charged after 19 hours of charging, the test shall be terminated at 24 hours. Conversely, if the full-charge indication is not yet present after 19 hours of charging, the test shall continue until 5 hours after the indication is present. (2) If there is no indicator, but the manufacturer's instructions indicate that charging this battery or this capacity of battery should be complete within 19 hours, the test shall be for 24 hours. If the instructions indicate that charging may take longer than 19 hours, the test shall be run for the longest estimated charge time plus 5 hours. (3) If there is no indicator and no time estimate in the instructions, but the charging current is stated on the charger or in the instructions, calculate the test duration as the longer of 24 hours or: (b) If none of the above applies, the duration of the test shall be 24 hours. 3.3.3. Battery Conditioning (a) No conditioning is to be done on lithium-ion batteries. The test technician shall proceed directly to battery preparation, section 3.3.4 of this appendix, when testing chargers for these batteries. (b) Products with integral batteries will have to be disassembled per the instructions in section 3.2.5 of this appendix, and the battery disconnected from the charger for discharging. (c) Batteries of other chemistries that have not been previously cycled are to be conditioned by performing two charges and two discharges, followed by a charge, as below. No data need be recorded during battery conditioning. (1) The test battery shall be fully charged for the duration specified in section 3.3.2 of this appendix or longer using the UUT. (2) The test battery shall then be fully discharged using either: (i) A battery analyzer at a rate not to exceed 1 C, until its average cell voltage under load reaches the end-of-discharge voltage specified in Table 3.3.2 of this appendix for the relevant battery chemistry; or (ii) The UUT, until the UUT ceases operation due to low battery voltage. (3) The test battery shall again be fully charged as in step (c)(1) of this section. (4) The test battery shall again be fully discharged as per step (c)(2) of this section. (5) The test battery shall be again fully charged as in step (c)(1) of this section. (d) Batteries of chemistries, other than lithium-ion, that are known to have been through at least two previous full charge/discharge cycles shall only be charged once per step (c)(5), of this section. 3.3.4. Preparing the Battery for Charge Testing Following any conditioning prior to beginning the battery charge test (section 3.3.6 of this appendix), the test battery shall be fully discharged to the end of discharge voltage prescribed in Table 3.3.2 of this appendix, or until the UUT circuitry terminates the discharge. 3.3.5. Resting the Battery The test battery shall be rested between preparation and the battery charge test. The rest period shall be at least one hour and not exceed 24 hours. For batteries with flooded cells, the electrolyte temperature shall be less than 30 °C before charging, even if the rest period must be extended longer than 24 hours. 3.3.6. Testing Charge Mode and Battery Maintenance Mode (a) The Charge and Battery Maintenance Mode test measures the energy consumed during charge mode and some time spent in the maintenance mode of the UUT. Functions required for battery conditioning that happen only with some user-selected switch or other control shall not be included in this measurement. (The technician shall manually turn off any battery conditioning cycle or setting.) Regularly occurring battery conditioning or maintenance functions that are not controlled by the user will, by default, be incorporated into this measurement. (b) During the measurement period, input power values to the UUT shall be recorded at least once every minute. (1) If possible, the technician shall set the data logging system to record the average power during the sample interval. The total energy is computed as the sum of power samples (in watts) multiplied by the sample interval (in hours). (2) If this setting is not possible, then the power analyzer shall be set to integrate or accumulate the input power over the measurement period and this result shall be used as the total energy. (c) The technician shall follow these steps: (1) Ensure that the user-controllable device functionality not associated with battery charging and any battery conditioning cycle or setting are turned off, as instructed in section 3.2.4 of this appendix; (2) Ensure that the test battery used in this test has been conditioned, prepared, discharged, and rested as described in sections 3.3.3 through 3.3.5 of this appendix; (3) Connect the data logging equipment to the battery charger; (4) Record the start time of the measurement period, and begin logging the input power; (5) Connect the test battery to the battery charger within 3 minutes of beginning logging. For integral battery products, connect the product to a cradle or EPS within 3 minutes of beginning logging; (6) After the test battery is connected, record the initial time and power (W) of the input current to the UUT. These measurements shall be taken within the first 10 minutes of active charging; (7) Record the input power for the duration of the “Charging and Maintenance Mode Test” period, as determined by section 3.3.2 of this appendix. The actual time that power is connected to the UUT shall be within ±5 minutes of the specified period; and (8) Disconnect power to the UUT, terminate data logging, and record the final time. 3.3.7. Resting the Battery The test battery shall be rested between charging and discharging. The rest period shall be at least 1 hour and not more than 4 hours, with an exception for flooded cells. For batteries with flooded cells, the electrolyte temperature shall be less than 30 °C before charging, even if the rest period must be extended beyond 4 hours. 3.3.8. Battery Discharge Energy Test (a) If multiple batteries were charged simultaneously, the discharge energy is the sum of the discharge energies of all the batteries. (1) For a multi-port charger, batteries that were charged in separate ports shall be discharged independently. (2) For a batch charger, batteries that were charged as a group may be discharged individually, as a group, or in sub-groups connected in series and/or parallel. The position of each battery with respect to the other batteries need not be maintained. (b) During discharge, the battery voltage and discharge current shall be sampled and recorded at least once per minute. The values recorded may be average or instantaneous values. (c) For this test, the technician shall follow these steps: (1) Ensure that the test battery has been charged by the UUT and rested according to sections 3.3.6. and 3.3.7 of this appendix. (2) Set the battery analyzer for a constant discharge rate and the end-of-discharge voltage in Table 3.3.2 of this appendix for the relevant battery chemistry. (3) Connect the test battery to the analyzer and begin recording the voltage, current, and wattage, if available from the battery analyzer. When the end-of-discharge voltage is reached or the UUT circuitry terminates the discharge, the test battery shall be returned to an open-circuit condition. If current continues to be drawn from the test battery after the end-of-discharge condition is first reached, this additional energy is not to be counted in the battery discharge energy. (d) If not available from the battery analyzer, the battery discharge energy (in watt-hours) is calculated by multiplying the voltage (in volts), current (in amperes), and sample period (in hours) for each sample, and then summing over all sample periods until the end-of-discharge voltage is reached. 3.3.9. Determining the Maintenance Mode Power After the measurement period is complete, the technician shall determine the average maintenance mode power consumption by examining the power-versus-time data from the charge and maintenance test and: (a) If the maintenance mode power is cyclic or shows periodic pulses, compute the average power over a time period that spans a whole number of cycles and includes at least the last 4 hours. (b) Otherwise, calculate the average power value over the last 4 hours. 3.3.10. Determining the 24-Hour Energy Consumption The accumulated energy or the average input power, integrated over the test period from the charge and maintenance mode test, shall be used to calculate 24-hour energy consumption. Table 3.3.2—Required Battery Discharge Rates and End-of-Discharge Battery Voltages Battery chemistry Discharge rate End-of-discharge Valve-Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) 0.2 1.75 Flooded Lead Acid 0.2 1.70 Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) 0.2 1.0 Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) 0.2 1.0 Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) 0.2 2.5 Lithium-Ion Polymer 0.2 2.5 Lithium Iron Phosphate 0.2 2.0 Rechargeable Alkaline 0.2 0.9 Silver Zinc 0.2 1.2 * If the presence of protective circuitry prevents the battery cells from being discharged to the end-of-discharge voltage specified, then discharge battery cells to the lowest possible voltage permitted by the protective circuitry. 3.3.11. Standby Mode Energy Consumption Measurement The standby mode measurement depends on the configuration of the battery charger, as follows: (a) Conduct a measurement of standby power consumption while the battery charger is connected to the power source. Disconnect the battery from the charger, allow the charger to operate for at least 30 minutes, and record the power ( i.e., (b) Standby mode may also apply to products with integral batteries, as follows: (1) If the product uses a cradle and/or adapter for power conversion and charging, then “disconnecting the battery from the charger” will require disconnection of the end-use product, which contains the batteries. The other enclosures of the battery charging system will remain connected to the main electricity supply, and standby mode power consumption will equal that of the cradle and/or adapter alone. (2) If the product is powered through a detachable AC power cord and contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry, then only the cord will remain connected to mains, and standby mode power consumption will equal that of the AC power cord ( i.e., (3) If the product contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry but is powered through a non-detachable AC power cord or plug blades, then no part of the system will remain connected to mains, and standby mode measurement is not applicable. 3.3.12. Off Mode Energy Consumption Measurement The off mode measurement depends on the configuration of the battery charger, as follows: (a) If the battery charger has manual on-off switches, record a measurement of off mode energy consumption while the battery charger is connected to the power source. Remove the battery from the charger, allow the charger to operate for at least 30 minutes, and record the power ( i.e., (b) Off mode may also apply to products with integral batteries, as follows: (1) If the product uses a cradle and/or adapter for power conversion and charging, then “disconnecting the battery from the charger” will require disconnection of the end-use product, which contains the batteries. The other enclosures of the battery charging system will remain connected to the main electricity supply, and off mode power consumption will equal that of the cradle and/or adapter alone. (2) If the product is powered through a detachable AC power cord and contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry, then only the cord will remain connected to mains, and off mode power consumption will equal that of the AC power cord ( i.e., (3) If the product contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry but is powered through a non-detachable AC power cord or plug blades, then no part of the system will remain connected to mains, and off mode measurement is not applicable. 3.3.13. Unit Energy Consumption Calculation Unit energy consumption (UEC) shall be calculated for a battery charger using one of the two equations (equation (i) or equation (ii)) listed in this section. If a battery charger is tested and its charge duration as determined in section 3.3.2 of this appendix minus 5 hours is greater than the threshold charge time listed in Table 3.3.3 of this appendix ( i.e. cd a&m Where: E 24 Measured E batt P m P sb P off t cd t a&m n sb off Table 3.3.3—Battery Charger Usage Profiles Product class Hours per day *** Charges Threshold Number Description Measured battery energy batt Special Active + a & m Standby sb Off off Number Hours 1 Low-Energy ≤5 Wh Inductive Connection **** 20.66 0.10 0.00 0.15 137.73 2 Low-Energy, Low-Voltage <100 Wh <4 V 7.82 5.29 0.00 0.54 14.48 3 Low-Energy, Medium-Voltage 4-10 V 6.42 0.30 0.00 0.10 64.20 4 Low-Energy, High-Voltage >10 V 16.84 0.91 0.00 0.50 33.68 5 Medium-Energy, Low-Voltage 100-3000 Wh <20 V 6.52 1.16 0.00 0.11 59.27 6 Medium-Energy, High-Voltage ≥20 V 17.15 6.85 0.00 0.34 50.44 7 High-Energy >3000 Wh 8.14 7.30 0.00 0.32 25.44 * If the duration of the charge test (minus 5 hours) as determined in section 3.3.2. of this appendix exceeds the threshold charge time, use equation (ii) to calculate UEC otherwise use equation (i). ** Measured E batt *** If the total time does not sum to 24 hours per day, the remaining time is allocated to unplugged time, which means there is 0 power consumption and no changes to the UEC calculation needed. **** Fixed-location inductive wireless charger only. 4. Testing Requirements for Uninterruptible Power Supplies 4.1. Standard Test Conditions 4.1.1. Measuring Equipment (a) The power or energy meter must provide true root mean square (r. m. s) measurements of the active input and output measurements, with an uncertainty at full rated load of less than or equal to 0.5% at the 95% confidence level notwithstanding that voltage and current waveforms can include harmonic components. The meter must measure input and output values simultaneously. (b) All measurement equipment used to conduct the tests must be calibrated within the measurement equipment manufacturer specified calibration period by a standard traceable to International System of Units such that measurements meet the uncertainty requirements specified in section 4.1.1(a) of this appendix. 4.1.2. Test Room Requirements All portions of the test must be carried out in a room with an air speed immediately surrounding the UUT of ≤0.5 m/s in all directions. Maintain the ambient temperature in the range of 20.0 °C to 30.0 °C, including all inaccuracies and uncertainties introduced by the temperature measurement equipment, throughout the test. No intentional cooling of the UUT, such as by use of separately powered fans, air conditioners, or heat sinks, is permitted. Test the UUT on a thermally non-conductive surface. 4.1.3. Input Voltage and Input Frequency The AC input voltage and frequency to the UPS during testing must be within 3 percent of the highest rated voltage and within 1 percent of the highest rated frequency of the device. 4.2. Unit Under Test Setup Requirements 4.2.1. General Setup Configure the UPS according to Annex J.2 of IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0 with the following additional requirements: (a) UPS Operating Mode Conditions. (b) Energy Storage System. (1) If the UUT has a battery charge indicator, charge the battery for 5 hours after the UUT has indicated that it is fully charged. (2) If the UUT does not have a battery charge indicator but the user manual shipped with the UUT specifies a time to reach full charge, charge the battery for 5 hours longer than the time specified. (3) If the UUT does not have a battery charge indicator or user manual instructions, charge the battery for 24 hours. (c) DC output port(s). 4.2.2. Additional Features (a) Any feature unrelated to maintaining the energy storage system at full charge or delivery of load power ( e.g., (b) If the UPS takes any physically separate connectors or cables not required for maintaining the energy storage system at full charge or delivery of load power but associated with other features (such as serial or USB connections, Ethernet, etc.), these connectors or cables shall be left disconnected during the test. (c) Any manual on-off switches specifically associated with maintaining the energy storage system at full charge or delivery of load power shall be switched on for the duration of the test. 4.3. Test Measurement and Calculation Efficiency can be calculated from either average power or accumulated energy. 4.3.1. Average Power Calculations If efficiency calculation are to be made using average power, calculate the average power consumption (P avg Where: P avg P i i n 4.3.2. Steady State Operate the UUT and the load for a sufficient length of time to reach steady state conditions. To determine if steady state conditions have been attained, perform the following steady state check, in which the difference between the two efficiency calculations must be less than 1 percent: (a)(1) Simultaneously measure the UUT's input and output power for at least 5 minutes, as specified in section 4.3.1 of this appendix, and record the average of each over the duration as P avg__in P avg__out (2) Simultaneously measure the UUT's input and output energy for at least 5 minutes and record the accumulation of each over the duration as E in E out (b) Calculate the UUT's efficiency, Eff 1 Where: Eff P avg__out P avg__in Where: Eff E out E in (c) Wait a minimum of 10 minutes. (d) Repeat the steps listed in paragraphs (a) and (b) of section 4.3.2 of this appendix to calculate another efficiency value, Eff 2 (e) Determine if the product is at steady state using the following equation: If the percentage difference of Eff 1 Eff 2 (f) If the percentage difference is greater than or equal to 1 percent, the product is not at steady state. Repeat the steps listed in paragraphs (c) to (e) of section 4.3.2 of this appendix until the product is at steady state. 4.3.3. Power Measurements and Efficiency Calculations Measure input and output power of the UUT according to section J.3 of Annex J of IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0, or measure the input and output energy of the UUT for efficiency calculations with the following exceptions: (a) Test the UUT at the following reference test load conditions, in the following order: 100 percent, 75 percent, 50 percent, and 25 percent of the rated output power. (b) Perform the test at each of the reference test loads by simultaneously measuring the UUT's input and output power in Watts (W), or input and output energy in Watt-Hours (Wh) over a 15 minute test period at a rate of at least 1 Hz. Calculate the efficiency for that reference load using one of the following two equations: Where: Eff n % n P avg__out n % n P avg__in n % n Where: Eff n % n E out n % n E in n % n (c) For representations of no-load losses, measure the active power at the UPS input port with no load applied in accordance with section 6.2.2.4 of IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0. 4.3.4 UUT Classification Optional Test for determination of UPS architecture. Determine the UPS architecture by performing the tests specified in the definitions of VI, VFD, and VFI (sections 2.27.1 through 2.27.3 of this appendix). 4.3.5. Output Efficiency Calculation (a) Use the load weightings from Table 4.3.1 to determine the average load adjusted efficiency as follows: Where: Eff avg t n % n Eff n % n Table 4.3.1—Load Weightings Rated output power UPS architecture Portion of time spent at reference load 25% 50% 75% 100% P ≤ 1500 W VFD 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 VI or VFI 0 * 0.3 0.4 0.3 P > 1500 W VFD, VI, or VFI 0 * 0.3 0.4 0.3 * Measuring efficiency at loading points with 0 time weighting is not required. (b) Round the calculated efficiency value to one tenth of a percentage point. [76 FR 31776, June 1, 2011, as amended at 81 FR 31842, May 20, 2016; 81 FR 42235, June 29, 2016; 81 FR 89822, Dec. 12, 2016; 87 FR 28756, May 11, 2022; 87 FR 55122, Sept. 8, 2022; 89 FR 28592, Apr. 19, 2024; 90 FR 6791, Jan. 21, 2025] Appendix Y1 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Battery Chargers Note 1: For all Battery Chargers, including UPSs, compliance with the relevant standard in § 430.32(z) or any representation must be based upon results generated under the corresponding appendix listed in the following table: Battery chargers other than UPSs UPS On or After July 3, 2024 and Before October 16, 2024 Use appendix Y as it appeared on either March 7, 2023, or July 3, 2024 Use appendix Y as it appeared on either March 7, 2023, or July 3, 2024 On or After October 16, 2024 and Before compliance date of any new or amended standards published any time after September 2022 Use appendix Y as it appeared on July 3, 2024. Use appendix Y as it appeared on July 3, 2024. On or After compliance date of any new or amended standards published any time after September 2022 Use appendix Y1 Use appendix Y1. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3 the entire test standard for IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0. However, only enumerated provisions of this standard are applicable to this appendix, as follows. In cases in which there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the referenced test standard. 0.1 IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0: (a) Section 3.5, Specified values; (b) Section 3.5.49, total harmonic distortion; (c) Section 5, Electrical conditions, performance and declared values; (d) Section 5.2, UPS input specification, as specified in section 2.28.2 of this appendix; (e) Section 5.2.1, Conditions for normal mode of operation; Clause 5.2.1.a; (f) Clause 5.2.1.b; (g) Section 5.2.2, Conditions to be declared by the manufacturer; Clause 5.2.2.k; (h) Clause 5.2.2.l; (i) Clause 5.2.2.m; (j) Section 5.3, UPS output specification; Section 5.3.2, Characteristics to be declared by the manufacturer; Clause 5.3.2.b; (k) Clause 5.3.2.c; (l) Clause 5.3.2.d; (m) Clause 5.3.2.e; (n) Section 5.3.4.2, Input dependency AAA; (o) Section 6.2, Routine test procedure; Section 6.2.2, Electrical; Section 6.2.2.4, No load, as specified in section 4.3.3(c) of this appendix; (p) Section 6.2.2.7, AC input failure, as specified in Note to section 2.28.1 of this appendix; (q) Section 6.4, Type test procedure (electrical); Section 6.4.1, Input—AC input power compatibility; Section 6.4.1.2, Steady state input voltage tolerance and VI input independency, as specified in Note to section 2.28.3 of this appendix; (r) Section 6.4.1.3, Combined input voltage/frequency tolerance and VFI input independency, as specified in Note to section 2.28.2 of this appendix; (s) Annex G—AC input power failure—Test method; (t) Annex J—UPS efficiency and no load losses—Methods of measurement, as specified in sections 4.2.1 and 4.3.3 of this appendix. 0.2 [Reserved] 1. Scope This appendix provides the test requirements used to measure the energy consumption of battery chargers, including fixed-location wireless chargers designed for charging batteries with less than 100 watt-hour battery energy and open-placement wireless chargers, operating at either DC or United States AC line voltage (nominally 115V at 60Hz). This appendix also provides the test requirements used to measure the energy efficiency of uninterruptible power supplies as defined in section 2 of this appendix that utilize the standardized National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) plug, 1-15P or 5-15P, as specified in ANSI/NEMA WD 6-2016 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) and have an AC output. This appendix does not provide a method for testing back-up battery chargers. 2. Definitions The following definitions are for the purposes of explaining the terminology associated with the test method for measuring battery charger energy consumption. 1 1 2.1. Active mode charge mode 2.2. Active power real power 2.3. Ambient temperature 2.4. Apparent power (S) 2.5. Batch charger 2.6. Battery battery pack (a) Detachable battery (a battery that is contained in a separate enclosure from the consumer product and is intended to be removed or disconnected from the consumer product for recharging); or (b) Integral battery (a battery that is contained within the consumer product and is not removed from the consumer product for charging purposes). The word “intended” in this context refers to whether a battery has been designed in such a way as to permit its removal or disconnection from its associated consumer product. 2.7. Battery energy 2.8. Battery maintenance mode maintenance mode, 2.9. Battery rest period 2.10. C-Rate 2.11. Cradle 2.12. Energy storage system 2.13. Equalization 2.14. Instructions manufacturer's instructions 2.15. Measured charge capacity of a battery 2.16. Manual on-off switch 2.17. Multi-port charger 2.18. Multi-voltage charger 2.19. Normal mode (a) The AC input supply is within required tolerances and supplies the UPS, (b) The energy storage system is being maintained at full charge or is under recharge, and (c) The load connected to the UPS is within the UPS's specified power rating. 2.20. Off mode (a) Is connected to the main electricity supply; (b) Is not connected to the battery; and (c) All manual on-off switches are turned off. 2.21. Nameplate battery voltage 2.22. Nameplate battery charge capacity 2.23. Nameplate battery energy capacity 2.24. No-battery mode (a) The battery charger is connected to the main electricity supply; (b) The battery is not connected to the charger; and (c) For battery chargers with manual on-off switches, all such switches are turned on. 2.25. Reference test load 2.26. Standby mode 2.27. Total harmonic distortion (THD), 2.28. Uninterruptible power supply or UPS 2.28.1. Voltage and frequency dependent UPS or VFD UPS Note to 2.28.1: 2.28.2. Voltage and frequency independent UPS or VFI UPS Note to 2.28.2: 2.28.3. Voltage independent UPS or VI UPS Note to 2.28.3: 2.29. Unit under test 2.30. Wireless charger 2.30.1. Fixed-location wireless charger 2.30.2. Open-placement wireless charger 3. Testing Requirements for all Battery Chargers Other Than Uninterruptible Power Supplies and Open-Placement Wireless Chargers 3.1. Standard Test Conditions 3.1.1. General The values that may be measured or calculated during the conduct of this test procedure have been summarized for easy reference in Table 3.1.1 of this appendix. Table 3.1.1—List of Measured or Calculated Values Name of measured or calculated value Reference 1. Duration of the Charge and Maintenance Modes test Section 3.3.2. 2. Battery Discharge Energy (E batt Section 3.3.8. 3. Initial time and power (W) of the input current of connected battery Section 3.3.6. 4. Active and Maintenance Modes Energy Consumption Section 3.3.6. 5. Maintenance Mode Power (P m Section 3.3.9. 6. Active mode Energy Consumption (E a Section 3.3.10. 7. No-Battery Mode Power (P nb Section 3.3.11. 8. Off Mode Power (P off Section 3.3.12. 9. Standby Mode Power (P sb Section 3.3.13. 3.1.2. Verifying Accuracy and Precision of Measuring Equipment Any power measurement equipment utilized for testing must conform to the uncertainty and resolution requirements outlined in Section 4, “General conditions for measurement”, as well as Annexes B, “Notes on the measurement of low-power modes”, and D, “Determination of uncertainty of measurement”, of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3). 3.1.3. Setting Up the Test Room All tests, battery conditioning, and battery rest periods shall be carried out in a room with an air speed immediately surrounding the UUT of ≤0.5 m/s. The ambient temperature shall be maintained at 20 °C ± 5 °C throughout the test. There shall be no intentional cooling of the UUT such as by use of separately powered fans, air conditioners, or heat sinks. The UUT shall be conditioned, rested, and tested on a thermally non-conductive surface. When not undergoing active testing, batteries shall be stored at 20 °C ± 5 °C. 3.1.4. Verifying the UUT's Input Voltage and Input Frequency (a) If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input in the United States, it shall be tested at 115 V at 60 Hz. If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input but cannot be operated at 115 V at 60 Hz, it shall not be tested. (b) If a battery charger is powered by a low-voltage DC or AC input and the manufacturer packages the battery charger with an external power supply (“EPS”), test the battery charger using the packaged EPS; if the battery charger does not include a pre-packaged EPS, then test the battery charger with an EPS sold and recommended by the manufacturer; if the manufacturer does not recommend an EPS that it sells, test the battery charger with an EPS that the manufacturer recommends for use in the manufacturer materials. The input reference source shall be 115 V at 60 Hz. If the EPS cannot be operated with AC input voltage at 115 V at 60 Hz, the charger shall not be tested. (c) If a battery charger is designed for operation only on DC input voltage and if the provisions of section 3.1.4.(b) of this appendix do not apply, test the battery charger with an external power supply that minimally complies with the applicable energy conservation standard and meets the external power supply parameters specified by the battery charger manufacturer. The input voltage shall be within ±1 percent of the battery charger manufacturer specified voltage. (d) If the input voltage is AC, the input frequency shall be within ±1 percent of the specified frequency. The THD of the input voltage shall be ≤2 percent, up to and including the 13th harmonic. The crest factor of the input voltage shall be between 1.34 and 1.49. (e) If the input voltage is DC, the AC ripple voltage (RMS) shall be: (1) ≤0.2 V for DC voltages up to 10 V; or (2) ≤2 percent of the DC voltage for DC voltages over 10 V. 3.2. Unit Under Test Setup Requirements 3.2.1. General Setup (a) The battery charger system shall be prepared and set up in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except where those instructions conflict with the requirements of this test procedure. If no instructions are given, then factory or “default” settings shall be used, or where there are no indications of such settings, the UUT shall be tested in the condition as it would be supplied to an end user. (b) If the battery charger has user controls to select from two or more charge rates (such as regular or fast charge) or different charge currents, the test shall be conducted at the fastest charge rate that is recommended by the manufacturer for everyday use, or, failing any explicit recommendation, the factory-default charge rate. If the charger has user controls for selecting special charge cycles that are recommended only for occasional use to preserve battery health, such as equalization charge, removing memory, or battery conditioning, these modes are not required to be tested. The settings of the controls shall be listed in the report for each test. 3.2.2. Selection and Treatment of the Battery Charger The UUT, including the battery charger and its associated battery, shall be new products of the type and condition that would be sold to a customer. If the battery is lead-acid chemistry and the battery is to be stored for more than 24 hours between its initial acquisition and testing, the battery shall be charged before such storage. 3.2.3. Selection of Batteries To Use for Testing (a) For chargers with integral batteries, the battery packaged with the charger shall be used for testing. For chargers with detachable batteries, the battery or batteries to be used for testing will vary depending on whether there are any batteries packaged with the battery charger. (1) If batteries are packaged with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from the batteries packaged with the battery charger, according to the procedure in section 3.2.3(b) of this appendix. (2) If no batteries are packaged with the charger, but the instructions specify or recommend batteries for use with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from those recommended or specified in the instructions, according to the procedure in section 3.2.3(b) of this appendix. (3) If no batteries are packaged with the charger and the instructions do not specify or recommend batteries for use with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from any that are suitable for use with the charger, according to the procedure in section 3.2.3(b) of this appendix. (b)(1) From the detachable batteries specified in section 3.2.3.(a) of this appendix, use Table 3.2.1 of this appendix to select the batteries to be used for testing, depending on the type of battery charger being tested. The battery charger types represented by the rows in the table are mutually exclusive. Find the single applicable row for the UUT, and test according to those requirements. Select only the single battery configuration specified for the battery charger type in Table 3.2.1 of this section. (2) If the battery selection criteria specified in Table 3.2.1 of this appendix results in two or more batteries or configurations of batteries of different chemistries, but with equal voltage and capacity ratings, determine the maintenance mode power, as specified in section 3.3.9 of this appendix, for each of the batteries or configurations of batteries, and select for testing the battery or configuration of batteries with the highest maintenance mode power. (c) A charger is considered as: (1) Single-capacity if all associated batteries have the same nameplate battery charge capacity (see definition) and, if it is a batch charger, all configurations of the batteries have the same nameplate battery charge capacity. (2) Multi-capacity if there are associated batteries or configurations of batteries that have different nameplate battery charge capacities. (d) The selected battery or batteries will be referred to as the “test battery” and will be used through the remainder of this test procedure. Table 3.2.1—Battery Selection for Testing Type of charger Tests to perform Multi-voltage Multi-port Multi-capacity Battery selection No No No Any associated battery. No No Yes Highest charge capacity battery. No Yes Yes or No Use all ports. Use the maximum number of identical batteries with the highest nameplate battery charge capacity that the charger can accommodate. Yes No No Highest voltage battery. Yes Yes to either or both Use all ports. Use the battery or configuration of batteries with the highest individual voltage. If multiple batteries meet this criteria, then use the battery or configuration of batteries with the highest total nameplate battery charge capacity at the highest individual voltage. 3.2.4. Limiting Other Non-Battery-Charger Functions (a) If the battery charger or product containing the battery charger does not have any additional functions unrelated to battery charging, this section may be skipped. (b) Any optional functions controlled by the user and not associated with the battery charging process (e.g., the answering machine in a cordless telephone charging base) shall be switched off. If it is not possible to switch such functions off, they shall be set to their lowest power-consuming mode during the test. (c) If the battery charger takes any physically separate connectors or cables not required for battery charging but associated with its other functionality (such as phone lines, serial or USB connections, Ethernet, cable TV lines, etc.), these connectors or cables shall be left disconnected during the testing. (d) Any manual on-off switches specifically associated with the battery charging process shall be switched on for the duration of the charge, maintenance, and no-battery mode tests, and switched off for the off mode test. 3.2.5. Accessing the Battery for the Test (a) The technician may need to disassemble the end-use product or battery charger to gain access to the battery terminals for the Battery Discharge Energy Test in section 3.3.8 of this appendix. If the battery terminals are not clearly labeled, the technician shall use a voltmeter to identify the positive and negative terminals. These terminals will be the ones that give the largest voltage difference and are able to deliver significant current (0.2 C or 1/hr) into a load. (b) All conductors used for contacting the battery must be cleaned and burnished prior to connecting in order to decrease voltage drops and achieve consistent results. (c) Manufacturer's instructions for disassembly shall be followed, except those instructions that: (1) Lead to any permanent alteration of the battery charger circuitry or function; (2) Could alter the energy consumption of the battery charger compared to that experienced by a user during typical use, e.g., due to changes in the airflow through the enclosure of the UUT; or (3) Conflict requirements of this test procedure. (d) Care shall be taken by the technician during disassembly to follow appropriate safety precautions. If the functionality of the device or its safety features is compromised, the product shall be discarded after testing. (e) Some products may include protective circuitry between the battery cells and the remainder of the device. If the manufacturer provides a description for accessing the connections at the output of the protective circuitry, these connections shall be used to discharge the battery and measure the discharge energy. The energy consumed by the protective circuitry during discharge shall not be measured or credited as battery energy. (f) If any of the following conditions specified in sections 3.2.5.(f)(1) to 3.2.5.(f)(3) of this appendix are applicable, preventing the measurement of the Battery Discharge Energy and the Charging and Maintenance Mode Energy, a manufacturer must submit a petition for a test procedure waiver in accordance with § 430.27: (1) Inability to access the battery terminals; (2) Access to the battery terminals destroys charger functionality; or (3) Inability to draw current from the test battery. 3.2.6. Determining Charge Capacity for Batteries With No Rating (a) If there is no rating for the battery charge capacity on the battery or in the instructions, then the technician shall determine a discharge current that meets the following requirements. The battery shall be fully charged and then discharged at this constant-current rate until it reaches the end-of-discharge voltage specified in Table 3.3.2 of this appendix. The discharge time must be not less than 4.5 hours nor more than 5 hours. In addition, the discharge test (section 3.3.8 of this appendix) (which may not be starting with a fully-charged battery) shall reach the end-of-discharge voltage within 5 hours. The same discharge current shall be used for both the preparations step (section 3.3.4 of this appendix) and the discharge test (section 3.3.8 of this appendix). The test report shall include the discharge current used and the resulting discharge times for both a fully-charged battery and for the discharge test. (b) For this section, the battery is considered as “fully charged” when either: it has been charged by the UUT until an indicator on the UUT shows that the charge is complete; or it has been charged by a battery analyzer at a current not greater than the discharge current until the battery analyzer indicates that the battery is fully charged. (c) When there is no capacity rating, a suitable discharge current must generally be determined by trial and error. Since the conditioning step does not require constant-current discharges, the trials themselves may also be counted as part of battery conditioning. 3.3. Test Measurement The test sequence to measure the battery charger energy consumption is summarized in Table 3.3.1 of this appendix, and explained in detail in this appendix. Measurements shall be made under test conditions and with the equipment specified in sections 3.1 and 3.2 of this appendix. Table 3.3.1—Test Sequence Step/description Equipment needed Data taken? Test battery Charger Battery AC power Thermometer 1. Record general data on UUT; Section 3.3.1 Yes X X 2. Determine Active and Maintenance Modes Test duration; Section 3.3.2 No 3. Battery conditioning; Section 3.3.3 No X X X 4. Prepare battery for Active Mode test; Section 3.3.4 No X X 5. Battery rest period; Section 3.3.5 No X X 6. Conduct Active and Maintenance Modes Test; Section 3.3.6 Yes X X X 7. Battery Rest Period; Section 3.3.7 No X X 8. Battery Discharge Energy Test; Section 3.3.8 Yes X X 9. Determine the Maintenance Mode Power; Section 3.3.9 Yes X X X 10. Determine Active Charge Energy; Section 3.3.10 Yes X X X 11. Conduct No-Battery Mode Test; Section 3.3.11 Yes X X 12. Conduct Off Mode Test; Section 3.3.12 Yes X X 13. Calculating Standby Mode Power; Section 3.3.13 Yes 3.3.1. Recording General Data on the UUT The technician shall record: (a) The manufacturer and model of the battery charger; (b) The presence and status of any additional functions unrelated to battery charging; (c) The manufacturer, model, and number of batteries in the test battery; (d) The nameplate battery voltage of the test battery; (e) The nameplate battery charge capacity of the test battery; and (f) The nameplate battery charge energy of the test battery. (g) The settings of the controls, if battery charger has user controls to select from two or more charge rates. 3.3.2. Determining the Duration of the Charge and Maintenance Modes Test (a) The charge and maintenance modes test, described in detail in section 3.3.6 of this appendix, shall be 24 hours in length or longer, as determined by the items in sections 3.3.2.(a)(1) to 3.3.2.(a)(3) of this appendix. Proceed in order until a test duration is determined. In case when the battery charger does not enter its true battery maintenance mode, the test shall continue until 5 hours after the true battery maintenance mode has been captured. (1) If the battery charger has an indicator to show that the battery is fully charged, that indicator shall be used as follows: if the indicator shows that the battery is charged after 19 hours of charging, the test shall be terminated at 24 hours. Conversely, if the full-charge indication is not yet present after 19 hours of charging, the test shall continue until 5 hours after the indication is present. (2) If there is no indicator, but the manufacturer's instructions indicate that charging this battery or this capacity of battery should be complete within 19 hours, the test shall be for 24 hours. If the instructions indicate that charging may take longer than 19 hours, the test shall be run for the longest estimated charge time plus 5 hours. (3) If there is no indicator and no time estimate in the instructions, but the charging current is stated on the charger or in the instructions, calculate the test duration as the longer of 24 hours or: (b) If none of section 3.3.2.(a) applies, the duration of the test shall be 24 hours. 3.3.3. Battery Conditioning (a) No conditioning is to be done on lithium-ion batteries. The test technician shall proceed directly to battery preparation, section 3.3.4 of this appendix, when testing chargers for these batteries. (b) Products with integral batteries will have to be disassembled per the instructions in section 3.2.5 of this appendix, and the battery disconnected from the charger for discharging. (c) Batteries of other chemistries that have not been previously cycled are to be conditioned by performing two charges and two discharges, followed by a charge, as sections 3.3.3.(c)(1) to 3.3.3.(c)(5) of this appendix. No data need be recorded during battery conditioning. (1) The test battery shall be fully charged for the duration specified in section 3.3.2 of this appendix or longer using the UUT. (2) The test battery shall then be fully discharged using either: (i) A battery analyzer at a rate not to exceed 1 C, until its average cell voltage under load reaches the end-of-discharge voltage specified in Table 3.3.2 of this appendix for the relevant battery chemistry; or (ii) The UUT, until the UUT ceases operation due to low battery voltage. (3) The test battery shall again be fully charged per step in section 3.3.3(c)(1) of this appendix. (4) The test battery shall again be fully discharged per step in section 3.3.3(c)(2) of this appendix. (5) The test battery shall be again fully charged per step in section 3.3.3(c)(1) of this appendix. (d) Batteries of chemistries, other than lithium-ion, that are known to have been through at least two previous full charge/discharge cycles shall only be charged once per step in section 3.3.3(c)(5) of this appendix. 3.3.4. Preparing the Battery for Charge Testing Following any conditioning prior to beginning the battery charge test (section 3.3.6 of this appendix), the test battery shall be fully discharged to the end of discharge voltage prescribed in Table 3.3.2 of this appendix, or until the UUT circuitry terminates the discharge. 3.3.5. Resting the Battery The test battery shall be rested between preparation and the battery charge test. The rest period shall be at least one hour and not exceed 24 hours. For batteries with flooded cells, the electrolyte temperature shall be less than 30 °C before charging, even if the rest period must be extended longer than 24 hours. 3.3.6. Testing Active Charge Mode and Battery Maintenance Mode (a) The Active Charge and Battery Maintenance Modes test measures energy consumed during charge mode and some time spent in the maintenance mode of the UUT. Functions required for battery conditioning that happen only with some user-selected switch or other control shall not be included in this measurement. (The technician shall manually turn off any battery conditioning cycle or setting.) Regularly occurring battery conditioning or maintenance functions that are not controlled by the user will, by default, be incorporated into this measurement. (b) During the measurement period, input power values to the UUT shall be recorded at least once every minute. (1) If possible, the technician shall set the data logging system to record the average power during the sample interval. The total energy is computed as the sum of power samples (in watts) multiplied by the sample interval (in hours). (2) If this setting is not possible, then the power analyzer shall be set to integrate or accumulate the input power over the measurement period and this result shall be used as the total energy. (c) The technician shall follow these steps: (1) Ensure that the user-controllable device functionality not associated with battery charging and any battery conditioning cycle or setting are turned off, as instructed in section 3.2.4 of this appendix; (2) Ensure that the test battery used in this test has been conditioned, prepared, discharged, and rested as described in sections 3.3.3. through 3.3.5. of this appendix; (3) Connect the data logging equipment to the battery charger; (4) Record the start time of the measurement period, and begin logging the input power; (5) Connect the test battery to the battery charger within 3 minutes of beginning logging. For integral battery products, connect the product to a cradle or EPS within 3 minutes of beginning logging; (6) After the test battery is connected, record the initial time and power (W) of the input current to the UUT. These measurements shall be taken within the first 10 minutes of active charging; (7) Record the input power for the duration of the “Maintenance Mode Test” period, as determined by section 3.3.2. of this appendix. The actual time that power is connected to the UUT shall be within ±5 minutes of the specified period; and (8) Disconnect power to the UUT, terminate data logging, and record the final time. 3.3.7. Resting the Battery The test battery shall be rested between charging and discharging. The rest period shall be at least 1 hour and not more than 4 hours, with an exception for flooded cells. For batteries with flooded cells, the electrolyte temperature shall be less than 30 °C before charging, even if the rest period must be extended beyond 4 hours. 3.3.8. Battery Discharge Energy Test (a) If multiple batteries were charged simultaneously, the discharge energy (E batt (1) For a multi-port charger, batteries that were charged in separate ports shall be discharged independently. (2) For a batch charger, batteries that were charged as a group may be discharged individually, as a group, or in sub-groups connected in series and/or parallel. The position of each battery with respect to the other batteries need not be maintained. (b) During discharge, the battery voltage and discharge current shall be sampled and recorded at least once per minute. The values recorded may be average or instantaneous values. (c) For this test, the technician shall follow these steps: (1) Ensure that the test battery has been charged by the UUT and rested according to the procedures prescribed in sections 3.3.6 and 3.3.7 of this appendix. (2) Set the battery analyzer for a constant discharge rate and the end-of-discharge voltage in Table 3.3.2 of this appendix for the relevant battery chemistry. (3) Connect the test battery to the analyzer and begin recording the voltage, current, and wattage, if available from the battery analyzer. When the end-of-discharge voltage is reached or the UUT circuitry terminates the discharge, the test battery shall be returned to an open-circuit condition. If current continues to be drawn from the test battery after the end-of-discharge condition is first reached, this additional energy is not to be counted in the battery discharge energy. (d) If not available from the battery analyzer, the battery discharge energy (in watt-hours) is calculated by multiplying the voltage (in volts), current (in amperes), and sample period (in hours) for each sample, and then summing over all sample periods until the end-of-discharge voltage is reached. Table 3.3.2—Required Battery Discharge Rates and End-of-Discharge Battery Voltages Battery chemistry Discharge rate End-of- Valve-Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) 0.2 1.75 Flooded Lead Acid 0.2 1.70 Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) 0.2 1.0 Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) 0.2 1.0 Lithium-ion (Li-Ion) 0.2 2.5 Lithium-ion Polymer 0.2 2.5 Lithium Iron Phosphate 0.2 2.0 Rechargeable Alkaline 0.2 0.9 Silver Zinc 0.2 1.2 *If the presence of protective circuitry prevents the battery cells from being discharged to the end-of-discharge voltage specified, then discharge battery cells to the lowest possible voltage permitted by the protective circuitry. 3.3.9. Determining the Maintenance Mode Power After the measurement period is complete, the technician shall determine the average maintenance mode power consumption (P m (a) If the maintenance mode power is cyclic or shows periodic pulses, compute the average power over a time period that spans a whole number of cycles and includes at least the last 4 hours. (b) Otherwise, calculate the average power value over the last 4 hours. 3.3.10. Determining the Active Charge Energy After the measurement period is complete, the technician shall determine the total active charge energy (E a (a) First determine when the battery charger enters maintenance mode by examining the power-versus-time data to identify when the input power enters either a steady state or a cyclic state with average power for that period being the same as the maintenance mode power determined in section 3.3.9. of this appendix. (b) The accumulated energy or the average input power, integrated over the test period from the initial recorded input time up until when the battery charger enters maintenance mode would be the active charge energy, E a 3.3.11. No-Battery Mode Energy Consumption Measurement The no-battery mode measurement depends on the configuration of the battery charger, as follows: (a) Conduct a measurement of no-battery power consumption while the battery charger is connected to the power source. Disconnect the battery from the charger, allow the charger to operate for at least 30 minutes, and record the power ( i.e., (b) No-battery mode may also apply to products with integral batteries, as follows: (1) If the product uses a cradle and/or adapter for power conversion and charging, then “disconnecting the battery from the charger” will require disconnection of the end-use product, which contains the batteries. The other enclosures of the battery charging system will remain connected to the main electricity supply, and no-battery mode power consumption will equal that of the cradle and/or adapter alone. (2) If the product is powered through a detachable AC power cord and contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry, then only the cord will remain connected to mains, and no-battery mode power consumption will equal that of the AC power cord ( i.e., (3) If the product contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry but is powered through a non-detachable AC power cord or plug blades, then no part of the system will remain connected to mains, and no-battery mode measurement is not applicable. 3.3.12. Off Mode Energy Consumption Measurement The off mode measurement depends on the configuration of the battery charger, as follows: (a) If the battery charger has manual on-off switches, record a measurement of off mode energy consumption while the battery charger is connected to the power source. Remove the battery from the charger, allow the charger to operate for at least 30 minutes, and record the power ( i.e., (b) Off mode may also apply to products with integral batteries, as follows: (1) If the product uses a cradle and/or adapter for power conversion and charging, then “disconnecting the battery from the charger” will require disconnection of the end-use product, which contains the batteries. The other enclosures of the battery charging system will remain connected to the main electricity supply, and off mode power consumption will equal that of the cradle and/or adapter alone. (2) If the product is powered through a detachable AC power cord and contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry, then only the cord will remain connected to mains, and off mode power consumption will equal that of the AC power cord ( i.e., (3) If the product contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry but is powered through a non-detachable AC power cord or plug blades, then no part of the system will remain connected to mains, and off mode measurement is not applicable. 3.3.13. Standby Mode Power The standby mode power (P sb m nb 4. Testing Requirements for Uninterruptible Power Supplies 4.1. Standard Test Conditions 4.1.1. Measuring Equipment (a) The power or energy meter must provide true root mean square (r.m.s) measurements of the active input and output measurements, with an uncertainty at full rated load of less than or equal to 0.5 percent at the 95 percent confidence level notwithstanding that voltage and current waveforms can include harmonic components. The meter must measure input and output values simultaneously. (b) All measurement equipment used to conduct the tests must be calibrated within the measurement equipment manufacturer specified calibration period by a standard traceable to International System of Units such that measurements meet the uncertainty requirements specified in section 4.1.1(a) of this appendix. 4.1.2. Test Room Requirements All portions of the test must be carried out in a room with an air speed immediately surrounding the UUT of ≤0.5 m/s in all directions. Maintain the ambient temperature in the range of 20.0 °C to 30.0 °C, including all inaccuracies and uncertainties introduced by the temperature measurement equipment, throughout the test. No intentional cooling of the UUT, such as by use of separately powered fans, air conditioners, or heat sinks, is permitted. Test the UUT on a thermally non-conductive surface. 4.1.3. Input Voltage and Input Frequency The AC input voltage and frequency to the UPS during testing must be within 3 percent of the highest rated voltage and within 1 percent of the highest rated frequency of the device. 4.2. Unit Under Test Setup Requirements 4.2.1. General Setup Configure the UPS according to Annex J.2 of IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0 with the following additional requirements: (a) UPS Operating Mode Conditions. If the UPS can operate in two or more distinct normal modes as more than one UPS architecture, conduct the test in its lowest input dependency as well as in its highest input dependency mode where VFD represents the lowest possible input dependency, followed by VI and then VFI. (b) Energy Storage System. The UPS must not be modified or adjusted to disable energy storage charging features. Minimize the transfer of energy to and from the energy storage system by ensuring the energy storage system is fully charged (at the start of testing) as follows: (1) If the UUT has a battery charge indicator, charge the battery for 5 hours after the UUT has indicated that it is fully charged. (2) If the UUT does not have a battery charge indicator but the user manual shipped with the UUT specifies a time to reach full charge, charge the battery for 5 hours longer than the time specified. (3) If the UUT does not have a battery charge indicator or user manual instructions, charge the battery for 24 hours. (c) DC output port(s). All DC output port(s) of the UUT must remain unloaded during testing. 4.2.2. Additional Features (a) Any feature unrelated to maintaining the energy storage system at full charge or delivery of load power (e.g., LCD display) shall be switched off. If it is not possible to switch such features off, they shall be set to their lowest power-consuming mode during the test. (b) If the UPS takes any physically separate connectors or cables not required for maintaining the energy storage system at full charge or delivery of load power but associated with other features (such as serial or USB connections, Ethernet, etc.), these connectors or cables shall be left disconnected during the test. (c) Any manual on-off switches specifically associated with maintaining the energy storage system at full charge or delivery of load power shall be switched on for the duration of the test. 4.3. Test Measurement and Calculation Efficiency can be calculated from either average power or accumulated energy. 4.3.1. Average Power Calculations If efficiency calculation are to be made using average power, calculate the average power consumption (P avg Where: P avg P i i n 4.3.2. Steady State Operate the UUT and the load for a sufficient length of time to reach steady state conditions. To determine if steady state conditions have been attained, perform the following steady state check, in which the difference between the two efficiency calculations must be less than 1 percent: (a)(1) Simultaneously measure the UUT's input and output power for at least 5 minutes, as specified in section 4.3.1 of this appendix, and record the average of each over the duration as P avg_in P avg_out , (2) Simultaneously measure the UUT's input and output energy for at least 5 minutes and record the accumulation of each over the duration as E in E out , (b) Calculate the UUT's efficiency, Eff 1 (1) Where: Eff P avg_out P avg_in (2) Where: Eff E out E in (c) Wait a minimum of 10 minutes. (d) Repeat the steps listed in paragraphs (a) and (b) of section 4.3.2 of this appendix to calculate another efficiency value, Eff 2 (e) Determine if the product is at steady state using the following equation: If the percentage difference of Eff 1 Eff 2 (f) If the percentage difference is greater than or equal to 1 percent, the product is not at steady state. Repeat the steps listed in paragraphs (c) to (e) of section 4.3.2 of this appendix until the product is at steady state. 4.3.3. Power Measurements and Efficiency Calculations Measure input and output power of the UUT according to section J.3 of Annex J of IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0, or measure the input and output energy of the UUT for efficiency calculations with the following exceptions: (a) Test the UUT at the following reference test load conditions, in the following order: 100 percent, 75 percent, 50 percent, and 25 percent of the rated output power. (b) Perform the test at each of the reference test loads by simultaneously measuring the UUT's input and output power in Watts (W), or input and output energy in Watt-Hours (Wh) over a 15 minute test period at a rate of at least 1 Hz. Calculate the efficiency for that reference load using one of the following two equations: (1) Where: Eff n % n P avg_out n % n P avg_in n % n (2) Where: Eff n % n E out n % n E in n % n (c) For representations of no-load losses, measure the active power at the UPS input port with no load applied in accordance with section 6.2.2.4 of IEC 62040-3 Ed. 3.0. 4.3.4. UUT Classification Optional Test for determination of UPS architecture. Determine the UPS architecture by performing the tests specified in the definitions of VI, VFD, and VFI (sections 2.28.1 through 2.28.3 of this appendix). 4.3.5. Output Efficiency Calculation (a) Use the load weightings from Table 4.3.1 to determine the average load adjusted efficiency as follows: Eff avg t 25 % Eff 25 % t 50 % Eff 50 % t 75 % Eff 75 % t 100 % Eff 100 % Where: Eff avg t n % n Eff n % n Table 4.3.1—Load Weightings Portion of time spent at reference load Rated output power UPS architecture 25% 50% 75% 100% P ≤ 1500 W VFD 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 VI or VFI 0 * 0.3 0.4 0.3 P > 1500 W VFD, VI, or VFI 0 * 0.3 0.4 0.3 * Measuring efficiency at loading points with 0 time weighting is not required. (b) Round the calculated efficiency value to one tenth of a percentage point. 5. Testing Requirements for Open-Placement Wireless Chargers 5.1. Standard Test Conditions and UUT Setup Requirements The technician will set up the testing environment according to the test conditions as specified in sections 3.1.2, 3.1.3, and 3.1.4 of this appendix. The unit under test will be configurated according to section 3.2.1 and all other non-battery charger related functions will be turned off according to section 3.2.4. 5.2. Active Mode Test [Reserved] 5.3. No-Battery Mode Test (a) Connect the UUT to mains power and place it in no-battery mode by ensuring there are no foreign objects on the charging surface ( i.e., (b) Monitor the AC input power for a period of 5 minutes to assess the stability of the UUT. If the power level does not drift by more than 1percent from the maximum value observed, the UUT is considered stable. (c) If the AC input power is not stable, follow the specifications in Section 5.3.3. of IEC 62301 for measuring average power or accumulated energy over time for the input. If the UUT is stable, record the measurements of the AC input power over a 5-minute period. (d) Power consumption calculation. The power consumption of the no-battery mode is equal to the active AC input power (W). [87 FR 55125, Sept. 8, 2022, as amended at 89 FR 28593, Apr. 19, 2024] Appendix Z to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of External Power Supplies Note: Starting on February 15, 2023, manufacturers must make any representations regarding the energy efficiency or power consumption of external power supplies based upon results generated under this appendix. Prior to that date, manufacturers must make any representations regarding the energy efficiency or power consumption of external power supplies based upon results generated under this appendix as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B revised as of January 1, 2021. The provisions at section (4)(g) of this appendix regarding the testing of units for which a wire or cord is not provided by the manufacturer are not required for use until such time as compliance is required with any amended standards for external power supplies provided in § 430.32(w) that are published after January 1, 2021. 0. Incorporation by reference. DOE incorporated by reference the entire standard for IEC 62301 in § 430.3; however, only enumerated provisions of this document are applicable to this appendix, as follows: 0.1 IEC 62301, (“IEC 62301”), Household electrical appliances—Measurement of standby power, (Edition 2.0, 2011-01), as follows: (a) Section 4.3.2 “Supply voltage waveform,” as referenced in section 3 of this appendix; (b) Section 4.4.1 “Power measurement uncertainty,” as referenced in section 4 of this appendix; (c) Section 5.3.3 “Average reading method,” as referenced in sections 5 and 6 of this appendix; (d) Annex B “Notes on the measurement of low power modes,” as referenced in section 4 of this appendix; and (e) Annex D “Determination of uncertainty of measurement,” as referenced in section 4 of this appendix. 0.2 Reserved. 1. [Reserved] 2. Scope: This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the energy consumption of external power supplies subject to the energy conservation standards set forth at § 430.32(w)(1). Additionally, this appendix does not apply to external power supplies for which the primary load of the converted voltage within the device is not delivered to a separate end-use product, i.e., 3. Definitions: The following definitions are for the purposes of understanding terminology associated with the test method for measuring external power supply energy consumption. Active mode Active mode efficiency Active power (P) real power Adaptive external power supply Ambient temperature Average Active-Mode Efficiency Manual on-off switch Minimum output current Multiple-voltage external power supply Nameplate output current Nameplate output power Nameplate output voltage No-load mode Off-mode (1) Connected to the main electricity supply; (2) The output is not connected to any load; and (3) All manual on-off switches are turned off. Output bus RMS Single-voltage external AC-AC power supply Single-voltage external AC-DC power supply Standby mode Switch-selectable single voltage external power supply Total harmonic distortion (THD), where I n n Unit under test (UUT) USB Power Delivery (USB-PD) EPS USB Type-C 4. Test Apparatus and General Instructions (a) Any power measurements recorded, as well as any power measurement equipment utilized for testing, shall conform to the uncertainty and resolution specifications in Section 4.4.1, “Power measurement uncertainty,” as well as Annexes B, “Notes on the measurement of low power modes,” and D, “Determination of uncertainty of measurement,” of IEC 62301. (b) Carry out tests in a room that has an air speed close to the UUT of ≤0.5 m/s. Maintain ambient temperature at 20 ± 5 °C throughout the test. Do not intentionally cool the UUT, for example, by use of separately powered fans, air conditioners, or heat sinks. Test the UUT on a thermally non-conductive surface. Products intended for outdoor use may be tested at additional temperatures, provided those are in addition to the conditions specified and are noted in a separate section on the test report. (c) If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input in the United States, test it at 115 V at 60 Hz. If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input but cannot be operated at 115 V at 60 Hz, do not test it. Ensure the input voltage is within ±1 percent of the above specified voltage and the input frequency is within ±1 percent of the specified frequency. (d) The input voltage source must be capable of delivering at least 10 times the nameplate input power of the UUT as is specified in IEEE 1515-2000 (Referenced for guidance only, see § 430.4). Regardless of the AC source type, the THD of the supply voltage when supplying the UUT in the specified mode must not exceed 2 percent, up to and including the 13th harmonic. The peak value of the test voltage must be within 1.34 and 1.49 multiplied by its RMS value. (e) Select all leads used in the test set-up with appropriate wire gauges and lengths to minimize voltage drops across the wires during testing. See Table B.2 — “Commonly used values for wire gages [ sic (f) Test Load. To load the power supply to produce all active-mode loading conditions, use passive loads, such as rheostats, or active loads, such as electronic loads. Resistive loads need not be measured precisely with an ohmmeter; simply adjust a variable resistor to the point where the ammeter confirms that the desired percentage of nameplate output current is flowing. For electronic loads, adjust the desired output current in constant current mode rather than adjusting the required output power in constant power mode. (g) Test the external power supply at the end of the wire or cord that connects to an end-use product, regardless of whether the end of the wire or cord is integrated into an end-use product or plugs into and out of an end-use product. If a separate wire or cord is provided by the manufacturer to connect the external power supply to an end-use product, use this wire or cord and perform tests at the end of the cord that connects to an end-use product. An external power supply that is not supplied with a wire or cord must be tested with a wire or an output cord recommended by the manufacturer. If the external power supply is not supplied with a wire or cord and for which the manufacturer does not recommend one, the EPS must be tested with a 3-foot-long output wire or cord with a conductor thickness that is minimally sufficient to carry the maximum required current. (1) If the connection to an end-use product is removable, there are two options for connecting metering equipment to the output connection of the external power supply: (i) Cut the cord immediately adjacent to the output connector, or (ii) Attach leads and measure the efficiency from the output connector itself. (2) If the connection to an end-use product is not removable, cut the cord immediately adjacent to the powered product and connect metering equipment at that point. (h) Conduct the tests on the sets of output wires that constitute the output busses. If the product has more than two output wires, including those wires that are necessary for controlling the product, the manufacturer must supply a connection diagram or test fixture that will allow the testing laboratory to put the UUT into active mode. Figure 1 of this section provides one illustration of how to set up a single-voltage external power supply for testing; however, the actual test setup may vary pursuant to the type of external power supply being tested and the requirements of this appendix. (i) Except as provided in section 4(j) of this appendix, external power supplies must be tested in their final, completed configuration in order to represent their measured efficiency on product labels or specification sheets. Although the same procedure may be used to test the efficiency of a bare circuit board power supply prior to its incorporation into a finished housing and the attachment of its DC output cord, the efficiency of the bare circuit board power supply may not be used to characterize the efficiency of the final product (once enclosed in a case and fitted with a DC output cord). For example, a power supply manufacturer or component manufacturer may wish to assess the efficiency of a design that it intends to provide to an OEM for incorporation into a finished external power supply, but these results may not be used to represent the efficiency of the finished external power supply. (j) If a product serves one or more other major functions in addition to converting household electric current into DC current or lower-voltage AC current, components of the product that serve other functions may be disconnected before testing so that test measurements do not include power used by other functions and as long as disconnecting such components do not affect the ability of the product to convert household electric current into DC current or lower-voltage AC current. For example, consider an EPS that also acts as a surge protector that offers outlets supplying AC household electric current and one or more USB outputs supplying DC current. If power is provided to the AC outlets through a surge protection circuit, but power to the USB outlet(s) is not, then the surge protection circuit may be disconnected from AC power during testing. Similarly, if a lighted manual on-off switch disconnects power only to the AC outlets, but not the USB outputs, then the manual on-off switch may be turned off and power to the light disconnected during testing. If a disconnection is performed by a technician, the disconnection must be able to be replicated by a third-party test facility. 5. Test Measurement for all External Power Supplies Other than Adaptive External Power Supplies: (a) Single-Voltage External Power Supply (1) Standby Mode and Active-Mode Measurement. (i) Place in the “on” position any built-in switch in the UUT controlling power flow to the AC input and note the existence of such a switch in the final test report. (ii) Operate the UUT at 100 percent of nameplate output current for at least 30 minutes immediately prior to conducting efficiency measurements. After this warm-up period, monitor AC input power for a period of 5 minutes to assess the stability of the UUT. If the power level does not drift by more than 5 percent from the maximum value observed, the UUT is considered stable. If the UUT is stable, record the measurements obtained at the end of this 5-minute period. Measure subsequent loading conditions under the same 5-minute stability parameters. Note that only one warm-up period of 30 minutes is required for each UUT at the beginning of the test procedure. If the AC input power is not stable over a 5-minute period, follow the guidelines established by Section 5.3.3 of IEC 62301 for measuring average power or accumulated energy over time for both input and output. (iii) Test the UUT at the nameplate output voltage(s) at the loading conditions listed in Table 1, derated per the proportional allocation method presented in section 5(a)(1)(iv) of this appendix. Conduct efficiency measurements in sequence from Loading Condition 1 to Loading Condition 4 as indicated in Table 1 of this section. For Loading Condition 5, place the UUT in no-load mode, disconnect any additional signal connections to the UUT, and measure input power. Table 1—Loading Conditions for Unit Under Test Loading Condition 1 100% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 2 75% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 3 50% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 4 25% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 5 0%. Note: (A) If testing of additional, optional loading conditions is desired, conduct that testing in accordance with this test procedure and subsequent to completing the sequence described in section 5(a)(1)(iii) of this appendix. (B) Where the external power supply lists both an instantaneous and continuous output current, test the external power supply at the continuous condition only. (C) If an external power supply cannot sustain output at one or more of the Loading Conditions 1-4 as specified in Table 1 of this section, test the external power supply only at the loading conditions for which it can sustain output. (iv) Use the following proportional allocation method to provide consistent loading conditions for single-voltage external power supplies with multiple-output busses. For additional explanation (provided for guidance only), please refer to section 6.1.1 of the California Energy Commission's “Generalized Test Protocol for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Internal Ac-Dc Power Supplies Revision 6.7,” March 2014. (A) Consider a power supply with N output busses, each with the same nameplate output voltages V 1 N 1 N i i (B) If D ≥1, then loading every port to its nameplate output current does not exceed the overall maximum output power for the power supply. In this case, load each output bus to the percentages of its nameplate output current listed in Table 1 of this section. However, if D <1, it is an indication that loading each port to its nameplate output current will exceed the overall maximum output power for the power supply. In this case, and at each loading condition, load each output bus to the appropriate percentage of its nameplate output current as listed in Table 1, multiplied by the derating factor D. (v) Test switch-selectable single-voltage external power supplies twice—once at the highest nameplate output voltage and once at the lowest. (vi) Efficiency calculation. Calculate and record efficiency at each loading point by dividing the UUT's measured active output power at a given loading condition by the active AC input power measured at that loading condition. (A) Calculate and record average efficiency of the UUT as the arithmetic mean of the efficiency values calculated at Loading Conditions 1, 2, 3, and 4 in Table 1 of this section. (B) If, when tested, a UUT cannot sustain output current at one or more of the loading conditions as specified in Table 1, the average active-mode efficiency is calculated as the average of the loading conditions for which it can sustain output. (C) If the UUT can only sustain one output current at any of the output busses, test it at the loading condition that allows for the maximum output power on that bus ( i.e., (vii) Power consumption calculation. The power consumption of Loading Condition 5 (no-load) is equal to the active AC input power (W) at that loading condition. (viii) Off-Mode Measurement. If the UUT incorporates manual on-off switches, place the UUT in off-mode, and measure and record its power consumption at Loading Condition 5 in Table 1 of this section. The measurement of the off-mode energy consumption must conform to the requirements specified in section 5(a)(1) of this appendix, except that all manual on-off switches must be placed in the “off” position for the off-mode measurement. The UUT is considered stable if, over 5 minutes with samples taken at least once every second, the AC input power does not drift from the maximum value observed by more than 1 percent or 50 milliwatts, whichever is greater. Measure the off-mode power consumption of a switch-selectable single-voltage external power supply twice—once at the highest nameplate output voltage and once at the lowest. (b) Multiple-Voltage External Power Supply. (1) Standby-Mode and Active-Mode Measurement. (i) Place in the “on” position any built-in switch in the UUT controlling power flow to the AC input and note the existence of such a switch in the final test report. (ii) Operate the UUT at 100 percent of nameplate output current for at least 30 minutes immediately prior to conducting efficiency measurements. After this warm-up period, monitor AC input power for a period of 5 minutes to assess the stability of the UUT. If the power level does not drift by more than 1 percent from the maximum value observed, the UUT is considered stable. If the UUT is stable, record the measurements obtained at the end of this 5-minute period. Measure subsequent loading conditions under the same 5-minute stability parameters. Note that only one warm-up period of 30 minutes is required for each UUT at the beginning of the test procedure. If the AC input power is not stable over a 5-minute period, follow the guidelines established by Section 5.3.3 of IEC 62301 for measuring average power or accumulated energy over time for both input and output. (iii) Test the UUT at the nameplate output voltage(s) at the loading conditions listed in Table 2 of this section, derated per the proportional allocation method presented in section 5(b)(1)(iv) of this appendix. Active or passive loads used for efficiency testing of the UUT must maintain the required current loading set point for each output voltage within an accuracy of ±0.5 percent. Conduct efficiency measurements in sequence from Loading Condition 1 to Loading Condition 4 as indicated in Table 2 of this section. For Loading Condition 5, place the UUT in no-load mode, disconnect any additional signal connections to the UUT, and measure input power. Table 2—Loading Conditions for Unit Under Test Loading Condition 1 100% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 2 75% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 3 50% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 4 25% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 5 0%. Note: (A) If testing of additional, optional loading conditions is desired, conduct that testing in accordance with this test procedure and subsequent to completing the sequence described in section 5(b)(1)(iii) of this appendix. (B) Where the external power supply lists both an instantaneous and continuous output current, test the external power supply at the continuous condition only. (C) If an external power supply cannot sustain output at one or more of the Loading Conditions 1-4 as specified in Table 2 of this section, test the external power supply only at the loading conditions for which it can sustain output. (iv) Use the following proportional allocation method to provide consistent loading conditions for multiple-voltage external power supplies. For additional explanation (provided for guidance only), please refer to section 6.1.1 of the California Energy Commission's “Proposed Test Protocol for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Internal Ac-Dc Power Supplies Revision 6.7,” March 2014. (A) Consider a power supply with N output busses, and nameplate output voltages V 1 N 1 N i i (B) If D ≥1, then loading every bus to its nameplate output current does not exceed the overall maximum output power for the power supply. In this case, load each output bus to the percentages of its nameplate output current listed in Table 2 of this section. However, if D <1, it is an indication that loading each bus to its nameplate output current will exceed the overall maximum output power for the power supply. In this case, and at each loading condition, load each output bus to the appropriate percentage of its nameplate output current listed in Table 2 of this section, multiplied by the derating factor D. (v) Minimum output current requirements. Depending on their application, some multiple-voltage power supplies may require a minimum output current for each output bus of the power supply for correct operation. In these cases, ensure that the load current for each output at Loading Condition 4 in Table 2 is greater than the minimum output current requirement. Thus, if the test method's calculated load current for a given voltage bus is smaller than the minimum output current requirement, the minimum output current must be used to load the bus. This load current shall be properly recorded in any test report. (vi) Efficiency calculation. Calculate and record efficiency at each loading point by dividing the UUT's measured active output power at a given loading condition by the active AC input power measured at that loading condition. (A) Calculate and record average efficiency of the UUT as the arithmetic mean of the efficiency values calculated at Loading Conditions 1, 2, 3, and 4, in Table 2 of this section. (B) If, when tested, a UUT cannot sustain output current at one or more of the loading conditions as specified in Table 2 of this section, the average active mode efficiency is calculated as the average of the loading conditions for which it can sustain output. (C) If the UUT can only sustain one output current at any of the output busses, test it at the loading condition that allows for the maximum output power on that bus ( i.e., (vii) Power consumption calculation. The power consumption of Loading Condition 5 (no-load) is equal to the active AC input power (W) at that loading condition. (2) Off-mode Measurement—If the UUT incorporates manual on-off switches, place the UUT in off-mode and measure and record its power consumption at Loading Condition 5 in Table 2 of this section. The measurement of the off-mode energy consumption must conform to the requirements specified in section (5)(b)(1) of this appendix, except that all manual on-off switches must be placed in the “off” position for the off-mode measurement. The UUT is considered stable if, over 5 minutes with samples taken at least once every second, the AC input power does not drift from the maximum value observed by more than 1 percent or 50 milliwatts, whichever is greater. 6. Test Measurement for Adaptive External Power Supplies: (a) Single-Voltage Adaptive External Power Supply. (1) Standby Mode and Active-Mode Measurement. (i) Place in the “on” position any built-in switch in the UUT controlling power flow to the AC input and note the existence of such a switch in the final test report. (ii) Operate the UUT at 100 percent of nameplate output current for at least 30 minutes immediately prior to conducting efficiency measurements. After this warm-up period, monitor AC input power for a period of 5 minutes to assess the stability of the UUT. If the power level does not drift by more than 5 percent from the maximum value observed, the UUT is considered stable. If the UUT is stable, record the measurements obtained at the end of this 5-minute period. Measure subsequent loading conditions under the same 5-minute stability parameters. Note that only one warm-up period of 30 minutes is required for each UUT at the beginning of the test procedure. If the AC input power is not stable over a 5-minute period, follow the guidelines established by Section 5.3.3 of IEC 62301 for measuring average power or accumulated energy over time for both input and output. (iii) Test the UUT at the nameplate output voltage(s) at the loading conditions listed in Table 3 of this section, derated per the proportional allocation method presented in section 6(a)(1)(iv) of this appendix. Adaptive external power supplies must be tested twice—once at the highest nameplate output voltage and once at the lowest nameplate output voltage as described in the following sections. (A) At the highest nameplate output voltage, test adaptive external power supplies in sequence from Loading Condition 1 to Loading Condition 4, as indicated in Table 3 of this section. For Loading Condition 5, place the UUT in no-load mode, disconnect any additional signal connections, and measure the input power. (B) At the lowest nameplate output voltage, with the exception of USB-PD EPSs, test all adaptive external power supplies in sequence from Loading Condition 1 to Loading Condition 4, as indicated in Table 3 of this section. For USB-PD adaptive external power supplies, at the lowest nameplate output voltage, test the external power supply such that for Loading Conditions 1, 2, 3, and 4, all adaptive ports are loaded to 2 amperes, 1.5 amperes, 1 ampere, and 0.5 amperes, respectively. All non-adaptive ports will continue to be loaded as indicated in Table 3 of this section. For Loading Condition 5, test all adaptive external power supplies by placing the UUT in no-load mode, disconnecting any additional signal connections, and measuring the input power. Table 3—Loading Conditions for a Single-Voltage Adaptive External Power Supply Loading Condition 1 100% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 2 75% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 3 50% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 4 25% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 5 0%. Note: (C) If testing of additional, optional loading conditions is desired, conduct that testing in accordance with this test procedure and subsequent to completing the sequence described in section 6(a)(1)(iii) of this appendix. (D) Where the external power supply lists both an instantaneous and continuous output current, test the external power supply at the continuous condition only. (E) If an external power supply cannot sustain output at one or more of the Loading Conditions 1-4 as specified in Table 3 of this section, test the external power supply only at the loading conditions for which it can sustain output. (iv) Use the following proportional allocation method to provide consistent loading conditions for single-voltage adaptive external power supplies with multiple-output busses. For additional explanation, please refer to section 6.1.1 of the California Energy Commission's “Proposed Test Protocol for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Internal Ac-Dc Power Supplies Revision 6.7,” March 2014. (A) Consider a power supply with N output busses, each with the same nameplate output voltages V 1 N 1 N i i For USB-PD adaptive external power supplies, at the lowest nameplate output voltage, limit the contribution from each port to 10W when calculating the derating factor. (B) If D ≥1, then loading every port to its nameplate output current does not exceed the overall maximum output power for the power supply. In this case, load each output bus to the percentages of its nameplate output current listed in Table 3 of this section. However, if D <1, it is an indication that loading each port to its nameplate output current will exceed the overall maximum output power for the power supply. In this case, and at each loading condition, each output bus will be loaded to the appropriate percentage of its nameplate output current listed in Table 3 of this section, multiplied by the derating factor D. (v) Efficiency calculation. Calculate and record the efficiency at each loading point by dividing the UUT's measured active output power at that loading condition by the active AC input power measured at that loading condition. (A) Calculate and record average efficiency of the UUT as the arithmetic mean of the efficiency values calculated at Loading Conditions 1, 2, 3, and 4 in Table 3 of this section. (B) If, when tested, a UUT cannot sustain the output current at one or more of the loading conditions as specified in Table 3 of this section, the average active-mode efficiency is calculated as the average of the loading conditions for which it can sustain output. (C) If the UUT can only sustain one output current at any of the output busses, test it at the loading condition that allows for the maximum output power on that bus ( i.e., (vi) Power consumption calculation. The power consumption of Loading Condition 5 (no-load) is equal to the active AC input power (W) at that loading condition. (2) Off-Mode Measurement—If the UUT incorporates manual on-off switches, place the UUT in off-mode and measure and record its power consumption at Loading Condition 5 in Table 3 of this section. The measurement of the off-mode energy consumption must conform to the requirements specified in section 6(a)(1) of this appendix, except that all manual on-off switches must be placed in the “off” position for the off-mode measurement. The UUT is considered stable if, over 5 minutes with samples taken at least once every second, the AC input power does not drift from the maximum value observed by more than 1 percent or 50 milliwatts, whichever is greater. Measure the off-mode power consumption of a single-voltage adaptive external power supply twice—once at the highest nameplate output voltage and once at the lowest. (b) Multiple-Voltage Adaptive External Power Supply. (1) Standby Mode and Active-Mode Measurement. (i) Place in the “on” position any built-in switch in the UUT controlling power flow to the AC input and note the existence of such a switch in the final test report. (ii) Operate the UUT at 100 percent of nameplate output current for at least 30 minutes immediately prior to conducting efficiency measurements. After this warm-up period, monitor AC input power for a period of 5 minutes to assess the stability of the UUT. If the power level does not drift by more than 1 percent from the maximum value observed, the UUT is considered stable. If the UUT is stable, record the measurements obtained at the end of this 5-minute period. Measure subsequent loading conditions under the same 5-minute stability parameters. Note that only one warm-up period of 30 minutes is required for each UUT at the beginning of the test procedure. If the AC input power is not stable over a 5-minute period, follow the guidelines established by Section 5.3.3 of IEC 62301 for measuring average power or accumulated energy over time for both input and output. (iii) Test the UUT at the nameplate output voltage(s) at the loading conditions listed in Table 4 of this section, derated per the proportional allocation method presented in section 6(b)(1)(iv) of this appendix. Active or passive loads used for efficiency testing of the UUT must maintain the required current loading set point for each output voltage within an accuracy of ±0.5 percent. Adaptive external power supplies must be tested twice—once at the highest nameplate output voltage and once at the lowest nameplate output voltage as described in the following sections. (A) At the highest nameplate output voltage, test adaptive external power supplies in sequence from Loading Condition 1 to Loading Condition 4, as indicated in Table 4 of this section. For Loading Condition 5, place the UUT in no-load mode, disconnect any additional signal connections, and measure the input power. (B) At the lowest nameplate output voltage, with the exception of USB-PD EPSs, test all other adaptive external power supplies, in sequence from Loading Condition 1 to Loading Condition 4, as indicated in Table 4 of this section. For USB-PD adaptive external power supplies, at the lowest nameplate output voltage, test the external power supply such that for Loading Conditions 1, 2, 3, and 4, all adaptive ports are loaded to 2 amperes, 1.5 amperes, 1 ampere, and 0.5 amperes, respectively. All non-adaptive ports will continue to be loaded as indicated in Table 4 of this section. For Loading Condition 5, test all adaptive external power supplies by placing the UUT in no-load mode, disconnecting any additional signal connections, and measuring the input power. Table 4—Loading Conditions for a Multiple-Voltage Adaptive External Power Supply Loading Condition 1 100% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 2 75% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 3 50% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 4 25% of Derated Nameplate Output Current ±2%. Loading Condition 5 0%. Note: (C) If testing of additional, optional loading conditions is desired, conduct that testing in accordance with this test procedure and subsequent to completing the sequence described in section 6(b)(1)(iii) of this appendix. (D) Where the external power supply lists both an instantaneous and continuous output current, test the external power supply at the continuous condition only. (E) If an adaptive external power supply is operating as a multiple-voltage external power supply at only the highest nameplate output voltage or lowest nameplate output voltage, test this external power supply as a multiple-voltage adaptive external power supply at both the highest nameplate output voltage and the lowest nameplate output voltage. (F) If an external power supply has both adaptive and non-adaptive ports, and these ports operate simultaneously at multiple voltages, ensure that testing is performed with all ports active at both the highest and lowest nameplate output voltage. For example, if an external power supply has a USB-PD adaptive output bus that operates at 5 volts and 20 volts and a second non-adaptive output bus that operates at 9 volts, test this EPS at the highest nameplate output voltage with both the adaptive and non-adaptive ports respectively loaded at 20 volts and 9 volts; likewise, test it at the lowest nameplate output voltage with both the adaptive and non-adaptive ports respectively loaded at 5 volts and 9 volts. (G) If an external power supply cannot sustain output at one or more of the Loading Conditions 1-4 as specified in Table 4 of this section, test the external power supply only at the loading conditions for which it can sustain output. (iv) Use the following proportional allocation method to provide consistent loading conditions for multiple-voltage adaptive external power supplies. For additional explanation, please refer to section 6.1.1 of the California Energy Commission's “Proposed Test Protocol for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Internal Ac-Dc Power Supplies Revision 6.7,” March 2014. (A) Consider a multiple-voltage power supply with N output busses, and nameplate output voltages V 1 N 1 N i i For USB-PD adaptive external power supplies, at the lowest nameplate output voltage, limit the contribution from each port to 10W when calculating the derating factor. (B) If D ≥1, then loading every bus to its nameplate output current does not exceed the overall maximum output power for the power supply. In this case, load each output bus to the percentages of its nameplate output current listed in Table 4 of this section. However, if D <1, it is an indication that loading each bus to its nameplate output current will exceed the overall maximum output power for the power supply. In this case, at each loading condition, load each output bus to the appropriate percentage of its nameplate output current listed in Table 4 of this section, multiplied by the derating factor D. (v) Minimum output current requirements. Depending on their application, some multiple-voltage adaptive external power supplies may require a minimum output current for each output bus of the power supply for correct operation. In these cases, ensure that the load current for each output at Loading Condition 4 in Table 4 of this section is greater than the minimum output current requirement. Thus, if the test method's calculated load current for a given voltage bus is smaller than the minimum output current requirement, use the minimum output current to load the bus. Record this load current in any test report. (vi) Efficiency calculation. Calculate and record the efficiency at each loading point by dividing the UUT's measured active output power at that loading condition by the active AC input power measured at that loading condition. (A) Calculate and record average efficiency of the UUT as the arithmetic mean of the efficiency values calculated at Loading Conditions 1, 2, 3, and 4 in Table 4 of this section. (B) If, when tested, a UUT cannot sustain the output current at one or more of the loading conditions as specified in Table 4, the average active-mode efficiency is calculated as the average of the loading conditions for which it can sustain output. (C) If the UUT can only sustain one output current at any of the output busses, test it at the loading condition that allows for the maximum output power on that bus ( i.e., (vii) Power consumption calculation. The power consumption of Loading Condition 5 (no-load) is equal to the active AC input power at that loading condition. (2) Off-mode Measurement—If the UUT incorporates manual on-off switches, place the UUT in off-mode, and measure and record its power consumption at Loading Condition 5 in Table 4 of this section. The measurement of the off-mode energy consumption must conform to the requirements specified in section (6)(b)(1) of this appendix, except that all manual on-off switches must be placed in the “off” position for the off-mode measurement. The UUT is considered stable if, over 5 minutes with samples taken at least once every second, the AC input power does not drift from the maximum value observed by more than 1 percent or 50 milliwatts, whichever is greater. Measure the off-mode power consumption of a multiple-voltage adaptive external power supply twice—once at the highest nameplate output voltage and once at the lowest. [87 FR 51221, Aug. 19, 2022] Appendix AA to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnace Fans Note: Prior to October 9, 2024, any representations with respect to energy use or efficiency of furnace fans must be made either in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix or with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix as it appeared in the 10 CFR parts 200-499 edition revised as of January 1, 2023. On or after October 9, 2024, any representations, including certifications of compliance, made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of furnace fans must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire standard for ASHRAE 37-2009 (RA 2019), as corrected by the ASHRAE 37-2009 Errata Sheet; ASHRAE 41.1-1986; as well as Chapter 1 of the 2021 ASHRAE Handbook and ASHRAE 103-2017. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the incorporated standards. 1. Scope. 2. Definitions. 2.1. Active mode 2.2. Airflow-control settings e.g., 2.3. Dual-fuel unit 2.4. External static pressure 2.5. Furnace fan 2.6. Modular blower (a) Is designed to be the principal air circulation source for the living space of a residence; (b) Is not contained within the same cabinet as a furnace or central air conditioner; and (c) Is designed to be paired with HVAC products that have a heat input rate of less than 225,000 Btu per hour and cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu per hour. 2.7. Off mode 2.8. Seasonal off switch 2.9. Specified airflow-control settings 2.10. Standby mode 2.11. Thermal stack damper 3. Classifications. 4. Requirements. 5. Instruments. 5.1. Temperature. 5.1.1. Outlet Air Temperature Thermocouple Grid. 5.2. Humidity. 6. Apparatus. 6.1. General. 6.2. Downflow furnaces. See 6.3. Modular Blowers. 6.4. Ducts and Plenums. 6.4.1. For tests conducted using a return air duct. 6.4.2. For tests conducted without a return air duct. 6.5. Air Filters. 6.6. Electrical Measurement. 7. Test Conditions. 7.1 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Conditions. RA 7.2. Measurement of Jacket Surface Temperature (optional). see 8. Test Procedure. 8.1. Direct Measurement of Off-Cycle Losses Testing Method. 8.2. Measurement of Electrical Standby and Off Mode Power. 8.3. Steady-State Conditions for Hot Flow Tests for Gas and Oil Furnaces. (a) 3 °F in the stack gas temperature for furnaces equipped with draft diverters; (b) 5 °F in the stack gas temperature for furnaces equipped with either draft hoods, direct exhaust, or direct vent systems; and (c) 1 °F in the flue gas temperature for condensing furnaces. 8.4. Steady-State Conditions for Hot Flow Tests for Electric Furnaces and Modular Blowers. 8.5. Steady-State Conditions for Cold Flow Tests. i.e., 8.6. Fan Energy Rating (FER) Test. 8.6.1. Initial FER test conditions and maximum airflow-control setting measurements. q db 8.6.1.1. Furnace fans for which the maximum airflow-control setting is not a specified heating airflow-control setting. Max Max Max,Out Max 8.6.1.2. Furnace fans for which the maximum airflow-control setting is a specified heating airflow-control setting. Max Max IN,H Max SS,Max Max,Out Max Max Table 1—Required Minimum External Static Pressure in the Maximum Airflow-Control Setting by Installation Type Installation type ESP Units with an internal, factory-installed evaporator coil 0.50-0.55 Units designed to be paired with an evaporator coil, but without one installed 0.65-0.70 Mobile home 0.30-0.35 * Once the specified ESP has been achieved, the same outlet duct restrictions shall be used for the remainder of the furnace fan test. If the unit under test is unable to complete the testing ( i.e., 8.6.2. Constant circulation airflow-control setting measurements. Circ Circ Circ 8.6.3. Heating airflow-control setting measurements. Heat Heat IN,k Heat SS Heat, Out Heat Heat 9. Nomenclature. 60 = conversion factor from hours to minutes, (min/h) 0.24 = approximate specific heat capacity of dry air, (Btu/lb- °F) 0.44 = approximate specific heat capacity of saturated water vapor, (Btu/lb- °F) Effy SS,i i. SS,i SS,i L J CCH = annual furnace fan constant-circulation hours E Circ E Heat E Max ESP i i, i FER = fan energy rating, in watts/1000 cfm HH = annual furnace fan heating operating hours HCR = heating capacity ratio (nameplate reduced heat input capacity divided by nameplate maximum input heat capacity) k ref T db T i,k,in i k, i i = k i k T i,k,out i k, i i = k i k ΔT i,k i,k,Out i,k,in i k, Qi,k = airflow in airflow-control setting i k, MH = annual furnace fan maximum airflow hours Q IN,k k, k W = humidity ratio in pounds water vapor per pounds dry air v air 3 10. Calculation of derived results from test measurements for a single unit. 10.1. Fan Energy Rating (FER) Where: Q Max Heat For products for which the maximum airflow control setting is only designated for cooling; and The estimated national average operating hours presented in table 2 to this appendix shall be used to calculate FER. Table 2—Estimated National Average Operating Hour Values for Calculating FER Operating mode Variable Single-stage Multi-stage Heating HH 830 830/HCR. Maximum Airflow MH 640 640. Constant Circulation CCH 400 400. Where: [89 FR 25801, Apr. 12, 2024] Appendix BB to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Input Power, Lumen Output, Lamp Efficacy, Correlated Color Temperature (CCT), Color Rendering Index (CRI), Power Factor, Time to Failure, and Standby Mode Power of Integrated Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps Note 1 to appendix BB to subpart B: On and after July 15, 2025, any representations made with respect to the energy efficiency of integrated LED lamps must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix BB. Manufacturers conducting tests of integrated LED lamps prior to July 15, 2025, must conduct such tests in accordance with either this appendix or the previous version of appendix BB as it appeared in the Code of Federal Regulations on January 1, 2023. Any representations made with respect to the energy efficiency of integrated LED lamps must be in accordance with whichever version is selected. 1. Scope: 2. Definitions 2.1. The definitions specified in section 1.3 of IES LM-79-08 except section 1.3(f) (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) apply. 2.2. Initial lumen output 2.3. Interval lumen output 2.4. Rated input voltage 2.5. Test duration 2.6. Time to failure 3. Active Mode Test Method for Determining Lumen Output, Input Power, CCT, CRI, Power Factor, and Lamp Efficacy In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over IES LM-79-08 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.1. Test Conditions and Setup 3.1.1. Establish the ambient conditions, power supply, electrical settings, and instrumentation in accordance with the specifications in sections 2.0, 3.0, 7.0, and 8.0 of IES LM-79-08 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), respectively. 3.1.2. Position an equal number of integrated LED lamps in the base-up and base-down orientations throughout testing; if the position is restricted by the manufacturer, test units in the manufacturer-specified position. 3.1.3. Operate the integrated LED lamp at the rated voltage throughout testing. For an integrated LED lamp with multiple rated voltages including 120 volts, operate the lamp at 120 volts. If an integrated LED lamp with multiple rated voltages is not rated for 120 volts, operate the lamp at the highest rated input voltage. Additional tests may be conducted at other rated voltages. 3.1.4. Ensure that the lamp is not operating as a colored lamp (as defined in 10 CFR 430.2) and operate the lamp at maximum input power. If multiple modes occur at the same maximum input power (such as variable CCT or CRI), select any of these modes for testing; however, all measurements must be taken at the same selected mode. The test report must specify which mode was selected for testing and include details such that another laboratory can replicate the test at the same mode. 3.1.5. For a lamp that has one or more component(s) that offer a completely different functionality ( e.g., e.g., 3.2. Test Method, Measurements, and Calculations 3.2.1. The test conditions and setup described in section 3.1 of this appendix apply to this section 3.2. 3.2.2. Stabilize the integrated LED lamp prior to measurement as specified in section 5.0 of IES LM-79-08 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). Calculate the stabilization variation as [(maximum—minimum)/minimum] of at least three readings of the input power and lumen output over a period of 30 minutes, taken 15 minutes apart. 3.2.3. Measure the input power in watts as specified in section 8.0 of IES LM-79-08. 3.2.4. Measure the input voltage in volts as specified in section 8.0 of IES LM-79-08. 3.2.5. Measure the input current in amps as specified in section 8.0 of IES LM-79-08. 3.2.6. Measure lumen output as specified in section 9.1 and 9.2 of IES LM-79-08. Do not use goniophotometers. 3.2.7. Determine CCT according to the method specified in section 12.0 of IES LM-79-08 with the exclusion of section 12.2 and 12.5 of IES LM-79-08. Do not use goniophotometers. 3.2.8. Determine CRI according to the method specified in section 12.0 of IES LM-79-08 with the exclusion of section 12.2 and 12.5 of IES LM-79-08. Do not use goniophotometers. 3.2.9. Determine lamp efficacy by dividing measured initial lumen output by the measured input power. 3.2.10. Determine power factor for AC-input lamps by dividing measured input power by the product of the measured input voltage and measured input current. 4. Active Mode Test Method to Measure Time to Failure In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over IES LM-84 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and IES TM-28 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 4.1. Lamp Handling, Tracking, and Time Recording 4.1.1. Handle, transport, and store the integrated LED lamp as described in section 7.2 of IES LM-84 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 4.1.2. Mark and track the integrated LED lamp as specified in section 7.3 of IES LM-84. 4.1.3. Measure elapsed operating time and calibrate all equipment as described in section 7.5 of IES LM-84. 4.1.4. Check the integrated LED lamps regularly for failure as specified in section 7.8 of IES LM-84. 4.2. Measure Initial Lumen Output. 4.3. Test Duration. 4.3.1. There is no minimum test duration requirement for the integrated LED lamp. The test duration is selected by the manufacturer. See section 4.6 of this appendix for instruction on the maximum time to failure. 4.3.2. The test duration only includes time when the integrated LED lamp is energized and operating. 4.4. Operating Conditions and Setup Between Lumen Output Measurements 4.4.1. Electrical settings must be as described in section 5.1 of IES LM-84 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 4.4.2. LED lamps must be handled and cleaned as described in section 4.1 of IES LM-84. 4.4.3. Vibration around each lamp must be as described in section 4.3 of IES LM-84. 4.4.4. Ambient temperature conditions must be as described in section 4.4 of IES LM-84. Maintain the ambient temperature at 25 °C ± 5 °C or at a manufacturer-selected temperature higher than 25 °C with the same ±5 °C tolerance. 4.4.5. Humidity in the testing environment must be as described in section 4.5 of IES LM-84. 4.4.6. Air movement around each lamp must be as described in section 4.6 of IES LM-84. 4.4.7. Position a lamp in either the base-up and base-down orientation throughout testing. An equal number of lamps in the sample must be tested in the base-up and base-down orientations, except that, if the manufacturer restricts the position, test all of the units in the sample in the manufacturer-specified position. 4.4.8. Operate the lamp at the rated input voltage as described in section 3.1.3 of this appendix for the entire test duration. 4.4.9. Operate the lamp at the maximum input power as described in section 3.1.4 of this appendix for the entire test duration. 4.4.10. Line voltage waveshape must be as described in section 5.2 of IES LM-84. 4.4.11. Monitor and regulate rated input voltage as described in section 5.4 of IES LM-84. 4.4.12. Wiring of test racks must be as specified in section 5.5 of IES LM-84. 4.4.13. Operate the integrated LED lamp continuously. 4.5. Measure Interval Lumen Output. 4.5.1. Record interval lumen output and elapsed operating time as described in section 4.2 of IES TM-28 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 4.5.1.1. For test duration values greater than or equal to 3,000 hours and less than 6,000 hours, measure lumen maintenance of the integrated LED lamp at an interval in accordance with section 4.2.2 of IES TM-28. 4.5.1.2. For test duration values greater than or equal to 6,000 hours, measure lumen maintenance at an interval in accordance with section 4.2.1 of IES TM-28. 4.6. Calculate Lumen Maintenance and Time to Failure 4.6.1. Calculate the lumen maintenance of the lamp at each interval by dividing the interval lumen output “x t 0 4.6.2. For lumen maintenance values less than 0.7, including lamp failures that result in complete loss of light output, time to failure is equal to the previously recorded lumen output measurement (at a shorter test duration) where the lumen maintenance is greater than or equal to 0.7. 4.6.3. For lumen maintenance values equal to 0.7, time to failure is equal to the test duration. 4.6.4. For lumen maintenance values greater than 0.7, use the following method: 4.6.4.1. For test duration values less than 3,000 hours, do not project time to failure. Time to failure equals the test duration. 4.6.4.2. For test duration values greater than or equal to 3,000 hours but less than 6,000 hours, time to failure is equal to the lesser of the projected time to failure calculated according to section 4.6.4.2.1 of this appendix or the test duration multiplied by the limiting multiplier calculated in section 4.6.4.2.2 of this appendix. 4.6.4.2.1. Project time to failure using the projection method described in section 5.1.4 of IES TM-28 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). Project time to failure for each individual LED lamp. Do not use data obtained prior to a test duration value of 1,000 hours. 4.6.4.2.2. Calculate the limiting multiplier from the following equation: 4.6.4.3. For test duration values greater than 6,000 hours, time to failure is equal to the lesser of the projected time to failure calculated according to section 4.6.4.3.1 or the test duration multiplied by six. 4.6.4.3.1. Project time to failure using the projection method described in section 5.1.4 of IES TM-28 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). Project time to failure for each individual LED lamp. Data used for the time to failure projection method must be as specified in section 5.1.3 of IES TM-28. 5. Standby Mode Test Method for Determining Standby Mode Power Measure standby mode power consumption for integrated LED lamps capable of operating in standby mode. The standby mode test method in this section 5 may be completed before or after the active mode test method for determining lumen output, input power, CCT, CRI, power factor, and lamp efficacy in section 3 of this appendix. The standby mode test method in this section 5 must be completed before the active mode test method for determining time to failure in section 4 of this appendix. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over IES LM-79 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 5.1. Test Conditions and Setup 5.1.1. Establish the ambient conditions, power supply, electrical settings, and instrumentation in accordance with the specifications in sections 2.0, 3.0, 7.0, and 8.0 of IES LM-79 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), respectively. Maintain the ambient temperature at 25 °C ± 1 °C. 5.1.2. Position a lamp in either the base-up and base-down orientation throughout testing. An equal number of lamps in the sample must be tested in the base-up and base-down orientations. 5.1.3. Operate the integrated LED lamp at the rated voltage throughout testing. For an integrated LED lamp with multiple rated voltages, operate the integrated LED lamp at 120 volts. If an integrated LED lamp with multiple rated voltages is not rated for 120 volts, operate the integrated LED lamp at the highest rated input voltage. 5.2. Test Method, Measurements, and Calculations 5.2.1. The test conditions and setup described in section 3.1 of this appendix apply to this section. 5.2.2. Connect the integrated LED lamp to the manufacturer-specified wireless control network (if applicable) and configure the integrated LED lamp in standby mode by sending a signal to the integrated LED lamp instructing it to have zero light output. Lamp must remain connected to the network throughout the duration of the test. 5.2.3. Stabilize the integrated LED lamp as specified in section 5 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) prior to measurement. 5.2.4. Measure the standby mode power in watts as specified in section 5 of IEC 62301. [81 FR 43427, July 1, 2016, as amended at 83 FR 47812, Sept. 21, 2018; 90 FR 4602, Jan. 16, 2025] Appendix CC to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Portable Air Conditioners Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix to determine compliance with the relevant standards for portable air conditioners at § 430.32(cc) with which compliance is required as of January 10, 2025. Specifically, before November 13, 2023 representations must be based upon results generated either under this appendix or under this appendix CC as it appeared in the 10 CFR parts 200-499 edition revised as of January 1, 2021. Any representations made on or after November 13, 2023 but before the compliance date of any amended standards for portable ACs must be made based upon results generated using this appendix. Manufacturers must use the results of testing under appendix CC1 to this subpart to determine compliance with any standards that amend the portable air conditioners standard at § 430.32(cc) with which compliance is required on January 10, 2025 and that use the Annualized Energy Efficiency Ratio (AEER) metric. Any representations related to energy also must be made in accordance with the appendix that applies ( i.e., 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3 the entire standard for ANSI/AHAM PAC-1-2015, ANSI/AMCA 210-99, ASHRAE 37-2009, ASHRAE 41.1-1986, ASHRAE 41.6-1994, and IEC 62301; however, only enumerated provisions of ANSI/AHAM PAC-1-2015, ANSI/AMCA 210-99, ASHRAE 37-2009, and IEC 62301 apply to this appendix CC as follows. Treat “should” in IEC 62301 as mandatory. When there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes precedence over those documents. 0.1 ANSI/AHAM PAC-1-2015 (a) Section 4 “Definitions,” as specified in section 3.1.1 of this appendix, except for AHAM's definition for “Portable Air Conditioner”; (b) Section 7 “Tests,” as specified in sections 3.1.1, 3.1.1.3, 3.1.1.4, 4.1.1, and 4.1.2 of this appendix. 0.2 ANSI/AMCA 210-99 (“ANSI/AMCA 210”) (a) Figure 12 “Outlet chamber Setup—Multiple Nozzles in Chamber” as specified in section 4.1.1 of this appendix; (b) Figure 12 Notes as specified in section 4.1.1 of this appendix. 0.3 ASHRAE 37-2009 (a) Section 5.4 “Electrical Instruments,” as specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of this appendix; (b) Section 7.3 “Indoor and Outdoor Air Enthalpy Methods,” as specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of this appendix; (c) Section 7.6 “Outdoor Liquid Coil Method,” as specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of this appendix; (d) Section 7.7 “Airflow Rate Measurement,” as specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of this appendix; (e) Section 8.7 “Test Procedure for Cooling Capacity Tests,” as specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of this appendix; (f) Section 9.2 “Test Tolerances,” as specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of this appendix; (g) Section 11.1 “Symbols Used In Equations,” as specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of this appendix. 0.4 IEC 62301 (a) Paragraph 4.2 “Test room,” as specified in section 3.2.4 of this appendix; (b) Paragraph 4.3.2 “Supply voltage waveform,” as specified in section 3.2.2.2 of this appendix; (c) Paragraph 4.4 “Power measuring instruments,” as specified in section 3.2.3 of this appendix; (d) Paragraph 5.1, “General,” Note 1, as specified in section 4.3 of this appendix; (e) Paragraph 5.2 “Preparation of product,” as specified in section 3.2.1 of this appendix; (f) Paragraph 5.3.2 “Sampling method,” as specified in section 4.3 of this appendix; (g) Annex D, “Determination of Uncertainty of Measurement,” as specified in sections 3.2.1, 3.2.2.2, and 3.2.3 of this appendix. 1. Scope This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the energy performance of single-duct and dual-duct portable air conditioners, as defined at 10 CFR 430.2. 2. Definitions Combined-duct Combined energy efficiency ratio Cooling mode Dual-duct Full compressor speed (full) Inactive mode Low compressor speed (low) i.e., i.e., Off-cycle mode (a) Has cycled off its main cooling or heating function by thermostat or temperature sensor signal; (b) May or may not operate its fan or blower; and (c) Will reactivate the main function according to the thermostat or temperature sensor signal. Off mode Seasonally adjusted cooling capacity Seasonally adjusted cooling capacity, full Single-duct Single-speed Standby mode (a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of cooling mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer; or (b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks ( e.g., Theoretical comparable single-speed Variable-speed 3. Test Apparatus and General Instructions 3.1 Active mode. 3.1.1 Test conduct. 3.1.1.1 Duct setup. 3.1.1.2 Single-duct evaporator inlet test conditions. 3.1.1.3 Condensate Removal. 3.1.1.4 Unit Placement. 3.1.1.5 Electrical supply. 3.1.1.6 Duct temperature measurements. 3.1.2 Control settings. 3.2 Standby Mode and Off Mode 3.2.1 Installation requirements. 3.2.2 Electrical energy supply. 3.2.2.1 Electrical supply. 3.2.2.2 Supply voltage waveform. 3.2.3 Standby mode and off mode wattmeter. 3.2.4 Standby mode and off mode ambient temperature. 4. Test Measurement 4.1 Cooling Mode Note: For the purposes of this cooling mode test procedure, evaporator inlet air is considered the “indoor air” of the conditioned space and condenser inlet air is considered the “outdoor air” outside of the conditioned space. 4.1.1 Single-Speed Cooling Mode Test. SD SD 95 95 83 83 Table 1—Single-Speed Evaporator (Indoor) and Condenser (Outdoor) Inlet Test Conditions Test condition Evaporator inlet air, °F ( °C) Condenser inlet air, °F ( °C) Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb 1.A 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) 95 (35.0) 75 (23.9) 1.B 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) 83 (28.3) 67.5 (19.7) 1.C 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) 4.1.2 Variable-Speed Cooling Mode Test. SD_Full SD_Full SD_Low SD_Low 95_Full 95_Full 83_Full 83_Full 83_Low 83_Low Table 2—Variable-Speed Evaporator (Indoor) and Condenser (Outdoor) Inlet Test Conditions Test condition Evaporator inlet air °F ( °C) Condenser inlet air °F ( °C) Compressor speed Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb 2.A 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) 95 (35.0) 75 (23.9) Full. 2.B 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) 83 (28.3) 67.5 (19.7) Full. 2.C 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) 83 (28.3) 67.5 (19.7) Low. 2.D 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) Full. 2.E 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) 80 (26.7) 67 (19.4) Low. 4.1.3. Duct Heat Transfer Throughout the cooling mode test, measure the surface temperature of the condenser exhaust duct and condenser inlet duct, where applicable. Calculate the average temperature at each thermocouple placement location. Then calculate the average surface temperature of each duct. For single-duct and dual-duct units, calculate the average of the four average temperature measurements taken on the duct. For combined-duct units, calculate the average of the sixteen average temperature measurements taken on the duct. Calculate the surface area (A duct_j A duct_j Where: Cj = the circumference of duct “j”, including any manufacturer-supplied insulation, measured by wrapping a flexible measuring tape, or equivalent, around the outside of a combined duct, making sure the tape is on the outermost ridges or, alternatively, if the duct has a circular cross-section, by multiplying the outer diameter by 3.14. Lj = the extended length of duct “j” while under test. j represents the condenser exhaust duct for single-duct units, the condenser exhaust duct and the condenser inlet duct for dual-duct units, and the combined duct for combined-duct units. Calculate the total heat transferred from the surface of the duct(s) to the indoor conditioned space while operating in cooling mode at each test condition, as follows: For single-duct single-speed portable air conditioners: Q duct_SD duct_j T duct_j T ei For dual-duct single-speed portable air conditioners: Q duct_DD_95 j duct_j duct_95_j ei Q duct_DD_83 j duct_j duct_83_j ei For single-duct variable-speed portable air conditioners: Q duct_SD_Full duct T duct_Full_j T ei Q duct_SD_Low duct T duct_Low_j T ei For dual-duct variable-speed portable air conditioners: Q duct_DD_95_Full j duct_j duct_Full_95_j ei Q duct_DD_83_Full j duct_j duct_Full_83_j ei Q duct_DD_83_Low j duct_j duct_Low_83_j ei Where: Q duct_SD Q duct_DD_95 duct_DD_83 Q duct_SD_Full duct_SD_Low Q duct_DD_95_Full duct_DD_83_Full duct_DD_83_Low 3 = empirically-derived convection coefficient in Btu/h per square foot per °F. A duct_j T duct_j T duct_95_j duct_83_j T duct_Full_j duct_Low_j T duct_Full_95_j duct_Full_83_j duct_Low_83_j j represents the condenser exhaust duct for single-duct units, the condenser exhaust duct and the condenser inlet duct for dual-duct units, and the combined duct for combined-duct units. T ei 4.1.4. Infiltration Air Heat Transfer. Calculate the sample unit's heat contribution from infiltration air into the conditioned space for each cooling mode test as follows: Calculate the dry air mass flow rate of infiltration air, which affects the sensible and latent components of heat contribution from infiltration air, according to the following equations. For a single-duct single-speed unit: For a dual-duct single-speed unit: For a single-duct variable-speed unit: For a dual-duct variable-speed unit: Where: m SD SD_Full SD_Low m 95, 83, 95_Full 83_Full 83_Low V co_SD, co_SD_Full, co_SD_Low, co_95, co_83, co_95_Full co_83_Full co_83_Low V ci_95, ci_83, ci_95_Full, ci_83_Full, ci_83_Low ρ co_SD, co_SD_Full, co_SD_Low co_95, co_83, co_95_Full, co_83_Full, co_83_Low m 3 ρ ci_95, ci_83, ci_95_Full ci_83_Full ci_83_Low m 3 ω co_SD, co_SD_Full, co_SD_Low, co_95, co_83, co_95_Full, co_83_Full, co_83_Low w da ω ci_95, ci_83, ci_95_Full ci_83_Full ci_83_Low w da Calculate the sensible component of infiltration air heat contribution according to the following equations. For single-duct single-speed units: Q s_SD_95 SD p_da p_wv Q s_SD_83 SD p_da p_wv For dual-duct single-speed units: Q s_DD_95 95 p_da p_wv Q s_DD_83 83 p_da p_wv For single-duct variable-speed units: Q s_SD_95_Full SD_Full p_da p_wv Q s_SD_83_Full SD_Full p_da p_wv Q s_SD_83_Low SD_Low p_da p_wv For dual-duct variable-speed units: Q s_DD_95_Full 95_Full p_da p_wv Q s_DD_83_Full 83_Full p_da p_wv Q s_DD_83_Low 83_Low p_da p_wv Where: Q s_SD_95 s_SD_83 s_DD_95 s_DD_83 Q s_SD_95_Full s_SD_83_Full s_SD_83_Low s_DD_95_Full, s_DD_83_Full, s_DD_83_Low m SD 95 83 m SD_95_Full SD_83_Low 95_Full 83_Low c p_da c p_wv 80 = indoor chamber dry-bulb temperature, in °F. 95 = infiltration air dry-bulb temperature for Test Conditions 1.A and 2.A, in °F. 83 = infiltration air dry-bulb temperature for Test Conditions 1.B, 2.B, and 2.C, in °F. 0.0141 = humidity ratio of the dry-bulb infiltration air for Test Conditions 1.A and 2.A, in lb w da 0.01086 = humidity ratio of the dry-bulb infiltration air for Test Conditions 1.B, 2.B, and 2.C, in lb w da 0.0112 = humidity ratio of the indoor chamber air, in lb w da indoor 60 = conversion factor from minutes to hours. Calculate the latent heat contribution of the infiltration air according to the following equations. For a single-duct single-speed unit: Q l_SD_95 SD Q l_SD_83 SD For a dual-duct single-speed unit: Q l_DD_95 95 Q l_DD_83 83 For a single-duct variable-speed unit: Q l_SD_95_Full SD_Full Q l_SD_83_Full SD_Full Q l_SD_83_Low SD_Low For a dual-duct variable-speed unit: Q l_DD_95_Full 95_Full Q l_DD_83_Full 83_Full Q l_DD_83_Low 83_Low Where: Q l_SD_95 l_SD_83 l_DD_95 l_DD_83 Q l_SD_95_Full l_SD_83_Full l_SD_Low l_DD_95_Full, l_DD_83_Full, l_DD_83_Low m SD 95 83 m SD_Full SD_Low 95_Full 83_Full 83_Low 1061 = latent heat of vaporization for water vapor, in Btu/lb m fg 0.0141 = humidity ratio of the dry-bulb infiltration air for Test Conditions 1.A and 2.A, in lb w da 0.01086 = humidity ratio of the dry-bulb infiltration air for Test Conditions 1.B, 2.B, and 2.C, in lb w da 0.0112 = humidity ratio of the indoor chamber air, in lb w da 60 = conversion factor from minutes to hours. Calculate the total heat contribution of the infiltration air at each test condition by adding the sensible and latent heat according to the following equations. For a single-duct single-speed unit: Q infiltration_SD_95 s_SD_95 l_SD_95 Q infiltration_SD_83 s_SD_83 l_SD_83 For a dual-duct single-speed unit: Q infiltration_DD_95 s_DD_95 l_DD_95 Q infiltration_DD_83 s_DD_83 l_DD_83 For a single-duct variable-speed unit: Q infiltration_SD_95_Full s_SD_95_Full l_SD_95_Full Q infiltration_SD_83_Full s_SD_83_Full l_SD_83_Full Q infiltration_SD_83_Low s_SD_83_Low l_SD_83_Low For a dual-duct variable-speed unit: Q infiltration_DD_95_Full s_DD_95_Full l_DD_95_Full Q infiltration_DD_83_Full s_DD_83_Full l_DD_83_Full Q infiltration_DD_83_Low s_DD_83_Low l_DD_83_Low Where: Q infiltration_SD_95 infiltration_SD_83 infiltration_DD_95 infiltration_DD_83 Q infiltration_SD_95_Full infiltration_SD_83_Full infiltration_SD_83_Low infiltration_DD_95_Full infiltration_DD_83_Full infiltration_DD_83_Low Q s_SD_95 s_SD_83 s_DD_95 s_DD_83 Q s_SD_95_Full s_SD_83_Full s_SD_83_Low s_DD_95_Full s_DD_83_Full s_DD_83_Low Q l_SD_95 l_SD_83 l_DD_95 l_DD_83 Q l_SD_95_Full l_SD_83_Full l_SD_83_Low l_DD_95_Full, l_DD_83_Full, l_DD_83_Low 4.2 Off-cycle mode. oc 4.3 Standby mode and off mode. 4.3.1 If the portable air conditioner has an inactive mode, as defined in section 2.6 of this appendix, but not an off mode, as defined in section 2.8 of this appendix, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the portable air conditioner, P ia 4.3.2 If the portable air conditioner has an off mode, as defined in section 2.8 of this appendix, measure and record the average off mode power of the portable air conditioner, P om 5. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements 5.1 Adjusted Cooling Capacity 5.1.1 Single-Speed Adjusted Cooling Capacity. For a single-duct single-speed portable air conditioner unit: ACC SD_95_SS Capacity SD Q duct_SD Q inflitration_SD_95 ACC SD_83_SS Capacity SD Q duct_SD Q inflitration_SD_83 For a dual-duct single-speed portable air conditioner unit: ACC DD_95_SS Capacity 95 Q duct_DD_95 Q inflitration_DD_95 ACC DD_83_SS Capacity 83 Q duct_DD_83 Q inflitration_DD_83 Where: Capacity SD 95 83 Q duct_SD duct_DD_95 duct_DD_83 Q infiltration_SD_95, infiltration_SD_83, infiltration_DD_95, infiltration_DD_83 5.1.2 Variable-Speed Adjusted Cooling Capacity. For a single-duct variable-speed portable air conditioner unit: ACC SD_ 95 Capacity SD_Full Q duct_SD_Full Q inflitration_SD_95_Full ACC SD_ 83_ Full Capacity SD_Full Q duct_SD_Full Q inflitration_SD_ 83_ Full ACC SD_ 83_ Low Capacity SD_Low Q duct_SD_Low Q inflitration_SD_ 83 _Low For a dual-duct variable-speed portable air conditioner unit: ACC DD_ 95 Capacity DD_ 95_ Full Q duct_DD_ 95_ Full Q inflitration_DD_ 95_ Full ACC DD_ 83_ Full Capacity DD_ 83_ Full Q duct_DD_ 83_ Full Q inflitration_DD_ 83_ Full ACC DD_ 83_ Low Capacity DD_ 83_ Low Q duct_DD_ 83_ Low Q inflitration_DD_ 83_ Low Where: Capacity SD_Full SD_Low DD_95_Full DD_83_Full DD_83_Low Q duct_SD_Full duct_SD_Low duct_DD_95_Full duct_DD_83_Full duct_DD_83_Low Q infiltration_SD_95_Full infiltration_SD_83_Full infiltration_SD_83_Low infiltration_DD_95_Full infiltration_DD_83_Full infiltration_DD_83_Low 5.2 Seasonally Adjusted Cooling Capacity 5.2.1 Calculate the unit's seasonally adjusted cooling capacity, SACC, in Btu/h, according to the following equations: For a single-speed portable air conditioner unit: SACC SD ACC SD_ 95_ SS ACC SD_ 83_ SS SACC DD ACC DD_ 95_ SS ACC SD_ 83_ SS For a variable-speed portable air conditioner unit: SACC SD ACC SD_ 95 ACC SD_ 83_ Low SACC DD ACC DD_ 95 ACC DD_ 83_ Low Where: ACC SD_95_SS SD_83_SS DD_95_SS DD_83_SS ACC SD_95 SD_83_Low DD_95 DD_83_Low 0.2 = weighting factor for the 95 °F test condition. 0.8 = weighting factor for the 83 °F test condition. 5.2.2 For variable-speed portable ACs determine a Full-Load Seasonally Adjusted Cooling Capacity (SACC Full_SD Full_DD SACC Full_SD ACC SD_ 95 ACC SD_ 83_ Full SACC Full_DD ACC DD_ 95 ACC DD_ 83_ Full ACC SD_95 SD_83_Full DD_95 DD_83_Full 0.2 = weighting factor for the 95 °F test condition. 0.8 = weighting factor for the 83 °F test condition. 5.3 Annual Energy Consumption. Type of portable air conditioner Operating mode Subscript Annual Variable speed (single- or dual-duct) Cooling Mode: Test Conditions 2.A, 2.B, 2.C, 2.D, and 2.E 1 DD_95_Full, DD_83_Full, DD_83_Low, SD_Full, and SD_Low 750 Single speed (single- or dual-duct) Cooling Mode: Test Conditions 1.A, 1.B, and 1C 1 DD_95, DD_83, and SD 750 all Off-Cycle oc 880 all Inactive or Off ia or om 1,355 1 AEC m P m t m Where: AEC m m represents the operating mode as shown in the table above with each operating mode's respective subscript. P m t m 0.001 kWh/Wh = conversion factor from watt-hours to kilowatt-hours. Calculate the sample unit's total annual energy consumption in off-cycle mode and inactive or off mode as follows: Where: AEC T AEC m ncm represents the following two non-cooling operating modes: off-cycle mode and inactive or off mode. 5.4 Combined Energy Efficiency Ratio 5.4.1 Combined Energy Efficiency Ratio for Single-Speed Portable Air Conditioners. Using the annual operating hours established in section 5.3 of this appendix, calculate the combined energy efficiency ratio, CEER, in Btu/Wh, for single-speed portable air conditioners according to the following equation, as applicable: Where: CEER SD DD ACC SD_95_SS, SD_83_SS, DD_95_SS, DD_83_SS AEC SD DD_95 DD_83 AEC T 0.750 = number of cooling mode hours per year, 750, multiplied by the conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours, 0.001 kWh/Wh. 0.2 = weighting factor for the 95 °F dry-bulb outdoor condition test. 0.8 = weighting factor for the 83 °F dry-bulb outdoor condition test. 5.4.2 Unadjusted Combined Energy Efficiency Ratio for Variable-Speed Portable Air Conditioners. For a variable-speed portable air conditioner, calculate the unit's unadjusted combined energy efficiency ratio, CEER UA, For single-duct variable-speed portable air conditioners: For dual-duct variable-speed portable air conditioners: Where: CEER SD_UA DD_UA ACC SD_95 SD_83_Low DD_95 DD_83 AEC SD_Full SD_Low DD_95_Full DD_83_Low AEC ia/om 0.750 = number of cooling mode hours per year, 750, multiplied by the conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours, 0.001 kWh/Wh. 0.2 = weighting factor for the 95 °F dry-bulb outdoor temperature operating condition. 0.8 = weighting factor for the 83 °F dry-bulb outdoor temperature operating condition. 5.5 Adjustment of the Combined Energy Efficiency Ratio. 5.5.1 Theoretical Comparable Single-Speed Portable Air Conditioner Cooling Capacity and Power at the Lower Outdoor Temperature Operating Condition. For a single-duct theoretical comparable single speed portable air conditioner: Capacity SD_83_SS SD_Full Capacity SD_83_SS_CF SD_Full P SD_83_SS SD_Full For a dual-duct theoretical comparable single speed portable air conditioner: Capacity DD_83_SS 83_Full Capacity DD_83_SS_CF 83_Full P DD_83_SS 83_Full Where: Capacity SD_83_SS DD_83_SS Capacity SD_83_SS_CF DD_83_SS_CF Capacity SD_Full 83_Full P SD_83_SS DD_83_SS P SD_Full 83_Full 0.82 = empirically-derived cycling factor for the 83 °F dry-bulb outdoor temperature operating condition for single-duct units. 0.77 = empirically-derived cycling factor for the 83 °F dry-bulb outdoor temperature operating condition for dual-duct units. 5.5.2 Duct Heat Transfer for a Theoretical Comparable Single-Speed Portable Air Conditioner at the Lower Outdoor Temperature Operating Condition. For a single-duct theoretical comparable single-speed portable air conditioner: Q duct_SD_83_SS duct_SD_Full For a dual-duct theoretical comparable single-speed portable air conditioner: Q duct_DD_83_SS duct_DD_83_Full Where: Q duct_SD_83_SS duct_DD_83_SS Q duct_SD_Full duct_DD_83_Full 5.5.3 Infiltration Air Heat Transfer for a Theoretical Comparable Single-Speed Portable Air Conditioner at the Lower Outdoor Temperature Operating Condition. For a single-duct theoretical comparable single-speed portable air conditioner: Q infiltration_SD_83_SS infiltration_SD_83_Full For a dual-duct theoretical comparable single-speed portable air conditioner: Q infiltration_DD_83_SS infiltration_DD_83_Full Where: Q infiltration_SD_83_SS infiltration_DD_83_SS Q infiltration_SD_83_Full and infiltration_DD_83_Full 5.5.4 Adjusted Cooling Capacity for a Theoretical Comparable Single-Speed Portable Air Conditioner at the Lower Outdoor Temperature Operating Condition. For a single-duct theoretical comparable single-speed portable air conditioner: ACC SD_83_SS SD_83_SS duct_SD_83_SS infiltration_SD_83_SS ACC SD_83_SS_CF SD_83_SS_CF duct_SD_83_SS infiltration_SD_83_SS For a dual-duct theoretical comparable single-speed portable air conditioner: ACC DD____83_SS 83_SS duct_DD_83_SS infiltration_DD_83_SS ACC DD_83_SS_CF DD_83_SS_CF duct_DD_83_SS infiltration_DD_83_SS Where: ACC SD_83_SS SD_83_SS_CF DD_83_SS DD_83_SS_CF Capacity SD_83_SS SD_83_SS_CF Capacity DD_83_SS DD_83_SS_CF Q duct_SD_83_SS duct_DD_83_SS Q infiltration_SD_83_SS infiltration_DD_83_SS 5.5.5 Annual Energy Consumption in Cooling Mode for a Theoretical Comparable Single-Speed Portable Air Conditioner at the Lower Outdoor Temperature Operating Condition. For a single-duct theoretical comparable single-speed portable air conditioner: AEC SD_83_SS SD_83_SS For a dual-duct theoretical comparable single-speed portable air conditioner: AEC DD_83_SS DD_83_SS Where: AEC SD_83_SS DD_83_SS P SD_83_SS DD_83_SS 0.750 = number of cooling mode hours per year, 750, multiplied by the conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours, 0.001 kWh/Wh. 5.5.6 Combined Energy Efficiency Ratio for a Theoretical Comparable Single-Speed Portable Air Conditioner. SD_SS DD_SS SD_SS_CF DD_SS_CF For a single-duct portable air conditioner: For a dual-duct portable air conditioner: Where: CEER SD_SS SD_CF_SS CEER DD_SS DD_CF_SS ACC SD_95 DD_95 ACC SD_83_SS SD_83_SS_CF ACC DD_83_SS DD_83_SS_CF AEC SD_Full AEC DD_95_Full AEC SD_83_SS DD_83_SS AEC T 0.750 as defined previously in this section. 0.2 = weighting factor for the 95 °F dry-bulb outdoor temperature operating condition. 0.8 = weighting factor for the 83 °F dry-bulb outdoor temperature operating condition. 5.5.7 Performance Adjustment Factor. p For a single-duct unit: For a dual-duct unit: Where: CEER SD_SS SD_SS_CF CEER DD_SS DD_SS_CF 5.5.8 Single-Duct and Dual-Duct Variable-Speed Portable Air Conditioner Combined Energy Efficiency Ratio. For a single-duct portable air conditioner: CEER SD SD_UA p_SD For a dual-duct portable air conditioner: CEER DD DD_UA p_DD Where: CEER SD DD CEER SD_UA DD_UA F p_SD p_DD [81 FR 35265, June 1, 2016, as amended at 81 FR 70923, Oct. 14, 2016; 85 FR 21746, Apr. 20, 2020; 88 FR 31127, May 15, 2023] Appendix CC1 to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Portable Air Conditioners Note: Manufacturers must use the results of testing under this appendix CC1 to determine compliance with any standards that amend the portable air conditioners standard at § 430.32(cc) with which compliance is required on January 10, 2025 and that use the Annualized Energy Efficiency Ratio (AEER) metric. Any representation related to energy also must be made in accordance with the appendix that applies ( i.e., 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire standard for AHAM PAC-1-2022, ANSI/AMCA 210-99, ASHRAE 37-2009, ASHRAE 41.1-1986, ASHRAE 41.6-1994, and IEC 62301; however, only enumerated provisions of AHAM PAC-1-2022, ANSI/AMCA 210-99, ASHRAE 37-2009, and IEC 62301 are applicable to this appendix CC1, as follows. Treat “should” in IEC 62301 as mandatory. When there is a conflict, the language of this appendix takes precedence over those documents. 0.1 AHAM PAC-1-2022 (a) Section 4 “Definitions,” as specified in section 2 of this appendix; (b) Section 7 “Test Setup,” as specified in sections 3 and 4 of this appendix; (c) Section 8 “Test Conduct,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (d) Section 8.1 “Cooling Mode,” as specified in sections 5.1 and 5.3 of this appendix; (e) Section 9 “Calculation of Derived Results from Test Measurements,” as specified in section 5 of this appendix; (f) Section 9.1 “Duct Heat Transfer,” as specified in section 5.1 of this appendix; (g) Section 9.2 “Infiltration Air Heat Transfer,” as specified in section 5.1 of this appendix. 0.2 ANSI/AMCA 210-99 (“ANSI/AMCA 210”) (a) Figure 12, “Outlet chamber Setup—Multiple Nozzles in Chamber,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (b) Figure 12 Notes, as specified in section 4 of this appendix. 0.3 ASHRAE 37-2009 (a) Section 5.1 “Temperature Measuring Instruments,” as specified in section 3 of this appendix; (b) Section 5.3 “Air Differential Pressure and Airflow Measurements,” as specified in section 3 of this appendix; (c) Section 5.4 “Electrical Instruments,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (d) Section 6.2 “Nozzle Airflow Measuring Apparatus,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (e) Section 6.3 “Nozzles,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (f) Section 7.3 “Indoor and Outdoor Air Enthalpy Methods,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (g) Section 7.7 “Airflow Rate Measurement,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (h) Section 8.7 “Test Procedure for Cooling Capacity Tests,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (i) Section 9 “Data to be Recorded,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (j) Section 10 “Test Results,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (k) Section 11.1 “Symbols Used In Equations,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix. 0.4 IEC 62301 (a) Paragraph 4.2 “Test room” as specified in section 3 of this appendix; (b) Paragraph 4.3.2 “Supply voltage waveform,” as specified in section 3 of this appendix; (c) Paragraph 4.4 “Power measuring instruments,” as specified in section 3 of this appendix; (d) Paragraph 5.1, “General,” Note 1 as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (e)Paragraph 5.2 “Preparation of product,” as specified in section 3 of this appendix; (f) Paragraph 5.3.2 “Sampling method,” as specified in section 4 of this appendix; (g) Annex D, “Determination of Uncertainty of Measurement,” as specified in section 3 of this appendix. 1. Scope Establishes test requirements to measure the energy performance of single-duct and dual-duct, and single-speed and variable-speed portable air conditioners in accordance with AHAM PAC-1-2022, unless otherwise specified. 2. Definitions Definitions for industry standards, terms, modes, calculations, etc. are in accordance with AHAM PAC-1-2022, section 4, with the following added definition: Annualized Energy Efficiency Ratio 3. Test Apparatus and General Instructions Follow requirements and instructions for test conduct and test setup in accordance with AHAM PAC-1-2022, section 7, excluding section 7.1.3, including references to ASHRAE 37-2009, sections 5.1 and 5.3, and IEC 62301 sections 4.2, 4.3.2, 4.4, and 5.2, and Annex D. If the portable air conditioner has network functions, disable all network functions throughout testing if possible. If an end-user cannot disable a network function or the product's user manual does not provide instruction for disabling a network function, test the unit with that network function in the factory default configuration for the duration of the test. 3.1 Duct temperature measurements. 4. Test Measurement Follow requirements for test conduct in active and inactive modes of operation in accordance with AHAM PAC-1-2022, section 8, except section 8.1.b, including references to sections 5.4, 6.2, 6.3, 7.3, 7.7, 8.7, 9, 10, and 11 of ASHRAE 37-2009, referring to Figure 12 and Figure 12 Notes of ANSI/AMCA 210 to determine placement of static pressure taps, and including references to ASHRAE 41.1-1986 and ASHRAE 41.6-1994. When conducting cooling mode testing for a variable-speed dual-duct portable air conditioner, use test configurations 1C and 1E in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022. Conduct the first test in accordance with ambient conditions for test configuration 1C in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022, and measure cooling capacity (Capacity DD_95_Full DD_95_Full DD_83_Low DD_83_Low 5. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements Perform calculations from test measurements to determine Seasonally Adjusted Cooling Capacity (SACC) and Annualized Energy Efficiency Ratio (AEER) in accordance with AHAM PAC-1-2022, section 9 unless otherwise specified in this section. 5.1 Adjusted Cooling Capacity. For a single-duct single-speed unit: ACC 95 = Capacity SD Q duct_SD infiltration_95 ACC 83 0.6000 Capacity SD duct_SD Q infiltration_83 For a single-duct variable-speed unit: ACC 95 = Capacity SD_Full Q duct_SD_Full Q infiltration_95 ACC 83 = Capacity SD_Low Q duct_SD_Low Q infiltration_83_Low For a dual-duct single-speed unit: ACC 95 = Capacity DD_95_Full Q duct_DD_95_Full Q infiltration_95 ACC 83 = 0.5363 Capacity DD_83 Q duct_DD_83 Q infiltration_83 For a dual-duct variable-speed unit: ACC 95 = Capacity DD_95_Full Q duct_DD_95_Full Q infiltration_95 ACC 83 = Capacity DD_Low Q duct_DD_83_Low Q infiltration_83_Low Where: ACC 95 83 For a single-duct single-speed unit, test configuration 2A in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022. For a single-duct variable-speed unit, test configurations 2B and 2C in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022. For a dual-duct single-speed unit, test configurations 1A and 1B in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022. For a dual-duct variable-speed unit: test configurations 1C and 1E in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022. Capacity SD SD_Full SD_Low DD_95 DD_83 DD_95_Full DD_83_Low Q duct_SD, duct_SD_Full duct_SD_Low duct_DD_95 duct_DD_83 duct_DD_95_Full duct_DD_83_Low Q infiltration_95 infiltration_83 infiltration_83_Low For a single-duct single-speed unit, use Q infiltration_95 infiltration_83 For a single-duct variable-speed unit, use Q infiltration_95 infiltration_83_Low For a dual-duct single-speed unit, use Q infiltration_95 infiltration_83 For a dual-duct variable-speed unit, use Q infiltration_95 infiltration_83_Low 0.6000 and 0.5363 = empirically-derived load-based capacity adjustment factor for a single-duct and dual-duct single-speed unit, respectively, when operating at test conditions 2A and 1B. 5.2 Seasonally Adjusted Cooling Capacity. SACC ACC 95 ACC 83 Where: ACC 95 83 0.144 = empirically-derived weighting factor for ACC 95 0.856 = empirically-derived weighting factor for ACC 83 5.3 Annual Energy Consumption. Table 1—Annual Operating Hours Operating mode Annual operating hours Cooling Mode Test Configurations 1A, 1C, 2A (95), 2B 164 Cooling Mode Test Configurations 1B, 2A (83) 586 Cooling Mode Test Configuration 1E, 2C 977 Off-Cycle, Single-Speed 391 Off-Cycle, Variable-Speed 0 Total Cooling and Off-cycle Mode 1,141 Inactive or Off Mode 1,844 Calculate total annual energy consumption in all modes according to the following equations: AEC ia/om P ia/om t ia/om k For a single-duct single-speed unit: AEC 95 P SD_95 t SD_95 k For a single-duct variable-speed unit: AEC 95 P SD_Full t SD_Full k AEC 83 P SD_Low t SD_Low k For a dual-duct single-speed unit: AEC 95 P DD_95 t DD_95 k For a dual-duct variable-speed unit: AEC 95 P DD _95_ Full t DD _95_ Full k AEC 83 P DD _83_ Low t DD _83_ Low k Where: AEC 95 83 P m t m k = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor from watt-hours to kilowatt-hours. 0.82 = empirically-derived factor representing efficiency losses due to compressor cycling outside of fan operation for single-duct units 0.77 = empirically-derived factor representing efficiency losses due to compressor cycling outside of fan operation for dual-duct units m represents the operating mode: —“DD_95” and “DD_83” correspond to cooling mode in Test Configurations 1A and 1B in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022, respectively, for dual-duct single-speed units, —“DD_95_Full”, “DD_83_Low” correspond to cooling mode in Test Configurations 1C and 1E in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022, respectively, for dual-duct variable-speed units, —“SD_95” corresponds to cooling mode in Test Configuration 2A in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022 for single-duct single-speed units, for use when calculating AEC at the 95 °F outdoor temperature condition, —“SD_83” corresponds to cooling mode in Test Configuration 2A in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022 for single-duct single-speed units, for use when calculating AEC at the 83 °F outdoor temperature condition, —“SD_Full” and “SD_Low” correspond to cooling mode in Test Configurations 2B and 2C in Table 2 of AHAM PAC-1-2022, respectively, for single-duct variable-speed units, —“oc” corresponds to off-cycle, —“ia/om” corresponds to inactive or off mode, 5.4 Annualized Cooling and Energy Ratio. Where: AEER = the annualized energy efficiency ratio of the sample unit in Btu/Wh. ACC 95 83 AEC 95 83 oc ia/om t cm_95 DD_95 DD_95_Full SD_95 SD_Full 164 = number of annual hours spent in cooling mode at the 95 °F operating condition, as shown in Table III.2 977 = number of annual hours spent in cooling mode and off-cycle mode at the 83 °F operating condition, defined in section 5.3 of this appendix. 0.001 = kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours. [88 FR 31136, May 15, 2023, as amended at 90 FR 6791, Jan. 21, 2025] Appendix DD to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption and Energy Efficiency of General Service Lamps That Are Not General Service Incandescent Lamps, Compact Fluorescent Lamps, or Integrated LED Lamps Note 1 to appendix DD to subpart B: On and after July 15, 2025, any representations made with respect to the energy efficiency of general service lamps that are not general service incandescent lamps, compact fluorescent lamps, or integrated LED lamps must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix DD. Manufacturers conducting tests of such general service lamps prior to July 15, 2025, must conduct such tests in accordance with either this appendix or the version of appendix DD as it appeared in the Code of Federal Regulations on January 1, 2023. Any representations made with respect to the energy efficiency of such general service lamp must be in accordance with whichever version is selected. 1. Scope: 2. Definitions: Commercially available fluorescent lamp ballast, high intensity discharge (“HID”) ballast, or external LED driver i.e., Measured initial input power Measured initial lumen output Power factor Publicly available manufacturer-provided compatibility list e.g., 3. Active Mode Test Procedures 3.1. Test Conditions and Setup 3.1.1. For single base OLED and non-integrated LED lamps, position a lamp in either the base-up and base-down orientation throughout testing. Test an equal number of lamps in the sample in the base-up and base-down orientations, except that, if the manufacturer restricts the orientation, test all of the units in the sample in the manufacturer-specified orientation. For double base OLED and non-integrated LED lamps, test all units in the horizontal orientation except that, if the manufacturer restricts the orientation, test all of the units in the sample in the manufacturer-specified orientation. 3.1.2. For integrated lamps, operate the lamp at the rated voltage throughout testing. For lamps with multiple rated voltages including 120 volts, operate the lamp at 120 volts. If a lamp is not rated for 120 volts, operate the lamp at the highest rated input voltage. 3.1.3. For non-integrated lamps, operate the lamp on a fluorescent lamp ballast, HID lamp ballast, or external LED driver in order of the following preference: 3.1.3.1. Select a commercially available fluorescent lamp ballast, HID lamp ballast, or external LED driver from the lamp's publicly available manufacturer-provided compatibility list. The test report must specify the manufacturer and model name/number of the fluorescent lamp ballast, HID lamp ballast, or external LED driver used in the test. 3.1.3.1.1. If all ballasts on the publicly available manufacturer-provided compatibility list use the same starting method, then select a ballast with that starting method to test the lamp. 3.1.3.1.1.1. If ballasts on the publicly available manufacturer-provided compatibility list are available with multiple ballast factors, then select a ballast with a ballast factor based on lamp type specified in Table 3.1. If the ballast factor in the table is not available among ballasts on the publicly available manufacturer-provided compatibility list, select a ballast with a ballast factor closest to the one listed in the table: Table 3.1—Ballast Factor by Lamp Type Lamp type Ballast factor T8 medium bipin 0.88. T8 recessed double contact 1.05. T5 miniature bipin 1. T12 single pin, slimline Any. T12 medium bipin Any. T12 recessed double contact Any. All other lamp types Any. 3.1.3.1.2. If ballasts on the publicly available manufacturer-provided compatibility list are available with multiple starting methods, then select a ballast with a starting method based on lamp type specified in Table 3.2. If the starting method in the table is not available among ballasts on the publicly available manufacturer-provided compatibility list, select any starting method on the publicly available manufacturer-provided compatibility list: Table 3.2—Starting Method by Lamp Type Lamp type Starting method T8 medium bipin Instant Start. T8 recessed double contact Instant Start. T5 miniature bipin Programmed Start. T12 single pin, slimline Instant Start. T12 medium bipin Rapid Start. T12 recessed double contact Rapid Start. All other lamp types Any. 3.1.3.1.2.1. If ballasts on the publicly available manufacturer-provided compatibility list are available with multiple ballast factors, then select a ballast with a ballast factor based on lamp type specified in Table 3.3. If the ballast factor in the table is not available among ballasts on the publicly available manufacturer-provided compatibility list, select a ballast with a ballast factor closest to the one listed in the table: Table 3.3—Ballast Factor by Lamp Type Lamp type Ballast factor T8 medium bipin 0.88. T8 recessed double contact 1.05. T5 miniature bipin 1. T12 single pin, slimline Any. T12 medium bipin Any. T12 recessed double contact Any. All other lamp types Any. 3.1.3.2. If the procedure in section 3.1.3.1 is not possible, select any commercially available fluorescent lamp ballast, HID lamp ballast, or external LED driver that can operate the lamp throughout the duration of the test. The test report must specify the manufacturer and model name/number of the fluorescent lamp ballast, HID lamp ballast, or external LED driver used in the test. 3.1.3.2.1. If all commercially available ballasts use the same starting method, then select a ballast with that starting method to test the lamp. 3.1.3.2.1.1. If commercially available ballasts are available with multiple ballast factors, then select a ballast with a ballast factor based on lamp type specified in Table 3.4. If the ballast factor in the table is not available among commercially available ballasts, select a ballast with a ballast factor closest to the one listed in the table: Table 3.4—Ballast Factor by Lamp Type Lamp type Ballast factor T8 medium bipin 0.88. T8 recessed double contact 1.05. T5 miniature bipin 1. T12 single pin, slimline Any. T12 medium bipin Any. T12 recessed double contact Any. All other lamp types Any. 3.1.3.2.2. If commercially available ballasts are available with multiple starting methods, then select a ballast with a starting method based on lamp type specified in Table 3.5. If the starting method in the table is not available among commercially available ballasts, select any starting method: Table 3.5—Starting Method by Lamp Type Lamp type Starting method T8 medium bipin Instant Start. T8 recessed double contact Instant Start. T5 miniature bipin Programmed Start. T12 single pin, slimline Instant Start. T12 medium bipin Rapid Start. T12 recessed double contact Rapid Start. All other lamp types Any. 3.1.3.2.2.1. If commercially available ballasts are available with multiple ballast factors, then select a ballast with a ballast factor based on lamp type specified in Table 3.6. If the ballast factor in the table is not available among commercially available ballasts, select a ballast with a ballast factor closest to the one listed in the table: Table 3.6—Ballast Factor by Lamp Type Lamp type Ballast factor T8 medium bipin 0.88. T8 recessed double contact 1.05. T5 miniature bipin 1. T12 single pin, slimline Any. T12 medium bipin Any. T12 recessed double contact Any. All other lamp types Any. 3.1.3.3. If the procedures in sections 3.1.3.1 and 3.1.3.2 are not possible, use any previously procured fluorescent lamp ballast, HID lamp ballast, or external LED driver that can operate the lamp throughout the duration of the test. The test report must specify the manufacturer and model name/number of the fluorescent lamp ballast, HID lamp ballast, or external LED driver used in the test. 3.1.3.3.1. If all previously procured ballasts use the same starting method, then select a ballast with that starting method to test the lamp. 3.1.3.3.1.1. If previously procured ballasts are available with multiple ballast factors, then select a ballast with a ballast factor based on lamp type specified in Table 3.7. If the ballast factor in the table is not available among the previously procured ballasts, select a ballast with a ballast factor closest to the one listed in the table: Table 3.7—Ballast Factor by Lamp Type Lamp type Ballast factor T8 medium bipin 0.88. T8 recessed double contact 1.05. T5 miniature bipin 1. T12 single pin, slimline Any. T12 medium bipin Any. T12 recessed double contact Any. All other lamp types Any. 3.1.3.3.2. If previously procured ballasts are available with multiple starting methods, then select a ballast with a starting method based on lamp type specified in Table 3.8. If the starting method in the table is not available among the previously procured ballasts, select any starting method: Table 3.8—Starting Method by Lamp Type Lamp type Starting method T8 medium bipin Instant Start. T8 recessed double contact Instant Start. T5 miniature bipin Programmed Start. T12 single pin, slimline Instant Start. T12 medium bipin Rapid Start. T12 recessed double contact Rapid Start. All other lamp types Any. 3.1.3.3.2.1. If previously procured ballasts are available with multiple ballast factors, then select a ballast with a ballast factor based on lamp type specified in Table 3.9. If the ballast factor in the table is not available among the previously procured ballasts, select a ballast with a ballast factor closest to the one listed in the table: Table 3.9—Ballast Factor by Lamp Type Lamp type Ballast factor T8 medium bipin 0.88. T8 recessed double contact 1.05. T5 miniature bipin 1. T12 single pin, slimline Any. T12 medium bipin Any. T12 recessed double contact Any. All other lamp types Any. 3.1.3.4. If the procedures in sections 3.1.3.1, 3.1.3.2 and 3.1.3.3 are not possible and the lamp only operates on a low frequency, preheat start fluorescent lamp ballast, operate the lamp on the manufacturer-declared voltage and current. The test report must specify the voltage and current with which the lamp was operated. 3.1.4. Operate the fluorescent lamp ballast, HID lamp ballast, or external LED driver loaded with the maximum number of lamps. Test one lamp at a time in the integrating sphere, while operating the other lamps outside of the sphere. Measure the initial lumen output, initial input power, input voltage, and input current for each lamp according to section 3.2.1. 3.1.5. For a non-integrated lamp designed and marketed to replace a fluorescent lamp and operate on the existing fluorescent lamp ballast, conduct testing in accordance with the following setup provisions: 3.1.5.1. Thermal conditions: A compatible combination of ballast and LED replacement lamp designed for direct replacement of linear fluorescent lamp sources must not result in the overheating of components. LED replacement lamps that are compatible with a given ballast must not cause the ballast to operate at a higher temperature or power than the fluorescent ballast ratings. The temperature measured at the Tc point must not exceed the rating of the ballast. For magnetic ballasts and electronic ballasts with no Tc point identified, the ballast enclosure must not exceed 90 degrees Celsius. 3.1.5.2 Electrical conditions: LED replacement lamps must be measured with the ballast in the circuit, consistent with rated LED replacement lamp values on a given ballast condition (ballast type/ballast factor/lamp loading). Compatibility is based on the rated values specified by the LED lamp manufacturer. The lamp current must be equal to or less than the target lamp current. (The target lamp is the fluorescent lamp the replacement lamp is intended to replace.) The measured input power to the ballast must not exceed the rating of the ballast by more than 10%. 3.1.6. For a non-integrated lamp designed and marketed to replace an HID lamp and operate on the existing HID lamp ballast, conduct testing in accordance with the following setup provisions: 3.1.6.1. Thermal conditions: The LED replacement lamp must not exceed its maximum operational temperature rating as specified by the LED lamp manufacturer. 3.1.6.2. Electrical conditions: LED replacement lamps must be measured with the ballast in the circuit, consistent with rated LED replacement lamp values on a given ballast condition (ballast type/ballast factor/lamp loading). Compatibility is based on the rated values specified by the LED replacement lamp manufacturer. The LED replacement lamp voltage must be in a range of ±15 percent of the nominal HID lamp voltage. The lamp current must be equal to or less than the target lamp current. (The target lamp is the HID lamp the device is intended to replace.) The measured input power to the ballast must not exceed the rating of the ballast by more than 10%. 3.1.6.3. Ballast conditions: For magnetic ballasts: (1) the ballast capacitor voltage for magnetic ballasts must not exceed the capacitor rating and (2) the ballast must not exceed the temperature described in its ballast temperature code. For electronic ballasts, the temperature at the Tc point must be equal or less than described on the ballast label. 3.1.7. Ensure that the lamp is not operating as a colored lamp (as defined in 10 CFR 430.2) and operate the lamp at maximum input power. If multiple modes occur at the same maximum input power (such as variable CCT or CRI), select any of these modes for testing; however, all measurements must be taken at the same selected mode. The test report must specify which mode was selected for testing and include details such that another laboratory can replicate the test at the same mode. 3.1.8. For a lamp that has one or more component(s) that offer a completely different functionality ( e.g., e.g., 3.2. Test Method, Measurements, and Calculations 3.2.1. To measure initial lumen output, input power, input voltage, and input current use the test procedures in the table in this section. Do not use a goniophotometer. Table 3.10—References to Industry Standard Test Procedures Lamp type Referenced test procedure Compact fluorescent lamps Appendix W to subpart B of 10 CFR part 430. General service incandescent lamps Appendix R to subpart B of 10 CFR part 430. Integrated LED lamps Appendix BB to subpart B of 10 CFR part 430. Non-integrated LED lamps IES LM-79-08-DD, sections 1.3 (except 1.3f), 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.1 and 9.2.* OLED lamps IES LM-79-08-DD, sections 1.3 (except 1.3f), 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.1 and 9.2.* Other fluorescent lamps IES LM-9-09-DD, sections 46, and section 7.5.* Other incandescent lamps that are not reflector lamps IES LM-45-15, sections 4-6, and section 7.1.* Other incandescent lamps that are reflector lamps IES LM-20-13, sections 4-6, and section 8.* * Incorporated by reference, see § 430.3. 3.2.2. Determine initial lamp efficacy by dividing the measured initial lumen output (lumens) by the measured initial input power (watts). Per section 3.1.4, if multiple lamps were operated on the same ballast or external LED driver, determine the initial lamp efficacy by calculating the initial lamp efficacy for each lamp and calculating the average. 3.2.3. Determine power factor by dividing the measured initial input power (watts) by the product of the measured input voltage (volts) and measured input current (amps). Per section 3.1.4, if multiple lamps were operated on the same ballast or external LED driver, determine the power factor by calculating the power factor for each lamp and calculating the average. 3.3. Standby Mode Test Procedure 3.3.1. Measure standby mode power only for lamps that are capable of standby mode operation. 3.3.2. The test conditions and setup described in section 3.1 of this appendix apply to this section. 3.3.3. Connect the lamp to the manufacturer-specified wireless control network (if applicable) and configure the lamp in standby mode by sending a signal to the lamp instructing it to have zero light output. Lamp must remain connected to the network throughout testing. 3.3.4. Operate the lamp at the rated voltage throughout testing. For lamps with multiple rated voltages including 120 volts, operate the lamp at 120 volts. If a lamp is not rated for 120 volts, operate the lamp at the highest rated input voltage. 3.3.5. Stabilize the lamp prior to measurement as specified in section 5 of IEC 62301-DD (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). 3.3.6. Measure the standby mode power in watts as specified in section 5 of IEC 62301-DD (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). [90 FR 4602, Jan. 16, 2025] Appendix EE to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method For Measuring the Energy Consumption of Consumer Boilers 0. Incorporation by reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire standard for ASHRAE 103-2017, ASHRAE 41.6-2014, ASTM D2156-09 (R2018), and IEC 62301. However, only enumerated provisions of ASHRAE 103-2017 are applicable to this appendix, as follows. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over the incorporated standards. 0.1 ASHRAE 103-2017 (a) Section 2 “Scope” as referenced in section 1 of this appendix; (b) Section 3 “Definitions” as referenced in section 2 of this appendix; (c) Section 4 “Classifications” as referenced in section 3 of this appendix; (d) Section 5 “Requirements” as referenced in section 4 of this appendix; (e) Section 6 “Instruments” as referenced in sections 5 and 8 of this appendix; (f) Section 7 “Apparatus” (except for sections 7.1 and 7.8) as referenced in sections 6, 7.7, and 8.6 of this appendix; (g) Section 8 “Methods of Testing” (except for sections 8.3.1.3, 8.3.3.1, 8.4.1.1, 8.4.1.1.1, 8.4.1.2, 8.6.1.1, 8.7.2, and 8.8.3) as referenced in sections 7 and 8 of this appendix; (h) Section 9 “Test Procedure” (except for 9.1.2.2.1, 9.1.2.2.2, 9.5.2.1, 9.7.4, and 9.10) as referenced in sections 7.3, 8, and 10.4 of this appendix; (i) Section 10 “Nomenclature” as referenced in section 9 of this appendix; and (j) Section 11 “Calculations” as referenced in sections 8.8 and 10 of this appendix. 0.2 [Reserved] 1. Scope. 2. Definitions. Active mode Boiler pump Draft inducer Gas valve Installation and operation (I&O) manual Off mode Off switch Oil control valve Standard cubic foot of gas Standby mode (a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including thermostat or remote control), internal or external sensors, or timer; (b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays or sensor-based functions. Thermal stack damper 3. Classifications. 4. Requirements. 5. Instruments. 6. Apparatus. 6.1 General. (a) Install the boiler in the test room in accordance with the I&O manual, as defined in section 2.5 of this appendix, except that if provisions within this appendix are specified, then the provisions herein drafted and prescribed by DOE govern. If the I&O manual and any additional provisions of this appendix are not sufficient for testing a boiler, the manufacturer must request a waiver from the test procedure pursuant to § 430.27. (b) The apparatuses described in section 6 of this appendix are used in conjunction with the boiler during testing. Each piece of apparatus shall conform to material and construction specifications listed in this appendix and in ASHRAE 103-2017, and the reference standards cited in this appendix and in ASHRAE 103-2017. (c) Test rooms containing equipment must have suitable facilities for providing the utilities (including but not limited to environmental controls, sufficient fluid source(s), applicable measurement equipment, and any other technology or tools) necessary for performance of the test and must be able to maintain conditions within the limits specified in section 6 of this appendix. 6.2 Condensate collection. 7. Testing conditions. 7.1 Fuel supply, gas. 7.2 Installation of piping. 7.3 Gas burner. see 7.4 Modulating gas burner adjustment at reduced input rate. 7.5 Oil burner. 2 7.6 Measurement of jacket surface temperature. 7.7 Installation of vent system. see 7.8 Additional optional method of testing for determining D P and D F F P 7.8.1 Optional test method for indicating the absence of flow through the heat exchanger. 7.8.1.1 Test apparatus. 7.8.1.2 Test conditions. 7.8.1.3 Location of the test apparatus. (a) For horizontal combustion air intakes, approximately 4 inches from the vertical plane at the termination of the intake vent and 4 inches below the bottom edge of the combustion air intake; or (b) for vertical combustion air intakes, approximately 4 inches horizontal from vent perimeter at the termination of the intake vent and 4 inches down (parallel to the vertical axis of the vent). In the instance where the boiler combustion air intake is closer than 4 inches to the floor, place the smoke device directly on the floor without impeding the flow of smoke. 7.8.1.4 Duration of test. 7.8.1.5 Test results. If absolutely no smoke is drawn into the combustion air intake, the boiler meets the requirements to allow use of the minimum default draft factor provided in section 7.8 of this appendix. If there is any smoke drawn into the intake, proceed with the methods of testing as prescribed in section 8.8 of ASHRAE 103-2017. 7.8.2 [Reserved] 8. Test procedure. 8.1 Fuel input. IN IN,R IN,R 8.2 Electrical input. 8.3 Input to interrupted ignition device. IG IG IG IG IG 8.4 Cycling Test Requirements. 8.5 Optional test procedures for condensing boilers, measurement of condensate during the establishment of steady-state conditions. C,SS C,SS 8.6 Cool-down test for gas- and oil-fueled boilers without stack dampers. F,OFF 3 F,OFF 4 a. During this off-period, for units that do not have pump delay after shut-off, do not allow any water to circulate through the hot water boilers. b. For units that have pump delay on shut-off, except those having pump controls sensing water temperature, the unit control must stop the pump. Measure and record the time between burner shut-off and pump shut-off (t + c. For units having pump delay controls that sense water temperature, operate the pump for 15 minutes and record t + d. For boilers that employ post-purge, measure the length of the post-purge period with a stopwatch. Record the time from burner “OFF” to combustion blower “OFF” (electrically de-energized) as t P P F,OFF P P F,OFF 3 P F,OFF 4 P P F,OFF P P P 8.7 [Reserved] 8.8 Calculation options. P F S F P 8.9 Optional test procedures for condensing boilers that have no off-period flue losses. HS 8.10 Measurement of electrical standby and off mode power. 8.10.1 Standby power measurement. W,SB Room Ambient Temperature, Electrical Supply, Test room, Power supply. Power measurement instruments, Measurements, Energy Flow Rate. W,SB 8.10.2 Off mode power measurement. W OFF Room Ambient Temperature, Electrical Supply, Test room, Power supply. Power measurement instruments, Measurements, Energy Flow Rate. W,OFF W,SB W,OFF 9. Nomenclature. Eff motor PE IG R T,a T,F = R T,S R T,F R T,S t IG T a,SS,X F,SS,X = T S,SS,X y IG y P E SO P W,OFF P W,SB 10. Calculation of derived results from test measurements. 10.1 Annual fuel utilization efficiency. 10.1.1 Off-cycle Infiltration Heat Loss. I,OFF1 I,OFF1 10.1.2 Determination of Effy HS in the Defining Equation for AFUE. HS Effy HS 10.1.3 Balance Point Temperature for Condensing Modulating Boilers. C T C Where: T SH T OA,T α = oversize factor, as defined in 11.4.8.2 Q IN Q IN,R L S,SSR L S,SS 10.2 National average burner operating hours, average annual fuel energy consumption, and average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil boilers. 10.2.1 National average number of burner operating hours. 10.2.1.1 For boilers equipped with single-stage controls, the national average number of burner operating hours is defined as: BOH SS OUT Where: 2,080 = national average heating load hours 0.77 = adjustment factor to adjust the calculated design heating requirement and heating load hours to the actual heating load experienced by the heating system A = 100,000/[341,200 (y P IG IG IN P HS = 100,000/[341,200 (y P motor IG IG IN P HS Q OUT α = value as defined in section 11.2.8.2 of ASHRAE 103-2017. B = 2 Q P HS Where: Eff motor = 0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if not provided by the manufacturer. 100,000 = factor that accounts for percent and kBtu y P 1 for units without post-purge; 1 + (t P ON PE = all electrical power related to burner operation at full load steady-state operation, including electrical ignition device if energized, controls, gas valve or oil control valve, draft inducer, and boiler pump, as determined in section 8.2 of this appendix. y IG 0 for burners not equipped with interrupted ignition device; (t IG ON PE IG y = ratio of pump on-time to average burner on-time, as follows: 1 for boilers without a pump delay; 1 + (t + ON BE = circulating water pump electrical energy input rate at full-load steady-state operation as defined in section 8.2 of this appendix. t P = 0 if t P t IG Q IN Q P Effy HS indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or outdoor installation, for boilers that are weatherized. 2 = ratio of the average length of the heating season in hours to the average heating load hours t + t ON 10.2.1.2 For boilers equipped with two-stage or step-modulating controls, the national average number of burner operating hours at the reduced operating mode (BOH R BOH R R OUT R R Where: X R 2080 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix 0.77 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix Q OUT α = as defined in section 11.4.8.2 of ASHRAE 103-2017 A R P,R R IG,R IG R R IN,R P U,R = 100,000/[341,200(y P,R R motor IG,R IG R R IN,R P U,R B R P U,R R 100,000 = conversion factor accounting for percent and 1,000 Btu/kBtu 341,200 = conversion factor accounting for percent and 3412 Btu/h/kW y P,R p ON,R PE R y IG,R IG ON,R PE IG y R + ON,R BE R Q IN,R Q P Effy U,R indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or outdoor installation, for boilers that are weatherized. Eff motor = 0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if not provided by the manufacturer. 10.2.1.3 For boilers equipped with two-stage controls, the national average number of burner operating hours at the maximum operating mode (BOH H BOH H H OUT H H Where: X H 2080 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix 0.77 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix Q OUT α = as defined in section 11.4.8.2 of ASHRAE 103-2017 A H P,H H IG,H IG H H IN,H P U,H = 100,000/[341,200(y P,H H motor IG,H IG H H IN,H P U,H B H P U,H H 100,000 = conversion factor accounting for percent and 1,000 Btu/kBtu 341,200 = conversion factor accounting for percent and 3412 Btu/h/kW y P,H p ON,H PE H y IG,H IG ON,H PE IG y H + ON,H BE H Q IN,H Q P Effy U,H indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or outdoor installation, for boilers that are weatherized. Eff motor = 0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if not provided by the manufacturer. 10.2.1.4 For boilers equipped with step-modulating controls, the national average number of burner operating hours at the modulating operating mode (BOH M BOH M H OUT M M Where: X H 2080 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix 0.77 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix Q OUT α = as defined in section 11.4.8.2 of ASHRAE 103-2017 A M P,H H IG,H IG H H IN,M P U,M = 100,000/[341,200(y P,H H motor IG,H IG H H IN,M P U,M B M P U,M M 100,000 = conversion factor accounting for percent and 1,000 Btu/kBtu 341,200 = conversion factor accounting for percent and 3412 Btu/h/kW y P,H p ON,H PE H y IG,H IG ON,H PE IG y H + ON,H BE H Q IN,M OUT,M SS,M Q OUT,M Effy SS,M Q P Effy U,M indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or outdoor installation, for boilers that are weatherized. Eff motor = 0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if not provided by the manufacturer. 10.2.2 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil fueled boilers. 10.2.2.1 For boilers equipped with single-stage controls, the average annual fuel energy consumption (E F E F SS IN P P Where: BOH SS Q IN Q P 8,760 = total number of hours per year. 10.2.2.2 For boilers equipped with either two-stage or step modulating controls, E F E F H IN R IN,R H R P For step-modulating control: E F M IN,M R IN,R H R P Where: BOH H BOH R BOH M Q IN Q IN,R Q IN,M 8,760 = total number of hours per year Q P 10.2.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled boilers. 10.2.3.1 For boilers equipped with single-stage controls, the average annual auxiliary electrical consumption (E AE E AE SS P IG IG SO Where: BOH SS y P PE = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix y IG PE IG y = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix BE = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix E SO 10.2.3.2 For boilers equipped with two-stage controls, E AE E AE R P,R R IG,R IG R R H P,H H IG,H IG H H SO Where: BOH R y P,R PE R y IG,R PE IG y R BE R BOH H PE H y P,H y IG,H BE H y H E SO 10.2.3.3 For boilers equipped with step-modulating controls, E AE E AE R P,R R IG,R IG R R M P,H H IG,H IG H H SO Where: BOH R y P,R PE R y IG,R PE IG y R BE R BOH M y P,H PE H y IG,H y H BE H E SO 10.3 Average annual electric energy consumption for electric boilers. E E E OUT SO Where: 100 = to express a percent as a decimal 2,080 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix 0.77 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix Q OUT α = as defined in section 11.2.8.2 of ASHRAE 103-2017 3412 = conversion factor from kilowatt-hours to Btu AFUE = as defined in section 11.1 of ASHRAE 103-2017, in percent, and calculated on the basis of: indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or outdoor installation, for boilers that are weatherized. E SO 10.4 Energy factor. 10.4.1 Energy factor for gas or oil boilers. EF = (E F P HS F AE Where: E F 4,600 = as defined in section 11.4.12 of ASHRAE 103-2017 Q P Effy HS indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or outdoor installation, for boilers that are weatherized. 3,412 = conversion factor from kW to Btu/h E AE 10.4.2 Energy factor for electric boilers. EF = AFUE Where: AFUE = annual fuel utilization efficiency as defined in section 10.3 of this appendix, in percent. 10.5 Average annual energy consumption for boilers located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. 10.5.1 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled boilers located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. FR E FR F P P Where: E F 8,760 = as defined in section 10.2.2 of this appendix Q P HLH = heating load hours for a specific geographic region determined from the heating load hour map in Figure 1 of this appendix 2,080 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix. 10.5.2 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled boilers located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. AER E AER AE SO SOR Where: E AE E SO HLH = as defined in section 10.5.1 of this appendix 2,080 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix E SOR 10.5.3 Average annual electric energy consumption for electric boilers located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. ER E ER OUT SOR Where: 100 = as defined in section 10.2.3 of this appendix 0.77 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix Q OUT α = as defined in section 11.2.8.2 of ASHRAE 103-2017 HLH = as defined in section 10.5.1 of this appendix 3.412 = as defined in section 10.2.3 of this appendix AFUE = as defined in section 10.2.3 of this appendix E SOR SO SO 10.6 [Reserved] 10.7 Average annual electrical standby mode and off mode energy consumption. SO E SO W,SB W,OFF Where: P W,SB 4,160 = average heating season hours per year BOH = total burner operating hours as calculated in section 10.2 of this appendix for gas or oil-fueled boilers. Where for gas or oil-fueled boilers equipped with single-stage controls, BOH = BOH SS R H R M OUT in 4,600 = as defined in section 11.4.12 of ASHRAE 103-2017 P W,OFF K = 0.001 kWh/Wh, conversion factor from watt-hours to kilowatt-hours Where: 100 = to express a percent as a decimal 2,080 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix 0.77 = as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix Q OUT α = as defined in section 11.2.8.2 of ASHRAE 103-2017 E in 3412 = as defined in section 10.3 of this appendix AFUE = as defined in section 11.1 of ASHRAE 103-2017 in percent. [88 FR 15547, Mar. 13, 2023] Appendix FF to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Air Cleaners Note: Beginning on the compliance date of any energy conservation standards for air cleaners, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of these products, including those made for certification purposes, must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. Manufacturers may choose to test in accordance with this appendix to certify compliance with any energy conservation standards prior to the applicable compliance date for those standards. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3 the entire standard for AHAM AC-1-2020, AHAM AC-7-2022, ASTM E741-11(2017), and IEC 62301. However, only enumerated provisions of AHAM AC-1-2020, AHAM AC-7-2022, and IEC 62301 apply to this appendix, as follows: 0.1 AHAM AC-1-2020 (a) Sections 4.2 through 4.6; (b) Sections 5 through 7; (c) Section 8.1; (d) Annex A; (e) Annex I; and (f) AHAM Standard Interpretation. 0.2 AHAM AC-7-2022 (a) Sections 2.2 and 2.3, sections 2.4.1 through 2.4.2.4, and sections 2.6 through 2.9; (b) Sections 3.1 through 3.6.3; (c) Section 4; (d) Sections 5.3 through 5.7.4; and (e) Sections 6 and 7. 0.3 IEC 62301: Household Electrical Appliances—Measurement of Standby Power (a) Sections 4.4.1 through 4.4.3; and (b) Section 5.3. 1. Scope of Coverage This appendix contains the test requirements to measure the energy performance of a conventional room air cleaner, as defined at § 430.2, with smoke CADR and dust CADR between 10 to 600 cubic feet per minute (cfm), inclusive. 2. Definitions The definitions in sections 2.2, 2.3, 2.4.1 through 2.4.2.4, 2.6 through 2.8, and 2.9 of AHAM AC-7-2022 apply to this test procedure, including the applicable provisions of Annex I of AHAM AC-1-2020 as referenced in section 2.9 of AHAM AC-7-2022. 3. Test Conditions Testing conditions shall be as specified in sections 3.1 through 3.6.3 of AHAM AC-7-2022, including the applicable provisions of sections 4.2 through 4.6 and Annex A of AHAM AC-1-2020 as referenced in sections 3.2.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, and 3.6.2 of AHAM AC-7-2022 and the applicable provisions of ASTM E 741-11(2017) as referenced in section 3.3 of AHAM AC-7-2022. Additionally, the following requirements are also applicable: 3.1. Placement for Testing. 3.2. Air Cleaners with Network Mode Capability. 4. Instrumentation Test instruments shall be as specified in section 4 of AHAM AC-7-2022, including the applicable provisions of sections 4.4.1 through 4.4.3 of IEC 62301. 5. Active Mode CADR and Power Measurement Measurement of smoke CADR, dust CADR, and pollen CADR shall be as specified in sections 5 through 7 of AHAM AC-1-2020, respectively. Measurement of active mode power shall be as specified in sections 5.3 through 5.7.4 of AHAM AC-7-2022, including the applicable provisions of sections 5.2.5 and 6.2.5 of AHAM AC-1-2020 as referenced in section 5.7.1 of AHAM AC-7-2022. Additionally, the following requirement is also applicable: 5.1. Calculation of PM 2.5 CADR. 5.1.1 PM 2.5 5.1.2. For determining compliance only with the standards specified in § 430.32(ee)(1), PM 2.5 6. Standby Mode Power Measurement Standby mode power consumption shall be measured as specified in section 6 of AHAM AC-7-2022, including the applicable provisions of section 5.3 of IEC 62301. 7. Total Energy Calculation Annual energy consumption, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year, and integrated energy factor, expressed in CADR per watt, shall be calculated as specified in section 7 of AHAM AC-7-2022. [88 FR 14044, Mar. 6, 2023, as amended at 88 FR 53371, Aug. 8, 2023; 88 FR 21814, Apr. 11, 2023] Appendix GG to Subpart B of Part 430—Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Portable Electric Spas Note: Beginning on the compliance date of any energy conservation standards for portable electric spas specified in § 430.32, all representations of fill volume, energy efficiency, and energy use of portable electric spas, including those made on marketing materials and product labels, must be made in accordance with this test procedure. 0. Incorporation by Reference DOE incorporated by reference in § 430.3, the entire standard for ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019 and CSA C374:11 (R2021). However, only enumerated provisions of ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019 and CSA C374:11 (R2021), as listed in this section 0 are required. To the extent there is a conflict between the terms or provisions of a referenced industry standard and the CFR, the CFR provisions control. Non-enumerated provisions of ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019 are specifically excluded. 0.1. ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019 (a) Section 3—Definitions (excluding the definitions for cover, specified; fill volume; rated volume; and standby mode (b) Section 5—Test Method (excluding Sections 5.1, 5.2, 5.5.2, 5.5.4, 5.5.5, and 5.7), as specified in sections 3, 3.1.6, 3.2.2, and 3.2.3 of this appendix; (c) Appendix A—Minimum Chamber Requirements (excluding section titled Chamber floor 0.2. CSA C374:11 (R2021) (a) Clause 5.1.1—Test room, as specified in section 3.1.2 of this appendix; (b) Figure 1—Test platform, as specified in section 3.1.2 of this appendix. 1. Scope This appendix provides the test procedure for measuring the standby loss in watts and the fill volume in gallons of portable electric spas. 2. Definitions 2.1. Section 3, Definitions, of ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019 applies to this test procedure. In case of conflicting terms between ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019 and DOE's definitions in this appendix or in § 430.2, DOE's definitions take priority. 2.2. Combination spa (a) One reservoir is an exercise spa; (b) The second reservoir is a standard spa; and (c) Each reservoir has an independent water temperature setting control. 2.3. Exercise spa 2.4. Exercise spa portion 2.5. Fill volume 2.6. Inflatable spa 2.7. Standard spa 2.8. Standard spa portion 2.9. Standby loss 3. Test Method Determine the standby loss in watts and fill volume in gallons for portable electric spas in accordance with section 5, Test Method, 3.1. Test Setup 3.1.1. Chamber Install the portable electric spa in a chamber satisfying the requirements specified for Chamber internal dimensions, Air flow, Chamber insulation Minimum Chamber Requirements, 3.1.2. Chamber Floor Install the portable electric spa on a platform as specified in Clause 5.1.1(b) and Figure 1 of CSA C374:11 (R2021). 3.1.3. Electrical Supply Voltage and Amperage Configuration 3.1.3.1. General If the portable electric spa can be installed or configured with multiple options of voltage, maximum amperage, or both, use the hierarchy in section 3.1.3.2 of this appendix to determine the configuration for testing. 3.1.3.2. Hierarchy Use the as-shipped configuration, if such a configuration is provided. If no configuration is provided in the as-shipped condition, use the option specified in the manufacturer's instructions as the recommended configuration for normal consumer use. If no configuration is provided in the as-shipped condition and the manufacturer's instructions do not provide a recommended configuration for normal consumer use, use the maximum voltage specified in the manufacturer's installation instructions and maximum amperage that the manufacturer's installation instructions specify for use with the maximum voltage. 3.1.4. Fill Volume Follow the manufacturer's instructions for filling the portable electric spa with water, connecting and/or priming the pump(s), and starting up the spa. After verifying that the spa is operating normally and that all water lines are filled, power off the spa and adjust the fill level as needed to meet the following specifications before starting the test. If the manufacturer's instructions specify a single fill level, fill to that level with a tolerance of ±0.125 inches. If the manufacturer's instructions specify a range of fill levels and not a single fill level, fill to the middle of that range with a tolerance of ±0.125 inches. If the manufacturer's instructions do not specify a fill level or range of fill levels, fill to the halfway point between the bottom of the skimmer opening and the top of the skimmer opening with a tolerance of ±0.125 inches. If the manufacturer's instructions do not specify a fill level or range of fill levels, and there is no wall skimmer, fill to 6.0 inches ±0.125 inches below the overflow level of the spa. Measure the volume of water added to the spa with a water meter while filling the spa. Measure any water removed from the spa using a water meter, graduated container, or scale, each with an accuracy of ±2 percent of the quantity measured. The fill volume is the volume of water held by the spa when the spa is filled as specified above. 3.1.5. Spa Cover 3.1.5.1. Cover Is Designated by the Spa Manufacturer Install the spa cover following the manufacturer's instructions. 3.1.5.2. No Cover Is Designated by the Spa Manufacturer If no cover is designated by the spa manufacturer for use with the spa, cover the portable electric spa with a single layer of 6 mil thickness (0.006 inches; 0.15 mm) plastic film. Cut the plastic to cover the entire top surface of the spa and extend over the edge of the spa approximately 6 inches below the top surface of the spa. Use fasteners or weights to keep the plastic in place during the test, but do not seal the edges of the plastic to the spa (by using tape, for example). 3.1.6. Ambient Temperature Measurement Location The ambient air temperature measurement point specified in section 5.6.3 of ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019 must be located above the center of the spa. 3.2. Test Conditions and Conduct 3.2.1. Ambient Air Temperature Maintain the ambient air temperature at a maximum of 63.0 °F for the duration of the test. This requirement applies to each individual ambient air temperature measurement taken for the duration of the stabilization period and test period. 3.2.2. Water Temperature Settings Adjust the spa water temperature settings to meet the applicable temperature requirements in section 5.6.1 of ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019. The spa water temperature settings must not be adjusted between the start of the stabilizing period specified in section 5.6.1 of ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019 and the end of the test period specified in section 5.6.4.7 of ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019. 3.2.3. Water Temperature Requirements Each individual water temperature measurement taken during the stabilization period and test period must meet the applicable water temperature requirements specified in section 5.6.1 of ANSI/APSP/ICC-14 2019. 3.3. Standby Loss Calculation Calculate standby loss in watts by calculating the measured standby loss using Equation 1 of this appendix, calculating the measured temperature difference using Equation 2 of this appendix, and normalizing the standby loss using Equation 3 of this appendix. Use the standby loss calculated in Equation 3 as the standby loss value for the test. Where: SL meas E = Total energy use during the test (watt-hours) t = Length of test (hours) ΔT meas T water avg T air avg SL = Standby loss (W) ΔT std 46.0 °F for all inflatable spas, standard spas, standard spa portions of a combination spa, exercise spas, and exercise spa portions of a combination spa tested to a minimum water temperature of 100 °F; or 31.0 °F for all exercise spas or exercise spa portions of a combination spa tested to a minimum water temperature of 85 °F. [88 FR 38627, June 13, 2023] Subpart C—Energy and Water Conservation Standards § 430.31 Purpose and scope. This subpart contains energy conservation standards and water conservation standards (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) for classes of covered products that are required to be administered by the Department of Energy pursuant to the Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products Other Than Automobiles under the Energy Policy and Conservation Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 6291 et seq. [63 FR 13317, Mar. 18, 1998, as amended at 78 FR 62993, Oct. 23, 2013] § 430.32 Energy and water conservation standards and their compliance dates. The energy and water (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) conservation standards for the covered product classes are: (a) Refrigerators/refrigerator-freezers/freezers. (1) The following standards apply to products manufactured on or after September 15, 2014, and before the 2029/2030 compliance dates depending on product class (see paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(3) of this section). Table 1 to Paragraph (a)(1) Product class Equations for maximum energy use (kWh/yr) based on AV 3 based on av 1. Refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers with manual defrost 7.99AV + 225.0 0.282av + 225.0 1A. All-refrigerators—manual defrost 6.79AV + 193.6 0.240av + 193.6 2. Refrigerator-freezers—partial automatic defrost 7.99AV + 225.0 0.282av + 225.0 3. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer without an automatic icemaker 8.07AV + 233.7 0.285av + 233.7 3-BI. Built-in refrigerator-freezer—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer without an automatic icemaker 9.15AV + 264.9 0.323av + 264.9 3I. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer with an automatic icemaker without through-the-door ice service 8.07AV + 317.7 0.285av + 317.7 3I-BI. Built-in refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer with an automatic icemaker without through-the-door ice service 9.15AV + 348.9 0.323av + 348.9 3A. All-refrigerators—automatic defrost 7.07AV + 201.6 0.250av + 201.6 3A-BI. Built-in All-refrigerators—automatic defrost 8.02AV + 228.5 0.283av + 228.5 4. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer without an automatic icemaker 8.51AV + 297.8 0.301av + 297.8 4-BI. Built-In Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer without an automatic icemaker 10.22AV + 357.4 0.361av + 357.4 4I. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer with an automatic icemaker without through-the-door ice service 8.51AV + 381.8 0.301av + 381.8 4I-BI. Built-In Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer with an automatic icemaker without through-the-door ice service 10.22AV + 441.4 0.361av + 441.4 5. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer without an automatic icemaker 8.85AV + 317.0 0.312av + 317.0 5-BI. Built-In Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer without an automatic icemaker 9.40AV + 336.9 0.332av + 336.9 5I. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer with an automatic icemaker without through-the-door ice service 8.85AV + 401.0 0.312av + 401.0 5I-BI. Built-In Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer with an automatic icemaker without through-the-door ice service 9.40AV + 420.9 0.332av + 420.9 5A. Refrigerator-freezer—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer with through-the-door ice service 9.25AV + 475.4 0.327av + 475.4 5A-BI. Built-in refrigerator-freezer—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer with through-the-door ice service 9.83AV + 499.9 0.347av + 499.9 6. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer with through-the-door ice service 8.40AV + 385.4 0.297av + 385.4 7. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer with through-the-door ice service 8.54AV + 432.8 0.302av + 431.1 7-BI. Built-In Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer with through-the-door ice service 10.25AV + 502.6 0.362av + 502.6 8. Upright freezers with manual defrost 5.57AV + 193.7 0.197av + 193.7 9. Upright freezers with automatic defrost without an automatic icemaker 8.62AV + 228.3 0.305av + 228.3 9I. Upright freezers with automatic defrost with an automatic icemaker 8.62AV + 312.3 0.305av + 312.3 9-BI. Built-In Upright freezers with automatic defrost without an automatic icemaker 9.86AV + 260.9 0.348av + 260.6 9I-BI. Built-In Upright freezers with automatic defrost with an automatic icemaker 9.86AV + 344.9 0.348av + 344.9 10. Chest freezers and all other freezers except compact freezers 7.29AV + 107.8 0.257av + 107.8 10A. Chest freezers with automatic defrost 10.24AV + 148.1 0.362av + 148.1 11. Compact refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers with manual defrost 9.03AV + 252.3 0.319av + 252.3 11A. Compact refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers with manual defrost 7.84AV + 219.1 0.277av + 219.1 12. Compact refrigerator-freezers—partial automatic defrost 5.91AV + 335.8 0.209av + 335.8 13. Compact refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer 11.80AV + 339.2 0.417av + 339.2 13I. Compact refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer with an automatic icemaker 11.80AV + 423.2 0.417av + 423.2 13A. Compact all-refrigerator—automatic defrost 9.17AV + 259.3 0.324av + 259.3 14. Compact refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer 6.82AV + 456.9 0.241av + 456.9 14I. Compact refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer with an automatic icemaker 6.82AV + 540.9 0.241av + 540.9 15. Compact refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer 11.80AV + 339.2 0.417av + 339.2 15I. Compact refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer with an automatic icemaker 11.80AV + 423.2 0.417av + 423.2 16. Compact upright freezers with manual defrost 8.65AV + 225.7 0.306av + 225.7 17. Compact upright freezers with automatic defrost 10.17AV + 351.9 0.359av + 351.9 18. Compact chest freezers 9.25AV + 136.8 0.327av + 136.8 AV = Total adjusted volume, expressed in ft 3 av = Total adjusted volume, expressed in Liters. (2) The following standards apply to products manufactured on or after January 31, 2029. Table 2 to Paragraph ( a 2 Product class Equations for maximum energy use Based on AV 3 Based on av 3-BI. Built-in refrigerator-freezer—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer 8.24AV + 238.4 + 28I 0.291av + 238.4 + 28I. 3A-BI. Built-in All-refrigerators—automatic defrost (7.22AV + 205.7) * K3ABI (0.255av + 205.7) * K3ABI. 4-BI. Built-In Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer (8.79AV + 307.4) * K4BI + 28I (0.310av + 307.4) * K4BI + 28I. 5-BI. Built-In Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer (8.65AV + 309.9) * K5BI + 28I (0.305av + 309.9) * K5BI + 28I. 5A. Refrigerator-freezer—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer with through-the-door ice service (7.76AV + 351.9) * K5A (0.274av + 351.9) * K5A. 5A-BI. Built-in refrigerator-freezer—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer with through-the-door ice service (8.21AV + 370.7) * K5ABI (0.290av + 370.7) * K5ABI. 7-BI. Built-In Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer with through-the-door ice service (8.82AV + 384.1) * K7BI (0.311av + 384.1) * K7BI. 8. Upright freezers with manual defrost 5.57AV + 193.7 0.197av + 193.7. 9-BI. Built-In Upright freezers with automatic defrost (9.37AV + 247.9) * K9BI + 28I (0.331av + 247.9) * K9BI + 28I. 9A-BI. Built-In Upright freezers with automatic defrost with through-the-door ice service 9.86AV + 288.9 0.348av + 288.9. 10. Chest freezers and all other freezers except compact freezers 7.29AV + 107.8 0.257av + 107.8. 10A. Chest freezers with automatic defrost 10.24AV + 148.1 0.362av + 148.1. 11. Compact refrigerator-freezers and refrigerators other than all-refrigerators with manual defrost 7.68AV + 214.5 0.271av + 214.5. 11A. Compact all-refrigerators—manual defrost 6.66AV + 186.2 0.235av + 186.2. 12. Compact refrigerator-freezers—partial automatic defrost (5.32AV + 302.2) * K12 (0.188av + 302.2) * K12. 13. Compact refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer 10.62AV + 305.3 + 28I 0.375av + 305.3 + 28I. 13A. Compact all-refrigerators—automatic defrost (8.25AV + 233.4) * K13A (0.291av + 233.4) * K13A. 14. Compact refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer 6.14AV + 411.2 + 28I 0.217av + 411.2 + 28I. 15. Compact refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer 10.62AV + 305.3 + 28I 0.375av + 305.3 + 28I. 16. Compact upright freezers with manual defrost 7.35AV + 191.8 0.260av + 191.8. 17. Compact upright freezers with automatic defrost 9.15AV + 316.7 0.323av + 316.7. 18. Compact chest freezers 7.86AV + 107.8 0.278av + 107.8. AV = Total adjusted volume, expressed in ft 3 av = Total adjusted volume, expressed in Liters. I = 1 for a product with an automatic icemaker and = 0 for a product without an automatic icemaker. Door Coefficients ( e.g., Table 3 to Paragraph ( a 2 Door coefficient Products with a Products without a Products without a K3ABI 1.10 1.0 1.0. K4BI 1.10 1.06 1 + 0.02 * (N d K5BI 1.10 1.06 1 + 0.02 * (N d K5A 1.10 1.06 1 + 0.02 * (N d K5ABI 1.10 1.06 1 + 0.02 * (N d K7BI 1.10 1.06 1 + 0.02 * (N d K9BI 1.0 1.0 1 + 0.02 * (N d K12 1.0 1.0 1 + 0.02 * (N d K13A 1.10 1.0 1.0. Notes: 1 d 2 d (3) The following standards apply to products manufactured on or after January 31, 2030. Table 4 to Paragraph ( a 3 Product class Equations for maximum energy use Based on AV 3 Based on av 1. Refrigerator-freezers and refrigerators other than all-refrigerators with manual defrost 6.79AV + 191.3 0.240av + 191.3. 1A. All-refrigerators—manual defrost 5.77AV + 164.6 0.204av + 164.6. 2. Refrigerator-freezers—partial automatic defrost (6.79AV + 191.3) * K2 (0.240av + 191.3) * K2. 3. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer 6.86AV + 198.6 + 28I 0.242av + 198.6 + 28I. 3A. All-refrigerators—automatic defrost (6.01AV + 171.4) * K3A (0.212av + 171.4) * K3A. 4. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer (7.28AV + 254.9) * K4 + 28I (0.257av + 254.9) * K4 + 28I. 5. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer (7.61AV + 272.6) * K5 + 28I (0.269av + 272.6) * K5 + 28I. 6. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with top-mounted freezer with through-the-door ice service 7.14AV + 280.0 0.252av + 280.0. 7. Refrigerator-freezers—automatic defrost with side-mounted freezer with through-the-door ice service (7.31AV + 322.5) * K7 (0.258av + 322.5) * K7. 9. Upright freezers with automatic defrost (7.33AV + 194.1) * K9 + 28I (0.259av + 194.1) * K9 + 28I. AV = Total adjusted volume, expressed in ft 3 av = Total adjusted volume, expressed in Liters. I = 1 for a product with an automatic icemaker and = 0 for a product without an automatic icemaker. Door Coefficients ( e.g., Table 5 to Paragraph ( a 3 Door coefficient Products with a Products without a Products without a K2 1.0 1.0 1 + 0.02 * (N d K3A 1.10 1.0 1.0. K4 1.10 1.06 1 + 0.02 * (N d K5 1.10 1.06 1 + 0.02 * (N d K7 1.10 1.06 1 + 0.02 * (N d K9 1.0 1.0 1 + 0.02 * (N d Notes: 1 d 2 d (b) Room air conditioners. Table 6 to Paragraph ( b Equipment class Combined energy 1. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity 1 11.0 2. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 6,000 to 7,999 Btu/h 11.0 3. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 8,000 to 13,999 Btu/h 10.9 4. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 14,000 to 19,999 Btu/h 10.7 5a. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 20,000 Btu/h to 27,999 Btu/h 9.4 5b. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 28,000 Btu/h or more 9.0 6. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity less than 6,000 Btu/h 10.0 7. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 6,000 to 7,999 Btu/h 10.0 8a. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 8,000 to 10,999 Btu/h 9.6 8b. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 11,000 to 13,999 Btu/h 9.5 9. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 14,000 to 19,999 Btu/h 9.3 10. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 20,000 Btu/h or more 9.4 11. With reverse cycle, with louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity less than 20,000 Btu/h 9.8 12. With reverse cycle, without louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity less than 14,000 Btu/h 9.3 13. With reverse cycle, with louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity of 20,000 Btu/h or more 9.3 14. With reverse cycle, without louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity of 14,000 Btu/h or more 8.7 15. Casement-Only 9.5 16. Casement-Slider 10.4 1 (2) The following standards apply to products manufactured starting May 26, 2026: Table 7 to Paragraph ( b Equipment class Combined energy 1. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity 1 13.1 2. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 6,000 to 7,900 Btu/h 13.7 3. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 8,000 to 13,900 Btu/h 16.0 4. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 14,000 to 19,900 Btu/h 16.0 5a. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 20,000 Btu/h to 27,900 Btu/h 13.8 5b. Without reverse cycle, with louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 28,000 Btu/h or more 13.2 6. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity less than 6,000 Btu/h 12.8 7. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 6,000 to 7,900 Btu/h 12.8 8a. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 8,000 to 10,900 Btu/h 14.1 8b. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 11,000 to 13,900 Btu/h 13.9 9. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 14,000 to 19,900 Btu/h 13.7 10. Without reverse cycle, without louvered sides and with a certified cooling capacity of 20,000 Btu/h or more 13.8 11. With reverse cycle, with louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity less than 20,000 Btu/h 14.4 12. With reverse cycle, without louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity less than 14,000 Btu/h 13.7 13. With reverse cycle, with louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity of 20,000 Btu/h or more 13.7 14. With reverse cycle, without louvered sides, and with a certified cooling capacity of 14,000 Btu/h or more 12.8 15. Casement-Only 13.9 16. Casement-Slider 15.3 1 (c) Central air conditioners and heat pumps. (1) Central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps manufactured on or after January 1, 2015, and before January 1, 2023, must have Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio and Heating Seasonal Performance Factor not less than: Product class Seasonal Heating (i) Split systems—air conditioners 13 (ii) Split systems—heat pumps 14 8.2 (iii) Single package units—air conditioners 14 (iv) Single package units—heat pumps 14 8.0 (v) Small-duct, high-velocity systems 12 7.2 (vi)(A) Space-constrained products—air conditioners 12 (vi)(B) Space-constrained products—heat pumps 12 7.4 (2) In addition to meeting the applicable requirements in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, products in product class (i) of paragraph (c)(1) of this section ( i.e., (3)(i) In addition to meeting the applicable requirements in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, products in product classes (i) and (iii) of paragraph (c)(1) of this section ( i.e., Product class Energy (i) Split systems—air conditioners with rated cooling capacity less than 45,000 Btu/hr 12.2 (ii) Split systems—air conditioners with rated cooling capacity equal to or greater than 45,000 Btu/hr 11.7 (iii) Single-package units—air conditioners 11.0 (ii) Any outdoor unit model that has a certified combination with a rating below 14 SEER or the applicable EER cannot be installed in this region. The least-efficient combination of each basic model must comply with this standard. (4) Each basic model of single-package central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps and each individual combination of split-system central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps manufactured on or after January 1, 2015, shall have an average off mode electrical power consumption not more than the following: Product class Average off mode power W,OFF (i) Split-system air conditioners 30 (ii) Split-system heat pumps 33 (iii) Single-package air conditioners 30 (iv) Single-package heat pumps 33 (v) Small-duct, high-velocity systems 30 (vi) Space-constrained air conditioners 30 (vii) Space-constrained heat pumps 33 (5) Central air conditioners and central air conditioning heat pumps manufactured on or after January 1, 2023, must have a Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio 2 and a Heating Seasonal Performance Factor 2 not less than: Product class Seasonal Heating (i)(A) Split systems—air conditioners with a certified cooling capacity less than 45,000 Btu/hr 13.4 (i)(B) Split systems—air conditioners with a certified cooling capacity equal to or greater than 45,000 Btu/hr 13.4 (ii) Split systems—heat pumps 14.3 7.5 (iii) Single-package units—air conditioners 13.4 (iv) Single-package units—heat pumps 13.4 6.7 (v) Small-duct, high-velocity systems 12 6.1 (vi)(A) Space-constrained products—air conditioners 11.7 (vi)(B) Space-constrained products—heat pumps 11.9 6.3 (6)(i) In addition to meeting the applicable requirements in paragraph (c)(5) of this section, products in product classes (i) and (iii) of paragraph (c)(5) of this section ( i.e., Product class Southeast * Southwest ** SEER2 SEER2 EER2 *** (i)(A) Split-systems—air conditioners with a certified cooling capacity less than 45,000 Btu/hr 14.3 14.3 11.7/9.8 † (i)(B) Split-systems—air conditioners with a certified cooling capacity equal to or greater than 45,000 Btu/hr 13.8 13.8 11.2/9.8 †† (iii) Single-package units—air conditioners 10.6 * “Southeast” includes the States of Alabama, Arkansas, Delaware, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maryland, Mississippi, North Carolina, Oklahoma, Puerto Rico, South Carolina, Tennessee, Texas, Virginia, the District of Columbia, and the U.S. Territories. ** “Southwest” includes the States of Arizona, California, Nevada, and New Mexico. *** EER refers to the energy efficiency ratio at a standard rating of 95 °F dry bulb outdoor temperature. † The 11.7 EER2 standard applies to products with a certified SEER2 less than 15.2. The 9.8 EER2 standard applies to products with a certified SEER2 greater than or equal to 15.2. †† The 11.2 EER2 standard applies to products with a certified SEER2 less than 15.2. The 9.8 EER2 standard applies to products with a certified SEER2 greater than or equal to 15.2. (ii) Any model of outdoor unit that has a certified combination with a rating below the applicable standard level(s) for a region cannot be installed in that region. The least-efficient combination of each basic model, which for single-split-system air conditioner (AC) with single-stage or two-stage compressor (including space-constrained and small-duct high velocity systems (SDHV)) must be a coil-only combination, must comply with the applicable standard. See 10 CFR 429.16(a)(1) and (a)(4)(i). (d) Water Heaters. Product class Rated storage volume if applicable Draw pattern Uniform energy factor 1 Gas-fired Storage Water Heater ≥20 gal and ≤55 gal Very Small 0.3456 − (0.0020 × V r Low 0.5982 − (0.0019 × V r Medium 0.6483 − (0.0017 × V r High 0.6920 − (0.0013 × V r >55 gal and ≤100 gal Very Small 0.6470 − (0.0006 × V r Low 0.7689 − (0.0005 × V r Medium 0.7897 − (0.0004 × V r High 0.8072 − (0.0003 × V r Oil-fired Storage Water Heater ≤50 gal Very Small 0.2509 − (0.0012 × V r Low 0.5330 − (0.0016 × V r Medium 0.6078 − (0.0016 × V r High 0.6815 − (0.0014 × V r Electric Storage Water Heaters ≥20 gal and ≤55 gal Very Small 0.8808 − (0.0008 × V r Low 0.9254 − (0.0003 × V r Medium 0.9307 − (0.0002 × V r High 0.9349 − (0.0001 × V r >55 gal and ≤120 gal Very Small 1.9236 − (0.0011 × V r Low 2.0440 − (0.0011 × V r Medium 2.1171 − (0.0011 × V r High 2.2418 − (0.0011 × V r Tabletop Water Heater ≥20 gal and ≤120 gal Very Small 0.6323 − (0.0058 × V r Low 0.9188 − (0.0031 × V r Medium 0.9577 − (0.0023 × V r High 0.9884 − (0.0016 × V r Instantaneous Gas-fired Water Heater <2 gal and >50,000 Btu/h Very Small 0.80 Low 0.81 Medium 0.81 High 0.81 Instantaneous Electric Water Heater <2 gal Very Small 0.91 Low 0.91 Medium 0.91 High 0.92 Grid-enabled Water Heater >75 gal Very Small 1.0136 − (0.0028 × V r Low 0.9984 − (0.0014 × V r Medium 0.9853 − (0.0010 × V r High 0.9720 − (0.0007 × V r 1 r (2) The uniform energy factor of water heaters manufactured on or after May 6, 2029, shall not be less than the following: Table 14 to Paragraph (d)(2) Product class Effective storage volume and input rating Draw pattern Uniform energy factor * Gas-fired Storage Water Heater <20 gal Very Small 0.2062−(0.0020 × V eff Low 0.4893−(0.0027 × V eff Medium 0.5758−(0.0023 × V eff High 0.6586−(0.0020 × V eff ≥20 gal and ≤55 gal Very Small 0.3925−(0.0020 × V eff Low 0.6451−(0.0019 × V eff Medium 0.7046−(0.0017 × V eff High 0.7424−(0.0013 × V eff >55 gal and ≤100 gal Very Small 0.6470−(0.0006 × V eff Low 0.7689−(0.0005 × V eff Medium 0.7897−(0.0004 × V eff High 0.8072−(0.0003 × V eff >100 gal Very Small 0.1482−(0.0007 × V eff Low 0.4342−(0.0017 × V eff Medium 0.5596−(0.0020 × V eff High 0.6658−(0.0019 × V eff Oil-fired Storage Water Heater ≤50 gal Very Small 0.2909−(0.0012 × V eff Low 0.5730−(0.0016 × V eff Medium 0.6478−(0.0016 × V eff High 0.7215−(0.0014 × V eff >50 gal Very Small 0.1580−(0.0009 × V eff Low 0.4390−(0.0020 × V eff Medium 0.5389−(0.0021 × V eff High 0.6172−(0.0018 × V eff Very Small Electric Storage Water Heater <20 gal Very Small 0.5925−(0.0059 × V eff Low 0.8642−(0.0030 × V eff Medium 0.9096−(0.0020 × V eff High 0.9430−(0.0012 × V eff Small Electric Storage Water Heater ≥20 gal and ≤35 gal Very Small 0.8808−(0.0008 × V eff Low 0.9254−(0.0003 × V eff Electric Storage Water Heaters ≥20 and ≤55 gal (excluding small electric storage water heaters) Very Small 2.30 Low 2.30 Medium 2.30 High 2.30 >55 gal and ≤120 gal Very Small 2.50 Low 2.50 Medium 2.50 High 2.50 >120 gal Very Small 0.3574−(0.0012 × V eff Low 0.7897−(0.0019 × V eff Medium 0.8884−(0.0017 × V eff High 0.9575−(0.0013 × V eff Tabletop Water Heater <20 gal Very Small 0.5925−(0.0059 × V eff Low 0.8642−(0.0030 × V eff ≥20 gal Very Small 0.6323−(0.0058 × V eff Low 0.9188−(0.0031 × V eff Instantaneous Oil-fired Water Heater <2 gal and ≤210,000 Btu/h Very Small 0.61 Low 0.61 Medium 0.61 High 0.61 ≥2 gal and ≤210,000 Btu/h Very Small 0.2780−(0.0022 × V eff Low 0.5151−(0.0023 × V eff Medium 0.5687−(0.0021 × V eff High 0.6147−(0.0017 × V eff Instantaneous Electric Water Heater <2 gal Very Small 0.91 Low 0.91 Medium 0.91 High 0.92 ≥2 gal Very Small 0.8086−(0.0050 × V eff Low 0.9123−(0.0020 × V eff Medium 0.9252−(0.0015 × V eff High 0.9350−(0.0011 × V eff Grid-Enabled Water Heater >75 gal Very Small 1.0136−(0.0028 × V eff Low 0.9984−(0.0014 × V eff Medium 0.9853−(0.0010 × V eff High 0.9720−(0.0007 × V eff * V eff (3) The provisions of paragraph (d) of this section are separate and severable from one another. Should a court of competent jurisdiction hold any provision(s) of paragraph (d) of this section to be stayed or invalid, such action shall not affect any other provision of paragraph (d) of this section. (e) Furnaces and boilers Furnaces. Product class AFUE 1 (A) Furnaces (excluding classes noted below) 78 (B) Mobile Home furnaces 75 (C) Small furnaces (other than those designed solely for installation in mobile homes) having an input rate of less than 45,000 Btu/hr ( 1 78 ( 2 78 1 (ii) The AFUE for non-weatherized gas furnaces (not including mobile home gas furnaces) manufactured on or after November 19, 2015, but before December 18, 2028; mobile home gas furnaces manufactured on or after November 19, 2015, but before December 18, 2028; non-weatherized oil-fired furnaces (not including mobile home furnaces) manufactured on or after May 1, 2013, mobile home oil-fired furnaces manufactured on or after September 1, 1990; weatherized gas-fired furnaces manufactured on or after January 1, 2015; weatherized oil-fired furnaces manufactured on or after January 1, 1992; and electric furnaces manufactured on or after January 1, 1992; shall not be less than the following: Product class AFUE 1 (A) Non-weatherized gas furnaces (not including mobile home furnaces) 80.0 (B) Mobile home gas furnaces 80.0 (C) Non-weatherized oil-fired furnaces (not including mobile home furnaces) 83.0 (D) Mobile home oil-fired furnaces 75.0 (E) Weatherized gas furnaces 81.0 (F) Weatherized oil-fired furnaces 78.0 (G) Electric furnaces 78.0 1 (iii) The AFUE for non-weatherized gas (not including mobile home gas furnaces) manufactured on and after December 18, 2028; and mobile home gas furnaces manufactured on and after December 18, 2028, shall not be less than the following: Product class AFUE 1 (A) Non-weatherized gas furnaces (not including mobile home gas furnaces) 95.0 (B) Mobile home gas furnaces 95.0 1 (iv) Furnaces manufactured on or after May 1, 2013, shall have an electrical standby mode power consumption (P W,SB W,OFF Product class Maximum standby mode electrical power consumption, P W,SB Maximum off mode electrical power consumption, P W,OFF (A) Non-weatherized oil-fired furnaces (including mobile home furnaces) 11 11 (B) Electric furnaces 10 10 (2) Boilers. Product class AFUE 1 (A) Boilers (excluding gas steam) 80 (B) Gas steam boilers 75 1 (ii) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(iv) of this section, the AFUE of residential boilers, manufactured on or after September 1, 2012, and before January 15, 2021, shall not be less than the following and must comply with the design requirements as follows: Product class AFUE 1 Design requirements (A) Gas-fired hot water boiler 82 Constant burning pilot not permitted. (B) Gas-fired steam boiler 80 Constant burning pilot not permitted. (C) Oil-fired hot water boiler 84 Automatic means for adjusting temperature required (except for boilers equipped with tankless domestic water heating coils). (D) Oil-fired steam boiler 82 None. (E) Electric hot water boiler None Automatic means for adjusting temperature required (except for boilers equipped with tankless domestic water heating coils). 1 (iii)(A) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(v) of this section, the AFUE of residential boilers, manufactured on and after January 15, 2021, shall not be less than the following and must comply with the design requirements as follows: Product class AFUE 1 Design requirements ( 1 84 Constant-burning pilot not permitted. Automatic means for adjusting water temperature required (except for boilers equipped with tankless domestic water heating coils). ( 2 82 Constant-burning pilot not permitted. ( 3 86 Automatic means for adjusting temperature required (except for boilers equipped with tankless domestic water heating coils). ( 4 85 None. ( 5 None Automatic means for adjusting temperature required (except for boilers equipped with tankless domestic water heating coils). ( 6 None None. 1 (B) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(v) of this section, the standby mode power consumption (P W,SB W,OFF Product class P W,SB P W,OFF ( 1 9 9 ( 2 8 8 ( 3 11 11 ( 4 11 11 ( 5 8 8 ( 6 8 8 (iv) Automatic means for adjusting water temperature. (B) For boilers that fire at a single input rate, the automatic means for adjusting water temperature requirement may be satisfied by providing an automatic means that allows the burner or heating element to fire only when the means has determined that the inferred heat load cannot be met by the residual heat of the water in the system. (C) When there is no inferred heat load with respect to a hot water boiler, the automatic means described in this paragraph shall limit the temperature of the water in the boiler to not more than 140 degrees Fahrenheit. (D) A boiler for which an automatic means for adjusting water temperature is required shall be operable only when the automatic means is installed. (v) A boiler that is manufactured to operate without any need for electricity or any electric connection, electric gauges, electric pumps, electric wires, or electric devices is not required to meet the AFUE or design requirements applicable to the boiler requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section, but must meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section, as applicable. (f) Dishwashers. (i) Standard size dishwashers shall not exceed 307 kwh/year and 5.0 gallons per cycle. Standard size dishwashers have a capacity equal to or greater than eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in AHAM DW-1-2020 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) using the test load specified in section 2.3 of appendix C1 or section 2.4 of appendix C2 to subpart B of this part, as applicable. (ii) Compact size dishwashers shall not exceed 222 kwh/year and 3.5 gallons per cycle. Compact size dishwashers have a capacity less than eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in AHAM DW-1-2020 (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3) using the test load specified in section 2.3 of appendix C1 or section 2.4 of appendix C2 to subpart B of this part, as applicable. (2) All dishwashers manufactured on or after April 23, 2027, shall not exceed the following standard— Product class Estimated annual energy use Maximum (i) Standard-size 1 2 223 3.3 (ii) Compact-size (<8 place settings plus 6 serving pieces) 2 174 3.1 1 2 (3) The provisions of paragraph (f)(2) of this section are separate and severable from one another. Should a court of competent jurisdiction hold any provision(s) of this section to be stayed or invalid, such action shall not affect any other provision of this section. (g) Clothes washers. Product class Integrated Integrated (i) Top-loading, Compact (less than 1.6 ft 3 1.15 12.0 (ii) Top-loading, Standard (1.6 ft 3 1.57 6.5 (iii) Front-loading, Compact (less than 1.6 ft 3 1.13 8.3 (iv) Front-loading, Standard (1.6 ft 3 1.84 4.7 (2) Clothes washers manufactured on or after March 1, 2028: (i) Shall have an Energy Efficiency Ratio and a Water Efficiency Ratio no less than: Product class Energy efficiency ratio Water efficiency ratio (A) Automatic Clothes Washers: ( 1 3 3.79 0.29 ( 2 3 1 4.27 0.57 ( 3 3 2 5.02 0.71 ( 4 3 3 5.52 0.77 (B) Semi-Automatic Clothes Washers 2.12 0.27 1 2 3 3 3 (ii) The provisions of this paragraph (g)(2) are separate and severable from one another. Should a court of competent jurisdiction hold any provision(s) of this section to be stayed or invalid, such action shall not affect any other provisions of this section. (h) Clothes dryers. (2) Clothes dryers manufactured on or after May 14, 1994 and before January 1, 2015, shall have an energy factor no less than: Product class Energy i. Electric, Standard (4.4 ft 3 3.01 ii. Electric, Compact (120V) (less than 4.4 ft 3 3.13 iii. Electric, Compact (240V) (less than 4.4 ft 3 2.90 iv. Gas 2.67 (3) Clothes dryers manufactured on or after January 1, 2015, shall have a combined energy factor no less than: Product class Combined energy factor (i) Vented Electric, Standard (4.4 ft 3 3.73 (ii) Vented Electric, Compact (120V) (less than 4.4 ft 3 3.61 (iii) Vented Electric, Compact (240V) (less than 4.4 ft 3 3.27 (iv) Vented Gas 3.30 (v) Ventless Electric, Compact (240V) (less than 4.4 ft 3 2.55 (vi) Ventless Electric, Combination Washer-Dryer 2.08 (4) Clothes dryers manufactured on or after March 1, 2028, shall have a combined energy factor, determined in accordance with appendix D2 of this subpart, no less than: Product class CEF D2 (i) Electric, Standard (4.4 ft 3 3.93 (ii) Electric, Compact (120V) (less than 4.4 ft 3 4.33 (iii) Vented Electric, Compact (240V) (less than 4.4 ft 3 3.57 (iv) Vented Gas, Standard (4.4 ft 3 3.48 (v) Vented Gas, Compact (less than 4.4 ft 3 2.02 (vi) Ventless Electric, Compact (240V) (less than 4.4 ft 3 2.68 (vii) Ventless Electric, Combination Washer-Dryer 2.33 * The energy conservation standards in this product class do not apply to Vented Electric, Standard clothes dryers with a cycle time of less than 30 minutes, when tested according to appendix D2 in subpart B of this part. ** The energy conservation standards in this product class do not apply to Vented Gas, Standard clothes dryers with a cycle time of less than 30 minutes, when tested according to appendix D2 in subpart B of this part. (i) Direct heating equipment. Product class Annual fuel utilization efficiency, Jan. 1, 1990 (percent) 1. Gas wall fan type up to 42,000 Btu/h 73 2. Gas wall fan type over 42,000 Btu/h 74 3. Gas wall gravity type up to 10,000 Btu/h 59 4. Gas wall gravity type over 10,000 Btu/h up to 12, 000 Btu/h 60 5. Gas wall gravity type over 12,000 Btu/h up to 15,000 Btu/h 61 6. Gas wall gravity type over 15,000 Btu/h up to 19,000 Btu/h 62 7. Gas wall gravity type over 19,000 Btu/h and up to 27,000 Btu/h 63 8. Gas wall gravity type over 27,000 Btu/h and up to 46,000 Btu/h 64 9. Gas wall gravity type over 46,000 Btu/h 65 10. Gas floor up to 37,000 Btu/h 56 11. Gas floor over 37,000 Btu/h 57 12. Gas room up to 18,000 Btu/h 57 13. Gas room over 18,000 Btu/h up to 20,000 Btu/h 58 14. Gas room over 20,000 Btu/h up to 27,000 Btu/h 63 15. Gas room over 27,000 Btu/h up to 46,000 Btu/h 64 16. Gas room over 46,000 Btu/h 65 (2) Vented home heating equipment manufactured on or after April 16, 2013, shall have an annual fuel utilization efficiency no less than: Product class Annual fuel utilization efficiency, April 16, 2013 (percent) Gas wall fan type up to 42,000 Btu/h 75 Gas wall fan type over 42,000 Btu/h 76 Gas wall gravity type up to 27,000 Btu/h 65 Gas wall gravity type over 27,000 Btu/h up to 46,000 Btu/h 66 Gas wall gravity type over 46,000 Btu/h 67 Gas floor up to 37,000 Btu/h 57 Gas floor over 37,000 Btu/h 58 Gas room up to 20,000 Btu/h 61 Gas room over 20,000 Btu/h up to 27,000 Btu/h 66 Gas room over 27,000 Btu/h up to 46,000 Btu/h 67 Gas room over 46,000 Btu/h 68 (j) Cooking Products Conventional cooking tops. (ii) Gas portable indoor conventional cooking tops, manufactured on or after April 9, 2012, shall not be equipped with a constant burning pilot light. (iii) Conventional cooking tops, other than portable indoor conventional cooking tops, manufactured on or after January 31, 2028, shall have an integrated annual energy consumption (IAEC), excluding any downdraft venting system energy consumption, no greater than: Product class Maximum integrated annual energy consumption (A) Electric Smooth Element Standalone Cooking Tops 207 kWh/year. (B) Electric Smooth Element Cooking Top Component of Combined Cooking Products 207 kWh/year. (C) Gas Standalone Cooking Tops 1,770 kBtu/year. (D) Gas Cooking Top Component of Combined Cooking Products 1,770 kBtu/year. (2) Conventional ovens. (i) Not be equipped with a constant burning pilot light, for gas ovens manufactured on or after April 9, 2012; and (ii) Not be equipped with a linear power supply, for electric and gas ovens manufactured on or after January 31, 2028. (3) Microwave ovens. (i) Microwave-only ovens and countertop convection microwave ovens manufactured on or after June 17, 2016, and before June 22, 2026, shall have an average standby power not more than 1.0 watt. Built-in and over-the-range convection microwave ovens manufactured on or after June 17, 2016, and before June 22, 2026, shall have an average standby power not more than 2.2 watts. (ii) Microwave-only ovens and countertop convection microwave ovens manufactured on or after June 22, 2026, shall have an average standby power not more than 0.6 watts. Built-in and over-the-range convection microwave ovens manufactured on or after June 22, 2026, shall have an average standby power not more than 1.0 watt. (k) Pool heaters. (2) Gas-fired pool heaters and electric pool heaters manufactured on and after May 30, 2028, shall have an integrated thermal efficiency not less than the following: where Q IN (l) Television sets. (m) Fluorescent lamp ballasts Standards for fluorescent lamp ballasts (other than dimming ballasts). (i) Designed and marketed— (A) To operate at nominal input voltages at or between 120 and 277 volts; (B) To operate with an input current frequency of 60 Hertz; and (C) For use in connection with fluorescent lamps (as defined in § 430.2) (ii) Must have— (A) A power factor of: ( 1 ( 2 (B) A ballast luminous efficiency not less than the following: BLE = A/(1 + B × average total lamp arc power ^ −C) Where A, B, and C are as follows: Description A B C Instant start and rapid start ballasts (not classified as residential ballasts) that are designed and marketed to operate: 4-foot medium bipin lamps; 0.993 0.27 0.25 2-foot U-shaped lamps; or 8-foot slimline lamps. Programmed start ballasts (not classified as residential ballasts) that are designed and marketed to operate: 4-foot medium bipin lamps; 0.993 0.51 0.37 2-foot U-shaped lamps; 4-foot miniature bipin standard output lamps; or 4-foot miniature bipin high output lamps. Instant start and rapid start ballasts (not classified as sign ballasts) that are designed and marketed to operate 8-foot high output lamps 0.993 0.38 0.25 Programmed start ballasts (not classified as sign ballasts) that are designed and marketed to operate 8-foot high output lamps 0.973 0.70 0.37 Sign ballasts that are designed and marketed to operate 8-foot high output lamps 0.993 0.47 0.25 Instant start and rapid start residential ballasts that are designed and marketed to operate: 4-foot medium bipin lamps; 0.993 0.41 0.25 2-foot U-shaped lamps; or 8-foot slimline lamps. Programmed start residential ballasts that are designed and marketed to operate: 4-foot medium bipin lamps or 0.973 0.71 0.37 2-foot U-shaped lamps. (2) Standards for certain dimming ballasts. (i) Designed and marketed— (A) To operate at nominal input voltages at or between 120 and 277 volts; (B) To operate with an input current frequency of 60 Hertz; and (C) For use in connection with fluorescent lamps (as defined in § 430.2) (ii) Must have— (A) A power factor of: ( 1 ( 2 (B) A ballast luminous efficiency not less than the following: Designed and marketed for operation of a maximum of Nominal input Total nominal lamp watts Ballast luminous efficiency Low frequency ballasts High frequency ballasts One F34T12 lamp 120/277 34 0.777 0.778 Two F34T12 lamps 120/277 68 0.804 0.805 Two F96T12/ES lamps 120/277 120 0.876 0.884 Two F96T12HO/ES lamps 120/277 190 0.711 0.713 (3) Exemptions. (i) A dimming ballast designed and marketed to operate exclusively lamp types other than one F34T12, two F34T12, two F96T12/ES, or two F96T12HO/ES lamps; (ii) A low frequency ballast that is designed and marketed to operate T8 diameter lamps; is designed and marketed for use in electromagnetic-interference-sensitive-environments only; and is shipped by the manufacturer in packages containing 10 or fewer ballasts; or (iii) A programmed start ballast that operates 4-foot medium bipin T8 lamps and delivers on average less than 140 milliamperes to each lamp. (4) For the purposes of this paragraph (m), the definitions found in appendix Q of subpart B of this part apply. (n) General service fluorescent lamps and incandescent reflector lamps. Lamp type Nominal lamp watts * Minimum color rendering index Effective date (i) 4-foot medium bipin >35 W 69 Nov. 1, 1995. (ii) 2-foot U-shaped >35 W 69 Nov. 1, 1995. (iii) 8-foot slimline >65 W 69 May 1, 1994. (iv) 8-foot high output >100 W 69 May 1, 1994. * Nominal lamp watts means the wattage at which a fluorescent lamp is designed to operate. 42 U.S.C. 6291(29)(H) (2) The standards described in paragraph (n)(1) of this section do not apply to: (i) Any 4-foot medium bipin lamp or 2-foot U-shaped lamp with a rated wattage less than 28 watts; (ii) Any 8-foot high output lamp not defined in ANSI C78.81-2010 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) or related supplements, or not 0.800 nominal amperes; or (iii) Any 8-foot slimline lamp not defined in ANSI C78.3 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3). (3) Each of the following general service fluorescent lamps manufactured on or after January 26, 2018, must meet or exceed the following lamp efficacy standards shown in the table: Lamp type Correlated color Minimum (i) 4-foot medium bipin lamps (straight-shaped lamp with medium bipin base, nominal overall length of 48 inches, and rated wattage of 25 or more) ≤4,500K 92.4 (ii) 2-foot U-shaped lamps (U-shaped lamp with medium bipin base, nominal overall length between 22 and 25 inches, and rated wattage of 25 or more) ≤4,500K 85.0 (iii) 8-foot slimline lamps (instant start lamp with single pin base, nominal overall length of 96 inches, and rated wattage of 49 or more) ≤4,500K 97.0 (iv) 8-foot high output lamps (rapid start lamp with recessed double contact base, nominal overall length of 96 inches) ≤4,500K 92.0 (v) 4-foot miniature bipin standard output lamps (straight-shaped lamp with miniature bipin base, nominal overall length between 45 and 48 inches, and rated wattage of 25 or more) ≤4,500K 95.0 (vi) 4-foot miniature bipin high output lamps (straight-shaped lamp with miniature bipin base, nominal overall length between 45 and 48 inches, and rated wattage of 44 or more) ≤4,500K 82.7 Note 1 to paragraph ( n For paragraphs (n)(3)(i) through (vi), rated wattage is defined with respect to fluorescent lamps and general service fluorescent lamps in § 430.2. (4) Subject to the sales prohibition in paragraph (dd) of this section, each of the following incandescent reflector lamps manufactured after July 14, 2012, must meet or exceed the lamp efficacy standards shown in the table: Rated wattage Lamp spectrum Lamp diameter inches Rated voltage of lamp Minimum (i) 40-205 Standard Spectrum >2.5 ≥125 V 6.8*P 0.27 0.27 ≤2.5 ≥125 V 5.7*P 0.27 0.27 (ii) 40-205 Modified Spectrum >2.5 ≥125 V 5.8*P 0.27 0.27 ≤2.5 ≥125 V 4.9*P 0.27 0.27 Note 2 to paragraph ( n P is equal to the rated wattage, in watts. Rated wattage is defined with respect to incandescent reflector lamps in § 430.2. Note 3 to paragraph ( n Standard Spectrum means any incandescent reflector lamp that does not meet the definition of modified spectrum in § 430.2. (5) The standards specified in this section do not apply to the following types of incandescent reflector lamps: (i) Lamps rated at 50 watts or less that are ER30, BR30, BR40, or ER40 lamps; (ii) Lamps rated at 65 watts that are BR30, BR40, or ER40 lamps; or (iii) R20 incandescent reflector lamps rated 45 watts or less. (o) Faucets. Faucet type Maximum flow rate Lavatory faucets 2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min) 1 2 Lavatory replacement aerators 2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min) Kitchen faucets 2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min) Kitchen replacement aerators 2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min) Metering faucets 0.25 gal/cycle (0.95 L/cycle) 3 4 Note: 1 The maximum flow rate of each orifice that manually turns on or off shall not exceed the maximum flow rate for a lavatory faucet. 2 The maximum flow rate of a sprayhead that manually turns on or off shall be the product of (a) the maximum flow rate for a lavatory faucet and (b) the number of component lavatories (rim space of the lavatory in inches (millimeters) divided by 20 inches (508 millimeters)). 3 The maximum flow rate of each orifice that delivers a pre-set volume of water before gradually shutting itself off shall not exceed the maximum flow rate for a metering faucet. 4 The maximum flow rate of a sprayhead that delivers a pre-set volume of water before gradually shutting itself off shall be the product of (a) the maximum flow rate for a metering faucet and (b) the number of component lavatories (rim space of the lavatory in inches (millimeters) divided by 20 inches (508 millimeters)). (p) Showerheads. (q) Water closets. Water closet type Maximum flush rate Manufactured after January 1, 1994 Manufactured after January 1, 1997 (1) Gravity flush tank water closet 1.6 (6.0) 1.6 (6.0) (2) Flushometer tank water closet 1.6 (6.0) 1.6 (6.0) (3) Electromechanical hydraulic water closet 1.6 (6.0) 1.6 (6.0) (4) Blowout bowl water closet 3.5 (13.2) 3.5 (13.2) (5) Flushometer valve water closets, other than those with blowout bowls 1.6 (6.0) (r) Urinals. (1) The maximum flow rate for a urinal and (2) The length of the trough-type urinal in inches (millimeter) divided by 16 inches (406 millimeters). (s) Ceiling fans and ceiling fan light kits. (i) Fan speed controls separate from any lighting controls; (ii) Adjustable speed controls (either more than 1 speed or variable speed); (iii) The capability of reversible fan action, except for— (A) Fans sold for industrial applications; (B) Fans sold for outdoor applications; and (C) Cases in which safety standards would be violated by the use of the reversible mode. (2)(i) Ceiling fans manufactured on or after January 21, 2020, shall meet the requirements shows in the table: Product class as Minimum 1 Very small-diameter (VSD) D ≤ 12 in.: 21. D > 12 in.: 3.16 D-17.04. Standard 0.65 D + 38.03. Hugger 0.29 D + 34.46. High-speed small-diameter (HSSD) 4.16 D + 0.02. 1 (ii) Large-diameter ceiling fans, as defined in appendix U to subpart B of this part, manufactured on or after January 21, 2020, shall have a CFEI greater than or equal to - (A) 1.00 at high speed; and (B) 1.31 at 40 percent speed or the nearest speed that is not less than 40 percent speed. (iii) The provisions in this appendix apply to ceiling fans except: (A) Ceiling fans where the plane of rotation of a ceiling fan's blades is not less than or equal to 45 degrees from horizontal, or cannot be adjusted based on the manufacturer's specifications to be less than or equal to 45 degrees from horizontal; (B) Centrifugal ceiling fans, as defined in Appendix U of this part; (C) Belt-driven ceiling fans, as defined in Appendix U of this part; (D) Oscillating ceiling fans, as defined in Appendix U of this part; and (E) Highly-decorative ceiling fans, as defined in Appendix U of this part. (3) Ceiling fan light kits manufactured on or after January 1, 2007, and prior to January 21, 2020, with medium screw base sockets must be packaged with medium screw base lamps to fill all sockets. These medium screw base lamps must— (i) Be compact fluorescent lamps that meet or exceed the following requirements or be as described in paragraph (s)(3)(ii) of this section: Factor Requirements Rated Wattage (Watts) & Configuration 1 Minimum Initial Lamp Efficacy (lumens per watt) 2 Bare Lamp: Lamp Power <15 45.0 Lamp Power ≥15 60.0 Covered Lamp (no reflector): Lamp Power <15 40.0 15≤Lamp Power <19 48.0 19≤Lamp Power <25 50.0 Lamp Power ≥25 55.0 With Reflector: Lamp Power <20 33.0 Lamp Power ≥20 40.0 Lumen Maintenance at 1,000 hours ≥ 90.0% Lumen Maintenance at 40 Percent of Lifetime ≥ 80.0% Rapid Cycle Stress Test Each lamp must be cycled once for every 2 hours of lifetime. At least 5 lamps must meet or exceed the minimum number of cycles. Lifetime ≥ 6,000 hours for the sample of lamps. 1 2 (ii) Be light sources other than compact fluorescent lamps that have lumens per watt performance at least equivalent to comparably configured compact fluorescent lamps meeting the energy conservation standards in paragraph (s)(3)(i) of this section. (4) Ceiling fan light kits manufactured on or after January 1, 2007, and prior January 21, 2020, with pin-based sockets for fluorescent lamps must use an electronic ballast and be packaged with lamps to fill all sockets. These lamp ballast platforms must meet the following requirements: Factor Requirement System Efficacy Per Lamp Ballast Platform in Lumens Per Watt (lm/w) ≥50 lm/w for all lamps below 30 total listed lamp watts. ≥60 lm/w for all lamps that are ≤ 24 inches and ≥30 total listed lamp watts. ≥70 lm/w for all lamps that are > 24 inches and ≥30 total listed lamp watts. (5) Ceiling fan light kits manufactured on or after January 1, 2009, and prior to January 21, 2020, with socket types other than those covered in paragraph (s)(3) or (4) of this section, including candelabra screw base sockets, must be packaged with lamps to fill all sockets and must not be capable of operating with lamps that total more than 190 watts. (6) Ceiling fan light kits manufactured on or after January 21, 2020 must be packaged with lamps to fill all sockets, and each basic model of lamp packaged with the basic model of CFLK, each basic model of consumer-replaceable SSL packaged with the basic model of CFLK, and each basic model of non-consumer-replaceable SSL in the CFLK basic model shall meet the requirements shown in paragraphs (s)(6)(i) and (ii) of this section: Lumens 1 Minimum required efficacy (i) <120 50. (ii) ≥120 (74.0−29.42 × 0.9983 lumens 1 (i) Ceiling fan light kits with medium screw base sockets manufactured on or after January 21, 2020 and packaged with compact fluorescent lamps must include lamps that also meet the following requirements: Lumen Maintenance at 1,000 hours ≥90.0%. Lumen Maintenance at 40 Percent of Lifetime ≥80.0%. Rapid Cycle Stress Test Each lamp must be cycled once for every 2 hours of lifetime of compact fluorescent lamp as defined in § 430.2. At least 5 lamps must meet or exceed the minimum number of cycles. Lifetime ≥6,000 hours for the sample of lamps. (ii) Ceiling fan light kits with pin based sockets for fluorescent lamps, manufactured on or after January 21, 2020, must also use an electronic ballast. (t) Torchieres. (1) Consume not more than 190 watts of power; and (2) Not be capable of operating with lamps that total more than 190 watts. (u) [Reserved] (v) Dehumidifiers. Product capacity (pints/day) Minimum energy factor (liters/kWh) Up to 35.00 1.35 35.01-45.00 1.50 45.01-54.00 1.60 54.01-75.00 1.70 75.01 or more 2.5 (2) Dehumidifiers manufactured on or after June 13, 2019, shall have an integrated energy factor that meets or exceeds the following values: Portable dehumidifier product capacity Minimum 25.00 or less 1.30 25.01-50.00 1.60 50.01 or more 2.80 Whole-home dehumidifier product case volume (cubic feet) 8.0 or less 1.77 More than 8.0 2.41 (w) External power supplies. Active mode Nameplate output Required efficiency (decimal equivalent of a percentage) Less than 1 watt 0.5 times the Nameplate output. From 1 watt to not more than 51 watts The sum of 0.09 times the Natural Logarithm of the Nameplate Output and 0.5. Greater than 51 watts 0.85. No-load mode Nameplate output Maximum consumption Not more than 250 watts 0.5 watts. (ii) Except as provided in paragraphs (w)(5), (w)(6), and (w)(7) of this section, all direct operation external power supplies manufactured on or after February 10, 2016, shall meet the following standards: (iii) Except as provided in paragraphs (w)(5), (w)(6), and (w)(7) of this section, all external power supplies manufactured on or after February 10, 2016, shall meet the following standards: Class A EPS Non-Class A EPS Direct Operation EPS Level VI: 10 CFR 430.32(w)(1)(ii) Level VI: 10 CFR 430.32(w)(1)(ii). Indirect Operation EPS Level IV: 10 CFR 430.32(w)(1)(i) No Standards. (2) A basic model of external power supply is not subject to the energy conservation standards of paragraph (w)(1)(ii) of this section if the external power supply— (i) Is manufactured during the period beginning on February 10, 2016, and ending on February 10, 2020; (ii) Is marked in accordance with the External Power Supply International Efficiency Marking Protocol, as in effect on February 10, 2016; (iii) Meets, where applicable, the standards under paragraph (w)(1)(i) of this section, and has been certified to the Secretary as meeting those standards; and (iv) Is made available by the manufacturer only as a service part or a spare part for an end-use product that— (A) Constitutes the primary load; and (B) Was manufactured before February 10, 2016. (3) The standards described in paragraph (w)(1) of this section shall not constitute an energy conservation standard for the separate end-use product to which the external power supply is connected. (4) Any external power supply subject to the standards in paragraph (w)(1) of this section shall be clearly and permanently marked in accordance with the International Efficiency Marking Protocol for External Power Supplies (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3), published by the U.S. Department of Energy. (5) Non-application of no-load mode requirements. (i) Is an AC-to-AC external power supply; (ii) Has a nameplate output of 20 watts or more; (iii) Is certified to the Secretary as being designed to be connected to a security or life safety alarm or surveillance system component; and (iv) On establishment within the External Power Supply International Efficiency Marking Protocol, as referenced in the “Energy Star Program Requirements for Single Voltage External Ac-Dc and Ac-Ac Power Supplies” (incorporated by reference, see § 430.3), published by the Environmental Protection Agency, of a distinguishing mark for products described in this clause, is permanently marked with the distinguishing mark. (6) An external power supply shall not be subject to the standards in paragraph (w)(1) of this section if it is a device that requires Federal Food and Drug Administration (FDA) listing and approval as a medical device in accordance with section 513 of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C. 360(c)). (7) A direct operation, AC-DC external power supply with nameplate output voltage less than 3 volts and nameplate output current greater than or equal to 1,000 milliamps that charges the battery of a product that is fully or primarily motor operated shall not be subject to the standards in paragraph (w)(1)(ii) of this section. (x) Intermediate base incandescent lamps and candelabra base incandescent lamps. (2) Subject to the sales prohibition in paragraph (dd) of this section, each intermediate base incandescent lamp shall not exceed 40 rated watts. (y) Residential furnace fans. Table 1—Energy Conservation Standards for Covered Residential Furnace Fans* Product class FER ** (Watts/1000 cfm) Non-Weatherized, Non-Condensing Gas Furnace Fan (NWG-NC) FER = 0.044 × Q Max Non-Weatherized, Condensing Gas Furnace Fan (NWG-C) FER = 0.044 × Q Max Weatherized Non-Condensing Gas Furnace Fan (WG-NC) FER = 0.044 × Q Max Non-Weatherized, Non-Condensing Oil Furnace Fan (NWO-NC) FER = 0.071 × Q Max Non-Weatherized Electric Furnace/Modular Blower Fan (NWEF/NWMB) FER = 0.044 × Q Max Mobile Home Non-Weatherized, Non-Condensing Gas Furnace Fan (MH-NWG-NC) FER = 0.071 × Q Max Mobile Home Non-Weatherized, Condensing Gas Furnace Fan (MH-NWG-C) FER = 0.071 × Q Max Mobile Home Electric Furnace/Modular Blower Fan (MH-EF/MB) FER = 0.044 × Q Max Mobile Home Non-Weatherized Oil Furnace Fan (MH-NWO) Reserved Mobile Home Weatherized Gas Furnace Fan (MH-WG) ** Reserved * Furnace fans incorporated into hydronic air handlers, SDHV modular blowers, SDHV electric furnaces, and CAC/HP indoor units are not subject to the standards listed in this table. ** Q Max (z) Battery chargers. Product class Product class description Rated battery energy (Ebatt **) Special characteristic or battery voltage Maximum UEC (kWh/yr) 1 Low-Energy ≤5 Wh Inductive Connection * 3.04 2 Low-Energy, Low-Voltage <100 Wh <4 V 0.1440 * E batt 3 Low-Energy, Medium-Voltage 4-10 V For E batt batt batt 4 Low-Energy, High-Voltage >10 V 0.11 * E batt 5 Medium-Energy, Low-Voltage 100-3000 Wh <20 V 0.0257 * E batt 6 Medium-Energy, High-Voltage ≥20 V 0.0778 * E batt 7 High-Energy >3000 Wh 0.0502 * E batt * Inductive connection and designed for use in a wet environment ( e.g. ** E batt (2) A battery charger shall not be subject to the standards in paragraph (z)(1) of this section if it is a device that requires Federal Food and Drug Administration (FDA) listing and approval as a life-sustaining or life-supporting device in accordance with section 513 of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C. 360(c)). (3) All uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) manufactured on and after January 10, 2022, that utilize a NEMA 1-15P or 5-15P input plug and have an AC output shall have an average load adjusted efficiency that meets or exceeds the values shown in the table in this paragraph (z)(3) based on the rated output power (P rated Battery charger product class Rated output power Minimum efficiency 10a (VFD UPSs) 0 W < P rated W −1.20E-06 * P 2 rated P rated 300 W < P rated W −7.85E-08 * P 2 rated P rated P rated W −7.23E-09 * P 2 rated P rated 10b (VI UPSs) 0 W < P rated W −1.20E-06 * P 2 rated P rated 300 W < P rated W −7.67E-08 * P 2 rated P rated P rated W −4.62E-09 * P 2 rated P rated 10c (VFI UPSs) 0 W < P rated W −3.13E-06 * P 2 rated P rated 300 W < P rated W −2.60E-07 * P 2 rated P rated P rated W −1.70E-08 * P 2 rated P rated (aa) Miscellaneous refrigeration products. (1) Coolers. Product class AEU (A) Freestanding compact. 7.88AV + 155.8 (B) Freestanding. 7.88AV + 155.8 (C) Built-in compact. 7.88AV + 155.8 (D) Built-in. 7.88AV + 155.8 Note: 3 (ii) Coolers manufactured on or after January 31, 2029, shall have an Annual Energy Use (AEU) no more than: Product class AEU (A) Freestanding compact. 5.52AV + 109.1 (B) Freestanding. 5.52AV + 109.1 (C) Built-in compact. 5.52AV + 109.1 (D) Built-in. 6.30AV + 124.6 Note: 3 (2) Combination cooler refrigeration products. Product class AEU (A) C-3A. Cooler with all-refrigerator—automatic defrost 4.57AV + 130.4 (B) C-3A-BI. Built-in cooler with all-refrigerator—automatic defrost 5.19AV + 147.8 (C) C-9. Cooler with upright freezer with automatic defrost without an automatic icemaker 5.58AV + 147.7 (D) C-9-BI. Built-in cooler with upright freezer with automatic defrost without an automatic icemaker 6.38AV + 168.8 (E) C-9I. Cooler with upright freezer with automatic defrost with an automatic icemaker 5.58AV + 231.7 (F) C-9I-BI. Built-in cooler with upright freezer with automatic defrost with an automatic icemaker 6.38AV + 252.8 (G) C-13A. Compact cooler with all-refrigerator—automatic defrost 5.93AV + 193.7 (H) C-13A-BI. Built-in compact cooler with all-refrigerator—automatic defrost 6.52AV + 213.1 Note: 3 (ii) Combination cooler refrigeration products manufactured on or after January 31, 2029, shall have an Annual Energy Use (AEU) no more than: Product class AEU C-3A. Cooler with all-refrigerator—automatic defrost 4.11AV + 117.4. C-3A-BI. Built-in cooler with all-refrigerator—automatic defrost 4.67AV + 133.0. C-5-BI. Built-in cooler with refrigerator-freezer with automatic defrost with bottom-mounted freezer 5.47AV + 196.2 + 28I. C-9. Cooler with upright freezer with automatic defrost 5.58AV + 147.7 + 28I. C-9-BI. Built-in cooler with upright freezer with automatic defrost 6.38AV + 168.8 + 28I. C-13A. Compact cooler with all-refrigerator—automatic defrost 4.74AV + 155.0. C-13A-BI. Built-in compact cooler with all-refrigerator—automatic defrost 5.22AV + 170.5. AV = Total adjusted volume, expressed in ft 3 I = 1 for a product with an automatic icemaker and = 0 for a product without an automatic icemaker. (bb) Rough service lamps and vibration service lamps. (i) Have a shatter-proof coating or equivalent technology that is compliant with NSF/ANSI 51 (incorporated by reference; see § 430.3) and is designed to contain the glass if the glass envelope of the lamp is broken and to provide effective containment over the life of the lamp; (ii) Have a rated wattage not greater than 40 watts; and (iii) Be sold at retail only in a package containing one lamp. (2) Subject to the sales prohibition in paragraph (dd) of this section, vibration service lamps manufactured on or after January 25, 2018 must: (i) Have a rated wattage no greater than 40 watts; and (ii) Be sold at retail only in a package containing one lamp. (cc) Portable air conditioners. SACC: Full (dd) General service lamps. (1) Energy conservation standards for general service lamps: (i) General service incandescent lamps manufactured after the dates specified in the following tables, except as described in paragraph (dd)(1)(ii) of this section, shall have a color rendering index greater than or equal to 80 and shall have a rated wattage no greater than, and a lifetime no less than the values shown in the table as follows: General Service Incandescent Lamps Rated lumen ranges Minimum Maximum rate Compliance date (A) 1490-2600 1,000 72 1/1/2012 (B) 1050-1489 1,000 53 1/1/2013 (C) 750-1049 1,000 43 1/1/2014 (D) 310-749 1,000 29 1/1/2014 * Use lifetime determined in accordance with § 429.66 of this chapter to determine compliance with this standard. (ii) Modified spectrum general service incandescent lamps manufactured after the dates specified in the following table shall have a color rendering index greater than or equal to 75 and shall have a rated wattage no greater than, and a lifetime no less than the values shown in the table as follows: Modified Spectrum General Service Incandescent Lamps Rated lumen ranges Minimum 1 Maximum rate Compliance date (A) 1118-1950 1,000 72 1/1/2012 (B) 788-1117 1,000 53 1/1/2013 (C) 563-787 1,000 43 1/1/2014 (D) 232-562 1,000 29 1/1/2014 1 (iii) A bare or covered (no reflector) medium base compact fluorescent lamp manufactured on or after January 1, 2006, must meet or exceed the following requirements: Factor Requirements Configuration 1 Labeled wattage Minimum initial (A) Bare Lamp: ( 1 45.0 ( 2 60.0 (B) Covered Lamp (no reflector): ( 1 40.0 ( 2 48.0 ( 3 50.0 ( 4 55.0 1 (iv) Each general service lamp manufactured on or after July 25, 2028 must have: (A) A power factor greater than or equal to 0.7 for integrated LED lamps (as defined in § 430.2) and 0.5 for medium base compact fluorescent lamps (as defined in § 430.2); and (B) A lamp efficacy greater than or equal to the values shown in the table as follows: Lamp type Length Standby mode operation 3 Efficacy ( 1 Short (<45 inches) No Standby Mode Operation 123/(1.2+e − 0.005* ( Lumens-200 )) ( 2 Long (≥45 inches) No Standby Mode Operation 123/(1.2+e − 0.005* ( Lumens-200 )) ( 3 1 All Lengths No Standby Mode Operation 73/(0.5+e − 0.0021* ( Lumens+1000 )) ( 4 2 Short (<45 inches) No Standby Mode Operation 122/(0.55+e − 0.003* ( Lumens+250 )) ( 5 1 All Lengths No Standby Mode Operation 67/(0.45+e − 0.00176* ( Lumens+1310 )) ( 6 Short (<45 inches) Standby Mode Operation 123/(1.2+e − 0.005* ( Lumens-200 )) ( 7 1 All Lengths Standby Mode Operation 73/(0.5+e − 0.0021* ( Lumens+1000 ) ( 8 Long (≥45 inches) No Standby Mode Operation 123/(1.2+e − 0.005* ( Lumens-200 )) 1 2 3 (C) The standards described in paragraph (dd)(1)(iv) of this section do not apply to a general service lamp that: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 e.g., e.g., (2) Medium base CFLs (as defined in § 430.2) manufactured on or after the dates specified in the following table shall meet or exceed the following standards: Metrics Requirements for Requirements for (i) Lumen Maintenance at 1,000 Hours ≥90.0% ≥90.0%. (ii) Lumen Maintenance at 40 Percent of Lifetime 1 ≥80.0% ≥80.0%. (iii) Rapid Cycle Stress Test At least 5 lamps must meet or exceed the minimum number of cycles At least 5 lamps must meet or exceed the minimum number of cycles. All MBCFLs: Cycle once per every two hours of lifetime 1 MBCFLs with start time >100 ms: Cycle once per hour of lifetime 1 1 (iv) Lifetime 1 ≥6,000 hours ≥10,000 hours. (v) Start time No requirement The time needed for a MBCFL to remain continuously illuminated must be within: {1} one second of application of electrical power for lamp with standby mode power {2} 750 milliseconds of application of electrical power for lamp without standby mode power. 1 (ee) Air cleaners. 2.5 2.5 Product capacity IEF (PM 2.5 (i) 10 ≤PM 2.5 1.7 (ii) 100 ≤PM 2.5 1.9 (iii) PM 2.5 2.0 (2) Conventional room air cleaners as defined in § 430.2 with a PM 2.5 2.5 Product capacity IEF (PM 2.5 (i) 10 ≤PM 2.5 1.9 (ii) 100 ≤PM 2.5 2.4 (iii) PM 2.5 2.9 [54 FR 6077, Feb. 7, 1989] Editorial Note: For Federal Register www.govinfo.gov. § 430.33 Preemption of State regulations. (a) Any State regulation providing for any energy conservation standard, or water conservation standard (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals), or other requirement with respect to the energy efficiency, energy use, or water use (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, or urinals) of a covered product that is not identical to a Federal standard in effect under this subpart is preempted by that standard, except as provided for in sections 325(i)(6)(A)(vi), 327(b) and (c) of the Act. (b) No State regulation, or revision thereof, concerning the energy efficiency, energy use, or water use of the covered product shall be effective with respect to such covered product, unless the State regulation or revision in the case of any portion of any regulation that establishes requirements for general service incandescent lamps, intermediate base incandescent lamps, or candelabra base lamps, was enacted or adopted by the State of California or Nevada before December 4, 2007, except that— (1) The regulation adopted by the California Energy Commission with an effective date of January 1, 2008, shall only be effective until the effective date of the Federal standard for the applicable lamp category under paragraphs (A), (B), and (C) of section 325(i)(1) of EPCA; and (2) The States of California and Nevada may, at any time, modify or adopt a State standard for general service lamps to conform with Federal standards with effective dates no earlier than 12 months prior to the Federal effective dates prescribed under paragraphs (A), (B), and (C) of section 325(i)(1) of EPCA, at which time any prior regulations adopted by the State of California or Nevada shall no longer be effective. [63 FR 13318, Mar. 18, 1998, as amended at 74 FR 12070, Mar. 23, 2009; 78 FR 62993, Oct. 23, 2013] § 430.34 Energy and water conservation standards amendments The Department of Energy may not prescribe any amended standard which increases the maximum allowable energy use or, in the case of showerheads, faucets, water closets or urinals, the maximum allowable water use, or which decreases the minimum required energy efficiency of a covered product. [67 FR 36406, May 23, 2002] § 430.35 Petitions with respect to general service lamps. (a) Any person may petition the Secretary for an exemption for a type of general service lamp from the requirements of this subpart. The Secretary may grant an exemption only to the extent that the Secretary finds, after a hearing and opportunity for public comment, that it is not technically feasible to serve a specialized lighting application (such as a military, medical, public safety or certified historic lighting application) using a lamp that meets the requirements of this subpart. To grant an exemption for a product under this paragraph, the Secretary shall include, as an additional criterion, that the exempted product is unlikely to be used in a general service lighting application. (b) Any person may petition the Secretary to establish standards for lamp shapes or bases that are excluded from the definition of general service lamps. The petition shall include evidence that the availability or sales of exempted lamps have increased significantly since December 19, 2007. The Secretary shall grant a petition if the Secretary finds that: (1) The petition presents evidence that demonstrates that commercial availability or sales of exempted incandescent lamp types have increased significantly since December 19, 2007 and are being widely used in general lighting applications; and (2) Significant energy savings could be achieved by covering exempted products, as determined by the Secretary based on sales data provided to the Secretary from manufacturers and importers. [74 FR 12070, Mar. 23, 2009] Appendix A to Subpart C of Part 430—Procedures, Interpretations, and Policies for Consideration of New or Revised Energy Conservation Standards and Test Procedures for Consumer Products and Certain Commercial/Industrial Equipment 1. Objectives 2. Scope 3. Application 4. Setting Priorities for Rulemaking Activity 5. Coverage Determination Rulemakings 6. Process for Developing Energy Conservation Standards 7. Policies on Selection of Standards 8. Test Procedures 9. ASHRAE Equipment 10. Direct Final Rules 11. Principles for Distinguishing Between Effective and Compliance Dates 12. Principles for the Conduct of the Engineering Analysis 13. Principles for the Analysis of Impacts on Manufacturers 14. Principles for the Analysis of Impacts on Consumers 15. Consideration of Non-Regulatory Approaches 16. Cross-Cutting Analytical Assumptions 1. Objectives This appendix establishes procedures, interpretations, and policies to guide the Department of Energy (“DOE” or the “Department”) in the consideration and promulgation of new or revised appliance energy conservation standards and test procedures under the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (EPCA). This appendix applies to both covered consumer products and covered commercial/industrial equipment. The Department's objectives in establishing these procedures include: (a) Provide for early input from stakeholders. (1) Establishing a new or amending an existing test procedure will better measure the energy efficiency, energy use, water use (as specified in EPCA), or estimated annual operating cost of a covered product/equipment during a representative average use cycle or period of use (for consumer products); and (2) Will not be unduly burdensome to conduct. (b) Increase predictability of the rulemaking timetable. (c) Eliminate problematic design options early in the process. (d) Fully consider non-regulatory approaches. (e) Conduct thorough analysis of impacts. (f) Use transparent and robust analytical methods. (g) Support efforts to build consensus on standards. et seq. 2. Scope The procedures, interpretations, and policies described in this appendix apply to rulemakings concerning new or revised Federal energy conservation standards and test procedures, and related rule documents ( i.e., 3. Application (a) This appendix contains procedures, interpretations, and policies that are generally applicable to the development of energy conservation standards and test procedures. The Department may, as necessary, deviate from this appendix to account for the specific circumstances of a particular rulemaking. In those instances where the Department may find it necessary or appropriate to deviate from these procedures, interpretations or policies, DOE will provide interested parties with notice of the deviation and an explanation. (b) If the Department concludes that changes to the procedures, interpretations or policies in this appendix are necessary or appropriate, DOE will provide notice in the Federal Register (c) This appendix is not intended to, and does not, create any right or benefit, substantive or procedural, enforceable at law or in equity. 4. Setting Priorities for Rulemaking Activity (a) In establishing its priorities for undertaking energy conservation standards and test procedure rulemakings, DOE will consider the following factors, consistent with applicable legal obligations: (1) Potential energy savings; (2) Potential social and private, including environmental or energy security, benefits; (3) Applicable deadlines for rulemakings; (4) Incremental DOE resources required to complete the rulemaking process; (5) Other relevant regulatory actions affecting the products/equipment; (6) Stakeholder recommendations; (7) Evidence of energy efficiency gains in the market absent new or revised standards; (8) Status of required changes to test procedures; and (9) Other relevant factors. (b) DOE will offer the opportunity to provide input on prioritization of rulemakings through a request for comment as DOE begins preparation of its Regulatory Agenda each spring. 5. Coverage Determination Rulemakings DOE has discretion to conduct proceedings to determine whether additional consumer products and commercial/industrial equipment should be covered under EPCA if certain statutory criteria are met. (42 U.S.C. 6292(b) and 42 U.S.C. 6295(l) for consumer products; 42 U.S.C. 6312(b) for commercial/industrial equipment). This section describes the process to be used in establishing coverage for consumer products and commercial/industrial equipment. (a) Pre-notice of proposed rulemaking (“NOPR”) stage. Federal Register Federal Register, (b) NOPR stage. (c) Final rule. Federal Register (d) Scope of coverage revisions. 6. Process for Developing Energy Conservation Standards This section describes the process to be used in developing energy conservation standards for covered products and equipment other than those covered equipment subject to ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1. (a) Pre-NOPR stage General. Federal Register Federal Register, (2) Satisfaction of statutory criteria. i.e., Federal Register (3) Design options General. (ii) Identification and screening of design options. i.e., (iii) Factors for screening of design options. (A) Technological feasibility. (B) Practicability to manufacture, install and service. (C) Adverse impacts on product utility or product availability. (D) Adverse impacts on health or safety. (E) Unique-pathway proprietary technologies. (4) Engineering analysis of design options and selection of candidate standard levels. (i) Identification of engineering analytical methods and tools. (ii) Engineering and life-cycle cost analysis of design options. (iii) Review by stakeholders. (iv) New information relating to the factors used for screening design options. (v) Selection of candidate standard levels. (5) Analysis of impacts and selection of proposed standard level. (i) Identification of issues for analysis. (ii) Identification of analytical methods and tools. (iii) Analysis of impacts. (iv) Factors to be considered in selecting a proposed standard. (A) Impacts on manufacturers. (B) Private impacts on consumers. (C) Impacts on competition, including industry concentration analysis. (D) Impacts on utilities. (E) National energy, economic, and employment impacts. (F) Impacts on the environment. (G) Impacts of non-regulatory approaches. (H) New information relating to the factors used for screening design options. (6) Public comment and hearing. (7) Revisions based on comments. (b) NOPR stage Documentation of decisions on proposed standard selection. Federal Register www.regulations.gov. (2) Public comment and hearing. (3) Revisions to impact analyses and selection of final standard. (c) Final rule stage. Federal Register 7. Policies on Selection of Standards (a) Purpose. (b) Screening design options. (1) Technological feasibility. (2) Practicability to manufacture, install and service. (3) Impacts on product utility. (4) Safety of technologies. (5) Unique-pathway proprietary technologies. (c) Identification of candidate standard levels. (1) Costs and savings of design options. (2) Further information on factors used for screening design options. (3) Selection of candidate standard levels. (i) The range of candidate standard levels will typically include: (A) The most energy-efficient combination of design options; (B) The combination of design options with the lowest life-cycle cost; and (C) A combination of design options with a payback period of not more than three years. (ii) Candidate standard levels that incorporate noteworthy technologies or fill in large gaps between efficiency levels of other candidate standard levels also may be selected. (d) Pre-NOPR Stage. (e)(1) Selection of proposed standard. (2) Statutory policies. (i) A trial standard level will not be proposed or promulgated if the Department determines that it is not both technologically feasible and economically justified. (42 U.S.C. 6295(o)(2)(A) and 42 U.S.C. 6295(o)(3)(B)) For a trial standard level to be economically justified, the Secretary must determine that the benefits of the standard exceed its burdens by, to the greatest extent practicable, considering the factors listed in 42 U.S.C. 6295(o)(2)(B)(i). A standard level is subject to a rebuttable presumption that it is economically justified if the payback period is three years or less. (42 U.S.C. 6295(o)(2)(B)(iii)) (ii) If the Department determines that interested persons have established by a preponderance of the evidence that a standard level is likely to result in the unavailability in the United States of any covered product/equipment type (or class) with performance characteristics (including reliability), features, sizes, capacities, and volumes that are substantially the same as products generally available in the U.S. at the time of the determination, then that standard level will not be proposed. (42 U.S.C. 6295(o)(4)) (iii) If the Department determines that a standard level would not result in significant conservation of energy, that standard level will not be proposed. (42 U.S.C. 6295(o)(3)(B)) (f) Selection of a final standard. 8. Test Procedures (a) Pre-NOPR stage General. Federal Register e.g., (2) Satisfaction of statutory criteria. (3) If DOE determines that a new or amended test procedure would not satisfy the applicable statutory criteria, DOE will engage in notice-and-comment rulemaking to issue a determination that a new or amended test procedure is not warranted. (4) If DOE receives sufficient information suggesting a new or amended test procedure may satisfy the applicable statutory criteria or the information received is inconclusive with regard to the statutory criteria, DOE will move forward with the rulemaking to issue or amend a test procedure. (5) In those instances where the available information either suggested that a new or amended test procedure might be warranted or in which the information was inconclusive on this point, and DOE undertakes a rulemaking to establish or amend a test procedure, DOE may still ultimately determine that such a test procedure does not satisfy the applicable statutory criteria at a later stage of the rulemaking. (6) Public comment and hearing. (b) NOPR stage Documentation of decisions on proposed test procedure. Federal Register (2) Public comment and hearing. (3) Revisions to the analyses and establishment of a final test procedure. (c) Final rule stage. Federal Register (d) Adoption of industry test methods. (e) Issuing final test procedure Process. (i) A NOPR proposing new or amended energy conservation standards; or (ii) A notice of proposed determination that standards do not need to be amended. With regards to amended test procedures, DOE will state in the test procedure final rule whether the amendments impact measured energy use or efficiency. (2) Exceptions. (i) Test procedures developed in accordance with the Negotiated Rulemaking Act or by interested persons that are fairly representative of relevant points of view (including representatives of manufacturers of covered products, States, and efficiency advocates), as determined by the Secretary; or (ii) Test procedure amendments limited to calculation changes ( e.g., (f) Effective date of test procedures. 9. ASHRAE Equipment EPCA provides unique statutory requirements and a specific set of timelines for certain enumerated types of commercial and industrial equipment (generally, commercial water heaters, commercial packaged boilers, commercial air-conditioning and heating equipment, and packaged terminal air conditioners and heat pumps ( i.e., (a) ASHRAE trigger rulemakings for energy conservation standards. (1) Not later than 180 days after the amendment of ASHRAE Standard 90.1, DOE will publish in the Federal Register (2) Not later than 18 months after the amendment of ASHRAE Standard 90.1, DOE must adopt amended energy conservation standards at the new efficiency level in ASHRAE Standard 90.1 as the uniform national standard for the affected equipment, unless DOE determines by rule, and supported by clear and convincing evidence, that a more-stringent standard would result in significant additional conservation of energy and is technologically feasible and economically justified. In such case, DOE must adopt the more-stringent standard for the affected equipment not later than 30 months after amendment of ASHRAE Standard 90.1. (3) Regarding amendments to ASHRAE Standard 90.1 involving energy conservation standards, DOE considers an amendment of a standard level to occur when an updated version of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 publishes ( i.e., (b) ASHRAE trigger rulemakings for test procedures. (1) DOE shall amend the test procedure for ASHRAE equipment, as necessary, to be consistent with the amended ASHRAE Standard 90.1, unless DOE determines by rule, and supported by clear and convincing evidence, that to do so would not meet the requirements in 42 U.S.C. 6314(a)(2)-(3), which generally provide that the test procedure must produce results which reflect energy efficiency, energy use, and estimated operating costs during a representative average use cycle and not be unduly burdensome to conduct. If DOE makes such a determination, DOE may establish an amended test procedure for such equipment that meets the requirements in 42 U.S.C. 6314(a)(2)-(3). (2) With regard to test procedures for ASHRAE equipment, EPCA requires DOE to adopt test procedures consistent with applicable industry test standards. (c) ASHRAE lookback rulemakings for standards. (1) Every 6 years, DOE shall conduct an evaluation of each class of covered equipment. DOE shall publish either a notice of determination that standards do not need to be amended (because they would not result in significant additional conservation of energy and/or would not be technologically feasible and/or economically justified) or a notice of proposed rulemaking including new proposed standards (based on the criteria and procedures in 42 U.S.C. 6313(a)(6)(B) and supported by clear and convincing evidence). (2) If DOE issues a notice of proposed rulemaking, it shall publish a final rule no more than 2 years later. (3) If DOE determines that a standard does not need to be amended, not later than 3 years after such a determination, DOE must publish either a notice of determination that standards do not need to be amended (because they would not result in significant additional conservation of energy and/or would not be technologically feasible and/or economically justified) or a notice of proposed rulemaking including new proposed standards (based on the criteria and procedures in 42 U.S.C. 6313(a)(6)(B) and supported by clear and convincing evidence). (d) ASHRAE lookback rulemakings for test procedures. 10. Direct Final Rules In accordance with 42 U.S.C. 6295(p)(4), on receipt of a joint proposal, including a consensus recommendation developed in accordance with the Negotiated Rulemaking Act (5 U.S.C. 561 et seq. 11. Principles for Distinguishing Between Effective and Compliance Dates (a) Dates, generally. (b) Effective date. Federal Register (c) Compliance date. (2) For energy conservation standards, the compliance date is the specific date upon which manufacturers are required to meet the new or amended standards for applicable covered products/equipment that are distributed in interstate commerce. 12. Principles for the Conduct of the Engineering Analysis (a) The purpose of the engineering analysis is to develop the relationship between efficiency and cost of the subject product/equipment. The Department will use the most appropriate means available to determine the efficiency/cost relationship, including an overall system approach or engineering modeling to predict the reduction in energy use or improvement in energy efficiency that can be expected from individual design options as discussed in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section. From this efficiency/cost relationship, measures such as payback, life-cycle cost, and energy savings can be developed. The Department will identify issues that will be examined in the engineering analysis and the types of specialized expertise that may be required. DOE will select appropriate contractors, subcontractors, and expert consultants, as necessary, to perform the engineering analysis and the impact analysis. Also, the Department will consider data, information, and analyses received from interested parties for use in the analysis wherever feasible. (b) The engineering analysis begins with the list of design options developed in consultation with the interested parties as a result of the screening process. The Department will establish the likely cost and performance improvement of each design option. Ranges and uncertainties of cost and performance will be established, although efforts will be made to minimize uncertainties by using measures such as test data or component or material supplier information where available. Estimated uncertainties will be carried forward in subsequent analyses. The use of quantitative models will be supplemented by qualitative assessments as appropriate. (c) The next step includes identifying, modifying, or developing any engineering models necessary to predict the efficiency impact of any one or combination of design options on the product/equipment. A base case configuration or starting point will be established, as well as the order and combination/blending of the design options to be evaluated. DOE will then perform the engineering analysis and develop the cost-efficiency curve for the product/equipment. The cost efficiency curve and any necessary models will be available to stakeholders during the pre-NOPR stage of the rulemaking. 13. Principles for the Analysis of Impacts on Manufacturers (a) Purpose. (b) Issue identification. (c) Industry characterization. (1) Manufacturers and their current and historical relative market shares; (2) Manufacturer characteristics, such as whether manufacturers make a full line of models or serve a niche market; (3) Trends in the number of manufacturers; (4) Financial situation of manufacturers; (5) Trends in product/equipment characteristics and retail markets including manufacturer market shares and market concentration; and (6) Identification of other relevant regulatory actions and a description of the nature and timing of any likely impacts. (d) Cost impacts on manufacturers. (1) Estimates of total private cost impacts, including product/equipment-specific costs (based on cost impacts estimated for the engineering analysis) and front-end investment/conversion costs for the full range of product/equipment models. (2) Range of uncertainties in estimates of average cost, considering alternative designs and technologies which may vary cost impacts and changes in costs of material, labor, and other inputs which may vary costs. (3) Variable cost impacts on particular types of manufacturers, considering factors such as atypical sunk costs or characteristics of specific models which may increase or decrease costs. (e) Impacts on product/equipment sales, features, prices, and cost recovery. (f) Measures of impact. (1) Industry net present value, with sensitivity analyses based on uncertainty of costs, sales prices, and sales volumes; (2) Cash flows, by year; and (3) Other measures of impact, such as revenue, net income, and return on equity, as appropriate. DOE also notes that the characteristics of a typical manufacturers worthy of special consideration will be determined in consultation with manufacturers and other interested parties and may include: Manufacturers incurring higher or lower than average costs; and manufacturers experiencing greater or fewer adverse impacts on sales. Alternative scenarios based on other methods of estimating cost or sales impacts also will be performed, as needed. (g) Cumulative Impacts of Other Federal Regulatory Actions. (2) If the Department determines that a proposed standard would impose a significant impact on product or equipment manufacturers within approximately three years of the compliance date of another DOE standard that imposes significant impacts on the same manufacturers (or divisions thereof, as appropriate), the Department will, in addition to evaluating the impact on manufacturers of the proposed standard, assess the joint impacts of both standards on manufacturers. (3) If the Department is directed to establish or revise standards for products/equipment that are components of other products/equipment subject to standards, the Department will consider the interaction between such standards in setting rulemaking priorities and assessing manufacturer impacts of a particular standard. The Department will assess, as part of the engineering and impact analyses, the cost of components subject to efficiency standards. (h) Summary of quantitative and qualitative assessments. (1) Key modeling and analytical tools. In its assessment of the likely impacts of standards on manufacturers, the Department will use models that are clear and understandable, feature accessible calculations, and have clearly explained assumptions. As a starting point, the Department will use the Government Regulatory Impact Model (GRIM). The Department will also support the development of economic models for price and volume forecasting. Research required to update key economic data will be considered. (2) [Reserved] 14. Principles for the Analysis of Impacts on Consumers (a) Early consideration of impacts on consumer utility. (b) Impacts on product/equipment availability. (c) Department of Justice review. (d) Variation in consumer impacts. (e) Payback period and first cost. (2) If, in the analysis of consumer impacts, the Department determines that a candidate/trial standard level would result in a substantial increase in product/equipment first costs to consumers or would not pay back such additional first costs through energy cost savings in less than three years, Department will assess the likely impacts of such a standard on low-income households, product/equipment sales and fuel switching, as appropriate. 15. Consideration of Non-Regulatory Approaches The Department recognizes that non-regulatory efforts by manufacturers, utilities, and other interested parties can result in substantial efficiency improvements. The Department intends to consider the likely effects of non-regulatory initiatives on product/equipment energy use, consumer utility and life-cycle costs, manufacturers, competition, utilities, and the environment, as well as the distribution of these impacts among different regions, consumers, manufacturers, and utilities. DOE will attempt to base its assessment on the actual impacts of such initiatives to date, but also will consider information presented regarding the impacts that any existing initiative might have in the future. Such information is likely to include a demonstration of the strong commitment of manufacturers, distribution channels, utilities, or others to such non-regulatory efficiency improvements. This information will be used in assessing the likely incremental impacts of establishing or revising standards, in assessing—where possible—appropriate compliance dates for new or revised standards, and in considering DOE support of non-regulatory initiatives. 16. Cross-Cutting Analytical Assumptions In selecting values for certain cross-cutting analytical assumptions, DOE expects to continue relying upon the following sources and general principles: (a) Underlying economic assumptions. Annual Energy Outlook AEO (b) Analytic time length. (c) Energy price and demand trends. AEO. (d) Product/equipment-specific energy-efficiency trends, without updated standards. (e) Price forecasting. (f) Private Discount rates. (g) Social discount rates. (h) Environmental impacts. (2) The first component estimates the effect of potential candidate/trial standard levels on power sector and site combustion emissions of carbon dioxide, nitrogen oxides, sulfur dioxide, mercury, methane, and nitrous oxide. DOE develops the power sector emissions analysis using a methodology based on DOE's latest Annual Energy Outlook. (3) The second component of DOE's emissions analysis estimates the effect of potential candidate/trial standard levels on emissions of carbon dioxide, nitrogen oxides, sulfur dioxide, mercury, methane, and nitrous oxide due to “upstream activities” in the fuel production chain. These upstream activities include the emissions related to extracting, processing, and transporting fuels to the site of combustion as detailed in DOE's Fuel-Fuel-Cycle Statement of Policy (76 FR 51281 (August 18, 2011)). DOE will consider the effects of the candidate/trial standard levels on these emissions after assessing the seven factors required to demonstrate economic justification under EPCA. Consistent with Executive Order 13783, dated March 28, 2017, when monetizing the value of changes in reductions in CO 2 [86 FR 70924, Dec. 13, 2021, as amended at 89 FR 24359, Apr. 8, 2024] Subpart D—Petitions To Exempt State Regulation From Preemption; Petitions To Withdraw Exemption of State Regulation Source: 54 FR 6078, Feb. 7, 1989, unless otherwise noted. § 430.40 Purpose and scope. (a) This subpart prescribes the procedures to be followed in connection with petitions requesting a rule that a State regulation prescribing an energy conservation standard, water conservation standard (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals), or other requirement respecting energy efficiency, energy use, or water use (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) of a type (or class) of covered product not be preempted. (b) This subpart also prescribes the procedures to be followed in connection with petitions to withdraw a rule exempting a State regulation prescribing an energy conservation standard, water conservation standard (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals), or other requirement respecting energy efficiency, energy use, or water use (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) of a type (or class) of covered product. [63 FR 13318, Mar. 18, 1998] § 430.41 Prescriptions of a rule. (a) Criteria for exemption from preemption. (1) Requirements of petition for exemption from preemption. (i) The name, address, and telephone number of the petitioner; (ii) A copy of the State standard for which a rule exempting such standard is sought; (iii) A copy of the State's energy plan or water plan and forecast; (iv) Specification of each type or class of covered product for which a rule exempting a standard is sought; (v) Other information, if any, believed to be pertinent by the petitioner; and (vi) Such other information as the Secretary may require. (2) [Reserved] (b) Criteria for exemption from preemption when energy emergency conditions or water emergency conditions (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) exist within State. Federal Register, (1) Requirements of petition for exemption from preemption when energy emergency conditions or water emergency conditions (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) exist within a State. (i) A description of the energy emergency condition or water emergency condition (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) which exists within the State, including causes and impacts. (ii) A description of emergency response actions taken by the State and utilities within the State to alleviate the emergency condition; (iii) An analysis of why the emergency condition cannot be alleviated substantially by importation of energy or water or the use of interconnection agreements; and (iv) An analysis of how the State standard can alleviate substantially such emergency condition. (2) [Reserved] (c) Criteria for withdrawal of a rule exempting a State standard. (1) Requirements of petition to withdraw a rule exempting a State standard. (i) The name, address and telephone number of the petitioner; (ii) A statement of the interest of the petitioner for which a rule withdrawing an exemption is sought; (iii) A copy of the State standard for which a rule withdrawing an exemption is sought; (iv) Specification of each type or class of covered product for which a rule withdrawing an exemption is sought; (v) A discussion of the factors contained in paragraph (a) of this section; (vi) Such other information, if any, believed to be pertinent by the petitioner; and (vii) Such other information as the Secretary may require. (2) [Reserved] [63 FR 13318, Mar. 18, 1998] § 430.42 Filing requirements. (a) Service. (b) Obligation to supply information. (c) The same or related matters. (d) Computation of time. (2) Saturdays, Sundays, and intervening Federal legal holidays shall be excluded from the computation of time when the period of time allowed or prescribed is 7 days or less. (3) When a submission is required to be made within a prescribed time, DOE may grant an extension of time upon good cause shown. (4) Documents received after regular business hours are deemed to have been submitted on the next regular business day. Regular business hours for the DOE's National Office, Washington, DC, are 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. (5) DOE reserves the right to refuse to accept, and not to consider, untimely submissions. (e) Filing of petitions. (2) A petition may be submitted on behalf of more than one person. A joint petition shall indicate each person participating in the submission. A joint petition shall provide the information required by § 430.41 for each person on whose behalf the petition is submitted. (3) All petitions shall be signed by the person(s) submitting the petition or by a duly authorized representative. If submitted by a duly authorized representative, the petition shall certify this authorization. (4) A petition for a rule to withdraw a rule exempting a State regulation, all supporting documents, and all future submissions shall be served on each State agency, department, or instrumentality whose regulation the petitioner seeks to supersede. The petition shall contain a certification of this service which states the name and mailing address of the served parties, and the date of service. (f) Acceptance for filing. (2) For purposes of the Act and this subpart, a petition is deemed to be filed on the date it is accepted for filing. (g) Docket. § 430.43 Notice of petition. (a) Promptly after receipt of a petition and its acceptance for filing, notice of such petition shall be published in the Federal Register. Federal Register. (b) In addition to the material required under paragraph (a) of this section, each notice shall contain a summary of the State regulation at issue and the petitioner's reasons for the rule sought. § 430.44 Consolidation. DOE may consolidate any or all matters at issue in two or more proceedings docketed where there exist common parties, common questions of fact and law, and where such consolidation would expedite or simplify consideration of the issues. Consolidation shall not affect the right of any party to raise issues that could have been raised if consolidation had not occurred. § 430.45 Hearing. The Secretary may hold a public hearing, and publish notice in the Federal Register § 430.46 Disposition of petitions. (a) After the submission of public comments under § 430.42(a), the Secretary shall prescribe a final rule or deny the petition within 6 months after the date the petition is filed. (b) The final rule issued by the Secretary or a determination by the Secretary to deny the petition shall include a written statement setting forth his findings and conclusions, and the reasons and basis therefor. A copy of the Secretary's decision shall be sent to the petitioner and the affected State agency. The Secretary shall publish in the Federal Register (c) If the Secretary finds that he cannot issue a final rule within the 6-month period pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section, he shall publish a notice in the Federal Register § 430.47 Effective dates of final rules. (a) A final rule exempting a State standard from Federal preemption will be effective: (1) Upon publication in the Federal Register (2) Three years after such rule is published in the Federal Register (3) Five years after such rule is published in the Federal Register (b) A final rule withdrawing a rule exempting a State standard will be effective upon publication in the Federal Register. [54 FR 6078, Feb. 7, 1989, as amended at 63 FR 13319, Mar. 18, 1998] § 430.48 Request for reconsideration. (a) Any petitioner whose petition for a rule has been denied may request reconsideration within 30 days of denial. The request shall contain a statement of facts and reasons supporting reconsideration and shall be submitted in writing to the Secretary. (b) The denial of a petition will be reconsidered only where it is alleged and demonstrated that the denial was based on error in law or fact and that evidence of the error is found in the record of the proceedings. (c) If the Secretary fails to take action on the request for reconsideration within 30 days, the request is deemed denied, and the petitioner may seek such judicial review as may be appropriate and available. (d) A petitioner has not exhausted other administrative remedies until a request for reconsideration has been filed and acted upon or deemed denied. § 430.49 Finality of decision. (a) A decision to prescribe a rule that a State energy conservation standard, water conservation standard (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) or other requirement not be preempted is final on the date the rule is issued, i.e., signed by the Secretary. A decision to prescribe such a rule has no effect on other regulations of a covered product of any other State. (b) A decision to prescribe a rule withdrawing a rule exempting a State standard or other requirement is final on the date the rule is issued, i.e., signed by the Secretary. A decision to deny such a petition is final on the day a denial of a request for reconsideration is issued, i.e., signed by the Secretary. [54 FR 6078, Feb. 7, 1989, as amended at 63 FR 13319, Mar. 18, 1998] Subpart E—Small Business Exemptions Source: 54 FR 6080, Feb. 7, 1989, unless otherwise noted. § 430.50 Purpose and scope. (a) This subpart establishes procedures for the submission and disposition of applications filed by manufacturers of covered consumer products with annual gross revenues that do not exceed $8 million to exempt them temporarily from all or part of energy conservation standards or water conservation standards (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) established by this part. (b) The purpose of this subpart is to provide content and format requirements for manufacturers of covered consumer products with low annual gross revenues who desire to apply for temporary exemptions from applicable energy conservation standards or water conservation standards (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) . [54 FR 6080, Feb. 7, 1989, as amended at 63 FR 13319, Mar. 18, 1998] § 430.51 Eligibility. Any manufacturer of a covered product with annual gross revenues that do not exceed $8,000,000 from all its operations (including the manufacture and sale of covered products) for the 12-month period preceding the date of application may apply for an exemption. In determining the annual gross revenues of any manufacturer under this subpart, the annual gross revenue of any other person who controls, is controlled, by, or is under common control with, such manufacturer shall be taken into account. § 430.52 Requirements for applications. (a) Each application filed under this subpart shall be submitted in triplicate to: U.S. Department of Energy, Small Business Exemptions, Appliance Efficiency Standards, Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy, Forrestal Building, 1000 Independence Avenue, SW., Washington, DC 20585. (b) An application shall be in writing and shall include the following: (1) Name and mailing address of applicant; (2) Whether the applicant controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with another manufacturer, and if so, the nature of that control relationship; (3) The text or substance of the standard or portion thereof for which the exemption is sought and the length of time desired for the exemption; (4) Information showing the annual gross revenue of the applicant for the preceding 12-month period from all of its operations (including the manufacture and sale of covered products): (5) Information to show that failure to grant an exemption is likely to result in a lessening of competition; (6) Such other information, if any, believed to be pertinent by the petitioner; and (7) Such other information as the Secretary may require. § 430.53 Processing of applications. (a) The applicant shall serve a copy of the application, all supporting documents and all subsequent submissions, or a copy from which confidential information has been deleted pursuant to 10 CFR 1004.11, to the Secretary, which may be made available for public review. (b) Within fifteen (15) days of the receipt of an application, the Secretary will either accept it for filing or reject it, and the applicant will be so notified in writing. Only such applications which conform to the requirements of this subpart and which contain sufficient information for the purposes of a substantive decision will be accepted for filing. Applications which do not so conform will be rejected and an explanation provided to the applicant in writing. (c) For the purpose of this subpart, an application is deemed to be filed on the date it is accepted for filing. (d) Promptly after receipt of an application and its acceptance for filing, notice of such application shall be published in the Federal Register. Federal Register. (e) The Secretary on his own initiative may convene a hearing if, in his discretion, he considers such hearing will advance his evaluation of the application. § 430.54 Referral to the Attorney General. Notice of the application for exemption under this subpart shall be transmitted to the Attorney General by the Secretary and shall contain (a) a statement of the facts and of the reasons for the exemption, and (b) copies of all documents submitted. § 430.55 Evaluation of application. The Secretary shall grant an application for exemption submitted under this subpart if the Secretary finds, after obtaining the written views of the Attorney General, that a failure to allow an exemption would likely result in a lessening of competition. § 430.56 Decision and order. (a) Upon consideration of the application and other relevant information received or obtained, the Secretary shall issue an order granting or denying the application. (b) The order shall include a written statement setting forth the relevant facts and the legal basis of the order. (c) The Secretary shall serve a copy of the order upon the applicant and upon any other person readily identifiable by the Secretary as one who is interested in or aggrieved by such order. The Secretary also shall publish in the Federal Register § 430.57 Duration of temporary exemption. A temporary exemption terminates according to its terms but not later than twenty-four months after the affective date of the rule for which the exemption is allowed. Subpart F [Reserved]

Related documents

• 50 CFR Part 600 — Magnuson-Stevens Act Provisions#512148
• 50 CFR Part 622 — Fisheries of the Caribbean, Gulf of America, and South Atlantic#512149
• 50 CFR Part 635 — Atlantic Highly Migratory Species#512150
• 50 CFR Part 648 — Fisheries of the Northeastern United States#512151
• 50 CFR Part 660 — Fisheries off West Coast States#512152